Site Feedback

Title 26

Displaying title 26, up to date as of 9/10/2026. Title 26 was last amended 9/08/2026.
eCFR Content

The Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) is the official legal print publication containing the codification of the general and permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Electronic Code of Federal Regulations (eCFR) is a continuously updated online version of the CFR. It is not an official legal edition of the CFR.

Learn more about the eCFR, its status, and the editorial process.

Special Rules for Determining Capital Gains and Losses

§ 1.1231-1 Gains and losses from the sale or exchange of certain property used in the trade or business.

(a) In general. Section 1231 provides that, subject to the provisions of paragraph (e) of this section, a taxpayer's gains and losses from the disposition (including involuntary conversion) of assets described in that section as property used in the trade or business and from the involuntary conversion of capital assets held for more than 6 months shall be treated as long-term capital gains and losses if the total gains exceed the total losses. If the total gains do not exceed the total losses, all such gains and losses are treated as ordinary gains and losses. Therefore, if the taxpayer has no gains subject to section 1231, a recognized loss from the condemnation (or from a sale or exchange under threat of condemnation) of even a capital asset held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977) is an ordinary loss. Capital assets subject to section 1231 treatment include only capital assets involuntarily converted. The noncapital assets subject to section 1231 treatment are

(1) depreciable business property and business real property held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977) other than stock in trade and certain copyrights and artistic property and, in the case of sales and other dispositions occurring after July 25, 1969, other than a letter, memorandum, or property similar to a letter or memorandum;

(2) timber, coal, and iron ore which do not otherwise meet the requirements of section 1231 but with respect to which section 631 applies; and

(3) certain livestock and unharvested crops. See paragraph (c) of this section.

(b) Treatment of gains and losses. For the purpose of applying section 1231, a taxpayer must aggregate his recognized gains and losses from:

(1) The sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of property used in the trade or business (as defined in section 1231(b)), and

(2) The involuntary conversion (but not sale or exchange) of capital assets held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977).

If the gains to which section 1231 applies exceed the losses to which the section applies, the gains and losses are treated as long-term capital gains and losses and are subject to the provisions of parts I and II (section 1201 and following), subchapter P, chapter 1 of the Code, relating to capital gains and losses. If the gains to which section 1231 applies do not exceed the losses to which the section applies, the gains and losses are treated as ordinary gains and losses. Therefore, in the latter case, a loss from the involuntary conversion of a capital asset held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977) is treated as an ordinary loss and is not subject to the limitation on capital losses in section 1211. The phrase involuntary conversion is defined in paragraph (e) of this section.

(c) Transactions to which section applies. Section 1231 applies to recognized gains and losses from the following:

(1) The sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of property held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977) and used in the taxpayer's trade or business, which is either real property or is of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation under section 167 (even though fully depreciated), and which is not:

(i) Property of a kind which would properly be includible in the inventory of the taxpayer if on hand at the close of the taxable year, or property held by the taxpayer primarily for sale to customers in the ordinary course of business;

(ii) A copyright, a literary, musical, or artistic composition, or similar property, or (in the case of sales and other dispositions occurring after July 25, 1969) a letter, memorandum, or property similar to a letter or memorandum, held by a taxpayer described in section 1221(3); or

(iii) Livestock held for draft, breeding, dairy, or sporting purposes, except to the extent included under paragraph (4) of this paragraph, or poultry.

(2) The involuntary conversion of capital assets held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977).

(3) The cutting or disposal of timber, or the disposal of coal or iron ore, to the extent considered arising from a sale or exchange by reason of the provisions of section 631 and the regulations thereunder.

(4) The sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of livestock if the requirements of § 1.1231-2 are met.

(5) The sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of unharvested crops on land which is

(i) used in the taxpayer's trade or business and held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977), and

(ii) sold or exchanged at the same time and to the same person. See paragraph (f) of this section.

For purposes of section 1231, the phrase property used in the trade or business means property described in this paragraph (other than property described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph). Notwithstanding any of the provisions of this paragraph, section 1231(a) does not apply to gains and losses under the circumstances described in paragraph (e) (2) or (3) of this section.

(d) Extent to which gains and losses are taken into account. All gains and losses to which section 1231 applies must be taken into account in determining whether and to what extent the gains exceed the losses. For the purpose of this computation, the provisions of section 1211 limiting the deduction of capital losses do not apply, and no losses are excluded by that section. With that exception, gains are included in the computations under section 1231 only to the extent that they are taken into account in computing gross income, and losses are included only to the extent that they are taken into account in computing taxable income. The following are examples of gains and losses not included in the computations under section 1231:

(1) Losses of a personal nature which are not deductible by reason of section 165 (c) or (d), such as losses from the sale of property held for personal use;

(2) Losses which are not deductible under section 267 (relating to losses with respect to transactions between related taxpayers) or section 1091 (relating to losses from wash sales);

(3) Gain on the sale of property (to which section 1231 applies) reported for any taxable year on the installment method under section 453, except to the extent the gain is to be reported under section 453 for the taxable year; and

(4) Gains and losses which are not recognized under section 1002, such as those to which sections 1031 through 1036, relating to common nontaxable exchanges, apply.

(e) Involuntary conversion

(1) General rule. For purposes of section 1231, the terms compulsory or involuntary conversion and involuntary conversion of property mean the conversion of proeprty into money or other property as a result of complete or partial destruction, theft or seizure, or an exercise of the power of requisition or condemnation, or the threat or imminence thereof. Losses upon the complete or partial destruction, theft, seizure, requisition, or condemnation of property are treated as losses upon an involuntary conversion whether or not there is a conversion of the property into other property or money and whether or not the property is uninsured, partially insured, or totally insured. For example, if a capital asset held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977), with an adjusted basis of $400, but not held for the production of income, is stolen, and the loss which is sustained in the taxable year 1956 is not compensated for by insurance or otherwise, section 1231 applies to the $400 loss. For certain exceptions to this subparagraph, see subparagraphs (2) and (3) of this paragraph.

(2) Certain uninsured losses. Notwithstanding the provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, losses sustained during a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1957, and before January 1, 1970, with respect to both property used in the trade or business and any capital asset held for more than 6 months and held for the production of income, which losses arise from fire, storm, shipwreck, or other casualty, or from theft, and which are not compensated for by insurance in any amount, are not losses to which section 1231(a) applies. Such losses shall not be taken into account in applying the provisions of this section.

(3) Exclusion of gains and losses from certain involuntary conversions. Notwithstanding the provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, if for any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1969, the recognized losses from the involuntary conversion as a result of fire, storm, shipwreck, or other casualty, or from theft, of any property used in the trade or business or of any capital asset held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977) exceed the recognized gains from the involuntary conversion of any such property as a result of fire, storm, shipwreck, or other casualty, or from theft, such gains and losses are not gains and losses to which section 1231 applies and shall not be taken into account in applying the provisions of this section. The net loss, in effect, will be treated as an ordinary loss. This subparagraph shall apply whether such property is uninsured, partially insured, or totally insured and, in the case of a capital asset held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977), whether the property is property used in the trade or business, property held for the production of income, or a personal asset.

(f) Unharvested crops. Section 1231 does not apply to a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of an unharvested crop if the taxpayer retains any right or option to reacquire the land the crop is on, directly or indirectly (other than a right customarily incident to a mortgage or other security transaction). The length of time for which the crop, as distinguished from the land, is held is immaterial. A leasehold or estate for years is not land for the purpose of section 1231.

(g) Examples. The provisions of this section may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

A, an individual, makes his income tax return on the calendar year basis. A's recognized gains and losses for 1957 of the kind described in section 1231 are as follows:

Gains Losses
1. Gain on sale of machinery, used in the business and subject to an allowance for depreciation, held for more than 6 months $4,000
2. Gain reported in 1957 (under section 453) on installment sale in 1956 of factory premises used in the business (including building and land, each held for more than 6 months) 6,000
3. Gain reported in 1957 (under section 453) on installment sale in 1957 of land held for more than 6 months, used in the business as a storage lot for trucks 2,000
4. Gain on proceeds from requisition by Government of boat, held for more than 6 months, used in the business and subject to an allowance for depreciation 500
5. Loss upon the destruction by fire of warehouse, held for more than 6 months and used in the business (excess of adjusted basis of warehouse over compensation by insurance, etc.) $3,000
6. Loss upon theft of unregistered bearer bonds, held for more than 6 months 5,000
7. Loss in storm of pleasure yacht, purchased in 1950 for $1,800 and having a fair market value of $1,000 at the time of the storm 1,000
8. Total gains 12,500 ___
9. Total losses 9,000
10. Excess of gains over losses 3,500

Since the aggregate of the recognized gains ($12,500) exceeds the aggregate of the recognized losses ($9,000), such gains and losses are treated under section 1231 as gains and losses from the sale or exchange of capital assets held for more than 6 months. For any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1957, and before January 1, 1970, the $5,000 loss upon theft of bonds (item 6) would not be taken into account under section 1231. See paragraph (e)(2) of this section.

Example 2. If in example (1), A also had a loss of $4,000 from the sale under threat of condemnation of a capital asset acquired for profit and held for more than six months, then the gains ($12,500) would not exceed the losses ($9,000 plus $4,000, or $13,000). Neither the loss on that sale nor any of the other items set forth in example (1) would then be treated as gains and losses from the sale or exchanges of capital assets, but all of such items would be treated as ordinary gains and losses. Likewise, if A had no other gain or loss, the $4,000 loss would be treated as an ordinary loss.

Example 3. A's yacht, used for pleasure and acquired for that use in 1945 at a cost of $25,000, was requisitioned by the Government in 1957 for $15,000. A sustained no loss deductible under section 165(c) and since no loss with respect to the requisition is recognizable, the loss will not be included in the computations under section 1231.

Example 4. A, an individual, makes his income tax return on a calendar year basis. During 1970 trees on A's residential property which were planted in 1950 after the purchase of such property were destroyed by fire. The loss, which was in the amount of $2,000 after applying section 165(c)(3), was not compensated for by insurance or otherwise. During the same year A also recognized a $1,500 gain from insurance proceeds compensating him for the theft sustained in 1970 of a diamond brooch purchased in 1960 for personal use. A has no other gains or losses for 1970 from the involuntary conversion of property. Since the recognized losses exceed the recognized gains from the involuntary conversion for 1970 as a result of fire, storm, shipwreck, or other casualty, or from theft, of any property used in the trade or business or of any capital asset held for more than 6 months, neither the gain nor the loss is included in making the computations under section 1231.

Example 5. The facts are the same as in example (4), except that A also recognized a gain of $1,000 from insurance proceeds compensating him for the total destruction by fire of a truck, held for more than 6 months, used in A's business and subject to an allowance for depreciation. A has no other gains or losses for 1970 from the involuntary conversion of property. Since the recognized losses ($2,000) do not exceed the recognized gains ($2,500) from the involuntary conversion for 1970 as a result of fire, storm, shipwreck, or other casualty, or from theft, of any property used in the trade or business or of any capital asset held for more than 6 months, such gains and losses are included in making the computations under section 1231. Thus, if A has no other gains or losses for 1970 to which section 1231 applies, the gains and losses from these involuntary conversions are treated under section 1231 as gains and losses from the sale or exchange of capital assets held for more than 6 months.

Example 6.

The facts are the same as in example (5) except that A also has the following recognized gains and losses for 1970 to which section 1231 applies:

Gains Losses
Gain on sale of machinery, used in the business and subject to an allowance for depreciation, held for more than 6 months $4,000
Gain reported in 1970 (under section 453) on installment sale in 1969 of factory premises used in the business (including building and land, each held for more than 6 months) 6,000
Gain reported in 1970 (under section 453) on installment sale in 1970 of land held for more than 6 months, used in the business as a storage lot for trucks $2,000
Loss upon the sale in 1970 of warehouse, used in the business and subject to an allowance for depreciation, held for more than 6 months $5,000
Total gains 12,000 _____
Total losses 5,000

Since the aggregate of the recognized gains ($14,500) exceeds the aggregate of the recognized losses ($7,000), such gains and losses are treated under section 1231 as gains and losses from the sale or exchange of capital assets held for more than 6 months.

Example 7. B, an individual, makes his income tax return on the calendar year basis. During 1970 furniture used in his business and held for more than 6 months was destroyed by fire. The recognized loss, after compensation by insurance, was $2,000. During the same year B recognized a $1,000 gain upon the sale of a parcel of real estate used in his business and held for more than 6 months, and a $6,000 loss upon the sale of stock held for more than 6 months. B has no other gains or losses for 1970 from the involuntary conversion, or the sale or exchange of, property. The $6,000 loss upon the sale of stock is not a loss to which section 1231 applies since the stock is not property used in the trade or business, as defined in section 1231(b). The $2,000 loss upon the destruction of the furniture is not a loss to which section 1231 applies since the recognized losses ($2,000) exceed the recognized gains ($0) from the involuntary conversion for 1970 as a result of fire, storm, shipwreck, or other casualty, or from theft, of any property used in the trade or business or of any capital asset held for more than 6 months. Accordingly, the $1,000 gain upon the sale of real estate is considered to be gain from the sale or exchange of a capital asset held for more than 6 months since the gains ($1,000) to which section 1231 applies exceed the losses ($0) to which such section applies.

Example 8. The facts are the same as in example (7) except that B also recognized a gain of $4,000 from insurance proceeds compensating him for the total destruction by fire of a freighter, held for more than 6 months, used in B's business and subject to an allowance for depreciation. Since the recognized losses ($2,000) do not exceed the recognized gains ($4,000) from the involuntary conversion for 1970 as a result of fire, storm, shipwreck, or other casualty, or from theft, of any property used in the trade or business or of any capital asset held for more than 6 months, such gains and losses are included in making the computations under section 1231. Since the aggregate of the recognized gains to which section 1231 applies ($5,000) exceeds the aggregate of the recognized losses to which such section applies ($2,000), such gains and losses are treated under section 1231 as gains and losses from the sale or exchange of capital assets held for more than 6 months. The $6,000 loss upon the sale of stock is not taken into account in making such computation since it is not a loss to which section 1231 applies.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12006, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 6841, 30 FR 9309, July 27, 1965; T.D. 7369, 40 FR 29841, July 16, 1975; T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980; T.D. 7829, 47 FR 38515, Sept. 1, 1982]

§ 1.1231-2 Livestock held for draft, breeding, dairy, or sporting purposes.

(a)

(1) In the case of cattle, horses, or other livestock acquired by the taxpayer after December 31, 1969, section 1231 applies to the sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of such cattle, horses, or other livestock, regardless of age, held by the taxpayer for draft, breeding, dairy, or sporting purposes, and held by him:

(i) For 24 months or more from the date of acquisition in the case of cattle or horses, or

(ii) For 12 months or more from the date of acquisition in the case of such other livestock.

(2) In the case of livestock (including cattle or horses) acquired by the taxpayer on or before December 31, 1969, section 1231 applies to the sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of such livestock, regardless of age, held by the taxpayer for draft, breeding, or dairy purposes, and held by him for 12 months or more from the date of acquisition.

(3) For the purposes of section 1231, the term livestock is given a broad, rather than a narrow, interpretation and includes cattle, hogs, horses, mules, donkeys, sheep, goats, fur-bearing animals, and other mammals. However, it does not include poultry, chickens, turkeys, pigeons, geese, other birds, fish, frogs, reptiles, etc.

(b)

(1) Whether or not livestock is held by the taxpayer for draft, breeding, dairy, or sporting purposes depends upon all of the facts and circumstances in each case. The purpose for which the animal is held is ordinarily shown by the taxpayer's actual use of the animal. However, a draft, breeding, dairy, or sporting purpose may be present if an animal is disposed of within a reasonable time after its intended use for such purpose is prevented or made undesirable by reason of accident, disease, drought, unfitness of the animal for such purpose, or a similar factual circumstance. Under certain circumstances, an animal held for ultimate sale to customers in the ordinary course of the taxpayer's trade or business may be considered as held for draft, breeding, dairy, or sporting purposes. However, an animal is not held by the taxpayer for draft, breeding, dairy, or sporting purposes merely because it is suitable for such purposes or merely because it is held by the taxpayer for sale to other persons for use by them for such purposes. Furthermore, an animal held by the taxpayer for other purposes is not considered as held for draft, breeding, dairy, or sporting purposes merely because of a negligible use of the animal for such purposes or merely because of the use of the animal for such purposes as an ordinary or necessary incident to the other purposes for which the animal is held. See paragraph (c) of this section for the rules to be used in determining when horses are held for racing purposes and, therefore, are considered as held for sporting purposes.

(2) The application of this paragraph is illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. An animal intended by the taxpayer for use by him for breeding purposes is discovered to be sterile or unfit for the breeding purposes for which it was held, and is disposed of within a reasonable time thereafter. This animal is considered as held for breeding purposes.

Example 2. The taxpayer retires from the breeding or dairy business and sells his entire herd, including young animals which would have been used by him for breeding or dairy purposes if he had remained in business. These young animals are considered as held for breeding or dairy purposes. The same would be true with respect to young animals which would have been used by the taxpayer for breeding or dairy purposes but which are sold by him in reduction of his breeding or dairy herd, because of, for example, drought.

Example 3. A taxpayer in the business of raising hogs for slaughter customarily breeds sows to obtain a single litter to be raised by him for sale, and sells these brood sows after obtaining the litter. Even though these brood sows are held for ultimate sale to customers in the ordinary course of the taxpayer's trade or business, they are considered as held for breeding purposes.

Example 4. A taxpayer in the business of raising horses for sale to others for use by them as draft horses uses them for draft purposes on his own farm in order to train them. This use is an ordinary or necessary incident to the purpose of selling the animals, and, accordingly, these horses are not considered as held for draft purposes.

Example 5. The taxpayer is in the business of raising registered cattle for sale to others for use by them as breeding cattle. It is the business practice of this particular taxpayer to breed the offspring of his herd which he is holding for sale to others prior to sale in order to establish their fitness for sale as registered breeding cattle. In such case, the taxpayer's breeding of such offspring is an ordinary and necessary incident to his holding them for the purpose of selling them as bred heifers or proven bulls and does not demonstrate that the taxpayer is holding them for breeding purposes. However, those cattle held by the taxpayer as additions or replacements to his own breeding herd to produce calves are considered to be held for breeding purposes, even though they may not actually have produced calves.

Example 6. A taxpayer, engaged in the business of buying cattle and fattening them for slaughter, purchased cows with calf. The calves were born while the cows were held by the taxpayer. These cows are not considered as held for breeding purposes.

(c)

(1) For purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, a horse held for racing purposes shall be considered as held for sporting purposes. Whether a horse is held for racing purposes shall be determined in accordance with the following rules:

(i) A horse which has actually been raced at a public race track shall, except in rare and unusual circumstances, be considered as held for racing purposes.

(ii) A horse which has not been raced at a public track shall be considered as held for racing purposes if it has been trained to race and other facts and circumstances in the particular case also indicate that the horse was held for this purpose. For example, assume that the taxpayer maintains a written training record on all horses he keeps in training status, which shows that a particular horse does not meet objective standards (including, but not limited to, such considerations as failure to achieve predetermined standards of performance during training, or the existence of a physical or other defect) established by the taxpayer for determining the fitness and quality of horses to be retained in his racing stable. Under such circumstances, if the taxpayer disposes of the horse within a reasonable time after he determined that it did not meet his objective standards for retention, the horse shall be considered as held for racing purposes.

(iii) A horse which has neither been raced at a public track nor trained for racing shall not, except in rare and unusual circumstances, be considered as held for racing purposes.

(2) This paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. The taxpayer breeds, raises, and trains horses for the purpose of racing. Every year he culls some horses from his racing stable. In 1971, the taxpayer decided that in order to prevent his racing stable from getting too large to be effectively operated he must cull six horses from it. All six of the horses culled by the taxpayer had been raced at public tracks in 1970. Under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph, all these horses are considered as held for racing purposes.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1). Assume further that the taxpayer decided to cull four more horses from his racing stable in 1971. All these horses had been trained to race but had not been raced at public tracks. The taxpayer culled these four horses because the training log which the taxpayer maintains on all the horses he trains showed these horses to be unfit to remain in his racing stable. Horse A was culled because it developed shin splints during training. Horses B and C were culled because of poor temperament. B bolted every time a rider tried to mount it, and C became extremely nervous when it was placed in the starting gate. Horse D was culled because it did not qualify for retention under one of the objective standards the taxpayer had established for determining which horses to retain since it was unable to run a specified distance in a minimum time. These four horses were disposed of within a reasonable time after the taxpayer determined that they were unfit to remain in his stable. Under subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph, all these horses are considered as held for racing purposes.

[T.D. 7141, 36 FR 18792, Sept. 22, 1971]

§ 1.1232-1 Bonds and other evidences of indebtedness; scope of section.

(a) In general. Section 1232 applies to any bond, debenture, note, or certificate or other evidence of indebtedness (referred to in this section and §§ 1.1232-3 and 1.1232-3A as an obligation) which is a capital asset in the hands of the taxpayer, and which is issued by any corporation, or by any government or political subdivision thereof. In general, section 1232(a)(1) provides that the retirement of an obligation, other than certain obligations issued before January 1, 1955, is considered to be an exchange and, therefore, is usually subject to capital gain or loss treatment. In general, section 1232(a)(2)(B) provides that in the case of a gain realized on the sale or exchange of certain obligations issued at a discount after December 31, 1954, which are either corporate bonds issued on or before May 27, 1969, or government bonds, the amount of gain equal to such discount or, under certain circumstances, the amount of gain equal to a specified portion of such discount, constitutes ordinary income. In the case of certain corporate obligations issued after May 27, 1969, in general, section 1232(a)(3) provides for the inclusion as interest in gross income of a ratable portion of original issue discount for each taxable year over the life of the obligation, section 1232(a)(3)(E) provides for an increase in basis equal to the original issue discount included in gross income, and section 1232(a)(2)(A) provides that any gain realized on such an obligation held more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977) shall be considered gain from the sale or exchange of a capital asset held more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977). For the requirements for reporting original issue discount on certain obligations issued after May 27, 1969, see section 6049(a) and the regulations thereunder. Section 1232(c) treats as ordinary income a portion of any gain realized upon the disposition of coupon obligations which were acquired after August 16, 1954, and before January 1, 1958, without all coupons maturing more than 12 months after purchase attached, and coupon obligations which were acquired after December 31, 1957, without all coupons maturing after the date of purchase attached.

(b) Requirement that obligations be capital assets. In order for section 1232 to be applicable, an obligation must be a capital asset in the hands of the taxpayer. See section 1221 and the regulations thereunder. Obligations held by a dealer in securities (except as provided in section 1236) or obligations arising from the sale of inventory or personal services by the holder are not capital assets. However, obligations held by a financial institution, as defined in section 582(c) (relating to treatment of losses and gains on bonds of certain financial institutions) for investment and not primarily for sale to customers in the ordinary course of the financial institution's trade or business, are capital assets. Thus, with respect ot obligations held as capital assets by such a financial institution which are corporate obligations to which section 1232(a)(3) applies, there is ratable inclusion of original issue discount as interest in gross income under paragraph (a) of § 1.1232-3A, and gain on a sale or exchange (including retirement) may be subject to ordinary income treatment under section 582(c) and paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1232-3.

(c) Face-amount certificates

(1) In general. For purposes of section 1232, this section and §§ 1.1232-3 and 1.1232-3A, the term other evidence of indebtedness includes face amount certificates as defined in section 2(a)(15) and 4 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-2 and 80a-4).

(2) Amounts received in taxable years beginning prior to January 1, 1964. Amounts received in taxable years beginning prior to January 1, 1964 under face amount certificates which were issued after December 31, 1954, are subject to the limitation on tax under section 72(e)(3). See paragraph (g) of § 1.72-11 (relating to limit on tax attributable to receipt of a lump sum received as an annuity payment). However, section 72(e)(3) does not apply to any such amounts received in taxable years beginning after December 31, 1963.

(3) Certificates issued after December 31, 1975. In the case of a face-amount certificate issued after December 31, 1975 (other than such a certificate issued pursuant to a written commitment which was binding on such date and at all times thereafter), the provisions of section 1232(a)(3) (relating to the ratable inclusion of original issue discount in gross income) shall apply. See section 1232-3A(f). For treatment of any increase in basis under section 1232(a)(3)(A) as consideration paid for purposes of computing the investment in the contract under section 72, see § 1.72-6(c)(4).

(d) Certain deposits in financial institutions. For purposes of section 1232, this section and §§ 1.1232-3 and 1.1232-3A, the term other evidence of indebtedness includes certificates of deposit, time deposits, bonus plans, and other deposit arrangements with banks, domestic building and loan associations, and similar financial institutions. For application of section 1232 to such deposits, see paragraph (e) of § 1.1232-3A. However, section 1232, this section, and §§ 1.1232-2 through 1.1232-4 shall not apply to such deposits made prior to January 1, 1971. For treatment of renewable certificates of deposit, see paragraph (e)(4) of § 1.1232-3A.

[T.D. 7154, 36 FR 25000, Dec. 28, 1971, as amended by T.D. 7311, 39 FR 11880, Apr. 1, 1974; T.D. 7365, 40 FR 27936, July 2, 1975; T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980; T.D. 9849, 84 FR 9237, Mar. 14, 2019]

§ 1.1232-2 [Reserved]

§ 1.1232-3 Gain upon sale or exchange of obligations issued at a discount after December 31, 1954.

(a) General rule; sale or exchange

(1) Obligations issued by a corporation after May 27, 1969

(i) General rule. Under section 1232(a)(2)(A), in the case of gain realized upon the sale or exchange of an obligation issued at a discount by a corporation after May 27, 1969 (other than an obligation subject to the transitional rule of subparagraph (4) of this paragraph), and held by the taxpayer for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977):

(a) If at the time of original issue there was no intention to call the obligation before maturity, such gain shall be considered as long-term capital gain, or

(b) If at the time of original issue there was an intention to call the obligation before maturity, such gain shall be considered ordinary income to the extent it does not exceed the excess of:

(1) An amount equal to the entire original issue discount, over

(2) An amount equal to the entire original issue discount multiplied by a fraction the numerator of which is the sum of the number of complete months and any fractional part of a month elapsed since the date of original issue and the denominator of which is the number of complete months and any fractional part of a month from the date of original issue to the stated maturity date.

The balance, if any, of the gain shall be considered as long-term capital gain. The amount described in (2) of this subdivision (b) in effect reduces the amount of original issue discount to be treated as ordinary income under this subdivision (b) by the amounts previously includible (regardless of whether included) by all holders (computed, however, as to any holder without regard to any purchase allowance under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of § 1.1232-3A and without regard to whether any holder purchased at a premium as defined in paragraph (d)(2) of § 1.1232-3).

(ii) Cross references. For definition of the terms original issue discount and intention to call before maturity, see paragraphs (b) (1) and (4) respectively of this section. For definition of the term date of original issue, see paragraph (b)(3) of this section. For computation of the number of complete months and any fractional portion of a month, see paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1232-3A.

(iii) Effect of section 582(c). Gain shall not be considered to be long-term capital gain under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph if section 582(c) (relating to treatment of losses and gains on bonds of certain financial institutions) applies.

(2) Examples. The provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On January 1, 1970, A, a calendar-year taxpayer, purchases at original issue for cash of $7,600, M Corporation's 10-year, 5 percent bond which has a stated redemption price at maturity of $10,000. On January 1, 1972, A sells the bond to B, for $9,040. A has previously included $480 of the original issue discount in his gross income (see example (1) of paragraph (d) of § 1.1232-3A) and increased his basis in the bond by that amount to $8,080 (see paragraph (c) of § 1.1232-3A). Thus, if at the time of original issue there was no intention to call the bond before maturity, A's gain of $960 (amount realized, $9,040, less adjusted basis, $8,080) is considered long-term capital gain.

Example 2.

(i) Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that at the time of original issue there was an intention to call the bond before maturity. The amount of the entire gain includible by A as ordinary income under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph is determined as follows:

(1) Entire original issue discount (stated redemption price at maturity, $10,000, minus issue price, $7,600) $2,400
(2) Less: Line (1), $2,400, multiplied by months elapsed since date of original issue, 24, divided by months from such date to stated maturity date, 120 $480
(3) Maximum amount includible by A as ordinary income $1,920

Since the amount in line (3) is greater than A's gain, $960, A's entire gain is includible as ordinary income.

(ii) On January 1, 1979, B, a calendar-year taxpayer, sells the bond to C for $10,150. Assume that B has included $120 of original issue discount in his gross income for each taxable year he held the bond (see example (2) of paragraph (d) of § 1.1232-3A) and therefore increased his basis by $840 (i.e., $120 each year × 7 years) to $9,880. B's gain is therefore $270 (amount realized, $10,150, less basis, $9,880). The amount of such gain includible by B as ordinary income under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph is determined as follows:

(1) Entire original issue discount (as determined in part (i) of this example) $2,400
(2) Less: Line (1), $2,400, multiplied by months elapsed since date of original issue, 108, divided by months from such date to stated maturity date, 120 $2,160
(3) Maximum amount includible by B as ordinary income $240

Since the amount in line (3) is less than B's gain, $270, only $240 of B's gain is includible as ordinary income. The remaining portion of B's gain, $30, is considered long-term capital gain.

(3) Obligations issued by a corporation on or before May 27, 1969, and government obligations. Under section 1232(a)(2)(B), if gain is realized on the sale or exchange after December 31, 1957, of an obligation held by the taxpayer more than 6 months, and if the obligation either was issued at a discount after December 31, 1954, and on or before May 27, 1969, by a corporation or was issued at a discount after December 31, 1954, by or on behalf of the United States or a foreign country, or a political subdivision of either, then such gain shall be considered ordinary income to the extent it does not exceed:

(i) An amount equal to the entire original issue discount, or

(ii) If at the time of original issue there was no intention to call the obligation before maturity, a portion of the original issue discount determined in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section,

And the balance, if any, of the gain shall be considered as long-term capital gain. For the definition of the terms original issue discount and intention to call before maturity, see paragraphs (b) (1) and (4) respectively of this section. See section 1037(b) and paragraph (b) of § 1.1037-1 for special rules which are applicable in applying section 1232(a)(2)(B) and this subparagraph to gain realized on the disposition or redemption of obligations of the United States which were received from the United States in an exchange upon which gain or loss is not recognized because of section 1037(a) (or so much of section 1031 (b) or (c) as relates to section 1037(a)).

(4) Transitional rule. Subparagraph (3) of this paragraph (in lieu of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph) shall apply to an obligation issued by a corporation pursuant to a written commitment which was binding on May 27, 1969, and at all times thereafter.

(5) Obligations issued after December 31, 1954, and sold or exchanged before January 1, 1958. Gain realized upon the sale or exchange before January 1, 1958, of an obligation issued at a discount after December 31, 1954, and held by the taxpayer for more than 6 months, shall be considered ordinary income to the extent it equals a specified portion of the original issue discount, and the balance, if any, of the gain shall be considered as long-term capital gain. The term original issue discount is defined in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. The computation of the amount of gain which constitutes ordinary income is illustrated in paragraph (c) of this section.

(6) Obligations issued before January 1, 1955. Whether gain representing original issue discount realized upon the sale or exchange of obligations issued at a discount before January 1, 1955, is capital gain or ordinary income shall be determined without reference to section 1232.

(b) Definitions

(1) Original issue discount

(i) In general. For purposes of section 1232, the term original issue discount means the difference between the issue price and the stated redemption price at maturity. The stated redemption price is determined without regard to optional call dates.

(ii) De minimis rule. If the original issue discount is less than one-fourth of 1 percent of the stated redemption price at maturity multiplied by the number of full years from the date of original issue to maturity, then the discount shall be considered to be zero. For example, a 10-year bond with a stated redemption price at maturity of $100 issued at $98 would be regarded as having an original issue discount of zero. Thus, any gain realized by the holder would be a long-term capital gain if the bond was a capital asset in the hands of the holder and held by him for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977). However, if the bond were issued at $97.50 or less, the original issue discount would not be considered zero.

(iii) Stated redemption price at maturity

(a) Definition. Except as otherwise provided in this subdivision (iii), the term stated redemption price at maturity means the amount fixed by the last modification of the purchase agreement, including dividends, interest, and any other amounts, however designated, payable at that time. If any amount based on a fixed rate of simple or compound interest is actually payable or will be treated as constructively received under section 451 and the regulations thereunder either:

(1) At fixed periodic intervals of one year or less during the entire term of an obligation, or

(2) except as provided in subdivision (e) of this paragraph (b)(1)(iii), at maturity in the case of an obligation with a term of one year or less, any such amount payable at maturity shall not be included in determining the stated redemption price at maturity. For purposes of subdivision (a)(2) of this paragraph (b)(1)(iii), the term of an obligation shall include any renewal period with respect to which, under the terms of the obligation, the holder may either take action or refrain from taking action which would prevent the actual or constructive receipt of any interest on such obligation until the expiration of any such renewal period. To illustrate this paragraph (b)(1)(iii), assume that a note which promises to pay $1,000 at the end of three years provides for additional amounts labeled as interest to be paid at the rate of $50 at the end of the first year, $50 at the end of the second year, and $120 at the end of the third year. The stated redemption price at maturity will be $1,070 since only $50 of the $120 payable at the end of the third year is based on a fixed rate of simple or compound interest. If, however, the $120 were payable at the end of the second year, so that only $50 in addition to principal would be payable at the end of the third year, then under the rule for serial obligations contained in subparagraph (2)(iv)(c) of this paragraph, the $1,000 note is treated as consisting of two series. The first series is treated as maturing at the end of the second year at a stated redemption price of $70. The second series is treated as maturing at the end of the third year at a stated redemption price of $1,000. For the calculation of issue price and the allocation of original issue discount with respect to each such series, see example (3) of subparagraph (2)(iv)(f) of this paragraph.

(b) Special rules. In the case of face -amount certificates, the redemption price at maturity is the price as modified through changes such as extensions of the purchase agreement and includes any dividends which are payable at maturity. In the case of an obligation issued as part of an investment unit consisting of such obligation and an option (which is not excluded by (c) of this subdivision (iii)), security, or other property, the term stated redemption price at maturity means the amount payable on maturity in respect of the obligation, and does not include any amount payable in respect of the option, security, or other property under a repurchase agreement or option to buy or sell the option, security, or other property. For application of this subdivision to certain deposits in financial institutions, see paragraph (e) of § 1.1232-3A.

(c) Excluded option. An option is excluded by this subdivision (c) if it is an option to which paragraph (a) of § 1.61-15 applies or if it is an option, referred to in paragraph (a) of § 1.83-7, granted in connection with performance of services to which section 421 does not apply.

(d) Obligation issued in installments. If an obligation is issued by a corporation under terms whereby the holder makes installment payments, then the stated redemption price for each installment payment shall be computed in a manner consistent with the rules contained in subparagraph (2)(iv) of this paragraph for computing the issue price for each series of a serial obligation. For application of this subdivision (d) to certain open account deposit arrangements, see examples (1) and (2) of paragraph (e)(5)(ii) of § 1.1232-3A.

(e) Application of definition. Subdivision (a)(2) of this paragraph (b)(1)(iii) shall not apply:

(1) For taxable years beginning before September 19, 1979, if for the issuer's last taxable year beginning before September 19, 1978, the rules of § 1.163-4 were properly applied by the issuer, or

(2) In the case of an obligation with a term of six months or less held by a nonresident alien individual or foreign corporation, but only for purposes of the appliction of sections 871 and 881.

(iv) Carryover of original issue discount. If in pursuance of a plan of reorganization an obligation is received in an exchange for another obligation, and if gain or loss is not recognized in whole or in part on such exchange of obligations by reason, for example, of section 354 or 356, then the obligation received shall be considered to have the same original issue discount as the obligation surrendered reduced by the amount of gain (if any) recognized as ordinary income upon such exchange of obligations, and by the amount of original issue discount with respect to the obligation surrendered which was included as interest income under the ratable inclusion rules of sections 1232(a)(3) and 1.1232-3A. If inclusion as interest of the ratable monthly portion of original issue discount is required under section 1232(a)(3) with respect to the obligation received, see paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of § 1.1232-3A for computation of the ratable monthly portion of original issue discount. For special rules in connection with certain exchanges of U.S. obligations, see section 1037.

(2) Issue price defined

(i) In general. The term issue price in the case of obligations registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission means the initial offering price to the public at which price a substantial amount of such obligations were sold. For this purpose, the term the public does not include bond houses and brokers, or similar persons or organizations acting in the capacity of underwriters or wholesalers. Ordinarily, the issue price will be the first price at which the obligations were sold to the public, and the issue price will not change if, due to market developments, part of the issue must be sold at a different price. When obligations are privately placed, the issue price of each obligation is the price paid by the first buyer of the particular obligation, irrespective of the issue price of the remainder of the issue. In the case of an obligation issued by a foreign obligor, the issue price shall be increased by the amount, if any, of interest equalization tax paid under section 4911 (and not credited, refunded, or reimbursed) on the acquisition of the obligation by the first buyer. In the case of an obligation which is convertible into stock or another obligation, the issue price includes any amount paid in respect of the conversion privilege. However, in the case of an obligation issued as part of an investment unit (as defined in subdivision (ii)(a) of this subparagraph), the issue price of the obligation includes only that portion of the initial offering price or price paid by the first buyer properly allocable to the obligation under the rules prescribed in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph. The terms initial offering price and price paid by the first buyer include the aggregate payments made by the purchaser under the purchase agreement, including modifications thereof. Thus, all amounts paid by the purchaser under the purchase agreement or a modification of it are included in the issue price (but in the case of an obligation issued as part of an investment unit, only to the extent allocable to such obligation under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph), such as amounts paid upon face-amount certificates or installment trust certificates in which the purchaser contracts to make a series of payments which will be returnable to the holder with an increment at a later date.

(ii) Investment units consisting of obligations and property—

(a) In general. An investment unit, within the meaning of this subdivision (ii) and for purposes of section 1232, consists of an obligation and an option, security, or other property. For purposes of this subparagraph, the initial offering price of an investment unit shall be allocated to the individual elements of the unit on the basis of their respective fair market values. However, if the fair market value of the option, security, or other property is not readily ascertainable (within the meaning of paragraph (c) of § 1.421-6), then the portion of the initial offering price or price paid by the first buyer of the unit which is allocable to the obligation issued as part of such unit shall be ascertained as of the time of acquisition of such unit by reference to the assumed price at which such obligation would have been issued had it been issued apart from such unit. The assumed price of the obligation shall be ascertained by comparison to the yields at which obligations of a similar character which are not issued as part of an investment unit are sold in arm's length transactions, and by adjusting the price of the obligation in question to this yield. The adjustment may be made by subtracting from the face amount of the obligation the total present value of the interest foregone by the purchaser as a result of purchasing the obligation at a lower yield as part of an investment unit. In most cases, assumed price may also be determined in a similar manner through the use of standard bond tables. Any reasonable method may be used in selecting an obligation for comparative purposes. Obligations of the same grade and classification shall be used to the extent possible, and proper regard shall be given, with respect to both the obligation in question and the comparative obligation, to the solvency of the issuer, the nature of the issuer's trade or business, the presence and nature of security for the obligation, the geographic area in which the loan is made, and all other factors relevant to the circumstances. An obligation which is convertible into stock or another obligation must not be used as a comparative obligation (except where the investment unit contains an obligation convertible into stock or another obligation), since such an obligation would not reflect the yield attributable solely to the obligation element of the investment unit.

(b) Agreement as to assumed price. In the case of an investment unit which is privately placed, the assumed price at which the obligation would have been issued had it been issued apart from such unit may be agreed to by the issuer and the original purchaser of the investment unit in writing on or before the date of purchase. Alternatively, an agreement between the issuer and original purchaser may specify the rate of interest which would have been paid on the obligation if the transaction were one not involving the issuance of options, and an assumed issue price may be determined (in the manner described in (a) of this subdivision) from such agreed assumed rate of interest. An assumed price based upon such an agreement between the parties will generally be presumed to be the issue price of the obligation with respect to the issuer, original purchaser, and all subsequent holders: Provided, That the agreement was made in arm's length negotiations between parties having adverse interests: And, provided further, That such price does not, under the rules stated in (a) of this subdivision, appear to be clearly erroneous. An assumed issue price agreed to by the parties as provided herein will not be considered clearly erroneous if it is not less than the face value adjusted (in the manner described in (a) of this subdivision) to a yield which is one percentage point greater than the actual rate of interest payable on the obligation. Similarly, if the agreement between the parties specifies an agreed assumed rate of interest (in lieu of an agreed assumed issue price) and such agreed rate is not more than 1 percentage point greater than the actual rate payable on the obligation, an adjusted issue price based upon such agreed assumed rate of interest will not be considered clearly erroneous.

(c) Cross references. For rules relating to the deductibility by the issuing corporation of bond discount resulting from an allocation under the rule stated in (a) of this subdivision, see §§ 1.163-3 and 1.163-4. For rules relating to the basis of obligations and options, securities, or other property acquired in investment units, see § 1.1012-1(d). For rules relating to certain reporting requirements with respect to options acquired in connection with evidences of indebtedness and for the tax treatment of such options, see § 1.61-15, and section 1234 and the regulations thereunder. With respect to the tax consequences to the issuing corporation upon the exercise of options issued in connection with evidences of indebtedness to which this section applies, see section 1032 and the regulations thereunder.

(d) Examples. The application of the principles set forth in this subdivision (ii) may be illustrated by the following examples in each of which it is assumed that there was no intention to call the note before maturity:

Example 1.

M Corporation is a small manufacturer of electronic components located in the southwestern United States. On January 1, 1969, in consideration for the payment of $41,500, M issues to X its unsecured note for $40,000 together with warrants to purchase 3,000 shares of M stock at $10 per share at any time during the term of the note. The note is payable in 4 years and provides for interest at the rate of 5 percent per year, payable semiannually. The fair market values of the note and the warrants are not readily ascertainable. Assume that companies in the same industry as M Corporation, and similarly situated both financially and geographically, are generally able to borrow money on their unsecured notes at an annual interest rate of 6 percent. Using a present value table, the calculation of the issue price of a 5 percent, 4 year, $40,000 note, discounted to yield 6 percent compounded semiannually is made as follows:

(1) (2) (3) (2) × (3)
Semiannual interest
period
Amount payable at 5 percent Factor for present value discounted at 3 percent per period Present value of payment
1 $1,000 0.9709 $970.90
2 1,000 .9426 942.60
3 1,000 .9151 915.10
4 1,000 .8885 888.50
5 1,000 .8626 862.60
6 1,000 .8375 837.50
7 1,000 .8131 813.10
8 1,000 .7894 789.40
8 40,000 .7804 31,576.00
Total present value of note discounted at 6 percent, compounded semiannually 38,595.70

The same result may be reached through the use of a standard bond table or by the following present value calculation:

Present value of annuity of $1,000 payable over 8 periods at 3 percent per period = 1000 × 7.0197 = $7,019.70
Add: Present value of principal (as calculated above) 31,576.00
Total $38,595.70

Accordingly, the assumed price at which M's note would have been issued had it been issued without stock purchase warrants, i.e., that portion of the $41,500 price paid by X which is allocable to M's note, is $38,596 (rounded). Since the price payable on redemption of M's note at maturity is $40,000, the original issue discount on M's note is $1,404 ($40,000 minus $38,596). Under the rules stated in § 1.163-3, M is entitled to a deduction, to be prorated or amortized over the life of the note, equal to this original issue discount on the note. The excess of the price for the unit over the portion of such price allocable to the note, $2,904 ($41,500 minus $38,596), is allocable to and is the basis of the stock purchase warrants acquired by X in connection with M's note. Upon the exercise of X's warrants, M will be allowed no deduction and will have no income. Upon maturity of the note X will receive $40,000 from M, of which $1,404, the amount of the original issue discount, will be taxable as ordinary income. If X were to transfer the note at its face amount to A 2 years after the issue date, X would realize, under section 1232(a)(2)(B), ordinary income of $702 (one-half of $1,404).

Example 2.

(1) On January 1, 1969, N Corporation negotiates with Y, a small business investment company, for a loan in the amount of $51,500 in consideration of which N Corporation issues to Y its unsecured 5-year note for $50,000, together with warrants to purchase 2,000 shares of N stock at $5 per share at any time during the term of the note. The note provides for interest of 6 percent, payable semiannually. The fair market values of the note and warrants are not readily ascertainable. The loan agreement between Y and N contains a provision, agreed to in arms-length bargaining between the parties, that a rate of 7 percent payable semiannually would have been applied to the loan if warrants were not issued as part of the consideration for the loan. The issue price of the note is $47,921 (rounded), determined with the use of a standard bond table, or computed in the manner illustrated in Example 1 or in the following alternative manner:

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (4) × (5)
Interest period Interest rate differential Principal Interest foregone for period (12%) Factor for present value discounted at 312
percent per period
Present value of interest foregone
1 1%(7%-6%) $50,000 250 0.9662 $241.53
2 1% 50,000 250 .9335 233.38
3 1% 50,000 250 .9019 225.48
4 1% 50,000 250 .8714 217.85
5 1% 50,000 250 .8420 210.50
6 1% 50,000 250 .8135 203.38
7 1% 50,000 250 .7860 196.50
8 1% 50,000 250 .7594 189.85
9 1% 50,000 250 .7337 183.43
10 1% 50,000 250 .7089 177.25
Total present value of interest foregone $2,079.15
Principal 50,000.00
Less: Total present value of interest foregone 2,079.15
Issue price 47,920.85

The calculation of present value of interest foregone may also be made as follows:

Present value of annuity of $250 discounted for 10 periods at 312 percent per period = $250 × 8.3166 = $2,079.15.

The total present value of interest foregone, $2,079, is also the original issue discount attributable to the note ($50,000 −$47,921). Under (b) of this subdivision, since the agreed assumed rate of interest of 7 percent is not more than 1 percentage point greater than the actual rate payable on the note, determination of the issue price of the note (and original issue discount) based upon such assumed rate will be presumed to be correct and will not be considered clearly erroneous, provided that both N and Y adhere to such determination. Under the rules in § 1.163-3, N is entitled to a deduction, to be prorated or amortized over the life of the note, equal to the original issue discount on the note. The excess of the price paid for the unit over the portion of such price allocable to the note, $3,579 ($51,500−$47,921) is allocable to and is the basis of the stock purchase warrants acquired by Y in connection with N's note. Upon the exercise or sale of the warrants by Y, N will be allowed no deduction and will have no income. Upon maturity of the note Y will receive $50,000 from N, of which $2,079, the amount of the original issue discount, will be taxable as ordinary income. If Y were to transfer the note at its face value to B 212 years after the issue date, Y would realize, under section 1232(a)(2)(B), ordinary income of $1,039.50 (one-half of $2,079).

(2) Assume that instead of the parties agreeing on an assumed interest rate at which the obligation would have been issued without the warrants, the parties agreed that the obligation at the actual 6 percent rate would have been issued without the warrants at a discounted price of $48,000. In this situation the agreed assumed issue price is presumed to be correct since it is not less than the face value adjusted (in the manner illustrated in part (1) of this example) to a yield which is one percentage point greater than the actual rate of interest payable on the obligation ($47,921).

Example 3.

O Corporation is a small advertising company located in the northeastern United States. Z is a tax-exempt organization. In consideration for the payment of $60,000, O issues to Z, in a transaction not within the scope of section 503(b), its unsecured 5-year note for $60,000, together with warrants to purchase 6,000 shares of O stock at $10 per share at any time during the term of the note. The note is subject to quarterly amortization at the rate of $3,000 per quarter, and provides for interest on the outstanding unpaid balance at an annual rate of 6 percent payable quarterly (112 percent per quarter). The fair market values of the notes and warrants are not readily ascertainable. The loan agreement between O and Z contains a recital that if the $60,000 note had been issued without the warrants only $45,000 would have been paid for it. An examination of relevant facts indicates that companies in the same industry as O Corporation, and similarly situated both financially and geographically, are able to borrow money on their unsecured notes at an annual interest cost of 812 percent payable quarterly (218 percent per quarter). By reference to a present value table, it is found that the present value of O's note discounted to yield 812 percent compounded quarterly is $56,608 (rounded). The computation is as follows:

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Quarterly interest period Principal payable Interest payable (112 percent) Total amount payable (2) + (3) Factor for present value discounted at 218
percent per quarter
Present value of total payment (4) × (5)
1 $3,000 $900 $3,900 0.9792 $3,818.88
2 3,000 855 3,855 .9588 3,696.17
3 3,000 810 3,810 .9389 3,577.21
4 3,000 765 3,765 .9193 3,461.16
5 3,000 720 3,720 .9002 3,348.74
6 3,000 675 3,675 .8815 3,239.51
7 3,000 630 3,630 .8631 3,133.05
8 3,000 585 3,585 .8452 3,030.04
9 3,000 540 3,540 .8276 2,929.70
10 3,000 495 3,495 .8104 2,832.35
11 3,000 450 3,450 .7935 2,737.58
12 3,000 405 3,405 .7770 2,645.69
13 3,000 360 3,360 .7608 2,556.29
14 3,000 315 3,315 .7450 2,469.68
15 3,000 270 3,270 .7295 2,385.47
16 3,000 225 3,225 .7143 2,303.62
17 3,000 180 3,180 .6994 2,224.09
18 3,000 135 3,135 .6849 2,147.16
19 3,000 90 3,090 .6706 2,072.15
20 3,000 45 3,045 .6567 1,999.65
Total 56,608.19

This amount ($56,608) is the assumed price at which the note would have been issued had it been issued without stock purchase warrants. The assumed price of $45,000 agreed to by the parties is not presumed to be correct since it is less than the face value adjusted to a yield which is one percentage point greater than the actual rate of interest payable on the obligation. The parties did not have adverse interests in agreeing upon an assumed price (since an excessively large amount of original issue discount would benefit O, the borrower, without adversely affecting Z, an exempt organization which would pay no tax on original issue discount income), and the price agreed to appears to be clearly erroneous when compared to the $56,608 assumed issue price determined under the principles of (a) of this subdivision. Since the maturity value of O's note is $60,000, the original issue discount on O's note is $3,392 ($60,000 minus $56,608). Under the rules in § 1.163-3, O is entitled to a deduction, to be prorated or amortized over the life of the note, equal to this original issue discount on the note. The excess of the price paid for the unit over the portion of such price allocable to the note, $3,392 ($60,000 minus $56,608), is allocable to and is the basis of the stock purchase warrants acquired by Z in connection with O's note. Upon the exercise or sale of the warrants by Z, O will be allowed no deduction and will have no income.

(iii) Issuance for property after May 27, 1969

(a) In general. Except as provided in (b) of this subdivision, if an obligation or an investment unit is issued for property other than money, the issue price of such obligation shall be the stated redemption price at maturity and, therefore, no original issue discount is created as a result of the exchange. However, in such case, there may be an amount treated as interest under section 483. In the case of certain exchanges of obligations of the United States for other such obligations, see section 1037 for the determination of the amount of original issue discount on the obligation acquired in the exchange. For carryover of original issue discount in the case of certain exchanges of obligations, see subparagraph (1)(iv) of this paragraph.

(b) Exceptions for original issue discount. If an obligation or investment unit is issued for property in an exchange which is not pursuant to a plan of reorganization referred to in (d) of this subdivision, and if:

(1) The obligation, investment unit, or an element of the investment unit is part of an issue a portion of which is traded on an established securities market, or

(2) The property for which such obligation or investment unit is issued is stock or securities which are traded on an established securities market

then the issue price of the obligation or investment unit shall be the fair market value of the property for which such obligation or investment unit is issued, as determined under (c) of this subdivision. Such issue price shall control for purposes of determining the amount realized by the person exchanging the property for the obligation or unit issued and the bases of the property acquired by the holder and issuer.

An obligation which is not traded on an established securities market and which is not part of an issue or investment unit a portion of which is so traded shall not be treated as property described in (1) of this (b) even though the obligation is convertible into property so traded. For purposes of this (b), an obligation, investment unit, or element of an investment unit shall be treated as traded on an established securities market if it is so traded on or within 10 trading days after the date it is issued. Trading days shall mean those days on which an established securities market is open. For purposes of this subdivision (iii), the term established securities market shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (d)(4) of § 1.453-3 (relating to limitations on installment method for purchaser evidences of indebtedness payable on demand or readily tradable).

(c) Determination of fair market value in cases to which (b) of this subdivision applies. In general, for purposes of (b) of this subdivision, the fair market value of property for which an obligation or investment unit is issued shall be deemed to be the same as the fair market value of such obligation or investment unit, determined by reference to the fair market value of that portion of the issue, of which such obligation or unit is a part, which is traded on an established securities market. The fair market value of such obligation or unit shall be determined as of the first date after the date of issue (within the meaning of section 1232(b)(3)) that such obligation or unit is traded on an established securities market. If, however, the obligation or investment unit is not part of an issue a portion of which is traded on an established securities market, but the property for which the obligation or investment unit is issued is stock or securities which are traded on an established securities market, the fair market value of such property shall be the fair market value of such stock or securities on the date such obligation or unit is issued for such property. The fair market value of property for purposes of this (c) shall be determined as provided in § 20.2031-2 of this chapter (Estate Tax Regulations) but without applying the blockage and other special rules contained in paragraph (e) thereof.

(d) Not in reorganization. An exchange which is not pursuant to a reorganization referred to in this subdivision (d) is an exchange in which the obligation or investment unit is not issued pursuant to a plan of reorganization within the meaning of section 368(a)(1) or pursuant to an insolvency reorganization within the meaning of section 371, 373, or 374. Thus, for example, no original issue discount is created on an obligation issued in a recapitalization within the meaning of section 368(a)(1)(E). Similarly, no original issue discount is created on an obligation issued in an exchange, pursuant to a plan of reorganization, to which section 361 applies regardless of the income tax consequences to any person who pursuant to such plan is the ultimate recipient of the obligation. The application of section 351 shall not preclude the creation of original issue discount. For carryover of original issue discount in the case of an exchange of obligations pursuant to a plan of reorganization, see subparagraph (1)(iv) of this paragraph.

(e) Effective date. Determinations with respect to obligations issued on or before May 27, 1969, or pursuant to a written commitment which was binding on that date and at all times thereafter, shall be made without regard to this subdivision (iii).

(iv) Serial obligations—

(a) In general. If an issue of obligations which matures serially is issued by a corporation, and if on the basis of the facts and circumstances in such case an independent issue price for each particular maturity can be established, then the obligations with each particular maturity shall be considered a separate series, and the obligations of each such series shall be treated as a separate issue with a separate issue price, maturity date, and stated redemption price at maturity. The ratable monthly portion of original issue discount attributable to each obligation within a particular series shall be determined and ratably included as interest in gross income under the rules of § 1.1232-3A.

(b) Issue price not independently established. If a separate issue price cannot be established with respect to each series of an issue of obligations which matures serially, the issue price for each obligation of each series shall be its stated redemption price at maturity minus the amount of original issue discount allocated thereto in accordance with (d) of this subdivision. The amount of original issue discount so allocated shall be ratably included as interest in gross income under rules of § 1.1232-3A.

(c) Single obligation rule. If a single corporate obligation provides for payments (other than payments which would not be included in the stated redemption price at maturity under subparagraph (1)(iii) of this paragraph) in two or more installments, the provisions of (b) of this subdivision shall be applied by treating such obligation as an issue of obligations consisting of more than one series each of which matures on the due date of each such installment payment.

(d) Allocation of discount. For purposes of (b) and (c) of this subdivision, the original issue discount with respect to each series of an issue shall be the total original issue discount for the issue multiplied by a fraction:

(1) The numerator of which is the product of

(i) the stated redemption price of such series and

(ii) the number of complete years (and any fraction thereof) constituting the period for such series from the date of original issue (as defined in paragraph (b)(3) of this section) to its stated maturity date, and

(2) The denominator of which is the sum of the products determined in (1) of this subdivision (d) with respect to each such series.

If a series consists of more than one obligation, the original issue discount allocated to such series shall be apportioned to such obligations in proportion to the stated redemption price of each. Computations under this subdivision (d) may be made using periods other than years, such as, for example, months or periods of 3 months.

(e) Effective date. The provisions of this subdivision (iv) shall apply with respect to corporate obligations issued after July 22, 1971. However, no inference shall be drawn from the preceding sentence with respect to serial obligations issued prior to such date.

(f) Examples. The provisions of this subdivision (iv) may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

On January 1, 1972, P Corporation issued a note with a total face value of $100,000 to B for cash of $94,000. The terms of the note provide that $50,000 is payable on December 31, 1973, and the other $50,000 on December 31, 1975. Each payment is treated as the stated redemption price of a series, and the total original issue discount with respect to the note, $6,000, is allocated to each such series as follows:

Year of maturity 1973 1975 Total
(1) Stated redemption price $50,000 $50,000
(2) Multiply by years outstanding 2 4
(3) Product of bond years $100,000 $200,000
(4) Sum of products $300,000
(5) Fractional portion of discount $100,000 $200,000
$300,000 $300,000
(6) Multiply line (5) by discount for entire issue $6,000 $6,000
(7) Discount for each series $2,000 $4,000
(8) Issue price (line (1), minus line (7)) $48,000 $46,000

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that a separate note is issued for each payment. The result is the same as in example (1).

Example 3.

On January 1, 1971, Y Bank, a corporation, issues a note to C for $1,000 cash. The terms of the note provide that $50 will be paid at the end of the first year, $120 at the end of the second year, and $1,050 at the end of the third year. Under (c) of this subdivision (iv), the $1,000 note is treated as consisting of two series, the first of which matures at the end of the second year, and the second of which matures at the end of the third year. The issue price and the allocation of original issue discount with respect to each series is computed as follows:

Year of maturity 1972 1973 Total
(1) Stated redemption price $70 $1,000
(2) Multiply by years outstanding 2 3
(3) Product of bond years $140 $3,000
(4) Sum of products $3,140
(5) Fractional portion of discount $140 $3,000
$3,140 $3,140
(6) Multiply line (5) by discount for entire issue $70 $70
(7) Discount for each series $3.12 $66.88
(8) Issue price (line 1 minus line (7)) $66.88 $933.12

(3) Date of original issue. In the case of issues of obligations which are registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission, the term date of original issue means the date on which the issue was first sold to the public at the issue price. In the case of issues which are privately placed, the term date of original issue means the date on which each obligation was sold to the original purchaser.

(4) Intention to call before maturity

(i) Meaning of term. For purposes of section 1232, the term intention to call the bond or other evidence of indebtedness before maturity means an understanding between

(a) the issuing corporation (such corporation is hereinafter referred to as the issuer), and

(b) the original purchaser of such obligation (or, in the case of obligations constituting part of an issue, any of the original purchasers of such obligations) that the issuer will redeem the obligation before maturity. For purposes of this subparagraph, the term original purchaser does not include persons or organizations acting in the capacity of underwriters or dealers, who purchased the obligation for resale in the ordinary course of their trade or business. It is not necessary that the issuer's intention to call the obligation before maturity be communicated directly to the original purchaser by the issuer. The understanding to call before maturity need not be unconditional; it may, for example, be dependent upon the financial condition of the issuer on the proposed early call date.

(ii) Proof of intent

(a) In general. Ordinarily, the existence or non-existance of an understanding at the time of original issue that the obligation will be redeemed before maturity shall be determined by an examination of all of the circumstances under which the obligation was issued and held. The fact that the obligation is issued with provisions on its face giving the issuer the privilege of redeeming the obligation before maturity is not determinative of an intention to call before maturity; likewise, the absence of such provision is not determinative of the absence of an intention to call before maturity. However, such provision, or the absence of such provision, is one of the circumstances to be given consideration along with other factors in determining whether an understanding existed. If the obligation was part of an issue registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission and was sold to the public (whether or not sold directly to the public by the obligor) without representation to the public that the obligor intends to call the obligation before maturity, there shall be a presumption that no intention to call the obligation before maturity was in existence at the time of original issue. The existence of a provision on the face of an obligation giving the issuer the privilege of redeeming the obligation before maturity shall not in and of itself overcome the presumption set forth in the preceding sentence.

(b) Circumstances indicating absence of understanding. Examples of circumstances which would be evidence that there was no understanding at the time of original issue to redeem the obligation before maturity are:

(1) The issue price and term of the obligation appear to be reasonable, taking into account the interest rate, if any, on the obligation, for a corporation in the financial condition of the issuer at the time of issue.

(2) The original purchaser and the issuer are not related within the meaning of section 267(b) and have not engaged in transactions with each other (other than concerning the obligation).

(3) The original purchaser is not related within the meaning of section 267(b) to any of the officers or directors of the issuer, and he has not engaged in transactions with such officers or directors (other than concerning the obligation).

(4) The officers and directors of the issuer at the time of issue of the obligation are different from those in control at the time the obligation is called or the taxpayer disposes of it.

(c) Gain treated as ordinary income in certain cases; computation. The amount of gain treated as ordinary income under paragraph (a) (3)(ii) or (5) of this section is computed by multiplying the original issue discount by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of full months the obligation was held by the holder and the denominator of which is the number of full months from the date of original issue to the date specified as the redemption date at maturity. (See paragraph (b)(3) of this section for definition of date of original issue.) The period that the obligation was held by the taxpayer shall include any period that it was held by another person if, under chapter 1 of the Code, for the purpose of determining gain or loss from a sale or exchange, the obligation has the same basis, in whole or in part, in the hands of the taxpayer as it would have in the hands of such other person. This computation is illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. An individual purchases a 10-year, 3-percent coupon bond for $900 on original issue on February 1, 1955, and sells it on February 20, 1960, for $940. The redemption price is $1,000. At the time of original issue, there was no intention to call the bond before maturity. The bond has been held by the taxpayer for 60 full months. (The additional days amounting to less than a full month are not taken into account.) The number of complete months from date of issue to date of maturity is 120 (10 years). The fraction 60120 multiplied by the discount of $100 is equal to $50, which represents the proportionate part of the original issue discount attributable to the period of ownership by the taxpayer. Accordingly, any part of the gain up to $50 will be treated as ordinary income. Therefore, in this case the entire gain of $40 is treated as ordinary income.

Example 2. Assume the same facts in the preceding example, except that the selling price of the bond is $970. In this case $50 of the gain of $70 is treated as ordinary income and the balance of $20 is treated as long-term capital gain.

Example 3. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that the selling price of the bond is $800. In this case, the individual has a long-term capital loss of $100.

Example 4. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that the bond is purchased by the second holder February 1, 1960, for $800. The second holder keeps it to the maturity date (February 1, 1965) when it is redeemed for $1,000. Since that holder has held the bond for 60 full months, he will, upon redemption, have $50 in ordinary income and $150 in long-term capital gain.

(d) Exceptions to the general rule

(1) In general. Section 1232(a)(2)(C) provides that section 1232(a)(2) does not apply (i) to obligations the interest on which is excluded from gross income under section 103 (relating to certain government obligations), or (ii) to any holder who purchases an obligation at a premium.

(2) Premium. For purposes of section 1232, this section, and § 1.1232-3A, premium means a purchase price which exceeds the stated redemption price of an obligation at its maturity. For purposes of the preceding sentence, if an obligation is acquired as part of an investment unit consisting of an option, security, or other property and an obligation, the purchase price of the obligation is that portion of the price paid or payable for the unit which is allocable to the obligation. The price paid for the unit shall be allocated to the individual elements of the unit on the basis of their respective fair market values. However, if the fair market value of the option, security, or other property is not readily ascertainable (within the meaning of paragraph (c) of § 1.421-6), then the price paid for the unit shall be allocated in accordance with the rules under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section for allocating the initial offering price of an investment unit to its elements. If, under chapter 1 of the Code, the basis of an obligation in the hands of the holder is the same, in whole or in part, for the purposes of determining gain or loss from a sale or exchange, as the basis of the obligation in the hands of another person who purchased the obligation at a premium, then the holder shall be considered to have purchased the obligation at a premium. Thus, the donee of an obligation purchased at a premium by the doner will be considered a holder who purchased the obligation at a premium.

(e) Amounts previously includible in income. Nothing in section 1232(a)(2) shall require the inclusion of any amount previously includible in gross income. Thus, if an amount was previously includible in a taxpayer's income on account of obligations issued at a discount and redeemable for fixed amounts increasing at stated intervals, or, under section 818(b) (relating to accrual of discount on bonds and other evidences of indebtedness held by life insurance companies), such amount is not again includible in the taxpayer's gross income under section 1232(a)(2). For example, amounts includible in gross income by a cash receipts and disbursements method taxpayer who has made an election under section 454 (a) or (c) (relating to accounting rules for certain obligations issued at a discount to which section 1232(a)(3) does not apply) are not includible in gross income under section 1232(a)(2). In the case of a gain which would include, under section 1232(a)(2), an amount considered to be ordinary income and a further amount considered long-term capital gain, any amount to which this paragraph applies is first used to offset the amount considered ordinary income. For example, on January 1, 1955, A purchases a 10-year bond which is redeemable for fixed amounts increasing at stated intervals. At the time of original issue, there was no intention to call the bond before maturity. The purchase price of the bond is $75, which is also the issue price. The stated redemption price at maturity of the bond is $100. A elects to treat the annual increase in the redemption price of the bond as income pursuant to section 454(a). On January 1, 1960, A sells the bond for $90. The total stated increase in the redemption price of the bond which A has reported annually as income for the taxable years 1955 through 1959 is $7. The portion of the original issue discount of $25 attributable to this period is $12.50, computed as follows:

60 (months bond is held by A)/120 (months from date of original issue to redemption date) × $25 (original issue discount)

However, $7, which represents the annual stated increase taken into income, is offset against the amount of $12.50, leaving $5.50 of the gain from the sale to be treated as ordinary income.

(f) Recordkeeping requirements. In the case of any obligation held by a taxpayer which was issued at an original issue discount after December 31, 1954, the taxpayer shall keep a record of the issue price and issue date upon or with each obligation (if known to or reasonably ascertainable by him). If the obligation held by the taxpayer is an obligation of the United States received from the United States in an exchange upon which gain or loss is not recognized because of section 1037 (a) (or so much of section 1031 (b) or (c) as relates to section 1037(a)), the taxpayer shall keep sufficient records to determine the issue price of such obligation for purposes of applying section 1037(b) and paragraphs (a) and (b) of § 1.1037-1 upon the disposition or redemption of such obligation. The issuer (or in the case of obligations first sold to the public through an underwriter or wholesaler, the underwriter or wholesaler) shall mark the issue price and issue date upon every obligation which is issued at an original issue discount after September 26, 1957, but only if the period between the date of original issue (as defined in paragraph (b)(3) of this section) and the stated maturity date is more than 6 months.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12008, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 6984, 33 FR 19176, Dec. 21, 1968; T.D. 7154, 36 FR 25000, Dec. 28, 1971; 37 FR 527, Jan. 13, 1972; T.D. 7213, 37 FR 21992, Oct. 18, 1972; 37 FR 22863, Oct. 26, 1972; T.D. 7663, 44 FR 76782, Dec. 28, 1979; T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980]

§ 1.1232-3A Inclusion as interest of original issue discount on certain obligations issued after May 27, 1969.

(a) Ratable inclusion as interest

(1) General rule. Under section 1232(a)(3), the holder of any obligation issued by a corporation after May 27, 1969 (other than an obligation issued by or on behalf of the United States or a foreign country, or a political subdivision of either) shall include as interest in his gross income an amount equal to the ratable monthly portion of original issue discount multiplied by the sum of the number of complete months and any fractional part of a month such holder held the obligation during the taxable year. For increase in basis for amounts included as interest in gross income pursuant to this paragraph, see paragraph (c) of this section. For requirements for reporting original issue discount, see section 6049(a) and the regulations thereunder.

(2) Ratable monthly portion of original issue discount

(i) General rule. Except when subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph applies, the term ratable monthly portion of original issue discount means an amount equal to the original issue discount divided by the sum of the number of complete months (plus any fractional part of a month) beginning on the date of original issue and ending the day before the stated maturity date of such obligation.

(ii) Reduction for purchase allowance. With respect to an obligation which has been acquired by purchase (within the meaning of subparagraph (4) of this paragraph), the term ratable monthly portion of original issue discount means the lesser of the amount determined under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph or an amount equal to:

(a) The excess (if any) of the stated redemption price of the obligation at maturity over its cost to the purchaser divided by

(b) The sum of the number of complete months (plus any fractional part of a month) beginning on the date of such purchase and ending the day before the stated maturity date of such obligation.

The amount of the ratable monthly portion within the meaning of this subdivision reflects a purchase allowance provided under section 1232(a)(3)(B) where a purchase is made at a price in excess of the sum of the issue price plus the portion of original issue discount previously includible (regardless of whether included) in the gross income of all previous holders (computed, however, as to such previous holders without regard to any purchase allowance under this subdivision and without regard to whether any previous holder purchased at a premium).

(iii) Ratable monthly portion upon carryover to new obligation. In any case in which there is a carryover of original issue discount under paragraph (b)(1)(iv) of § 1.1232-3 from an obligation exchanged to an obligation received in such exchange, the ratable monthly portion of original issue discount in respect of the obligation received shall be computed by dividing the amount of original issue discount carried over by the sum of the number of complete months (plus any fractional part of a month) beginning on the date of the exchange and ending the day before the stated maturity date of the obligation received.

(iv) Cross references. For definitions of the terms original issue discount and date of original issue, see subparagraphs (1) and (3) respectively, of § 1.1232-3(b). For definition of the term premium, see paragraph (d)(2) of § 1.1232-3.

(3) Determination of number of complete months

(i) In general. For purposes of this section:

(a) A complete month and a fractional part of a month commence with the date of original issue and the corresponding day of each succeeding calendar month (or the last day of a calendar month in which there is no corresponding day),

(b) If an obligation is acquired on any day other than the date a complete month commences, the ratable monthly portion of original issue discount for the complete month in which the acquisition occurs shall be allocated between the transferor and the transferee in accordance with the number of days in such complete month each held the obligation,

(c) In determining the allocation under (b) of this subdivision, any holder may treat each month as having 30 days,

(d) The transferee, and not the transferor, shall be deemed to hold the obligation during the entire day on the date of acquisition, and

(e) The obligor will be treated as the transferee on the date of redemption.

(ii) Example. The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: On February 22, 1970, A acquires an obligation of X Corporation for which February 1, 1970, is the date of original issue. B acquires the obligation on June 16, 1970. A does not choose to treat each month as having 30 days. Thus, A held the obligation for 334 months during 1970, i.e., one-fourth of February (728 days), March, April, May, one-half of June (1530 days). The ratable monthly portion of original issue discount for the obligation is multiplied by 334 months to determine the amount included in A's gross income for 1970 pursuant to this paragraph.

(4) Purchase. For purposes of this section, the term purchase means any acquisition (including an acquisition upon original issue) of an obligation to which this section applies, but only if the basis of such obligation is not determined in whole or in part by reference to the adjusted basis of such obligation in the hands of the person from whom it was acquired or under section 1014(a) (relating to property acquired from a decedent).

(b) Exceptions

(1) Binding commitment. Section 1232(a)(3) shall not apply to any obligation issued pursuant to a written commitment which was binding on May 27, 1969, and at all times thereafter.

(2) Exception for 1-year obligations. Section 1232(a)(3) shall not apply to any obligation in respect of which the period between the date of original issue (as defined in paragraph (b)(3) of § 1.1232-3) and the stated maturity date is 1 year or less. In such case, gain on the sale or exchange of such obligation shall be included in gross income as interest to the extent the gain does not exceed an amount equal to the ratable monthly portion of original issue discount multiplied by the sum of the number of complete months and any fractional part of a month such taxpayer held such obligation.

(3) Purchase at a premium. Section 1232(a)(3) shall not apply to any holder who purchased the obligation at a premium (within the meaning of paragraph (d)(2) of § 1.1232-3).

(4) Life insurance companies. Section 1232(a)(3) shall not apply to any holder which is a life insurance company to which section 818(b) applies. However, ratable inclusion of original issue discount as interest under section 1232(a)(3) is required by an insurance company which is subject to the tax imposed by section 821 or 831.

(c) Basis adjustment. The basis of an obligation in the hands of the holder thereof shall be increased by any amount of original issue discount with respect thereto included as interest in his gross income pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section. See section 1232(a)(3)(E). However, the basis of an obligation shall not be increased by any amount that was includible as interest in gross income under paragraph (a) of this section, but was not actually included by the holder in his gross income.

(d) Examples. The provisions of paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

On January 1, 1970, A, a calendar-year taxpayer, purchases at original issue, for cash of $7,600, M Corporation's 10-year, 5-percent bond which has a stated redemption price of $10,000. The ratable monthly portion of original issue discount, as determined under section 1232(a)(3) and this section, to be included as interest in A's gross income for each month he holds such bond is $20, computed as follows:

Original issue discount (stated redemption price, $10,000, minus issue price, $7,600) $2,400
Divide by: Number of months from date of original issue to stated maturity date 120 months
Ratable monthly portion $20

Assume that A holds the bond for all of 1970 and 1971 and includes as interest in his gross income for each such year an amount equal to the ratable monthly portion, $20, multiplied by the number of months he held the bond each such year, 12 months, or $240. Accordingly, on January 1, 1972, A's basis in the bond will have increased under paragraph (c) of this section by the amount so included, $480 (i.e., $240 × 2), from his cost, $7,600, to $8,080. For results if A sells the bond on that date, see examples (1) and (2) of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1282-3.

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in example (1). Assume further that on January 1, 1972, A sells the bond to B, a calendar-year taxpayer for $9,040.

Since B purchased the bond, he determines under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section the amount of the ratable monthly portion he must include as interest in his gross income in order to reflect the amount of his purchase allowance (if any). B determines that his ratable monthly portion is $10, computed as follows:

(1) Stated redemption price at maturity $10,000
(2) Minus: B's cost $9,040
(3) Excess $960
(4) Divide by: Number of months from date of purchase to stated maturity date 96 months
(5) Tentative ratable monthly portion $10
(6) Ratable monthly portion as computed in example (1) $20

Since line (5) is lower than line (6), B's ratable monthly portion is $10. Accordingly, if B holds the bond for all of 1972, he must include $120 (i.e., ratable monthly portion, $10 × 12 months) as interest in his gross income.

Example 3.

(1) Assume the same facts as in example (1). Assume further that on January 1, 1975, A sells the bond to B for $10,150. Under the exception of paragraph (b)(3) of this section, B is not required to include any amount in respect of original issue discount as interest in his gross income since he has purchased the bond at a premium.

(2) On January 1, 1979, B sells the bond to C, a calendar-year taxpayer, for $9,940. Since C is now the holder of the bond (and no exception applies to him), he must include as interest in his gross income the ratable monthly portion of original issue determined under section 1232(a)(3) and this section. Since C purchased the bond he determines under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section the amount of the ratable monthly portion he must include as interest in his gross income in order to reflect the amount of his purchase allowance (if any). C determines that his ratable monthly portion is $5, computed as follows:

(1) Stated redemption price at maturity $10,000
(2) Minus: C's cost $9,940
(3) Excess $60
(4) Divide by: Number of months from date of purchase to stated maturity date 12 months
(5) Tentative ratable monthly portion $5
(6) Ratable monthly portion as computed in example (1) $20

Since line (5) is lower than line (6), C's ratable monthly portion is $5. Accordingly, if C holds the bond for all of 1979, he must include $60 (i.e., ratable monthly portion, $5, × 12 months) as interest in his gross income. Upon maturity of the bond on January 1, 1980, C will receive $10,000 from M, which under paragraph (c) of this section will equal his adjusted basis (the sum of his cost, $9,940, plus original issue discount included as interest in his gross income, $60).

Example 4.

On January 1, 1968, D, a calendar-year taxpayer, purchases at original issue, for cash of $8,000, P Corporation's 20-year, 6 percent bond which has a stated redemption price of $10,000 and which will mature on January 1, 1988. The original issue discount with respect to such bond is $2,000. However, the ratable inclusion rules of section 1232(a)(3) do not apply to D, since the bond was issued by P before May 28, 1969. On January 1, 1973, pursuant to a plan of reorganization as defined in section 368(a)(1)(E), and in which no gain or loss is recognized by D under section 354, D's 20-year bond is exchanged for a 10-year, 6 percent bond which also has a stated redemption price of $10,000 but will mature on January 1, 1983. Under paragraph (b)(1)(iv) of § 1.1232-3, the $2,000 of original issue discount is carried over to the new 10-year bond received in such exchange. Since the new bond is an obligation issued after May 27, 1969, D is required to begin ratable inclusion of the $2,000 of discount as interest in his gross income for 1973. The ratable monthly portion of original issue discount, as determined under section 1232(a)(3) to be included as interest in gross income is computed as follows:

Amount of original issue discount carried over $2,000
Divide by: Number of complete months beginning on January 1, 1973, and ending on December 31, 1982 120 months
Ratable monthly portion $16.67

(e) Application of section 1232 to certain deposits in financial institutions and similar arrangements

(1) In general. Under paragraph (d) of § 1.1232-1, the term other evidence of indebtedness includes certificates of deposit, time deposits, bonus plans, and other deposit arrangements with banks, domestic building and loan associations, and similar financial institutions.

(2) Adjustments where obligation redeemed before maturity

(i) In general. If an obligation described in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph is redeemed for a price less than the stated redemption price at maturity from a taxpayer who acquired the obligation upon original issue, such taxpayer shall be allowed as a deduction, in computing adjusted gross income, the amount of the original issue discount he included in gross income but did not receive (as determined under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph). The taxpayer's basis of such obligation (determined after any increase in basis for the taxable year under section 1232(a)(3)(E) by the amount of original issue discount included in the holder's gross income under section 1232(a)(3)) shall be decreased by the amount of such adjustment.

(ii) Computation. The amount of the adjustment under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph shall be an amount equal to the excess (if any) of

(a) the ratable monthly portion of the original issue discount included in the holder's gross income under section 1232(a)(3) for the period he held the obligation, over

(b) the excess (if any) of the amount received upon the redemption over the issue price. Under paragraph (b)(1)(iii)(a) of § 1.1232-3, if any amount based on a fixed rate of simple or compound interest is actually payable or will be treated as constructively received under section 451 and the regulations thereunder at fixed periodic intervals of 1 year or less during the term of the obligation, any such amount payable upon redemption shall not be included in determining the amount received upon such redemption.

(iii) Partial redemption.

(a) In the case of an obligation (other than a single obligation having serial maturity dates), if a portion of the obligation is redeemed prior to the stated maturity date of the entire obligation, the provisions of this subdivision shall be applied and not the provisions of subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph. In such case, the adjusted basis of the unredeemed portion of the obligation on the date of the partial redemption shall be an amount equal to the adjusted basis of the entire obligation on that date minus the amount paid upon the redemption.

(b) If the adjusted basis of the unredeemed portion (as computed under (a) of this subdivision) is equal to or in excess of the amount to be received for the unredeemed portion at maturity, no gain or loss shall be recognized at the time of the partial redemption but the holder shall be allowed a deduction, in computing adjusted gross income for the taxable year during which such partial redemption occurs, equal to the amount of such excess (if any), and no further original issue discount will be includible in the holder's gross income under section 1232(a)(3) over the remaining term of the unredeemed portion. In such case, the holder shall decrease his basis in the unredeemed portion (as computed under (a) of this subdivision) by the amount of such adjustment.

(c) If the adjusted basis of the unredeemed portion (as computed under (a) of this subdivision) is less than the redemption price of the unredeemed portion at maturity, a new computation shall be made under paragraph (a) of this section (without regard to the exception for one-year obligations in paragraph (b)(2) of this section) of the ratable monthly portion of original issue discount to be included as interest in the gross income of the holder over the remaining term of the unredeemed portion. For purposes of such computation, the adjusted basis of the unredeemed portion shall be treated as the issue price, the date of the partial redemption shall be treated as the issue date, and the amount to be paid for the unredeemed portion at maturity shall be treated as the stated redemption price.

(3) Examples. The application of section 1232 to obligations to which this paragraph applies may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A is a cash method taxpayer who uses the calendar year as his taxable year. On January 1, 1971, he purchases a certificate of deposit from X Bank, a corporation, for $10,000. The certificate of deposit is not redeemable until December 31, 1975, except in an emergency as defined in, and subject to the qualifications provided by, Regulation Q of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve. See 12 CFR 217.4(d). The stated redemption price at maturity is $13,382.26. The terms of the certificate do not expressly refer to any amount as interest. A's certificate of deposit is an obligation to which section 1232 and this paragraph apply. A shall include the ratable portion of original issue discount in gross income for 1971 as determined under section 1232(a)(3). Thus, if A holds the certificate of deposit for the full calendar year 1971, the amount to be included in A's gross income for 1971 is $676.45, that is, 1260 months, multiplied by the excess of the stated redemption price ($13,382.26) over the issue price ($10,000).

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that the certificate of deposit provides for payment upon redemption at December 31, 1975, of an amount equal to “$10,000, plus 6 percent compound interest from January 1, 1971, to December 31, 1975.” Thus, the total amount payable upon redemption in both example (1) and this example is $13,382.26. The certificate of deposit is an obligation to which section 1232 and this paragraph apply and, since the substance of the deposit arrangement is identical to that contained in example (1), A must include the same amount in gross income.

Example 3. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that the certificate provides for the payment of interest in the amount of $200 on December 31, of each year and $2,000 plus $10,000 (the original amount) payable upon redemption at December 31, 1975. Thus, if A holds the certificate of deposit for the full calendar year 1971, A must include in his gross income for 1971 the $200 interest payable on December 31, 1971, and $400 of original issue discount, that is, 1260 months multiplied by the excess of the stated redemption price ($12,000) over the issue price ($10,000).

Example 4.

B is a cash method taxpayer who uses the calendar year as his taxable year. On January 1, 1971, B purchases a 4-year savings certificate from the Y Building and Loan Corporation for $4,000, redeemable on December 31, 1974, for $5,000. On December 31, 1973, Y redeems the certificate for $4,660. Under section 1232(a)(3), B included $250 of original issue discount in his gross income for 1971, $250 for 1972, and includes $250 in his gross income for 1973 for a total of $750. Since the excess of (i) the amount received upon the redemption, $4,660, over (ii) the issue price, $4,000, or $660, is lower than the total amount of original issue discount ($750) included in B's gross income for the period he held the certificate by $90, the $90 will be treated under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph as a deduction in computing adjusted gross income, and accordingly, will decrease the basis of his certificate by such amount. B has no gain or loss upon the redemption, as determined in accordance with the following computation:

Adjusted basis January 1, 1973 $4,500
Increase under section 1232(a)(3)(E) 250
Subtotal 4,750
Decrease under subparagraph (b)(2) of this paragraph 90
Basis upon redemption 4,660
Amount realized upon redemption 4,660
Gain or loss 0

Example 5. On January 1, 1971, C, a cash method taxpayer who uses the calendar year as his taxable year, opens a savings account in Z bank with a $10,000 deposit. Under the terms of the account, interest is made available semiannually at 6 percent annual interest, compounded semiannually. Since all of the interest on C's account in Z Bank is made available semiannually, the stated redemption price at maturity under paragraph (b)(1)(iii)(a) of § 1.1232-3 equals the issue price, and, therefore, no original issue discount is reportable by C under section 1232(a)(3). However, C must include the sum of $300 (i.e., 12 × 6% × $10,000) plus $309 (i.e., 12 × 6% × $10,300) or $609, of interest made available during 1971 in his gross income for 1971.

Example 6.

(i) D is a cash method taxpayer who uses the calendar year as his taxable year. On January 1, 1971, D purchases a $10,000 deferred income certificate from M Bank. Under the terms of the certificate, interest accrues at 6 percent per annum, compounded quarterly. The period of the account is 10 years. In addition, the holder is permitted to withdraw the entire amount of the purchase price at any time (but not interest prior to the expiration of the 10 year term), and upon such a withdrawal of the purchase price, no further interest accrues. If the certificate is held to maturity, the issue price plus accrued interest will aggregate $18,140.18.

(ii) In respect of the certificate, the original issue discount is $8,140.18, determined by subtracting the issue price of the certificate ($10,000) from the stated redemption price at maturity ($18,140.18). Thus, under section 1232(a)(3) the ratable monthly portion of original issue discount is $67.835 (i.e., 120 months, multiplied by $8,140.18). Under section 1232(a)(3), D includes $814.02 (i.e., 12 months, multiplied by $67.835) in his gross income for each calendar year the certificate remains outstanding and under section 1232(a)(3)(E) increases his basis by that amount. Thus, on December 31, 1975, D's basis for the certificate is $14,070.10 (i.e., issue price, $10,000, increased by product of $814.02 × 5 years).

(iii) On December 31, 1975, D withdraws the $10,000. Under the terms of the certificate $3,468.55 cannot be withdrawn until December 31, 1980. Under the provisions of subparagraph (2)(iii) of this paragraph, the $10,000 partial redemption shall be treated as follows:

(1) Adjusted basis of obligation at time of partial redemption $14,070.10
(2) Amount paid upon redemption 10,000.00
(3) Adjusted basis of unredeemed portion (line (1) less line (2)) 4,070.10
(4) Amount to be paid for unredeemed portion at maturity (December 31, 1980) 3,468.55
(5) Adjustment in computing adjusted gross income (excess of line (3) over line (4)) 601.55

Since the adjusted basis of the unredeemed portion exceeds the amount to be received for the unredeemed portion at maturity, D is allowed a deduction, in computing adjusted gross income, of $601.25 in 1975 and no further original issue discount is includible as interest in his gross income. In addition, D will decrease his basis in the unredeemed portion by $601.55, the amount of such adjustment, from $4,070.10 to $3,468.55.

Example 7. E is a cash method taxpayer who uses the calendar year as his taxable year. On January 1, 1971, E purchases a $10,000 “Bonus Savings Certificate” from N Building and Loan Corporation. Under the terms of the certificate, interest is payable at 5 percent per annum, compounded quarterly, and the period of the account is 3 years. In addition, the certificate provides that if the holder makes no withdrawals of principal or interest during the term of the certificate, a bonus payment equal to 5 percent of the purchase price of the certificate will be paid to the holder of the certificate at maturity. Thus, the amount of the bonus payment is $500 (i.e., 5 percent multiplied by $10,000). Since the 5 percent annual interest is payable quarterly, the amount of such interest is not included in determining the stated redemption price at maturity under paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of § 1.1232-3. However, since the bonus payment is only payable at maturity, the amount of such bonus is included as part of the stated redemption price at maturity. Thus, the stated redemption price at maturity equals $10,500 (purchase price, $10,000, plus bonus payment $500). Accordingly, the original issue discount attributable to such certificate equals $500 (stated redemption price at maturity. $10,500, minus issue price, $10,000). Therefore, E must include as interest $166.67 (i.e., 1236 months, multiplied by the original issue discount, $500) in his gross income for each taxable year he holds the certificate.

(4) Renewable certificates of deposit

(i) In general. The renewal of a certificate of deposit shall be treated as a purchase of the certificate on the date the renewal period begins regardless of any requirement pursuant to the terms of the certificate that the holder give notice of an intention to renew or not to renew. Thus, for example, in the case of a certificate of deposit for which a renewal period begins after December 31, 1970, such renewal shall be treated as a purchase after such date whether or not the initial period began before such date.

(ii) Computation. For purposes of computing the amount of original issue discount to be ratably included as interest in gross income under section 1232(a)(3) in respect of a renewable certificate of deposit for the initial period or any renewal period, the following rules apply:

(a) The issue price on the date any renewal period begins is considered to be in the case of a certificate of deposit initially purchased:

(1) After December 31, 1970, the adjusted basis of the certificate on the date such period begins,

(2) Before January 1, 1971, the amount the adjusted basis would have been on the date such period begins had the holder included all amounts of original issue discount as interest in gross income that would have been includible if section 1232(a)(3) had applied to the certificate from the date of original purchase.

Thus, if under the terms of the certificate, no amount is forfeited upon a failure to renew, then the issue price on the date any renewal period begins is considered to be the amount which would have been received by the holder on such date had it not been renewed.

(b) The date of original issue for any renewal period shall be considered to be the date it begins.

(c) The date of maturity for the initial period or any renewal period shall be considered to be the date it ends.

(d) The stated redemption price at maturity for the initial period or any renewal period shall be considered to be the maximum amount which would be received at the end of any such period, without regard to any reduction resulting from withdrawal prior to maturity or failure to renew at any renewal date.

(iii) Application of 1-year rule. For purposes of paragraph (b)(2) of this section (relating to nonapplication of section 1232(a)(3) to any obligation having a term of 1 year or less), the period between the date of original issue (as defined in paragraph (b)(3) of § 1.1232-3) of a renewable certificate of deposit and its stated maturity date shall include all renewal periods with respect to which, under the terms of the certificate, the holder may either take action or refrain from taking action which would prevent the actual or constructive receipt of any interest on such certificate until the expiration of any such renewal period whether or not the original date of issue is prior to January 1, 1971.

(iv) Example. The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

(a) On May 1, 1969, A purchases a 2-year renewable certificate of deposit from M bank, a corporation, for $10,000. Interest will be compounded semiannually at 6 percent on May 1 and November 1. The terms of the certificate provide that such certificate will be automatically renewed on the anniversary date every 2 years if the holder does not notify M of an intention not to renew prior to 60 days before the particular anniversary date. Thus, on May 1, 1971, and May 1, 1973, the certificate may be redeemed for $11,255.09 and $12,667.60, respectively. However, in no event shall the initial period and the renewal periods exceed 10 years. A does not notify M of an intention not to renew by March 1, 1971, and the certificate is automatically renewed for an additional 2-year period on May 1, 1971.

(b) Under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, the May 1, 1971, renewal shall be treated as the purchase of a certificate of deposit on that date, i.e., after December 31, 1970. Under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, the issue price is considered to be $11,255.09 and the date of maturity is considered to be May 1, 1973. Since the stated redemption price at maturity is $12,667.60. A must include $58.85 as interest in gross income for each month he holds the certificate during the renewal period beginning May 1, 1971, computed as follows:

Original issue discount (stated redemption price, $12,667.60, minus issue price, $11,255.09) $1,412.51
Divided by: Number of months from renewal to maturity date 24 months
Ratable monthly portion $58.85

(5) Time deposit open account arrangements

(i) In general. The term time deposit open account arrangement means an arrangement with a fixed maturity date where deposits may be made from time to time and ordinarily no interest will be paid or constructively received until such fixed maturity date. All deposits pursuant to such an arrangement constitute parts of a single obligation. The amount of original issue discount to be ratably included as interest in the gross income of the depositor for any taxable year shall be the sum of the amounts separately computed for each deposit. For this purpose, the issue price for a deposit is the amount thereof and the stated redemption price at maturity is computed under paragraph (b)(1)(iii)(d) of § 1.1232-3.

(ii) Obligations redeemed before maturity. In the event of a partial redemption of a time deposit open account before maturity, the following rules, in addition to subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, shall apply:

(a) If, pursuant to the terms of the withdrawal, the amount received by the depositor is determined with reference to the principal amount of a specific deposit and interest earned from the date of such deposit, then such terms shall control for the purpose of determining which deposit was withdrawn.

(b) If (a) of this subdivision (ii) does not apply, then the withdrawal shall be deemed to be of specific deposits together with interest earned from the date of such deposits, on a first-in, first-out basis.

(iii) Examples. The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) F is a cash method taxpayer who uses the calendar year as his taxable year. On December 1, 1970, F enters into a 5-year deposit open account arrangement with M Savings and Loan Corp. The terms of the arrangement provide that F will deposit $100 each month for a period of 5 years, and that interest will be compounded semiannually (on June 1 and December 1) at 6 percent, but will be paid only at maturity. Thus, assuming F makes deposits of $100 on the first of each month beginning with December 1, 1970, the account will have a stated redemption price of $6,998.20 at maturity on December 1, 1975. Since, however, section 1232 applies only to deposits made after December 31, 1970 (see paragraph (d) of § 1.1232-1), the $34.39 of compound interest to be earned on the first deposit of $100 over the term of the arrangement will not be subject to the ratable inclusion rules of section 1232(a)(3). F must include such $34.39 of interest in his gross income on December 1, 1975, the date it is paid.

(ii) For 1971, F must include $44.19 of original issue discount as interest in gross income, to be computed as follows:

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Date of $100 deposit Months to maturity Redemption price at
maturity
Original issue discount (Col.3−$100) Ratable monthly portion (Col.4 ÷ Col.2) Months on deposit in 1971 1971 original issue discount (Col.5 × Col.6)
1-1-71 59 $133.73 $33.73 $0.5717 12 $6.86
2-1-71 58 133.07 33.07 .5702 11 6.27
3-1-71 57 132.42 32.42 .5688 10 5.69
4-1-71 56 131.77 31.77 .5673 9 5.11
5-1-71 55 131.12 31.12 .5658 8 4.53
6-1-71 54 130.48 30.48 .5644 7 3.95
7-1-71 53 129.84 29.84 .5630 6 3.38
8-1-71 52 129.20 29.20 .5615 5 2.81
9-1-71 51 128.56 28.56 .5600 4 2.24
10-1-71 50 127.93 27.93 .5586 3 1.68
11-1-71 49 127.30 27.30 .5571 2 1.11
12-1-71 48 126.68 26.68 .5558 1 0.56
Total original issue discount to be included as interest in F's gross income for 1971 44.19

Example 2.

(i) G is a cash method taxpayer who uses the calendar year as his taxable year. On February 1, 1971, G enters into a 4-year deposit open account arrangement with T Bank, a corporation. The terms of the deposit arrangement provide that G may deposit any amount from time to time in multiples of $50 for a period of 4 years. The terms also provide that G may not redeem any amount until February 1, 1975, except in an emergency as defined in, and subject to the qualifications provided by, Regulation Q of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System. See 12 CFR 217.4(d). Interest will be compounded semiannually (on February 1 and August 1) at 6 percent, providing there is no redemption prior to February 1, 1975. However, if there is a redemption prior to such date, interest will be compounded semiannually at 512 percent.

(ii) The schedule of deposits made by G pursuant to the arrangement, and computation of ratable monthly portion for each deposit, is set forth in the table below:

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Date of deposit Months to maturity Amount of deposit Redemption price at
maturity
Original issue discount (Col.4−Col.3) Ratable monthly portion (Col.5 ÷ Col.2)
2-1-71 48 100 $126.68 $26.68 0.5558
6-1-71 44 200 248.42 48.42 1.1005
12-1-71 38 500 602.95 102.95 2.7092
2-1-72 36 800 955.24 155.24 4.3122
3-1-72 35 800 950.56 150.56 4.3017
7-1-72 31 600 699.00 99.00 3.1935
8-1-72 30 250 289.82 39.82 1.3273

(iii) With respect to amounts on deposit pursuant to the arrangement, the amounts of original issue discount G must include as interest in his gross income for 1971 and 1972 are computed in the table below:

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Date of deposit Ratable
monthly
portion
Months on deposit in 1971 1971 original issue discount (Col.2 × Col.3) Months on deposit in 1972 1972 original issue discount (Col.2 × Col.5)
2-1-71 $0.5558 11 $6.11 12 $6.67
6-1-71 1.1005 7 7.70 12 13.21
12-1-71 2.7092 1 2.71 12 32.51
2-1-72 4.3122 11 47.43
3-1-72 4.3017 10 43.02
7-1-72 3.1935 6 19.16
8-1-72 1.3273 5 6.64
Total original issue discount includible as interest in gross income for taxable year 16.52 168.64

(6) Certain contingent interest arrangement

(i) In general. If under the terms of a deposit arrangement:

(a) The holder cannot receive payment of any interest or constructively receive any interest prior to a fixed maturity date,

(b) Interest is earned at a guaranteed minimum rate of compound interest,

(c) Additional contingent interest may be earned for any year at a rate not to exceed one percentage point above such guaranteed minimum rate, and

(d) Any additional contingent interest is credited at least annually to the depositor's account,

Then any contingent interest credited to the depositor shall be treated as creating a separate obligation subject to the rules of subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph.

(ii) Computation. For purposes of computing the original issue discount to be included as interest in the depositor's gross income under section 1232(a)(3) with respect to such separate obligation:

(a) The issue price shall be zero,

(b) The date of original issue shall be the date on which the contingent interest is credited to the depositor's account and begins to earn interest,

(c) The date of maturity shall be the fixed maturity date of the deposit, and

(d) The stated redemption price at maturity is the sum of the amount of such contingent interest plus any interest to be earned thereon at the guaranteed minimum rate of compound interest between such dates of original issue and maturity.

(7) Contingent interest arrangements other than those described in subparagraph (6)

(i) In general. If under the terms of a deposit arrangement, contingent interest may be earned and credited to a depositor's account, but is neither actually or constructively received before a fixed maturity date nor treated under subparagraph (6)(i) of this paragraph as creating a separate obligation, then the redemption price shall include the amount which would be credited to such account assuming the issuer, during the term of such account, credits contingent interest at the greater of the rate:

(a) Last credited on a similar account, or

(b) Equal to the average rate credited for the preceding 5 calendar years on a similar account.

(ii) Adjustments for additional interest. The rate taken into account under this subparagraph in computing the redemption price shall be treated as the guaranteed minimum rate for purposes of applying subparagraph (6) of this paragraph in the event the rate at which contingent interest is actually credited to the depositor's account exceeds such rate previously taken into account. If for any period the actual rate at which contingent interest is credited to the account exceeds by more than 1 percentage point the rate for the previous period taken into account under this subparagraph in computing the redemption price, a new computation shall be made to determine the ratable monthly portion of original issue discount to be included as interest in the gross income of the depositor over the remaining term of the account. For purposes of such computation, the date that interest is first so credited to the account shall be treated as the issue date, the adjusted basis of the account on such date shall be the issue price, and the redemption price shall equal the amount actually on deposit in the account on such date plus the amount which would be credited to such account assuming the issuer, during the remaining term of such account, continues to credit contingent interest at the new rate.

(iii) Adjustment for reduced interest. If for any period the actual rate of interest at which contingent interest is credited to the depositor's account is less than the rate for the previous period taken into account under this subparagraph in computing the redemption price, the difference between the amount of interest which would have been credited to the account at the rate for such previous period and the amount actually credited shall be allowed as a deduction against the amount of original issue discount with respect to such account required to be included in the gross income of the depositor. If an account is redeemed for a price less than the adjusted basis of the account, the depositor shall be allowed as a deduction, in computing adjusted gross income, the amount of the original issue discount he included in gross income but did not receive.

(f) Application of section 1232(a)(3) to face-amount certificates

(1) In general. Under paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.1232-1, the provisions of section 1232(a)(3) and this section apply in the case of a face-amount certificate issued after December 31, 1975 (other than such a certificate issued pursuant to a written commitment which was binding on such date and at all times thereafter).

(2) Relationship with paragraph (e) of this section. Determinations with regard to the inclusion as interest of original issue discount on, and certain adjustments with respect to, face-amount certificates to which this section applies shall be made in a manner consistent with the rules of paragraph (e) of this section (relating to the application of section 1232 to certain deposits in financial institutions and similar arrangements). Thus, for example, if a face-amount certificate is redeemed before maturity, the holder shall be allowed a deduction in computing adjusted gross income computed in a manner consistent with the rules of paragraph (e)(2) of this section. For a further example, if under the terms of a face-amount certificate, the issuer may grant additional credits to be paid at a fixed maturity date, computations with respect to such additional credits shall be made in a manner consistent with the rules of paragraphs (e) (6) and (7) of this section (as applicable) relating to contingent interest arrangements.

[T.D. 7154, 36 FR 25005, Dec. 28, 1971; 37 FR 527, Jan. 13, 1972, as amended by T.D. 7213, 37 FR 21993, Oct. 18, 1972; 37 FR 22863, Oct. 26, 1972; T.D. 7311, 39 FR 11880, Apr. 1, 1974; T.D. 7365, 40 FR 27936, July 2, 1975]

§ 1.1233-1 Gains and losses from short sales.

(a) General.

(1) For income tax purposes, a short sale is not deemed to be consummated until delivery of property to close the short sale. Whether the recognized gain or loss from a short sale is capital gain or loss or ordinary gain or loss depends upon whether the property so delivered constitutes a capital asset in the hands of the taxpayer.

(2) Thus, if a dealer in securities makes a short sale of X Corporation stock, ordinary gain or loss results on closing of the short sale if the stock used to close the short sale was stock which he held primarily for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his trade or business. If the stock used to close the short sale was a capital asset in his hands, or if the taxpayer in this example was not a dealer, a capital gain or loss would result.

(3) Generally, the period for which a taxpayer holds property delivered to close a short sale determines whether long-term or short-term capital gain or loss results.

(4) Thus, if a taxpayer makes a short sale of shares of stock and covers the short sale by purchasing and delivering shares which he held for not more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977), the recognized gain or loss would be considered short-term capital gain or loss. If the short sale is made through a broker and the broker borrows property to make a delivery, the short sale is not deemed to be consummated until the obligation of the seller created by the short sale is finally discharged by delivery of property to the broker to replace the property borrowed by the broker.

(5) For rules for determining the date of sale for purposes of applying under section 1091 the 61-day period applicable to a short sale of stock or securities at a loss, see paragraph (g) of § 1.1091-1.

(b) Hedging transactions. Under section 1233(g), the provisions of section 1233 and this section shall not apply to any bona fide hedging transaction in commodity futures entered into by flour millers, producers of cloth, operators of grain elevators, etc., for the purpose of their business. Gain or loss from a short sale of commodity futures which does not qualify as a hedging transaction shall be considered gain or loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset if the commodity future used to close the short sale constitutes a capital asset in the hands of the taxpayer as explained in paragraph (a) of this section.

(c) Special short sales

(1) General. Section 1233 provides rules as to the tax consequences of a short sale of property if gain or loss from the short sale is considered as gain or loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset under section 1233(a) and paragraph (a) of this section and if, at the time of the short sale or on or before the date of the closing of the short sale, the taxpayer holds property substantially identical to that sold short. The term property is defined for purposes of such rules to include only stocks and securities (including stocks and securities dealt with on a when issued basis) and commodity futures, which are capital assets in the hands of the taxpayer. Certain restrictions on the application of the section to commodity futures are provided in section 1233(e) and paragraph (d)(2) of this section. Section 1233(f) contains special provisions governing the operation of rule (2) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph in the case of a purchase and short sale of stock (as defined in subparagraph (3) qualifying as an arbitrage operation. See paragraph (f) of this section for detailed rules relating to arbitrage operations in stocks and securities.

(2) Treatment of special short sales. The first two rules, which are set forth in section 1233(b), are applicable whenever property substantially identical to that sold short has been held by the taxpayer on the date of the short sale for not more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977) (determined without regard to rule (2), contained in this subparagraph, relating to the holding period) or is acquired by him after the short sale and on or before the date of the closing thereof. These rules are:

Rule (1). Any gain upon the closing of such short sale shall be considered as a gain upon the sale or exchange of a capital asset held for not more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977) (notwithstanding the period of time any property used to close such short sale has been held); and

Rule (2). The holding period of such substantially identical property shall be considered to begin (notwithstanding the provisions of section 1223) on the date of the closing of such short sale or on the date of a sale, gift, or other disposition of such property, whichever date occurs first.

(3) Options to sell. For the purpose of rule (1) and rule (2) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the acquisition of an option to sell property at a fixed price shall be considered a short sale, and the exercise or failure to exercise such option shall be considered as a closing of such short sale, except that any option to sell property at a fixed price acquired on or after August 17, 1954 (the day after enactment of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954), shall not be considered a short sale and the exercise or failure to exercise such option shall not be considered as the closing of a short sale provided that the option and property identified as intended to be used in its exercise are acquired on the same date. This exception shall not apply, if the option is exercised, unless it is exercised by the sale of the property so identified. In the case of any option not exercised which falls within this exception, the cost of such option shall be added to the basis of the property with which such option is identified. If the option itself does not specifically identify the property intended to be used in exercising the option, then the identification of such property shall be made by appropriate entries in the taxpayer's records within 15 days after the date such property is acquired or before November 17, 1956, whichever expiration date later occurs.

(4) Treatment of losses. The third rule, which is set forth in section 1233(d), is applicable whenever property substantially identical to that sold short has been held by the taxpayer on the date of the short sale for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977). This rule is:

Rule (3). Any loss upon the closing of such short sale shall be considered as a loss upon the sale or exchange of a capital asset held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977), not withstanding the period of time any property used to close such short sale has been held. For the purpose of this rule, the acquisition of an option to sell property at a fixed price is not considered a short sale, and the exercise or failure to exercise such option is not considered as a closing of a short sale.

(5) Application of rules. Rules (1) and (3) contained in subparagraphs (2) and (4) of this paragraph do not apply to the gain or loss attributable to so much of the property sold short as exceeds in quantity the substantially identical property referred to in section 1233 (b) and (d), respectively. Except as otherwise provided in section 1233(f), rule (2) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph applies to the substantially identical property referred to in section 1233(b) in the order of the dates of the acquisition of such property, but only to so much of such property as does not exceed the quantity sold short. If property substantially identical to that sold short has been held by the taxpayer on the date of the short sale for not more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977), or is acquired by him after the short sale and on or before the date of the closing thereof, and if property substantially identical to that sold short has been held by the taxpayer on the date of the short sale for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977), all three rules are applicable.

(6) Examples. The following examples illustrate the application of these rules to short sales of stock in the case of a taxpayer who makes his return on the basis of the calendar year:

Example 1. A buys 100 shares of X stock at $10 per share on February 1, 1955, sells short 100 shares of X stock at $16 per share on July 1, 1955, and closes the short sale on August 2, 1955, by delivering the 100 shares of X stock purchased on February 1, 1955, to the lender of the stock used to effect the short sale. Since 100 shares of X stock had been held by A on the date of the short sale for not more than 6 months, the gain of $600 realized upon the closing of the short sale is, by application of rule (1) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, a short-term capital gain.

Example 2. A buys 100 shares of X stock at $10 per share on February 1, 1955, sells short 100 shares of X stock at $16 per share on July 1, 1955, closes the short sale on August 1, 1955, with 100 shares of X stock purchased on that date at $18 per share, and on August 2, 1955, sells at $18 per share the 100 shares of X stock purchased on February 1, 1955. The $200 loss sustained upon the closing of the short sale is a short-term capital loss to which section 1233(d) has no application. By application of rule (2) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, however, the holding period of the 100 shares of X stock purchased on February 1, 1955, and sold on August 2, 1955 is considered to begin on August 1, 1955, the date of the closing of the short sale. The $800 gain realized upon the sale of such stock is, therefore, a short-term capital gain.

Example 3. A buys 100 shares of X stock at $10 per share on February 1, 1955, sells short 100 shares of X stock at $16 per share on September 1, 1955, sells on October 1, 1955, at $18 per share the 100 shares of X stock purchased on February 1, 1955, and closes the short sale on October 1, 1955, with 100 shares of X stock purchased on that date at $18 per share. The $800 gain realized upon the sale of the 100 shares of X stock purchased on February 1, 1955, is a long-term capital gain to which section 1233(b) has no application. Since A had held 100 shares of X stock on the date of the short sale for more than 6 months, the $200 loss sustained upon the closing of the short sale is, by application of rule (3) in subparagraph (4) of this paragraph, a long-term capital loss. If, instead of purchasing 100 shares of X stock on October 1, 1955, A closed the short sale with the 100 shares of stock purchased on February 1, 1955, the $600 gain realized on the closing of the short sale would be a long-term capital gain to which section 1233(b) has no application.

Example 4. A sells short 100 shares of X stock at $16 per share on February 1, 1955. He buys 250 shares of X stock on March 1, 1955, at $10 per share and holds the latter stock until September 2, 1955 (more than 6 months), at which time, 100 shares of the 250 shares of X stock are delivered to close the short sale made on February 1, 1955. Since substantially identical property was acquired by A after the short sale and before it was closed, the $600 gain realized on the closing of the short sale is, by application of rule (1) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, a short-term capital gain. The holding period of the remaining 150 shares of X stock is not affected by section 1233 since this amount of the substantially identical property exceeds the quantity of the property sold short.

Example 5. A buys 100 shares of X stock at $10 per share on February 1, 1955, buys an additional 100 shares of X stock at $20 per share on July 1, 1955, sells short 100 shares of X stock at $30 per share on September 1, 1955, and closes the short sale on February 1, 1956, by delivering the 100 shares of X stock purchased on February 1, 1955, to the lender of the stock used to effect the short sale. Since 100 shares of X stock had been held by A on the date of the short sale for not more than 6 months, the gain of $2,000 realized upon the closing of the short sale is, by application of rule (1) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, a short-term capital gain and the holding period of the 100 shares of X stock purchased on July 1, 1955, is considered, by application of rule (2) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph to begin on February 1, 1956, the date of the closing of the short sale. If, however, the 100 shares of X stock purchased on July 1, 1955, had been used by A to close the short sale, then, since 100 shares of X stock had been held by A on the date of the short sale for not more than 6 months, the gain of $1,000 realized upon the closing of the short sale would be, by application of rule (1) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, a short-term capital gain, but the holding period of the 100 shares of X stock purchased on February 1, 1955, would not be affected by section 1233. If, on the other hand, A purchased an additional 100 shares of X stock at $40 per share on February 1, 1956, and used such shares to close the short sale at that time, then, since 100 shares of X stock had been held by A on the date of the short sale for more than 6 months, the loss of $1,000 sustained upon the closing of the short sale would be, by application of rule (3) in subparagraph (4) of this paragraph, a long-term capital loss, and since 100 shares of X stock had been held by A on the date of the short sale for not more than 6 months, the holding period of the 100 shares of X stock purchased on July 1, 1955, would be considered, by application of rule (2) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, to begin on February 1, 1956, but the holding period of the 100 shares of X stock purchased on February 1, 1955, would not be affected by section 1233.

Example 6. A buys 100 shares of X preferred stock at $10 per share on February 1, 1955. On July 1, 1955, he enters into a contract to sell 100 shares of XY common stock at $16 per share when, as, and if issued pursuant to a particular plan of reorganization. On August 2, 1955, he receives 100 shares of XY common stock in exchange for the 100 shares of X preferred stock purchased on February 1, 1955, and delivers such common shares in performance of his July 1, 1955, contract. Assume that the exchange of the X preferred stock for the XY common stock is a tax-free exchange pursuant to section 354(a)(1), and that on the basis of all of the facts and circumstances existing on July 1, 1955, the when issued XY common stock is substantially identical to the X preferred stock. Since 100 shares of substantially identical property had been held by A for not more than 6 months on the date of entering into the July 1, 1955, contract of sale, the gain of $600 realized upon the closing of the contract of sale is, by application of rule (1) in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, a short-term capital gain.

(d) Other rules for the application of section 1233

(1) Substantially identical property. The term substantially identical property is to be applied according to the facts and circumstances in each case. In general, as applied to stocks or securities, the term has the same meaning as the term substantially identical stock or securities used in section 1091, relating to wash sales of stocks or securities. For certain restrictions on the term as applied to commodity futures see subparagraph (2) of this paragraph. Ordinarily, stocks or securities of one corporation are not considered substantially identical to stocks or securities of another corporation. In certain situations they may be substantially identical; for example, in the case of a reorganization the facts and circumstances may be such that the stocks and securities of predecessor and successor corporations are substantially identical property. Similarly, bonds or preferred stock of a corporation are not ordinarily considered substantially identical to the common stock of the same corporation. However, in certain situations, as, for example, where the preferred stock or bonds are convertible into common stock of the same corporation, the relative values, price changes, and other circumstances may be such as to make such bonds or preferred stock and the common stock substantially identical property. Similarly, depending on the facts and circumstances, the term may apply to the stocks and securities to be received in a corporate reorganization or recapitalization, traded in on a when issued basis, as compared with the stocks or securities to be exchanged in such reorganization or recapitalization.

(2) Commodity futures.

(i) As provided in section 1233(e)(2)(B), in the case of futures transactions in any commodity on or subject to the rules of a board of trade or commodity exchange, a commodity future requiring delivery in one calendar month shall not be considered as property substantially identical to another commodity future requiring delivery in a different calendar month. For example, commodity futures in May wheat and July wheat are not considered, for the purpose of section 1233, substantially identical property. Similarly, futures in different commodities which are not generally through custom of the trade used as hedges for each other (such as corn and wheat, for example) are not considered substantially identical property. If commodity futures are otherwise substantially identical property, the mere fact that they were procured through different brokers will not remove them from the scope of the term substantially identical property. Commodity futures procured on different markets may come within the term substantially identical property depending upon the facts and circumstances in the case, with the historical similarity in the price movements in the two markets as the primary factor to be considered.

(ii) Section 1233(e)(3), relating to so-called arbitrage transactions in commodity futures, provides that where a taxpayer enters into two commodity futures transactions on the same day, one requiring delivery by him in one market and the other requiring delivery to him of the same (or substantially identical) commodity in the same calendar month in a different market, and the taxpayer subsequently closes both such transactions on the same day, section 1233 shall have no application to so much of the commodity involved in either such transaction as does not exceed in quantity the commodity involved in the other. Section 1233(f), relating to arbitrage operations in stocks or securities, has no application to arbitrage transactions in commodity futures.

(iii) The following example indicates the application of section 1233 to a commodity futures transaction:

Example: A, who makes his return on the basis of the calendar year, on February 1, 1955, enters into a contract through broker X to purchase 10,000 bushels of December wheat on the Chicago market at $2 per bushel. On July 1, 1955, he enters into a contract through broker Y to sell 10,000 bushels of December wheat on the Chicago market at $2.25 per bushel. On August 2, 1955, he closes both transactions at $2.50 per bushel. The $2,500 loss sustained on the closing of the short sale is a short-term capital loss to which section 1233(d) has no application. By application of rule (2) in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, however, the holding period of the futures contract entered into on February 1, 1955, is considered to begin on August 2, 1955, the date of the closing of the short sale. The $5,000 gain realized upon the closing of such contract is, therefore, a short-term capital gain.

(3) Husband and wife. Section 1233(e)(2)(C) provides that, in the case of a short sale of property by an individual, the term taxpayer in the application of subsections (b), (d), and (e) shall be read as taxpayer or his spouse. Thus, if the spouse of a taxpayer holds or acquires property substantially identical to that sold short by the taxpayer, and other conditions of subsections (b), (d), and (e) are met, then the rules set forth therein are applicable to the same extent as if the taxpayer held or acquired the substantially identical property. For this purpose, an individual who is legally separated from the taxpayer under a decree of divorce or of separate maintenance shall not be considered as the spouse of the taxpayer.

(e) Special rule for short sales by dealers in securities under certain circumstances. In the case of a short sale of stock (as defined in subparagraph (3) of this paragraph) after December 31, 1957, by a dealer in securities, section 1233(e)(4)(A) provides that the holding period of substantially identical stock which he has held as an investment for not more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977) shall be determined in accordance with section 1233(b)(2) unless such short sale is closed within 20 days of the date on which it was made. See rule (2) in paragraph (c)(2) of this section for the purpose of determining the holding period of such substantially identical stock. In addition, section 1233(e)(4)(B) provides that for the purpose of the special rule of section 1233(e)(4)(A), the acquisition of an option to sell property at a fixed price shall be considered a short sale, and the exercise or failure to exercise such option shall be considered a closing of such short sale. For purposes of this paragraph:

(1) Whether or not a taxpayer is a dealer in securities shall be determined in accordance with the meaning of the term for purposes of section 1236;

(2) Whether or not stock is substantially identical with other property shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (d)(1) of this section; and

(3) The term stock means:

(i) Any share or certificate of stock,

(ii) Any bond or other evidence of indebtedness which is convertible into a share or certificate of stock, and

(iii) Any evidence of an interest in, or right to subscribe to or purchase, any of the items described in subdivision (i) or (ii) of this subparagraph.

(f) Arbitrage operations in stocks and securities and holding periods

(1) General rule.

(i) In the case of a short sale entered into as part of an arbitrage operation, rule (2) of paragraph (c)(2) of this section shall apply first to substantially identical property acquired for arbitrage operations and held by the taxpayer at the close of business on the day of the short sale. The holding period of substantially identical property not acquired for arbitrage operations shall be affected only to the extent that the amount of property sold short exceeds the amount of substantially identical property acquired for arbitrage operations and held by the tapayer at the close of business on the day of the short sale.

(ii) If the substantially identical property acquired for arbitrage operations is disposed of without closing the short sale so that a net short position in assets acquired for arbitrage operations is created, a short sale in the amount of such net short position will be deemed to have been made on the day such net short position is created. Rule (2) of paragraph (c)(2) of this section will then apply to substantially identical property not acquired for arbitrage operations to the same extent as if the taxpayer, on the day such net short position is created, sold short an amount equal to the amount of the net short position in a transaction not entered into as part of an arbitrage operation.

(iii) The following examples illustrate the application of rule (2) of paragraph (c)(2) of this section to arbitrage operations:

Example 1. On August 13, 1957, A buys 100 bonds of X Corporation for purposes other than arbitrage operations. The bonds are convertible at the option of the bondholders into common stock of X Corporation on the basis of one bond for one share of stock. On November 1, 1957, A sells short 100 shares of common stock of X Corporation in a transaction identified and intended to be part of an arbitrage operation and on the same day buys another 100 bonds of X Corporation in a transaction identified and intended to be part of the same arbitrage operation. The bonds acquired on both August 13, 1957, and November 1, 1957, are, on the basis of all the facts and circumstances, substantially identical to the common stock of X Corporation. On December 1, 1957, A closes the short sale with 100 shares of common stock of X Corporation acquired on that day. The holding period of the bonds acquired on November 1, by application of rule (2) of paragraph (c)(2) of this section, will be deemed to begin on December 1 and the holding period of the bonds acquired on August 13 will be unaffected. If, instead of purchasing the 100 shares of common stock of X Corporation on December 1, 1957, A had converted the bonds acquired on November 1 into common stock and, on December 1, 1957, used the stock so acquired to close the short sale, rule (2) of paragraph (c)(2) of this section would similarly have no effect on the holding period of the bonds acquired on August 13.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that A, on December 1, sells the bonds acquired on November 1 (or converts such bonds into common stock and sells the stock), but does not close the short sale. The sale of the bonds (or stock) creates a net short position in assets acquired for arbitrage operations which is deemed to be a short sale made on December 1. Accordingly, the holding period of the bonds acquired on August 13 will, by application of rule (2) of paragraph (c)(2) of this section, begin on the date such short sale is closed or on the date of sale, gift, or other disposition of such bonds, whichever date occurs first.

(2) Right to receive or acquire property.

(i) For purposes of section 1233(f) (1) and (2) and subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, a taxpayer will be deemed to hold substantially identical property acquired for arbitrage operations at the close of any business day if, by virtue of the ownership of other property acquired for arbitrage operations (whether or not substantially identical) or because of any contract entered into by the taxpayer in an arbitrage operation, he then has the right to receive or acquire such substantially identical property.

(ii) The application of section 1233(f)(3) and subdivision (i) of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: A acquires on August 13, 1957, 100 shares of common stock of X Corporation for purposes other than arbitrage operations. On November 1, A sells short, in a transaction identified and intended to be part of an arbitrage operation, 100 shares of X common stock. On the same day, in a transaction also identified and intended to be part of the same arbitrage operation, A contracts to purchase 100 shares of preferred stock of X. The preferred stock of X may be converted into common stock of X on the basis of one share of preferred stock for one share of common stock. The preferred stock is not actually delivered to A until November 3. Since A has contracted before the close of business on the date of the short sale, as part of an arbitrage operation, to purchase property by virtue of which he has the right to receive or acquire substantially identical property to that sold short, he will be deemed, for purposes of section 1233(f) (1) and (2), to hold such substantially identical property at the close of business on the date of the short sale. For purposes of this subparagraph, it is immaterial whether, on the basis of all the facts and circumstances, the preferred stock of X is substantially identical to the common stock of X. The short sale on November 1 does not affect the holding period of the 100 shares of X Corporation common stock purchased on August 13, 1957. Because of the operation of rule (2) of paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the holding period of the preferred stock acquired as the result of A's contract to purchase it as part of an arbitrage operation (or the common stock which A acquires by conversion of such preferred stock into common stock) will not begin until the short sale entered into in the arbitrage operation is closed.

(3) Definition of arbitrage operations. For the purpose of section 1233(f), arbitrage operations are transactions involving the purchase and sale of property entered into for the purpose of profiting from a current difference between the price of the property purchased and the price of the property sold. Assets acquired for arbitrage operations include only stocks and securities and rights to acquire stocks and securities. The property purchased may be either identical to the property sold or, if not so identical, such that its acquisition will entitle the taxpayer to acquire property which is so identical. Thus, the purchase of bonds or preferred stock convertible, at the holder's option, into common stock and the short sale of the common stock which may be acquired therefor, or the purchase of stock rights and the short sale of the stock to be acquired on the exercise of such rights, may qualify as arbitrage operations. A transaction will qualify as an arbitrage operation under section 1233(f) only if the taxpayer properly identifies the transaction as an arbitrage operation on his records as soon as he is able to do so. Such identification must ordinarily be entered in the taxpayer's records on the day of the transaction. Property acquired in a transaction properly identified as part of an arbitrage operation is the only property which will be deemed acquired for an arbitrage operation. The provisions of section 1233(f) and this paragraph shall continue to apply to property acquired in a transaction properly identified as an arbitrage operation although, because of subsequent events, e.g., a change in the value of bonds so acquired or of stock into which such bonds may be converted, the taxpayer sells such property outright rather than using it to complete the arbitrage operation.

(4) Effective date of section 1233(f). Section 1233(f), relating to arbitrage operations involving short sales of property, is effective only with respect to taxable years ending after August 12, 1955, and only with respect to short sales made after such date.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12011, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 6494, 25 FR 9372, Sept. 30, 1960; T.D. 6926, 32 FR 11468, Aug. 9, 1967; T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980]

§ 1.1233-2 Hedging transactions.

The character of gain or loss on a short sale that is (or is identified as being) part of a hedging transaction is determined under the rules of § 1.1221-2.

[T.D. 8555, 59 FR 36367, July 18, 1994]

§ 1.1234-1 Options to buy or sell.

(a) Sale or exchange

(1) Capital assets. Gain or loss from the sale or exchange of an option (or privilege) to buy or sell property which is (or if acquired would be) a capital asset in the hands of the taxpayer holding the option is considered as gain or loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset (unless, under the provisions of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the gain or loss is subject to the provisions of section 1231). The period for which the taxpayer has held the option determines whether the capital gain or loss is short-term or long-term.

(2) Section 1231 transactions. Gain or loss from the sale or exchange of an option to buy or sell property is considered a gain or loss subject to the provisions of section 1231 if, had the sale or exchange been of the property subject to the option, held by the taxpayer for the length of time he held the option, the sale or exchange would have been subject to the provisions of section 1231.

(3) Other property. Gain or loss from the sale or exchange of an option to buy or sell property which is not (or if acquired would not be) a capital asset in the hands of the taxpayer holding the option is considered ordinary income or loss (unless under the provisions of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the gain or loss is subject to the provisions of section 1231).

(b) Failure to exercise option. If the holder of an option to buy or sell property incurs a loss on failure to exercise the option, the option is deemed to have been sold or exchanged on the date that it expired. Any such loss to the holder of an option is treated under the general rule provided in paragraph (a) of this section. In general, any gain to the grantor of an option arising from the failure of the holder to exercise it, and any gain or loss realized by the grantor of an option as a result of a closing transaction, such as repurchasing the option from the holder, is considered ordinary income or loss. However, for the treatment of gain or loss from a closing transaction with respect to or gain on the lapse of an option granted in stock, securities, commodities or commodity futures, see section 1234(b) and § 1.1234-3. For special rules for grantors of straddles applicable to certain options granted on or before September 1, 1976, see § 1.1234-2.

(c) Certain options to sell property at a fixed price. Section 1234 does not apply to a loss on the failure to exercise an option to sell property at a fixed price which is acquired on the same day on which the property identified as intended to be used in exercising the option is acquired. Such a loss is not recognized, but the cost of the option is added to the basis of the property with which it is identified. See section 1233(c) and the regulations thereunder.

(d) Dealers in options to buy or sell. Any gain or loss realized by a dealer in options from the sale or exchange or an option to buy or sell property is considered ordinary income or loss under paragraph (a)(3) of this section. A dealer in options to buy or sell property is considered a dealer in the property subject to the option.

(e) Other exceptions. Section 1234 does not apply to gain resulting from the sale or exchange of an option:

(1) To the extent that the gain is in the nature of compensation (see sections 61 and 421, and the regulations thereunder, relating to employee stock options);

(2) If the option is treated as section 306 stock (see section 306 and the regulations thereunder, relating to dispositions of certain stock); or

(3) To the extent that the gain is a distribution of earnings or profits taxable as a dividend (see section 301 and the regulations thereunder, relating to distributions of property).

(4) Acquired by the taxpayer before March 1, 1954, if in the hands of the taxpayer such option is a capital asset (whether or not the property to which the option relates is, or would be if acquired by the taxpayer, a capital asset in the hands of the taxpayer).

(f) Limitations on effect of section. Losses to which section 1234 applies are subject to the limitations on losses under sections 165(c) and 1211 when applicable. Section 1234 does not permit the deduction of any loss which is disallowed under any other provision of law. In addition, section 1234 does not apply to an option to lease property, but does apply to an option to buy or sell a lease. Thus, an option to obtain all the right, title, and interest of a lessee in leased property is subject to the provisions of section 1234, but an option to obtain a sublease from the lessee is not. Furthermore, if section 1234 applies to an option to buy or sell a lease, it is the character the lease itself, if acquired, would have in the hands of the taxpayer, and not the character of the property leased, which determines the treatment of gain or loss experienced by the taxpayer with respect to such an option.

(g) Examples. The rules set forth in this section may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A taxpayer is considering buying a new house for his residence and acquires an option to buy a certain house at a fixed price. Although the property goes up in value, the taxpayer decides he does not want the house for his residence and sells the option for more than he paid for it. The gain which taxpayer realized is a capital gain since the property, if acquired, would have been a capital asset in his hands.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that the property goes down in value, and the taxpayer decides not to purchase the house. He sells the option at a loss. While this is a capital loss under section 1234, it is not a deductible loss because of the provisions of section 165(c).

Example 3. A dealer in industrial property acquires an option to buy an industrial site and fails to exercise the option. The loss is an ordinary loss since he would have held the property for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his trade or business if he had acquired it.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12013, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 7652, 44 FR 62282, Oct. 30, 1979]

§ 1.1234-2 Special rule for grantors of straddles applicable to certain options granted on or before September 1, 1976.

(a) In general. Section 1234(c)(1) provides a special rule applicable in the case of gain on the lapse of an option granted by the taxpayer as part of a straddle. In such a case, the gain shall be deemed to be gain from the sale or exchange of a capital asset held for not more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977) on the day that the option expired. Thus, such gain shall be treated as a short-term capital gain, as defined in section 1222(1). Section 1234(c)(1) does not apply to any person who holds securities (including options to acquire or sell securities) for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his trade or business.

(b) Definitions. The following definitions apply for purposes of section 1234(c) and this section.

(1) Straddle. The term straddle means a simultaneously granted combination of an option to buy (i.e., a call) and an option to sell (i.e., a put) the same quantity of a security at the same price during the same period of time.

(2) Security. The term security has the meaning assigned to such term by section 1236(c) and the regulations thereunder. Thus, for example, the term security does not include commodity futures.

(3) Grantor. The term grantor means the writer or issuer of the option contracts making up the straddle.

(4) Multiple option. The term multiple option means a simultaneously granted combination of an option to buy plus an option to sell plus one or more additional options to buy or sell a security.

(c) Special rules in the case of a multiple option.

(1) If, in the case of a multiple option, the number of the options to sell and the number of the options to buy are the same and if the terms of all of the options are identical (as to the quantity of the security, price, and period of time), then each of the options contained in the multiple option shall be deemed to be a component of a straddle for purposes of section 1234(c)(1) and paragraph (a) of this section.

(2) If, in the case of a multiple option, the number of the options to sell and the number of the options to buy are not the same or if the terms of all of the options are not identical (as to the quantity of the security, price, and period of time), then section 1234(c)(1) applies to gain on the lapse of an option granted as part of the multiple option only if:

(i) The grantor of the multiple option identifies the two options which comprise each straddle contained in the multiple option in the manner prescribed in subparagraph (3) of this paragraph; or

(ii) It is clear from the facts and circumstances that the lapsed option was part of a straddle. See example (6) of paragraph (f) of this section. A multiple option to which this subdivision applies may not be regarded as consisting of a number of straddles which exceeds the lesser of the options to sell or the options to buy as the case may be. For example, if a multiple option of five puts and four calls is granted it may not be regarded as consisting of more than four straddles, although the particular facts and circumstances could dictate that the option consists of less than four straddles.

(3) The identification required under subparagraph (2)(i) of this paragraph shall be made by the grantor indicating in his records, to the extent feasible, the individual serial number of, or other characteristic symbol imprinted upon, each of the two individual options which comprise the straddle, or by adopting any other method of identification satisfactory to the Commissioner. Such identification must be made before the expiration of the 15th day after the day on which the multiple option is granted. The preceding sentence shall apply only with respect to multiple options granted after January 24, 1972. In computing the 15-day period prescribed by this paragraph, the first day of such period is the day following the day on which the multiple option is granted.

(d) Allocation of premium. The allocation of a premium received for a straddle or a multiple option between or among the component options thereof shall be made on the basis of the relative market value of such component options at the time of their issuance or on any other reasonable and consistently applied basis which is acceptable to the Commissioner.

(e) Effective date

(1) In general. This section, relating to special rules for grantors of straddles, shall apply only with respect to straddle transactions entered into after January 25, 1965, and before September 2, 1976.

(2) Special rule. For a special rule with respect to the identification of a straddle granted as part of a multiple option, see paragraph (c).

(f) Illustrations. The application of section 1234(c) and this section may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On February 1, 1971, taxpayer A, who files his income tax returns on a calendar year basis, issues a straddle for 100 shares of X Corporation stock and receives a premium of $1,000. The options comprising the straddle were to expire on August 10, 1971. A has allocated $450 (45 percent of $1,000) of the premium to the put and $550 (55 percent of $1,000) to the call. On March 1, 1971, B, the holder of the put, exercises his option. C, the holder of the call, fails to exercise his option prior to its expiration. As a result of C's failure to exercise his option, A realizes a short-term capital gain of $550 (that part of the premium allocated to the call) on August 10, 1971.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that C exercises his call on March 1, 1971, and B fails to exercise his put prior to its expiration. As a result of B's failure to exercise his option, A realizes a short-term capital gain of $450 (that part of the premium allocated to the put) on August 10, 1971.

Example 3. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that both B and C fail to exercise their respective options. As a result of the failure of B and C to exercise their options, A realizes short-term capital gains of $1,000 (the premium for granting the straddle) on August 10, 1971.

Example 4. On March 1, 1971, taxpayer D issues a multiple option containing five puts and five calls. Each put and each call is for the same number of shares of Y Corporation stock, at the same price, and for the same period of time. Thus, each of the puts and calls is deemed to be a component part of a straddle. The puts and calls comprising the multiple option were to expire on September 10, 1971. All of the puts are exercised, and all of the calls lapse. As a result of the lapse of the calls, D realizes a short-term capital gain on September 10, 1971, in the amount of that part of the premium for the multiple option which is allocable to all of the calls.

Example 5. Assume the same facts as in example (4) except that one of the puts and two of the calls lapse and the remaining puts and calls are exercised. As a result, on September 10, 1971, D realizes a short-term capital gain in the amount of that part of the premium for the multiple option which is allocable to both of the lapsed calls and the lapsed put.

Example 6. On March 1, 1971, taxpayer E issues a multiple option containing five puts and four calls. Each put and call is for the same number of shares of Y Corporation stock at the same price and for the same period of time, E does not identify the puts and calls as parts of straddles in the manner prescribed in paragraph (c)(3) of this section. However, because the terms of all of the puts and all of the calls are identical four of the puts and four of the calls are deemed to be a component part of a straddle. The puts and calls comprising the multiple option were to expire on September 10, 1971. Four of the puts are exercised and the four calls and one of the puts lapse. As a result, on September 10, 1971, E realizes short-term capital gain in the amount of that part of the premium for the multiple option which is allocable to the four lapsed calls and realizes ordinary income in the amount of that part of such premium which is allocable to the lapsed put. If E had identified four of the puts and four of the calls as constituting parts of straddles in the manner prescribed in paragraph (c)(3) of this section and the put that lapsed constituted part of a straddle, then the gain on the lapse of the put would also be short-term capital gain.

Example 7.

Assume the same facts as in example (6) except that two of the puts are for Y Corporation stock at a price which is greater than that of the other puts and the other calls and that two of the calls expire on October 10, 1971. Additionally, assume that the put which lapses is at the lower price. The two puts offering the Y Corporation stock at the greater price and the two calls with the later expiration date cannot be deemed to be component parts of a straddle. Thus, only two of the puts and two of the calls are deemed to be a component part of a straddle. As a result, E realizes income as follows:

(i) On September 10, 1971, short-term capital gain in the amount of that part of the premium for the multiple option which is allocable to the two lapsed calls with the expiration date of September 10, 1971, and ordinary income in the amount of that part of such premium which is allocable to the lapsed put. If E had identified two of the puts at the lower price and the two calls with the expiration date of September 10, 1971, as constituting parts of straddles in the manner prescribed in paragraph (c)(3) of this section and if the put that lapsed was one of those identified as constituting a part of a straddle, then the gain on the lapse of that put would also be short-term capital gain.

(ii) On October 10, 1971, ordinary income in the amount of that part of the premium for the multiple option which is allocable to the lapsed calls with an expiration date of October 10, 1971.

[T.D. 7152, 36 FR 24801, Dec. 23, 1971, as amended by T.D. 7210, 37 FR 20688, Oct. 3, 1972; T.D. 7652, 44 FR 62282, Oct. 30, 1979; 44 FR 67657, Nov. 27, 1979; T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980]

§ 1.1234-3 Special rules for the treatment of grantors of certain options granted after September 1, 1976.

(a) In general. In the case of the grantor of an option (including an option granted as part of a straddle or multiple option), gain of loss from any closing transaction with respect to, and gain on the lapse of, an option in property shall be treated as a gain or loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset held not more than 1 year. (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977).

(b) Definitions. The following definitions apply for purposes of this section.

(1) The term closing transaction means any termination of a grantor's obligation under an option to buy property (a call) or an option to sell property (a put) other than through the exercise or lapse of the option. For example, the grantor of a call may effectively terminate his obligation under the option by either:

(i) Repurchasing the option from the holder or

(ii) Purchasing from an options exchange a call with terms identical to the original option granted and designating the purchase as a closing transaction.

A put or call purchased to make a closing transaction is identical as to striking price and expiration date. Such put or call need not match the granted option in time of creation, date of acquisition, cost of the entire option or units therein, or number of units subject to the option. If such put or call terminates only part of a grantor's obligation under the granted option, a closing transaction is made as to that part.

(2) The term property means stocks and securities (including stocks and securities dealt with on a when issued basis), commodities, and commodity futures.

(3) The term grantor means the writer or issuer of an option.

(4) The term straddle means a simultaneously granted combination of an option to buy and an option to sell the same quantity of property at the same price during the same period of time.

(5) The term multiple option means a simultaneously granted combination of an option to buy plus an option to sell plus one or more additional options to buy or sell property.

(c) Nonapplicability to broker-dealers. The provisions of this section do not apply to any option granted in the ordinary course of the taxpayer's trade or business of granting options. However, the provisions of this section do apply to:

(1) Gain from any closing transaction with respect to an option and gain on lapse of an option if gain on the sale or exchange of the option would be considered capital gain by a dealer in securities under section 1236(a) and the regulations thereunder, and

(2) Loss from any closing transaction with respect to an option if loss on the sale or exchange of the option would not be considered ordinary loss by a dealer in securities under section 1236(b) and the regulations thereunder.

The preceding sentence shall be applied with respect to dealers in property (as defined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section) and without regard to the limitation of the applicability of section 1236 to dealers in securities.

(d) Nonapplicability to compensatory options. Section 1234 does not apply to options to purchase stock or other property which are issued as compensation for services, as described in sections 61, 83, and 421 and the regulations thereunder.

(e) Premium allocation for simultaneously granted options. The allocation of a premium received for a straddle or multiple option between or among the component options thereof shall be made on the basis of the relative market value of the component options at the time of their issuance or on any other reasonable and consistently applied basis which is acceptable to the Commissioner.

(f) Effective date. This section, relating to special rules for the treatment of grantors of certain options, shall apply to options granted after September 1, 1976.

[T.D. 7652, 44 FR 62282, Oct. 30, 1979; 44 FR 67657, Nov. 27, 1979]

§ 1.1234-4 Hedging transactions.

The character of gain or loss on an acquired or a written option that is (or is identified as being) part of a hedging transaction is determined under the rules of § 1.1221-2.

[T.D. 8555, 59 FR 36367, July 18, 1994]

§ 1.1235-1 Sale or exchange of patents.

(a) General rule. Section 1235 provides that a transfer (other than by gift, inheritance, or devise) of all substantial rights to a patent, or of an undivided interest in all such rights to a patent, by a holder to a person other than a related person constitutes the sale or exchange of a capital asset held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977), whether or not payments therefor are:

(1) Payable periodically over a period generally coterminous with the transferee's use of the patent, or

(2) Contingent on the productivity, use, or disposition of the property transferred.

(b) Scope of section 1235. If a transfer is not one described in paragraph (a) of this section, section 1235 shall be disregarded in determining whether or not such transfer is the sale or exchange of a capital asset. For example, a transfer by a person other than a holder or a transfer by a holder to a related person is not governed by section 1235. The tax consequences of such transfers shall be determined under other provisions of the internal revenue laws.

(c) Special rules

(1) Payments for infringement. If section 1235 applies to the transfer of all substantial rights to a patent (or an undivided interest therein), amounts received in settlement of, or as the award of damages in, a suit for compensatory damages for infringement of the patent shall be considered payments attributable to a transfer to which section 1235 applies to the extent that such amounts relate to the interest transferred. For taxable years beginning before January 1, 1964, see section 1304, as in effect before such date, and § 1.1304A-1 for treatment of compensatory damages for patent infringement.

(2) Payments to an employee. Payments received by an employee as compensation for services rendered as an employee under an employment contract requiring the employee to transfer to the employer the rights to any invention by such employee are not attributable to a transfer to which section 1235 applies. However, whether payments received by an employee from his employer (under an employment contract or otherwise) are attributable to the transfer by the employee of all substantial rights to a patent (or an undivided interest therein) or are compensation for services rendered the employer by the employee is a question of fact. In determining which is the case, consideration shall be given not only to all the facts and circumstances of the employment relationship but also to whether the amount of such payments depends upon the production, sale, or use by, or the value to, the employer of the patent rights transferred by the employee. If it is determined that payments are attributable to the transfer of patent rights, and all other requirements under section 1235 are met, such payments shall be treated as proceeds derived from the sale of a patent.

(3) Successive transfers. The applicability of section 1235 to transfers of undivided interest in patents, or to successive transfers of such rights, shall be determined separately with respect to each transfer. For example, X, who is a holder, and Y, who is not a holder, transfer their respective two-thirds and one-third undivided interests in a patent to Z. Assume the transfer by X qualifies under section 1235 and that X in a later transfer acquires all the rights with respect to Y's interest, including the rights to payments from Z. One-third of all the payments thereafter received by X from Z are not attributable to a transfer to which section 1235 applies.

(d) Payor's treatment of payments in a transfer under section 1235. Payments made by the transferee of patent rights pursuant to a transfer satisfying the requirements of section 1235 are payments of the purchase price for the patent rights and are not the payment of royalties.

(e) Effective date. Amounts received or accrued, and payments made or accrued, during any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1953 and ending after August 16, 1954, pursuant to a transfer satisfying the requirements of section 1235, whether such transfer occurred in a taxable year to which the Internal Revenue Code of 1954 applies, or in a year prior thereto, are subject to the provisions of section 1235.

(f) Nonresident aliens. For the special rule relating to nonresident aliens who have gains arising from a transfer to which section 1235 applies, see section 871 and the regulations thereunder. For withholding of tax from income of nonresident aliens, see section 1441 and the regulations thereunder.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12014, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 6885, 31 FR 7803, June 2, 1966; T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980]

§ 1.1235-2 Definition of terms.

For the purposes of section 1235 and § 1.1235-1:

(a) Patent. The term patent means a patent granted under the provisions of title 35 of the United States Code, or any foreign patent granting rights generally similar to those under a United States patent. It is not necessary that the patent or patent application for the invention be in existence if the requirements of section 1235 are otherwise met.

(b) All substantial rights to a patent.

(1) The term all substantial rights to a patent means all rights (whether or not then held by the grantor) which are of value at the time the rights to the patent (or an undivided interest therein) are transferred. The term all substantial rights to a patent does not include a grant of rights to a patent:

(i) Which is limited geographically within the country of issuance;

(ii) Which is limited in duration by the terms of the agreement to a period less than the remaining life of the patent;

(iii) Which grants rights to the grantee, in fields of use within trades or industries, which are less than all the rights covered by the patent, which exist and have value at the time of the grant; or

(iv) Which grants to the grantee less than all the claims or inventions covered by the patent which exist and have value at the time of the grant.

The circumstances of the whole transaction, rather than the particular terminology used in the instrument of transfer, shall be considered in determining whether or not all substantial rights to a patent are transferred in a transaction.

(2) Rights which are not considered substantial for purposes of section 1235 may be retained by the holder. Examples of such rights are:

(i) The retention by the transferor of legal title for the purpose of securing performance or payment by the transferee in a transaction involving transfer of an exclusive license to manufacture, use, and sell for the life of the patent;

(ii) The retention by the transferor of rights in the property which are not inconsistent with the passage of ownership, such as the retention of a security interest (such as a vendor's lien), or a reservation in the nature of a condition subsequent (such as a provision for forfeiture on account of nonperformance).

(3) Examples of rights which may or may not be substantial, depending upon the circumstances of the whole transaction in which rights to a patent are transferred, are:

(i) The retention by the transferor of an absolute right to prohibit sublicensing or subassignment by the transferee;

(ii) The failure to convey to the transferee the right to use or to sell the patent property.

(4) The retention of a right to terminate the transfer at will is the retention of a substantial right for the purposes of section 1235.

(c) Undivided interest. A person owns an undivided interest in all substantial rights to a patent when he owns the same fractional share of each and every substantial right to the patent. It does not include, for example, a right to the income from a patent, or a license limited geographically, or a license which covers some, but not all, of the valuable claims or uses covered by the patent. A transfer limited in duration by the terms of the instrument to a period less than the remaining life of the patent is not a transfer of an undivided interest in all substantial rights to a patent.

(d) Holder.

(1) The term holder means any individual:

(i) Whose efforts created the patent property and who would qualify as the original and first inventor, or joint inventor, within the meaning of title 35 U.S.C., or

(ii) Who has acquired his interest in the patent property in exchange for a consideration paid to the inventor in money or money's worth prior to the actual reduction of the invention to practice (see paragraph (e) of this section), provided that such individual was neither the employer of the inventor nor related to him (see paragraph (f) of this section). The requirement that such individual is neither the employer of the inventor nor related to him must be satisfied at the time when the substantive rights as to the interest to be acquired are determined, and at the time when the consideration in money or money's worth to be paid is definitely fixed. For example, if prior to the actual reduction to practice of an invention an individual who is neither the employer of the inventor nor related to him agrees to pay the inventor a sum of money definitely fixed as to amount in return for an undivided one-half interest in rights to a patent and at a later date, when such individual has become the employer of the inventor, he pays the definitely fixed sum of money pursuant to the earlier agreement, such individual will not be denied the status of a holder because of such employment relationship.

(2) Although a partnership cannot be a holder, each member of a partnership who is an individual may qualify as a holder as to his share of a patent owned by the partnership. For example, if an inventor who is a member of a partnership composed solely of individuals uses partnership property in the development of his invention with the understanding that the patent when issued will become partnership property, each of the inventor's partners during this period would qualify as a holder. If, in this example, the partnership were not composed solely of individuals, nevertheless, each of the individual partners' distributive shares of income attributable to the transfer of all substantial rights to the patent or an undivided interest therein, would be considered proceeds from the sale or exchange of a capital asset held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977).

(3) An individual may qualify as a holder whether or not he is in the business of making inventions or in the business of buying and selling patents.

(e) Actual reduction to practice. For the purposes of determining whether an individual is a holder under paragraph (d) of this section, the term actual reduction to practice has the same meaning as it does under section 102(g) of title 35 of the United States Code. Generally, an invention is reduced to actual practice when it has been tested and operated successfully under operating conditions. This may occur either before or after application for a patent but cannot occur later than the earliest time that commercial exploitation of the invention occurs.

(f) Related person.

(1) The term related person means one whose relationship to another person at the time of the transfer is described in section 267(b), except that the term does not include a brother or sister, whether of the whole or the half blood. Thus, if a holder transfers all his substantial rights to a patent to his brother or sister, or both, such transfer is not to a related person.

(2) If, prior to September 3, 1958, a holder transferred all his substantial rights to a patent to a corporation in which he owned more than 50 percent in value of the outstanding stock, he is considered as having transferred such rights to a related person for the purpose of section 1235. On the other hand, if a holder, prior to September 3, 1958, transferred all his substantial rights to a patent to a corporation in which he owned 50 percent or less in value of the outstanding stock and his brother owned the remaining stock, he is not considered as having transferred such rights to a related person since the brother relationship is to be disregarded for purposes of section 1235.

(3) If, subsequent to September 2, 1958, a holder transfers all his substantial rights to a patent to a corporation in which he owns 25 percent or more in value of the outstanding stock, he is considered as transferring such rights to a related person for the purpose of section 1235. On the other hand if a holder, subsequent to September 2, 1958, transfers all his substantial rights to a patent to a corporation in which he owns less than 25 percent in value of the outstanding stock and his brother owns the remaining stock, he is not considered as transferring such rights to a related person since the brother relationship is to be disregarded for purposes of section 1235.

(4) If a relationship described in section 267(b) exists independently of family status, the brother-sister exception, described in subparagraphs (1), (2), and (3) of this paragraph, does not apply. Thus, if a holder transfers all his substantial rights to a patent to the fiduciary of a trust of which the holder is the grantor, the holder and the fiduciary are related persons for purposes of section 1235(d). (See section 267(b)(4).) The transfer, therefore, would not qualify under section 1235(a). This result obtains whether or not the fiduciary is the brother or sister of the holder since the disqualifying relationship exists because of the grantor-fiduciary status and not because of family status.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12014, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 6852, 30 FR 12730, Oct. 6, 1965; T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980]

§ 1.1236-1 Dealers in securities.

(a) Capital gains. Section 1236(a) provides that gain realized by a dealer in securities from the sale or exchange of a security (as defined in paragraph (c) of this section) shall not be considered as gain from the sale or exchange of a capital asset unless:

(1) The security is, before the expiration of the thirtieth day after the date of its acquisition, clearly identified in the dealer's records as a security held for investment or, if acquired before October 20, 1951, was so identified before November 20, 1951; and

(2) The security is not held by the dealer primarily for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his trade or business at any time after the identification referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph has been made.

Unless both of these requirements are met, the gain is considered as gain from the sale of assets held by the dealer primarily for sale to customers in the course of his business.

(b) Ordinary losses. Section 1236(b) provides that a loss sustained by a dealer in securities from the sale or exchange of a security shall not be considered a loss from the sale or exchange of property which is not a capital asset if at any time after November 19, 1951, the security has been clearly identified in the dealer's records as a security held for investment. Once a security has been identified after November 19, 1951, as being held by the dealer for investment, it shall retain that character for purposes of determining loss on its ultimate disposition, even though at the time of its disposition the dealer holds it primarily for sale to his customers in the ordinary course of his business. However, section 1236 has no application to the extent that section 582(c) applies to losses of banks.

(c) Definitions

(1) Security. For the purposes of this section, the term security means any share of stock in any corporation, any certificate of stock or interest in any corporation, any note, bond, debenture, or other evidence of indebtedness, or any evidence of any interest in, or right to subscribe to or purchase, any of the foregoing.

(2) Dealer in securities. For definition of a dealer in securities, see the regulations under section 471.

(d) Identification of security in dealer's records.

(1) A security is clearly identified in the dealer's records as a security held for investment when there is an accounting separation of the security from other securities, as by making appropriate entries in the dealer's books of account to distinguish the security from inventories and to designate it as an investment and by

(i) indicating with such entries, to the extent feasible, the individual serial number of, or other characteristic symbol imprinted upon, the individual security, or

(ii) adopting any other method of identification satisfactory to the Commissioner.

(2) In computing the 30-day period prescribed by section 1236(a), the first day of the period is the day following the date of acquisition. Thus, in the case of a security acquired on March 18, 1957, the 30-day period expires at midnight on April 17, 1957.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12015, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 6726, 29 FR 5667, Apr. 29, 1964]

§ 1.1237-1 Real property subdivided for sale.

(a) General rule

(1) Introductory. This section provides a special rule for determining whether the taxpayer holds real property primarily for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his business under section 1221(1). This rule is to permit taxpayers qualifying under it to sell real estate from a single tract held for investment without the income being treated as ordinary income merely because of subdividing the tract or of active efforts to sell it. The rule is not applicable to dealers in real estate or to corporations, except a corporation making such sales in a taxable year beginning after December 3l, 1954, if such corporation qualifies under the provisions of paragraph (c)(5)(iv) of this section.

(2) When subdividing and selling activities are to be disregarded. When its conditions are met, section 1237 provides that if there is no other substantial evidence that a taxpayer holds real estate primarily for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his business, he shall not be considered a real estate dealer holding it primarily for sale merely because he has (i) subdivided the tract into lots (or parcels) and (ii) engaged in advertising, promotion, selling activities or the use of sales agents in connection with the sale of lots in such subdivision. Such subdividing and selling activities shall be disregarded in determining the purpose for which the taxpayer held real property sold from a subdivision whenever it is the only substantial evidence indicating that the taxpayer has ever held the real property sold primarily for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his business.

(3) When subdividing and selling activities are to be taken into account. When other substantial evidence tends to show that the taxpayer held real property for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his business, his activities in connection with the subdivision and sale of the property sold shall be taken into account in determining the purpose for which the taxpayer held both the subdivided property and any other real property. For example, such other evidence may consist of the taxpayer's selling activities in connection with other property in prior years during which he was engaged in subdividing or selling activities with respect to the subdivided tract, his intention in prior years (or at the time of acquiring the property subdivided) to hold the tract primarily for sale in his business, his subdivision of other tracts in the same year, his holding other real property for sale to customers in the same year, or his construction of a permanent real estate office which he could use in selling other real property. On the other hand, if the only evidence of the taxpayer's purpose in holding real property consisted of not more than one of the following, in the year in question, such fact would not be considered substantial other evidence:

(i) Holding a real estate dealer's license;

(ii) Selling other real property which was clearly investment property;

(iii) Acting as a salesman for a real estate dealer, but without any financial interest in the business; or

(iv) Mere ownership of other vacant real property without engaging in any selling activity whatsoever with respect to it.

If more than one of the above exists, the circumstances may or may not constitute substantial evidence that the taxpayer held real property for sale in his business, depending upon the particular facts in each case.

(4) Section 1237 not exclusive.

(i) The rule in section 1237 is not exclusive in its application. Section 1237 has no application in determining whether or not real property is held by a taxpayer primarily for sale in his business if any requirement under the section is not met. Also, even though the conditions of section 1237 are met, the rules of section 1237 are not applicable if without regard to section 1237 the real property sold would not have been considered real property held primarily for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his business. Thus, the district director may at all times conclude from convincing evidence that the taxpayer held the real property solely as an investment. Furthermore, whether or not the conditions of section 1237 are met, the section has no application to losses realized upon the sale of realty from subdivided property.

(ii) If, owing solely to the application of section 1237, the real property sold is deemed not to have been held primarily for sale in the ordinary course of business, any gain realized upon such sale shall be treated as ordinary income to the extent provided in section 1237(b) (1) and (2) and paragraph (e) of this section. Any additional gain realized upon the sale shall be treated as gain arising from the sale of a capital asset or, if the circumstances so indicate, as gain arising from the sale of real property used in the trade or business as defined in section 1231 (b)(1). For the relationship between sections 1237 and 1231, see paragraph (f) of this section.

(5) Principal conditions of qualification. Before section 1237 applies, the taxpayer must meet three basic conditions, more fully explained later: He cannot have held any part of the tract at any time previously for sale in the ordinary course of his business, nor in the year of sale held any other real estate for sale to customers; he cannot make substantial improvements on the tract which increase the value of the lot sold substantially; and he must have owned the property 5 years, unless he inherited it. However, the taxpayer may make certain improvements if they are necessary to make the property marketable if he elects neither to add their cost to the basis of the property, or of any other property, nor to deduct the cost as an expense, and he has held the property at least 10 years. If the requirements of section 1237 are met, gain (but not more than 5 percent of the selling price of each lot) shall be treated as ordinary income in and after the year in which the sixth lot or parcel is sold.

(b) Disqualification arising from holding real property primarily for sale

(1) General rule. Section 1237 does not apply to any transaction if the taxpayer either:

(i) Held the lot sold (or the tract of which it was a part) primarily for sale in the ordinary course of his business in a prior year, or

(ii) Holds other real property primarily for sale in the ordinary course of his business in the same year in which such lot is sold.

Where either of these elements is present, section 1237 shall be disregarded in determining the proper treatment of any gain arising from such sale.

(2) Method of applying general rule. For purposes of this paragraph, in determining whether the lot sold was held primarily for sale in the ordinary course of business in a prior year, the principles of section 1237 shall be applied, whether or not section 1237 was effective for such prior year, if the sale of the lot occurs after December 31, 1953, or, in the case of a corporation meeting the requirements of paragraph (c)(5)(iv) of this section, if the sale of the lot occurs in a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1954. Whether, on the other hand, the taxpayer holds other real property for sale in the ordinary course of his business in the same year such lot was sold shall be determined without regard to the application of section 1237 to such other real property.

(3) Attribution rules with respect to the holding of property. The taxpayer is considered as holding property which he owns individually, jointly, or as a member of a partnership. He is not generally considered as holding property owned by members of his family, an estate or trust, or a corporation. See, however, paragraph (c)(5) (iv)(c) of this section for an exception to this rule. The purpose for which a prior owner held the lot or tract, or his activities, are immaterial except to the extent they indicate the purpose for which the taxpayer has held the lot or tract. See paragraph (d) of this section for rules relating to the determination of the period for which the property is held. The principles of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: A dealer in real property held a tract of land for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his business for 5 years. He then made a gift of it to his son. As a result of the operation of section 1223(2) the son will have held the property for the period of time required by section 1237. However, he will not qualify for the benefits of section 1237 because, there being no evidence to the contrary, the circumstances involved establish that the son holds the property for sale to customers, as did his father.

(c) Disqualification arising from substantial improvements

(1) General rule. Section 1237 will not apply if the taxpayer or certain others make improvements on the tract which are substantial and which substantially increase the value of the lot sold. Certain improvements are not substantial within the meaning of section 1237(a)(2) if they are necessary to make the lot marketable at the prevailing local price and meet the other conditions of section 1237(b)(3). See subparagraph (5) of this paragraph.

(2) Improvements made or deemed to be made by the taxpayer. Certain improvements made by the taxpayer or made under a contract of sale between the taxpayer and the buyer make section 1237 inapplicable.

(i) For the purposes of section 1237 (a)(2) the taxpayer is deemed to have made any improvements on the tract while he held it which are made by:

(a) The taxpayer's whole or half brothers and sisters, spouse, ancestors and lineal descendants.

(b) A corporation controlled by the taxpayer. A corporation is controlled by the taxpayer if he controls, as the result of direct ownership, constructive ownership, or otherwise, more than 50 percent of the corporation's voting stock.

(c) A partnership of which the taxpayer was a member at the time the improvements were made.

(d) A lessee if the improvement takes the place of a payment of rental income. See section 109 and the regulations thereunder.

(e) A Federal, State, or local government, or political subdivision thereof, if the improvement results in an increase in the taxpayer's basis for the property, as it would, for example, from a special tax assessment for paving streets.

(ii) The principles of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: A held a tract of land for 3 years during which he made substantial improvements thereon which substantially enhanced the value of every lot on the tract. A then made a gift of the tract to his son. The son made no further improvements on the tract but held it for 3 years and then sold several lots therefrom. The son is not entitled to the benefits of section 1237 since under section 1237(a)(2) he is deemed to have made the substantial improvements made by his father, and under section 1223(2) he is treated as having held the property for the period during which his father held it. Thus, the disqualifying improvements are deemed to have been made by the son while the tract was held by him. See paragraph (d) of this section for rules relating to the determination of the period for which the property is held.

(iii) The taxpayer is also charged with making any improvements made pursuant to a contract of sale entered into between the taxpayer and the buyer. Therefore, the buyer, as well as the taxpayer, may make improvements which prevent the application of section 1237.

(a) If a contract of sale obligates either the taxpayer or the buyer to make a substantial improvement which would substantially increase the value of the lot, the taxpayer may not claim the application of section 1237 unless the obligation to improve the lot ceases (for any reason other than that the improvement has been made) before or within the period, prescribed by section 6511, within which the taxpayer may file a claim for credit or refund of an overpayment of his tax on the gain from the sale of the lot. The following example illustrates this rule:

Example: In 1956, A sells several lots from a tract he has subdivided for sale. Section 1237 would apply to the sales of these lots except that in the contract of sale, A agreed to install sewers, hard surface roads, and other utilities which would increase the value of the lots substantially. If in 1957, instead of requiring the improvements, the buyer releases A from this obligation, A may then claim the application of section 1237 to the sale of lots in 1956 in computing his income tax for 1956, since the period of limitations in which A may file a claim for credit or refund of an overpayment of his 1956 income tax has not expired.

(b) An improvement is made pursuant to a contract if the contract imposes an obligation on either party to make the improvement, but not if the contract merely places restrictions on the improvements, if any, either party may make. The following example illustrates this rule:

Example: B sells several lots from a tract which he has subdivided. Each contract of sale prohibits the purchaser from building any structure on his lot except a personal residence costing $15,000 or more. Even if the purchasers build such residences, that does not preclude B from applying section 1237 to the sales of such lots, since the contracts did not obligate the purchasers to make any improvements.

(iv) Improvements made by a bona fide lessee (other than as rent) or by others not described in section 1237(a) (2) do not preclude the use of section 1237.

(3) When improvements substantially enhance the value of the lot sold. Before a substantial improvement will preclude the use of section 1237, it must substantially enhance the value of the lot sold.

(i) The increase in value to be considered is only the increase attributable to the improvement or improvements. Other changes in the market price of the lot, not arising from improvements made by the taxpayer, shall be disregarded. The difference between the value of the lot, including improvements, when the improvement has been completed and an appraisal of its value if unimproved at that time, will disclose the value added by the improvements.

(ii) Whether improvements have substantially increased the value of a lot depends upon the circumstances in each case. If improvements increase the value of a lot by 10 percent or less, such increase will not be considered as substantial, but if the value of the lot is increased by more than 10 percent, then all relevant factors must be considered to determine whether, under such circumstances, the increase is substantial.

(iii) Improvement may increase the value of some lots in a tract without equally affecting other lots in the same tract. Only the lots whose value was substantially increased are ineligible for application of the rule established by section 1237.

(4) When an improvement is substantial. To prevent the application of section 1237, the improvement itself must be substantial in character. Among the improvements considered substantial are shopping centers, other commercial or residential buildings, and the installation of hard surface roads or utilities such as sewers, water, gas, or electric lines. On the other hand a temporary structure used as a field office, surveying, filling, draining, leveling and clearing operations, and the construction of minimum all-weather access roads, including gravel roads where required by the climate, are not substantial improvements.

(5) Special rules relating to substantial improvements. Under certain conditions a taxpayer, including a corporation to which subdivision (iv) of this subparagraph applies, may obtain the benefits of section 1237 whether or not substantial improvements have been made. In addition, an individual taxpayer may, under certain circumstances elect to have substantial improvements treated as necessary and not substantial.

(i) When an improvement is not considered substantial. An improvement will not be considered substantial if all of the following conditions are met:

(a) The taxpayer has held the property for 10 years. The full 10-year period must elapse, whether or not the taxpayer inherited the property. Although the taxpayer must hold the property 10 years, he need not hold it for 10 years after subdividing it. See paragraph (d) of this section for rules relating to the determination of the period for which the property is held.

(b) The improvement consists of the building or installation of water, sewer, or drainage facilities (either surface, sub-surface, or both) or roads, including hard surface roads, curbs, and gutters.

(c) The district director with whom the taxpayer must file his return is satisfied that, without such improvement, the lot sold would not have brought the prevailing local price for similar building sites.

(d) The taxpayer elects, as provided in subdivision (iii) of this subparagraph, not to adjust the basis of the lot sold or any other property held by him for any part of the cost of such improvement attributable to such lot and not to deduct any part of such cost as an expense.

(ii) Meaning of similar building site. A similar building site is any real property in the immediate vicinity whose size, terrain, and other characteristics are comparable to the taxpayer's property. For the purpose of determining whether a tract is marketable at the prevailing local price for similar building sites, the taxpayer shall furnish the district director with sufficient evidence to enable him to compare

(a) the value of the taxpayer's property in an unimproved state with

(b) the amount for which similar building sites, improved by the installation of water, sewer, or drainage facilities or roads, have recently been sold, reduced by the present cost of such improvements. Such comparison may be made and expressed in terms of dollars per square foot, dollars per acre, or dollars per front foot, or in any other suitable terms depending upon the practice generally followed by real estate dealers in the taxpayer's locality. The taxpayer shall also furnish evidence, where possible, of the best bona fide offer received for the tract or a lot thereof just before making the improvement, to assist the district director in determining the value of the tract or lot if it had been sold in its unimproved state. The operation of this subdivision and subdivision (i) of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A has been offered $500 per acre for a tract without roads, water, or sewer facilities which he has owned for 15 years. The adjacent tract has been subdivided and improved with water facilities and hard surface roads, and has sold for $4,000 per acre. The estimated cost of roads and water facilities on the adjacent tract is $2,500 per acre. The prevailing local price for similar building sites in the vicinity would be $1,500 per acre (i.e., $4,000 less $2,500). If A installed roads and water facilities at a cost of $2,500 per acre, his tract would sell for approximately $4,000 per acre. Under section 1237(b)(3) the installation of roads and water facilities does not constitute a substantial improvement if A elects to disregard the cost of such improvements ($2,500 per acre) in computing his cost or other basis for the lots sold from the tract, and in computing his basis for any other property owned by him.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1) of this subdivision, except that A can obtain $1,600 per acre for his property without improvements. The installation of any substantial improvements would not constitute a necessary improvement under section 1237(b)(3), since the prevailing local price could have been obtained without any improvement.

Example 3. Assume the same facts as in example (1) of this subdivision, except that the adjacent tract has also been improved with sewer facilities, the present cost of which is $1,200 per acre. The installation of the substantial improvements would not constitute a necessary improvement under section 1237(b)(3) on A's part, since the prevailing local price ($4,000 less the sum of $1,200 plus $2,500, or $300) could have been obtained by A without any improvement.

(iii) Manner of making election. The election required by section 1237(b) (3)(C) shall be made as follows:

(a) The taxpayer shall submit:

(1) A plat showing the subdivision and all improvements attributable to him.

(2) A list of all improvements to the tract, showing:

(i) The cost of such improvements.

(ii) Which of the improvements, without regard to the election, he considers substantial and which he considers not substantial.

(iii) Those improvements which are substantial to which the election is to apply, with a fair allocation of their cost to each lot they affect, and the amount by which they have increased the values of such lots.

(iv) The date on which each lot was acquired and its basis for determining gain or loss, exclusive of the cost of any improvements listed in subdivision (iii) of this subdivision.

(3) A statement that he will neither deduct as an expense nor add to the basis of any lot sold, or of any other property, any portion of the cost of any substantial improvement which substantially increased the value of any lot in the tract and which either he listed pursuant to (a)(2)(iii) of this subdivision or which the district director deems substantial.

(b) The election and the information required under (a) of this subdivision shall be submitted to the district director:

(1) With the taxpayer's income tax return for the taxable year in which the lots subject to the election were sold, or

(2) In the case of a return filed prior to August 14, 1957, either with a timely claim for refund, where the benefits of section 1237 have not been claimed on such return, or, independently, before November 13, 1957, where such benefits have been claimed, or

(3) If there is an obligation to make disqualifying improvements outstanding when the taxpayer files his return, with a formal claim for refund at the time of the release of the obligation, if it is then still possible to file a timely claim.

(c) Once made, the election as to the necessary improvement costs attributable to any lot sold shall be irrevocable and binding on the taxpayer unless the district director assesses an income tax as to such lot as if it were held for sale in the ordinary course of taxpayer's business. Under such circumstances, in computing gain, the cost or other basis shall be computed without regard to section 1237.

(iv) Exceptions with respect to necessary improvements and certain corporations. For taxable years beginning after December 31, 1954, individual taxpayers and certain corporations may obtain the benefits of section 1237 without complying with the provisions of subdivisions (i) (c) and (d), (ii), and (iii) of this subparagraph if the requirements of section 1237 are otherwise met and if:

(a) The property in question was acquired by the taxpayer through the foreclosure of a lien thereon,

(b) The lien foreclosed secured the payment of an indebtedness to the taxpayer or (in the case of a corporation) secured the payment of an indebtedness to a creditor who has transferred the foreclosure bid to the taxpayer in exchange for all of the stock of the corporation and other consideration, and

(c) In the case of a corporate taxpayer, no shareholder of the corporation holds real property for sale to customers in the ordinary course of his trade or business or holds a controlling interest in another corporation which actually so holds real property, or which, but for the application of this subdivision, would be considered to so hold real property.

Thus, in the case of such property, it is not necessary for the taxpayer to satisfy the district director that the property would not have brought the prevailing local price without improvements or to elect not to add the cost of the improvements to his basis. In addition, if 80 percent or more of the real property owned by a taxpayer is property to which this subdivision applies, the requirements of (a) and (b) of this subdivision need not be met with respect to property adjacent to such property which is also owned by the taxpayer.

(d) Holding period required

(1) General rules. To apply section 1237, the taxpayer must either have inherited the lot sold or have held it for 5 years. Generally, the provisions of section 1223 are applicable in determining the period for which the taxpayer has held the property. The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A held a tract of land for 3 years under circumstances otherwise qualifying for section 1237 treatment. He made a gift of the tract to B at a time when the fair market value of the tract exceeded A's basis for the tract. B held the tract for 2 more years under similar circumstances. B then sold 4 lots from the tract. B is entitled to the benefits of section 1237 since under section 1223(2) he held the lots for 5 years and all the other requirements of section 1237 are met.

Example 2. C purchased all the stock in a corporation in 1955. The corporation purchased an unimproved tract of land in 1957. In 1961 the corporation was liquidated under section 333 and C acquired the tract of land. For purposes of section 1237, C's holding period commenced on the date the corporation actually acquired the land in 1957 and not on the date C purchased the stock.

(2) Rules relating to property acquired upon death. If the taxpayer inherited the property there is no 5-year holding period required under section 1237. However, any holding period required by any other provision of the Code, such as section 1222, is nevertheless applicable. For purposes of section 1237, neither the survivor's one-half of community property, nor property acquired by survivorship in a joint tenancy, is property acquired by devise or inheritance. The holding period for the surviving joint tenant begins on the date the property was originally acquired.

(e) Tax consequences if section 1237 applies

(1) Introductory. Where there is no substantial evidence other than subdivision and related selling activities that real property is held for sale in the ordinary course of taxpayer's business and section 1237 applies, section 1237(b)(1) provides a special rule for computing taxable gain. For the relationship between sections 1237 and 1231, see paragraph (f) of this section.

(2) Characterization of gain and its relation to selling expenses.

(i) When the taxpayer has sold less than 6 lots or parcels from the same tract up to the end of his taxable year, the entire gain will be capital gain. (Where the land is used in a trade or business, see paragraph (f) of this section.) In computing the number of lots or parcels sold, two or more contiguous lots sold to a single buyer in a single sale will be counted as only one parcel. The following example illustrates this rule:

Example: A meets all the conditions of section 1237 in subdividing and selling a single tract. In 1956 he sells 4 lots to B, C, D, and E. In the same year F buys 3 adjacent lots. Since A has sold only 5 lots or parcels from the tract, any gain A realizes on the sales will be capital gain.

(ii) If the taxpayer has sold the sixth lot or parcel from the same tract within the taxable year, then the amount, if any, by which 5 percent of the selling price of each lot exceeds the expenses incurred in connection with its sale or exchange, shall, to the extent it represents gain, be ordinary income. Any part of the gain not treated as ordinary income will be treated as capital gain. (Where the land is used in a trade or business, see paragraph (f) of this section.) Five percent of the selling price of each lot sold from the tract in the taxable year the sixth lot is sold and thereafter is, to the extent it represents gain, considered ordinary income. However, all expenses of sale of the lot are to be deducted first from the 5 percent of the gain which would otherwise be considered ordinary income, and any remainder of such expenses shall reduce the gain upon the sale or exchange which would otherwise be considered capital gain. Such expenses cannot be deducted as ordinary business expenses from other income. The 5-percent rule applies to all lots sold from the tract in the year the sixth lot or parcel is sold. Thus, if the taxpayer sells the first 6 lots of a single tract in one year, 5 percent of the selling price of each lot sold shall be treated as ordinary income and reduced by the selling expenses. On the other hand, if the taxpayer sells the first 3 lots of a single tract in 1955, and the next 3 lots in 1956, only the gain realized from the sales made in 1956 shall be so treated. For the effect of a 5-year interval between sales, see paragraph (g)(2) of this section. The operation of this subdivision may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

Assume the selling price of the sixth lot of a tract is $10,000, the basis of the lot in the hands of the taxpayer is $5,000, and the expenses of sale are $750. The amount of gain realized by the taxpayer is $4,250, of which the amount of ordinary income attributable to the sale is zero, computed as follows:

Selling price $10,000
Basis 5,000
Excess over basis 5,000
5 percent of selling price 500
Expenses of sale 750
Amount of gain realized treated as ordinary income 0
Excess over basis 5,000
5 percent of selling price 500
Excess of expenses over 5 percent of selling price 250
750
Amount of gain realized from sale of property not held for sale in ordinary course of business 4,250

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in Example 1, except that the expenses of sale of such sixth lot are $300. The amount of gain realized by the taxpayer is $4,700, of which the amount of ordinary income attributable to the sale is $200, computed as follows:

Selling price $10,000
Basis 5,000
Excess over basis 5,000
5 percent of selling price $500
Expenses of sale 300
Amount of gain realized treated as ordinary income 200
Excess over basis 5,000
5 percent of selling price 500
Excess of expenses over 5 percent of selling price 0
500
Amount of gain realized from sale of property not held for sale in ordinary course of business 4,500

(iii) In the case of an exchange, the term selling price shall mean the fair market value of property received plus any sum of money received in exchange for the lot. See section 1031 for those exchanges in which no gain is recognized. For the purpose of subsections (b) and (c) of section 1237 and paragraphs (e) and (g) of this section, an exchange shall be treated as a sale or exchange whether or not gain or loss is recognized with respect to such exchange.

(f) Relationship of section 1237 and section 1231. Application of section 1237 to a sale of real property may, in some cases, result in the property being treated as real property used in the trade or business, as described in section 1231(b)(1). Thus, assuming section 1237 is otherwise applicable, if the lot sold would be considered property described in section 1231(b)(1) except for the fact that the taxpayer subdivided the tract of which it was a part, then evidence of such subdivision and connected sales activities shall be disregarded and the lot sold shall be considered real property used in the trade or business. Under such circumstances, any gain or loss realized from the sale shall be treated as gain or loss arising from the sale of real property used in the trade or business.

(g) Definition of tract

(1) Aggregation of properties. For the purposes of section 1237, the term tract means either

(i) a single piece of real property or

(ii) two or more pieces of real property if they were contiguous at any time while held by the taxpayer, or would have been contiguous but for the interposition of a road, street, railroad, stream, or similar property. Properties are contiguous if their boundaries meet at one or more points. The single piece of contiguous properties need not have been conveyed by a single deed. The taxpayer may have assembled them over a period of time and may hold them separately, jointly, or as a partner, or in any combination of such forms of ownership.

(2) When a subdivision will be considered a new tract. If the taxpayer sells or exchanges no lots from the tract for a period of 5 years after the sale or exchange of at least 1 lot in the tract, then the remainder of the tract shall be deemed a new tract for the purpose of counting the number of lots sold from the same tract under section 1237(b)(1). The pieces in the new tract need not be contiguous. The 5-year period is measured between the dates of the sales or exchanges.

(h) Effective date. This section shall apply only to gain realized on sales made after December 31, 1953, or, in the case of a person meeting the requirements of paragraph (c)(5)(iv) of this section, if the sale of the lot occurs in a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1954. Pursuant to section 7851(a)(1)(C), the regulations prescribed in this section (other than subdivision (iv) of paragraph (c)(5)) shall also apply to taxable years beginning before January 1, 1954, and ending after December 31, 1953, and to taxable years beginning after December 31, 1953, and ending before August 17, 1954, although such years are subject to the Internal Revenue Code of 1939. Irrespective of whether the taxable year involved is subject to the Internal Revenue Code of 1939 or the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, sales or exchanges made before January 1, 1954, shall be taken into account to determine whether:

(1) No sales or exchanges have been made for 5 years, under section 1237(c), and

(2) more than 5 lots or parcels have been sold or exchanged from the same tract, under section 1237(b)(1). Thus, if the taxpayer sold 5 lots from a single tract in 1950, and another lot is sold in 1954, the lot sold in 1954 constitutes the sixth lot sold from the original tract. On the other hand, if the first 5 lots were sold in 1948, the sale made in 1954 shall be deemed to have been made from a new tract.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12016, Nov. 26, 1960]

§ 1.1238-1 Amortization in excess of depreciation.

(a) In general. Section 1238 provides that if a taxpayer is entitled to a deduction for amortization of an emergency facility under section 168, and if the facility is later sold or exchanged, any gain realized shall be considered as ordinary income to the extent that the amortization deduction exceeds normal depreciation. Thus, under section 1238 gain from a sale or exchange of property shall be considered as ordinary income to the extent that its adjusted basis is less than its adjusted basis would be if it were determined without regard to section 168. If an entire facility is certified under section 168(e), the taxpayer may use allowances for depreciation based on any rate and method which would have been proper if the basis of the facility were not subject to amortization under section 168, in determining what the adjusted basis of the facility would be if it were determined without regard to section 168. If only a portion of a facility is certified under section 168(e), allowances for depreciation based on the rate and method properly used with respect to the uncertified part of the facility are used in determining what the adjusted basis of the facility would be if it were determined without regard to section 168. The principles of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On December 31, 1954, a taxpayer making his income tax returns on a calendar year basis acquires at a cost of $20,000 an emergency facility (used in his business) 50 percent of the adjusted basis of which has been certified under section 168(e). The facility would normally have a useful life of 20 years and a salvage value of $2,000 allocable equally between the certified and uncertified portions. Under section 168 the taxpayer elects to begin the 60-month amortization period on January 1, 1955. He takes amortization deductions with respect to the certified portion in the amount of $4,000 for the years 1955 and 1956 (24 months). On December 31, 1956, he sells the facility for a price of $19,000 which is allocable equally between the certified and uncertified portions. The adjusted basis of the certified portion on that date is $6,000 ($10,000 cost, less $4,000 amortization). With respect to the uncertified portion, the straight line method of depreciation is used and a deduction for depreciation in the amount of $450 is claimed and allowed for the year 1955. The adjusted basis of the uncertified portion on January 1, 1956, is $9,550 ($10,000 cost, less $450 depreciation). The depreciation allowance for the uncertified portion for the year 1956 would be limited to $50, the amount by which the adjusted basis of such portion at the beginning of the year exceeded its aliquot portion of the sales price. Thus, on December 31, 1956, the adjusted basis of the uncertified portion would be $9,500. Without regard to section 168, and using the rate and method the taxpayer properly applied to the uncertified portion of the facility, the adjusted basis of the certified portion on December 31, 1956, would be $9,500, computed in the same manner as the adjusted basis of the uncertified portion. The difference between the facility's actual adjusted basis ($15,500) and its adjusted basis determined without regard to section 168 ($19,000), is $3,500. Accordingly, the entire $3,500 gain on the sale of the facility ($19,000 sale price, less $15,500 adjusted basis) is treated as ordinary income.

Example 2. Assume that the entire facility in example (1) had been certified under section 168(e) and that, therefore, the adjusted basis of the facility on December 31, 1956, is $12,000. Assume further that the taxpayer adopts straight line depreciation as a proper method of depreciation for determining the adjusted basis of the facility without regard to section 168. Thus, the adjusted basis, without regard to section 168, would be $19,000. This amount is $7,000 more than the $12,000 adjusted basis under section 168. Hence, the entire $7,000 gain on the sale of the facility ($19,000 sale price less $12,000 adjusted basis) is treated as ordinary income.

(b) Substituted basis. If a taxpayer acquires other property in an exchange for an emergency facility with respect to which amortization deductions have been allowed or allowable, and if the basis in his hands of the other property is determined by reference to the basis of the emergency facility, then the basis of the other property is determined with regard to section 168, and therefore the provisions of section 1238 apply with respect to gain realized on a subsequent sale or exchange of the other property. The provisions of section 1238 also apply to gain realized on the sale or exchange of an emergency facility (or other property acquired, as described in the preceding sentence, in exchange for an emergency facility) by a taxpayer in whose hands the basis of the facility (or other property) is determined by reference to its basis in the hands of another person to whom deductions were allowable or allowed with respect to the facility under section 168.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12020, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 6825, 30 FR 7281, June 2, 1965]

§ 1.1239-1 Gain from sale or exchange of depreciable property between certain related taxpayers after October 4, 1976.

(a) In general. In the case of a sale or exchange of property, directly or indirectly, between related persons after October 4, 1976 (other than a sale or exchange made under a binding contract entered into on or before that date), any gain recognized by the transferor shall be treated as ordinary income if such property is, in the hands of the transferee, subject to the allowance for depreciation provided in section 167. This rule also applies to property which would be subject to the allowance for depreciation provided in section 167 except that the purchaser has elected a different form of deduction, such as those allowed under sections 169, 188, and 191.

(b) Related persons. For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, the term related persons means:

(1) A husband and wife,

(2) An individual and a corporation 80 percent or more in value of the outstanding stock of which is owned, directly or indirectly, by or for such individual, or

(3) Two or more corporations 80 percent or more in value of the outstanding stock of each of which is owned, directly or indirectly, by or for the same individual.

(c) Rules of construction

(1) Husband and wife. For purposes of paragraph (b)(1) of this section, if on the date of the sale or exchange a taxpayer is legally separated from his spouse under an interlocutory decree of divorce, the taxpayer and his spouse shall not be treated as husband and wife, provided the sale or exchange is made pursuant to the decree and the decree subsequently becomes final. Thus, if pursuant to an interlocutory decree of divorce, an individual transfers depreciable property to his spouse and, because of this section, the gain recognized on the transfer of the property is treated as ordinary income, the individual may, if the interlocutory decree becomes final after his tax return has been filed, file a claim for a refund.

(2) Sales between commonly controlled corporations. In general, in the case of a sale or exchange of depreciable property between related corporations (within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3) of this section), gain which is treated as ordinary income by reason of this section shall be taxable to the transferor corporation rather than to a controlling shareholder. However, such gain shall be treated as ordinary income taxable to a controlling shareholder rather than the transferor corporation if the transferor corporation is used by a controlling shareholder as a mere conduit to make a sale to another controlled corporation, or the entity of the corporate transferor is otherwise properly disregarded for tax purposes. Sales between two or more corporations that are related within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3) of this section may also be subject to the rules of section 482 (relating to allocation of income between or among organizations, trades, or businesses which are commonly owned or controlled), and to rules requiring constructive dividend treatment to the controlling shareholder in appropriate circumstances.

(3) Relationship determination for transfers made after January 6, 1983—taxpayer and an 80-percent owned entity. For purposes of paragraph (b)(2) of this section with respect to transfers made after January 6, 1983—

(i) If the transferor is an entity, the transferee and such entity are related if the entity is an 80-percent owned entity with respect to such transferee either immediately before or immediately after the sale or exchange of depreciable property, and

(ii) If the transferor is not an entity, the transferee and such transferor are related if the transferee is an 80-percent owned entity with respect to such transferor immediately after the sale or exchange of depreciable property.

(4) Relationship determination for transfers made after January 6, 1983—two 80-percent owned entities. For purposes of paragraph (b)(3) of this section, with respect to transfers made after January 6, 1983, two entities are related if the same shareholder both owns 80 percent or more in value of the stock of the transferor before the sale or exchange of depreciable property and owns 80 percent or more in value of the stock of the transferee immediately after the sale or exchange of depreciable property.

(5) Ownership of stock. For purposes of determining the ownership of stock under this section, the constructive ownership rules of section 318 shall be applied, except that section 318(a)(2)(C) (relating to attribution of stock ownership from a corporation) and section 318(a)(3)(C) (relating to attribution of stock ownership to a corporation) shall be applied without regard to the 50-percent limitation contained therein. The application of the constructive ownership rules of section 318 to section 1239 is illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A, an individual, owns 79 percent of the stock (by value) of Corporation X, and a trust for A's children owns the remaining 21 percent of the stock. A's children are deemed to own the stock owned for their benefit by the trust in proportion to their actuarial interests in the trust (section 318(a)(2)(B)). A, in turn, constructively owns the stock so deemed to be owned by his children (section 318(a)(1)(A)(ii)). Thus, A is treated as owning all the stock of Corporation X, and any gain A recognizes from the sale of depreciable property to Corporation X is treated under section 1239 as ordinary income.

Example 2. Y Corporation owns 100 percent in value of the stock of Z Corporation. Y Corporation sells depreciable property at a gain to Z Corporation. P and his daughter, D, own 80 percent in value of the Y Corporation stock. Under the constructive ownership rules of section 318, as applied to section 1239, P and D are each considered to own the stock in Z Corporation owned by Y Corporation. Also, P and D are each considered to own the stock in Y Corporation owned by the other. As a result, both P and D constructively own 80 percent or more in value of the stock of both Y and Z Corporations. Thus, the sale between Y and Z is governed by section 1239 and produces ordinary income to Y.

[T.D. 7569, 43 FR 51388, Nov. 3, 1978, as amended by T.D. 8106, 51 FR 42835, Nov. 26, 1986]

§ 1.1239-2 Gain from sale or exchange of depreciable property between certain related taxpayers on or before October 4, 1976.

Section 1239 provides in general that any gain from the sale or exchange of depreciable property between a husband and wife or between an individual and a controlled corporation on or before October 4, 1976 (and in the case of a sale or exchange occurring after that date if made under a binding contract entered into on or before that date), shall be treated as ordinary income. Thus, any gain recognized to the transferor from a sale or exchange after May 3, 1951, and on or before October 4, 1976 (or thereafter if pursuant to a binding contract entered into on or before that date), directly or indirectly, between a husband and wife or between an individual and a controlled corporation, of property which, in the hands of the transferee, is property of a character subject to an allowance for depreciation provided in section 167 (including such property on which a deduction for amortization is allowable under sections 168 and 169) shall be considered as gain from the sale or exchange of property which is neither a capital asset nor property described in section 1231. For the purpose of section 1239, a corporation is controlled when more than 80 percent in value of all outstanding stock of the corporation is beneficially owned by the taxpayer, his spouse, and his minor children and minor grandchildren. For the purpose of this section, the terms children and grandchildren include legally adopted children and their children. The provisions of section 1239(a)(2) are applicable whether property is transferred from a corporation to a shareholder or from a shareholder to a corporation.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12021, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 7569, 43 FR 51388, Nov. 3, 1978]

§ 1.1240-1 Capital gains treatment of certain termination payments.

Any amounts received by an employee for the assignment or release of all his rights to receive, after termination of his employment and for a period of not less than five years or for a period ending with his death, a percentage of the profits or receipts of his employer attributable to a time subsequent to such termination, are considered received from the sale or exchange of a capital asset held for more than six months if the following requirements are met:

(a) The employee was employed by the employer, in whose future profits or receipts the employee had an interest, for a period of more than 20 years before the assignment or release by the employee of his rights in such future profits or receipts,

(b) The full rights of the employee to the percentage of the future profits or receipts on such employer, which rights are the subject of the assignment or release, were incorporated in the terms of the contract of employment between the employee and the employer for a period of at least 12 years, and were so incorporated before August 16, 1954,

(c) The assignment or release was made after the termination of the employee's employment with such employer,

(d) The assignment or release conveyed all the rights of the employee in the future profits or receipts of such employer and conveyed no other rights of the employee, and

(e) The total amount to which the employee became entitled pursuant to the assignment or release was received by the employee after the termination of his employment with such employer and in one taxable year of the employee.

The requirement that the assignment or release be made after the termination of the employee's employment contemplates a complete and bona fide termination of the relationship of employer and employee. This requires more than a mere termination of such relationship under the particular contract or contracts of employment pursuant to which the employee acquired his rights in the future profits or receipts of the employer. The contract need not expressly provide that the employee shall share in the future profits or receipts of the employer for a minimum period of five years. However, if the contract does not expressly so provide and the assignment or release is made before the expiration of five years following the termination of employment, the terms of the contract considered in conjunction with the facts in the particular situation must establish that the rights of the employee to a percentage of future profits or receipts, in all probability, will extend to a period of not less than five years from the date of termination of employment or for a period ending with his death. Section 1240 has application only to an assignment or release made by the employee who acquired the right to a percentage of future profits or receipts of the employer, and has no application to amounts received other than as payment for assignment or release of such right. Section 1240 has no effect upon the determination of the income tax of the employer making the payment to the employee.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12021, Nov. 26, 1960]

§ 1.1241-1 Cancellation of lease or distributor's agreement.

(a) In general. Section 1241 provides that proceeds received by lessees or distributors from the cancellation of leases or of certain distributorship agreements are considered as amounts received in exchange therefor. Section 1241 applies to leases of both real and personal property. Distributorship agreements to which section 1241 applies are described in paragraph (c) of this section. Section 1241 has no application in determining whether or not a cancellation not qualifying under that section is a sale or exchange. Further, section 1241 has no application in determining whether or not a lease or a distributorship agreement is a capital asset, even though its cancellation qualifies as an exchange under section 1241.

(b) Definition of cancellation. The term cancellation of a lease or a distributor's agreement, as used in section 1241, means a termination of all the contractual rights of a lessee or distributor with respect to particular premises or a particular distributorship, other than by the expiration of the lease or agreement in accordance with its terms. A payment made in good faith for a partial cancellation of a lease or a distributorship agreement is recognized as an amount received for cancellation under section 1241 if the cancellation relates to a severable economic unit, such as a portion of the premises covered by a lease, a reduction in the unexpired term of a lease or distributorship agreement, or a distributorship in one of several areas or of one of several products. Payments made for other modifications of leases or distributorship agreements, however, are not recognized as amounts received for cancellation under section 1241.

(c) Amounts received upon cancellation of a distributorship agreement. Section 1241 applies to distributorship agreements only if they are for marketing or marketing and servicing of goods. It does not apply to agreements for selling intangible property or for rendering personal services as, for example, agreements establishing insurance agencies or agencies for the brokerage of securities. Further, it applies to a distributorship agreement only if the distributor has made a substantial investment of capital in the distributorship. The substantial capital investment must be reflected in physical assets such as inventories of tangible goods, equipment, machinery, storage facilities, or similar property. An investment is not considered substantial for purposes of section 1241 unless it consists of a significant fraction or more of the facilities for storing, transporting, processing, or otherwise dealing with the goods distributed, or consists of a substantial inventory of such goods. The investment required in the maintenance of an office merely for clerical operations is not considered substantial for purposes of this section. Furthermore, section 1241 shall not apply unless a substantial amount of the capital or assets needed for carrying on the operations of a distributorship are acquired by the distributor and actually used in carrying on the distributorship at some time before the cancellation of the distributorship agreement. It is immaterial for the purposes of section 1241 whether the distributor acquired the assets used in performing the functions of the distributorship before or after beginning his operations under the distributorship agreement. It is also immaterial whether the distributor is a retailer, wholesaler, jobber, or other type of distributor. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Taxpayer is a distributor of various food products. He leases a warehouse including cold storage facilities and owns a number of motor trucks. In 1955 he obtains the exclusive rights to market certain frozen food products in his State. The marketing is accomplished by using the warehouse and trucks acquired before he entered into the agreement and entails no additional capital. Payments received upon the cancellation of the agreement are treated under section 1241 as though received upon the sale or exchange of the agreement.

Example 2. Assume that the taxpayer in example (1) entered into an exclusive distributorship agreement with the producer under which the taxpayer merely solicits orders through his staff of salesmen, the goods being shipped direct to the purchasers. Payments received upon the cancellation of the agreement would not be treated under section 1241 as though received upon the sale or exchange of the agreement.

Example 3. Taxpayer is an exclusive distributor for M city of certain frozen food products which he distributes to frozen-food freezer and locker customers. The terms of his distributorship do not make it necessary for him to have any substantial investment in inventory. Taxpayer rents a loading platform for a nominal amount, but has no warehouse space. Orders for goods from customers are consolidated by the taxpayer and forwarded to the producer from time to time. Upon receipt of these goods, taxpayer allocates them to the individual orders of customers and delivers them immediately by truck. Although it would require a fleet of fifteen or twenty trucks to carry out this operation, the distributor uses only one truck of his own and hires cartage companies to deliver the bulk of the merchandise to the customers. Payments received upon the cancellation of the distributorship agreement in such a case would not be considered received upon the sale or exchange of the agreement under section 1241 since the taxpayer does not have facilities for the physical handling of more than a small fraction of the goods involved in carrying on the distributorship and, therefore, does not have a substantial capital investment in the distributorship. On the other hand, if the taxpayer had acquired and used a substantial number of the trucks necessary for the deliveries to his customers, payments received upon the cancellation of the agreement would be considered received in exchange therefor under section 1241.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12021, Nov. 26, 1960]

§ 1.1242-1 Losses on small business investment company stock.

(a) In general. Any taxpayer who sustains a loss for a taxable year beginning after September 2, 1958, as a result of the worthlessness, or from the sale or exchange, of the stock of a small business investment company (whether or not such stock was originally issued to such taxpayer) shall treat such loss as a loss from the sale or exchange of property which is not a capital asset, if at the time of such loss:

(1) The company which issued the stock is licensed to operate as a small business investment company pursuant to regulations promulgated by the Small Business Administration (13 CFR part 107), and

(2) Such loss would, but for the provisions of section 1242, be a loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset.

(b) Treatment of losses for purposes of section 172. For the purposes of section 172 (relating to the net operating loss deduction), any amount of loss treated by reason of section 1242 as a loss from the sale or exchange of property which is not a capital asset shall be treated as attributable to the trade or business of the taxpayer. Accordingly, the limitation of section 172(d)(4) on the allowance of nonbusiness deductions in computing a net operating loss shall not apply to any loss with respect to the stock of a small business investment company as described in paragraph (a) of this section. See section 172(d) and § 1.172-3.

(c) Statement to be filed with return. A taxpayer claiming a deduction for a loss on the stock of a small business investment company shall file with his income tax return a statement containing: The name and address of the small business investment company which issued the stock, the number of shares, basis, and selling price of the stock with respect to which the loss is claimed, the respective dates of purchase and sale of such stock, or the reason for its worthlessness and approximate date thereof. For the rules applicable in determining the worthlessness of securities, see section 165 and the regulations thereunder.

[T.D. 6500, 25 FR 12022, Nov. 26, 1960]

§ 1.1243-1 Loss of small business investment company.

(a) In general

(1) Taxable years beginning after July 11, 1969. For taxable years beginning after July 11, 1969, a small business investment company to which section 582(c) applies, and which sustains a loss as a result of the worthlessness, or on the sale or exchange, of the stock of a small business concern (as defined in section 103(5) of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958, as amended (15 U.S.C. 662(5)) and in 13 CFR 107.3), shall treat such loss as a loss from the sale or exchange of property which is not a capital asset if:

(i) The stock was issued pursuant to the conversion privilege of the convertible debentures acquired in accordance with the provisions of section 304 of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 684) and the regulations thereunder.

(ii) Such loss would, but for the provisions of section 1243, be a loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset, and

(iii) At the time of the loss, the company is licensed to operate as a small business investment company pursuant to regulations promulgated by the Small Business Administration (13 CFR part 107).

If section 582(c) does not apply for the taxable year, see subparagraph (2) of this paragraph.

(2) Taxable years beginning before July 11, 1974. For taxable years beginning after September 2, 1958, but before July 11, 1974, a small business investment company to which section 582(c) does not apply, and which sustains a loss as a result of the worthlessness, or on the sale or exchange, of the securities of a small business concern (as defined in section 103(5) of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958, as amended (15 U.S.C. 662(5)) and in 13 CFR 107.3), shall treat such loss as a loss from the sale or exchange of property which is not a capital asset if:

(i) The securities are either the convertible debentures, or the stock issued pursuant to the conversion privilege thereof, acquired in accordance with the provisions of section 304 of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 684) and the regulations thereunder.

(ii) Such loss would, but for the provisions of this subparagraph, be a loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset, and

(iii) At the time of the loss, the company is licensed to operate as a small business investment company pursuant to regulations promulgated by the Small Business Administration (13 CFR part 107).

If section 582(c) applies for the taxable year, see subparagraph (1) of this paragraph.

(b) Material to be filed with return. A small business investment company which claims a deduction for a loss on the convertible debentures (pursuant to paragraph (a)(2) of this section) or stock (pursuant to paragraph (a) (1) or (2) of this section) of a small business concern shall submit with its income tax return a statement that it is a Federal licensee under the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. chapter 14B). The statement shall also set forth: the name and address of the small business concern with respect to whose securities the loss was sustained, the number of shares of stock or the number and denomination of debentures with respect to which the loss is claimed, the basis and selling price thereof, and the respective dates of purchase and sale of the securities, or the reason for their worthlessness and the approximate date thereof. For the rules applicable in determining the worthlessness of securities, see section 165 and the regulations thereunder.

[T.D. 7171, 37 FR 5621, Mar. 17, 1972]

§ 1.1244(a)-1 Loss on small business stock treated as ordinary loss.

(a) In general. Subject to certain conditions and limitations, section 1244 provides that a loss on the sale or exchange (including a transaction treated as a sale or exchange, such as worthlessness) of section 1244 stock which would otherwise be treated as a loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset shall be treated as a loss from the sale or exchange of an asset which is not a capital asset (referred to in this section and §§ 1.1244(b)-1 to 1.1244(e)-1, inclusive, as an ordinary loss). Such a loss shall be allowed as a deduction from gross income in arriving at adjusted gross income. The requirements that must be satisfied in order that stock may be considered section 1244 stock are described in §§ 1.1244(c)-1 and 1.1244(c)-2. These requirements relate to the stock itself and the corporation issuing such stock. In addition, the taxpayer who claims an ordinary loss deduction pursuant to section 1244 must satisfy the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section.

(b) Taxpayers entitled to ordinary loss. The allowance of an ordinary loss deduction for a loss of section 1244 stock is permitted only to the following two classes of taxpayers:

(1) An individual sustaining the loss to whom the stock was issued by a small business corporation, or

(2) An individual who is a partner in a partnership at the time the partnership acquired the stock in an issuance from a small business corporation and whose distributive share of partnership items reflects the loss sustained by the partnership. The ordinary loss deduction is limited to the lesser of the partner's distributive share at the time of the issuance of the stock or the partner's distributive share at the time the loss is sustained. In order to claim a deduction under section 1244 the individual, or the partnership, sustaining the loss must have continuously held the stock from the date of issuance. A corporation, trust, or estate is not entitled to ordinary loss treatment under section 1244 regardless of how the stock was acquired. An individual who acquires stock from a shareholder by purchase, gift, devise, or in any other manner is not entitled to an ordinary loss under section 1244 with respect to this stock.

Thus, ordinary loss treatment is not available to a partner to whom the stock is distributed by the partnership. Stock acquired through an investment banking firm, or other person, participating in the sale of an issue may qualify for ordinary loss treatment only if the stock is not first issued to the firm or person. Thus, for example, if the firm acts as a selling agent for the issuing corporation the stock may qualify. On the other hand, stock purchased by an investment firm and subsequently resold does not qualify as section 1244 stock in the hands of the person acquiring the stock from the firm.

(c) Examples. The provisions of paragraph (b) of this section may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A and B, both individuals, and C, a trust, are equal partners in a partnership to which a small business corporation issues section 1244 stock. The partnership sells the stock at a loss. A's and B's distributive share of the loss may be treated as an ordinary loss pursuant to section 1244, but C's distributive share of the loss may not be so treated.

Example 2. The facts are the same as in example (1) except that the section 1244 stock is distributed by the partnership to partner A and he subsequently sells the stock at a loss. Section 1244 is not applicable to the loss since A did not acquire the stock by issuance from the small business corporation.

[T.D. 6495, 25 FR 9675, Oct. 8, 1960, as amended by T.D. 7779, 46 FR 29467, June 2, 1981]

§ 1.1244(b)-1 Annual limitation.

(a) In general. Subsection (b) of section 1244 imposes a limitation on the aggregate amount of loss that for any taxable year may be treated as an ordinary loss by a taxpayer by reason of that section. In the case of a partnership, the limitation is determined separately as to each partner. Any amount of loss in excess of the applicable limitation is treated as loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset.

(b) Amount of loss

(1) Taxable years beginning after December 31, 1978. For any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1978, the maximum amount that may be treated as an ordinary loss under section 1244 is:

(i) $50,000, or

(ii) $100,000, if a husband and wife file a joint return under section 6013.

These limitations on the maximum amount of ordinary loss apply whether the loss or losses are sustained on pre-November 1978 stock (as defined in § 1.1244 (c)-1 (a)(1)), post-November 1978 stock (as defined in § 1.1244 (c)-1 (a)(2)), or on any combination of pre-November 1978 stock and post-November 1978 stock. The limitation referred to in (ii) applies to a joint return whether the loss or losses are sustained by one or both spouses.

(2) Taxable years ending before November 6, 1978. For any taxable year ending before November 6, 1978, the maximum amount that may be treated as an ordinary loss under section 1244 is:

(i) $25,000 or

(ii) $50,000, if a husband and wife file a joint return under section 6013.

The limitation referred to in (ii) applies to a joint return whether the loss or losses are sustained by one or both spouses.

(3) Taxable years including November 6, 1978. For a taxable year including November 6, 1978, the maximum amount that may be treated as ordinary loss under section 1244 is the sum of:

(i) The amount calculated by applying the limitations described in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph (b) to the amount of loss, if any, sustained during the taxable year on post-November 1978 stock, plus

(ii) The amount calculated by applying the limitations described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph (b) to the amount of loss, if any, sustained during the taxable year on pre-November 1978 stock,

To the extent this sum does not exceed $50,000, or, if a husband and wife file a joint return under section 6013 for the taxable year, $100,000.

(4) Examples. The provisions of this section may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A, a married taxpayer who files a joint return for the taxable year ending December 31, 1977, sustains a $50,000 loss qualifying under section 1244 on pre-November 1978 stock in Corporation X and an equal amount of loss qualifying under section 1244 on pre-November 1978 stock in Corporation Y. A is limited to $50,000 of ordinary loss under paragraph (b)(2)(ii). The remaining $50,000 of loss is treated as loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset.

Example 2. For the taxable year ending December 31, 1979, B, a married taxpayer who files a joint return, sustains a $90,000 loss on post-November 1978 stock in Corporation X. In the same taxable year, C, B's spouse, sustains a $25,000 loss on post-November 1978 stock in Corporation Y. Both losses qualify under section 1244. B and C's ordinary loss is limited to $100,000 under paragraph (b)(1)(ii). The remaining $15,000 of loss is treated as loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset.

Example 3. D, a married taxpayer who files a joint return and reports income on a fiscal year basis for the taxable year ending November 30, 1978, sustains a $60,000 loss qualifying under section 1244 on pre-November 1978 stock and a $40,000 loss qualifying under section 1244 on post-November 1978 stock. D's ordinary loss on pre-November 1978 stock is limited to $50,000 under subparagraph (3)(ii) of this paragraph (b). D's $40,000 loss on post-November 1978 stock is within the limit of subparagraph (3)(i) of this paragraph (b). The total of these losses, $90,000, is the aggregate amount deductible by D as ordinary loss under section 1244. The remaining $10,000 of loss is treated as loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset.

Example 4. E, a married taxpayer who files a joint return for the taxable year ending December 31, 1980, sustains a $75,000 loss qualifying under section 1244 on pre-November 1978 stock and a $10,000 loss qualifying under section 1244 on post-November 1978 stock. E may deduct the total of these losses, $85,000, as ordinary loss under paragraph (b)(1)(ii).

Example 5. Assume the same facts as in the preceding example, except that the losses are sustained in the taxable year beginning January 1, 1978, and ending December 31, 1978. E is limited to $60,000 of ordinary loss ($50,000 on pre-November 1978 stock plus $10,000 on post-November 1978 stock) under paragraph (b)(3). The remaining $25,000 of loss is treated as loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset.

Example 6. F, a married taxpayer who files a joint return for the taxable year beginning January 1, 1978, and ending December 31, 1978, sustains a $75,000 loss qualifying under section 1244 on pre-November 1978 stock and a $125,000 loss qualifying under section 1244 on post-November 1978 stock. F's loss on pre-November 1978 stock is limited to $50,000 of ordinary loss under subparagraph (3)(ii) of this paragraph (b). F's loss on post-November 1978 stock is limited to $100,000 of ordinary loss under subparagraph (3)(i) of this paragraph (b). The total of these losses, $150,000, is limited to $100,000 of ordinary loss under paragraph (b)(3). F's aggregate amount of ordinary loss under section 1244 is $100,000. The remaining $100,000 of loss is treated as loss from the sale or exchange of a capital asset.

[T.D. 7779, 46 FR 29467, June 2, 1981]

§ 1.1244(c)-1 Section 1244 stock defined.

(a) In general. For purposes of §§ 1.1244(a)-1 to 1.1244(e)-1, inclusive:

(1) The term pre-November 1978 stock means stock issued after June 30, 1958, and on or before November 6, 1978.

(2) The term post-November 1978 stock means stock issued after November 6, 1978.

In order that stock may qualify as section 1244 stock, the requirements described in paragraphs (b) through (e) of this section must be satisfied. In addition, the requirements of paragraph (f) of this section must be satisfied in the case of pre-November 1978 stock. Whether these requirements have been met is determined at the time the stock is issued, except for the requirement in paragraph (e) of this section. Whether the requirement in paragraph (e) of this section, relating to gross receipts of the corporation, has been satisfied is determined at the time a loss is sustained. Therefore, at the time of issuance it cannot be said with certainty that stock will qualify for the benefits of section 1244.

(b) Common stock. Only common stock, either voting or nonvoting, in a domestic corporation may qualify as section 1244 stock. For purposes of section 1244, neither securities of the corporation convertible into common stock nor common stock convertible into other securities of the corporation are treated as common stock. An increase in the basis of outstanding stock as a result of a contribution to capital is not treated as an issuance of stock under section 1244. For definition of domestic corporation, see section 7701(a)(4) and the regulations under that section.

(c) Small business corporation. At the time the stock is issued (or, in the case of pre-November 1978 stock, at the time of adoption of the plan described in paragraph (f)(1) of this section) the corporation must be a small business corporation. See § 1.1244(c)-2 for the definition of a small business corporation.

(d) Issued for money or other property.

(1) The stock must be issued to the taxpayer for money or other property transferred by the taxpayer to the corporation. However, stock issued in exchange for stock or securities, including stock or securities of the issuing corporation, cannot qualify as section 1244 stock, except as provided in § 1.1244(d)-3, relating to certain cases where stock is issued in exchange for section 1244 stock. Stock issued for services rendered or to be rendered to, or for the benefit of, the issuing corporation does not qualify as section 1244 stock. Stock issued in consideration for cancellation of indebtedness of the corporation shall be considered issued in exchange for money or other property unless such indebtedness is evidenced by a security, or arises out of the performance of personal services.

(2) The following examples illustrate situations where stock fails to qualify as section 1244 stock as a result of the rules in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph:

Example 1. A taxpayer owns stock of Corporation X issued to him prior to July 1, 1958. Under a plan adopted in 1977, he exchanges his stock for a new issuance of stock of Corporation X. The stock received by the taxpayer in the exchange may not qualify as section 1244 stock even if the corporation has adopted a valid plan and is a small business corporation.

Example 2. A taxpayer owns stock in Corporation X. Corporation X merges into Corporation Y. In exchange for his stock, Corporation Y issues shares of its stock to the taxpayer. The stock in Corporation Y does not qualify as section 1244 stock even if the stock exchanged by the taxpayer did qualify.

Example 3. Corporation X transfers part of its business assets to Corporation Y, a new corporation, and all of the stock of Corporation Y is issued directly to the shareholders of Corporation X. Since the Corporation Y stock was not issued to the shareholders for a transfer by them of money or other property, none of the Corporation Y stock in the hands of the shareholders can qualify.

(e) Gross receipts.

(1)

(i)

(a) Except as provided in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, stock will not qualify under section 1244, if 50 percent or more of the gross receipts of the corporation, for the period consisting of the five most recent taxable years of the corporation ending before the date the loss on such stock is sustained by the shareholders, is derived from royalties, rents, dividends, interest, annuities, and sales or exchanges of stock or securities. If the corporation has not been in existence for five taxable years ending before such date, the percentage test referred to in the preceding sentence applies to the period of the taxable years ending before such date during which the corporation has been in existence; and if the loss is sustained during the first taxable year of the corporation such test applies to the period beginning with the first day of such taxable year and ending on the day before the loss is sustained. The test under this paragraph shall be made on the basis of total gross receipts, except that gross receipts from the sales or exchanges of stock or securities shall be taken into account only to the extent of gains therefrom. The term gross receipts as used in section 1244(c)(1)(C) is not synonymous with gross income. Gross receipts means the total amount received or accrued under the method of accounting used by the corporation in computing its taxable income. Thus, the total amount of receipts is not reduced by returns and allowances, cost, or deductions. For example, gross receipts will include the total amount received or accrued during the corporation's taxable year from the sale or exchange (including a sale or exchange to which section 337 applies) of any kind of property, from investments, and for services rendered by the corporation. However, gross receipts does not include amounts received in nontaxable sales or exchanges (other than those to which section 337 applies), except to the extent that gain is recognized by the corporation, nor does that term include amounts received as a loan, as a repayment of a loan, as a contribution to capital, or on the issuance by the corporation of its own stock.

(b) The meaning of the term gross receipts as used in section 1244(c)(1)(C) may be further illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A corporation on the accrual method sells property (other than stock or securities) and receives payment partly in money and partly in the form of a note payable at a future time. The amount of the money and the face amount of the note would be considered gross receipts in the taxable year of the sale and would not be reduced by the adjusted basis of the property, the costs of sale, or any other amount.

Example 2. A corporation has a long-term contract as defined in paragraph (a) of § 1.451-3 with respect to which it reports income according to the percentage-of-completion method as described in paragraph (b)(1) of § 1.451-3. The portion of the gross contract price which corresponds to the percentage of the entire contract which has been completed during the taxable year shall be included in gross receipts for such year.

Example 3. A corporation which regularly sells personal property on the installment plan elects to report its taxable income from the sale of property (other than stock or securities) on the installment method in accordance with section 453. The installment payments actually received in a given taxable year of the corporation shall be included in gross receipts for such year.

(ii) The term royalties as used in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph means all royalties, including mineral, oil, and gas royalties (whether or not the aggregate amount of such royalties constitutes 50 percent or more of the gross income of the corporation for the taxable year), and amounts received for the privilege of using patents, copyrights, secret processes and formulas, good will, trademarks, trade brands, franchises, and other like property. The term royalties does not include amounts received upon the disposal of timber, coal, or domestic iron ore with a retained economic interest to which the special rules of section 631 (b) and (c) apply or amounts received from the transfer of patent rights to which section 1235 applies. For the definition of mineral, oil, or gas royalties, see paragraph (b)(11) (ii) and (iii) of § 1.543-1. For purposes of this subdivision, the gross amount of royalties shall not be reduced by any part of the cost of the rights under which they are received or by any amount allowable as a deduction in computing taxable income.

(iii) The term rents as used in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph means amounts received for the use of, or right to use, property (whether real or personal) of the corporation, whether or not such amounts constitute 50 percent or more of the gross income of the corporation for the taxable year. The term rents does not include payments for the use or occupancy of rooms or other space where significant services are also rendered to the occupant, such as for the use or occupancy of rooms or other quarters in hotels, boarding houses, or apartment houses furnishing hotel services, or in tourist homes, motor courts, or motels. Generally, services are considered rendered to the occupant if they are primarily for his convenience and are other than those usually or customarily rendered in connection with the rental of rooms or other space for occupancy only. The supplying of maid service, for example, constitutes such services; whereas the furnishing of heat and light, the cleaning of public entrances, exits, stairways, and lobbies, the collection of trash, etc., are not considered as services rendered to the occupant. Payments for the use or occupancy of entire private residences or living quarters in duplex or multiple housing units, of offices in an office building, etc., are generally rents under section 1244(c)(1)(C). Payments for the parking of automobiles ordinarily do not constitute rents. Payments for the warehousing of goods or for the use of personal property do not constitute rents if significant services are rendered in connection with such payments.

(iv) The term dividends as used in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph includes dividends as defined in section 316, amounts required to be included in gross income under section 551 (relating to foreign personal holding company income taxed to United States shareholders), and consent dividends determined as provided in section 565.

(v) The term interest as used in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph means any amounts received for the use of money (including tax-exempt interest).

(vi) The term annuities as used in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph means the entire amount received as an annuity under an annuity, endowment, or life insurance contract, regardless of whether only part of such amount would be includible in gross income under section 72.

(vii) For purposes of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, gross receipts from the sales or exchanges of stock or securities are taken into account only to the extent of gains therefrom. Thus, the gross receipts from the sale of a particular share of stock will be the excess of the amount realized over the adjusted basis of such share. If the adjusted basis should equal or exceed the amount realized on the sale or exchange of a certain share of stock, bond, etc., there would be no gross receipts resulting from the sale of such security. Losses on sales or exchanges of stock or securities do not offset gains on the sales or exchanges of other stock or securities for purposes of computing gross receipts from such sales or exchanges. Gross receipts from the sale or exchange of stocks and securities include gains received from such sales or exchanges by a corporation even though such corporation is a regular dealer in stocks and securities. For the meaning of the term stocks or securities, see paragraph (b)(5)(i) of § 1.543-1.

(2) The requirement of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph need not be satisfied if for the applicable period the aggregate amount of deductions allowed to the corporation exceeds the aggregate amount of its gross income. But for this purpose the deductions allowed by section 172, relating to the net operating loss deduction, and by sections 242, 243, 244, and 245, relating to certain special deductions for corporations, shall not be taken into account. Notwithstanding the provisions of this subparagraph and of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, pursuant to the specific delegation of authority granted in section 1244(e) to prescribe such regulations as may be necessary to carry out the purposes of section 1244, ordinary loss treatment will not be available with respect to stock of a corporation which is not largely an operating company within the five most recent taxable years (or such lesser period as the corporation is in existence) ending before the date of the loss. Thus, for example, assume that a person who is not a dealer in real estate forms a corporation which issues stock to him which meets all the formal requirements of section 1244 stock. The corporation then acquires a piece of unimproved real estate which it holds as an investment. The property declines in value and the stockholder sells his stock at a loss. The loss does not qualify for ordinary loss treatment under section 1244 but must be treated as a capital loss.

(3) In applying subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this paragraph to a successor corporation in a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(F), such corporation shall be treated as the same corporation as its predecessor. See paragraph (d)(2) of § 1.1244(d)-3.

(f) Special rules applicable to pre-November 1978 stock.

(1)

(i) Pre-November 1978 common stock must have been issued under a written plan adopted by the corporation after June 30, 1958, and on or before November 6, 1978, to offer only this stock during a period specified in the plan ending not later than 2 years after the date the plan is adopted. The 2-year requirement referred to in the preceding sentence is met if the period specified in the plan is based upon the date when, under the rules or regulations of a Government agency relating to the issuance of the stock, the stock may lawfully be sold, and it is clear that this period will end, and in fact does end, within 2 years after the plan is adopted. The plan must specifically state, in terms of dollars, the maximum amount to be received by the corporation in consideration for the stock to be issued under the plan. See § 1.1244(c)-2 for the limitation on the amount that may be received by the corporation under the plan.

(ii) To qualify, the pre-November 1978 stock must be issued during the period of the offer, which period must end not later than two years after the date the plan is adopted. Pre-November 1978 stock which is subscribed for during the period of the plan but not issued during this period cannot qualify as section 1244 stock. Pre-November 1978 stock issued on the exercise of a stock right, stock warrant, or stock option (which right, warrant, or option was not outstanding at the time the plan was adopted) will be treated as issued under a plan only if the right, warrant, or option is applicable solely to unissued stock offered under the plan and is exercised during the period of the plan.

(iii) Pre-November 1978 stock subscribed for prior to the adoption of the plan, including stock subscribed for prior to the date the corporation comes into existence, may be considered issued under a plan adopted by the corporation if the stock is not in fact issued prior to the adoption of the plan.

(iv) Pre-November 1978 stock issued for a payment which, alone or together with prior payments, exceeds the maximum amount that may be received under the plan, is not considered issued under the plan, and none of the stock can qualify as section 1244 stock. See § 1.1244(c)-2(b) for a different rule with respect to post-November 1978 stock.

(2) Pre-November 1978 stock does not qualify as section 1244 stock if at the time of the adoption of the plan under which it is issued there remains unissued any portion of a prior offering of stock. Thus, if any portion of an outstanding offering of common or preferred stock is unissued at the time of the adoption of the plan, stock issued under the plan will not qualify as section 1244 stock. An offer is outstanding unless and until it is withdrawn by affirmative action before the plan is adopted. Stock rights, stock warrants, stock options, or securities convertible into stock, that are outstanding at the time the plan is adopted, are considered prior offerings. The authorization in the corporate charter to issue stock different from stock offered under the plan or in excess of stock offered under the plan is not of itself a prior offering.

(3)

(i) Even though the plan satisfies the requirements of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph (f), if another offering of pre-November 1978 stock is made by the corporation subsequent to, or simultaneous with, the adoption of the plan, pre-November 1978 stock issued under the plan after the other offering does not qualify as section 1244 stock. The issuance of stock options, stock rights, or stock warrants at any time during the period of the plan, that are exercisable on stock other than stock offered under the plan, is considered a subsequent offering. Similarly, the issuance of pre-November 1978 stock other than that offered under the plan is considered a subsequent offering. Because stock issued upon exercise of a converson privilege is stock issued for a security, and stock issued under a stock option granted in whole or in part for services is not issued for money or other property, the issuance of securities with a conversion privilege and the issuance of such a stock option are subsequent offerings, because the conversion privilege and the stock option are exercisable with respect to stock other than that which may properly be offered under the plan. Pre-November 1978 stock issued under the plan before a subsequent offering is not disqualified because of the subsequent offering. The rule of the subparagraph, together with the rule of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph (f), relating to offers prior to the adoption of the plan, limits pre-November 1978 section 1244 stock to stock issued by the corporation during a period when any stock issued by it must have been issued under the plan.

(ii) Any modification of a plan that changes the offering to include preferred stock, or that increases the amount of pre-November 1978 stock that may be issued under the plan to such an extent that the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section would not have been satisfied if determined with reference to this amount as of the date the plan was initially adopted, or that extends the period of time during which stock may be issued under the plan to more than 2 years from the date the plan was initially adopted, is considered a subsequent offering, and no stock issued after this offering may qualify. However, a corporation may withdraw a plan and adopt a new plan to issue stock. To determine whether stock issued under this new plan may qualify, this paragraph (f) must be applied with respect to the new plan as of the date of its adoption. For example, amounts received for stock under the prior plan must be taken into account in determining whether the statutory requirements relating to definition of small business corporation are satisfied. In applying the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section, reference should be made to equity capital as of the date the new plan is adopted. The same principles apply if the period of the initial plan expires and the corporation adopts a new plan.

[T.D. 7779, 46 FR 29468, June 2, 1981]

§ 1.1244(c)-2 Small business corporation defined.

(a) In general. A corporation is treated as a small business corporation if it is a domestic corporation that satisfies the requirements described in paragraph (b) or (c) of this section. The requirements of paragraph (b) of this section apply if a loss is sustained on post-November 1978 stock. The requirements of paragraph (c) of this section apply if a loss is sustained on pre-November 1978 stock. If losses are sustained on both pre-November 1978 stock and post-November 1978 stock in the same taxable year, the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section are applied to the corporation at the time of the issuance of the stock (as required by paragraph (b) in the case of a loss on post-November 1978 stock) in order to determine whether the loss on post-November 1978 stock qualifies as a section 1244 loss, and the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section are applied to the corporation at the time of the adoption of the plan (as required by paragraph (c) in the case of a loss on pre-November 1978 stock) in order to determine whether the loss on pre-November 1978 stock qualifies as a section 1244 loss. For definition of domestic corporation, see section 7701 (a)(4) and the regulations under that section.

(b) Post-November 1978 stock

(1) Amount received by corporation for stock. Capital receipts of a small business corporation may not exceed $1,000,000. For purposes of this paragraph the term capital receipts means the aggregate dollar amount received by the corporation for its stock, as a contribution to capital, and as paid-in surplus. If the $1,000,000 limitation is exceeded, the rules of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph (b) apply. In making these determinations,

(i) property is taken into account at its adjusted basis to the corporation (for determining gain) as of the date received by the corporation, and

(ii) this aggregate amount is reduced by the amount of any liability to which the property was subject and by the amount of any liability assumed by the corporation at the time the property was received. Capital receipts are not reduced by distributions to shareholders, even though the distributions may be capital distributions.

(2) Requirement of designation in event $1,000,000 limitation exceeded.

(i) If capital receipts exceed $1,000,000, the corporation shall designate as section 1244 stock certain shares of post-November 1978 common stock issued for money or other property in the transitional year. For purposes of this paragraph, the term transitional year means the first taxable year in which capital receipts exceed $1,000,000 and in which the corporation issues stock. This designation shall be made in accordance with the rules of subdivision (iii) of this paragraph (b)(2). The amount received for designated stock shall not exceed $1,000,000 less amounts received—

(A) In exchange for stock in years prior to the transitional year;

(B) As contributions to capital in years prior to the transitional year; and

(C) As paid-in surplus in years prior to the transitional year.

(ii) Post-November 1978 common stock issued for money or other property before the transitional year qualifies as section 1244 stock without affirmative designation by the corporation. Post-November 1978 common stock issued after the transitional year does not qualify as section 1244 stock.

(iii) The corporation shall make the designation required by subdivision (i) of this paragraph (b)(2) not later than the 15th day of the third month following the close of the transitional year. However, in the case of post-November 1978 common stock issued on or before June 2, 1981 the corporation shall make the required designation by August 3, 1981 or by the 15th day of the 3rd month following the close of the transitional year, whichever is later. The designation shall be made by entering the numbers of the qualifying share certificates on the corporation's records. If the shares do not bear serial numbers or other identifying numbers or letters, or are not represented by share certificates, the corporation shall make an alternative designation in writing at the time of issuance, or, in the case of post-November 1978 common stock issued on or before June 2, 1981 by August 3, 1981. This alternative designation may be made in any manner sufficient to identify the shares qualifying for section 1244 treatment. If the corporation fails to make a designation by share certificate number or an alternative written designation as described, the rules of subparagraph (3) of this paragraph (b) apply.

(3) Allocation of section 1244 benefit in event corporation fails to designate qualifying shares. If a corporation issues post-November 1978 stock in the transitional year and fails to designate certain shares of post-November 1978 common stock as section 1244 stock in accordance with the rules of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph (b), the following rules apply:

(i) Section 1244 treatment is extended to losses sustained on post-November 1978 common stock issued for money or other property in taxable years before the transitional year and is withheld from losses sustained on post-November 1978 stock issued in taxable years after the transitional year.

(ii) Post-1958 capital received before the transitional year is subtracted from $1,000,000.

(iii) Subject to the annual limitation described in § 1.1244(b)-1, an ordinary loss on post-November 1978 common stock issued for money or other property in the transitional year is allowed in an amount which bears the same ratio to the total loss sustained by the individual as:

(A) The amount described in § 1.1244(c)-2(b) (3) (ii) bears to

(B) The total amount of money and other property received by the corporation in exchange for stock, as a contribution to capital, and as paid-in surplus in the transitional year.

(4) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph (b) may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On December 1, 1978, Corporation W, a newly-formed corporation, issues 10,000 shares of common stock at $125 a share for an amount (determined under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph (b)) of money and other property totaling $1,250,000. The board of directors specifies that 8,000 shares are section 1244 stock and records the certificate numbers of the qualifying shares in its minutes. Because Corporation W issued post-November 1978 common stock in exchange for money and other property exceeding $1,000,000, but has designated shares of stock as section 1244 stock and the designated shares were issued in exchange for money and other property not exceeding $1,000,000 (8,000 shares × $125 price per share = $1,000,000), the 8,000 designated shares qualify as section 1244 stock.

Example 2. Corporation X comes into existence on June 1, 1979. On June 10, 1979, Corporation X issues 2,500 shares of common stock at $250 per share to shareholder A and 2,500 shares of common stock at $250 per share to shareholder B. By written agreement dated September 1, 1981, shareholder A and shareholder B determine that 1,500 of shareholder A's shares and all of shareholder B's shares will be treated as section 1244 stock. Although shareholder A's 1,500 shares and shareholder B's 2,500 shares were issued for money and other property not exceeding $1,000,000 (4,000 shares × $250 price per share = $1,000,000, these 4,000 shares do not qualify as section 1244 stock under the rules of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph (b) for three reasons: The agreement of September 1, 1979,

(i) did not identify which 1,500 of shareholder A's 2,500 shares were intended to qualify for section 1244 treatment,

(ii) was made by the shareholders and not by Corporation X, and

(iii) was made later than the 15th day of the third month following the close of the transitional year. However, certain of the shares issued by Corporation X may qualify as section 1244 stock under the rules of subparagraph (3) of this paragraph (b). See example (4).

Example 3. On December 1, 1980, Corporation Y issues common stock to shareholder A in exchange for $500,000 in cash. On August 1, 1981, Corporation Y issues common stock to shareholder B in exchange for property having an adjusted basis to Corporation Y of $500,000. On December 1, 1981, B transfers a tract of land having a basis in B's hands of $250,000 to Corporation Y as a contribution to capital. Under section 362(a)(2) of the Code, Corporation Y takes a basis of $250,000 in the tract of land. Corporation Y is a calendar year corporation. On February 15, 1982, it designates all of shareholder B's stock as section 1244 stock by entering the numbers of the qualifying certificates on the corporation's records. The designation made by Corporation Y is effective because it identifies which shares of its stock qualify for section 1244 treatment, was made in writing before the 15th day of the 3rd month following the close of the transitional year (1981), and because the amount received for designated stock does not exceed $1,000,000, less amounts received

(i) in exchange for stock in years prior to the transitional year;

(ii) as contributions to capital in years prior to the transitional year; and

(iii) as paid-in surplus in years prior to the transitional year. Nevertheless, in the event of B's sale of his stock at a loss, the increase in basis attributable to his December, 1981, contribution to capital will be treated as allocable to stock that is not section 1244 stock under § 1.1244(d)-2.

Example 4.

Corporation Z, a newly-formed corporation, issues 10,000 shares of common stock at $200 per share on July 1, 1979. In exchange for its stock Corporation Z receives property (other than stock or securities) having a basis to the corporation of $400,000, and $1,600,000 in cash, for a total of $2,000,000. Corporation Z fails to designate any of the issued shares as section 1244 stock. Shareholder C purchases 2,500 shares of the 10,000 shares of Corporation Z stock for $500,000 on July 1, 1979. Subsequently, shareholder C sells the 2,500 shares for $400,000. Shareholder C may treat $50,000 of the $100,000 loss as an ordinary loss under section 1244. The amount of that loss is computed under the rule of subparagraph (3) of this paragraph (b) as follows:

X [C's section 1244 loss] = $1,000,000 [$1,000,000 −0 = $1,000,000]
$100,000 [C's total loss] $2,000,000 [total amount received by Corporation Z]
X = $50,000

The remaining $50,000 is not treated as an ordinary loss under section 1244.

Example 5.

(i) Corporation V, a newly-formed corporation, issues common stock to shareholder A and shareholder B on June 15, 1980, in exchange for $800,000 in cash ($400,000 from A and $400,000 from B). On September 15, 1981, the corporation issues common stock to shareholder C in exchange for $600,000 in cash. On January 1, 1982, common stock is issued to shareholder D in exchange for $100,000 in cash. Corporation V fails to designate any of the issued shares as section 1244 stock. A, B, C, and D subsequently sell their Corporation Y stock at a loss.

(ii) Subject to the annual limitation discussed in § 1.1244(b)-1, A and B may treat their entire loss as an ordinary loss under section 1244. D may not treat any part of his loss as an ordinary loss under section 1244. Subject to the annual limitation, one-third of the loss sustained by shareholder C is treated as an ordinary loss under section 1244. These results are calculated under the rules of subparagraph (3) of this paragraph (b) as follows: First, section 1244 treatment is extended to post-November 1978 stock issued to A and B in 1980, a taxable year before the transitional year (1981); section 1244 treatment is withheld from the stock issued to D in 1982, a taxable year after the transitional year. Second $800,000 the amount of post-1958 capital received in taxable years before the transitional year, is subtracted from $1,000,000 to leave $200,000. Third, subject to the annual limitation, an ordinary loss is allowed to C in an amount which bears the same ratio to his total loss as the amount calculated in the preceding sentence ($200,000) bears to the total amount received by the corporation in the transitional year in exchange for stock, as a contribution to capital, or as paid-in surplus ($600,000).

Example 6. Corporation V comes into existence on July 1, 1982. On that date it issues 10 shares of voting common stock to shareholder A in exchange for $500,000 and 5 shares of voting common stock to shareholder B in exchange for $250,000, designating the shares issued to both A and B as section 1244 stock. On September 15, 1982, Corporation V receives a contribution to capital from shareholders A and B having a basis in their hands of $225,000. On February 1, 1983, Corporation V issues one share of stock to shareholder C in exchange for $50,000. Corporation V may designate one-half of the share issued to shareholder C as section 1244 stock under § 1.1244(c)-2 (b)(2). In 1982 the corporation received $750,000 for stock ($500,000 from A and $250,000 from B) and $225,000 as a capital contribution, totaling $975,000 in capital receipts. The receipt of $50,000 from shareholder C in exchange for stock in 1983 causes capital receipts to exceed $1,000,000 and 1983 thus becomes Corporation V's transitional year. Corporation V may receive only $25,000 for designated stock in 1983 under the rule set forth in § 1.1244 (c)-2 (b)(2)(i), which states that the amount received for designated stock shall not exceed $1,000,000, less amounts received

(i) in exchange for stock in years prior to the transitional year ($750,000 from A and B),

(ii) as contributions to capital in years prior to the transitional year ($225,000), and

(iii) as paid-in surplus in years prior to the transitional year ($0). Thus, one-half of C's share (representing the receipt of $25,000) may be designated as section 1244 stock by Corporation V. In the event of the sale of A's stock or B's stock at a loss, the increase in basis attributable to their contribution to capital will be treated as allocable to stock that is not section 1244 stock under § 1.1244(d)-2.

(c) Pre-November 1978 stock

(1) Amount received by corporation for stock. At the time of the adoption of the plan, the sum of the aggregate dollar amount to be paid for pre-November 1978 stock that may be offered under the plan plus the aggregate amount of money and other property that has been received by the corporation after June 30, 1958, and on or before November 6, 1978, for its stock, as a contribution to capital by its shareholders, and as paid-in surplus must not exceed $500,000. In making these determinations

(i) property is taken into account at its adjusted basis to the corporation (for determining gain) as of the date received by the corporation, and

(ii) this aggregate amount is reduced by the amount of any liability to which the property was subject and by the amount of any liability assumed by the corporation at the time the property was received. For purposes of the $500,000 test, the total amount of money and other property received for stock, as a contribution to capital, and as paid-in surplus is not reduced by distributions to shareholders, even though the distributions may be capital distributions. Thus, once the total amount of money and other property received after June 30, 1958, reaches $500,000, the corporation is precluded from subsequently issuing pre-November 1978 stock. For a different rule that applies to post-November 1978 stock see § 1.1244(c)-2(b).

(2) Equity capital. The sum of the aggregate dollar amount to be paid for pre-November 1978 stock that may be offered under the plan plus the equity capital of the corporation (determined on the date of the adoption of the plan) may not exceed $1,000,000. For this purpose, equity capital is the sum of the corporation's money and other property (in an amount equal to its adjusted basis for determining gain) less the amount of the corporation's indebtedness to persons other than its shareholders.

(3) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph (c) may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Corporation W comes into existence on December 1, 1958. On that date the corporation may adopt a plan to issue common stock for an amount (determined under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph (c)) not in excess of $500,000 during a period ending not later than November 30, 1960. Such corporation will qualify as a small business corporation as of the date that the plan is adopted. However, if the corporation adopts a plan to issue stock for an amount in excess of $500,000 it is not a small business corporation at the time the plan is adopted and no stock issued under the plan may qualify as section 1244 stock. If the cost of organizing corporation W amounted to $1,000 and constituted paid-in surplus or a contribution to capital, such amount must be taken into account in determining the amount that may be received under the plan, with the result that only $499,000 may be so received.

Example 2. On December 1, 1958, Corporation X, a newly formed corporation, adopts a plan to issue common stock for an amount (determined under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph (c)) not in excess of $500,000 during a period ending not later than November 30, 1960. By January 1, 1960, the corporation has, pursuant to the plan, issued at par, stock having an aggregate par value of $400,000, $200,000 of which was issued for $200,000 cash, and $200,000 of which was issued for property (other than stock or securities) having a basis to the corporation of $100,000 and a fair market value of $200,000. The corporation may, prior to November 30, 1960, issue stock for an amount not in excess of $200,000 cash or property having a basis to it not in excess of $200,000. Stock issued for any payment which, alone or together with any payments received after January 1, 1960, exceeds such $200,000 amount would not qualify as section 1244 stock because it would not be issued pursuant to the plan.

Example 3. Assume that on December 1, 1958, Corporation Y, a newly formed corporation, adopts a plan to issue common stock for an amount (determined under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph (c)) not in excess of $500,000 during a period ending not later than November 30, 1960. By January 1960 the corporation has received $400,000 cash for stock issued pursuant to the plan, but due to business successes the equity capital of the corporation exceeds $1,000,000. Since the equity capital test is made as of the date that the plan is adopted, the corporation may still, prior to November 30, 1960, issue section 1244 stock pursuant to the plan until the full amount specified in the plan has been received.

Example 4. Subsequent to June 30, 1958, Corporation Z receives a total of $600,000 cash on the issuance of its stock. In 1960 Corporation Z redeems shares of its stock for the total amount of $300,000 and the redemptions reduce Corporation Z's capital to substantially less than $500,000. Notwithstanding the redemptions, pre-November 1978 stock subsequently issued by Corporation Z will not qualify as section 1244 stock because the $500,000 limitation has been previously exceeded.

[T.D. 7779, 46 FR 29470, June 2, 1981, as amended by T.D. 7837, 47 FR 42729, Sept. 29, 1982; 60 FR 16575, Mar. 31, 1995]

§ 1.1244(d)-1 Contributions of property having basis in excess of value.

(a) In general.

(1) Section 1244(d)(1) (A) provides a special rule which limits the amount of loss on section 1244 stock that may be treated as an ordinary loss. This rule applies only when section 1244 stock is issued by a corporation in exchange for property that, immediately before the exchange, has an adjusted basis (for determining loss) in excess of its fair market value. If section 1244 stock is issued in exchange for such property and the basis of such stock in the hands of the taxpayer is determined by reference to the basis of such property, then for purposes of section 1244, the basis of such stock shall be reduced by an amount equal to the excess, at the time of the exchange, of the adjusted basis of the property over its fair market value.

(2) The provisions of section 1244(d) (1)(A) do not affect the basis of stock for purposes other than section 1244. Such provisions are to be used only in determining the portion of the total loss sustained that may be treated as an ordinary loss pursuant to section 1244.

(b) Transfer of more than one item. If a taxpayer exchanges several items of property for stock in a single transaction so that the basis of the property transferred is allocated evenly among the shares of stock received, the computation under this section should be made by reference to the aggregate fair market value and the aggregate basis of the property transferred.

(c) Examples. The provisions of this section may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. B transfers property with an adjusted basis of $1,000 and a fair market value of $250 to a corporation for 10 shares of section 1244 stock in an exchange that qualifies under section 351. The basis of B's stock is $1,000 ($100 per share), but, solely for purposes of section 1244, the total basis of the stock must be reduced by $750, the excess of the adjusted basis of the property exchanged over its fair market value. Thus, the basis of such stock for purposes of section 1244 is $250 and the basis of each share for such purposes is $25. If B sells his 10 shares for $250, he will recognize a loss of $750, all of which must be treated as a capital loss. If he sells the 10 shares for $200, then $50 of his total loss of $800 will be treated as an ordinary loss under section 1244, assuming the various requirements of such section are satisfied, and the remaining $750 will be a capital loss.

Example 2. B owns property with a basis of $20,000. The fair market value of the property unencumbered is $15,000 but the property is subject to a $2,000 mortgage. B transfers the encumbered property to a corporation for 100 shares of section 1244 stock in an exchange that qualifies under section 351. The basis of the shares, determined in accordance with section 358, is $18,000 or $180 per share, but solely for purposes of section 1244 the basis is $13,000 ($130 per share), which is its basis for purposes other than section 1244, reduced by $5,000, the excess of the adjusted basis, immediately before the exchange, of the property transferred over its fair market value.

Example 3.

C transfers business assets to a corporation for 100 shares of section 1244 stock in an exchange that qualifies under section 351. The assets transferred are as follows:

Basis Fair market value
Cash $10,000 $10,000
Inventory 15,000 30,000
Depreciable property 50,000 20,000
Land 25,000 10,000
100,000 70,000

The basis for the shares received by C is $100,000, which is applied $1,000 to each share. However, the basis of the shares for purposes of section 1244 is $70,000 ($700 per share), the basis for general purposes reduced by $30,000, the excess of the aggregate adjusted basis of the property transferred over the aggregate fair market value of such property.

[T.D. 6495, 25 FR 9679, Oct. 8, 1960]

§ 1.1244(d)-2 Increases in basis of section 1244 stock.

(a) In general. If subsequent to the time of its issuance there is for any reason, including the operation of section 1376(a), an increase in the basis of section 1244 stock, such increase shall be treated as allocable to stock which is not section 1244 stock. Therefore, a loss on stock, the basis of which has been increased subsequent to its issuance, must be apportioned between the part that qualifies as section 1244 stock and the part that does not so qualify. Only the loss apportioned to the part that so qualifies may be treated as an ordinary loss pursuant to section 1244. The amount of loss apportioned to the part that qualifies is the amount which bears the same ratio to the total loss as the basis of the stock which is treated as allocated to section 1244 stock bears to the total basis of the stock.

(b) Example. The provisions of paragraph (a) of this section may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: For $10,000 a corporation issues 100 shares of section 1244 stock to X. X later contributes $2,000 to the capital of the corporation and this increases the total basis of his 100 shares to $12,000. Subsequently, he sells the 100 shares for $9,000. Of the $3,000 loss, $2,500 is allocated to the portion of the stock that qualifies as section 1244 stock ($10,000/$12,000 of $3,000), and the remaining $500 is allocated to the portion of the stock that does not so qualify. Therefore, to the extent of $2,500, the loss may be treated as an ordinary loss assuming the various requirements of section 1244 stock are satisfied. However, the remaining $500 loss must be treated as a capital loss.

[T.D. 6495, 25 FR 9680, Oct. 8, 1960]

§ 1.1244(d)-3 Stock dividend, recapitalizations, changes in name, etc.

(a) In general. Section 1244(c)(1) provides that stock may not qualify for the benefits of section 1244 unless it is issued to the taxpayer for money or other property not including stock or securities. However, section 1244(d)(2) authorizes exceptions to this rule. The exceptions may apply in three situations:

(1) The receipt of a stock dividend;

(2) the exchange of stock for stock pursuant to a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(E); and

(3) the exchange of stock for stock pursuant to a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(F).

(b) Stock dividends.

(1) If common stock is received by an individual or partnership in a nontaxable distribution under section 305(a) made solely with respect to stock owned by such individual or partnership which meets the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the distribution, then the common stock so received will also be treated as meeting such requirements. For purposes of this paragraph and paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the distribution or exchange are all of the requirements of section 1244(c)(1) other than the one described in subparagraph (C) thereof, relating to the gross receipts test.

(2) If, however, such stock dividend is received by such individual or partnership partly with respect to stock meeting the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the distribution, and partly with respect to stock not meeting such requirements, then only part of the stock received as a stock dividend will be treated as meeting such requirements. Assuming all the shares with respect to which the dividend is received have equal rights to dividends, such part is the number of shares which bears the same ratio to the total number of shares received as the number of shares owned immediately before the stock dividend which meets such qualifications bears to the total number of shares with respect to which the stock dividend is received. In determining the basis of shares received in the stock dividend and of the shares held before the stock dividend, section 307 shall apply as if two separate nontaxable stock dividends were made, one with respect to the shares that meet the requirements and the other with respect to shares that do not meet the requirements.

(3) The provisions of subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Corporation X issues 100 shares of its common stock to B for $1,000. Subsequently, in a nontaxable stock dividend B receives 5 more shares of common stock of Corporation X. If the 100 shares meet all the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the distribution of the stock dividend, the 5 additional shares shall also be treated as meeting such requirements.

Example 2. In 1959, Corporation Y issues 100 shares of its common stock to C for $1,000 and these shares meet the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the issuance. In 1960, C purchases an additional 200 shares of such stock from another shareholder for $3,000; however, these shares do not meet the requirements of section 1244 stock because they were not originally issued to C by the corporation. In 1961, C receives 15 shares of Corporation Y common stock as a stock dividend. Of the shares received, 5 shares, the number received with respect to the 100 shares of stock which met the requirements of section 1244 at the time of the distribution, i.e., 100/300 × 15, shall also be treated as meeting such requirements. The remaining 10 shares do not meet such requirements as they are not received with respect to section 1244 stock. The basis of such 5 shares is determined by applying section 307 as if the 5 shares were received as a separate stock dividend made solely with respect to shares that meet the requirements of section 1244 stock at the time of the distribution. Thus, the basis of the 5 shares is $47.61 (5105 of $1,000).

(c) Recapitalizations.

(1) If, pursuant to a recapitalization described in section 368(a)(1)(E), common stock of a corporation is received by an individual or partnership in exchange for stock of such corporation meeting the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the exchange, such common stock shall be treated as meeting such requirements.

(2) If common stock is received pursuant to such a recapitalization partly in exchange for stock meeting the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the exchange and partly in exchange for stock not meeting such requirements, then only part of such common stock will be treated as meeting such requirements. Such part is the number of shares which bears the same ratio to the total number of shares of common stock so received as the basis of the shares transferred which meet such requirements bears to the basis of all the shares transferred for such common stock. The basis allocable, pursuant to section 358, to the common stock which is treated as meeting such requirements is limited to the basis of stock that meets such requirements transferred in the exchange.

(3) The provisions of subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 3. A owns 500 shares of voting common stock of Corporation X. Corporation X revises its capital structure to provide for two classes of common stock: Class A voting and Class B nonvoting. In a recapitalization described in subparagraph (E) of section 368(a)(1). A exchanges his 500 shares for 750 shares of Class B nonvoting stock. If the 500 shares meet all the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the exchange, the 750 shares received in the exchange are treated as meeting such requirements.

Example 4. B owns 500 shares of common stock of Corporation X with a basis of $5,000, and 100 shares of preferred stock of that corporation with a basis of $2,500. Pursuant to a recapitalization described in section 368(a)(1)(E), B exchanges all of his shares for 900 shares of common stock of Corporation X. The 500 common shares meet the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the exchange, but the 100 preferred shares do not meet such requirements since only common stock may qualify. Of the 900 common shares received, 600 shares ($5,000/$7,500 × 900 shares) are treated as meeting the requirements of section 1244 stock at the time of the exchange, because they are deemed to be received in exchange for the 500 common shares which met such requirements. The remaining 300 shares do not meet such requirements as they are not deemed to be received in exchange for section 1244 stock. The basis of the 600 shares is $5,000, the basis of the relinquished shares meeting the requirements of section 1244.

(d) Change of name, etc.

(1) If, pursuant to a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(F), common stock of a successor corporation is received by an individual or partnership in exchange for stock of the predecessor corporation meeting the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the exchange, such common stock shall be treated as meeting such requirements. If common stock is received pursuant to such a reorganization partly in exchange for stock meeting the requirements of section 1244 stock determinable at the time of the exchange and partly in exchange for stock not meeting such requirements, the principles of paragraph (c)(2) of this section apply in determinating the number of shares received which are treated as meeting the requirements of section 1244 stock and the basis of those shares.

(2) For purposes of paragraphs (1)(C) and (3)(A) of section 1244(c), a successor corporation in a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(F) shall be treated as the same corporation as its predecessor.

[T.D. 7779, 46 FR 29472, June 2, 1981]

§ 1.1244(d)-4 Net operating loss deduction.

(a) General rule. For purpose of section 172, relating to the net operating loss deduction, any amount of loss that is treated as an ordinary loss under section 1244 (taking into account the annual dollar limitation of that section) shall be treated as attributable to the trade or business of the taxpayer. Therefore, this loss is allowable in determining the taxpayer's net operating loss for a taxable year and is not subject to the application of section 172(d)(4), relating to nonbusiness deductions. A taxpayer may deduct the maximum of ordinary loss permitted under section 1244(b) even though all or a portion of the taxpayer's net operating loss carryback or carryover for the taxable year was, when incurred, a loss on section 1244 stock.

(b) Example. The provisions of this section may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: A, a single individual, computes a net operating loss of $15,000 for 1980 in accordance with the rules of § 1.172-3, relating to net operating loss in case of a taxpayer other than a corporation. Included within A's computation of this net operating loss is a deduction arising under section 1244 for a loss on small business stock. A had no taxable income in 1977, 1978, or 1979. Assume that A can carry over the entire $15,000 loss under the rules of section 172. In 1981 A has gross income of $75,000 and again sustains a loss on section 1244 stock. The amount of A's 1981 loss on section 1244 stock is $50,000. A may deduct the full $50,000 as an ordinary loss under section 1244 and the full $15,000 as a net operating loss carryover in 1981.

[T.D. 7779, 46 FR 29473, June 2, 1981]

§ 1.1244(e)-1 Records to be kept.

(a) By the corporation

(1) Mandatory records. A plan to issue pre-November 1978 stock must appear upon the records of the corporation. Any designation of post-November 1978 stock under § 1.1244(c)-2(b)(2) also must appear upon the records of the corporation.

(2) Discretionary records. In order to substantiate an ordinary loss deduction claimed by its shareholders, the corporation should maintain records showing the following:

(i) The persons to whom stock was issued, the date of issuance to these persons, and a description of the amount and type of consideration received from each;

(ii) If the consideration received is property, the basis in the hands of the shareholder and the fair market value of the property when received by the corporation;

(iii) The amount of money and the basis in the hands of the corporation of other property received for its stock, as a contribution to capital, and as paid-in surplus;

(iv) Financial statements of the corporation, such as its income tax returns, that identify the source of the gross receipt of the corporation for the period consisting of the five most recent taxable years of the corporation, or, if the corporation has not been in existence for 5 taxable years, for the period of the corporation's existence;

(v) Information relating to any tax-free stock dividend made with respect to section 1244 stock and any reorganization in which stock is transferred by the corporation in exchange for section 1244 stock; and

(vi) With respect to pre-November 1978 stock;

(A) Which certificates represent stock issued under the plan;

(B) The amount of money and the basis in the hands of the corporation of other property received after June 30, 1958, and before the adoption of the plan, for its stock, as a contribution to capital, and as paid-in surplus; and

(C) The equity capital of the corporation on the date of adoption of the plan.

(b) By the taxpayer. A person who claims an ordinary loss with respect to stock under section 1244 must have records sufficient to establish that the taxpayer is entitled to the loss and satisfies the requirements of section 1244. See also section 6001, requiring records to be maintained.

In addition, a person who owns section 1244 stock in a corporation shall maintain records sufficient to distinguish such stock from any other stock he may own in the corporation.

[T.D. 6495, 25 FR 9681, Oct. 8, 1960, as amended by T.D. 7779, 46 FR 29473, June 2, 1981; 46 FR 31881, June 18, 1981; T.D. 8594, 60 FR 20898, Apr. 28, 1995]

§ 1.1245-1 General rule for treatment of gain from dispositions of certain depreciable property.

(a) General.

(1) In general, section 1245(a)(1) provides that, upon a disposition of an item of section 1245 property, the amount by which the lower of

(i) the recomputed basis of the property, or

(ii) the amount realized on a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion (or the fair market value of the property on any other disposition), exceeds the adjusted basis of the property shall be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property which is neither a capital asset nor property described in section 1231 (that is, shall be recognized as ordinary income). The amount of such gain shall be determined separately for each item of section 1245 property. In general, the term recomputed basis means the adjusted basis of property plus all adjustments reflected in such adjusted basis on account of depreciation allowed or allowable for all periods after December 31, 1961. See section 1245(a)(2) and § 1.1245-2. Generally, the ordinary income treatment applies even though in the absence of section 1245 no gain would be recognized under the Code. For example, if a corporation distributes section 1245 property as a dividend, gain may be recognized as ordinary income to the corporation even though, in the absence of section 1245, section 311(a) would preclude any recognition of gain to the corporation. For the definition of section 1245 property, see section 1245(a)(3) and § 1.1245-3. For exceptions and limitations to the application of section 1245(a)(1), see section 1245(b) and § 1.1245-4.

(2) Section 1245(a)(1) applies to dispositions of section 1245 property in taxable years beginning after December 31, 1962, except that:

(i) In respect of section 1245 property which is an elevator or escalator, section 1245(a)(1) applies to dispositions after December 31, 1963, and

(ii) In respect of section 1245 property which is livestock (described in subparagraph (4) of § 1.1245-3(a)), section 1245(a)(1) applies to dispositions made in taxable years beginning after December 31, 1969, and

(iii) [Reserved].

(3) For purposes of this section and §§ 1.1245-2 through 1.1245-6, the term disposition includes a sale in a sale-and-leaseback transaction and a transfer upon the foreclosure of a security interest, but such term does not include a mere transfer of title to a creditor upon creation of a security interest or to a debtor upon termination of a security interest. Thus, for example, a disposition occurs upon a sale of property pursuant to a conditional sales contract even though the seller retains legal title to the property for purposes of security but a disposition does not occur when the seller ultimately gives up his security interest following payment by the purchaser.

(4) For purposes of applying section 1245, the facts and circumstances of each disposition shall be considered in determining what is the appropriate item of section 1245 property. A taxpayer may treat any number of units of section 1245 property in any particular depreciation account (as defined in § 1.167(a)-7) as one item of section 1245 property as long as it is reasonably clear, from the best estimates obtainable on the basis of all the facts and circumstances, that the amount of gain to which section 1245(a)(1) applies is not less than the total of the gain under section 1245(a)(1) which would be computed separately for each unit. Thus, for example, if 50 units of section 1245 property X, 25 units of section 1245 property Y, and other property are accounted for in one depreciation account, and if each such unit is sold at a gain in one transaction in which the total gain realized on the sale exceeds the sum of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis (as defined in paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1245-2) of each such unit on account of depreciation allowed or allowable for periods after December 31, 1961, all 75 units may be treated as one item of section 1245 property. If, however, 5 such units of section 1245 property Y were sold at a loss, then only 70 of such units (50 of X plus the 20 of Y sold at a gain) may be treated as one item of section 1245 property.

(5) In case of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of section 1245 and non-section 1245 property in one transaction, the total amount realized upon the disposition shall be allocated between the section 1245 property and the non-section 1245 property in proportion to their respective fair market values. In general, if a buyer and seller have adverse interests as to the allocation of the amount realized between the section 1245 property and the non-section 1245 property, any arm's length agreement between the buyer and the seller will establish the allocation. In the absence of such an agreement, the allocation shall be made by taking into account the appropriate facts and circumstances. Some of the facts and circumstances which shall be taken into account to the extent appropriate include, but are not limited to, a comparison between the section 1245 property and all the property disposed of in such transaction of

(i) the original cost and reproduction cost of construction, erection, or production,

(ii) the remaining economic useful life,

(iii) state of obsolescence, and

(iv) anticipated expenditures to maintain, renovate, or to modernize.

(b) Sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion.

(1) In the case of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of section 1245 property, the gain to which section 1245(a)(1) applies is the amount by which

(i) the lower of the amount realized upon the disposition of the property or the recomputed basis of the property, exceeds

(ii) the adjusted basis of the property.

(2) The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On January 1, 1964, Brown purchases section 1245 property for use in his manufacturing business. The property has a basis for depreciation of $3,300. After taking depreciation deductions of $1,300 (the amount allowable), Brown realizes after selling expenses the amount of $2,900 upon sale of the property on January 1, 1969. Brown's gain is $900 ($2,900 amount realized minus $2,000 adjusted basis). Since the amount realized upon disposition of the property ($2,900) is lower than its recomputed basis ($3,300, i.e., $2,000 adjusted basis plus $1,300 in depreciation deductions), the entire gain is treated as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1) and not as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that Brown exchanges the section 1245 property for land which has a fair market value of $3,700, thereby realizing a gain of $1,700 ($3,700 amount realized minus $2,000 adjusted basis). Since the recomputed basis of the property ($3,300) is lower than the amount realized upon its disposition ($3,700), the excess of recomputed basis over adjusted basis, or $1,300, is treated as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1). The remaining $400 of the gain may be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231.

(c) Other dispositions.

(1) In the case of a disposition of section 1245 property other than by way of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion, the gain to which section 1245(a)(1) applies is the amount by which

(i) the lower of the fair market value of the property on the date of disposition or the recomputed basis of the property, exceeds

(ii) the adjusted basis of the property. If property is transferred by a corporation to a shareholder for an amount less than its fair market value in a sale or exchange, for purposes of applying section 1245 such transfer shall be treated as a disposition other than by way of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion.

(2) The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. X Corporation distributes section 1245 property to its shareholders as a dividend. The property has an adjusted basis of $2,000 to the corporation, a recomputed basis of $3,300, and a fair market value of $3,100. Since the fair market value of the property ($3,100) is lower than its recomputed basis ($3,300), the excess of fair market value over adjusted basis, or $1,100, is treated under section 1245(a)(1) as ordinary income to the corporation even though, in the absence of section 1245, section 311(a) would preclude recognition of gain to the corporation.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that X Corporation distributes the section 1245 property to its shareholders in complete liquidation of the corporation. Assume further that section 1245(b)(3) does not apply and that the fair market value of the property is $3,800 at the time of the distribution. Since the recomputed basis of the property ($3,300) is lower than its fair market value ($3,800), the excess of recomputed basis over adjusted basis, or $1,300, is treated under section 1245(a)(1) as ordinary income to the corporation even though, in the absence of section 1245, section 336 would preclude recognition of gain to the corporation.

(d) Losses. Section 1245(a)(1) does not apply to losses. Thus, section 1245(a)(1) does not apply if a loss is realized upon a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of property, all of which is considered section 1245 property, nor does the section apply to a disposition of such property other than by way of sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion if at the time of the disposition the fair market value of such property is not greater than its adjusted basis.

(e) Treatment of partnership and partners.

(1) The manner of determining the amount of gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) to a partnership may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: A partnership sells for $63 section 1245 property which has an adjusted basis to the partnership of $30 and a recomputed basis to the partnership of $60. The partnership recognizes under section 1245(a)(1) gain of $30, i.e., the lower of the amount realized ($63) or recomputed basis ($60), minus adjusted basis ($30). This result would not be changed if one or more partners had, in respect of the property, a special basis adjustment described in section 743(b) or had taken depreciation deductions in respect of such special basis adjustment.

(2)

(i) Unless paragraph (e)(3) of this section applies, a partner's distributive share of gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) by the partnership is equal to the lesser of the partner's share of total gain from the disposition of the property (gain limitation) or the partner's share of depreciation or amortization with respect to the property (as determined under paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section). Any gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) by the partnership that is not allocated under the first sentence of this paragraph (e)(2)(i) (excess depreciation recapture) is allocated among the partners whose shares of total gain from the disposition of the property exceed their shares of depreciation or amortization with respect to the property. Excess depreciation recapture is allocated among those partners in proportion to their relative shares of the total gain (including gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1)) from the disposition of the property that is allocated to the partners who are not subject to the gain limitation. See Example 2 of paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section.

(ii)

(A) Subject to the adjustments described in paragraphs (e)(2)(ii)(B) and (e)(2)(ii)(C) of this section, a partner's share of depreciation or amortization with respect to property equals the total amount of allowed or allowable depreciation or amortization previously allocated to that partner with respect to the property.

(B) If a partner transfers a partnership interest, a share of depreciation or amortization must be allocated to the transferee partner as it would have been allocated to the transferor partner. If the partner transfers a portion of the partnership interest, a share of depreciation or amortization proportionate to the interest transferred must be allocated to the transferee partner.

(C)

(1) A partner's share of depreciation or amortization with respect to property contributed by the partner includes the amount of depreciation or amortization allowed or allowable to the partner for the period before the property is contributed.

(2) A partner's share of depreciation or amortization with respect to property contributed by a partner is adjusted to account for any curative allocations. (See § 1.704-3(c) for a description of the traditional method with curative allocations.) The contributing partner's share of depreciation or amortization with respect to the contributed property is decreased (but not below zero) by the amount of any curative allocation of ordinary income to the contributing partner with respect to that property and by the amount of any curative allocation of deduction or loss (other than capital loss) to the noncontributing partners with respect to that property. A noncontributing partner's share of depreciation or amortization with respect to the contributed property is increased by the noncontributing partner's share of any curative allocation of ordinary income to the contributing partner with respect to that property and by the amount of any curative allocation of deduction or loss (other than capital loss) to the noncontributing partner with respect to that property. The partners' shares of depreciation or amortization with respect to property from which curative allocations of depreciation or amortization are taken is determined without regard to those curative allocations. See Example 3(iii) of paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section.

(3) A partner's share of depreciation or amortization with respect to property contributed by a partner is adjusted to account for any remedial allocations. (See § 1.704-3(d) for a description of the remedial allocation method.) The contributing partner's share of depreciation or amortization with respect to the contributed property is decreased (but not below zero) by the amount of any remedial allocation of income to the contributing partner with respect to that property. A noncontributing partner's share of depreciation or amortization with respect to the contributed property is increased by the amount of any remedial allocation of depreciation or amortization to the noncontributing partner with respect to that property. See Example 3(iv) of paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section.

(4) If, under paragraphs (e)(2)(ii)(C)(2) and (e)(2)(ii)(C)(3) of this section, the partners' shares of depreciation or amortization with respect to a contributed property exceed the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property under § 1.1245-2(a) at the partnership level, then the partnership's gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) with respect to that property is allocated among the partners in proportion to their relative shares of depreciation or amortization (subject to any gain limitation that might apply).

(5) This paragraph (e)(2)(ii)(C) also applies in determining a partner's share of depreciation or amortization with respect to property for which differences between book value and adjusted tax basis are created when a partnership revalues partnership property pursuant to § 1.704-1(b)(2)(iv)(f).

(iii) Examples. The application of this paragraph (e)(2) may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Recapture allocations.

(i) Facts. A and B each contribute $5,000 cash to form AB, a general partnership. The partnership agreement provides that depreciation deductions will be allocated 90 percent to A and 10 percent to B, and, on the sale of depreciable property, A will first be allocated gain to the extent necessary to equalize A's and B's capital accounts. Any remaining gain will be allocated 50 percent to A and 50 percent to B. In its first year of operations, AB purchases depreciable equipment for $5,000. AB depreciates the equipment over its 5-year recovery period and elects to use the straight-line method. In its first year of operations, AB's operating income equals its expenses (other than depreciation). (To simplify this example, AB's depreciation deductions are determined without regard to any first-year depreciation conventions.)

(ii) Year 1. In its first year of operations, AB has $1,000 of depreciation from the partnership equipment. In accordance with the partnership agreement, AB allocates 90 percent ($900) of the depreciation to A and 10 percent ($100) of the depreciation to B. At the end of the year, AB sells the equipment for $5,200, recognizing $1,200 of gain ($5,200 amount realized less $4,000 adjusted tax basis). In accordance with the partnership agreement, the first $800 of gain is allocated to A to equalize the partners' capital accounts, and the remaining $400 of gain is allocated $200 to A and $200 to B.

(iii) Recapture allocations. $1,000 of the gain from the sale of the equipment is treated as section 1245(a)(1) gain. Under paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section, each partner's share of the section 1245(a)(1) gain is equal to the lesser of the partner's share of total gain recognized on the sale of the equipment or the partner's share of total depreciation with respect to the equipment. Thus, A's share of the section 1245(a)(1) gain is $900 (the lesser of A's share of the total gain ($1,000) and A's share of depreciation ($900)). B's share of the section 1245(a)(1) gain is $100 (the lesser of B's share of the total gain ($200) and B's share of depreciation ($100)). Accordingly, $900 of the $1,000 of total gain allocated to A is treated as ordinary income and $100 of the $200 of total gain allocated to B is treated as ordinary income.

Example 2. Recapture allocation subject to gain limitation.

(i) Facts. A, B, and C form general partnership ABC. The partnership agreement provides that depreciation deductions will be allocated equally among the partners, but that gain from the sale of depreciable property will be allocated 75 percent to A and 25 percent to B. ABC purchases depreciable personal property for $300 and subsequently allocates $100 of depreciation deductions each to A, B, and C, reducing the adjusted tax basis of the property to $0. ABC then sells the property for $440. ABC allocates $330 of the gain to A (75 percent of $440) and allocates $110 of the gain to B (25 percent of $440). No gain is allocated to C.

(ii) Application of gain limitation. Each partner's share of depreciation with respect to the property is $100. C's share of the total gain from the disposition of the property, however, is $0. As a result, under the gain limitation provision in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section, C's share of section 1245(a)(1) gain is limited to $0.

(iii) Excess depreciation recapture. Under paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section, the $100 of section 1245(a)(1) gain that cannot be allocated to C under the gain limitation provision (excess depreciation recapture) is allocated to A and B (the partners not subject to the gain limitation at the time of the allocation) in proportion to their relative shares of total gain from the disposition of the property. A's relative share of the total gain allocated to A and B is 75 percent ($330 of $440 total gain). B's relative share of the total gain allocated to A and B is 25 percent ($110 of $440 total gain). However, under the gain limitation provision of paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section, B cannot be allocated 25 percent of the excess depreciation recapture ($25) because that would result in a total allocation of $125 of depreciation recapture to B (a $100 allocation equal to B's share of depreciation plus a $25 allocation of excess depreciation recapture), which is in excess of B's share of the total gain from the disposition of the property ($110). Therefore, only $10 of excess depreciation recapture is allocated to B and the remaining $90 of excess depreciation recapture is allocated to A. A is not subject to the gain limitation because A's share of the total gain ($330) still exceeds A's share of section 1245(a)(1) gain ($190). Accordingly, all $110 of the total gain allocated to B is treated as ordinary income ($100 share of depreciation allocated to B plus $10 of excess depreciation recapture) and $190 of the total gain allocated to A is treated as ordinary income ($100 share of depreciation allocated to A plus $90 of excess depreciation recapture).

Example 3. Determination of partners' shares of depreciation with respect to contributed property.

(i) Facts.C and D form partnership CD as equal partners. C contributes depreciable personal property C1 with an adjusted tax basis of $800 and a fair market value of $2,800. Prior to the contribution, C claimed $200 of depreciation from C1. At the time of the contribution, C1 is depreciable under the straight-line method and has four years remaining on its 5-year recovery period. D contributes $2,800 cash, which CD uses to purchase depreciable personal property D1, which is depreciable over seven years under the straight-line method. (To simplify the example, all depreciation is determined without regard to any first-year depreciation conventions.)

(ii) Traditional method. C1 generates $700 of book depreciation (14 of $2,800 book value) and $200 of tax depreciation (14 of $800 adjusted tax basis) each year. C and D will each be allocated $350 of book depreciation from C1 in year 1. Under the traditional method of making section 704(c) allocations, D will be allocated the entire $200 of tax depreciation from C1 in year 1. D1 generates $400 of book and tax depreciation each year (17 of $2,800 book value and adjusted tax basis). C and D will each be allocated $200 of book and tax depreciation from D1 in year 1. As a result, after the first year of partnership operations, C's share of depreciation with respect to C1 is $200 (the depreciation taken by C prior to contribution) and D's share of depreciation with respect to C1 is $200 (the amount of tax depreciation allocated to D). C and D each have a $200 share of depreciation with respect to D1. At the end of four years, C's share of depreciation with respect to C1 will be $200 (the depreciation taken by C prior to contribution) and D's share of depreciation with respect to C1 will be $800 (four years of $200 depreciation per year). At the end of four years, C and D will each have an $800 share of depreciation with respect to D1 (four years of $200 depreciation per year).

(iii) Effect of curative allocations. (A) Year 1. If the partnership elects to make curative allocations under § 1.704-3(c) using depreciation from D1, the results will be the same as under the traditional method, except that $150 of the $200 of tax depreciation from D1 that would be allocated to C under the traditional method will be allocated to D as additional depreciation with respect to C1. As a result, after the first year of partnership operations, C's share of depreciation with respect to C1 will be reduced to $50 (the total depreciation taken by C prior to contribution ($200) decreased by the amount of the curative allocation to D ($150)). D's share of depreciation with respect to C1 will be $350 (the depreciation allocated to D under the traditional method ($200) increased by the amount of the curative allocation to D ($150)). C and D will each have a $200 share of depreciation with respect to D1.

(B) Year 4. At the end of four years, C's share of depreciation with respect to C1 will be reduced to $0 (the total depreciation taken by C prior to contribution ($200) decreased, but not below zero, by the amount of the curative allocations to D ($600)), and D's share of depreciation with respect to C1 will be $1,400 (the total depreciation allocated to D under the traditional method ($800) increased by the amount of the curative allocations to D ($600)). However, CD's section 1245(a)(1) gain with respect to C1 will not be more than $1,000 (CD's tax depreciation ($800) plus C's tax depreciation prior to contribution ($200)). Under paragraph (e)(2)(ii)(C)(4) of this section, because the partners' shares of depreciation with respect to C1 exceed the adjustments reflected in the property's adjusted basis, CD's section 1245(a)(1) gain will be allocated in proportion to the partners' relative shares of depreciation with respect to C1. Because C's share of depreciation with respect to C1 is $0, and D's share of depreciation with respect to C1 is $1,400, all of CD's $1,000 of section 1245(a)(1) gain will be allocated to D. At the end of four years, C and D will each have an $800 share of depreciation with respect to D1 (four years of $200 depreciation per year).

(iv) Effect of remedial allocations. (A) Year 1. If the partnership elects to make remedial allocations under § 1.704-3(d), there will be $600 of book depreciation from C1 in year 1. (Under the remedial allocation method, the amount by which C1's book basis ($2,800) exceeds its tax basis ($800) is depreciated over a 5-year life, rather than a 4-year life.) C and D will each be allocated one-half ($300) of the total book depreciation. As under the traditional method, D will be allocated all $200 of tax depreciation from C1. Because the ceiling rule would cause a disparity of $100 between D's book and tax allocations of depreciation, D will also receive a $100 remedial allocation of depreciation with respect to C1, and C will receive a $100 remedial allocation of income with respect to C1. As a result, after the first year of partnership operations, D's share of depreciation with respect to C1 is $300 (the depreciation allocated to D under the traditional method ($200) increased by the amount of the remedial allocation ($100)). C's share of depreciation with respect to C1 is $100 (the total depreciation taken by C prior to contribution ($200) decreased by the amount of the remedial allocation of income ($100)). C and D will each have a $200 share of depreciation with respect to D1.

(B) Year 5. At the end of five years, C's share of depreciation with respect to C1 will be $0 (the total depreciation taken by C prior to contribution ($200) decreased, but not below zero, by the total amount of the remedial allocations of income to C ($600)). D's share of depreciation with respect to C1 will be $1,400 (the total depreciation allocated to D under the traditional method ($800) increased by the total amount of the remedial allocations of depreciation to D ($600)). However, CD's section 1245(a)(1) gain with respect to C1 will not be more than $1,000 (CD's tax depreciation ($800) plus C's tax depreciation prior to contribution ($200)). Under paragraph (e)(2)(ii)(C)(4) of this section, because the partners' shares of depreciation with respect to C1 exceed the adjustments reflected in the property's adjusted basis, CD's section 1245(a)(1) gain will be allocated in proportion to the partners' relative shares of depreciation with respect to C1. Because C's share of depreciation with respect to C1 is $0, and D's share of depreciation with respect to C1 is $1,400, all of CD's $1,000 of section 1245(a)(1) gain will be allocated to D. At the end of five years, C and D will each have a $1,000 share of depreciation with respect to D1 (five years of $200 depreciation per year).

(iv) Effective date. This paragraph (e)(2) is effective for properties acquired by a partnership on or after August 20, 1997. However, partnerships may rely on this paragraph (e)(2) for properties acquired before August 20, 1997 and disposed of on or after August 20, 1997.

(3)

(i) If (a) a partner had a special basis adjustment under section 743(b) in respect of section 1245 property, or (b) on the date he acquired his partnership interest by way of a sale or exchange (or upon death of another partner) the partnership owned section 1245 property and an election under section 754 (relating to optional adjustment to basis of partnership property) was in effect with respect to the partnership, then the amount of gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) by him upon a disposition by the partnership of such property shall be determined under this subparagraph.

(ii) There shall be allocated to such partner, in the same proportion as the partnership's total gain is allocated to him as his distributive share under section 704, a portion of (a) the common partnership adjusted basis for the property, and (b) the amount realized by the partnership upon the disposition, or, if nothing is realized, the fair market value of the property. There shall also be allocated to him, in the same proportion as the partnership's gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) is allocated under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph as his distributive share of such gain, a portion of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis (as defined in paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1245-2) of such property. If on the date he acquired his partnership interest by way of a sale or exchange the partnership owned such property and an election under section 754 was in effect, then for purposes of the preceding sentence the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of such property on such date shall be deemed to be zero. For special rules relating to the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of property after partnership transactions, see paragraph (c)(6) of § 1.1245-2.

(iii) The partner's adjusted basis in respect of the property shall be deemed to be (a) the portion of the partnership's adjusted basis for the property allocated to the partner under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, (b) increased by the amount of any special basis adjustment described in section 743(b)(1) (or decreased by the amount of any special basis adjustment described in section 743(b)(2) which the partner may have in respect of the property on the date the partnership disposed of the property.

(iv) The partner's recomputed basis in respect of the property shall be deemed to be (a) the sum of the partner's adjusted basis for the property, as determined in subdivision (iii) of this subparagraph, plus the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis (as defined in paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1245-2) for the property allocated to the partner under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, (b) increased by the amount by which any special basis adjustment described in section 743(b)(1) (or decreased by the amount by which any special basis adjustment described in section 743(b)(2)) in respect of the property was reduced, but only to the extent such amount was applied to adjust the amount of the deductions allowed or allowable to the partner for depreciation or amortization of section 1245 property attributable to periods referred to in paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1245-2. The terms allowed or allowable, depreciation or amortization, and attributable to periods shall have the meanings assigned to these terms in paragraph (a) of § 1.1245-2.

(4) The application of subparagraph (3) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

A, B, and C each hold a one-third interest in calendar year partnership ABC. On December 31, 1962, the firm holds section 1245 property which has an adjusted basis of $30,000 and a recomputed basis of $33,000. Depreciation deductions in respect of the property for 1962 were $3,000. On January 1, 1963, when D purchases C's partnership interest, the election under section 754 is in effect and a $5,000 special basis adjustment is made in respect of D to his one-third share of the common partnership adjusted basis for the property. For 1963 and 1964 the partnership deducts $6,000 as depreciation in respect of the property, thereby reducing its adjusted basis to $24,000, and D deducts $2,800, i.e., his distributive share of partnership depreciation ($2,000) plus depreciation in respect of his special basis adjustment ($800). On March 15, 1965, the partnership sells the property for $48,000. Since the partnership's recomputed basis for the property ($33,000, i.e., $24,000 adjusted basis plus $9,000 in depreciation deductions) is lower than the amount realized upon the sale ($48,000), the excess of recomputed basis over adjusted basis, or $9,000, is treated as partnership gain under section 1245(a)(1). D's distributive share of such gain is $3,000 (13 of $9,000). However, the amount of gain recognized by D under section 1245 (a)(1) is only $2,800, determined as follows:

(1) Adjusted basis:
D's portion of partnership adjusted basis (13 of $24,000) $8,000
D's special basis adjustment as of December 31, 1964 ($5,000 minus $800) 4,200
D's adjusted basis $12,200
(2) Recomputed basis:
D's adjusted basis 12,200
D's portion of partnership depreciation for 1963 and 1964, i.e., for periods after he acquired his partnership interest (13 of $6,000) 2,000
Depreciation for 1963 and 1964 in respect of D's special basis adjustment 800
D's recomputed basis
15,000
(3) D's portion of amount realized by partnership (13 of $48,000) 16,000
(4) Gain recognized to D under section 1245(a)(1), i.e., the lower of (2) or (3), minus (1) 2,800

[T.D. 6832, 30 FR 8576, July 7, 1965, as amended by T.D. 7084, 36 FR 268, Jan. 8, 1971; T.D. 7141, 36 FR 18793, Sept. 22, 1971; T.D. 8730, 62 FR 44216, Aug. 20, 1997]

§ 1.1245-2 Definition of recomputed basis.

(a) General rule

(1) Recomputed basis defined. The term recomputed basis means, with respect to any property, an amount equal to the sum of:

(i) The adjusted basis of the property, as defined in section 1011, plus

(ii) The amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis.

(2) Definition of adjustments reflected in adjusted basis. The term adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis means:

(i) With respect to any property other than property described in subdivision (ii), (iii), or (iv) of this subparagraph, the amount of the adjustments attributable to periods after December 31, 1961,

(ii) With respect to an elevator or escalator, the amount of the adjustments attributable to periods after June 30, 1963,

(iii) With respect to livestock (described in subparagraph (4) of § 1.1245-3(a)), the amount of the adjustments attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, or

(iv) [Reserved]

which are reflected in the adjusted basis of such property on account of deductions allowed or allowable for depreciation or amortization (within the meaning of subparagraph (3) of this paragraph). For cases where the taxpayer can establish that the amount allowed for any period was less than the amount allowable, see subparagraph (7) of this paragraph. For determination of adjusted basis of property in a multiple asset account, see paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.167(a)-8.

(3) Meaning of depreciation or amortization.

(i) For purposes of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the term depreciation or amortization includes allowances (and amounts treated as allowances) for depreciation (or amortization in lieu thereof), and deductions for amortization of emergency facilities under section 168. Thus, for example, such term includes a reasonable allowance for exhaustion, wear and tear (including a reasonable allowance for obsolescence) under section 167, an expense allowance (additional first-year depreciation allowance for property placed in service before January 1, 1981), under section 179, an expenditure treated as an amount allowed under section 167 by reason of the application of section 182(d)(2)(B) (relating to expenditures by farmers for clearing land), and a deduction for depreciation of improvements under section 611 (relating to depletion). For further examples, the term depreciation or amortization includes periodic deductions referred to in § 1.162-11 in respect of a specified sum paid for the acquisition of a leasehold and in respect of the cost to a lessee of improvements on property of which he is the lessee. However, such term does not include deductions for the periodic payment of rent.

(ii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: On January 1, 1966, Smith purchases for $1,000, and places in service, an item of property described in section 1245(a) (3)(A). Smith deducts an additional first-year allowance for depreciation under section 179 of $200. Accordingly, the basis of the property for purposes of depreciation is $800 on January 1, 1966. Between that date and January 1, 1974, Smith deducts $640 in depreciation (the amount allowable) with respect to the property, thereby reducing its adjusted basis to $160. Since this adjusted basis reflects deductions for depreciation and amortization (within the meaning of this subparagraph) amounting to $840 ($200 plus $640), the recomputed basis of the property is $1,000 ($160 plus $840).

(4) Adjustments of other taxpayers or in respect of other property.

(i) For purposes of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the adjustments reflected in adjusted basis on account of depreciation or amortization which must be taken into account in determining recomputed basis are not limited to those adjustments on account of depreciation or amortization with respect to the property disposed of, nor are such adjustments limited to those on account of depreciation or amortization allowed or allowable to the taxpayer disposing of such property. Except as provided in subparagraph (7) of this paragraph, all such adjustments are taken into account, whether the deductions were allowed or allowable in respect of the same or other property and whether to the taxpayer or to any other person. For manner of determining the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of property immediately after certain dispositions, see paragraph (c) of this section.

(ii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

On January 1, 1966, Jones purchases machine X for use in his trade or business. The machine, which is section 1245 property, has a basis for depreciation of $10,000. After taking depreciation deductions of $2,000 (the amount allowable), Jones transfers the machine to his son as a gift on January 1, 1968. Since the exception for gifts in section 1245(b)(1) applies, Jones does not recognize gain under section 1245(a)(1). The son's adjusted basis for the machine is $8,000. On January 1, 1969, after taking a depreciation deduction of $1,000 (the amount allowable), the son exchanges machine X for machine Y in a like kind exchange described in section 1031. Since the exception for like kind exchanges in section 1245(b)(4) applies, the son does not recognize gain under section 1245(a)(1). The son's adjusted basis for machine Y is $7,000. In 1969, the son takes a depreciation deduction of $1,000 (the amount allowable) in respect of machine Y. The son sells machine Y on June 30, 1970. No depreciation was allowed or allowable for 1970, the year of the sale. The recomputed basis of machine Y on June 30, 1970, is determined in the following manner:

Adjusted basis $6,000
Adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis:
Depreciation deducted by Jones for 1966 and 1967 on machine X 2,000
Depreciation deducted by son for 1968 on machine X 1,000
Depreciation deducted by son for 1969 on machine Y 1,000
Total adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis $4,000
Recomputed basis 10,000

(5) Adjustments reflected in adjusted basis of property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B). For purposes of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B), on account of depreciation or amortization which must be taken into account in determining recomputed basis, may include deductions attributable to periods during which the property is not used as an integral part of an activity, or does not constitute a facility, specified in section 1245(a)(3)(B) (i) or (ii). Thus, for example, if depreciation deductions taken with respect to such property after December 31, 1961, amount to $10,000 (the amount allowable), of which $6,000 is attributable to periods during which the property is used as an integral part of a specified activity or constitutes a specified facility, then the entire $10,000 of depreciation deductions are adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis for purposes of determining recomputed basis. Moreover, if the property was never so used but was acquired in a transaction to which section 1245(b)(4) (relating to like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions) applies, and if by reason of the application of paragraph (d)(3) of § 1.1245-4 the property is considered as section 1245 property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B), then the entire $10,000 of depreciation deductions would also be adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis for purposes of determining recomputed basis.

(6) Allocation of adjustments attributable to periods after certain dates.

(i) For purposes of determining recomputed basis, the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of property other than property described in subparagraph (2) (ii), (iii), or (iv) of this paragraph are limited to adjustments attributable to periods after December 31, 1961. Accordingly, if depreciation deducted with respect to such property of a calendar year taxpayer is $1,000 a year (the amount allowable) for each of 10 years beginning with 1956, only the depreciation deducted in 1962 and succeeding years shall be treated as reflected in the adjusted basis for purposes of determining recomputed basis. With respect to a taxable year beginning in 1961 and ending in 1962, the deduction for depreciation or amortization shall be ascertained by applying the principles stated in paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.167(a)-8 (relating to determination of adjusted basis of retired asset). The amount of the deduction, determined in such manner, shall be allocated on a daily basis in order to determine the portion thereof which is attributable to a period after December 31, 1961. Thus, for example, if a taxpayer, whose fiscal year ends on May 31, 1962, acquires section 1245 property on November 12, 1961, and the deduction for depreciation attributable to the property for such fiscal year is ascertained (under the principles of paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.167(a)-8) to be $400, then the portion thereof attributable to a period after December 31, 1961, is $302 (151200 of $400). If, however, the property were acquired by such taxpayer after December 31, 1961, the entire deduction for depreciation attributable to the property for such fiscal year would be allocable to a period after December 31, 1961. For treatment of certain normal retirements described in paragraph (e)(2) of § 1.167(a)-8, see paragraph (c) of § 1.1245-6. For principles of determining the amount of adjustments for depreciation or amortization reflected in the adjusted basis of property upon an abnormal retirement of property in a multiple asset account, see paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.167(a)-8.

(ii) For purposes of determining recomputed basis, the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of an elevator or escalator are limited to adjustments attributable to periods after June 30, 1963.

(iii) For purposes of determining recomputed basis, the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of livestock (described in subparagraph (2)(iii) of this paragraph) are limited to adjustments attributable to periods after December 31, 1969.

(7) Depreciation or amortization allowed or allowable. For purposes of determining recomputed basis, generally all adjustments (for periods after Dec. 31, 1961, or, in the case of property described in subparagraph (2) (ii), (iii), or (iv) of this paragraph, for periods after the applicable date) attributable to allowed or allowable depreciation or amortization must be taken into account. See section 1016(a)(2) and the regulations thereunder for the meaning of allowed and allowable. However, if a taxpayer can establish by adequate records or other sufficient evidence that the amount allowed for depreciation or amortization for any period was less than the amount allowable for such period, the amount to be taken into account for such period shall be the amount allowed. No adjustment is to be made on account of the tax imposed by section 56 (relating to the minimum tax for tax preferences). See paragraph (b) of this section (relating to records to be kept and information to be filed). For example, assume that in the year 1967 it becomes necessary to determine the recomputed basis of property, the $500 adjusted basis of which reflects adjustments of $1,000 with respect to depreciation deductions allowable for periods after December 31, 1961. If the taxpayer can establish by adequate records or other sufficient evidence that he had been allowed deductions amounting to only $800 for the period, then in determining recomputed basis the amount added to adjusted basis with respect to the $1,000 adjustments to basis for the period will be only $800.

(8) Exempt organizations. In respect of property disposed of by an organization which is or was exempt from income taxes (within the meaning of section 501(a)), adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis (within the meaning of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph) shall include only depreciation or amortization allowed or allowable

(i) in computing unrelated business taxable income (as defined in section 512(a), or

(ii) in computing taxable income of the organization (or a predecessor organization) for a period during which it was not exempt or, by reason of the application of section 502, 503, or 504, was denied its exemption.

(b) Records to be kept. In any case in which it is necessary to determine recomputed basis of an item of section 1245 property, the taxpayer shall have available permanent records of all the facts necessary to determine with reasonable accuracy the amount of such recomputed basis, including the following:

(1) The date, and the manner in which, the property was acquired,

(2) The taxpayer's basis on the date the property was acquired and the manner in which the basis was determined,

(3) The amount and date of all adjustments to the basis of the property allowed or allowable to the taxpayer for depreciation or amortization and the amount and date of any other adjustments by the taxpayer to the basis of the property,

(4) In the case of section 1245 property which has an adjusted basis reflecting adjustments for depreciation or amortization taken by the taxpayer with respect to other property, or by another taxpayer with respect to the same or other property, the information described in subparagraphs (1), (2), and (3) of this paragraph with respect to such other property or such other taxpayer.

(c) Adjustments reflected in adjusted basis immediately after certain acquisitions

(1) Zero.

(i) If on the date a person acquires property his basis for the property is determined solely by reference to its cost (within the meaning of section 1012), then on such date the amount of the adjustments reflected in his adjusted basis for the property is zero.

(ii) If on the date a person acquires property his basis for the property is determined solely by reason of the application of section 301(d) (relating to basis of property received in corporate distribution) or section 334(a) (relating to basis of property received in a liquidation in which gain or loss is recognized), then on such date the amount of the adjustments reflected in his adjusted basis for the property is zero.

(iii) If on the date a person acquires property his basis for the property is determined solely under the rules of section 334 (b)(2) or (c) relating to basis of property received in certain corporate liquidations), then on such date the amount of the adjustments reflected in his adjusted basis for the property is zero.

(iv) If as of the date a person acquires property from a decedent such person's basis is determined, by reason of the application of section 1014(a), solely by reference to the fair market value of the property on the date of the decedent's death or on the applicable date provided in section 2032 (relating to alternate valuation date), then on such date the amount of the adjustments reflected in his adjusted basis for the property is zero.

(2) Gifts and certain tax-free transactions.

(i) If property is disposed of in a transaction described in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, then the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property in the hands of a transferee immediately after the disposition shall be an amount equal to:

(a) The amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property in the hands of the transferor immediately before the disposition, minus

(b) The amount of any gain taken into account under section 1245(a)(1) by the transferor upon the disposition.

(ii) The transactions referred to in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section are:

(A) A disposition that is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift (see § 1.1245-4(a)(3));

(B) A disposition (other than a disposition to which section 1245(b)(6)(A) applies) that is described in section 1245(b)(3) (relating to certain tax-free transactions);

(C) An exchange described in § 1.1245-4(e)(2) (relating to transfers described in section 1081(d)(1)(A)); or

(D) A transfer at death where the basis of property in the hands of the transferee is determined under section 1022.

(iii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Jones transfers section 1245 property to a corporation in exchange for stock of the corporation and $1,000 cash in a transaction which qualifies under section 351 (relating to transfer to a corporation controlled by transferor). Before the exchange the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property is $3,000. Upon the exchange $1,000 gain is recognized under section 1245(a)(1). Immediately after the exchange, the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property in the hands of the corporation is $2,000 (that is, $3,000 minus $1,000).

(3) Certain transfers at death.

(i) If property is acquired in a transfer at death to which section 1245(b)(2) applies, the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of property in the hands of the transferee immediately after the transfer shall be the amount (if any) of depreciation or amortization deductions allowed the transferee before the decedent's death, to the extent that the basis of the property (determined under section 1014(a)) is required to be reduced under the second sentence of section 1014(b)(9) (relating to adjustments to basis where property is acquired from a decedent prior to his death).

(ii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: H purchases section 1245 property in 1965 which he immediately conveys to himself and W, his wife, as tenants by the entirety. Under local law each spouse is entitled to one-half the income from the property. H and W file joint income tax returns for calendar years 1965, 1966, and 1967. Over the 3 years, depreciation deductions amounting to $4,000 (the amount allowable) are allowed in respect of the property of which one-half thereof, or $2,000, is allocable to W. On January 1, 1968, H dies and the entire value of the property at the date of death is included in H's gross estate. Since W's basis for the property (determined under section 1014(a)) is reduced (under the second sentence of section 1014(b)(9)) by the $2,000 depreciation deductions allowed W before H's death, the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property in the hands of W immediately after H's death amount to $2,000.

(4) Property received in a like kind exchange, involuntary conversion, or F.C.C. transaction.

(i) If property is acquired in a transaction described in subdivision

(ii) of this subparagraph then immediately after the acquisition (and before applying subparagraph (5) of this paragraph, if applicable) the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property acquired shall be an amount equal to:

(a) The amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property disposed of immediately before the disposition, minus

(b) The sum of (1) the amount of any gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) upon the disposition, plus (2) the amount of gain (if any) referred to in subparagraph (5)(ii) of this paragraph.

(ii) The transactions referred to in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph are:

(a) A disposition which is a like kind exchange or an involuntary conversion to which section 1245(b)(4) applies, or

(b) A disposition to which the provisions of section 1071 and paragraph (e)(1) of § 1.1245-4 apply.

(iii) The provisions of subdivisions (i) and (ii) of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Smith exchanges machine A for machine B and $1,000 cash in a like kind exchange. Gain of $1,000 is recognized under section 1245(a)(1). If before the exchange the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of machine A was $5,000, the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of machine B after the exchange is $4,000 (that is, $5,000 minus $1,000).

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that machine A is destroyed by fire, that $5,000 in insurance proceeds are received of which $4,000 is used to purchase machine B, and that Smith properly elects under section 1033(a)(3)(A) to limit recognition of gain. The result is the same as in example (1), that is, the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of machine B is $4,000 ($5,000 minus $1,000).

(iv) If more than one item of section 1245 property is acquired in a transaction referred to in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, the total amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted bases of the items acquired shall be allocated to such items in proportion to their respective adjusted bases.

(5) Property after a reduction in basis pursuant to election under section 1071 or application of section 1082(a)(2). If the basis of section 1245 property is reduced pursuant to an election under section 1071 (relating to gain from sale or exchange to effectuate policies of F.C.C.), or the application of section 1082(a)(2) (relating to sale or exchange in obedience to order of S.E.C.), then immediately after the basis reduction the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property shall be the sum of:

(i) The amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property immediately before the basis reduction (but after applying subparagraph (4) of this paragraph, if applicable), plus

(ii) The amount of gain which was not recognized under section 1245(a)(1) by reason of the reduction in the basis of the property. See paragraph (e)(1) of § 1.1245-4.

(6) Partnership property after certain transactions.

(i) For the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of property immediately after certain distributions of the property by a partnership to a partner, see section 1245(b)(6)(B).

(ii) If under paragraph (b)(3) of § 1.751-1 (relating to certain distributions of partnership property other than section 751 property treated as sales or exchanges) a partnership is treated as purchasing section 1245 property (or a portion thereof) from a distributee who relinquishes his interest in such property (or portion), then on the date of such purchase the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of such purchased property (or portion) shall be zero.

(iii) See paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of § 1.1245-1 for the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of partnership property in respect of a partner who acquired his partnership interest in certain transactions when an election under section 754 (relating to optional adjustments to basis of partnership property) was in effect.

(d) Effective/applicability date. This section applies on and after January 19, 2017. For rules before January 19, 2017, see § 1.1245-2 as contained in 26 CFR part 1 revised as of April 1, 2016.

[T.D. 6832, 30 FR 8578, July 7, 1965, as amended by T.D. 7084, 36 FR 268, Jan. 8, 1971; T.D. 7141, 36 FR 18793, Sept. 22, 1971; 36 FR 19160, Sept. 30, 1971; T.D. 7564, 43 FR 40496, Sept. 12, 1978; T.D. 8121, 52 FR 414, Jan. 6, 1987; T.D. 9811, 82 FR 6241, Jan. 19, 2017]

§ 1.1245-3 Definition of section 1245 property.

(a) In general.

(1) The term section 1245 property means any property (other than livestock excluded by the effective date limitation in subparagraph (4) of this paragraph) which is or has been property of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation provided in section 167 and which is either:

(i) Personal property (within the meaning of paragraph (b) of this section),

(ii) Property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B) (see paragraph (c) of this section), or

(iii) An elevator or an escalator within the meaning of subparagraph (C) of section 48(a)(1) (relating to the definition of section 38 property for purposes of the investment credit), but without regard to the limitations in such subparagraph (C).

(2) If property is section 1245 property under a subdivision of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, a leasehold of such property is also section 1245 property under such subdivision. Thus, for example, if A owns personal property which is section 1245 property under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph, and if A leases the personal property to B, B's leasehold is also section 1245 property under such provision. For a further example, if C owns and leases to D for a single lump-sum payment of $100,000 property consisting of land and a fully equipped factory building thereon, and if 40 percent of the fair market value of such property is properly allocable to section 1245 property, then 40 percent of D's leasehold is also section 1245 property. A leasehold of land is not section 1245 property.

(3) Even though property may not be of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation in the hands of the taxpayer, such property may nevertheless be section 1245 property if the taxpayer's basis for the property is determined by reference to its basis in the hands of a prior owner of the property and such property was of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation in the hands of such prior owner, or if the taxpayer's basis for the property is determined by reference to the basis of other property that in the hands of the taxpayer was property of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation, or if the taxpayer's basis for the property is determined under section 1022 and such property was of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation in the hands of the decedent. Thus, for example, if a father uses an automobile in his trade or business during a period after December 31, 1961, and then gives the automobile to his son as a gift for the son's personal use, the automobile is section 1245 property in the hands of the son.

(4) Section 1245 property includes livestock, but only with respect to taxable years beginning after December 31, 1969. For purposes of section 1245, the term livestock includes horses, cattle, hogs, sheep, goats, and mink and other furbearing animals, irrespective of the use to which they are put or the purpose for which they are held.

(b) Personal property defined. The term personal property means:

(1) Tangible personal property (as defined in paragraph (c) of § 1.48-1, relating to the definition of section 38 property for purposes of the investment credit), and

(2) Intangible personal property.

(c) Property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B).

(1) The term property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B) means tangible property of the requisite depreciable character other than personal property (and other than a building and its structural components), but only if there are adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property (within the meaning of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1245-2) for a period during which such property (or other property):

(i) Was used as an integral part of manufacturing, production, or extraction, or as an integral part of furnishing transportation, communications, electrical energy, gas, water, or sewage disposal services by a person engaged in a trade or business of furnishing any such service, or

(ii) Constituted a research or storage facility used in connection with any of the foregoing activities.

Thus, even though during the period immediately preceding its disposition the property is not used as an integral part of an activity specified in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph and does not constitute a facility specified in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, such property is nevertheless property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B) if, for example, there are adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property for a period during which the property was used as an integral part of manufacturing by the taxpayer or another taxpayer, or for a period during which other property (which was involuntarily converted into, or exchanged in a like kind exchange for, the property) was so used by the taxpayer or another taxpayer. For rules applicable to involuntary conversions and like kind exchanges, see paragraph (d)(3) of § 1.1245-4.

(2) The language used in subparagraph (1) (i) and (ii) of this paragraph shall have the same meaning as when used in paragraph (a) of § 1.48-1, and the terms building and structural components shall have the meanings assigned to those terms in paragraph (e) of § 1.48-1.

(d) Effective/applicability date. This section applies on and after January 19, 2017. For rules before January 19, 2017, see § 1.1245-3 as contained in 26 CFR part 1 revised as of April 1, 2016.

[T.D. 6832, 30 FR 8580, July 7, 1965, as amended by T.D. 7141, 36 FR 18794, Sept. 22, 1971; T.D. 9811, 82 FR 6241, Jan. 19, 2017]

§ 1.1245-4 Exceptions and limitations.

(a) Exception for gifts

(1) General rule. Section 1245(b)(1) provides that no gain shall be recognized under section 1245(a)(1) upon a disposition by gift. For purposes of this paragraph (a), the term gift means, except to the extent that paragraph (a)(3) of this section applies, a transfer of property that, in the hands of the transferee, has a basis determined under the provisions of section 1015(a) or 1015(d) (relating to basis of property acquired by gifts) or section 1022 (relating to basis of property acquired from certain decedents who died in 2010). For reduction in amount of charitable contribution in case of a gift of section 1245 property, see section 170(e) and the regulations thereunder.

(2) Examples. The provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A places section 1245 property in trust to pay the income from the property to B for his life, and after B's death to distribute the property to C. If the basis of the property to the fiduciary and to C is determined under the uniform basis rules prescribed in paragraph (b) of § 1.1015-1, and under paragraph (c) of § 1.1015-1 the time the fiduciary and C acquire their interests in the property is the time the donor relinquished dominion over the property, then section 1245(a)(1) does not apply to the transfer by A to the trust or to the distribution to C.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that the fiduciary sells the section 1245 property and reinvests the proceeds in other section 1245 property which is distributed to C upon B's death. Assume further that under paragraph (f) of § 1.1015-1 C's basis for the distributed property is the cost or other basis to the fiduciary. Section 1245(a)(1) applies to the sale but not to the distribution.

(3) Disposition in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift. Where a disposition of property is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift, the gain to which section 1245(a)(1) applies is the amount by which

(i) the lower of the amount realized upon the disposition of the property or the recomputed basis of the property, exceeds

(ii) the adjusted basis of the property. For determination of the recomputed basis of the property in the hands of the transferee, see paragraph (c)(2) of § 1.1245-2.

(4) Example. The provisions of subparagraph (3) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

(i) Smith transfers section 1245 property, which he has held in excess of 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977), to his son for $60,000. Immediately before the transfer the property in the hands of Smith has an adjusted basis of $30,000, a fair market value of $90,000, and a recomputed basis of $110,000. Since the amount realized upon disposition of the property ($60,000) is lower than its recomputed basis ($110,000), the excess of the amount realized over adjusted basis, or $30,000, is treated as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1) and not as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231. Smith has made a gift of $30,000 ($90,000 fair market value minus $60,000 amount realized) to which section 1245(a)(1) does not apply.

(ii) Immediately before the transfer, the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property was $80,000. Under paragraph (c)(2) of § 1.1245-2, $50,000 of adjustments are reflected in the adjusted basis of the property immediately after the transfer, that is, $80,000 of such adjustments immediately before the transfer, minus $30,000 gain taken into account under section 1245(a)(1) upon the transfer. Thus, the recomputed basis of the property in the hands of the son is $110,000.

(b) Exception for transfers at death

(1) General rule. Section 1245(b)(2) provides that, except as provided in section 691 (relating to income in respect of a decedent), no gain shall be recognized under section 1245(a)(1) upon a transfer at death. For purposes of this paragraph, the term transfer at death means a transfer of property which, in the hands of the transferee, has a basis determined under the provisions of section 1014(a) (relating to basis of property acquired from a decedent) because of the death of the transferor. For recomputed basis of property acquired in a transfer at death, see paragraph (c)(1)(iv) of § 1.1245-2.

(2) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Smith owns section 1245 property which, upon Smith's death, is inherited by his son. Since the property is described in section 1014(b)(1), its basis in the hands of the son is determined under the provisions of section 1014(a). Therefore, section 1245(a)(1) does not apply to the transfer at Smith's death.

Example 2. H purchases section 1245 property which he conveys to himself and W, his wife, as tenants by the entirety. Upon H's death in 1970 the property (including W's share) is included in his gross estate. Since the entire property is described in section 1014(b) (1) and (9), its basis in the hands of W is determined under the provisions of section 1014(a). Therefore, section 1245(a)(1) does not apply to the transfer at H's death. For determination of the recomputed basis of the property in the hands of W, see paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.1245-2.

Example 3. Green's will provides for the bequest of section 1245 property to trustees to pay the income from the property to his wife for her lifetime, and upon her death to distribute the property to his son. If under paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1014-4 the son's unadjusted basis for the property is its fair market value at the time the decedent died, section 1245(a)(1) does not apply to the distribution of the property to the son.

Example 4. The trustee of a trust created by will transfers section 1245 property to a beneficiary in satisfaction of a specific bequest of $10,000. If under the principles of paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1014-4 the trust realizes a taxable gain upon the transfer, section 1245(a)(1) applies to the transfer.

(c) Limitation for certain tax-free transactions

(1) Limitation on amount of gain. Section 1245(b)(3) provides that upon a transfer of property described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the amount of gain taken into account by the transferor under section 1245(a)(1) shall not exceed the amount of gain recognized to the transferor on the transfer (determined without regard to section 1245). For purposes of this subparagraph, in case of a transfer of both section 1245 property and non-section 1245 property in one transaction, the amount realized from the disposition of the section 1245 property (as determined under paragraph (a)(5) of § 1.1245-1) shall be deemed to consist of that portion of the fair market value of each property acquired which bears the same ratio to the fair market value of such acquired property as the amount realized from the disposition of the section 1245 property bears to the total amount realized. The preceding sentence shall be applied solely for purposes of computing the portion of the total gain (determined without regard to section 1245) which shall be recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1). For determination of the recomputed basis of the section 1245 property in the hands of the transferee, see paragraph (c)(2) of § 1.1245-2. Section 1245(b)(3) does not apply to a disposition of property to an organization (other than a cooperative described in section 521) which is exempt from the tax imposed by chapter 1 of the Code.

(2) Transfers covered. The transfers referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph are transfers of property in which the basis of the property in the hands of the transferee is determined by reference to its basis in the hands of the transferor by reason of the application of any of the following provisions:

(i) Section 332 (relating to distributions in complete liquidation of an 80-percent-or-more controlled subsidiary corporation). See subparagraph (3) of this paragraph.

(ii) Section 351 (relating to transfer to a corporation controlled by transferor).

(iii) Section 361 (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain corporate reorganizations).

(iv) Section 371(a) (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain receivership and bankruptcy proceedings).

(v) Section 374(a) (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain railroad reorganizations).

(vi) Section 721 (relating to transfers to a partnership in exchange for a partnership interest).

(vii) Section 731 (relating to distributions by a partnership to a partner). For special carryover basis rule, see section 1245(b)(6)(A) and paragraph (f)(1) of this section.

(3) Complete liquidation of subsidiary. In the case of a distribution in complete liquidation of an 80-percent-or-more controlled subsidiary to which section 332 applies, the limitation provided in section 1245(b)(3) is confined to instances in which the basis of the property in the hands of the transferee is determined, under section 334(b)(1), by reference to its basis in the hands of the transferor. Thus, for example, the limitation of section 1245(b)(3) may apply in respect of a liquidating distribution of section 1245 property by an 80-percent-or-more controlled corporation to the parent corporation, but does not apply in respect of a liquidating distribution of section 1245 property to a minority shareholder. Section 1245(b)(3) does not apply to a liquidating distribution of property by an 80-percent-or-more controlled subsidiary to its parent if the parent's basis for the property is determined, under section 334(b)(2), by reference to its basis for the stock of the subsidiary.

(4) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Section 1245 property, which is owned by Smith, has a fair market value of $10,000, a recomputed basis of $8,000, and an adjusted basis of $4,000. Smith transfers the property to a corporation in exchange for stock in the corporation worth $9,000 plus $1,000 in cash in a transaction qualifying under section 351. Without regard to section 1245, Smith would recognize $1,000 gain under section 351(b), and the corporation's basis for the property would be determined under section 362(a) by reference to its basis in the hands of Smith. Since the recomputed basis of the property disposed of ($8,000) is lower than the amount realized ($10,000), the excess of recomputed basis over adjusted basis ($4,000), or $4,000, would be treated as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1) if the provisions of section 1245(b)(3) did not apply. However, section 1245(b)(3) limits the gain taken into account by Smith under section 1245(a)(1) to $1,000. If, instead, Smith transferred the property to the corporation solely in exchange for stock of the corporation worth $10,000, then, because of the application of section 1245(b)(3), Smith would not take any gain into account under section 1245(a)(1). If, however, Smith transferred the property to the corporation for stock worth $5,000 and $5,000 cash, only $4,000 of the $5,000 gain under section 351(b) would be treated as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1).

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that Smith contributes the property to a new partnership in which he has a one-half interest. Since, without regard to section 1245, no gain would be recognized to Smith under section 721, and by reason of the application of section 721 the partnership's basis for the property would be determined under section 723 by reference to its basis in the hands of Smith, the application of section 1245(b)(3) results in no gain being taken into account by Smith under section 1245(a)(1).

Example 3. Assume the same facts as in example (2) except that the property is subject to a $9,000 mortgage. Since under section 752(b) (relating to decrease in partner's liabilities) Smith is treated as receiving a distribution in money of $4,500 (one-half of liability assumed by partnership), and since the basis of Smith's partnership interest is $4,000 (the adjusted basis of the contributed property), the $4,500 distribution results in his realizing $500 gain under section 731(a) (relating to distributions by a partnership), determined without regard to section 1245. Accordingly, the application of section 1245(b)(3) limits the gain taken into account by Smith under section 1245(a)(1) to $500.

(d) Limitation for like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions

(1) General rule. Section 1245(b)(4) provides that if property is disposed of and gain (determined without regard to section 1245) is not recognized in whole or in part under section 1031 (relating to like kind exchanges) or section 1033 (relating to involuntary conversions), then the amount of gain taken into account by the transferor under section 1245(a)(1) shall not exceed the sum of:

(i) The amount of gain recognized on such disposition (determined without regard to section 1245), plus

(ii) The fair market value of property acquired which is not section 1245 property and which is not taken into account under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph (that is, the fair market value of non-section 1245 property acquired which is qualifying property under section 1031 or 1033, as the case may be).

(2) Examples. The provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Smith exchanges machine A for machine B in a like kind exchange as to which no gain is recognized under section 1031(a). Both machines are section 1245 property. No gain is recognized under section 1245(a)(1) because of the limitation contained in section 1245(b)(4). The result would be the same if machine A were involuntarily converted into machine B in a transaction as to which no gain is recognized under section 1033(a)(1).

Example 2. Jones owns property A, which is section 1245 property, with an adjusted basis of $100,000 and a recomputed basis of $116,000. The property is destroyed by fire and Jones receives $117,000 of insurance proceeds. Thus, the amount of gain under section 1245(a)(1), determined without regard to section 1245(b)(4), would be $16,000. He uses $105,000 of the proceeds to purchase section 1245 property similar or related in service or use to property A, and $9,000 of the proceeds to purchase stock in the acquisition of control of a corporation owning property similar or related in service or use to property A. Both acquisitions qualify under section 1033(a)(3)(A). Jones properly elects under section 1033(a)(3)(A) and the regulations thereunder to limit recognition of gain to the amount by which the amount realized from the conversion exceeds the cost of the stock and other property acquired to replace the converted property. Since $3,000 of the gain is recognized (without regard to section 1245) under section 1033(a)(3) (that is, $117,000 minus $114,000), and since the stock purchased for $9,000 is not section 1245 property and was not taken into account in determining the gain under section 1033, section 1245(b)(4) limits the amount of the gain taken into account under section 1245(a)(1) to $12,000 (that is, $3,000 plus $9,000). If, instead of purchasing $9,000 in stock, Jones purchases $9,000 worth of property which is section 1245 property similar or related in use to the destroyed property, section 1245(b)(4) would limit the amount of gain taken into account under section 1245(a)(1) to $3,000.

(3) Certain tangible property. If:

(i) A person disposes of section 1245 property in a transaction to which section 1245(b)(4) applies,

(ii) Adjustments are reflected in the adjusted basis (within the meaning of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1245-2) of such property which are attributable to the use of such property (or other property) as an integral part of an activity, or as a facility, specified in section 1245(a)(3)(B) (i) or (ii), and

(iii) Property is acquired in the transaction which would be considered as section 1245 property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B) if such person used the acquired property as an integral part of such an activity, or as such a facility, then (regardless of the use of the acquired property) the acquired property shall be considered as section 1245 property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B). For definition of property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B), see paragraph (c) of § 1.1245-3. Thus, for example, if a person's section 1245 property (which is personal property) is involuntarily converted into property A which would qualify as section 1245 property only if it were devoted to a specified use, and if the person had so devoted the section 1245 property disposed of, then the acquired property is considered as section 1245 property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B) and therefore its fair market value is not taken into account under subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph. For recomputed basis of property A, see paragraph (a)(5) of § 1.1245-2. Moreover, if property A is not devoted to a specified use and is subsequently involuntarily converted into property B which would qualify as section 1245 property only if it were so devoted, then property B is also considered as section 1245 property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B).

(4) Application to disposition of section 1245 property and nonsection 1245 property in one transaction. For purposes of this paragraph, if both section 1245 property and nonsection 1245 property are acquired as the result of one disposition in which both section 1245 property and nonsection 1245 property are disposed of, then except as provided in subparagraph (7) of this paragraph:

(i) The total amount realized upon the disposition shall be allocated (in a manner consistent with the principles of paragraph (a)(5) of § 1.1245-1) between the section 1245 property and the nonsection 1245 property disposed of in proportion to their respective fair market values.

(ii) The amount realized upon the disposition of the section 1245 property shall be deemed to consist of so much of the fair market value of the section 1245 property acquired as is not in excess of the amount realized from the section 1245 property disposed of, and the remaining portion (if any) of the amount realized upon the disposition of the section 1245 property shall be deemed to consist of so much of the fair market value of the non-section 1245 property acquired as is not in excess of the amount of such remaining portion, and

(iii) The amount realized upon the disposition of the non-section 1245 property shall be deemed to consist of so much of the fair market value of all the property acquired which was not taken into account in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph.

(5) Example. The provisions of subparagraph (4) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

(i) Smith owns section 1245 property A with a fair market value of $30,000, and non-section 1245 property X with a fair market value of $20,000. Properties A and X are destroyed by fire and Smith receives insurance proceeds of $40,000. He uses all the proceeds, plus additional cash of $10,000, to purchase in a single transaction properties B and Y which qualify under section 1033(a)(3)(A), and he properly elects under section 1033(a)(3)(A) and the regulations thereunder to limit recognition of gain to the excess of the amount realized from the conversion over the costs of the qualifying properties acquired. Thus no gain would be recognized (without regard to section 1245) under section 1033(a)(3)(A). Property B is section 1245 property with a fair market value of $15,000, and property Y is non-section 1245 property with a fair market value of $35,000.

(ii) The amount realized upon the disposition of A and X ($40,000) is allocated between A and X in proportion to their respective fair market values. Thus, the amount considered realized in respect of A is $24,000 (that is, 3050 of $40,000). (The amount considered realized in respect of X is $16,000 (that is, 2050 of $40,000).)

(iii) The $24,000 realized upon the disposition of A is deemed to consist of the fair market value of B ($15,000) and $9,000 of the fair market value of Y. (The $16,000 realized upon the disposition of X is deemed to consist of $16,000 of the fair market value of Y. Also, $10,000 of the fair market value of Y is attributable to the additional cash of $10,000.)

(iv) Assume that A has an adjusted basis of $5,000, and a recomputed basis of $40,000. Since the amount considered realized upon the disposition of A ($24,000) is lower than its recomputed basis ($40,000), the amount of gain which would be recognized under section 1245(a)(1), determined without regard to section 1245(b)(4), is $19,000, that is, the amount realized ($24,000) minus the adjusted basis ($5,000). Since no gain is recognized (without regard to section 1245) under section 1033(a)(3), and since $9,000 of the property acquired in exchange for section 1245 property A is non-section 1245 property Y, section 1245(b)(4) limits the amount of gain taken into account under section 1245(a)(1) to $9,000.

(6) Cross references. For the manner of determining the recomputed basis of property acquired in a transaction to which section 1245(b)(4) applies, see paragraph (c)(4) of § 1.1245-2. For the manner of determining the basis of such property, see paragraph (a) of § 1.1245-5.

(7) Coordination with section 1250. For purposes of this paragraph, if section 1245 property and section 1250 property are disposed of in one transaction in which the property acquired includes section 1250 property, the allocation rules of paragraph (d)(6) of § 1.1250-3 shall apply.

(e) Limitation for section 1071 and 1081 transactions

(1) Section 1071 and 1081(b) transactions. If property is disposed of and gain (determined without regard to section 1245) is not recognized in whole or in part because of the application of section 1071 (relating to gain from sale or exchange to effectuate policies of F.C.C.) or section 1081(b) (relating to gain from sale or exchange in obedience to order of S.E.C.), then the amount of gain taken into account by the transferor under section 1245(a)(1) shall not exceed the sum of:

(i) The amount of gain recognized on such disposition (determined without regard to section 1245),

(ii) In the case of a transaction to which section 1071 applies, the fair market value of property acquired which is not section 1245 property and which is not taken into account under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, plus

(iii) The amount by which the basis of property, other than section 1245 property, is reduced (pursuant to an election under section 1071 or pursuant to the application of section 1082(a)(2)), and which is not taken into account under subdivision (i) or (ii) of this subparagraph.

(2) Section 1081(d)(1)(A) transaction. No gain shall be recognized under section 1245(a)(1) upon an exchange of property as to which gain would not be recognized (without regard to section 1245) because of the application of section 1081(d)(1)(A) (relating to transfers within system group). For recomputed basis of property acquired in a transaction referred to in this subparagraph, see paragraph (c)(2) of § 1.1245-2.

(3) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Corporation X elects under section 1071 to treat a sale of section 1245 property for $100,000 as an involuntary conversion subject to the provisions of section 1033, but does not elect to reduce the basis of depreciable property pursuant to an election under section 1071. The corporation uses $35,000 of the proceeds to purchase section 1245 property and $40,000 to purchase other property. Both properties qualify as replacement property under section 1033. Assuming that the amount of gain under section 1245(a)(1) (determined without regard to this paragraph) would be $70,000, and that $25,000 of gain would be recognized (without regard to section 1245) upon the application of section 1071, the amount of gain taken into account under section 1245(a)(1) is $65,000 ($25,000 plus $40,000).

Example 2.

(i) Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that the corporation elects under section 1071 to reduce its basis for property of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation under section 167 by the amount of gain which would be recognized without regard to the application of section 1245, that is, by $25,000. Assume further that under section 1071 the corporation may reduce the basis of depreciable property consisting of property A, which is section 1245 property with an adjusted basis of $30,000, and property B, which is property other than section 1245 property with an adjusted basis of $20,000. Under paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1071-3, the $25,000 of unrecognized gain is applied to reduce the basis of property A by $15,000 (30,000/50,000 of $25,000) and the basis of property B by $10,000 (20,000/50,000 of $25,000).

(ii) The amount of gain which would be recognized (determined without regard to section 1245) under section 1071 is zero, i.e., the amount determined in example (1) ($25,000), minus the amount of the reduction in basis of depreciable property pursuant to the election ($25,000). The amount of gain taken into account under section 1245(a)(1) is $50,000, i.e., the sum of (a) the gain which would be recognized without regard to section 1245 (zero), (b) the cost of property acquired which is not section 1245 property ($40,000), plus (c) the amount by which the basis of property B is reduced ($10,000). For method of increasing basis of property B, see paragraph (b)(2) of § 1.1245-5, and for recomputed basis of property A, see paragraph (c)(5) of § 1.1245-2.

(f) Limitation for property distributed by a partnership

(1) In general. For purposes of section 1245(b)(3) (relating to certain tax-free transactions), the basis of section 1245 property distributed by a partnership to a partner shall be deemed to be determined by reference to the adjusted basis of such property to the partnership.

(2) Adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis. If section 1245 property is distributed by a partnership to a partner, then, for purposes of determining the recomputed basis of the property in the hands of the distributee, the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property immediately after the distribution shall be an amount equal to:

(i) The potential section 1245 income (as defined in paragraph (c)(4) of § 1.751-1) of the partnership in respect of the property immediately before the distribution, reduced by

(ii) The portion of such potential section 1245 income which is recognized as ordinary income to the partnership under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.751-1.

(3) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) A machine, which is section 1245 property owned by partnership ABC, has an adjusted basis of $9,000, a recomputed basis of $18,000, and a fair market value of $15,000. Since the fair market value of the machine is lower than its recomputed basis, the potential section 1245 income in respect of the machine is the excess of fair market value over adjusted basis, or $6,000. The partnership distributes the machine to C in a complete liquidation of his partnership interest to which section 736(a) does not apply. C, who had originally contributed the machine to the partnership, has a basis for his partnership interest of $10,000. Since section 751(b)(2)(A) provides that section 751(b)(1) does not apply to a distribution of property to the partner who contributed the property, no gain would be recognized to the partnership under section 731(b) (without regard to the application of section 1245). By reason of the application of section 731, C's basis for the property would, under section 732(b), be equal to his basis for his interest in the partnership, or $10,000.

(ii) Since section 731 applies to the distribution, and since subparagraph (1) of this paragraph provides that, for purposes of section 1245(b)(3), C's basis for the property is deemed to be determined by reference to the adjusted basis of the property to the partnership, the gain taken into account under section 1245(a)(1) by the partnership is limited by section 1245(b)(3) so as not to exceed the amount of gain which would be recognized to the partnership if section 1245 did not apply. Accordingly, the partnership does not recognize any gain under section 1245(a)(1) upon the distribution.

(iii) Immediately after the distribution, the amount of the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property is equal to $6,000 (that is, the potential section 1245 income of the partnership in respect of the property before the distribution, $6,000, minus the gain recognized by the partnership under section 751(b), zero). Accordingly, C's recomputed basis for the property is $16,000 (that is, adjusted basis, $10,000, plus adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis, $6,000).

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that the machine had been purchased by the partnership. Assume further that upon the distribution, the partnership recognizes $4,000 gain as ordinary income under section 751(b). Under section 1245(b)(3), gain to be taken into account under section 1245(a)(1) by the partnership is limited to $4,000. Immediately after the distribution, the amount of adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of the property is $2,000 (that is, potential section 1245 income of the partnership, $6,000, minus gain recognized to the partnership under section 751(b), $4,000). Thus, if the adjusted basis of the machine in the hands of C were $11,333 (see, for example, the computation in paragraph (d)(2) of example (6) of paragraph (g) of § 1.751-1), the recomputed basis of the machine would be $13,333 ($11,333 plus $2,000).

(g) [Reserved]

(h) Timber property subject to amortization under section 194

(1) In general. For purposes of section 1245(a)(2), in determining the recomputed basis of property with respect to which a deduction under section 194 was allowed for any taxable year, a taxpayer shall not take into account amortization deductions claimed under section 194 to the extent such deductions are attributable to the amortizable basis (within the meaning of section 194(c)(2)) of the taxpayer acquired before the tenth taxable year preceding the taxable year in which gain with respect to the property is recognized.

(2) Example. The principles of paragraph (h)(1) of this section are illustrated by the following example:

Example: Assume A owns qualified timber property (as defined in section 194(c)(1)) with a basis of $30,000. In 1981, A incurs $12,000 of qualifying reforestation expenditures and elects to amortize the maximum $10,000 of such expenses under section 194. The $10,000 of deductions are taken during the 8-year period from 1981 to 1988. If A sells the property in 1990 for $60,000 a gain of $28,000 ($60,000—adjusted basis of $32,000) is recognized on the sale. Since the sale took place within 10 years of the taxable year in which the reforestation expenditures were made, $10,000 of the gain is treated as ordinary income, and the remaining $18,000 of gain would be capital gain, if it otherwise qualifies for capital gain treatment. In order to avoid ordinary income treatment of the gain attributable to the reforestation expenditures incurred in 1981, A would have to wait until 1992 to dispose of the property.

(i) Effective/applicability date. This section applies on and after January 19, 2017. For rules before January 19, 2017, see § 1.1245-4 as contained in 26 CFR part 1 revised as of April 1, 2016.

[T.D. 6832, 30 FR 8581, July 7, 1965, as amended by T.D. 7084, 36 FR 268, Jan. 8, 1971; T.D. 7207, 37 FR 20799, Oct. 14, 1972; T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980; T.D. 7927, 48 FR 55851, Dec. 16, 1983; T.D. 9811, 82 FR 6241, Jan. 19, 2017]

§ 1.1245-5 Adjustments to basis.

In order to reflect gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1), the following adjustments to the basis of property shall be made:

(a) Property acquired in like kind exchange or involuntary conversion.

(1) If property is acquired in a transaction to which section 1245(b)(4) applies, its basis shall be determined under the rules of section 1031(d) or 1033(c).

(2) The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Jones exchanges property A, which is section 1245 property with an adjusted basis of $10,000, for property B, which has a fair market value of $9,000, and property C, which has a fair market value of $3,500, in a like kind exchange as to which no gain would be recognized under section 1031(a). Upon the exchange $2,500 gain is recognized under section 1245(a)(1), since property C is not section 1245 property. See section 1245(b)(4). Under the rules of section 1031(d), the basis of the properties received in the exchange is $12,500 (i.e., the basis of property transferred, $10,000, plus the amount of gain recognized, $2,500), of which the amount allocated to property C is $3,500 (the fair market value thereof), and the residue, $9,000, is allocated to property B.

(b) Sections 1071 and 1081 transactions.

(1) If property is acquired in a transaction to which section 1071 and paragraph (e)(1) of § 1.1245-4 (relating to limitation for section 1071 transactions, etc.) apply, its basis shall be determined in accordance with the principles of paragraph (a) of this section.

(2) If the basis of property, other than section 1245 property, is reduced pursuant to either an election under section 1071 or the application of section 1082(a)(2), then the basis of the property shall be increased to the extent of the gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) by reason of the application of paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of § 1.1245-4.

[T.D. 6832, 30 FR 8584, July 7, 1965]

§ 1.1245-6 Relation of section 1245 to other sections.

(a) General. The provisions of section 1245 apply notwithstanding any other provision of subtitle A of the Code. Thus, unless an exception or limitation under section 1245(b) applies, gain under section 1245(a)(1) is recognized notwithstanding any contrary nonrecognition provision or income characterizing provision. For example, since section 1245 overrides section 1231 (relating to property used in the trade or business), the gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) upon a disposition will be treated as ordinary income and only the remaining gain, if any, from the disposition may be considered as gain from the sale or exchange of a capital asset if section 1231 is applicable. See example (2) of paragraph (b)(2) of § 1.1245-1. For effect of section 1245 on basis provisions of the Code, see § 1.1245-5.

(b) Nonrecognition sections overridden. The nonrecognition provisions of subtitle A of the Code which section 1245 overrides include, but are not limited to, sections 267(d), 311(a), 336, 337, 501(a), 512(b)(5), and 1039. See section 1245(b) for the extent to which section 1245(a)(1) overrides sections 332, 351, 361, 371(a), 374(a), 721, 731, 1031, 1033, 1071, and 1081 (b)(1) and (d)(1)(A). For limitation on amount of adjustments reflected in adjusted basis of property disposed of by an organization exempt from income taxes (within the meaning of section 501(a)), see paragraph (a)(8) of § 1.1245-2.

(c) Normal retirement of asset in multiple asset account. Section 1245(a)(1) does not require recognition of gain upon normal retirements of section 1245 property in a multiple asset account as long as the taxpayer's method of accounting, as described in paragraph (e)(2) of § 1.167(a)-8 (relating to accounting treatment of asset retirements), does not require recognition of such gain.

(d) Installment method.

(1) Gain from a disposition to which section 1245(a)(1) applies may be reported under the installment method if such method is otherwise available under section 453 of the Code. In such case, the income (other than interest) on each installment payment shall be deemed to consist of gain to which section 1245(a)(1) applies until all such gain has been reported, and the remaining portion (if any) of such income shall be deemed to consist of gain to which section 1245(a)(1) does not apply. For treatment of amounts as interest on certain deferred payments, see section 483.

(2) The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Jones contracts to sell an item of section 1245 property for $10,000 to be paid in 10 equal payments of $1,000 each, plus a sufficient amount of interest so that section 483 does not apply. He properly elects under section 453 to report under the installment method gain of $2,000 to which section 1245(a)(1) applies and gain of $1,000 to which section 1231 applies. Accordingly, $300 of each of the first 6 installment payments and $200 of the seventh installment payment is ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1), and $100 of the seventh installment payment and $300 of each of the last 3 installment payments is gain under section 1231.

(e) Exempt income. The fact that section 1245 provides for recognition of gain as ordinary income does not change into taxable income any income which is exempt under section 115 (relating to income of states, etc.), 892 (relating to income of foreign governments), or 894 (relating to income exempt under treaties).

(f) Treatment of gain not recognized under section 1245. Section 1245 does not prevent gain which is not recognized under section 1245 from being considered as gain under another provision of the Code, such as, for example, section 311(c) (relating to liability in excess of basis), section 341(f) (relating to collapsible corporations), section 357(c) (relating to liabilities in excess of basis), section 1238 (relating to amortization in excess of depreciation), or section 1239 (relating to gain from sale of depreciable property between certain related persons). Thus, for example, if section 1245 property, which has an adjusted basis of $1,000 and a recomputed basis of $1,500, is sold for $1,750 in a transaction to which section 1239 applies, $500 of the gain would be recognized under section 1245(a)(1) and the remaining $250 of the gain would be treated as ordinary income under section 1239.

[T.D. 6832, 30 FR 8584, July 7, 1965, as amended by T.D. 7084, 36 FR 269, Jan. 8, 1971; T.D. 7400, 41 FR 5101, Feb. 4, 1976]

§ 1.1248-1 Treatment of gain from certain sales or exchanges of stock in certain foreign corporations.

(a) In general.

(1) If a United States person (as defined in section 7701(a)(30)) recognizes gain on a sale or exchange after December 31, 1962, of stock in a foreign corporation, and if in respect of such person the conditions of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph are satisfied, then the gain shall be included in the gross income of such person as a dividend to the extent of the earnings and profits of such corporation attributable to such stock under § 1.1248-2 or 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable, which were accumulated in taxable years of such foreign corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, during the period or periods such stock was held (or was considered as held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) by such person while such corporation was a controlled foreign corporation. See section 1248(a). See § 1.1248-8 for additional rules regarding the attribution of earnings and profits to the stock of a foreign corporation following certain nonrecognition transactions. For computation of earnings and profits attributable to such stock if there are any lower tier corporations, see paragraph (a) (3) and (4) of § 1.1248-2 or paragraph (a) of § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable. In general, the amount of gain to be included in a person's gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) shall be determined separately for each share of stock sold or exchanged. However, such determination may be made in respect of a block of stock if earnings and profits attributable to the block are computed under § 1.1248-2 or 1.1248-3. See paragraph (b) of § 1.1248-2 and paragraph (a)(5) of § 1.1248-3. For the limitation on the tax attributable to an amount included in an individual's gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a), see section 1248(b) and § 1.1248-4. For the treatment, under certain circumstances, of the sale or exchange of stock in a domestic corporation as the sale or exchange of stock held by the domestic corporation in a foreign corporation, see section 1248(e) and § 1.1248-6. For the nonapplication of section 1248 in certain circumstances, see section 1248(g) and paragraph (e) of this section. For the requirement that the person establish the amount of earnings and profits attributable to the stock sold or exchanged and, for purposes of section 1248(b), the amount of certain taxes, see section 1248(h) and § 1.1248-7. See § 1.1411-10(c)(3) for additional rules concerning the application of section 1248 for purposes of section 1411.

(2) In respect of a United States person who sells or exchanges stock in a foreign corporation, the conditions referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph are satisfied only if

(i) such person owned, within the meaning of section 958(a), or was considered as owning by applying the rules of ownership of section 958(b), 10 percent or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote of such foreign corporation at any time during the 5-year period ending on the date of the sale or exchange, and

(ii) at such time such foreign corporation was a controlled foreign corporation (as defined in section 957).

(3) For purposes of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph,

(i) a foreign corporation shall not be considered to be a controlled foreign corporation at any time before the first day of its first taxable year beginning after December 31, 1962, and

(ii) the percentage of the total combined voting power of stock of a foreign corporation owned (or considered as owned) by a United States person shall be determined in accordance with the principles of section 951(b) and the regulations thereunder.

(4) For purposes of paragraph (a)(1) of this section, if a foreign partnership sells or exchanges stock of a corporation, the partners in such foreign partnership shall be treated as selling or exchanging their proportionate share of the stock of such corporation. Stock which is considered to have been sold or exchanged by a partner by reason of the application of this paragraph (a)(4) shall for purposes of applying such sentence be treated as actually sold or exchanged by such partner.

(5) The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Corporation F is a foreign corporation which has outstanding 100 shares of one class of stock. F was a controlled foreign corporation for the period beginning on January 1, 1963, and ending on June 30, 1965, but was not a controlled foreign corporation at any time thereafter. On December 31, 1965, Brown, a United States person who has owned 15 shares of F stock since 1962, sells 7 of his 15 shares and recognizes gain with respect to each share sold. Since Brown owned stock representing at least 10 percent of the total combined voting power of F at a time during the 5-year period ending on December 31, 1965, while F was a controlled foreign corporation, the conditions of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph are satisfied. Therefore, section 1248(a) applies to the gain recognized by Brown to the extent of the earnings and profits attributable under § 1.1248-3 to such shares.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1). Assume further that on February 1, 1970, Brown sells the remainder of his shares in F Corporation and recognizes gain with respect to each share sold. Even though Brown did not own stock representing at least 10 percent of the total combined voting power of F on February 1, 1970, nevertheless, in respect of each of the 8 shares of F stock which he sold on such date, the conditions of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph are satisfied since Brown owned stock representing at least 10 percent of such voting power at a time during the 5-year period ending on February 1, 1970, while F was a controlled foreign corporation. Therefore, section 1248(a) applies to the gain recognized by Brown to the extent of the earnings and profits attributable under § 1.1248-3 to such shares. If, however, Brown had sold the reminder of his shares in F on July 1, 1970, since the last date on which Brown owned stock representing at least 10 percent of the total combined voting power of F while F was a controlled foreign corporation was June 30, 1965, a date which is not within the 5-year period ending July 1, 1970, the conditions of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph would not be satisfied and section 1248(a) would not apply.

Example 3. Corporation G, a foreign corporation created in 1950, has outstanding 100 shares of one class of stock and uses the calendar year as its taxable year. Corporation X, a United States person, owns 60 shares of G stock and has owned such stock since G was created. Corporation Y, a United States person, owned 15 shares of the G stock from 1950 until December 1, 1962, on which date it sold 10 of such shares. On December 31, 1963, Y sells its remaining 5 shares of the G stock and recognizes gain on the sale. Since G is not considered to be a controlled foreign corporation at any time before January 1, 1963, and since Y did not own stock representing at least 10 percent of the total combined voting power of G at any time on or after such date, the conditions of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph are not satisfied and section 1248(a) does not apply.

Example 4.

(i) Facts. X, a domestic corporation, and Y, a foreign corporation that is not a controlled foreign corporation, are partners in foreign partnership Z. X has a 60% interest in Z, and Y has a 40% interest in Z. All parties are calendar year taxpayers. On January 1, year 1, Z forms foreign corporation H, a controlled foreign corporation that conducts a business in Country C. Z and H's functional currency is the United States dollar. In years 1 and 2, H did not earn subpart F income as defined in section 952(a). On December 31, year 2, Z sells all of the H stock for $600 when Z's adjusted basis in the stock is $100. Therefore, Z recognizes a gain of $500 on the sale, of which $300 is allocable to X as a 60% partner. At the time of the sale, H had $300 of earnings and profits, $180 of which (that is, 60% of $300) is attributable to X's 60% share of the H stock.

(ii) Result. Pursuant to section 1248(a) and paragraphs (a)(1) and (4) of this section, X and Y are treated as selling 60% and 40%, respectively, of the H stock. X includes in its gross income as a dividend $180 of the gain recognized on the sale. Because Y is a foreign corporation that is not a CFC, neither section 1248 nor section 964 applies to the sale of Y's 40% share of the H stock.

(iii) Alternative facts. If, instead, X owned its 60% interest in Z through another foreign partnership, the result would be the same.

(b) Sale or exchange. For purposes of section 1248(a), the term sale or exchange includes the receipt of a distribution which is treated as in exchange for stock under section 302(a) (relating to distributions in redemption of stock) or section 331(a) (relating to distributions in complete liquidation of a corporation). For purposes of section 1248(a), gain recognized by a shareholder under section 301(c)(3) in connection with a distribution of property by a corporation with respect to its stock shall be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of stock of such corporation.

(c) Gain recognized. Section 1248(a) applies to a sale or exchange of stock in a foreign corporation only if gain is recognized in whole or in part upon the sale or exchange. Thus, for example, if a United States person exchanges stock in a foreign corporation and no gain is recognized on the exchange under section 332, 351, 354, 355, 356, or 361, taking into account the application of section 367, then no amount is includible in the gross income of the person as a dividend under section 1248(a). But see §§ 1.1248(f)-1 and 1.1248(f)-2, providing that a domestic distributing corporation must include in gross income amounts under section 1248(f) as a result of certain foreign stock distributed pursuant to section 337, 355(c)(1), or 361(c)(1) (in certain cases without regard to the amount of gain realized by the domestic distributing corporation in the distribution).

(d) Credit for foreign taxes.

(1) If a domestic corporation includes an amount in its gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) upon a sale or exchange of stock in a foreign corporation (referred to as a first tier corporation), and if on the date of the sale or exchange the domestic corporation owns directly at least 10 percent of the voting stock of the first tier corporation:

(i) The foreign tax credit provisions of sections 901 through 908 shall apply in the same manner and subject to the same conditions and limitations as if the first tier corporation on such date distributed to the domestic corporation as a dividend that portion of the amount included in gross income under section 1248(a) which does not exceed the earnings and profits of the first tier corporation attributable to the stock under § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, as the case may be, and

(ii) If on such date such first tier corporation owns directly 50 percent or more of the voting stock of a lower tier corporation described in paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1248-2 or paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1248-3, as the case may be (referred to as a second tier corporation), then the foreign tax credit provisions of sections 901 through 905 shall apply in the same manner and subject to the same conditions and limitations as if on such date (a) the domestic corporation owned directly that percentage of the stock in the second tier corporation which such domestic corporation is considered to own by reason of the application of section 958(a)(2), and (b) the second tier corporation had distributed to the domestic corporation as a dividend that portion of the amount included in gross income under section 1248(a) which does not exceed the earnings and profits of the second tier corporation attributable to such stock under § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, as the case may be.

(2) A credit shall not be allowed under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph in respect of taxes which are not actually paid or accrued. For the inclusion as a dividend in the gross income of a domestic corporation of an amount equal to the taxes deemed paid by such corporation under section 902(a)(1), see section 78.

(3) If subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph applies, and if the amount included in gross income under section 1248(a) upon the sale or exchange of the stock in a first tier corporation described in subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph is less than the sum of the earnings and profits of the first tier corporation attributable to such stock under § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, as the case may be, plus the earnings and profits of the second tier corporation attributable to such stock under § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, as the case may be, then the amount considered distributed to the domestic corporation as a dividend shall be determined by multiplying the amount included in gross income under section 1248(a) by:

(i) For purposes of applying subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph, the percentage that (a) the earnings and profits of the first tier corporation attributable to such stock under § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, as the case may be, bears to (b) the sum of the earnings and profits of the first tier corporation attributable to such stock under § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, as the case may be, plus the earnings and profits of the second tier corporation attributable to such stock under § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, as the case may be, and

(ii) For purposes of applying subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph, the percentage that (a) the earnings and profits of the second tier corporation attributable to such stock under § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, as the case may be, bears to (b) the sum referred to in subdivision (i)(b) of this subparagraph.

(4) The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On June 30, 1964, domestic corporation D owns 10 percent of the voting stock of controlled foreign corporation X. On such date, D sells a share of X stock and includes $200 of the gain on the sale in its gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a). X does not own any stock of a lower tier corporation referred to in paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1248-3. D uses the calendar year as its taxable year and instead of deducting foreign taxes under section 164, D chooses the benefits of the foreign tax credit provisions for 1964. If D had included $200 in its gross income as a dividend with respect to a distribution from X on June 30, 1964, the amount of the foreign income taxes paid by X which D would be deemed to have paid under section 902(a) in respect of such distribution would be $60. Thus, in respect of the $200 included in D's gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a), and subject to the applicable limitations and conditions of sections 901 through 905, D is entitled under this paragraph to a foreign tax credit of $60 for 1964.

Example 2. On June 30, 1965, domestic corporation D owns all of the voting stock of foreign corporation Y, and Y (the first tier corporation) owns all of the voting stock of foreign corporation Z (a second tier corporation). On such date, D sells a block of Y stock and includes $400 of the gain on the sale in its gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a). The earnings and profits attributable under § 1.1248-3 to the block are $600 from Y and $1,800 from Z. D uses the calendar year as its taxable year and instead of deducting foreign taxes under section 164, D chooses the benefits of the foreign tax credit provisions for 1965. For purposes of applying the foreign tax credit provisions, Y is considered under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph to have distributed to D a dividend of $100 ($400 × 600/2400) and Z is considered to have so distributed to D a dividend of $300 ($400 × 1800/2400). If D had included $100 in its gross income as a dividend with respect to a distribution from Y on June 30, 1965, the amount of foreign income taxes paid by Y which D would be deemed to have paid under section 902(a) in respect of such distribution is $80. If D had owned the stock in Z directly, and if D had included $300 in its gross income as a dividend with respect to a distribution from Z, the amount of foreign income taxes paid by Z which D would be deemed to have paid under section 902(a) in respect of such distribution is $120. Thus, in respect of the $400 included in D's gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a), and subject to the applicable limitations and conditions of sections 901 through 905, D is entitled under this paragraph to a foreign tax credit of $200 ($80 plus $120) for 1965.

(e) Exceptions. Under section 1248(g), this section and §§ 1.1248-2 through 1.1248-8 do not apply to:

(1) Distributions to which section 303 (relating to distributions in redemption of stock to pay death taxes) applies; or

(2) Any amount to the extent that the amount is, under any other provision of the Internal Revenue Code (Code), treated as—

(i) A dividend;

(ii) Gain from the sale of an asset which is not a capital asset; or

(iii) Gain from the sale of an asset held for not more than 1 year.

(f) Installment method.

(1) Gain from a sale or exchange to which section 1248 applies may be reported under the installment method if such method is otherwise available under section 453 of the Code. In such case, the income (other than interest) on each installment payment shall be deemed to consist of gain which is included in gross income under section 1248 as a dividend until all such gain has been reported, and the remaining portion (if any) of such income shall be deemed to consist of gain to which section 1248 does not apply. For treatment of amounts as interest on certain deferred payments, see section 483.

(2) The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Jones contracts to sell stock in a controlled foreign corporation for $5,000 to be paid in 10 equal payments of $500 each, plus a sufficient amount of interest so that section 483 does not apply. He properly elects under section 453 to report under the installment method gain of $1,000 which is includible in gross income under section 1248 as a dividend and gain of $500 which is a long-term capital gain. Accordingly, $150 of each of the first 6 installment payments and $100 of the seventh installment payment are included in gross income under section 1248 as a dividend, and $50 of the seventh installment payment and $150 of each of the last 3 installment payments are long-term capital gain.

(g) Effective/applicability date.

(1) The third sentence in paragraph (a)(1), paragraph (a)(4), and paragraph (a)(5), Example 4, of this section apply to income inclusions that occur on or after July 30, 2007. A taxpayer may elect to apply paragraph (a)(4) of this section to income inclusions in open taxable years provided that it consistently applies paragraph (a)(4) of this section for income inclusions in the first year for which the election is applicable and in all subsequent years.

(2) Paragraph (b) of this section applies to distributions that occur on or after February 10, 2009.

(3) Paragraphs (c) and (e) of this section apply to transactions occurring on or after April 18, 2013.

[T.D. 6779, 29 FR 18130, Dec. 22, 1964, as amended by T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980; T.D. 7961, 49 FR 26225, June 27, 1984; T.D. 9345, 72 FR 41444, July 30, 2007; T.D. 9444, 74 FR 6828, Feb. 11, 2009; T.D. 9585, 77 FR 24381, Apr. 24, 2012; T.D. 9614, 78 FR 17041, Mar. 19, 2013; T.D. 10004, 89 FR 58285, July 18, 2024]

§ 1.1248-2 Earnings and profits attributable to a block of stock in simple cases.

(a) General

(1) Manner of computation. For purposes of paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1248-1, if a United States person sells or exchanges a block of stock (as defined in paragraph (b) of this section) in a foreign corporation, and if the conditions of paragraph (c) of this section are satisfied in respect of the block, then the earnings and profits attributable to the block which were accumulated in taxable years of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, during the period such block was held (or was considered to be held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) by such person while such corporation was a controlled foreign corporation, shall be computed in accordance with the steps set forth in subparagraphs (2), (3), and (4) of this paragraph.

(2) Step 1.

(i) For each taxable year of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, the earnings and profits accumulated for each such taxable year by the corporation shall be computed in the manner prescribed in paragraph (d) of this section, and

(ii) for the period the person held (or is considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) the block, the amount of earnings and profits attributable to the block shall be computed in the manner prescribed in paragraph (e) of this section.

(3) Step 2. If the conditions of paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section must be satisfied in respect of stock in a lower tier foreign corporation which such person owns within the meaning of section 958(a)(2), then

(i) the earnings and profits accumulated for each such taxable year by such lower tier corporation shall be computed in the manner prescribed in paragraph (d) of this section, and

(ii) for the period the person held (or is considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) the block, the amount of earnings and profits of the lower tier corporation attributable to the block shall be computed in the manner prescribed in paragraph (e) of this section applied as if such person owned directly the percentage of such stock in such lower tier corporation which such person owns within the meaning of section 958(a)(2).

(4) Step 3. The amount of earnings and profits attributable to the block shall be the sum of the amounts computed under steps 1 and 2.

(b) Block of stock. For purposes of this section, the term block of stock means a group of shares sold or exchanged in one transaction, but only if:

(1) The amount realized, basis, and holding period are identical for each such share, and

(2) In case, during the period the person held (or is considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223) such shares, any amount was included under section 951 in the gross income of the person (or another person) in respect of the shares, the excess under paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section (computed as if each share were a block) is identical for each such share.

(c) Conditions to application. This section shall apply only if the following conditions are satisfied:

(1)

(i) On each day of the period during which the block of stock was held (or is considered as held by reason of the application of section 1223) by the person during taxable years of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, the corporation is a controlled foreign corporation, and

(ii) On no such day is the corporation a foreign personal holding company (as defined in section 552) or a foreign investment company (as defined in section 1246(b)).

(2) The corporation had only one class of stock, and the same number of shares of such stock were outstanding, on each day of each taxable year of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, any day of which falls within the period referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph.

(3) For each taxable year referred to in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the corporation is not a less developed country corporation (as defined in section 902(d)).

(4) For each taxable year referred to in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the corporation does not make any distributions out of its earnings and profits other than distributions which, under section 316 (as modified by section 959), are considered to be out of earnings and profits accumulated in taxable years beginning after December 31, 1962, during the period such person held (or is considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) the block while such corporation was a controlled foreign corporation.

(5)

(i) If

(a) on the date of the sale or exchange such person, by reason of his ownership of such block, owns within the meaning of section 958(a)(2) stock in another foreign corporation (referred to as a lower tier corporation), and

(b) the conditions of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1248-1 would be satisfied by such person in respect of such stock in the lower tier corporation if such person were deemed to have sold or exchanged such stock in the lower tier corporation on the date he actually sold or exchanged such block in the first tier corporation, then the conditions of subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph must be satisfied.

(ii) In respect of stock in such lower tier corporation,

(a) the conditions set forth in subparagraphs (1) through (4) of this paragraph (applied as if such person owned directly such stock in such lower tier corporation) must be met and

(b) such person must own within the meaning of section 958(a)(2) the same percentage of the shares of such stock on each day which falls within the period referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph.

(d) Earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year

(1) General. For purposes of this section, the earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year of a foreign corporation shall be the earnings and profits for such year computed in accordance with the rules prescribed in § 1.964-1 (relating to determination of earnings and profits for a taxable year of a controlled foreign corporation) and reduced by any distributions therefrom. If the stock in the corporation is sold or exchanged before any action is taken by or on behalf of the corporation under paragraph (c) of § 1.964-1, the computation of earnings and profits under § 1.964-1 for purposes of this section shall be made as if no elections had been made and no accounting method had been adopted.

(2) Special rules.

(i) The earnings and profits of the corporation accumulated:

(a) For any taxable year beginning before January 1, 1967 (computed without any reduction for distributions), shall not include the excess of any item includible in gross income of the foreign corporation under section 882(b) as gross income derived from sources within the United States, and

(b) For any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1966 (computed without any reduction for distributions), shall not include the excess of any item includible in gross income of the foreign corporation under section 882(b)(2) as income effectively connected for that year with the conduct by such corporation of a trade or business in the United States, whether derived from sources within or from sources without the United States,

Over any deductions allocable to such item under section 882(c). However, if the sale or exchange of stock in the foreign corporation by the United States person occurs before January 1, 1967, the provisions of (a) of this subdivision apply with respect to such sale or exchange even though the taxable year begins after December 31, 1966. See section 1248(d)(4). Any item which is required to be excluded from gross income, or which is taxed at a reduced rate, under an applicable treaty obligation of the United States shall not be excluded under this subdivision from earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year (computed without any reduction for distributions).

(ii) If a foreign corporation adopts a plan of complete liquidation in a taxable year of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, and if because of the application of section 337(a) gain or loss would not be recognized by the corporation from the sale or exchange of property if the corporation were a domestic corporation, then the earnings and profits of the corporation accumulated for the taxable year (computed without any reduction for distributions) shall be determined without regard to the amount of such gain or loss. See section 1248(d)(2). For the nonapplication of section 337(a) to a liquidation by a collapsible corporation (as defined in section 341) and to certain other liquidations, see section 337(c).

(e) Earnings and profits attributable to block

(1) General. Except as provided in subparagraph (3) of this paragraph, the earnings and profits attributable to a block of stock of a controlled foreign corporation for the period a United States person held (or is considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) the block are an amount equal to:

(i) The sum of the earnings and profits accumulated for each taxable year of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962 (computed under paragraph (d) of this section) during such period, multiplied by

(ii) The percentage that

(a) the number of shares in the block, bears to

(b) the total number of shares of the corporation outstanding during such period.

(2) Special rule. For purposes of computing the sum referred to in subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph, in case the block was held (or is considered as held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) during a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1962, but not on each day of such taxable year, there shall be included in such sum only that portion which bears the same ratio to

(i) the total earnings and profits for such taxable year (computed under paragraph (d) of this section), as

(ii) the number of days during such taxable year the block was held (or is considered as so held), bears to

(iii) the total number of days in such taxable year.

(3) Amounts included in gross income under section 951.

(i) If, during the period the person held (or is considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) the block, any amount was included under section 951 in the gross income of such person (or of another person whose holding of the stock sold or exchanged is, by reason of the application of section 1223, attributed to such person) in respect of the block, then the earnings and profits attributable to the block for such period shall be an amount equal to

(a) the earnings and profits attributable to the block which would have been computed under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph if this subparagraph did not apply, reduced by

(b) the excess computed under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph. See section 1248(d)(1).

(ii) The excess computed under this subdivision is the excess (if any) of

(a) amounts included under section 951 in the gross income of such person (or such other person) in respect of the block during such period, over

(b) the portion of such amounts which, in any taxable year of such person (or such other person), resulted in an exclusion from the gross income of such person (or such other person) under section 959(a)(1) (relating to exclusion from gross income of distributions of previously taxed earnings and profits).

(iii) This subparagraph shall apply notwithstanding an election under section 962 by such person to be subject to tax at corporate rates.

(4) Examples. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

On May 26, 1965, Green, a United States person, purchases at its fair market value a block of 25 of the 100 outstanding shares of the only class of stock of controlled foreign corporation F. He sells the block on January 1, 1968. In respect of the block, Green did not include any amount in his gross income under section 951. F uses the calendar year as its taxable year and does not own stock in any lower tier corporation referred to in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section. All of the conditions of paragraph (c) of this section are satisfied in respect of the block. The earnings and profits accumulated by F (computed under paragraph (d) of this section) are $10,000 for 1965, $13,000 for 1966, and $11,000 for 1967. The earnings and profits of F attributable to the block are $7,500, determined as follows:

Sum of earnings and profits accumulated by F during period block was held:
For 1965 (219/365 × $10,000) $6,000
For 1966 $13,000
For 1967 $11,000
Sum $30,000
Multiplied by:
Number of shares in block (25), divided by total number of shares outstanding (100) 25%
Earnings and profits attributable to block $7,500

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that in respect of the block Green includes in his gross income under section 951 the total amount of $2,800 for 1965 and 1966, and because of such inclusion the amount of $2,800 which was distributed to Green by F on January 15, 1967, is excluded from his gross income under section 959(a)(1). Accordingly, the earnings and profits of F attributable to the block are $7,000, determined as follows:

Earnings and profits attributable to the block, as computed in example (1) $7,500
Minus:
Excess of amount included in Green's gross income under section 951 ($2,800), over portion thereof which resulted in an exclusion under section 959(a)(1) ($2,300) 500
Earnings and profits attributable to block 7,000

Example 3.

Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that on each day beginning on January 1, 1966 (the date controlled foreign corporation G was organized) through January 1, 1968, F owns 80 of the 100 outstanding shares of the only class of G stock. Since, by reason of his ownership of 25 shares of F stock, Green owns within the meaning of section 958(a)(2) the equivalent of 20 shares of G stock (25100 of 80 shares), G is a lower tier corporation referred to in paragraph (c)(5)(i)(a) of this section. If Green had sold the 20 shares of G stock on January 1, 1968, the date he actually sold the block of F stock, the conditions of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1248-1 would be satisfied in respect of the G stock, and, accordingly, the conditions of paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section must be satisfied. Assume further that such conditions are satisfied, that G uses the calendar year as its taxable year, and that the earnings and profits accumulated by G (computed under paragraph (d) of this section) are $19,000 for 1966 and $21,000 for 1967. The earnings and profits of F and of G attributable to the block are $15,500, determined as follows:

Sum of earnings and profits accumulated by G for period Green owned G stock within the meaning of section 958(a)(2) ($19,000 plus $21,000) $40,000
Multiplied by:
Number of G shares deemed owned within the meaning of section 958(a)(2) by Green (20), divided by total number of G shares outstanding (100) 20%
Earnings and profits of G attributable to block $8,000
Earnings and profits of F attributable to block, as determined in example (1) $7,500
Total earnings and profits attributable to block $15,000

[T.D. 6779, 29 FR 18131, Dec. 22, 1964, as amended by T.D. 7293, 38 FR 32803, Nov. 28, 1973; T.D. 9345, 72 FR 41445, July 30, 2007]

§ 1.1248-3 Earnings and profits attributable to stock in complex cases.

(a) General

(1) Manner of computation. For purposes of paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1248-1, if a United States person sells or exchanges stock in a foreign corporation, and if the provisions of § 1.1248-2 do not apply, then the earnings and profits attributable to the stock which were accumulated in taxable years of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, during the period or periods such stock was held (or was considered to be held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) by such person while such corporation was a controlled foreign corporation, shall be computed in accordance with the steps set forth in subparagraphs (2), (3), and (4) of this paragraph.

(2) Step 1. For each taxable year of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962,

(i) the earnings and profits accumulated for such taxable year by the corporation shall be computed in the manner prescribed in paragraph (b) of this section,

(ii) the person's tentative ratable share of such earnings and profits shall be computed in the manner prescribed in paragraph (c) or (d) (whichever is applicable) of this section, and

(iii) the person's ratable share of such earnings and profits shall be computed by adjusting the tentative ratable share in the manner prescribed in paragraph (e) of this section.

(3) Step 2. If the provisions of paragraph (f) of this section (relating to earnings and profits of lower tier foreign corporations) apply, the amount of the person's ratable share of the earnings and profits accumulated by each lower tier corporation attributable to any such taxable year

(i) shall be computed in the manner prescribed by paragraph (f) of this section, and

(ii) shall be added to such person's ratable share for such taxable year determined in step 1.

(4) Step 3. The amount of earnings and profits attributable to the share shall be the sum of the ratable shares computed for each such taxable year in the manner prescribed in steps 1 and 2.

(5) Share or block. In general, the computation under this paragraph shall be made separately for each share of stock sold or exchanged, except that if a group of shares constitute a block of stock the computation may be made in respect of the block. For purposes of this section, the term block of stock means a group of shares sold or exchanged in one transaction, but only if

(i) the amount realized, basis, and holding period are identical for each such share, and

(ii) the adjustments (if any) under paragraphs (e) and (f)(5) of this section of the tentative ratable shares would be identical for each such share if such adjustments were computed separately for each such share.

(6) Deficit in earnings and profits. For purposes of this section and §§ 1.1248-2 through 1.1248-8, in respect of a taxable year, the term earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year (but only if computed under paragraph (b) of this section) includes a deficit in earnings and profits accumulated for such taxable year. Similarly, a tentative ratable share, or a ratable share, may be a deficit.

(7) Examples. The application of the provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

On December 31, 1967, Brown sells 10 shares of stock in foreign corporation X, which uses the calendar year as its taxable year. The 10 shares constitute a block of stock under subparagraph (5) of this paragraph. Under step 1, Brown's ratable shares of the earnings and profits of X attributable to the block are as follows:

Taxble year of X Ratable shares
1963 $100
1964 150
1965 1 50
1966 50
1967 100
Sum 350
1 Deficit.

The amount of the earnings and profits attributable to such block under step 3 is $350.

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that in respect of X there are lower tier corporations Y and Z to which the provisions of paragraph (f) of this section apply. Brown's ratable shares of the earnings and profits of X, Y, and Z attributable to the block under steps 1 and 2 for each taxable year of X are as follows:

Taxable year of X Ratable shares
X Y Z Total
1963 $100 $40 $20 $160
1964 150 40 −60 130
1965 −50 30 50 30
1966 50 50 30 130
1967 100 −40 40 100
Sum 350 120 80 550

The amount of the earnings and profits attributable to such block under step 3 is $550.

(b) Earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year

(1) General. For purposes of this section, the earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year of a foreign corporation shall be the earnings and profits for such year, computed in accordance with the rules prescribed in § 1.964-1 (relating to determination of earnings and profits for a taxable year of a controlled foreign corporation), except that

(i) the special rules of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph shall apply, and

(ii) adjustments shall be made under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph for distributions made by the corporation during such taxable year. If the stock in the corporation is sold or exchanged before any action is taken by or on behalf of the corporation under paragraph (c) of § 1.964-1, the computation of earnings and profits under § 1.964-1 for purposes of this section shall be made as if no elections had been made and no accounting method had been adopted. The amount of earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year of a foreign corporation, as computed under this paragraph, is not necessarily the same amount as the earnings and profits of the taxable year computed under section 316(a)(1) or paragraph (d) of § 1.1248-2. Thus, for example, if a distribution with respect to stock is in excess of the amount of earnings and profits of the taxable year computed under section 316(a)(2), such excess is treated under section 316(a)(2), or paragraph (d) of § 1.1248-2 as made out of any earnings and profits accumulated in prior taxable years, whereas the amount of such excess may create, or increase, a deficit in the earnings and profits accumulated for the taxable year as computed under this paragraph. See subparagraph (3) of this paragraph.

(2) Special rules.

(i) The earnings and profits of the corporation accumulated:

(a) For any taxable year beginning before January 1, 1967, shall not include the excess of any item includible in gross income of the foreign corporation under section 882(b) as gross income derived from sources within the United States, and

(b) For any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1966, shall not include the excess of any item includible in gross income of the foreign corporation under section 882(b)(2) as income effectively connected for that year with the conduct by such corporation of a trade or business in the United States, whether derived from sources within or from sources without the United States,

Over any deductions allocable to such item under section 882(c). However, if the sale or exchange of stock in the foreign corporation by the U.S. person occurs before January 1, 1967, the provisions of (a) of this subdivision apply with respect to such sale or exchange even though the taxable year begins after December 31, 1966. See section 1248(d)(4). Any item which is required to be excluded from gross income, or which is taxed at a reduced rate, under an applicable treaty obligation of the United States shall not be excluded under this subdivision from earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year.

(ii) If a foreign corporation adopts a plan of complete liquidation in a taxable year of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, and if because of the application of section 337(a) gain or loss would not be recognized by the corporation from the sale or exchange of property if the corporation were a domestic corporation, then the earnings and profits of the corporation accumulated for the taxable year shall be determined without regard to the amount of such gain or loss. See section 1248(d)(2). For the nonapplication of section 337(a) to a liquidation by a collapsible corporation (as defined in section 341) and to certain other liquidations, see section 337(c).

(3) Adjustment for distributions.

(i) The earnings and profits of a foreign corporation accumulated for a taxable year (computed without regard to this subparagraph) shall be reduced (if necessary below zero so as to create a deficit), or a deficit in such earnings and profits shall be increased, by the amount of the distributions (other than in redemption of stock under section 302(a) or 303) made by the corporation in respect of its stock during such taxable year

(a) out of such earnings and profits, or

(b) out of earnings and profits accumulated for prior taxable years beginning after December 31, 1962 (computed under this paragraph). Except for purposes of applying this subparagraph, the application of the preceding sentence shall not affect the amount of earnings and profits accumulated for any such prior taxable year.

(ii) The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. X Corporation, which uses the calendar year as its taxable year, was organized on January 1, 1965, and was a controlled foreign corporation on each day of 1965. The amount of X's earnings and profits accumulated for 1965 (computed under this paragraph without regard to the adjustment for distributions under this subparagraph) is $400,000, of which $100,000 is distributed by X as dividends during 1965. The amount of X's earnings and profits accumulated for 1965 (computed under this paragraph) is $300,000 (that is, $400,000 minus $100,000). The result would be the same even if X was not a controlled foreign corporation on each day of 1965.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1). Assume further that the amount of X's earnings and profits accumulated for 1966 (computed under this paragraph without regard to the adjustment for distributions under this subparagraph) is $150,000, and that X distributes the amount of $260,000 as dividends during 1966. Since $150,000 of the distribution is from earnings and profits accumulated for 1966 (computed without regard to the adjustment for distributions under this subparagraph), and since $110,000 is from earnings and profits accumulated for 1965, the earnings and profits of X accumulated for 1966 are a deficit of $110,000 (that is, $150,000 minus $260,000). However, the earnings and profits accumulated for 1965 are still $300,000 for purposes of computing in the manner prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section a person's tentative ratable share.

(c) Tentative ratable share if earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year not less than zero

(1) General rule. For purposes of paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section, in respect of a share (or block) of stock in a foreign corporation, if the amount of the earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year of the corporation (computed under paragraph (b) of this section), beginning after December 31, 1962, is not less than zero, then the person's tentative ratable share for such taxable year shall be equal to:

(i)

(a) Such amount (if the computation is made in respect of a block, multiplied by the number of shares in the block), divided by

(b) the number of shares in the corporation outstanding, or deemed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph to be outstanding, on each day of such taxable year, multiplied by

(ii) The percentage that

(a) the number of days in such taxable year of the corporation during the period the person held (or was considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) the share (or block) while the corporation was a controlled foreign corporation, bears to

(b) the total number of days in such taxable year.

(2) Shares deemed outstanding for a taxable year. For purposes of this section and §§ 1.1248-4 through 1.1248-7, if the number of shares of stock in a foreign corporation outstanding on each day of a taxable year of the corporation is not constant, then the number of such shares deemed outstanding on each such day shall be the sum of the fractional amounts in respect of each share outstanding on any day of the taxable year. The fractional amount in respect of a share shall be determined by dividing

(i) the number of days in the taxable year during which such share was outstanding (excluding the day the share became outstanding, but including the day the share ceased to be outstanding), by

(ii) the total number of days in such taxable year.

(3) Examples. The application of subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

On each day of 1964, S owns a block consisting of 30 of the 100 shares of the only class of stock outstanding in F Corporation, and on each such day F is a controlled foreign corporation. F uses the calendar year as its taxable year and F's earnings and profits accumulated for 1964 (computed under paragraph (b) of this section) are $10,000. S's tentative ratable share with respect to the block is $3,000, computed as follows:

Earnings and profits accumulated for taxable year $10,000
Multiplied by:
Number of shares in block (30), divided by number of shares outstanding (100) 30%
Multiplied by:
Number of days in 1964 S held block while F was a controlled foreign corporation (365), divided by number of days in 1964 (365) 100%
Tentative ratable share for block $3,000

Example 2.

On December 31, 1964, X Corporation, a controlled foreign corporation which uses the calendar year as its taxable year, had 100 shares of one class of stock outstanding, 15 of which were owned by T. T's 15 shares were redeemed by X on March 14, 1965. On December 31, 1965, in addition to the remaining 85 shares, 10 new shares of stock (which were issued on May 26, 1965) were outstanding. Thus, during 1965, 15 shares were outstanding for 73 days, 10 for 219 days, and 85 for 365 days. The earnings and profits (computed under paragraph (b) of this section) accumulated for X's taxable year ending on December 31, 1965, are $18,800. T's tentative ratable share with respect to one share of stock is $40, computed as follows:

Earnings and profits accumulated for taxable year $18,800
Divided by:
Number of shares deemed outstanding each day of 1965:
15 for 73 days (15 × 73/365) 3
10 for 219 days (10 × 219/365) 6
85 for 365 days (35 × 365/365) 85
Total number of shares deemed outstanding each day of 1965 94
Earnings and profits accumulated per share $200
Multiplied by:
Number of days in 1965 T held his share while X was a controlled foreign corporation (73), divided by number of days in 1965 (365) 20%
T's tentative ratable share per share of stock $40

Example 3.

Assume the same facts as in example (2) except that X was not a controlled foreign corporation after January 31, 1965. T's tentative ratable share with respect to one share of stock for 1965 is $17, computed as follows:

Earnings and profits accumulated per share, determined in example (2) $200
Multiplied by:
Number of days in 1965 T held X stock while X was a controlled foreign corporation (31), divided by number of days in 1965 (365) 8.5%
Tentative ratable share $17

(4) More than one class of stock. If a foreign corporation for a taxable year has more than one class of stock outstanding, then before applying subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this paragraph the earnings and profits accumulated for the taxable year of the corporation (computed under paragraph (b) of this section) shall be allocated to each class of stock in accordance with the principles of paragraph (e) (2) and (3) of § 1.951-1, applied as if the corporation were a controlled foreign corporation on each day of such taxable year.

(d) Tentative ratable share if deficit in earnings and profits accumulated for taxable year

(1) General rule. For purposes of paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section, in respect of a share (or block) of stock in a foreign corporation, if there is a deficit in the earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year of the corporation (computed under paragraph (b) of this section) beginning after December 31, 1962, the person's tentative ratable share for such taxable year shall be an amount equal to the sum of the partial tentative ratable shares computed under subparagraphs (2) and (3) of this paragraph.

(2) Operating deficit. The partial tentative ratable share under this subparagraph is computed in 2 steps. First, compute (under paragraph (b) of this section without regard to the adjustment for distributions under subparagraph (3) thereof) the deficit (if any) in earnings and profits accumulated for such taxable year. Second, compute the partial tentative ratable share in the same manner as the tentative ratable share for such taxable year would be computed under paragraph (c) of this section if such deficit were the amount referred to in paragraph (c)(1)(i)(a) of this section.

(3) Deficit from distributions. The partial tentative ratable share under this subparagraph is computed in 2 steps. First, compute and treat as a deficit only that portion of the adjustment for distributions under paragraph (b)(3) of this section for such taxable year which is attributable under subparagraph (4) of this paragraph to distributions out of earnings and profits accumulated during prior taxable years of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, during the period or periods the corporation was a controlled foreign corporation and the share (or block) of stock was owned by a United States shareholder (as defined in section 951(b) and the regulations thereunder). Second, compute the partial tentative ratable share for such taxable year in the same manner as the tentative ratable share for such taxable year would be computed under paragraph (c) of this section if

(i) such deficit were the amount referred to in paragraph (c)(1)(i)(a) of this section, and

(ii) the corporation were a controlled foreign corporation on each day of such taxable year.

(4) Order of distributions. For purposes of applying subparagraph (3) of this paragraph only, the adjustment for distributions under paragraph (b)(3) of this section for a taxable year of a foreign corporation shall be treated as attributable first to distributions of earnings and profits for the taxable year (computed under paragraph (b) of this section without regard to such adjustment) to the extent thereof, and then to distributions out of the most recent of earnings and profits accumulated during prior taxable years beginning after December 31, 1962 (computed under paragraph (b) of this section). If the foreign corporation was a controlled foreign corporation during a prior taxable year for a period or periods which was only part of such prior taxable year, then for purposes of the preceding sentence

(i) such taxable year shall be divided into periods the corporation was or was not a controlled foreign corporation,

(ii) distributions of the earnings and profits accumulated during such prior taxable year shall be considered made from the most recent period first, and

(iii) the earnings and profits accumulated during such prior taxable year shall be allocated to a period during such year in the same proportion as the number of days in the period bears to the number of days in such year. Except for purposes of applying subparagraph (3) of this paragraph, the application of this subparagraph shall not affect the amount of earnings and profits accumulated for any such prior taxable year (computed under paragraph (b) of this section).

(5) Examples. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On each day of 1965 X Corporation, which uses the calendar year as its taxable year, was a controlled foreign corporation having 100 shares of one class of stock outstanding, a block of 25 of which were owned by T, who acquired them in 1962 and sold them in 1967. The deficit in X's earnings and profits accumulated for 1965 (computed under paragraph (b) of this section without regard to the adjustment for distributions under subparagraph (3) thereof) is $100,000, and thus in respect of the block T's partial tentative ratable share computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph is a deficit of $25,000 (that is, $100,000 × 25/100). During 1965 X does not make any distributions in respect of its stock, and thus in respect of the block T's partial tentative ratable share computed under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph is zero. Accordingly, T's tentative ratable share in respect of the block of X stock for 1965 is a deficit of $25,000. If, however, X was a controlled foreign corporation for only 292 days during 1965, T's tentative ratable share in respect of the block for 1965 would be a deficit of $20,000 (that is, $25,000 × 292/365).

Example 2.

(i) Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that at no time during 1965 is X a controlled foreign corporation and that during 1965 X distributes $80,000 with respect to its stock. Assume further that X was a controlled foreign corporation on each day of 1964, but only for the first 146 days of 1963, and that X's earnings and profits accumulated for prior taxable years computed under paragraph (b) of this section are $70,000 for 1964 and $20,000 for 1963.

(ii) Since X was not a controlled foreign corporation on any day of 1965, in respect of the block T's partial tentative ratable share computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph is zero.

(iii) The partial tentative ratable share under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph is computed in the following manner: For 1965 the adjustment for distributions under paragraph (b)(3) of this section is $80,000. Under subparagraph (4) of this paragraph $70,000 of such adjustment is attributable to the distribution of all of the earnings and profits accumulated during 1964, on every day of which X was a controlled foreign corporation, and $10,000 of the adjustment is attributable to the distribution of $10,000 of the earnings and profits accumulated for 1963. The portion of the earnings and profits accumulated by X in 1963 attributable to the first 146 days in 1963 during which X was a controlled foreign corporation is $8,000 (that is, $20,000 × 146/365), and the portion attributable to the period in 1963 during which X was not a controlled foreign corporation is $12,000 (that is, $20,000 × 219/365). Under subparagraph (4)(ii) of this paragraph, the distribution in 1965 of $10,000 of earnings and profits accumulated during 1963 is attributable to the more recent period in 1963, that is, the period X was not a controlled foreign corporation. Accordingly, the portion of the adjustment for distributions under paragraph (b)(3) of this section attributable to earnings and profits accumulated during periods X was a controlled foreign corporation is $70,000, and in respect of the block T's partial tentative ratable share under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph is a deficit of $17,500 (that is, $70,000 × 25/100).

(iv) T's tentative ratable share in respect of the block of X stock for 1965 is a deficit of $17,500 (that is, the sum of the partial tentative ratable share for the block computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, zero, plus the partial tentative ratable share for the block computed under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph, a deficit of $17,500).

(v) Assume that X had 100 shares of one class of stock outstanding on each day of 1964 and 1963. Notwithstanding the distributions in 1965 of earnings and profits accumulated during 1964 and 1963 (computed under paragraph (b) of this section), nevertheless, in respect of the block T's tentative ratable share for 1964 is $17,500 (that is, earnings and profits accumulated during 1964 so computed of $70,000, multiplied by 25 shares/100 shares) and in respect of the block T's tentative ratable share for 1963 is $2,000 (that is, earnings and profits accumulated during 1963 so computed of $20,000, multiplied by 25 shares/100 shares, and multiplied by the percentage that the number of days in 1963 on which X was a controlled foreign corporation bears to the total number of days in 1963, 146/365).

Example 3. Assume the same facts as in example (2) except that X was a controlled foreign corporation on each day of 1965. The tentative ratable share with respect to the block of stock for 1965 is a deficit of $42,500, that is, the sum of the partial tentative ratable share under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph (as determined in example (1)), a deficit of $25,000, plus the partial tentative ratable share under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph (as determined in example (2)), a deficit of $17,500.

(6) More than one class of stock. If a foreign corporation for a taxable year has more than one class of stock outstanding, then before applying subparagraph (1) of this paragraph the earnings and profits accumulated for the taxable year of the corporation (computed under paragraph (b) of this section) shall be allocated to each class of stock in accordance with the principles of paragraph (e) (2) and (3) of § 1.951-1, applied as if the corporation were a controlled foreign corporation on each day of such taxable year.

(e) Ratable share of earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year

(1) In general. For purposes of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section, in respect of a share (or block) of stock in a foreign corporation, the person's ratable share of the earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1962, shall be an amount equal to the tentative ratable share computed under paragraph (c) or (d) (as the case may be) of this section, adjusted in the manner prescribed in subparagraphs (2) through (6) of this paragraph.

(2) Amounts included in gross income under section 951.

(i) In respect of a share (or block) of stock in a foreign corporation, a person's tentative ratable share for a taxable year of the corporation (computed under paragraph (c) of this section) shall be reduced (but not below zero) by the excess of

(a) the amount, if any, included (in respect of such corporation for such taxable year) under section 951 in the gross income of such person or (during the period such share, or block, was considered to be held by such person by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) in the gross income of any other person who held such share (or block), over

(b) the portion of such amount which, in any taxable year of such person or such other person, resulted in an exclusion from the gross income of such person or such other person of an amount under section 959(a)(1) (relating to exclusion from gross income of distributions of previously taxed earnings and profits). See section 1248(d)(1). This subdivision shall apply notwithstanding an election under section 962 by such person to be subject to tax at corporate rates.

(ii) The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

On December 31, 1975, Brown sells one share of stock in X Corporation, a controlled foreign corporation which has never been a less developed country corporation (as defined in section 902(d)). Both Brown and X use the calendar year as the taxable year. In respect of his share, Brown's tentative ratable share for 1971 (computed under paragraph (c) of this section) is $35. In respect of his share, Brown included $4 in his gross income for 1971 under section 951, and the amount of $3, which was distributed to him by X on January 15, 1972, is excluded from Brown's gross income under section 959(a)(1). In respect of the stock, Brown's ratable share for 1971 is $34, determined as follows:

Tentative ratable share $35
Minus:
Excess of amount of tentative ratable share included in Brown's gross income under section 951 ($4), over portion thereof which resulted in exclusion under section 959(a)(1) ($3) 1
Ratable share 34

(3) Amounts included in gross income under section 551. In respect of a share (or block) of stock in a foreign corporation, a person's tentative ratable share for a taxable year of the corporation (computed under paragraph (c) of this section) shall be reduced (but not below zero) by the amount, if any, included (in respect of such corporation for such taxable year) under section 551 in the gross income of such person or (during the period such share, or block, was considered to be held by such person by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) in the gross income of any other person who held such share (or block).

(4) Less developed country corporations.

(i) If the foreign corporation was a less developed country corporation as defined in section 902(d) for a taxable year of the corporation, and if the person who sold or exchanged a share (or block) of stock in such corporation satisfies the requirements of paragraph (a) of § 1.1248-5 in respect of such stock, then his ratable share for such taxable year shall be zero. See section 1248(d)(3).

(ii) The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Assume the same facts as in the example in subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph except that X was a less developed country corporation for 1971. Assume further that Brown satisfies the requirements of paragraph (a) of § 1.1248-5. Brown's ratable share in respect of the stock for 1971 is zero.

(5) Qualified shareholder of foreign investment company. In respect of a share (or block) of stock in a foreign corporation which was a foreign investment company described in section 1246 (b)(1), if the election under section 1247(a) to distribute income currently was in effect for a taxable year of the company, and if the person who sold or exchanged the stock (or another person who actually owned the stock during such taxable year and whose holding of the stock is attributed by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8, to the person who sold or exchanged the stock) was a qualified shareholder (as defined in section 1247(c)) for his taxable year in which or with which such taxable year of the company ends, then the ratable share in respect of the share (or block) for such taxable year of the company shall be zero. See section 1248(d)(5). In case gain is recognized under section 1246 in respect of a share (or block), see section 1248(f)(3)(B).

(6) Adjustment for certain distributions. If

(i) the person who sold or exchanged the share or block (or another person who actually owned the share or block and whose holding of the share or block is attributed by reason of the application of section 1223 to such person, taking into account § 1.1248-8) received a distribution during a taxable year of the corporation, and

(ii) such distribution was not included in the gross income of such person (or such other person) by reason of the application of section 959(a)(1) to amounts which were included under section 951(a)(1) in the gross income of a United States shareholder whose holding of the share or block is not attributed by reason of the application of section 1223 to such person, taking into account § 1.1248-8 (or such other person), then the amount of such distribution shall be added to such person's tentative ratable share for such taxable year. Thus, for example, such tentative ratable share may be increased, or a deficit reduced, by the amount of such distribution.

(f) Earnings and profits of subsidiaries of foreign corporations

(1) Application of paragraph.

(i) In respect of a person who sells or exchanges stock in a foreign corporation (referred to as a first tier corporation), the provisions of this paragraph shall apply if the following 3 conditions exist:

(a) The conditions of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1248-1 are satisfied by the person in respect of such stock;

(b) By reason of his ownership of such stock, on the date of such sale or exchange such person owned, within the meaning of section 958(a)(2), stock in another foreign corporation (referred to as a lower tier corporation); and

(c) The conditions of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1248-1 would be satisfied by such person in respect of such stock in the lower tier corporation if such person were deemed to have sold or exchanged such stock in the lower tier corporation on the date he actually sold or exchanged such stock in the first tier corporation.

(ii) If the provisions of this paragraph apply,

(a) the person's tentative ratable share (or shares) of the earnings and profits accumulated by the lower tier corporation attributable to a taxable year of the first tier corporation shall be computed under subparagraph (2) or (4) of this paragraph, whichever is applicable, and

(b) such person's ratable share (or shares) for the lower tier corporation attributable to a taxable year of the first tier corporation shall be computed under subparagraph (5) of this paragraph. For the manner of taking into account the ratable share for a lower tier corporation, see paragraph (a)(3) of this section.

(iii) The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: On each day of 1964 and 1965 corporations X and Y are controlled foreign corporations, and each has outstanding 100 shares of one class of stock. On January 15, 1965, T, a United States person, owns one share of stock in X and X directly owns 20 shares of stock in Y. Thus, T owns, within the meaning of section 958(a)(2), stock in Y. On that date, T sells his share in X and satisfies the conditions of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1248-1 in respect of his stock in X. Assuming that the conditions of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1248-1 would be satisfied by T in respect of the stock he indirectly owns in Y if, on January 15, 1965, he were deemed to have sold such stock in Y, the provisions of this paragraph apply.

(2) Tentative ratable share (of lower tier corporation attributable to a taxable year of first tier corporation) not less than zero. If the provisions of this paragraph apply to a sale or exchange by a United States person of a share (or block) of stock in a first tier corporation, and if the amount of earnings and profits accumulated (computed under paragraph (b) of this section) for a taxable year (beginning after December 31, 1962) of the lower tier corporation is not less than zero, then in respect of the share (or block) such person's tentative ratable share of the earnings and profits accumulated for such taxable year of the lower tier corporation attributable to any taxable year (beginning after December 31, 1962) of such first tier corporation shall be an amount equal to:

(i)

(a) Such amount of earnings and profits accumulated for such taxable year of the lower tier corporation (if the computation is made in respect of a block in the first tier corporation, multiplied by the number of shares in the block), divided by

(b) the number of shares in the first tier corporation outstanding, or deemed under paragraph (c)(2) of this section to be outstanding, on each day of such taxable year of the first tier corporation, multiplied by

(ii) The percentage that

(a) the number of days during the period or periods in such taxable year of the first tier corporation on which such person held (or was considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) the share (or block) in the first tier corporation while the first tier corporation owned (within the meaning of section 958(a)) stock of such lower tier corporation at times while such lower tier corporation was a controlled foreign corporation, bears to

(b) the total number of days in such taxable year of the first tier corporation, multiplied by

(iii) The percentage that

(a) the average number of shares in the lower tier corporation which were owned within the meaning of section 958(a) by the first tier corporation during such period or periods (referred to in subdivision (ii)(a) of this subparagraph), bears to

(b) the total number of such shares outstanding, or deemed under the principles of paragraph (c)(2) of this section to be outstanding, during such period or periods, multiplied by

(iv) The percentage that

(a) the number of days in such taxable year of the lower tier corporation which fall within the taxable year of the first tier corporation, bears to

(b) the total number of days in such taxable year of the lower tier corporation.

(3) Examples. The application of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

In a year subsequent to 1969, Brown, a United States person, sells 5 of his shares of stock in X Corporation in a transaction as to which the provisions of this paragraph apply. Brown had purchased the 5 shares prior to 1969. On each day of 1969 X Corporation actually had 100 shares of one class of stock outstanding. On each such day X Corporation directly owned all of the shares of stock in Y Corporation, and Y Corporation directly owned all of the shares of stock in Z Corporation. Z Corporation on each such day was a controlled foreign corporation. Both X and Z use the calendar year as the taxable year. Z's earnings and profits accumulated for 1969 (computed under paragraph (b) of this section) are $2,000. Brown's tentative ratable share of the earnings and profits accumulated by Z attributable to the 1969 calendar year of X is $20 per share, computed as follows:

(i) Z's earnings and profits for 1969 ($2,000), divided by the number of shares in X deemed outstanding each day of 1969 (100) $20
Multiplied by:
(ii) Since on each day of 1969 Brown (by reason of owning directly his shares in X) owned, within the meaning of section 958(a)(2), stock in Z while Z was a controlled foreign corporation, the percentage determined under subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph equals 100%
Multiplied by:
(iii) Since on each day of 1969 X owned 100 percent of the stock of Y while Y owned 100 percent of the stock in Z, the percentage determined under subparagraph (2)(iii) of this paragraph equals 100%
Multiplied by:
(iv) Since X and Z each use the same taxable year, the percentage determined under subparagraph (2)(iv) of this paragraph equals 100%
Total $20

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that Brown sold his stock in X on October 19, 1969. Brown's tentative ratable share of the earnings and profits accumulated by Z attributable to the 1969 calendar year of X is $16 per share, computed as follows:

(i) The amount determined in subdivision (i) of example (1) $20
Multiplied by:
(ii) The number of days in the period during 1969 Brown (by reason of owning directly his stock in X) owned, within the meaning of section 958(a)(2), his stock in Z while Z was a controlled foreign corporation (292), divided by the number of days in 1969 (365), equals 80%
Multiplied by:
(iii) The percentage determined in subdivision
(iii) of example (1) 100%
Multiplied by:
(iv) The percentage determined in subdivision
(iv) of example (1) 100%
Total $16

Example 3.

Assume the same facts as in examples (1) and (2), except that on each day during 1969 Y owned (within the meaning of section 958(a)(2)) 81 of the 100 shares of Z's outstanding stock. Brown's tentative ratable share of the earnings and profits accumulated by Z attributable to the 1969 calendar year of X is $12.96 per share, computed as follows:

(i) The amount determined in subdivision (i) of example (1) $20
Multiplied by:
(ii) The percentage determined in subdivision (ii) of example (2) 80%
Multiplied by:
(iii) The average number of shares in Z which were owned (within the meaning of section 958(a)) by X during the applicable period (81), divided by the total number of shares in Z during such period (100) 81%
Multiplied by:
(iv) The percentage determined in subdivision (iv) of example (1) 100%
Total $12.96

The result would be the same if X owned (within the meaning of section 958(a)(2)) 81 percent of the stock in Y while Y so owned 100 percent of the stock in X, or if X so owned 90 percent of the stock in Y while Y so owned 90 percent of the stock in Z.

Example 4.

Assume the same facts as in example (3), except that Z Corporation uses a fiscal year ending June 30 as its taxable year. Assume further that Z's earnings and profits accumulated for its fiscal year ending June 30, 1969, and for its fiscal year ending June 30, 1970, are $3,000 and $2,000, respectively. Brown's tentative ratable share of the earnings and profits accumulated by Z attributable to the 1969 calendar year of X is $16.17 per share, computed as follows:

In respect of Z's taxable year ending
June 30, 1969 June 30, 1970
(i) Z's earnings and profits, divided by the number of shares in X deemed outstanding on each day of 1969:
$3,000/100 $30
$2,000/100 $20
Multiplied by:
(ii) The percentage determined in subdivision (ii) of example (2) 80% 80%
Multiplied by:
(iii) The percentage determined in subdivision (iii) of example (3) 81% 81%
Multiplied by:
(iv) Number of days in Z's taxable year which fall within 1969, divided by total number of days in Z's taxable year:
181/365 49.6%
184/365 50.4%
Totals $9.64 $6.53
(v) Sum of tentative ratable shares of Z attributable to X's 1969 calendar year:
For Z's taxable year ending
June 30, 1969 $9.64
June 30, 1970 $6.53
Sum $16.17

(4) Deficit in tentative ratable share of lower tier corporation attributable to a taxable year of first tier corporation.

(i) If there is a deficit in the earnings and profits accumulated for a taxable year of a lower tier corporation beginning after December 31, 1962 (computed under paragraph (b) of this section), the person's tentative ratable share for such taxable year of such lower tier corporation attributable to a taxable year of a first tier corporation shall not be computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph but shall be an amount equal to the sum of the partial tentative ratable shares computed under subdivisions (ii) and (iii) of this subparagraph.

(ii) The partial tentative ratable share under this subdivision is computed in 2 steps. First, compute (under paragraph (b) of this section without regard to the adjustments for distributions under subparagraph (3) thereof) the deficit (if any) in earnings and profits accumulated for such taxable year of such lower tier corporation. Second, compute the partial tentative ratable share in the same manner as such tentative ratable share would be computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph if such deficit were the amount referred to in subparagraph (2)(i)(a) of this paragraph.

(iii) The partial tentative ratable share under this subdivision is computed in 2 steps. First, compute and treat as a deficit the portion of the adjustment for distributions under paragraph (b)(3) of this section for such taxable year which is attributable under paragraph (d)(4) of this section to distributions of earnings and profits accumulated during prior taxable years of the lower tier corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, during the period or periods such lower tier corporation was a controlled foreign corporation and the percentage of the stock of such lower tier corporation (which the person owns within the meaning of section 958(a)(2)) was owned within the meaning of section 958(a) by a United States shareholder (as defined in section 951(b) and the regulations thereunder). Second, compute the partial tentative ratable share in the same manner as such tentative ratable share would be computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph if (a) such deficit were the amount referred to in subparagraph (2)(i)(a) of this paragraph, and (b) such lower tier corporation were a controlled foreign corporation on each day of such taxable year.

(5) Ratable share of lower tier corporation attributable to a first tier corporation.

(i) If the provisions of this paragraph apply in respect of a share of stock in a first tier corporation, a person's ratable share of the earnings and profits accumulated by the lower tier corporation attributable to a taxable year of the first tier corporation shall be an amount equal to the tentative ratable share computed under subparagraph (2) or (4) of this paragraph, adjusted in the manner prescribed in this subparagraph.

(ii) If the first tier corporation and the lower tier corporation use the same taxable year, then in respect of a share (or block) of stock in the first tier corporation the person's tentative ratable share of the accumulated earnings and profits of the lower tier corporation attributable to the taxable year of the first tier corporation (computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph) shall be reduced (but not below zero) by the excess of (a) the amount, if any, included (in respect of such lower tier corporation for its taxable year) under section 951 in the gross income of such person or (during the period such stock was considered to be held by such person by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) in the gross income of any other person who held such stock, over (b) the portion of such amount which, in any taxable year of such person or such other person, resulted in an exclusion from the gross income of such person or such other person of an amount under section 959(a)(1). For an illustration of the principles in the preceding sentence, see the example in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section.

(iii) If the first tier corporation and the lower tier corporation do not use the same taxable year, and if there would be an excess computed under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph in respect of a taxable year of the lower tier corporation (were the taxable years of such corporations the same), then such person's tentative ratable share of the accumulated earnings and profits for a taxable year of the lower tier corporation attributable to such taxable year of the first tier corporation shall be reduced (but not below zero) by an amount which bears the same ratio to

(a) such excess, as

(b) the number of days in the taxable year of the lower tier corporation which fall within the taxable year of the first tier corporation, bears to

(c) the total number of days in the taxable year of the first tier corporation.

(iv) If the first tier corporation and the lower tier corporation use the same taxable year, then in respect of a share (or block) of stock in the first tier corporation the person's tentative ratable share of the accumulated earnings and profits of the lower tier corporation attributable to the taxable year of the first tier corporation (computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph) shall be reduced (but not below zero) by the amount, if any, included (in respect of such corporation for such taxable year) under section 551, by reason of the application of section 555(b), in the gross income of such person or (during the period such share (or block) was considered to be held by such person by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) in the gross income of any other person who held such share (or block).

(v) If the first tier corporation and the lower tier corporation do not use the same taxable year, and if there would be a reduction in the person's tentative ratable share of the accumulated earnings and profits of the lower tier corporation attributable to the taxable year of the first tier corporation by an amount computed under subdivision (iv) of this subparagraph in respect of a taxable year of the lower tier corporation (were the taxable years of such corporations the same), then such person's tentative ratable share of the accumulated earnings and profits for a taxable year of the lower tier corporation attributable to such taxable year of the first tier corporation shall be reduced by an amount which bears the same ratio to

(a) such amount, as

(b) the number of days in the taxable year of the lower tier corporation which fall within the taxable year of the first tier corporation, bears to

(c) the total number of days in the taxable year of the first tier corporation.

(vi) If the lower tier corporation was a less developed country corporation as defined in section 902(d) for a taxable year of the corporation, see paragraph (g) of this section.

(g) Lower tier corporation a less developed country corporation

(1) General. If the lower tier corporation was a less developed country corporation as defined in section 902(d) for a taxable year of such corporation, and if the person who sold or exchanged a share (or block) of stock in the first tier corporation satisfies on the date of such sale or exchange:

(i) The requirements of paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1248-5 with respect to such stock, and

(ii) The requirements of paragraph (d)(1) of § 1.1248-5 with respect to any stock of the lower tier corporation which such person, by reason of his direct ownership of such stock in the first tier corporation, owned within the meaning of section 958(a)(2),

Then such person's ratable share (or a deficit in such ratable share) for such taxable year of the lower tier corporation attributable to a taxable year of the first tier corporation (determined without regard to this paragraph) shall be reduced by an amount computed by multiplying such ratable share (so determined without regard to this paragraph) by the percentage computed under either subparagraph (2) or (4) of this paragraph, whichever is applicable.

(2) Percentage for second tier corporation. For purposes of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, if stock of a lower tier corporation (hereinafter referred to as a second tier corporation) is owned directly by the first tier corporation on the date of the sale or exchange referred to in such subparagraph (1), the percentage under this subparagraph shall be computed by dividing

(i) the number of shares of stock of the second tier corporation which the first tier corporation has owned directly for an uninterrupted 10-year period ending on such date, by

(ii) the total number of shares of the stock of such second tier corporation owned directly by such first tier corporation on such date.

(3) Examples. The provisions of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On January 1, 1966, Smith, a United States person, recognizes gain upon the sale of one share of the only class of stock of F Corporation, which he has owned continuously since 1955. He includes a portion of the gain in his gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a). On January 1, 1966, F owns directly 60 shares of the 100 outstanding shares of the only class of stock of G Corporation, which F acquired in 1955 and owned continuously until such sale. F uses a taxable year ending June 30, and G uses the calendar year as the taxable year. For 1964, G was a less developed country corporation, and on each day of 1964 G was a controlled foreign corporation. Smith's ratable share for G's taxable year ending December 31, 1964, attributable to F's taxable year ending June 30, 1965 (determined without regard to this paragraph) is $6.00. Since the percentage computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph is 100 percent (60 shares divided by 60 shares), Smith's ratable share for G's taxable year ending December 31, 1964, attributable to F's taxable year ending June 30, 1965 (after the application of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph) is zero (that is, $6.00 reduced by 100 percent of $6.00).

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that of the 60 shares of G Corporation which F Corporation owned on January 1, 1966, 20 shares were acquired in 1961. The percentage computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph is 6623 percent (40 shares divided by 60 shares). Accordingly, Smith's ratable share for G's taxable year ending December 31, 1964, attributable to F's taxable year ending June 30, 1965 (after the application of subparagraph (2) or this paragraph) is $2.00 (that is, $6.00 reduced by 6623 percent of $6.00).

(4) Percentage for lower tier corporations other than second tier corporation. For purposes of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, if stock of a lower tier corporation (other than a second tier corporation) is owned within the meaning of section 958(a)(2) by the first tier corporation on the date of the sale or exchange referred to in such subparagraph (1), the percentage under this subparagraph shall be computed in the following manner:

(i) First, determine the percentage for the second tier corporation in accordance with subparagraph (2) of this paragraph.

(ii) Second, determine a partial percentage for each other lower tier corporation in the same manner as the percentage for the second tier corporation is determined. Thus, for example, the partial percentage for a third tier corporation is determined by dividing

(a) the number of shares of stock of the third tier corporation which the second tier corporation has owned directly for an uninterrupted 10-year period ending on the date of the sale or exchange referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, by

(b) the total number of shares of stock of such third tier corporation owned directly by such second tier corporation on such date.

(iii) Third, the percentage for a third tier corporation is the percentage for the second tier corporation multiplied by the partial percentage for the third tier corporation. The percentage for a fourth tier corporation is the percentage for the third tier corporation (as determined in the preceding sentence) multiplied by the partial percentage for the fourth tier corporation. In a similar manner, the percentage for any other lower tier corporation may be determined.

(5) Example. The application of subparagraph (4) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

On January 1, 1967, Brown, a United States person recognizes gain upon the sale of one share of the only class of stock of W Corporation, which he has owned continuously since 1955. He includes a portion of the gain in his gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a). W is the first tier corporation of a chain of foreign corporations W, X, Y, and Z. W and Z each use the calendar year as the taxable year. For 1964, Z was a less developed country corporation and on each day of 1964 Z was a controlled foreign corporation. Additional facts are set forth in the table below:

Corporation—(1) Shares directly owned
by preceding tier—
Column (2) divided by column (3) (percent)—(4)
For uninterrupted 10-year period ending Jan. 1, 1967—(2) On Jan. 1, 1967—(3)
X 40 60 6623
Y 30 40 75
Z 20 30 6623

For 1964, the percentage referred to in subparagraph (4) of this paragraph for Z is 3313 percent (6623% × 75% × 6623%).

(6) Special rule. For purposes of applying the provisions of this paragraph, a lower tier corporation may be treated as a second tier corporation with respect to any of its stock which is owned directly by a first tier corporation whereas such lower tier corporation may be treated as a lower tier corporation other than a second tier corporation with respect to other stock in such lower tier corporation which is owned (within the meaning of section 958(a)(2)) by such first tier corporation. Thus, for example, if corporations X, Y, and Z are foreign corporations, X is a first tier corporation owning directly 100 percent of the stock of Y and 40 percent of the stock of Z, and in addition Y owns directly 60 percent of the stock of Z, then the 40 percent of the Z stock (which X owns directly) is considered to be stock in a second tier corporation and the 60 percent of the Z stock (which Y owns directly and which X is considered to own within the meaning of section 958(a)(2)) is considered to be stock in a third tier corporation.

[T.D. 6779, 29 FR 18133, Dec. 22, 1964, as amended by T.D. 7293, 38 FR 32803, Nov. 28, 1973; T.D. 7545, 43 FR 19652, May 8, 1978; T.D. 9345, 72 FR 41445, July 30, 2007; T.D. 9614, 78 FR 17041, Mar. 19, 2013]

§ 1.1248-4 Limitation on tax applicable to individuals.

(a) General rule

(1) Limitation on tax. Under section 1248(b), if during a taxable year an individual sells or exchanges stock in a foreign corporation, then in respect of the stock the increase in the individual's income tax liability for such taxable year which is attributable (under paragraph (b) of this section) to the amount included in his gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) shall not be greater than an amount equal to the sum of:

(i) The excess, computed under paragraph (c) of this section in respect of the stock of the United States taxes which would have been paid by the corporation over the taxes (including United States taxes) actually paid by the corporation, plus.

(ii) An amount equal to the increase in the individual's income tax liability which would be attributable to the inclusion in his gross income for such taxable year, as long-term capital gain, of an amount equal to the excess of (a) the amount included in the individual's gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) in respect of such stock, over (b) the excess referred to in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph.

(2) Share or block. In general, the limitation on tax attributable (under paragraph (b) of this section) to the amount included in an individual's gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) shall be determined separately for each share of stock sold or exchanged. However, such determination may be made in respect of a block of stock if earnings and profits attributable to the block are computed under § 1.1248-2 or 1.1248-3. See paragraph (b) of § 1.1248-2 and paragraph (a)(5) of § 1.1248-3.

(3) Application of limitation. The provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph shall not apply unless the individual establishes:

(i) In the manner prescribed in § 1.1248-7, the amount of the earnings and profits of the corporation attributable under paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1248-2 or under paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable, to the stock, and

(ii) The amount equal to the sum described in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, computed in accordance with the provisions of this section.

(4) Example. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

On December 31, 1966, Smith, a United States person, sells a share of stock of X Corporation which he has owned continuously since December 31, 1965, and includes $100 of the gain on the sale in his gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a). Both X and Smith use the calendar year as the taxable year. The increase in Smith's income tax liability for 1966 which is attributable (under paragraph (b) of this section) to the inclusion of the $100 in his gross income as a dividend is $70. X was a controlled foreign corporation on each day of 1966. The excess computed under paragraph (c) of this section in respect of the share, of the United States taxes which X would have paid over the taxes (including United States taxes) actually paid by X is $49. Under section 1248(b), the limitation on the tax attributable to the $100 included by Smith in his gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) is $61.75, computed as follows:

(i) Excess, computed under paragraph (c) of this section, of United States taxes which X Corporation would have paid in 1966 over the taxes actually paid by X in 1966 $49.00
(ii) The amount determined under subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph:
The amount Smith included in his gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) $100.00
Less the excess referred to in subdivision (i) of this example 49.00
Difference 51.00
Increase in Smith's tax liability attributable to including $51 in his gross income as long-term capital gain (25 percent of $51) 12.75
(iii) Limitation on tax 61.75

(b) Tax attributable to amount treated as dividend

(1) General. For purposes of paragraph (a)(1) of this section, in respect of a share (or block) of stock in a foreign corporation sold or exchanged by an individual during a taxable year, the tax attributable to the amount included in his gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) shall be the amount which bears the same ratio to (i) the excess of (a) his income tax liability for the taxable year determined without regard to section 1248(b) over (b) such tax liability determined as if the portion of the total gain recognized during the taxable year which is treated as a dividend under section 1248(a) had not been recognized, as (ii) the amount included as a dividend under section 1248(a) in respect of the share (or block), bears to (iii) the total amount included as a dividend under section 1248(a) in the individual's gross income for such taxable year.

(2) Examples. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) During 1963, Brown, an unmarried United States person, sells a block of stock in a controlled foreign corporation. On the sale, he recognizes $22,000 gain, of which $18,000 is treated as a dividend under section 1248(a) and $4,000 as long-term capital gain. Brown computes his income tax liability for his taxable year ending December 31, 1963, under section 1201 (relating to alternative tax) in accordance with the additional facts assumed in the following table:

Computation of income tax liability without regard to section 1248(b) Computation of income tax liability as if the gain treated as a divided under section 1248(a) had not been recognized
Income from salary $300,000 $300,000
Long-term capital gain resulting from sale of stock, less deduction for capital gains under section 1202 ($4,000 less $2,000) 2,000 2,000
Amount treated as a dividend under section 1248(a) 18,000 0
Adjusted gross income 320,000 302,000
Charitable contribution of $100,000 to church (limited under section 170(b) to 30 percent of adjusted gross income) (96,000) (90,600)
Other itemized deductions and personal exemption (7,700) (7,700)
Taxable income 216,300 203,700
Less 50 percent of $4,000 2,000 2,000
Amount subject to partial tax under section 1201(b)(1) 214,300 201,700
Partial tax 169,833 158,367
25 percent of $4,000 1,000 1,000
Tax liability 170,833 159,367

(ii) The tax attributable to the $18,000 treated as a dividend under section 1248(a) is $11,466 ($170,833 minus $159,367).

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that the $18,000 treated as a dividend under section 1248(a) is attributable to the sale of a block of stock in X Corporation and a block of stock in Y Corporation. Assume further that $10,000 of the gain on the block of X stock was treated as a dividend and that $8,000 of the gain on the block of Y stock was treated as a dividend. Thus, the tax attributable to the amount treated as a dividend in respect of the block of X stock is $6,370 ($10,000/$18,000 of $11,466) and the amount in respect of the block of Y stock is $5,096 ($8,000/$18,000 of $11,466). The result would be the same if both blocks of stock were blocks of stock in the same corporation.

(c) Excess (of United States taxes which would have been paid over taxes actually paid) attributable to a share (or block)

(1) General. For purposes of paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section:

(i) The term taxes means income, war profits, or excess profits taxes, and

(ii) The excess (and the portion of such excess attributable to an individual's share or block of stock in a foreign corporation) of the United States taxes which would have been paid by the corporation over the taxes (including United States taxes) actually paid by the corporation, for the period or periods the stock was held (or was considered to be held by reason of the application of section 1223) by the individual in taxable years of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, while the corporation was a controlled foreign corporation, shall be computed in accordance with the steps set forth in subparagraphs (2), (3), and (4) of this paragraph.

(2) Step 1. For each taxable year of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, in respect of the individual's share (or block) of such stock

(i) the taxable income of the corporation shall be computed in the manner prescribed in paragraph (d) of this section, and

(ii) the excess (and the portion of such excess attributable to the stock of the United States taxes which would have been paid by the corporation on such taxable income over the taxes (including United States taxes) actually paid by the corporation shall be computed in the manner prescribed in paragraph (e) of this section.

(3) Step 2. If during such taxable year the corporation is a first tier corporation to which paragraph (f) of this section applies,

(i) the excess (and the portion of such excess attributable to the individual's share, or block, of stock in the first tier corporation) of the United States taxes which would have been paid by any lower tier corporation over the taxes (including United States taxes) actually paid by such lower tier corporation shall be computed under paragraph (f) of this section, and

(ii) such portion shall be added to the portion of the excess attributable to the individual's share (or block) of such stock as determined in step 1 for such taxable year.

(4) Step 3. The excess, in respect of the individual's share (or block), of the United States taxes which would have been paid by the corporation over the taxes actually paid by the corporation shall be the sum of the portions computed for each such taxable year in the manner prescribed in steps 1 and 2.

(d) Taxable income. For purposes of paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section, taxable income shall be computed in respect of an individual's share (or block) in accordance with the following rules:

(1) Application of principles of § 1.952-2. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph, the principles of paragraphs (a)(1), (b)(1), and (c) of § 1.952-2 (other than subparagraphs (2)(iii)(b), (2)(v), (5)(i), and (6) of such paragraph (c)) shall apply.

(2) Effect of elections. In respect of a taxable year of a foreign corporation, no effect shall be given to an election or an adoption of accounting method unless for such taxable year effect is given to such election or adoption of accounting method under paragraph (d)(1) of § 1.1248-2 or paragraph (b)(1) of § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable.

(3) The deductions for certain dividends received provided in sections 243, 244, and 245 shall not be allowed.

(4) Deduction for taxes. In computing the amount of the deduction allowed under section 164, there shall be excluded income, war profits, or excess profits taxes paid or accrued which are imposed by the authority of any foreign country or possession of the United States.

(5) Capital loss carryover. In determining the amount of a net capital loss to be carried forward under section 1212 to the taxable year:

(i) No net capital loss shall be carried forward from a taxable year beginning before January 1, 1963.

(ii) The portion of a net capital loss or a capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) for a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1962, which shall be taken into account shall be the amount of such loss or gain (as the case may be), multiplied by the percentage which (a) the number of days in such taxable year during which the individual held (or was considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223) the share (or block) of stock sold or exchanged while the corporation was a controlled foreign corporation, bears to (b) the total number of days in such taxable year.

(iii) The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Corporation X is a foreign corporation which was created on January 1, 1963, and which uses the calendar year as its taxable year. X was a controlled foreign corporation on each day of the period March 15, 1963, through December 31, 1965, but was not a controlled foreign corporation on any day during the period January 1, 1963, through March 14, 1963. On December 31, 1965, Smith, a United States person, sells a share of X stock which he has owned continuously since January 1, 1963. A portion of the gain recognized on the sale is includible in Smith's gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a). X had a net capital loss (determined without regard to subchapter N, chapter 1 of the Code) of $200 for 1963. Since, however, X was a controlled foreign corporation for only 292 days in 1963, for purposes of determining the net capital loss carryover to 1964 the portion of the net capital loss of $200 for 1963 which Smith takes into account under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph is $160 (292/365 of $200), and, accordingly, the amount of the net capital loss carryover to 1964 is $160.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that X was not a controlled foreign corporation on any day of the period May 26, 1964, through June 30, 1965. Assume further that X had a net capital gain (capital gain net income for taxable years beginning after December 31, 1976) (determined without regard to subchapter N, chapter 1, of the Code) of $160 for 1964. In computing X's taxable income for 1964 under this paragraph, Smith applies the net capital loss carryover of $160 from 1963 to reduce the net capital gain of $160 for 1964 to zero. Since, however, X was a controlled foreign corporation for only 146 days in 1964, for purposes of computing the portion of the 1963 capital loss of $160 which is a net capital loss carryover to 1965, the portion of the 1964 capital gain which Smith takes into account under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph is $63.83 (146366 of $160). Thus, the net capital loss carryover to 1965 is $96.17 ($160 minus $63.83).

(6) Net operating loss deduction.

(i) The individual shall reduce the taxable income (computed under subparagraphs (1) through (5) of this paragraph) of the corporation for the taxable year by the amount of the net operating loss deduction of the corporation computed under section 172, as modified in the manner prescribed in this subparagraph.

(ii) The rules of subparagraphs (1) through (5) of this paragraph shall apply for purposes of determining the excess referred to in section 172(c) and the taxable income referred to in section 172(b)(2).

(iii) A net operating loss shall not be carried forward from, or carried back to, a taxable year beginning before January 1, 1963.

(iv) The portion of a net operating loss incurred, or of taxable income earned, in a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1962, which shall be taken into account under section 172(b)(2) shall be the amount of such loss or income (as the case may be), multiplied by the percentage which (a) the number of days in such taxable year during which the individual held (or was considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223) the share (or block) of stock sold or exchanged while the corporation was a controlled foreign corporation, bears to (b) the total number of days in such taxable year.

(v) For illustrations of the principles of this subparagraph, see the examples relating to net capital loss carryovers in subparagraph (5)(iii) of this paragraph.

(7) Adjustment for amount previously included in gross income of United States shareholders. In respect of the individual's share (or block) of stock sold or exchanged, the taxable income of the corporation for the taxable year (determined without regard to this subparagraph and subparagraph (8) of this paragraph) shall be reduced (but not below zero) by an amount equal to the sum of the amounts included under section 951 in the gross income of United States shareholders (as defined in section 951(b)) of the corporation for the taxable year.

(8) Adjustment for distributions. In respect of the individual's share (or block) of stock sold or exchanged, the taxable income of the corporation for the taxable year (determined without regard to this subparagraph) shall be reduced (but not below zero) by the amount of the distributions (other than in redemption of stock under section 302(a) or 303) made by the corporation out of earnings and profits of such taxable year (within the meaning of section 316(a)(2)). For purposes of the preceding sentence, distributions shall be taken into account only to the extent not excluded from the gross income of the United States shareholders of the corporation under section 959.

(e) Excess attributable to a share (or block) of stock

(1) Excess of United States taxes which would have been paid over taxes actually paid. For purposes of paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, in respect of a taxable year of a foreign corporation, the portion of the excess under this subparagraph which is attributable to an individual's share (or block) of such stock shall be an amount equal to:

(i) The excess (if any) of (a) the United States taxes which would have been paid by the corporation on its taxable income (computed under paragraph (d) of this section) for the taxable year had it been taxed as a domestic corporation under chapter 1 of the Code (but without regard to subchapters F, G, H, L, M, N, S, and T thereof) for such taxable year, over (b) the income, war profits, or excess profits taxes actually paid by the corporation during such taxable year (including such taxes paid to the United States),

(ii) Multiplied by the percentage that (a) the number of days in such taxable year of the corporation during the period or periods the share (or block) was held (or was considered as held by reason of the application of section 1223) by the individual while the corporation was a controlled foreign corporation, bears to (b) the total number of days in such taxable year,

(iii) If the computation is made in respect of a block, multiplied by the number of shares in the block, and

(iv) Divided by the number of shares in the corporation outstanding, or deemed under paragraph (c)(2) of § 1.1248-3 to be outstanding, on each day of such taxable year.

(2) Example. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

(i) Jones, a United States person, owns on each day of 1963 10 shares of the 100 shares of the only class of outstanding stock of X corporation. He sells one of such shares on December 31, 1963. X corporation is a controlled foreign corporation on each day of 1963 and Jones and X each use the calendar year as the taxable year. For 1963, the excess of the United States taxes which would have been paid by X had it been taxable as a domestic corporation over the taxes (including United States taxes) actually paid by X is $23,500, computed as follows:

Amount subject to partial tax under section 1201(a)(1), as computed by Jones:
Taxable income $300,000
Less excess of net long-term capital gain over net short-term capital loss 100,000
Amount subject to partial tax 200,000
Excess determined under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph:
30 percent × $25,000 $7,500
52 percent × $175,000 91,000
Partial tax 98,500
25 percent × $100,000 25,000
United States taxes X would have paid (alternative tax computed under section 1201(a)) 123,500
Less income taxes X actually paid to:
United States $10,000
Foreign countries 90,000
Total $100,000
Excess 23,500
Multiplied by:
Percentage determined under subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph:
Since on each day of 1963, Jones held the share of X stock while X was a controlled foreign corporation, the percentage equals 100%
Total $23,500

(ii) The portion of the excess determined in subdivision (i) of this example which is attributable to the share held by Jones is $235, that is, the amount of such excess ($23,500), divided by the number of shares of X deemed to be outstanding on each day of 1963 (100).

(3) More than one class of stock. If a foreign corporation for a taxable year has more than one class of stock outstanding, then before applying subparagraph (1) of this paragraph the excess (if any) which would be determined under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph shall be allocated to each class of stock in accordance with the principles of paragraph (e) (2) and (3) of § 1.951-1, applied as if the corporation were a controlled foreign corporation on each day of such taxable year.

(f) Subsidiaries of foreign corporations

(1) Excess for lower tier corporation attributable to taxable year of first tier corporation. For purposes of paragraph (c)(3) of this section, if the provisions of paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1248-2 or paragraph (f) of § 1.1248-3 apply in the case of the sale or exchange by an individual of a share (or block) of stock in a first tier corporation, then in respect of a taxable year of a lower tier corporation (beginning after December 31, 1962) which includes at least one day which falls within a taxable year of the first tier corporation (beginning after December 31, 1962), the portion of the excess under this subparagraph attributable to the share shall be an amount equal to:

(i) The excess (if any) of (a) the United States taxes which would have been paid by the lower tier corporation on its taxable income (computed under paragraph (g) of this section) for such taxable year of the lower tier corporation had it been taxed as a domestic corporatin under chapter 1 of the Code (but without regard to subchapters F, G, H, L, M, N, and T thereof) for such taxable year of the lower tier corporation, over (b) the income, war profits, or excess profits taxes actually paid by the lower tier corporation during such taxable year (including such taxes paid to the United States),

(ii) Multiplied by each of the percentages described under paragraph (f)(2)(ii), (iii), and (iv) of § 1.1248-3 in respect of such taxable year of the first tier corporation,

(iii) If the computation is made in respect of a block of stock, multiplied by the number of shares in the block, and

(iv) Divided by the number of shares in the first tier corporation outstanding, or deemed under paragraph (c)(2) of § 1.1248-3 to be outstanding, on each day of such taxable year of the first tier corporation.

(2) More than one class of stock. If a foreign corporation for a taxable year has more than one class of stock outstanding, then before applying subparagraph (1) of this paragraph the principles of paragraph (e)(3) of this section shall apply.

(g) Taxable income of lower tier corporations

(1) General. For purposes of paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, in respect of the individual's share (or block) the taxable income of a lower tier corporation shall be computed in the manner provided in paragraph (d) of this section, except as provided in this paragraph.

(2) Capital loss carryover. For purposes of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, the provisions of paragraph (d)(5)(ii) of this section shall not apply. In determining the amount of a net capital loss to be carried forward under section 1212 to the taxable year of a lower tier corporation, the portion of a net capital loss or a capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) for a taxable year of the lower tier corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, which shall be taken into account shall be the amount of such loss or gain (as the case may be), multiplied by the percentage which

(i) the number of days in such taxable year during the period or periods the individual held (or was considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223) the share (or block) of stock in the first tier corporation sold or exchanged while the first tier corporation owned (within the meaning of section 958 (a)) stock in the lower tier corporation while the lower tier corporation was a controlled foreign corporation, bears to

(ii) the total number of days in such taxable year.

(3) Net operating loss deduction. For purposes of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, the provisions of paragraph (d)(6)(iv) of this section shall not apply. In determining the amount of the net operating loss deduction for a taxable year of a lower tier corporation, the portion of a net operating loss incurred, or of taxable income earned, in a taxable year of the lower tier corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, which shall be taken into account under section 172(b)(2) shall be the amount of such loss or income (as the case may be) multiplied by the percentage described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph for such taxable year.

[T.D. 6779, 29 FR 18139, Dec. 22, 1964, as amended by T.D. 7545, 43 FR 19653, May 8, 1978; T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980]

§ 1.1248-5 Stock ownership requirements for less developed country corporations.

(a) General rule

(1) Requirements. For purposes of paragraph (e)(4) of § 1.1248-3, a United States person shall be considered as satisfying the requirements of this paragraph with respect to a share (or block) of stock of a foreign corporation if on the date he sells or exchanges such share (or block):

(i) The 10-year stock ownership requirement of paragraph (b) of this section is met with respect to such share (or block), and

(ii) In the case of a United States person which is a domestic corporation, the requirement of paragraph (c) of this section, if applicable, is met.

(2) Ownership of stock. For purposes of this section:

(i) The rules for determining ownership of stock prescribed by section 958 (a) and (b) shall apply.

(ii) Stock owned by a United States person who is an individual, estate, or trust which was acquired by reason of the death of the predecessor in interest of such United States person shall be considered as owned by such United States persons during the period such stock was owned by such predecessor in interest, and during the period such stock was owned by any other predecessor in interest if between such United States person and such other predecessor in interest there was no transfer other than by reason of the death of an individual.

(b) 10-year stock ownership requirement

(1) General. A United States person meets the 10-year stock ownership requirement with respect to a share (or block) of stock in a foreign corporation which he sells or exchanges only if the share (or block) was owned (under the rules of paragraph (a)(2) of this section) by such person for a continuous period of at least 10 years ending on the date of the sale or exchange. See the first sentence of section 1248(d)(3). Thus, for example, if Jones, a United States person, sells a share of stock in a foreign corporation on January 1, 1965, the 10-year stock ownership requirement is met with respect to a share only if the share was owned (under the rules of paragraph (a)(2) of this section) by Jones continuously from January 1, 1955, to January 1, 1965. If a foreign corporation has not been in existence for at least 10 years on the date of the sale or exchange of the share, the 10-year stock ownership requirement cannot be met.

(2) Special rule. For purposes of this paragraph, a United States person shall be considered to have owned stock during the period he was considered to have held the stock by reason of the application of section 1223.

(c) Disqualification of domestic corporation as a result of changes in ownership of its stock

(1) General.

(i) For purposes of paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section, the requirement of this paragraph must be met only if, on at least one day during the 10-year period ending on the date of the sale or exchange by a domestic corporation of a share of stock in a foreign corporation, one or more noncorporate United States shareholders (as defined in subdivision (iii) of this subparagraph) own more than 50 percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote of the domestic corporation.

(ii) The requirement of this paragraph is that if one or more persons are noncorporate United States shareholders on the first such day (referred to in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph), such person or persons continue after such first day, at all times during the remainder of such 10-year period, to own in the aggregate more than 50 percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote of the domestic corporation. For purposes of determining whether a domestic corporation meets the requirement of this paragraph, the stock owned by a United States person who is a noncorporate United States shareholder of a domestic corporation on such first day shall not be counted at any time after he ceases during such 10-year period to be a noncorporate United States shareholder of such corporation.

(iii) For purposes of this paragraph, the term noncorporate United States shareholder means, with respect to a domestic corporation, a United States person who is an individual, estate, or trust and who owns 10 percent or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of such domestic corporation.

(iv) For purposes of this paragraph, the percentage of the total combined voting power of stock of a foreign corporation owned by a United States person shall be determined in accordance with the principles of section 951(b) and the regulations thereunder.

(2) Examples. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

During the entire period beginning December 31, 1954, and ending December 31, 1964, domestic corporation N owns all the stock of controlled foreign corporation X, a less developed country corporation. On December 31, 1964, N recognizes gain upon the sale of all its X stock. A, B, and C, who are unrelated individuals, were the only United States persons owning, or considered as owning, 10 percent or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote of N at any time during the 10-year period December 31, 1954, through December 31, 1964. The percentages of the total combined voting power in N, which A, B, and C owned during such 10-year period, are as follows:

Owner Dec. 31, 1954-
Apr. 1, 1957 (Percent)
Apr. 2, 1957-Oct. 1, 1959 (Percent) Oct. 2, 1959-Dec. 31, 1964 (Percent)
A 20 20 20
B 9 30 30
C 30 15 9

Domestic corporation N does not meet the requirement of this paragraph with respect to the stock of controlled foreign corporation X for the following reasons:

(i) April 2, 1957, is the first day (during the 10-year period ending on December 31, 1964, the date N sells the X stock) on which noncorporate United States shareholders of N own more than 50 percent of the total combined voting power in N, and thus the requirement of this paragraph must be met. See subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph. Although A, B, and C did own, in the aggregate, more than 50 percent of such voting power before April 2, 1957, the voting power owned by B is not counted because B was not a noncorporate United States shareholder of N before such date.

(ii) Although C is a noncorporate United States shareholder on April 2, 1957, C ceases to own 10 percent or more of the total combined voting power in N on October 2, 1959. Thus, after October 1, 1959, the N stock which C owns is not counted for purposes of determining whether the more-than-50-percent stock ownership test is met. See subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph. Accordingly, after October 1, 1959, the requirement of this paragraph is not met.

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that B's wife owns directly 5 percent of the total combined voting power in N from December 31, 1954, to December 31, 1964. On the basis of the assumed facts, N meets the requirement of this paragraph with respect to the stock of controlled foreign corporation X for the following reasons:

(i) December 31, 1954, is the first day (of the 10-year period ending on the date N sells the X stock) on which noncorporate United States shareholders of N own more than 50 percent of the total combined voting power in N. B is a noncorporate United States shareholder on such date because he owns, and is considered as owning, 14 percent of the total combined voting power in N (9 percent directly, and, under section 958(b), 5 percent constructively). Thus, on December 31, 1954, noncorporate United States shareholders A, B, and C own, in the aggregate, more than 50 percent of the total combined voting power in N.

(ii) A, B, and C, the noncorporate United States shareholders of N on December 31, 1954, own, and are considered as owning, more than 50 percent of the total voting power of N from December 31, 1954, to October 1, 1959. Since beginning on October 2, 1959, A owns 20 percent and B owns, and is considered as owning, 35 percent of the total combined voting power in N, A and B owns, and are considered as owning, more than 50 percent of the total combined voting power in N from October 2, 1959, to December 31, 1964. Therefore, the requirement of this paragraph is met.

(d) Application of section to lower tier corporation

(1) General. For purposes of paragraph (g)(1)(ii) of § 1.1248-3, a United States person satisfies the requirements of this subparagraph in respect of stock of a lower tier corporation which such person, by reason of his direct ownership of the share (or block) of the first tier corporation sold or exchanged, owned within the meaning of section 958(a)(2) on the date he sold or exchanged such share (or block), if on such date:

(i) The 10-year stock ownership requirement of paragraph (b) of this section is met by such person with respect to any stock in the lower tier corporation which such person so owned, and

(ii) In the case of a United States person which is a domestic corporation, the requirement of paragraph (c) of this section, if applicable, is met.

(2) Special rule. For purposes of this paragraph, in applying paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, the sale or exchange of a share (or block) of stock in a first tier corporation by a United States person shall be deemed to be the sale or exchange of any stock in a lower tier corporation which the person, by reason of his direct ownership of such share (or block) of the first tier corporation, owned within the meaning of section 958(a)(2) on the date he actually sold or exchanged such share (or block) in the first tier corporation.

[T.D. 6779, 29 FR 18142, Dec. 22, 1964]

§ 1.1248-6 Sale or exchange of stock in certain domestic corporations.

(a) General rule. If a United States person recognizes gain upon the sale or exchange of a share (or block) of stock of a domestic corporation which was formed or availed of principally for the holding, directly or indirectly, of stock of one or more foreign corporations, and if the conditions of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1248-1 would be met by such person in respect of the share (or block) if the domestic corporation were a foreign corporation, then section 1248 shall apply in respect of such gain in accordance with the rules provided in paragraph (b) of this section. See paragraph (d) of this section for a rule suspending the application of this section in certain circumstances.

(b) Application.

(1) The gain referred to in paragraph (a) of this section shall be included in the gross income of the United States person as a dividend under section 1248(a) to the extent of the earnings and profits attributable under § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable, to the share (or block), computed, however, in accordance with the following rules:

(i) The domestic corporation shall be treated as if it were a first tier foreign corporation;

(ii) If, after the application of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, the provisions of paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1248-2 or paragraph (f) of § 1.1248-3 (as the case may be) would apply in respect of a foreign corporation the stock of which is owned (within the meaning of section 958(a)) by the domestic corporation treated as the first tier corporation, such foreign corporation shall be considered a lower tier corporation;

(iii) Except to the extent provided in subdivision (iv) of this subparagraph, the earnings and profits of the domestic corporation treated as the first tier corporation accumulated for a taxable year, as computed under paragraph (d) of § 1.1248-2 or paragraph (b) of § 1.1248-3 (as the case may be), shall be considered to be zero; and

(iv) If, during a taxable year, a domestic corporation treated as the first tier corporation realizes gain upon the sale or exchange of stock in a foreign corporation, and solely by reason of the application of section 337 (relating to certain liquidations) the gain was not recognized, then the earnings and profits of such domestic corporation accumulated for the taxable year, as computed under paragraph (d) of § 1.1248-2 or paragraph (b) of § 1.1248-3 (as the case may be), shall be considered to be an amount equal to the portion of such gain realized during the taxable year which, if section 337 had not applied, would have been treated as a dividend under section 1248(a).

(2) If the person selling or exchanging the stock in the domestic corporation is an individual, the limitation on tax attributable to the amount included in his gross income as a dividend under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph shall be determined, in accordance with the principles of paragraph (f) of § 1.1248-4, by treating the domestic corporation as a first tier corporation.

(3)

(i) If the earnings and profits of the foreign corporation or corporations (or of the domestic corporation treated as a first tier corporation) to be taken into account under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph are not established in the manner provided in paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1248-7, all of the gain from the sale or exchange of the share (or block) of the domestic corporation shall be treated as a dividend.

(ii) To the extent that the person does not establish, in the manner provided in paragraph (c) of § 1.1248-7, the foreign taxes paid by such foreign corporation or corporations to be taken into account for purposes of computing the limitation on tax attributable to a share, such foreign taxes shall not be taken into account for purposes of such computation.

(c) Corporation formed or availed of principally for holding stock of foreign corporations. Whether or not a domestic corporation is formed or availed of principally for the holding, directly or indirectly, of stock of one or more foreign corporations shall be determined on the basis of all the facts and circumstances of each particular case.

(d) Temporary suspension of section 1248(e). Section 1248(e) and the rules of this section do not apply to a sale, exchange, or other disposition of the stock of a domestic corporation during a period when capital gains are taxed at a rate that equals or exceeds the rate at which ordinary income is taxed.

(e) Effective/applicability date. Paragraph (d) of this section applies to a sale, exchange, or other disposition of the stock of a domestic corporation on or after September 21, 1987.

[T.D. 6779, 29 FR 18143, Dec. 22, 1964, as amended by T.D. 9614, 78 FR 17042, Mar. 19, 2013]

§ 1.1248-7 Taxpayer to establish earnings and profits and foreign taxes.

(a) In general.

(1) If a taxpayer sells or exchanges stock in a foreign corporation which was a controlled foreign corporation and the Commissioner determines that the taxpayer has not established the amount of the earnings and profits of the corporation attributable to the stock under § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable, all the gain from such sale or exchange shall be treated as a dividend under section 1248(a). See section 1248(h). A taxpayer shall be considered to have established such amount if:

(i) He attaches to his income tax return, filed on or before the last day prescribed by law (including extensions thereof) for his taxable year in which he sold or exchanged the stock, the schedule prescribed by paragraph (b) of this section or, if such last day is before April 1, 1965, he files such schedule before such date with the district director with whom such return was filed, and

(ii) He establishes in the manner prescribed by paragraph (d) of this section the correctness of each amount shown on such schedule.

(2) Notwithstanding an omission of information from, or an error with respect to an amount shown on, the schedule referred to in subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph, a taxpayer shall be considered to have complied with such subparagraph (1)(i) if:

(i) He establishes that such omission or error was inadvertent, or due to reasonable cause and not due to willful neglect, and that he has substantially complied with the requirements of this section, and

(ii) The taxpayer corrects such omission or error at the time when he complies with paragraph (d) of this section.

(3) For the requirement to establish the amount of foreign taxes to be taken into account for purposes of section 1248(b), see paragraph (c) of this section.

(b) Schedule attached to return.

(1) The taxpayer shall attach to his income tax return for his taxable year in which he sold or exchanged the stock, a schedule showing his name, address, and identifying number. Except to the extent provided in paragraph (e) of this section, the schedule shall also show the amount of the earnings and profits attributable under paragraph (a) of § 1.1248-2 or paragraph (a) of § 1.1248-3 (as the case may be) to the stock, and, in order to support the computation of such amount, any additional information required by subparagraphs (2), (3), (4), and (5) of this paragraph.

(2) The schedule shall also show for the first tier corporation, and for each lower tier corporation as to which information is required under subparagraph (4) of this paragraph,

(i) the name of the corporation,

(ii) the country under whose laws the corporation is created or organized, and

(iii) the last day of the taxable year which the corporation regularly uses in computing its income.

(3) If the amount of earnings and profits attributable to a block of stock sold or exchanged are computed under § 1.1248-2, the schedule shall also show:

(i) For each taxable year of the corporation, beginning after December 31, 1962, during the period the taxpayer held (or was considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) the block, (a) the earnings and profits accumulated for each such taxable year computed under paragraph (d) of § 1.1248-2, and (b) the sum thereof computed under paragraph (e) (1)(i) and (2) of § 1.1248-2,

(ii) The number of shares in the block and the total number of shares of the corporation outstanding during such period,

(iii) If during the period the person held (or is considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) the block any amount was included under section 951 in the gross income of such person (or another person) in respect of the block, the computation of the excess referred to in paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of § 1.1248-2, and

(iv) If the amount of earnings and profits of a lower tier corporation attributable to the block are computed under paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1248-2, (a) the number of shares in the lower tier corporation which the taxpayer owns within the meaning of section 958(a)(2)(b) the total number of shares of such lower tier corporation outstanding during such period, and (c) in respect of such lower tier corporation, the information prescribed in subdivisions (i) and (iii) of this subparagraph.

(4) If the amount of earnings and profits attributable to a share (or block) sold or exchanged are computed under § 1.1248-3, the schedule shall also show for each taxable year of the corporation beginning after December 31, 1962, any day of which falls in a period or periods the taxpayer held (or was considered to have held by reason of the application of section 1223, taking into account § 1.1248-8) the stock while the corporation was a controlled foreign corporation:

(i) The number of days in such period or periods, but only if such number is less than the total number of days in such taxable year,

(ii) The earnings and profits accumulated for the taxable year computed under paragraph (b) of § 1.1248-3,

(iii) The number of shares in the corporation outstanding, or deemed under paragraph (c)(2) of § 1.1248-3 to be outstanding, on each day of the taxable year,

(iv) The taxpayer's tentative ratable share computed under paragraph (c) or (d) (as the case may be) of § 1.1248-3,

(v) The amount of, and a short description of each adjustment to, the tentative ratable share under paragraph (e) of § 1.1248-3, and

(vi) The amount of the ratable share referred to in paragraph (e)(1) of § 1.1248-3.

(5) In respect of a taxable year referred to in subparagraph (4) of this paragraph of a first tier corporation, if the taxpayer is required to compute under paragraph (f)(5) of § 1.1248-3 his ratable share of the earnings and profits for a taxable year of the lower tier corporation attributable to such taxable year of such first tier corporation, then for such taxable year of the lower tier corporation the schedule shall show:

(i) The earnings and profits accumulated for the taxable year of the lower tier corporation, computed under paragraph (b) of § 1.1248-3,

(ii) Each percentage described in paragraph (f)(2) (ii), (iii), and (iv) of § 1.1248-3,

(iii) The amount of the taxpayer's tentative ratable share computed under paragraph (f) (2) or (4) (as the case may be) of § 1.1248-3,

(iv) The amount of, and a short description of each adjustment to, the tentative ratable share under paragraph (f)(5) of § 1.1248-3, and

(v) The amount of the ratable share referred to in paragraph (f)(5)(i) of § 1.1248-3.

(c) Foreign taxes.

(1) If the taxpayer fails to establish any portion of the amount of any foreign taxes which he is required to establish by subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, then such portion shall not be taken into account under section 1248(b)(1)(B):

(2) The taxpayer shall establish in respect of the stock he sells or exchanges the amount of the foreign taxes described in section 1248(b)(1)(B) paid by the first tier corporation for each taxable year of such corporation for which the information is required under paragraph (b) (3) or (4) of this section, and the amount of such taxes paid by each lower tier corporation for each taxable year (as to which information is required under paragraph (b) (3)(iv) or (5) of this section) of each such lower tier corporation. A taxpayer shall be considered to have established the amount of such foreign taxes if:

(i) He attaches to the schedule described in paragraph (b) of this section a supplementary schedule which, except to the extent provided in paragraph (e) of this section, sets forth the amount of such foreign taxes for each taxable year (of the first tier corporation and of each such lower tier corporation) as to which such amount must be established under this subparagraph, and

(ii) He establishes in the manner prescribed by paragraph (d)(2) of this section the correctness of each amount shown on such supplementary schedule.

(d) Establishing amounts on schedules.

(1) A taxpayer shall be considered to have established, in respect of the stock he sold or exchanged, the correctness of an amount shown on a schedule described in paragraph (b) of this section only if he produces or provides within 180 days after demand by the district director (or within such longer period to which such director consents):

(i) The books of original entry, or similar systematic accounting records maintained by any person or persons on a current basis as supplements to such books, which establish to the satisfaction of the district director the correctness of each such amount, and

(ii) In respect of any such books or records which are not in the English language, either an accurate English translation of any such records as are demanded, or the services of a qualified interpreter satisfactory to such director.

(2) A shareholder shall be considered to have established in respect of such stock the correctness of an amount shown on a supplementary schedule described in paragraph (c) of this section only if he produces or provides within 180 days after demand by the district director (or within such longer period to which such director consents):

(i) Evidence described in paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.905-2 of such amount, or

(ii) Secondary evidence of such amount, in the same manner and to the same extent as would be permissible under paragraph (b) of § 1.905-2 in the case of a taxpayer who claimed the benefits of the foreign tax credit in respect of such amount.

(e) Insufficient information at time return is filed. If stock in a foreign corporation, which was a controlled foreign corporation, is sold or exchanged by a taxpayer during a taxable year of the corporation (or of a lower tier corporation) which ends after the last day of the taxpayer's taxable year in which the sale or exchange occurs, and if:

(1) For the taxpayer's taxable year, the last day referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section for filing his income tax return with a schedule prescribed in paragraph (b) of this section, and, if applicable, with a supplemental schedule prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section, or

(2) The last day referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section (that is, April 1, 1965) for filing any such schedule or schedules with the district director with whom such return was filed,

Is not later than 90 days after the close of such taxable year of any such corporation, then such return with such schedule or schedules may be filed, or any such schedule or schedules may be filed, on the basis of estimates of amounts or percentages (for any such taxable year of any such corporation) required to be shown on any such schedule or schedules. If any such estimate differs from the actual amount or percentage, the taxpayer shall, within 90 days after the close of any such taxable year of any such corporation, file (or attach to a claim for refund or amended return filed) at the office of the district director with whom he filed the return a new schedule or schedules showing the actual amounts or percentages.

[T.D. 6779, 29 FR 18143, Dec. 22, 1964, as amended by T.D. 9345, 72 FR 41445, July 30, 2007: T.D. 9614, 78 FR 17041, Mar. 19, 2013]

§ 1.1248-8 Earnings and profits attributable to stock following certain non-recognition transactions.

(a) Scope. This section sets forth rules for the attribution of earnings and profits for purposes of section 1248 and § 1.1248-1(a)(1) and to supplement the rules in §§ 1.1248-2 and 1.1248-3 with respect to—

(1) Stock that an exchanging shareholder receives, or an acquiring corporation receives, in restructuring transactions. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (a), stock of a foreign corporation that an exchanging shareholder receives, or an acquiring corporation receives, pursuant to a restructuring transaction (as defined in paragraph (b)(1)(vii) of this section) in which the holding period of such stock is determined by application of section 1223(1) or 1223(2), whichever is appropriate. This section shall not apply to an exchange otherwise described in this paragraph (a)(1) if, as a result of the exchange, the exchanging shareholder is required to include in income as a deemed dividend the section 1248 amount pursuant to § 1.367(b)-4(b). See paragraphs (b)(2) and (3) of this section;

(2) Nonexchanging shareholders. Stock of a foreign corporation that participates in a restructuring transaction that is held by a non-exchanging shareholder (as defined in paragraph (b)(1)(vi) of this section) in the restructuring transaction. See paragraph (b)(4) of this section;

(3) Section 381 transactions. Stock of a foreign corporation that receives assets in a transfer to which section 361(a) or (b) applies in connection with a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(A), (C), (D), (F), or (G), or in a distribution to which section 332 applies, and to which section 381(c)(2)(A) and § 1.381(c)(2)-1(a) apply. See paragraph (b)(6) of this section; or

(4) Section 332 liquidations. Stock of a foreign corporation that receives the assets and liabilities of a foreign corporation in a complete liquidation described in section 332 if the foreign distributee is a foreign corporate shareholder (as defined in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section) of the liquidating corporation. See paragraph (c) of this section.

(b) Earnings and profits attributable to stock following a restructuring transaction

(1) Definitions. The following definitions apply for purposes of this section:

(i) Acquired corporation is a corporation whose stock or assets are acquired in exchange for stock in (or stock in and other property of) either the acquiring corporation or a foreign corporation that controls, within the meaning of section 368(c), the acquiring corporation in a restructuring transaction.

(ii) Acquiring corporation is a corporation that acquires the stock or assets of an acquired corporation in a restructuring transaction.

(iii) Controlled foreign corporation is a corporation described in either section 953(c)(1)(B) or section 957.

(iv) Exchanging shareholder is a person that exchanges—

(A) In a restructuring transaction qualifying as a nonrecognition transaction within the meaning of section 7701(a)(45) and described in section 354, 356, or 361(a) or (b), stock in an acquired corporation for stock in either a foreign acquiring corporation or a foreign corporation that is in control, within the meaning of section 368(c), of an acquiring corporation (whether domestic or foreign); or

(B) In a restructuring transaction qualifying as a nonrecognition transaction within the meaning of section 7701(a)(45) and described in section 351, property (including stock) for stock in a foreign acquiring corporation.

(v) Foreign corporate shareholder is a foreign corporation that—

(A) Owns stock of another foreign corporation; and

(B) Has a section 1248 shareholder that is also a section 1248 shareholder of the other foreign corporation.

(vi) Non-exchanging shareholder is, at the time the acquiring corporation participates in a restructuring transaction, either a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder of the acquiring corporation that is not an exchanging shareholder with respect to that corporation.

(vii) Restructuring transaction is a transaction qualifying as a nonrecognition transaction within the meaning of section 7701(a)(45) and described in section 351, 354, 356, or 361.

(viii) Section 1248 shareholder is any United States person that satisfies the ownership requirements of section 1248(a)(2) and § 1.1248-1(a)(2) with respect to a foreign corporation.

(2) Earnings and profits attributable to stock that an exchanging shareholder receives in a restructuring transaction. Where, in a restructuring transaction, an exchanging shareholder receives stock in a foreign corporation, the holding period of which is determined under section 1223(1), and the exchanging shareholder is either a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder with respect to that foreign corporation immediately after the restructuring transaction, the earnings and profits attributable to the stock the exchanging shareholder receives shall be determined pursuant to the rules in paragraphs (b)(2)(i), (ii), and (iii) of this section.

(i) Exchanging shareholder exchanges property that is not stock of a foreign acquired corporation with respect to which the exchanging shareholder is a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(iv) of this section, where the exchanging shareholder exchanges in a restructuring transaction property that is not stock of a foreign acquired corporation with respect to which the exchanging shareholder is a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder immediately before the transaction, the earnings and profits attributable to the stock that the exchanging shareholder receives in the restructuring transaction will be determined in accordance with § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable, without regard to any portion of the section 1223(1) holding period in that stock that is before the restructuring transaction. See paragraph (b)(7), Example 1 of this section.

(ii) Exchanging shareholder exchanges stock of a foreign corporation with respect to which the exchanging shareholder is either a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section, where the exchanging shareholder exchanges in a restructuring transaction stock of a foreign acquired corporation with respect to which the exchanging shareholder is either a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder immediately before such restructuring transaction, the earnings and profits attributable to the stock that the exchanging shareholder receives in the restructuring transaction shall be the sum of the earnings and profits attributable to—

(A) The stock of the foreign acquired corporation exchanged (determined in accordance with § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable, and this section, if applicable) that was accumulated before the restructuring transaction; and

(B) The stock of the foreign corporation that the exchanging shareholder receives in the restructuring transaction (determined in accordance with § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable, and this section, if applicable), without regard to any portion of the section 1223(1) holding period in that stock that is prior to the restructuring transaction. See paragraph (b)(7) Example 2, Example 4, and Example 6 of this section.

(iii) Exchanging shareholder receives stock in a foreign corporation that controls a domestic acquiring corporation. Where the acquiring corporation is a domestic corporation and the exchanging shareholder receives in a restructuring transaction stock in a foreign corporation that controls (within the meaning of section 368(c)) the domestic acquiring corporation, the earnings and profits attributable to the stock that the exchanging shareholder receives in the restructuring transaction shall consist solely of the amount of earnings and profits attributable to such stock (determined in accordance with § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable, and this section, if applicable) without regard to any portion of the section 1223(1) holding period in that stock that is prior to the restructuring transaction. See paragraph (b)(7) Example 5 of this section.

(iv) Exchanging shareholder exchanges stock of a domestic acquired corporation for stock of a foreign corporation with respect to which the exchanging shareholder is a section 1248 shareholder after the exchange. If there is a restructuring transaction described in § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3) to which the exception provided by § 1.1248(f)-2(c) applies with respect to a distribution by a domestic acquired corporation of stock of a foreign corporation to one or more exchanging shareholders, the earnings and profits attributable to a portion of a share of stock as provided under § 1.1248(f)-2(c)(2) (or a whole share, if no division is required) will be determined pursuant to paragraphs (b)(2)(iv)(A) and (b)(2)(iv)(B) of this section.

(A) The earnings and profits attributable to a portion of a share of stock as provided under § 1.1248(f)-2(c)(2)(i) (or a whole share, if no division is required) will be determined in accordance with § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3 (and this section, as applicable), without regard to any portion of the section 1223(1) holding period in that portion of a share (or whole share) that is before the restructuring transaction.

(B) The earnings and profits attributable to a portion of a share of stock as provided under § 1.1248(f)-2(c)(2)(ii) (or whole share, if no division is required) is the amount in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(B)(1) of this section, increased by the amounts described in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(B)(2) of this section.

(1) The amount equal to the product of the ratio of the value of the share of stock to the value of all shares of stock received by the exchanging shareholder multiplied by the amount in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(B)(1)(i) of this section, reduced by the amount in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(B)(1)(ii) of this section.

(i) The amount equal to the product of the exchanging shareholder's ownership interest percentage (within the meaning of § 1.367(a)-7(f)(7)) in the domestic acquired corporation multiplied by the earnings and profits attributable to the block of stock of the foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange that relates to the portion (or whole share), determined in accordance with § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3 (and this section, as applicable) immediately before the restructuring transaction (and without taking into account the application of sections 367 and 1248 to the transfer of the stock of the foreign corporation in the section 361 exchange).

(ii) The amount of any dividend included in the domestic acquiring corporation's gross income under section 1248(a) on the transfer of the block of stock of the foreign corporation, which relates to the portion or whole share, in the section 361 exchange by reason of gain recognized under §§ 1.367(a)-6 or 1.367(a)-7(c)(2) attributable to the exchanging shareholder.

(2) The earnings and profits determined in accordance with § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3 (and this section, as applicable), without regard to any portion of the section 1223(1) holding period in that stock that is before the restructuring transaction. See § 1.1248(f)-2(e), Example 2 and Example 3.

(3) Earnings and profits attributable to stock in a foreign corporation certain acquiring corporations receive in a restructuring transaction. Where an acquiring corporation receives, in a restructuring transaction, stock in a foreign acquired corporation, the holding period of which is determined under section 1223(2), and the acquiring corporation is either a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder with respect to that foreign acquired corporation immediately after the restructuring transaction, the earnings and profits attributable to the foreign acquired corporation stock that the acquiring corporation receives shall be determined pursuant to the rules in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.

(i) Stock of a foreign corporation with respect to which the exchanging shareholder is neither a section 1248 shareholder nor a foreign corporate shareholder. The earnings and profits attributable to the stock of the foreign acquired corporation that the acquiring corporation receives in a restructuring transaction where the exchanging shareholder is neither a section 1248 shareholder nor a foreign corporate shareholder with respect to that foreign acquired corporation immediately before the restructuring transaction shall be determined in accordance with § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable, without regard to any portion of the section 1223(2) holding period in that stock that is prior to the restructuring transaction.

(ii) Stock of a foreign corporation with respect to which the exchanging shareholder is either a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder. The earnings and profits attributable to the stock of a foreign acquired corporation that the acquiring corporation receives in the restructuring transaction where the exchanging shareholder is either a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder with respect to that foreign corporation immediately before the restructuring transaction shall be determined in accordance with § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3, whichever is applicable, with regard to the portion of the section 1223(2) holding period of the stock that the exchanging shareholder took into account for purposes of attributing earnings and profits to that stock (determined in accordance with this section). See paragraph (b)(7) Example 3, Example 5, and Example 7 of this section.

(4) Earnings and profits attributable to stock held by a non-exchanging shareholder in a foreign acquiring corporation.

(i) Except to the extent paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section applies, the earnings and profits attributable to stock of a foreign acquiring corporation held by a non-exchanging shareholder immediately prior to a restructuring transaction continue to be attributed to such stock, and the earnings and profits of the acquired corporation accumulated prior to the restructuring transaction attributable to the stock of an acquired corporation are not attributed to the non-exchanging shareholder's stock in the foreign acquiring corporation. See § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3 (whichever is applicable) and, as applicable, paragraph (b)(6) of this section; see also paragraph (b)(7) Example 2 and Example 4 of this section.

(ii) Where a non-exchanging shareholder holds stock in a foreign corporation that is also an exchanging shareholder and a foreign acquiring corporation in the same restructuring transaction—

(A) The earnings and profits attributable to such stock shall be the sum of the earnings and profits attributable to the stock of such foreign corporation immediately before the restructuring transaction (including amounts attributed under section 1248(c)(2)) and the earnings and profits attributable to the stock of the foreign acquiring corporation accumulated after the restructuring transaction (including amounts attributed under section 1248(c)(2)); and

(B) Paragraph (b)(6) of this section applies. See paragraph (b)(7) Example 8 of this section.

(iii) Where the acquiring corporation is a foreign corporate shareholder with respect to stock of a foreign acquired corporation, paragraph (b)(3) of this section shall not apply for purposes of determining the earnings and profits attributable to stock in the foreign acquiring corporation owned by a non-exchanging shareholder thereof (see section 1248(c)(2)). See paragraph (b)(7) Example 6 of this section.

(5) Reduction in earnings and profits attributable to stock to prevent multiple inclusions with respect to the same earnings and profits. To the extent consistent with the principles of section 1248, adjustments to earnings and profits attributable to stock shall be made such that section 1223(1) and (2) and this section are applied in a manner that results in earnings and profits being taken into account only once. Thus, for example, when a controlled foreign corporation sells or exchanges all or part of the stock of another foreign corporation to which earnings and profits are attributable pursuant to this paragraph (b) or paragraph (c) of this section, proportionate reductions shall be made to the earnings and profits attributed to the stock of the selling foreign corporate shareholder owned by a section 1248 shareholder. See paragraph (b)(7) Example 7 of this section.

(6) Special rule regarding section 381. Solely for purposes of determining the earnings and profits (or deficit in earnings and profits) attributable to stock pursuant to this paragraph (b), the earnings and profits of a corporation shall not include earnings and profits that are treated as received or incurred under section 381(c)(2)(A) and § 1.381(c)(2)-1(a). See paragraph (b)(7) Example 4 of this section.

(7) Examples. The application of this paragraph (b) is illustrated by the following examples. Unless otherwise indicated, in the following examples assume that—

(i) There is no immediate gain recognition pursuant to section 367(a)(1) and the regulations under that section (either through operation of the rules or because the appropriate parties have entered into a gain recognition agreement under §§ 1.367(a)-3(b) and 1.367(a)-8);

(ii) There is no income inclusion required pursuant to section 367(b) and the regulations under that section, and all reporting requirements in those regulations are complied with;

(iii) References to earnings and profits are to earnings and profits that would be includible in income as a dividend under section 1248 and the regulations under that section if stock to which the earnings and profits are attributable were sold or exchanged by its shareholder;

(iv) Each corporation has only a single class of stock outstanding and uses the calendar year as its taxable year; and

(v) Each transaction is unrelated to all other transactions.

Example 1. A section 351 exchange of property other than stock in a foreign corporation with respect to which the exchanging shareholder is either a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder.

(i) Facts. DC1, a domestic corporation, has owned all the stock of CFC, a foreign corporation, since CFC's formation on January 1, year 3. On December 31, year 5, DC2, a domestic corporation unrelated to DC1, contributes property it has held since January 1, year 1, to CFC in exchange for voting stock of CFC in a restructuring transaction that is an exchange under section 351. The property that DC2 contributes is not stock in a foreign corporation with respect to which DC2 was either a section 1248 shareholder or a foreign corporate shareholder. DC2 receives 80% of the voting stock of CFC in the restructuring transaction and its holding period in that CFC stock, determined pursuant to section 1223(1), began on January 1, year 1. CFC has $100 of accumulated earnings and profits on December 31, year 5. On December 31, year 7, when the accumulated earnings and profits of CFC are $200, DC2, a section 1248 shareholder with respect to CFC, sells its CFC stock.

(ii) Result. Under paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section, the earnings and profits attributable to the CFC stock sold by DC2 are $80. This amount consists of none of the $100 of earnings and profits accumulated by CFC before the restructuring transaction, and 80% of the $100 of earnings and profits of CFC accumulated after the restructuring transaction.

Example 2. A section 351 exchange of controlled foreign corporation stock by a United States person for stock in a controlled foreign corporation in a restructuring transaction.

(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example 1 except as follows. The property that DC2 contributes is 100% of the stock in CFC2, a foreign corporation. DC2 has owned all the stock of CFC2 since CFC2's formation on January 1, year 2, and CFC2 has $200 of earnings and profits as of December 31, year 5. CFC2 does not accumulate any additional earnings and profits from December 31, year 5, to December 31, year 7. On December 31, year 7, when the accumulated earnings and profits of CFC are $200, DC2, a section 1248 shareholder with respect to CFC, sells its CFC stock. Also on that date, DC1 sells its CFC stock.

(ii) Result. (A) DC2 sale. Pursuant to paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, the earnings and profits attributable to the CFC stock sold by DC2 are $280. This amount consists of all of the $200 of earnings and profits of CFC2 accumulated before the restructuring transaction (see also section 1248(c)(2)), none of the $100 of earnings and profits accumulated by CFC before the restructuring transaction, and 80% of the $100 of earnings and profits of CFC accumulated after the restructuring transaction.

(B) DC1 sale. Pursuant to paragraph (b)(4) of this section, the earnings and profits attributable to the CFC stock sold by DC1, a non-exchanging shareholder in the restructuring transaction, are $120. This amount consists of all of the $100 of earnings and profits of CFC accumulated before the restructuring transaction, none of the $200 of earnings and profits of CFC2 accumulated before the restructuring transaction, and 20% of the $100 of earnings and profits of CFC accumulated after the restructuring transaction.

Example 3. A section 351 exchange of controlled foreign corporation stock by a United States person for stock in a domestic corporation in a restructuring transaction.

(i) Facts. DC1, a domestic corporation, has owned all of the stock of CFC, a foreign corporation, since CFC's formation on January 1, year 1. DC1 has also owned all the stock of DC2, a domestic corporation, since DC2's formation on January 1, year 1. On December 31, year 2, DC1 contributes the stock of CFC to DC2 in exchange for stock in DC2 in a restructuring transaction that is an exchange described in section 351. On December 31, year 2, CFC has $100 of accumulated earnings and profits. DC2 has a basis in the CFC stock determined under section 362, and is considered to have held the CFC stock since January 1, year 1, pursuant to section 1223(2). On December 31, year 4, when the accumulated earnings and profits of CFC are still $100, DC2 sells its CFC stock.

(ii) Result. Under paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section, $100 of accumulated earnings and profits of CFC is attributable to the stock of CFC sold by DC2, even though DC2 did not hold the stock of CFC during the time CFC accumulated the earnings and profits.

Example 4. Acquisition of a controlled foreign corporation by a controlled foreign corporation in a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(C) (or section 368(a)(1)(B)).

(i) Facts. DC1, a domestic corporation, has owned all the stock of CFC1, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. DC2, a domestic corporation unrelated to DC1, has owned all of the stock of CFC2, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 2. On December 31, year 3, pursuant to a restructuring transaction that is a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(C), CFC1 transfers all of its assets to CFC2 in exchange for 25% of the voting stock of CFC2. CFC1 distributes the CFC2 stock to DC1 and the CFC1 stock is cancelled. DC1's holding period in the CFC2 stock, determined under section 1223(1), begins on January 1, year 1. On December 31, year 3, CFC1 has $100 of accumulated earnings and profits and CFC2 has $200 of accumulated earnings and profits. CFC2 succeeds to the $100 of CFC1 accumulated earnings and profits in the reorganization under section 381. From January 1, year 4 to December 31, year 5, CFC2 incurred a deficit in earnings and profits in the amount of ($200). On December 31, year 5, both DC1 and DC2 sell their stock in CFC2.

(ii) Result. (A) DC1. Pursuant to paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, $50 of earnings and profits is attributable to the CFC2 stock sold by DC1. This amount consists of $100 of CFC1's earnings and profits accumulated before the restructuring transaction, reduced by 25% of CFC2's ($200) post-restructuring transaction deficit in earnings and profits. None of the $200 of CFC2's earnings and profits accumulated by CFC2 prior to the reorganization is attributed to the CFC2 stock sold by DC1. Also, none of the earnings and profits CFC2 succeeded to under section 381 is attributed to the CFC2 stock sold by DC1, pursuant to paragraph (b)(6) of this section.

(B) DC2. Pursuant to paragraph (b)(4) of this section, there is $50 of accumulated earnings and profits attributable to the CFC2 stock sold by DC2. This amount consists of all of the $200 of CFC2's earnings and profits accumulated by CFC2 prior to the reorganization, reduced by 75% of CFC2's deficit in earnings and profits in the amount of ($200) incurred after the restructuring transaction. None of the $100 of CFC1 accumulated earnings and profits succeeded to under section 381 is attributable to the CFC2 stock sold by DC2, pursuant to paragraph (b)(6) of this section.

(C) Section 368(a)(1)(B) reorganization. If, instead of DC1 acquiring its 25% interest in CFC2 pursuant to a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(C), DC1 had transferred the stock of CFC1 to CFC2 in exchange for 25% of the voting stock of CFC2 in a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(B), the results would be the same as described in paragraphs (ii) (A) and (B) of this Example 4.

Example 5. Acquisition of the stock of a foreign corporation that controls a domestic acquiring corporation in a triangular reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(C).

(i) Facts. DC1, a domestic corporation, has owned all the stock of CFC1, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. CFC1 has owned all the stock of CFC2, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. FC, a foreign corporation that is not a controlled foreign corporation, has owned all of the stock of DC2, a domestic corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 2. On December 31, year 3, pursuant to a restructuring transaction that was a triangular reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(C), CFC1 transfers all of its assets, including the CFC2 stock, to DC2 in exchange for 60% of the voting stock of FC. CFC1 transfers the voting stock of FC to DC1 and the CFC1 stock is cancelled. Pursuant to section 1223(1), DC1 is considered to have held the stock of FC since January 1, year 1. Under section 1223(2), DC2 is considered to have held the stock of CFC2 since January 1, year 1. On December 31, year 3, CFC1 has $100 of earnings and profits, CFC2 has $300 of earnings and profits, and FC has $200 of earnings and profits. DC1 includes the $100 all earnings and profits amount attributable to its CFC1 stock in income as a deemed dividend under § 1.367(b)-3 upon the exchange of CFC1 stock for FC stock. Pursuant to the lower-tier earnings exclusion of § 1.367(b)-2(d)(3)(ii), that amount does not include the $300 of earnings and profits of CFC2. From January 1, year 4, until December 31, year 5, FC (now a controlled foreign corporation) accumulates an additional $50 of earnings and profits. From January 1, year 4 until December 31, year 5, CFC2 accumulates an additional $100 of earnings and profits. On December 31, year 5, DC1 sells its stock in FC and DC2 sells its stock in CFC2.

(ii) Result. (A) DC1. Pursuant to paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section, there is $30 of earnings and profits attributable to the stock of FC sold by DC1. This amount consists of 60% of the $50 of earnings and profits accumulated by FC after the restructuring transaction, and none of the earnings and profits accumulated by CFC1, CFC2, or FC before the restructuring transaction.

(B) DC2. Pursuant to paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section, there is $400 of earnings and profits attributable to the stock of CFC2 sold by DC2. This amount consists of all of the earnings and profits accumulated by CFC2 during DC2's section 1223(2) holding period.

Example 6. Acquisition of the stock of a foreign corporation that controls a foreign acquiring corporation in a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(C).

(i) Facts. DC1, a domestic corporation, has owned all the stock of CFC1, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. CFC1 has owned all the stock of CFC2, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. FC, a foreign corporation that is not a controlled foreign corporation, has owned all of the stock of FC2, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 2. On December 31, year 3, pursuant to a restructuring transaction that was a triangular reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(C), CFC1 transfers all of its assets, including the CFC2 stock, to FC2 in exchange for 60% of the voting stock of FC. CFC1 transfers the voting stock of FC to DC1 and the CFC1 stock is cancelled. Pursuant to section 1223(1), DC1 is considered to have held the stock of FC since January 1, year 1. Under section 1223(2), FC2 is considered to have held the stock of CFC2 since January 1, year 1. On December 31, year 3, CFC1 has $100 of earnings and profits, CFC2 has $300 of earnings and profits, FC has $200 of earnings and profits, and FC2 has no earnings and profits. From January 1, year 4, until December 31, year 5, FC (now a controlled foreign corporation) accumulates an additional $50 of earnings and profits. From January 1, year 4 until December 31, year 5, CFC2 accumulates an additional $100 of earnings and profits. FC2, a controlled foreign corporation after the restructuring transaction, accumulates $100 of earnings and profits from January 1, year 4, until December 31, year 5. On December 31, year 5, DC1 sells its stock in FC.

(ii) Result. Pursuant to paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (b)(4)(iii) of this section, there is $550 of earnings and profits attributable to the stock of FC sold by DC1. This amount consists of all $400 of the CFC1 and CFC2 earnings and profits accumulated before the restructuring transaction (see also section 1248(c)(2)), and 60% of the $250 of the earnings and profits accumulated by FC, FC2, and CFC2 after the restructuring transaction.

Example 7. Acquisition of controlled foreign corporation stock by a controlled foreign corporation in a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(B), followed by a sale of the acquired stock by the acquiring controlled foreign corporation.

(i) Facts. DC1, a domestic corporation, has owned all of the outstanding stock of CFC1, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. CFC1 has owned all of the outstanding stock of CFC3, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. DC2, a domestic corporation unrelated to DC1, has owned all of the outstanding stock of CFC2, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 2. On December 31, year 3, pursuant to a restructuring transaction that is a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(B), CFC1 transfers all of the stock of CFC3 to CFC2 in exchange for 40% of CFC2's stock. On December 31, year 3, CFC2 and CFC3 have, respectively, $40 and $20 of earnings and profits. On December 31, year 5, when the accumulated earnings and profits of CFC3 are $50 ($20 of earnings and profits as of December 31, year 3, plus $30 of earnings and profits generated from January 1, year 4, through December 31, year 5), CFC2 sells the stock of CFC3 in a transaction to which section 964(e) applies.

(ii) Result. (A) CFC2. Pursuant to paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section, there is $50 of earnings and profits attributable to the CFC3 stock sold by CFC2. This amount consists of the accumulated earnings and profits attributable to CFC2's entire section 1223(2) holding period in the CFC3 stock.

(B) CFC1, DC2, and DC1. Under paragraph (b)(5) of this section, the earnings and profits attributable to the CFC2 stock held by CFC1 and DC2, and the earnings and profits attributable to the CFC1 stock held by DC1, will be reduced (regardless of whether CFC2 recognizes gain on its sale of CFC3 stock).

(1) CFC1. The earnings and profits attributable to the CFC2 stock held by CFC1 will be reduced by $32, or the amount of earnings and profits as of December 31, year 5, that would have been attributable to the CFC2 stock held by CFC1 pursuant to paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section. This amount consists of all of the $20 of earnings and profits accumulated by CFC3 before the restructuring transaction and 40% of the $30 of earnings and profits accumulated by CFC3 after the restructuring transaction (.40 × $30 = $12).

(2) DC1. The earnings and profits attributable to the CFC1 stock held by DC1 will also be reduced by $32, or the amount of earnings and profits that would have been attributable to the CFC1 stock held by DC1 as of December 31, year 5.

(3) DC2. The earnings and profits attributable to the CFC2 stock held by DC2 will be reduced by $18, or the amount of earnings and profits that would have been attributable to the CFC2 stock held by DC2 as of December 31, year 5, under paragraph (b)(4) of this section. This amount consists of 60% of the $30 (.60 × $30 = $18) of earnings and profits accumulated by CFC3 after the restructuring transaction.

(C) Partial sale by CFC2. If, instead of selling 100% of the CFC3 stock, on December 31, year 5, CFC2 sells only 50% of its CFC3 stock, paragraph (b)(5) of this section requires CFC1 to reduce the earnings and profits of CFC3 attributable to its CFC2 stock to $16. Similarly, DC1 would be required to reduce the earnings and profits of CFC3 attributable to its CFC1 stock by $16. Paragraph (b)(5) of this section also requires DC2 to reduce the CFC3 earnings and profits attributable to its CFC2 stock by $9. These reductions occur without regard to whether CFC2 recognizes gain on its sale of CFC3 stock.

Example 8. Acquisition of the assets of a lower-tier controlled foreign corporation by an upper-tier controlled foreign corporation in a restructuring transaction described in section 368(a)(1)(C).

(i) Facts. DC, a domestic corporation, has owned all the stock of CFC1, a controlled foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. CFC1 is a holding company that has owned 79% of the stock of CFC2, a controlled foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. The other 21% of CFC2 stock is owned by X, an unrelated party. On December 31, year 1, CFC2 has $200 of earnings and profits. On December 31, year 1, CFC1 has no accumulated earnings and profits. On December 31, year 1, pursuant to a restructuring transaction described in section 368(a)(1)(C), CFC2 transfers all its properties to CFC1. In exchange, CFC1 assumes the liabilities of CFC2 and transfers to CFC2 voting stock representing 21% of the stock of CFC1. CFC2 distributes the voting stock to X and liquidates. The liabilities assumed do not exceed 20% of the value of the properties of CFC2. From January 1, year 2, to December 31, year 3, CFC1 accumulates $100 of earnings and profits. On December 31, year 3, DC sells its CFC1 stock.

(ii) Result. Pursuant to paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section, there is $237 of earnings and profits attributable to DC's CFC1 stock. This amount consists of 79% of CFC2's $200 of earnings and profits accumulated before the restructuring transaction (see section 1248(c)(2)), and 79% of CFC1's $100 of earnings and profits accumulated after the restructuring transaction. Pursuant to paragraph (b)(6) of this section, none of CFC2's $200 of earnings and profits to which CFC1 succeeded under section 381 would be attributable to DC's CFC1 stock.

(c) Earnings and profits attributable to stock of a foreign distributee corporation that is a foreign corporate shareholder with respect to a foreign liquidating corporation

(1) General rule. If a foreign corporation (liquidating corporation) makes a distribution of property in complete liquidation under section 332 to a foreign corporation (distributee), and immediately before the liquidation the distributee was a foreign corporate shareholder with respect to the liquidating foreign corporation, the amount of earnings and profits attributable to the distributee stock upon its subsequent sale or exchange will be determined under this paragraph (c)(1). The earnings and profits attributable will be the sum of the earnings and profits attributable to the stock of the distributee immediately before the liquidation (including amounts attributed under section 1248(c)(2)) and the earnings and profits attributable to the stock of the distributee accumulated after the liquidation (including amounts attributed under section 1248(c)(2)).

(2) Special rule regarding section 381. Solely for purposes of determining the earnings and profits (or deficit in earnings and profits) attributable to stock under this paragraph (c), the attributed earnings and profits of a corporation shall not include earnings and profits that are treated as received or incurred pursuant to section 381(c)(2)(A) and § 1.381(c)(2)-1(a).

(3) Example—

(i) Facts. DC, a domestic corporation, has owned all of the stock of CFC1, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. CFC1 is an operating company that has owned all of the stock of CFC2, a foreign corporation, since its formation on January 1, year 1. On December 31, year 2, CFC1 has $200 of accumulated earnings and profits and CFC2 has a ($200) deficit in earnings and profits. On December 31, year 2, CFC2 distributes all of its assets and liabilities to CFC1 in a liquidation to which section 332 applies. From January 1, year 3, until December 31, year 4, CFC1 accumulates no additional earnings and profits. On December 31, year 4, DC sells its stock in CFC1.

(ii) Result. Pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, there are no earnings and profits attributable to DC's CFC1 stock. This amount consists of the sum of the earnings and profits attributable to the CFC1 stock immediately before the liquidation (100% of the $200 accumulated earnings and profits of CFC1 and 100% of CFC2's ($200) deficit in earnings and profits) and the amount of earnings and profits accumulated after the section 332 liquidation (see also section 1248(c)(2)).

(d) Effective/applicability dates

(1) General rule. Except as provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, this section applies to income inclusions that occur on or after July 30, 2007.

(2) Exception. Paragraph (b)(2)(iv) of this section applies to restructuring transactions occurring on or after April 18, 2013.

[T.D. 9345, 72 FR 41446, July 30, 2007, as amended by T.D. 9614, 78 FR 17042, Mar. 19, 2013; T.D. 9803, 81 FR 91030, Dec. 16, 2016]

§ 1.1248(f)-1 Certain nonrecognition distributions.

(a) Scope and purpose. This section and §§ 1.1248(f)-2 and 1.1248(f)-3 provide rules under section 1248(f) that apply when a domestic corporation (domestic distributing corporation) distributes stock of a foreign corporation (foreign distributed corporation) in a distribution to which section 337, 355(c)(1), or 361(c)(1) applies. Paragraph (b) of this section provides the general rule that requires the domestic distributing corporation, depending on the type of distribution, to include in gross income either the section 1248 amount or the total section 1248(f) amount. Paragraph (c) of this section provides definitions that apply for purposes of this section and §§ 1.1248(f)-2 and 1.1248(f)-3. Section 1.1248(f)-2 provides exceptions to the general rule contained in paragraph (b) of this section that apply, depending on the type of distribution. Section 1.1248(f)-3 provides reasonable cause relief procedures for failures to timely comply with certain filing requirements and effective/applicability dates.

(b) General rule

(1) Section 337 distribution. This paragraph (b)(1) applies if a domestic distributing corporation that is a section 1248 shareholder of a foreign distributed corporation distributes stock of the foreign distributed corporation in a distribution to which section 337 applies (section 337 distribution). Except as provided in § 1.1248(f)-2(a), the domestic distributing corporation must, notwithstanding any other provision of subtitle A of the Internal Revenue Code (Code), include in gross income as a dividend the section 1248 amount with respect to the stock of the foreign distributed corporation. This paragraph (b)(1) applies only to the extent the domestic distributing corporation does not recognize gain with respect to the stock of the foreign distributed corporation as a result of the section 337 distribution under another provision of subtitle A of the Code.

(2) Existing stock distribution under section 355 or 361. This paragraph (b)(2) applies to the extent a domestic distributing corporation distributes stock of the foreign distributed corporation that is not received in a section 361 exchange that is part of the plan of distribution, provided the distribution is described in section 355(c)(1) or section 361(c)(1) (existing stock distribution). Except as provided in § 1.1248(f)-2(b), the domestic distributing corporation must, notwithstanding any other provision of subtitle A of the Code, include in gross income as a dividend the section 1248 amount with respect to the stock of the foreign distributed corporation. This paragraph (b)(2) only applies to the extent the domestic distributing corporation does not recognize gain with respect to the stock of the foreign distributed corporation as a result of the existing stock distribution under another provision of subtitle A of the Code.

(3) New stock distribution under section 361. This paragraph (b)(3) applies to the extent a domestic distributing corporation distributes stock of the foreign distributed corporation that is received in a section 361 exchange that is part of the plan of distribution (and, to the extent applicable, also distributes any cash or other property), provided the distribution is described in section 361(c)(1) (new stock distribution). Except as provided in § 1.1248(f)-2(c), the domestic distributing corporation must, notwithstanding any other provision of subtitle A of the Code, include in gross income as a dividend the total section 1248(f) amount with respect to the stock of each foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange. This paragraph (b)(3) applies without regard to the amount of gain realized by the domestic distributing corporation in the new stock distribution.

(c) Definitions. Except as otherwise provided, the following definitions apply for purposes of this section and §§ 1.1248(f)-2 and 1.1248(f)-3:

(1) 80-percent distributee is a corporation described in section 337(c).

(2) Block of stock has the meaning provided in § 1.1248-2(b).

(3) Distributee is a shareholder of the domestic distributing corporation that receives one or more shares of stock of a foreign distributed corporation in an existing stock distribution (as defined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section) or a new stock distribution (as defined in paragraph (b)(3) of this section).

(4) Hypothetical section 1248 amount is, with respect to each distributee or non-stock distributee, the amount in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section, reduced by the amount in paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section computed with respect to the stock of each foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange by the domestic distributing corporation for which there is not an income inclusion under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(i).

(i) The amount that the domestic distributing corporation would have included in income as a deemed dividend under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(i) if the requirements of § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(ii)(A) (involving the receipt of foreign stock in an exchange to which § 1.367(a)-7(c) applies) had not been satisfied and that would have been attributable to such distributee or non-stock distributee under § 1.367(a)-7(e)(4) (providing rules to attribute deemed income inclusions under § 1.367(b)-4 to persons described in § 1.367(a)-3(e)(3)(iii)(A).

(ii) The amount of gain recognized by the domestic distributing corporation under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2) attributable to such distributee or non-stock distributee and allocable to the stock of such foreign corporation under § 1.367(a)-7(e)(1), but only to the extent such gain is treated as a dividend under section 1248(a).

(5) Non-stock distributee is a shareholder of the domestic distributing corporation that receives cash or other property but no shares of stock of the foreign distributed corporation in a new stock distribution (as defined in paragraph (b)(3) of this section).

(6) Postdistribution amount is the section 1248 amount with respect to the stock (or a portion of a share of stock) of the foreign distributed corporation received by a distributee, computed immediately after the distribution, but without taking into account any adjustments to the basis of the stock under § 1.1248(f)-2(b)(3) (in the case of an existing stock distribution) or adjustments to the basis of stock or income inclusions under § 1.1248(f)-2(c)(3) (in the case of a new stock distribution). The postdistribution amount in the stock of a foreign distributed corporation received in an existing stock distribution is determined based on the distributee's holding period in the stock as adjusted under § 1.1248(f)-2(b)(2). The postdistribution amount in the stock (or a portion of a share of stock, as applicable) of a foreign distributed corporation received in a new stock distribution is determined after applying the rules in §§ 1.1248-8(b)(2)(iv) and 1.1248(f)-2(c)(2).

(7) Section 358 basis is the basis in stock as determined under section 358.

(8) Section 361 exchange is an exchange described in section 361(a) or (b).

(9) Section 1248 amount is the net positive earnings and profits (if any) attributable to the stock of the foreign distributed corporation, determined in accordance with § 1.1248-2 or § 1.1248-3 (taking into account § 1.1248-8, if applicable), and that would be included in gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) if the stock were sold by the domestic distributing corporation in a transaction in which all realized gain is recognized.

(10) Section 1248(f) amount is the amount in paragraph (c)(10)(i) of this section, reduced by the amount in paragraph (c)(10)(ii) of this section computed with respect to the stock of each foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange by the domestic distributing corporation for which the domestic distributing corporation does not have an income inclusion under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(i).

(i) The amount that the domestic distributing corporation would have included in income as a dividend under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(i) if the requirements of § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(ii)(A) (involving the receipt of foreign stock in an exchange to which § 1.367(a)-7(c) applies) had not been satisfied.

(ii) The amount of gain recognized by the domestic distributing corporation under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2) and allocable to the stock of such foreign corporation under § 1.367(a)-7(e)(1), but only to the extent such gain is treated as a dividend under section 1248(a).

(11) Section 1248(f) block amount is the portion of the section 1248(f) amount, as defined in paragraph (c)(10) of this section, that relates to a block of stock of the foreign corporation if more than a single block of stock of the foreign corporation is transferred in the section 361 exchange.

(12) Section 1248 shareholder is a domestic corporation that satisfies the ownership requirements of section 1248(a)(2) with respect to a foreign corporation, except that a domestic corporation, other than a domestic distributing corporation, that is a regulated investment company (as defined in section 851(a)), a real estate investment trust (as defined in section 856(a)), or an S corporation (as defined in section 1361(a)) cannot be a section 1248 shareholder.

(13) Timely filed return is a U.S. income tax return filed on or before the due date set forth in section 6072(b), including any extensions of time to file the return granted under section 6081.

(14) Total section 1248(f) amount is the sum of each section 1248(f) amount (as defined in paragraph (c)(10) of this section).

[T.D. 9614, 78 FR 17043, Mar. 19, 2013, as amended by T.D. 9760, 81 FR 15169, Mar. 22, 2016]

§ 1.1248(f)-2 Exceptions for certain distributions and attribution rules.

(a) Section 337 stock distribution

(1) General exception. In the case of a section 337 distribution (as defined in § 1.1248-1(b)(1)), § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(1) shall not apply to the distribution of stock of the foreign distributed corporation to the 80-percent distributee if the conditions of paragraphs (a)(1)(i), (a)(1)(ii) and (a)(1)(iii) of this section are satisfied.

(i) 80-percent distributee is a section 1248 shareholder. Immediately after the section 337 distribution, the 80-percent distributee is a section 1248 shareholder with respect to the foreign distributed corporation.

(ii) Holding period. The 80-percent distributee is treated as holding the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the section 337 distribution for the period during which the stock was held by the domestic distributing corporation.

(iii) Basis. The 80-percent distributee's basis in the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the section 337 distribution does not exceed the domestic distributing corporation's basis in such stock at the time of the section 337 distribution.

(2) Elective exception. If the conditions of paragraph (a)(1)(ii) or (a)(1)(iii) of this section are not otherwise satisfied, the domestic distributing corporation and the 80-percent distributee may elect to make adjustments to the 80-percent distributee's holding period or basis in the stock of the foreign distributed corporation, as appropriate, such that the conditions described in paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) and (iii) of this section are satisfied. The conditions and procedures for making the election are described in paragraph (a)(3) of this section. See paragraphs (a)(4) and (5) of this section for adjustments that are required as a result of making the election.

(3) Election and reporting

(i) Statement required by domestic distributing corporation and 80-percent distributee

(A) In general. The domestic distributing corporation and the 80-percent distributee make the election described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section by each including a statement, described in paragraph (a)(3)(i)(B) of this section, with a timely filed return for the taxable year during which the section 337 distribution occurs, and by entering into a written agreement described in paragraph (a)(3)(ii) of this section. If the domestic distributing corporation or the 80-percent distributee are members of a consolidated group at the time of the section 337 distribution but not the common parent, the common parent of the consolidated group makes the election on behalf of the domestic distributing corporation or the 80-percent distributee. The election described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and made pursuant to this paragraph (a)(3) is irrevocable.

(B) Form and content. The statement of election must be entitled, “STATEMENT TO ELECT TO APPLY EXCEPTION UNDER § 1.1248(f)-2(a)(2),” state that the domestic distributing corporation and the 80-percent distributee have entered into a written agreement described in paragraph (a)(3)(ii) of this section, set forth the date of the agreement and the names of the parties to the agreement, and the adjustments to the 80-percent distributee's holding period and/or basis determined under section 334 in the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the section 337 distribution required under paragraphs (a)(4) and (a)(5) of this section.

(ii) Written agreement. The domestic distributing corporation and the 80-percent distributee must enter into a written agreement described in this paragraph (a)(3)(ii) on or before the due date (including extensions) of the domestic distributing corporation's U.S. income tax return for the taxable year during which the section 337 distribution occurs. Both the domestic distributing corporation and the 80-percent distributee must retain the original or a copy of the agreement as part of its records in the manner specified by § 1.6001-1(e). Both the domestic distributing corporation and the 80-percent distributee must provide a copy of the agreement to the Internal Revenue Service within 30 days of the receipt of a request for the agreement in connection with an examination of the taxable year during which the section 337 distribution occurs. The written agreement must—

(A) State the document is an agreement under paragraph (a)(3)(ii) of this section;

(B) Provide the name and taxpayer identification number (if any) of the domestic distributing corporation, the 80-percent distribute, and the foreign distributed corporation;

(C) With respect to the 80-percent distributee, state the holding period in the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the section 337 distribution as adjusted under paragraph (a)(4) of this section; and

(D) With respect to the 80-percent distributee, identify the basis as determined under section 334 of the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the section 337 distribution and the adjustment (if any) to such basis under paragraph (a)(5) of this section.

(4) Holding period adjustment. For purposes of section 1248, immediately after the section 337 distribution, the 80-percent distributee's holding period in the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the section 337 distribution shall equal the domestic distributing corporation's holding period in such stock at the time of the section 337 distribution.

(5) Basis adjustments. If the domestic distributing corporation's section 1248 amount with respect to the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received by the 80-percent distributee in the section 337 distribution exceeds the 80-percent distributee's postdistribution amount with respect to such stock (excess amount), the 80-percent distributee's basis as determined under section 334 in such stock shall be reduced by the excess amount.

(b) Existing stock distribution under sections 355 or 361. In the case of an existing stock distribution (as defined in § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(2)), § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(2) shall not apply to the distribution of stock of the foreign distributed corporation to a distributee that is a section 1248 shareholder with respect to the foreign distributed corporation immediately after the distribution if the domestic distributing corporation and all distributees that are section 1248 shareholders elect to apply the provisions of this paragraph (b) in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section. See paragraphs (b)(2) and (3) of this section for adjustments that may be required if an election is made to apply the provisions of this paragraph (b).

(1) Election and reporting

(i) Statement required by domestic distributing corporation and section 1248 shareholders

(A) In general. The domestic distributing corporation and all distributees that are section 1248 shareholders elect to apply the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section by each including a statement, described in paragraph (b)(1)(i)(B) of this section, with a timely filed return for the taxable year during which the existing stock distribution occurs and by entering into a written agreement described in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section. If the domestic distributing corporation or a section 1248 shareholder is a member of a consolidated group but not the common parent, the common parent of the consolidated group makes the election on behalf of the domestic distributing corporation or section 1248 shareholder. The election made under this paragraph (b)(1) is irrevocable.

(B) Form and content. The statement of election must be entitled, “ELECTION TO APPLY EXCEPTION UNDER § 1.1248(f)-2(b),” state that the domestic distributing corporation and all distributees that are section 1248 shareholders have entered into a written agreement described in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section, the date of the agreement and the names of the parties to the agreement, and set forth any required adjustment to each section 1248 shareholder's holding period or section 358 basis (if any) in the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the existing stock distribution under paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section, respectively.

(ii) Written agreement. The domestic distributing corporation and the section 1248 shareholders must enter into a written agreement described in this paragraph (b)(1)(ii) on or before the due date (including extensions) of the domestic distributing corporation's U.S. income tax return for the taxable year during which the existing stock distribution occurs. Each party to the agreement must retain the original or a copy of the agreement as part of its records in the manner specified by § 1.6001-1(e). Each party to the agreement must provide a copy of the agreement to the Internal Revenue Service within 30 days of the receipt of a request for the agreement in connection with an examination of the taxable year during which the existing stock distribution occurs. The written agreement must—

(A) State the document is an agreement under paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section;

(B) Provide the name and taxpayer identification number (if any) of the domestic distributing corporation, the foreign distributed corporation, and each section 1248 shareholder;

(C) With respect to each section 1248 shareholder, state the holding period in the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the existing stock distribution as adjusted under paragraph (b)(2) of this section; and

(D) With respect to each section 1248 shareholder, identify the basis under section 358 of the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the existing stock distribution and the adjustment (if any) to the basis under paragraph (b)(3) of this section.

(2) Holding period adjustments. For purposes of section 1248, immediately after the existing stock distribution, each section 1248 shareholder's holding period in each share of stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the existing stock distribution will be equal to the domestic distributing corporation's holding period in the share of stock at the time of the existing stock distribution.

(3) Basis adjustments. If the domestic distributing corporation's section 1248 amount with respect to a share of stock of the foreign distributed corporation received by a section 1248 shareholder in the existing stock distribution exceeds the section 1248 shareholder's postdistribution amount with respect to the share of stock (excess amount), the section 1248 shareholder's section 358 basis in the share of stock is reduced by the excess amount. For an illustration of the rule in this paragraph (b)(3), see paragraph (e) of this section, Example 1 and Example 3.

(c) New stock distribution under section 361. In the case of a new stock distribution (as defined in § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3)), the amount that the domestic distributing corporation is required to include in gross income as a dividend under § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3) (total section 1248(f) amount) is reduced by the sum of the portions of any section 1248(f) amount attributable under paragraph (d) of this section to stock of the foreign distributed corporation distributed to distributees that are section 1248 shareholders, but only if the domestic distributing corporation and all the distributees that are section 1248 shareholders elect to apply the provisions of this paragraph (c) in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section. See paragraphs (c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(4) of this section for adjustments or income inclusions that are required if an election is made to apply the provisions of this paragraph (c). The adjustments or income inclusions provided in paragraphs (c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(4) of this section apply after any adjustments required under section 367(a)(5) and § 1.367(a)-7(c). For illustrations of this exception, see paragraph (e) of this section, Example 2 and Example 3 and § 1.367(a)-3(e)(8), Example 3.

(1) Election and reporting

(i) Statement required by domestic distributing corporation and section 1248 shareholders

(A) In general. The domestic distributing corporation and all distributees that are section 1248 shareholders elect to apply the provisions of paragraph (c) of this section by each including a statement, in the form and containing the information listed in paragraph (c)(1)(i)(B) of this section, with a timely filed return for the taxable year during which the new stock distribution occurs and by entering into a written agreement described in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section. If the domestic distributing corporation or a section 1248 shareholder is a member of a consolidated group at the time of the new stock distribution but is not the common parent, the common parent of the consolidated group makes the election on behalf of the domestic distributing corporation or section 1248 shareholder. The election made under this paragraph (c)(1) is irrevocable.

(B) Form and content. The statement of election must be entitled, “ELECTION TO APPLY EXCEPTION UNDER § 1.1248(f)-2(c),” state that the domestic distributing corporation and each distributee that is a section 1248 shareholder have entered into a written agreement described in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section, the date of the agreement and the names of the parties to the agreement, and describe, with respect to each section 1248 shareholder, the extent to which the shares of stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the new stock distribution are divided into portions under paragraph (c)(2) of this section, any adjustments to the section 358 basis of the stock under paragraph (c)(3) of this section, and the amount the domestic distributing corporation must include in gross income as a dividend under paragraph (c)(3) of this section.

(ii) Written agreement. The domestic distributing corporation and all distributees that are section 1248 shareholders must enter into a written agreement described in this paragraph (c)(1)(ii) on or before the due date (including extensions) of the domestic distributing corporation's U.S. income tax return for the taxable year during which the new stock distribution occurs. Each party to the agreement must retain the original or a copy of the agreement as part of its records in the manner specified by § 1.6001-1(e). Each party to the agreement must provide a copy of the agreement to the Internal Revenue Service within 30 days of the receipt of a request for the agreement in connection with an examination of the taxable year during which the new stock distribution occurs. The written agreement must—

(A) State the document is an agreement under paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section;

(B) Provide the name and taxpayer identification number (if any) of the domestic distributing corporation, the foreign distributed corporation, and each section 1248 shareholder;

(C) With respect to each section 1248 shareholder, describe the extent to which the shares of stock of the foreign distributed corporation are divided into portions under paragraph (c)(2) of this section;

(D) With respect to each section 1248 shareholder, state the amount of earnings and profits attributable to the stock (or each block of stock, as applicable) of each foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange that is attributable under § 1.1248-8(b)(2)(iv) to the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the new stock distribution;

(E) With respect to each section 1248 shareholder, state the amount of the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the stock (or each block of stock, as applicable) of each foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange that is attributable under § 1.1248(f)-2(d) to the stock of the foreign distributed corporation received in the new stock distribution;

(F) With respect to each section 1248 shareholder, state the amount of the adjustment to the section 358 basis of the stock of the foreign distributed corporation under paragraph (c)(3) of this section; and

(G) With respect to each section 1248 shareholder, state the amount the domestic distributing corporation must include in gross income as a dividend under paragraph (c)(3) of this section.

(2) Portions. If the domestic distributing corporation transfers property, other than a single block of stock of a foreign corporation with respect to which the domestic distributing corporation is a section 1248 shareholder immediately before the section 361 exchange, to the foreign distributed corporation in the section 361 exchange that precedes the new stock distribution, then each share of stock of the foreign distributed corporation received by a distributee that is a section 1248 shareholder must be divided into portions as follows:

(i) One portion attributable to all property transferred in the section 361 exchange, other than property that is stock of a foreign corporation with respect to which the domestic distributing corporation is a section 1248 shareholder immediately before the section 361 exchange; and

(ii) One portion attributable to each block of stock of each foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange with respect to which the domestic distributing corporation is a section 1248 shareholder immediately before the section 361 exchange. For the determination of the earnings and profits attributable to the stock (or block of stock, as applicable) of each foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange that are attributable to a portion of a share of stock of the foreign distributed corporation, see § 1.1248-8(b)(2)(iv). For the determination of the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the stock (or block of stock, as applicable) of each foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange that is attributable to a portion of a share of stock of the foreign distributed corporation, see paragraph (d)(2) of this section.

(3) Basis adjustments and income inclusions. If the section 1248(f) amount attributable to a portion of a share of stock (or whole share, if no division is required) (as determined under paragraph (d) of this section) of the foreign distributed corporation received by a distributee that is a section 1248 shareholder in the new stock distribution exceeds the section 1248 shareholder's postdistribution amount in the portion (or whole share, if no division is required) (excess amount), then the section 1248 shareholder's section 358 basis in the portion as determined under paragraph (c)(4) of this section (or whole share, if no division is required), as adjusted under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(3), is reduced by the excess amount, but not below zero. To the extent the excess amount exceeds the section 358 basis in the portion (or whole share, if no division is required), the domestic distributing corporation must include that portion of the section 1248(f) amount attributable to the portion of the share (or whole share, if no division is required) in gross income as a dividend. For an illustration of this rule, see paragraph (e) of this section, Example 2, and § 1.367(a)-3(e)(8), Example 3.

(4) Divided shares of stock

(i) Basis. The basis of a portion of a share of stock of the foreign distributed corporation created under paragraph (c)(2) of this section is the product of the section 1248 shareholder's section 358 basis, as adjusted under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(3), in the share of stock multiplied by the ratio of the basis determined under section 362 (taking into account any gain or deemed dividends recognized under section 367) of the property (section 362 basis) to which the portion relates, to the aggregate section 362 basis of all property received by the foreign distributed corporation in the section 361 exchange. For illustrations of this rule, see paragraph (e) of this section, Example 2, and § 1.367(a)-3(e)(8), Example 3.

(ii) Fair market value. The fair market value of a portion of a share of stock of the foreign distributed corporation created under paragraph (c)(2) of this section is the product of the fair market value of the share of stock multiplied by the ratio of the fair market value of the property to which the portion relates to the aggregate fair market value of all property received by the foreign distributed corporation in the section 361 exchange. For illustrations of this rule, see paragraph (e) of this section, Example 2, and § 1.367(a)-3(e)(8), Example 3.

(iii) Subsequent exchanges. For purposes of determining the gain realized on the sale or exchange of a share of stock of the foreign distributed corporation that has divided portions under paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the amount realized on the sale or exchange of the share will be allocated to each divided portion based on the relative fair market value of the property to which the portion relates as determined at the time of the reorganization.

(iv) Duration of divided shares. Shares of stock of the foreign distributed corporation that are divided into portions under paragraph (c)(2) of this section must be divided so long as section 1248(a) would apply to a sale or exchange of the shares.

(d) Attribution of all or a portion of section 1248(f) amount to certain stock of the foreign distributed corporation. This paragraph (d) applies if there is a new stock distribution for which an election under § 1.1248(f)-2(c)(1) is made. This paragraph (d) provides rules for attributing all or a portion, as applicable, of the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the stock of each foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange by the domestic distributing corporation to shares of stock, or to portions of shares of stock, as applicable, received in the foreign distributed corporation and distributed to one or more distributees that are section 1248 shareholders with respect to the foreign distributed corporation. Paragraph (d)(1) of this section provides rules to attribute the applicable section 1248(f) amount among shares of stock of the foreign distributed corporation received by one or more distributees that are section 1248 shareholders. If shares of stock are divided into portions under paragraph (c)(2) of this section, paragraph (d)(2) of this section provides additional rules to attribute the applicable section 1248 amount to portions of shares of stock received by one or more distributees that are section 1248 shareholders.

(1) Attribution of all or a portion of section 1248(f) amount among shares of stock. With respect to one or more shares of stock of the foreign distributed corporation distributed to a distributee that is a section 1248 shareholder, the portion of the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the stock of the foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange that is equal to the distributee's hypothetical section 1248 amount is attributed among those shares of stock of the foreign distributed corporation based on the ratio of the value of a share distributed to the distributee to the value of all shares of stock distributed to the distributee (attributable share amount).

(2) Attribution of all or a portion of section 1248(f) amount to portions of a share of stock

(i) Single block of stock. If a single block of stock of the foreign corporation is transferred in the section 361 exchange, the attributable share amount (as determined under paragraph (d)(1) of this section) is attributed to the portion of the share that relates to the single block of stock of the foreign corporation.

(ii) Multiple blocks of stock. If multiple blocks of stock of the foreign corporation are transferred in the section 361 exchange, the attributable share amount (as determined under paragraph (d)(1) of the section) is attributed among the portions of the share that relate to such multiple blocks of stock of the foreign corporation. The portion of the attributable share amount that is attributable to a portion to which a block of stock relates is that amount that bears the same ratio that the section 1248(f) block amount with respect to that block of stock bears to the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the stock of the foreign corporation.

(e) Examples. The rules of this section are illustrated by the following examples. See also § 1.367(a)-3(e)(8), Example 3. For purposes of the examples, unless otherwise indicated: DP and DC are domestic corporations; X is a United States citizen; FP is a foreign corporation; CFC1, CFC2, and FA are controlled foreign corporations; each corporation has a single class of stock outstanding and uses the calendar year as its taxable year; each shareholder of a corporation owns a single block of stock in the corporation; DC owns Business A, which consists solely of property whose fair market value exceeds its basis and could satisfy the requirements of the active foreign trade or business exception under section 367(a)(3) and § 1.367(a)-2; DC owns no other assets and has no liabilities; the requirements in § 1.367(a)-7(c)(5) are satisfied; no earnings and profits of a foreign corporation are described in section 1248(d); and none of the foreign corporations in the examples is a surrogate foreign corporation (within the meaning of section 7874) as a result of the transactions described in the examples because one or more of the conditions of section 7874(a)(2)(B) is not satisfied.

Example 1. Existing stock distribution under section 355(c)(1); gain recognition and adjustment to stock basis.

(i) Facts. DP, FP, and X own 80%, 10%, and 10%, respectively, of the outstanding stock of DC. DP's DC stock has a $140x basis, $160x fair market value, and a 2-year holding period. DC wholly owns CFC1. DC's CFC1 stock has a $50x basis, $100x fair market value (therefore a gain of $50x), $25x of earnings and profits attributable to it for purposes of section 1248, and a $25x section 1248 amount (computed as the lesser of $50x gain in the CFC1 stock and $25x of section 1248 earnings and profits), and a 3-year holding period. On December 31, year 3, DC distributes all of the CFC1 stock to DP, FP, and X on a pro-rata basis in a distribution to which section 355 applies. The fair market value of the CFC1 stock received by DP, FP, and X is $80x, $10x, and $10x, respectively. After the distribution, DP's stock in DC has a fair market value of $80x and DP's section 358 basis in the CFC1 stock is $70x (a pro rata portion, or 50%, of DP's $140x basis in the DC stock immediately before the distribution). See § 1.358-2(a)(iv).

(ii) Result. (A) Under § 1.367(e)-1(b)(1), DC must recognize $5x gain on the distribution of CFC1 stock to FP (10% of the $50x gain in the CFC1 stock). Under § 1.367(b)-5(b)(1)(ii), DC must also recognize $5x gain on the distribution of CFC1 stock to X (10% of the $50x gain in the CFC1 stock). Of the aggregate $10x gain recognized by DC, $5x is recharacterized as a dividend under section 1248(a), computed as 20% of the $25x section 1248 amount with respect to the CFC1 stock. See § 1.1248-1 for additional consequences.

(B) DC's distribution of CFC1 stock to DP is described in section 1248(f)(1) and § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(2) because the distribution is pursuant to section 355(c)(1) (an existing stock distribution). As a result, the general rule is that DC must include in gross income as a dividend the section 1248 amount with respect to the CFC1 stock distributed to DP, or $20x (computed as 80% of the $25x section 1248 amount). However, if DP and DC make the election under paragraph (b)(1) of this section, § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(2) will not apply to DC's distribution of CFC1 stock to DP. If DP and DC make the election, then:

(1) Under paragraph (b)(2) of this section, for purposes of section 1248, immediately after the distribution DP will have a 3-year holding period in the CFC1 stock, the same holding period DC had in the CFC1 stock at the time of the distribution.

(2) Under paragraph (b)(3) of this section, DP's section 358 basis in the CFC1 stock ($70x) is reduced by $10x, the amount by which DC's section 1248 amount with respect to the CFC1 stock ($20x) distributed to DP exceeds DP's postdistribution amount with respect to the CFC1 stock ($10x). Under § 1.1248(f)-1(c)(6), DP's postdistribution amount equals the amount that DP would include in gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) if DP sold the CFC1 stock immediately after the distribution, or $10x, which is computed as the lesser of the $10x gain in the CFC1 stock ($80x fair market value, less $70x basis) and $20x of section 1248 earnings and profits attributable to the CFC1 stock, taking into account DP's 3-year holding period in the stock as required by paragraph (b)(2) of this section. As adjusted under paragraph (b)(3) of this section, DP's basis in the CFC1 stock is $60x ($70x basis, less $10x required basis reduction).

Example 2. New stock distribution under section 361(c)(1); adjustment to stock basis.

(i) Facts. DP wholly owns DC. DP's DC stock has a $180x basis and $200x fair market value. DC wholly owns CFC1 and CFC2. DC's CFC1 stock has a $70x basis, $100x fair market value (therefore a gain of $30x), $40x of earnings and profits attributable to it for purposes of section 1248, and a section 1248 amount of $30x (computed as the lesser of the $30x gain in CFC1 stock and $40x section 1248 earnings and profits). DC's CFC2 stock has a $130x basis, $100x fair market value (therefore a loss of $30x), $80x of earnings and profits attributable to it for purposes of section 1248, and a section 1248 amount of $0x (computed as the lesser of the $0x gain and $80x section 1248 earnings and profits). On December 31, Year 1, in a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(F), DC transfers the CFC1 stock and the CFC2 stock to FA, a newly formed corporation, in exchange for 100 shares of FA stock. DC distributes the 100 shares of FA stock to DP. DC's transfer of the CFC1 stock and CFC2 stock to FA in exchange for FA stock qualifies as a section 361 exchange, and DC's distribution of the 100 shares of FA stock to DP is pursuant to section 361(c)(1). DP exchanges its DC stock for the 100 shares of FA stock pursuant to section 354. Immediately after the transaction, DP wholly owns FA. DP and DC elect to apply the provisions of § 1.367(a)-7(c) in accordance with § 1.367(a)-7(c)(5). Pursuant to § 1.367(a)-3(e)(3)(iii)(A), DP properly files a gain recognition agreement with respect to the CFC1 stock that satisfies the conditions of §§ 1.367(a)-3(e)(6) and 1.367(a)-8.

(ii) Result. (A) DC does not recognize gain under § 1.367(a)-3(e)(2) with respect to the transfer of the CFC1 stock to FA because the three conditions in § 1.367(a)-3(e)(3)(i), (e)(3)(ii), and (e)(3)(iii) are satisfied. First, § 1.367(a)-3(e)(3)(i) is satisfied because the requirements of § 1.367(a)-7(c) are satisfied, including that an election is made to apply § 1.367(a)-7(c). Second, the requirements under § 1.367(a)-3(e)(3)(ii) related to transfers of domestic stock are not applicable because CFC1 is a foreign corporation. Third, because DC owns all the stock of FA immediately after DC's receipt of the FA stock in the section 361 exchange but prior to, and without taking into account, DC's distribution of the FA stock to DP, for purposes of satisfying the requirements of § 1.367(a)-3(e)(3)(iii), DP properly files a gain recognition agreement with respect to the CFC1 stock that satisfies the conditions of §§ 1.367(a)-3(e)(6) and 1.367(a)-8. Furthermore, DC is not required to recognize gain under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2)(ii), and DP is not required to reduce its $180x section 358 basis in the FA stock under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(3), because the inside gain (within the meaning of § 1.367(a)-7(f)(5)) is $0x ($200x aggregate fair market value of CFC1 stock and CFC2 stock, less $200x aggregate basis of CFC1 stock and CFC2 stock). In addition, DC is not required to include in income as a deemed dividend the $30x section 1248 amount with respect to the CFC1 stock under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(i) because immediately after DC's receipt of the FA stock in the section 361 exchange but prior to, and without taking into account, DC's distribution of the FA stock to DP, CFC1 and FA are controlled foreign corporations as to which DC is a section 1248 shareholder. See § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(ii)(A). With respect to the transfer of the CFC2 stock to FA, DC's section 1248 amount with respect to the CFC2 stock is $0x; therefore, § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(i) has no application.

(B) Under § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3), as a result of the section 361(c)(1) distribution of the FA stock to DP (a new stock distribution), the general rule is that DC must include in gross income as a dividend the total section 1248(f) amount (defined in § 1.1248(f)-1(c)(14)). The total section 1248(f) amount is $30x, the sum of the section 1248(f) amount (defined in § 1.1248(f)-1(c)(10)) with respect to the CFC1 stock ($30x) and CFC2 stock ($0x). The section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC1 stock is the amount that DC would have included in income as a deemed dividend under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(i) with respect to the CFC1 stock if the requirements under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(ii)(A) had not been satisfied ($30x), less the amount of gain recognized by DC under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2) that is allocable to the CFC1 stock under § 1.367(a)-7(e)(1) and treated as a dividend under section 1248(a) ($0x). Similarly, the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC2 stock is the amount that DC would have included in income as a deemed dividend under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(i) with respect to the CFC2 stock if the requirements under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(ii)(A) had not been satisfied ($0x), less the amount of gain recognized by DC under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2) that is allocable to the CFC2 stock under § 1.367(a)-7(e)(1) and treated as a dividend under section 1248(a) ($0x).

(C) If, however, DP and DC make the election provided in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the amount that DC is required to include in gross income as a dividend under § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3) (the total section 1248(f) amount of $30x) is reduced to the extent the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC1 stock ($30x) and CFC2 stock ($0x) is attributable under paragraph (d) of this section to the shares of FA stock distributed to one or more distributees that are section 1248 shareholders of FA. The only distributee is DP, and DP is a section 1248 shareholder with respect to FA. If DP and DC elect to apply paragraph (c) of this section, then:

(1) Under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the portion of the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC1 stock that is attributed to the shares of FA stock distributed to DP is equal to DP's hypothetical section 1248 amount (as defined in § 1.1248(f)-1(c)(4)) with respect to the CFC1 stock. Because DP is the only shareholder of DC, DP's hypothetical section 1248 amount equals the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC1 stock ($30x). The $30x hypothetical section 1248 amount is attributed pro rata (based on relative values) among the 100 shares of FA stock distributed to DP, and the attributable share amount (as defined in paragraph (d)(1) of this section) is $.30x. Paragraph (d)(1) of this section has no application with respect to the CFC2 stock because there is no section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC2 stock.

(2) If the shares of FA stock are divided into portions, the rules of paragraph (d)(2) of this section apply to attribute the attributable share amount ($.30x) to portions of shares of FA stock distributed to DP. Under paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, the 100 shares of FA stock are divided into two portions, one portion related to the single block of CFC1 stock and one portion related to the single block of CFC2 stock. Under paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section, the attributable share amount of $.30x is attributed to the portion of the 100 shares of FA stock that relates to the single block of CFC1 stock. Thus, all of the $30x section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC1 stock is attributable to the 100 shares of FA stock.

(3) Because the election under paragraph (c)(1) of this section is made, the total section 1248(f) amount ($30x) that DC is otherwise required to include in gross income as a dividend under § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3) is reduced by $30x, the portion of the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC1 stock that is attributable under paragraph (d) of this section to the shares of FA stock distributed to DP. Thus, the amount DC is required to include in gross income as a dividend under § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3) is $0x ($30x less $30x).

(4) Under paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section, the basis of each portion is the product of DP's section 358 basis in the share of FA stock multiplied by the ratio of the section 362 basis of the property (CFC1 stock or CFC2 stock, as applicable) to which the portion relates, to the aggregate section 362 basis of all property (CFC1 stock and CFC2 stock) received by FA in the section 361 exchange. Under paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section, the fair market value of each portion is the product of the fair market value of the share of FA stock multiplied by the ratio of the fair market value of the property (CFC1 stock or CFC2 stock, as applicable) to which the portion relates, to the aggregate fair market value of all property (CFC1 stock and CFC2 stock) received by FA in the section 361 exchange. The section 362 basis of the CFC1 stock and CFC2 stock is $70x and $130x, respectively, for a total section 362 basis of $200x. The CFC1 stock and CFC2 stock each has a fair market value of $100x, for a total fair market value of $200x. Therefore, the portions attributable to the CFC1 stock have an aggregate basis of $63x ($180x multiplied by $70x/$200x) and fair market value of $100x ($200x multiplied by $100x/$200x), resulting in aggregate gain in such portions of $37x (or $.37x per portion in each of the 100 shares). The portions attributable to the CFC2 stock have an aggregate basis of $117x ($180x multiplied by $130x/$200x) and fair market value of $100x ($200x multiplied by $100x/$200x), resulting in aggregate losses in such portions of $17x (or $.17x per portion in each of the 100 shares).

(5) Under § 1.1248-8(b)(2)(iv), the $40x earnings and profits attributable to the single block of CFC1 stock are attributed to the portions of the 100 shares of FA stock that relate to the CFC1 stock. Similarly, the $80x of earnings and profits attributable to the single block of CFC2 stock are attributed to the portions of the 100 shares of the FA stock that relate to the CFC2 stock. Thus, DP's postdistribution amount (defined in § 1.1248(f)-1(c)(6)) with respect to the portions of the shares of FA attributable to the CFC1 stock is $37x, the lesser of the aggregate gain in the portions attributable to the CFC1 stock of $37x (computed in paragraph (ii)(C)(4) of this Example 2) and the $40x earnings and profits attributable to such portions. Furthermore, DP's postdistribution amount with respect to the portions of the shares of FA attributable to the CFC2 stock is $0x, the lesser of the aggregate gain in the portions attributable to the CFC2 stock of $0x (computed in paragraph (ii)(C)(4) of this Example 2 to be an aggregate loss of $17x) and the $80x earnings and profits attributable to such portions.

(6) Under paragraph (c)(3) of this section, DP's section 358 basis in the portions of the 100 shares of FA stock attributable to the CFC1 stock ($63x, computed in paragraph (ii)(C)(4) of this Example 2) is reduced by the amount (if any) by which the section 1248(f) amount attributable to such portions under paragraph (d) of this section ($30x, as computed in paragraph (ii)(C)(2) of this Example 2) exceeds DP's postdistribution amount with respect to such portions ($37x, computed in paragraph (ii)(C)(5) of this Example 2). Thus, there is no basis reduction in the portions of the 100 shares of FA stock attributable to the CFC1 stock. DP's section 358 basis in the portions of the 100 shares of FA stock attributable to the CFC2 stock is not reduced because the section 1248(f) amount attributable to such portions under paragraph (d) of this section is $0x (computed in paragraph (ii)(C)(2) of this Example 2), which equals DP's postdistribution amount with respect to such portions of $0x (as computed in paragraph (ii)(C)(5) of this Example 2).

Example 3. Combined existing stock distribution and new stock distribution under sections 355(c)(1) and 361(c)(1).

(i) Facts. DP owns all 100 outstanding shares of stock of DC. DP's DC stock has a $180x basis (each of the 100 shares having a basis of $18), $200x fair market value, and 2-year holding period. DC owns all 60 shares of the outstanding stock of CFC1; all such shares constitute a single block of stock. DC's CFC1 stock has a $50x basis, $60x fair market value, $30x of earnings and profits attributable to it for purposes of section 1248, a $10x section 1248 amount (computed as the lesser of $10x gain and $30x of section 1248 earnings and profits), and a 3-year holding period. DC also owns all 40 shares of the outstanding stock of CFC2; all such shares constitute a single block of stock. DC's CFC2 stock has a $30x basis, $40x fair market value, $20x of earnings and profits attributable to it for purposes of section 1248, and a $10x section 1248 amount (computed as the lesser of $10x gain and $20x of section 1248 earnings and profits). DC also owns Business A, which has a fair market value of $100x. On December 31, year 4, in a divisive reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(D), DC transfers the CFC2 stock to CFC1 in exchange for 40 shares of newly issued CFC1 stock. DC's transfer of the CFC2 stock to CFC1 qualifies as a section 361 exchange. DC then distributes the 100 shares of CFC1 stock (60 shares held prior to the transaction and 40 shares received in the section 361 exchange) to DP in a transaction that qualifies under section 355. DP properly files a gain recognition agreement with respect to the CFC2 stock that satisfies the conditions of §§ 1.367(a)-3(e)(6) and 1.367(a)-8. DP and DC properly make the elections provided in § 1.367(a)-7(c)(5) and paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section.

(ii) Result. (A) DC does not recognize gain under § 1.367(a)-3(e)(2) with respect to the transfer of the CFC2 stock to CFC1 because the three conditions in § 1.367(a)-3(e)(3)(i), (e)(3)(ii), and (e)(3)(iii) are satisfied. First, § 1.367(a)-3(e)(3)(i) is satisfied because the requirements of § 1.367(a)-7(c) are satisfied, including that an election is made to apply § 1.367(a)-7(c). Second, the requirements under § 1.367(a)-3(e)(3)(ii) related to transfers of domestic stock are not applicable because CFC2 is a foreign corporation. Third, because DC and DP own all the stock of CFC1 for purposes of satisfying the requirements of § 1.367(a)-3(e)(3)(iii), DP properly files a gain recognition agreement with respect to the CFC2 stock that satisfies the conditions of §§ 1.367(a)-3(e)(6) and 1.367(a)-8. See paragraph (ii)(G) of this example for the computation of the amount of gain subject to the gain recognition agreement. In addition, DC is not required to include in income as a dividend the $10x section 1248 amount with respect to the CFC2 stock under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(i) because immediately after DC's receipt of the CFC1 stock in the section 361 exchange but prior to, and without taking into account, DC's distribution of the CFC1 stock to DP, CFC1 and CFC2 are controlled foreign corporations as to which DC is a section 1248 shareholder. See § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(ii)(A).

(B) DC is not required to recognize gain under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2)(i) because DP, a control group member (as defined in § 1.367(a)-7(f)(1)), owns 100% of DC. DC is not required to recognize gain under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2)(ii) because the amount described in § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2)(ii)(A) ($10x) does not exceed the amount described in § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2)(ii)(B) ($40x). The $10x described in § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2)(ii)(A) equals the product of the inside gain (as defined in § 1.367(a)-7(f)) ($10x) multiplied by DP's ownership interest percentage (as defined in § 1.367(a)-7(f)) (100%), reduced by the sum of the amounts in § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2)(ii)(A)(1), (c)(2)(ii)(A)(2), and (c)(2)(ii)(A)(3) ($0x). Under § 1.367(a)-7(f)(5), the $10x of inside gain is the amount by which the aggregate fair market value of the section 367(a) property (CFC2 stock with a fair market value of $40x) exceeds the sum of the inside basis ($30x) of such property, and $0x (the product of the section 367(a) percentage (100%) multiplied by DC's deductible liabilities assumed by CFC1 ($0x)). Under § 1.367(a)-7(f)(4), the $30x inside basis equals the aggregate basis of the section 367(a) property transferred in the section 361 exchange ($30x), increased by any gain or deemed dividends recognized by DC with respect to the section 367(a) property under section 367 ($0x). The $40x described in § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2)(ii)(B) is the product of the section 367(a) percentage (100%) multiplied by the fair market value of the 40 shares of CFC1 stock received by DC in the section 361 exchange and distributed to DP ($40x).

(C) Under section 358, DP must allocate the $180x basis in its 100 shares of DC stock between the 100 shares of DC stock (fair market value of $100x) and the 100 shares of CFC1 stock (fair market value of $100x) held after the distribution based on the relative fair market values of the shares. Accordingly, after the allocation of the basis under section 358, but prior to the application of § 1.367(a)-7(c)(3), the basis of DP's DC stock is $90x and the basis of DP's CFC1 stock is $90x. With respect to the $90x basis in the 100 shares of CFC1 stock, $36x is attributable to the 40 shares of CFC1 stock received by DC in the section 361 exchange ($90x multiplied by 40/100), and $54x is attributable to the 60 shares of CFC1 stock owned by DC prior to the section 361 exchange ($90x multiplied by 60/100). See § 1.358-2(a)(2)(iv).

(D) Pursuant to § 1.367(a)-7(c)(3)(ii), any adjustment to DP's basis in the CFC1 stock required under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(3)(i) can only be made with respect to the 40 shares of CFC1 stock received by DC in the section 361 exchange. Under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(3)(i)(A), DP must reduce its section 358 basis ($36x) in the 40 shares of CFC1 stock by $6x, the amount by which DP's attributable inside gain ($10x), reduced by the sum of the amounts in § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2)(ii)(A)(1), (c)(2)(ii)(A)(2), and (c)(2)(ii)(A)(3) ($0x) (as computed in paragraph (ii)(B) of this Example 3) exceeds DP's outside gain (as defined in § 1.367(a)-7(f)) ($4x). DP's $4x outside gain equals the product of the section 367(a) percentage (as defined in § 1.367(a)-7(f)) (100%) multiplied by the amount by which the fair market value ($40x) of the 40 shares of CFC1 stock is greater than DP's section 358 basis in the stock ($36x). After the $6x reduction to stock basis required under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(3), but before the application of § 1.1248(f)-2(c)(3), DP's basis in the 40 shares of CFC1 stock is $30x.

(E) DC's distribution of the 40 shares of newly issued CFC1 stock is subject to § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3) (a new stock distribution). Except as provided in § 1.1248(f)-2(c), under § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3) DC must include in gross income as a dividend the total section 1248(f) amount (as defined in § 1.1248(f)-1(c)(14)). The total section 1248(f) amount is $10x, the sum of the section 1248(f) amount (as defined in § 1.1248(f)-1(c)(10)) with respect to the stock of each foreign corporation transferred in the section 361 exchange. Only the CFC2 stock is transferred in the section 361 exchange; therefore, the total section 1248(f) amount is equal to the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC2 stock ($10x). The $10x section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC2 stock is the amount that DC would have included in income as a deemed dividend under § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(i) with respect to the CFC2 stock if the requirements of § 1.367(b)-4(b)(1)(ii)(A) had not been satisfied ($10x), reduced by the amount of gain recognized by DC under § 1.367(a)-7(c)(2) allocable to the CFC2 stock and treated as a dividend under section 1248(a) (in this case, $0x, as described in paragraph (ii)(B) of this Example 3).

(F) However, because DC and DP (a section 1248 shareholder of CFC1 immediately after the distribution) elect to apply the provisions of § 1.1248(f)-2(c) (as provided in § 1.1248(f)-2(c)(1)), the amount that DC is required to include in income as a dividend under § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3) ($10x total section 1248(f) amount as computed in paragraph (ii)(E) of this Example 3) is reduced by the sum of the portions of the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC2 stock that is attributable (under the rules of § 1.1248(f)-2(d)) to the 40 shares of CFC1 stock distributed to DP. As stated in the facts, the election is made to apply § 1.1248(f)-2(c).

(1) Under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the portion of the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC2 stock that is attributed to the 40 shares of CFC1 stock distributed to DP is equal to DP's hypothetical section 1248 amount (as defined in § 1.1248(f)-1(c)(4)) with respect to the CFC2 stock. Because DP is the only shareholder of DC, DP's hypothetical section 1248 amount equals the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC2 stock ($10x). The $10x hypothetical section 1248 amount is attributed pro rata (based on relative values) among the 40 shares of CFC1 stock distributed to DP, and the attributable share amount (as defined in paragraph (d)(1) of this section) is $.25x.

(2) The 40 shares of CFC1 stock are not divided into portions under paragraph (c)(2) of this section because the only property transferred by DC to CFC1 is a single block of stock of CFC2. If the 40 shares of CFC1 stock were required to be divided into portions, however, the rules of paragraph (d)(2) of this section apply to attribute the attributable share amount ($.25x) to portions of shares of CFC1 stock distributed to DP.

(3) Because the election under paragraph (c)(1) of this section is made, the total section 1248(f) amount ($10x) that DC is otherwise required to include in gross income as a dividend under § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3) is reduced by $10x, the portion of the section 1248(f) amount with respect to the CFC2 stock that is attributable under paragraph (d) of this section to the 40 shares of CFC1 stock distributed to DP. Thus, the amount DC is required to include in gross income as a dividend under § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(3) is $0x ($30x less $30x).

(4) Under § 1.1248-8(b)(2)(iv), the $20x earnings and profits attributable to the single block of CFC2 stock are attributed pro rata to the 40 shares of CFC1 stock. Thus, DP's postdistribution amount (defined in § 1.1248(f)-1(c)(6)) with respect to the 40 shares of CFC1 stock attributable to the CFC2 stock is $10x, the lesser of the aggregate gain in the 40 shares of CFC1 stock of $10x ($40x fair market value, less $30x section 358 basis, as described in paragraph (ii)(D) of this Example 3) and the $20x earnings and profits attributable to such shares.

(5) Under paragraph (c)(3) of this section, DP's section 358 basis in the 40 shares of CFC1 stock ($30x) is reduced by the amount (if any) by which the section 1248(f) amount attributable to such shares under paragraph (d) of this section ($10x, as computed in paragraph (ii)(E) of this Example 3) exceeds DP's postdistribution amount with respect to such shares ($10x). Thus, there is no basis reduction in the 40 shares of CFC1 stock.

(G) Pursuant § 1.367(a)-3(e)(6), the amount of gain subject to the gain recognition agreement entered into by DP with respect to the CFC2 stock is $10x, which is the product of DP's ownership interest percentage (100%) multiplied by the gain realized by DC in the 361 exchange prior to taking into account the application of any other provision of section 367 ($10x), reduced by the sum of the amounts described in § 1.367(a)-3(e)(6)(i)(A), (e)(6)(i)(B), (e)(6)(i)(C), and (e)(6)(i)(D) ($0x).

(H) DC's distribution of the 60 shares of CFC1 stock it held before the section 361 exchange is subject to § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(2) (an existing stock distribution); however, because DC and DP make the election provided in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, § 1.1248(f)-1(b)(2) does not apply to the distribution.

(1) Under paragraph (b)(2) of this section, for purposes of section 1248, DP will have a 3-year holding period in the 60 shares of CFC1 stock received, the same holding period that DC had in the 60 shares of CFC1 stock.

(2) Under paragraph (b)(3) of this section, DP's section 358 basis in the 60 shares of CFC1 stock received ($54x, as computed in paragraph (ii)(C) of this Example 3) is reduced by $4x, the amount by which DC's section 1248 amount ($10x) with respect to the 60 shares of CFC1 stock exceeds DP's postdistribution amount ($6x) with respect to the 60 shares of CFC1 stock. Under § 1.1248(f)-1(c)(6), DP's postdistribution amount with respect to the 60 shares of CFC1 stock equals the amount that DP would include in gross income as a dividend under section 1248(a) if DP sold the 60 shares of CFC1 stock immediately after the distribution, or $6x, which is computed as the lesser of the $6x gain in the such shares of CFC1 stock ($60x fair market value, less $54x basis) and $30x of section 1248 earnings and profits attributable to the CFC1 stock, taking into account DP's 3-year holding period in the stock as required by paragraph (b)(2) of this section. As adjusted under paragraph (b)(3) of this section, DP's basis in the 60 shares of CFC1 stock is $50x ($54x basis, less $4x basis reduction).

(f) Applicable cross-references. For rules relating to the attribution of earnings and profits to the stock of a foreign corporation following certain nonrecognition transactions, see § 1.1248-8. For rules relating to a transfer of property by a domestic corporation to a foreign corporation in a section 361 exchange that precedes a new stock distribution, see § 1.367(a)-7. If the property transferred includes stock of a corporation, see also §§ 1.367(a)-3(e) and 1.367(b)-4. For other rules that may apply if a domestic corporation distributes the stock of a foreign corporation in a new stock distribution or an existing stock distribution satisfying the requirements of section 355, see §§ 1.367(b)-5(b)(1) and 1.367(e)-1.

[T.D. 9614, 78 FR 17044, Mar. 19, 2013, as amended by T.D. 9760, 81 FR 15169, Mar. 22, 2016; T.D. 9803, 81 FR 91031, Dec. 16, 2016]

§ 1.1248(f)-3 Reasonable cause and effective/applicability dates.

(a) Reasonable cause for failure to comply

(1) Request for relief. If an 80-percent distributee, a distributee that is a section 1248 shareholder, or the domestic distributing corporation (reporting person) fails to timely comply with any requirement under § 1.1248(f)-2, the failure shall be deemed not to have occurred if the reporting person is able to demonstrate that the failure was due to reasonable cause and not willful neglect using the procedure set forth in paragraph (a)(2) of this section. Whether the failure to timely comply was due to reasonable cause and not willful neglect will be determined by the Director of Field Operations, Cross Border Activities Practice Area of Large Business & International (Director) based on all the facts and circumstances.

(2) Procedures for establishing that a failure to timely comply was due to reasonable cause and not willful neglect

(i) Time of submission. A reporting person's statement that the failure to timely comply was due to reasonable cause and not willful neglect will be considered only if, promptly after the reporting person becomes aware of the failure, an amended return is filed for the taxable year to which the failure relates that includes the information that should have been included with the original return for such taxable year or that otherwise complies with the rules of this section, and that includes a written statement explaining the reasons for the failure to timely comply.

(ii) Notice requirement. In addition to the requirements of paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section, the reporting person must comply with the notice requirements of this paragraph (a)(2)(ii). If any taxable year of the reporting person is under examination when the amended return is filed, a copy of the amended return and any information required to be included with such return must be delivered to the Internal Revenue Service personnel conducting the examination. If no taxable year of the reporting person is under examination when the amended return is filed, a copy of the amended return and any information required to be included with such return must be delivered to the Director.

(b) Effective/applicability date

(1) General rule. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, §§ 1.1248(f)-1 and 1.1248(f)-2 apply to distributions occurring on or after April 18, 2013. The provisions of § 1.1248(f)-3(a) apply to distributions occurring on or after April 17, 2013.

(2) Transactions described in Notice 87-64

(i) Gain not otherwise recognized. For distributions occurring on or after September 21, 1987, and before April 18, 2013, section 1248(f)(1) shall not apply to the extent the domestic distributing corporation recognizes gain with respect to the stock of the foreign distributed corporation as a result of the distribution under another provision of subtitle A of the Internal Revenue Code.

(ii) Section 355 distributions. Taxpayers may apply the provisions of § 1.1248(f)-2(b) to distributions occurring on or after September 21, 1987.

[T.D. 9614, 78 FR 17050, Mar. 19, 2013, as amended by T.D. 9760, 81 FR 15169, Mar. 22, 2016]

§ 1.1249-1 Gain from certain sales or exchanges of patents, etc., to foreign corporations.

(a) General rule. Section 1249 provides that if gain is recognized from the sale or exchange after December 31, 1962, of a patent, an invention, model, or design (whether or not patented), a copyright, a secret formula or process, or any other similar property right (not including property such as goodwill, a trademark, or a trade brand) to any foreign corporation by any United States person (as defined in section 7701(a)(30)) which controls such foreign corporation, and if such gain would (but for the provisions of section 1249) be gain from the sale or exchange of a capital asset or of property described in section 1231, then such gain shall be considered as gain from the sale or exchange of property which is neither a capital asset nor property described in section 1231. Section 1249 applies only to gain recognized in taxable years beginning after December 31, 1962.

(b) Control. For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, the term control means, with respect to any foreign corporation, the ownership, directly or indirectly, of stock possessing more than 50 percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the rules for determining ownership of stock provided by section 958 (a) and (b), and the principles for determining percentage of total combined voting power owned by United States shareholders provided by paragraphs (b) and

(c) of § 1.957-1, shall apply.

[T.D. 6765, 29 FR 14879, Nov. 3, 1964]

§ 1.1250-1 Gain from dispositions of certain depreciable realty.

(a) Dispositions after December 31, 1969

(1) Ordinary income.

(i) In general, section 1250(a)(1) provides that, upon a disposition of an item of section 1250 property after December 31, 1969, the applicable percentage of the lower of:

(a) The additional depreciation (as defined in § 1.1250-2) attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 in respect of the property, or

(b) The excess of the amount realized on a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion (or the fair market value of the property on any other disposition) over the adjusted basis of the property,

Shall be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property which is neither a capital asset nor property described in section 1231 (that is, shall be recognized as ordinary income). The amount of such gain shall be determined separately for each item (see subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph) of section 1250 property. If the amount determined under (b) of this subdivision exceeds the amount determined under (a) of this subdivision, then such excess shall be treated as provided in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph. For relation of section 1250 to other provisions, see paragraph (c) of this section.

(ii) If the amount determined under subdivision (i)(b) of this subparagraph exceeds the amount determined under subdivision (i)(a) of this subparagraph, then the applicable percentage of the lower of:

(a) The additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, or

(b) Such excess,

shall also be recognized as ordinary income.

(iii) If gain would be recognized upon a disposition of an item of section 1250 property under subdivisions (i) and (ii) of this subparagraph, and if section 1250(d) applies, then the gain recognized shall be considered as recognized first under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph. (See example (3)(i) of paragraph (c)(4) of § 1.1250-3.)

(2) Meaning of terms.

(i) For purposes of section 1250, the term disposition shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1245-1. Section 1250 property is, in general, depreciable real property other than section 1245 property. See paragraph (e) of this section. See paragraph (d)(1) of this section for meaning of the term applicable percentage. If, however, the property is considered to have two or more elements with separate periods (for example, because units thereof are placed in service on different dates, improvements are made to the property, or because of the application of paragraph (h) of § 1.1250-3), see the special rules of § 1.1250-5.

(ii) For purposes of applying section 1250, the facts and circumstances of each disposition shall be considered in determining what is the appropriate item of section 1250 property. In general, a building is an item of section 1250 property, but in an appropriate case more than one building may be treated as a single item. For example, if two or more buildings or structures on a single tract or parcel (or contiguous tracts or parcels) of land are operated as an integrated unit (as evidenced by their actual operation, management, financing, and accounting), they may be treated as a single item of section 1250 property. For the manner of determining whether an expenditure shall be treated as an addition to capital account of an item of section 1250 property or as a separate item of section 1250 property, see paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of § 1.1250-5.

(3) Sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion after December 31, 1969.

(i) In the case of a disposition of section 1250 property by a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion after December 31, 1969, the gain to which section 1250(a)(1) applies is the applicable percentage for the property (determined under paragraph (d)(1) of this section) multiplied by the lower of (a) the additional depreciation in respect of the property attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, or (b) the excess (referred to as gain realized) of the amount realized over the adjusted basis of the property.

(ii) In addition to gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1) and subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, gain may also be recognized under section 1250(a)(2) and this subdivision if the gain realized exceeds the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969. In such a case, the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a)(2) and this subdivision is the applicable percentage for the property (determined under paragraph (d)(2) of this section) multiplied by the lower of (a) the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, or (b) the excess (referred to as remaining gain) of the gain realized over the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969.

(iii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Section 1250 property which has an adjusted basis of $500,000 is sold for $650,000 after December 31, 1969, and thus the gain realized is $150,000. At the time of the sale the additional depreciation in respect of the property attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, is $190,000 and the applicable percentage is 100 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(e) of this section). Since the gain realized ($150,000), is lower than the additional depreciation ($190,000), the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(1) is $150,000 (that is, 100 percent of $150,000). No gain is recognized under section 1250(a)(2).

Example 2. Section 1250 property which has an adjusted basis of $440,000 is sold for $500,000 on December 31, 1974, and thus the gain realized is $60,000. The property was acquired on March 31, 1966. At the time of the sale, the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, is $20,000, and the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, is $60,000. The property qualified as residential rental property for each taxable year ending after December 31, 1969, and the applicable percentage is 95 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(c) of this section). The applicable percentage under paragraph (d)(2) of this section is 15 percent. Since the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 ($20,000), is lower than the gain realized ($60,000), the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(1) is $19,000 (that is, 95 percent of $20,000). In addition, gain is recognized under section 1250(a)(2) since there is remaining gain of $40,000 (that is, the gain realized ($60,000) minus the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 ($20,000)). Since the remaining gain of $40,000 is lower than the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970 ($60,000), the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2) is $6,000 (that is, 15 percent of $40,000). The remaining $35,000 (that is, gain realized $60,000, minus gain recognized under section 1250(a), $25,000) of the gain may be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231.

(4) Other dispositions after December 31, 1969.

(i) In the case of a disposition of section 1250 property after December 31, 1969, other than by way of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion, the gain to which section 1250(a)(1) applies is the applicable percentage for the property (determined under paragraph (d)(1) of this section) multiplied by the lower of (a) the additional depreciation in respect of the property attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, or (b) the excess (referred to as potential gain) of the fair market value of the property over its adjusted basis. In addition, if the potential gain exceeds the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, then the gain to which section 1250(a)(2) applies is the applicable percentage for the property (determined under paragraph (d)(2) of this section) multiplied by the lower of (c) the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, or (d) the excess (referred to as remaining potential gain) of the potential gain over the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969. If property is transferred by a corporation to a shareholder for an amount less than its fair market value in a sale or exchange, for purposes of applying section 1250 such transfer shall be treated as a disposition other than by way of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion.

(ii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Section 1250 property having an adjusted basis of $500,000 and a fair market value of $550,000 is distributed by a corporation to a stockholder in complete liquidation of the corporation after December 31, 1969, and thus the potential gain is $50,000. At the time of the liquidation, the additional depreciation for the property attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, is $80,000 and the applicable percentage is 100 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(e) of this section). Since the potential gain of $50,000 is lower than the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 ($80,000), the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(1) is $50,000 (that is, 100 percent of $50,000) even though in the absence of section 1250, section 336 would preclude recognition of gain to the corporation.

Example 2. The facts are the same as in example (1) except that the fair market value of the property is $650,000, and thus the potential gain is $150,000. Since the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 ($80,000), is lower than the potential gain of $150,000, the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(1) is $80,000 (that is, 100 percent of $80,000). In addition, section 1250(a)(2) applies since there is remaining potential gain of $70,000, that is, potential gain ($150,000) minus additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 ($80,000). The additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, is $90,000 and the applicable percentage under paragraph (d)(2) of this section is 50 percent. Since the remaining potential gain of $70,000 is lower than the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970 ($90,000), the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2) is $35,000 (that is, 50 percent of $70,000). Thus under section 1250(a), $115,000 (that is, $80,000 under section 1250(a)(1), plus $35,000 under section 1250(a)(2)) is recognized as ordinary income, even though in the absence of section 1250, section 336 would preclude recognition of gain to the corporation.

(5) Instances of nonapplication.

(i) Section 1250(a)(1) does not apply to losses. Thus, section 1250(a)(1) does not apply if a loss is realized upon a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of property, all of which is considered section 1250 property, nor does the section apply to a disposition of such property other than by way of sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion if at the time of the disposition the fair market value of such property is not greater than its adjusted basis.

(ii) In general, in the case of section 1250 property with a holding period under section 1223 of more than 1 year, section 1250(a)(1) does not apply if for periods after December 31, 1969, there are no depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line (as computed under section 1250(b) and paragraph (b) of § 1.1250-2).

(6) Allocation rules.

(i) In the case of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of section 1250 property and nonsection 1250 property in one transaction after December 31, 1969, the total amount realized upon the disposition shall be allocated between the section 1250 property and the other property in proportion to their respective fair market values. Such allocation shall be made in accordance with the principles set forth in paragraph (a)(5) of § 1.1245-1 (relating to allocation between section 1245 property and nonsection 1245 property).

(ii) If an item of section 1250 property has two (or more) applicable percentages because one subdivision of paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section applies to one portion of the taxpayer's holding period (determined under § 1.1250-4) and another subdivision of such paragraph applies with respect to another such portion, then the gain realized on a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion, or the potential gain in the case of any other disposition, shall be allocated to each such portion of the taxpayer's holding period after December 31, 1969, in the same proportion as the additional depreciation with respect to such item for such portion bears to the additional depreciation with respect to such item for the entire holding period after December 31, 1969.

(b) Dispositions before January 1, 1970

(1) Ordinary income. In general, section 1250(a)(2) provides that, upon a disposition of an item of section 1250 property after December 31, 1963, and before January 1, 1970, the applicable percentage of the lower of:

(i) The additional depreciation (as defined in § 1.1250-2) attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, in respect of the property, or

(ii) The excess of the amount realized on a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion (or the fair market value of the property on any other disposition) over the adjusted basis of the property,

shall be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property which is neither a capital asset nor property described in section 1231 (that is, shall be recognized as ordinary income). The amount of such gain shall be determined separately for each item (see subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph) of section 1250 property. For relation of section 1250 to other provisions, see paragraph (c) of this section.

(2) Meaning of terms.

(i) For purposes of section 1250, the term disposition shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1245-1. Section 1250 property is, in general, depreciable real property other than section 1245 property. See paragraph (e) of this section. For purposes of this paragraph, the term applicable percentage means 100 percent minus 1 percentage point for each full month the property was held after the date on which the property was held 20 full months. See paragraph (d)(2) of this section. If, however, the property is considered to have two or more elements with separate holding periods (for example, because units thereof are placed in service on different dates, or improvements are made to the property), see the special rules of § 1.1250-5.

(ii) For purposes of applying section 1250, the facts and circumstances of each disposition shall be considered in determining what is the appropriate item of section 1250 property. In general, a building is an item of section 1250 property, but in an appropriate case more than one building may be treated as a single item. For manner of determining whether an expenditure shall be treated as an addition to the capital account of an item of section 1250 property or as a separate item of section 1250 property, see paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of § 1.1250-5.

(3) Sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion before January 1, 1970.

(i) In the case of a disposition of section 1250 property by a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion before January 1, 1970, the gain to which section 1250(a)(2) applies is the applicable percentage for the property multiplied by the lower of (a) the additional depreciation in respect of the property or (b) the excess (referred to as gain realized) of the amount realized over the adjusted basis of the property.

(ii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Section 1250 property, which has an adjusted basis of $200,000, is sold for $290,000 before January 1, 1970. At the time of the sale the additional depreciation in respect of the property is $130,000 and the applicable percentage is 60 percent. Since the gain realized ($90,000, that is, amount realized, $290,000, minus adjusted basis, $200,000) is lower than the additional depreciation ($130,000), the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2) is $54,000 (that is, 60 percent of $90,000). The remaining $36,000 ($90,000 minus $54,000) of the gain may be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231.

(4) Other dispositions before January 1, 1970.

(i) In the case of a disposition of section 1250 property before January 1, 1970, other than by way of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion, the gain to which section 1250(a)(2) applies is the applicable percentage for the property multiplied by the lower of (a) the additional depreciation in respect of the property, or (b) the excess (referred to as potential gain) of the fair market value of the property on the date of disposition over its adjusted basis. If property is transferred by a corporation to a shareholder for an amount less than its fair market value in a sale or exchange, for purposes of applying section 1250 such transfer shall be treated as a disposition other than by way of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion.

(ii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Assume the same facts as in the example in subparagraph (3)(ii) of this paragraph except that the property is distributed by a corporation to a stockholder before January 1, 1970, in complete liquidation of the corporation, and that at the time of the distribution the fair market value of the property is $370,000. Since the additional depreciation ($130,000) is lower than the potential gain of $170,000 (that is, fair market value, $370,000, minus adjusted basis, $200,000), the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2) is $78,000 (that is, 60 percent of $130,000) even though, in the absence of section 1250, section 336 would preclude recognition of gain to the corporation.

(5) Instances of nonapplication.

(i) Section 1250(a)(2) does not apply to losses. Thus, section 1250(a)(2) does not apply if a loss is realized upon a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of property, all of which is considered section 1250 property, nor does the section apply to a disposition of such property other than by way of sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion if at the time of the disposition the fair market value of such property is not greater than its adjusted basis.

(ii) In general, in the case of section 1250 property with a holding period under section 1223 of more than one year, section 1250(a)(2) does not apply if for periods after December 1, 1963, there are no depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line (as computed under section 1250(b) and paragraph (b) of § 1.1250-2).

(iii) In a case in which section 1250 property (including each element thereof, if any) has a holding period under § 1.1250-4 (or paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of § 1.1250-5) of at least 10 years, section 1250(a)(2) does not apply. If within the 10-year period preceding the date the property is disposed of, an element is added to the property by reason, for example, of an addition to capital account, see § 1.1250-5.

(6) Allocation rule. In the case of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of section 1250 property and nonsection 1250 property in one transaction before January 1, 1970, the total amount realized upon the disposition shall be allocated between the section 1250 property and the other property in proportion to their respective fair market values. Such allocation shall be made in accordance with the principles set forth in paragraph (a)(5) of § 1.1245-1 (relating to allocation between section 1245 property and nonsection 1245 property).

(c) Relation of section 1250 to other provisions

(1) General. The provisions of section 1250 apply notwithstanding any other provision of subtitle A of the Code. See section 1250(i). Thus, unless an exception or limitation under section 1250(d) and § 1.1250-3 applies, gain under section 1250(a) is recognized notwithstanding any contrary nonrecognition provision or income characterizing provision. For example, since section 1250 overrides section 1231 (relating to property used in the trade or business), the gain recognized under section 1250(a) upon a disposition will be treated as ordinary income and only the remaining gain, if any, from the disposition may be considered as gain from the sale or exchange of a capital asset if section 1231 is applicable. See the example in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section.

(2) Nonrecognition sections overridden. The nonrecognition provisions of subtitle A of the Code which section 1250 overrides include, but are not limited to, sections 267(d), 311(a), 336, 337, 501(a), and 512(b)(5). See section 1250(d) for the extent to which section 1250(a) overrides sections 332, 351, 361, 371(a), 374(a), 721, 731, 1031, 1033, 1039, 1071, and 1081 (b)(1) and (d)(1)(A). For amount of additional depreciation in respect of property disposed of by an organization exempt from income taxes (within the meaning of section 501(a)), see paragraph (d)(6) of § 1.1250-2.

(3) Exempt income. The fact that section 1250 provides for recognition of gain as ordinary income does not change into taxable income any income which is exempt under section 115 (relating to income of States, etc.), 892 (relating to income of foreign governments), or 894 (relating to income exempt under treaties).

(4) Treatment of gain not recognized under section 1250. Section 1250 does not prevent gain which is not recognized under section 1250 from being considered as gain under another provision of the Code, such as, for example, section 1239 (relating to gain from sale of depreciable property between certain related persons). Thus, for example, if section 1250 property which has an adjusted basis of $10,000 is sold for $17,500 in a transaction to which section 1239 applies, and if $5,000 of the gain would be recognized under section 1250(a) then the remaining $2,500 of the gain would be treated as ordinary income under section 1239.

(5) Normal retirement of asset in multiple asset account. Section 1250(a) does not require recognition of gain upon normal retirements of section 1250 property in a multiple asset account as long as the taxpayer's method of accounting, as described in paragraph (e)(2) of § 1.167(a)-8 (relating to accounting treatment of asset retirements), does not require recognition of such gain.

(6) Installment method. Gain from a disposition to which section 1250(a) applies may be reported under the installment method if such method is otherwise available under section 453 of the Code. In such case, the income (other than interest) on each installment payment shall be deemed to consist of gain to which section 1250(a) applies until all such gain has been reported, and the remaining portion (if any) of such income shall be deemed to consist of other gain. For treatment of amounts as interest on certain deferred payments, see section 483.

(d) Applicable percentage

(1) Definition for purposes of section 1250(a)(1).

(i) For purposes of section 1250(a)(1), the term applicable percentage means:

(a) In the case of property disposed of pursuant to a written contract which was, on July 24, 1969, and at all times thereafter binding on the owner of the property, 100 percent minus 1 percentage point for each full month the property was held after the date on which the property was held 20 full months;

(b) In the case of property constructed, reconstructed, or acquired by the taxpayer before January 1, 1975, with respect to which a mortgage is insured under section 221(d)(3) or 236 of the National Housing Act, or housing is financed or assisted by direct loan or tax abatement under similar provisions of State or local laws, and with respect to which the owner is subject to the restrictions described in section 1039(b)(1)(B) (relating to approved dispositions of certain Government-assisted housing projects), 100 percent minus 1 percentage point for each full month of the taxpayer's holding period for the property (determined under § 1.1250-4) during which the property qualified under this sentence, beginning after the date on which the property so qualified for 20 full months.

(c) In the case of residential rental property (as defined in section 167(j)(2)(B)) other than that covered by (a) and (b) of this subdivision, 100 percent minus 1 percentage point for each full month of the taxpayer's holding period for the property (determined under § 1.1250-4) included within a taxable year for which the property qualified as residential rental property, beginning after the date on which the property so qualified for 100 full months.

(d) In the case of property with respect to which a deduction was allowed under section 167(k) (relating to the depreciation of expenditures to rehabilitate low-income rental housing), 100 percent minus 1 percentage point for each full month of the taxpayer's holding period (determined under § 1.1250-4) beginning 100 full months after the date on which the property was placed in service.

(e) In the case of all other property, 100 percent.

The provisions of (a), (b), and (c) of this subdivision shall not apply with respect to additional depreciation described in section 1250(b)(4). If the taxpayer's holding period under § 1.1250-4 includes a period before January 1, 1970, such period shall be taken into account in applying each provision of this subdivision.

(ii) A single item of property may have two (or more) applicable percentages under the provisions of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph. For example, if the provision of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph which applies to an item of section 1250 property (or to an element of such property if the property is treated as consisting of more than one element under § 1.1250-5) in the taxable year in which the item (or element) is disposed of did not apply to the item (or element) in a prior taxable year which is included within the taxpayer's holding period under § 1.1250-4 and which ends after December 31, 1969, then each provision of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph shall apply only for the period during which the property qualified under such provision.

(iii) If the taxpayer makes rehabilitation expenditures and elects to compute depreciation under section 167(k) with respect to the property attributable to the rehabilitation expenditures, such property will generally constitute a separate improvement under paragraph (c) of § 1.1250-5 and therefore will constitute an element of section 1250 property. For computation of applicable percentage and gain recognized under section 1250(a) in such a case, see paragraph (a) of § 1.1250-5.

(iv) The principles of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Section 1250 property is sold on December 31, 1970, pursuant to a written contract which was binding on the owner of the property on July 24, 1969, and at all times thereafter. The property was acquired on July 31, 1968. The applicable percentage for the property under subdivision (i)(a) of this subparagraph is 91 percent, since the property was held 29 full months.

Example 2. Section 1250 property is sold on June 30, 1978. The property was acquired by a calendar year taxpayer on June 30, 1966. Subdivision (i)(e) of this subparagraph applies to the property in 1977 and 1978. However, subdivision (i)(c) of this subparagraph applied to the property for the taxable years of 1970 through 1976. Thus, the property has two applicable percentages under this subparagraph. The period before January 1, 1970 (42 full months), and the period from 1970 through 1976 (84 full months) are both taken into account in determining the applicable percentage under subdivision (i)(c) of this subparagraph. Thus, the applicable percentage is 74 percent (that is, 100 percent minus the excess of the holding period taken into account (126 full months) over 100 full months). The applicable percentage for the years 1977 and 1978 is 100 percent under subdivision (i)(e) of this subparagraph.

Example 3. Section 1250 property is sold on December 31, 1978. The property was acquired by a calendar year taxpayer on December 31, 1969. The taxpayer made rehabilitation expenditures in 1973 and properly elected to compute depreciation under section 167(k) on the property attributable to the expenditures for the 60-month period beginning on January 1, 1974, the date such property was placed in service. Subdivision (i)(c) applies to the property (other than the property with respect to which a deduction was allowed under section 167(k)) for the taxable years of 1970 through 1978 (108 full months) and the applicable percentage for such property is 92 percent. The applicable percentage for the property with respect to which a deduction under section 167(k) was allowed is 100 percent under subdivision (i)(d) of this subparagraph, since the holding period for purposes of such subdivision begins on the date such property is placed in service.

Example 4. Section 1250 property is sold by a calendar year taxpayer on March 31, 1974. The property was transferred to the taxpayer by gift on December 31, 1970, and under section 1250(e)(2), the taxpayer's holding period for the property for purposes of computing the applicable percentage includes the transferor's holding period of 80 full months. Subdivision (i)(c) of this subparagraph applies to the property in the years 1970 through 1974. The applicable percentage under subdivision (i) (c) of this subparagraph is 81 percent, since the period before January 1, 1970 (68 full months), and that portion of the period after December 31, 1969, during which such subdivision applied (51 full months) are taken into account.

(2) Definition for purposes of section 1250(a)(2). For purposes of section 1250(a)(2), the term applicable percentage means:

(i) In case of property with a holding period of 20 full months or less, 100 percent;

(ii) In case of property with a holding period of more than 20 full months but less than 10 years, 100 percent minus 1 percentage point for each full month the property is held after the date on which the property is held 20 full months; and

(iii) In case of property with a holding period of at least 10 years, zero.

(3) Holding period. For purposes of this paragraph, the holding period of property shall be determined under the rules of § 1.1250-4, and not under the rules of section 1223, notwithstanding that the property was acquired on or before December 31, 1963. In the case of a disposition of section 1250 property which consists of 2 or more elements (within the meaning of paragraph (c) of § 1.1250-5), the holding period for each element shall be determined under the rules of paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of § 1.1250-5.

(4) Full month. For purposes of this paragraph, the term full month (or full months) means the period beginning on a date in 1 month and terminating on the date before the corresponding date in the next succeeding month (or in another succeeding month), or, if a particular succeeding month does not have such a corresponding date, terminating on the last day of such particular succeeding month.

(5) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Property is purchased on January 17, 1959. Under paragraph (b)(1) of § 1.1250-4, its holding period begins on January 18, 1959, and thus at any time during the period beginning on October 17, 1960, and ending on November 16, 1960, the property is considered held 21 full months and has an applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) of 99 percent. On and after January 17, 1969, the property has a holding period of at least 120 full months (10 years) and, therefore, the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) for the property is zero. Accordingly, no gain would be recognized under section 1250(a)(2) upon disposition of the property. If, however, the property consists of two or more elements, see the special rules of § 1.1250-5.

Example 2. Property is purchased on January 31, 1968. Under paragraph (b)(1) of § 1.1250-4 its holding period begins on February 1, 1968, and thus at any time during the period beginning on February 29, 1968, and ending on March 30, 1968, the property is considered held 1 full month. At any time during the period beginning on March 31, 1970, and ending on April 29, 1970, the property is considered held 26 full months. At any time during the period beginning on April 30, 1970, and ending on May 30, 1970, the property is considered held 27 full months.

(e) Section 1250 property

(1) Definition. The term section 1250 property means any real property (other than section 1245 property, as defined in section 1245(a)(3) and § 1.1245-3) which is or has been property of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation provided in section 167. See section 1250(c).

(2) Character of property. For purposes of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, the term is or has been property of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation provided in section 167 shall have the same meaning as when used in paragraph (a) (1) and (3) of § 1.1245-3. Thus, if a father uses a house in his trade or business during a period after December 31, 1963, and then gives the house to his son as a gift for the son's personal use, the house is section 1250 property in the hands of the son. For exception to the application of section 1250(a) upon disposition of a principal residence, see section 1250(d)(7).

(3) Real property.

(i) For purposes of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, the term real property means any property which is not personal property within the meaning of paragraph (b) of § 1.1245-3. The term section 1250 property includes three types of depreciable real property. The first type is intangible real property. For purposes of this paragraph, a leasehold of land or of section 1250 property is intangible real property, and accordingly such a leasehold is section 1250 property. However, a fee simple interest in land is not depreciable, and therefore is not section 1250 property. The second type is a building or its structural components within the meaning of paragraph (c) of § 1.1245-3. The third type is all other tangible real property except (a) property described in section 1245(a)(3)(B) as defined in paragraph (c)(1) of § 1.1245-3 (relating to property used as an integral part of a specified activity or as a specified facility), and (b) property described in section 1245(a)(3)(D). An elevator or escalator (within the meaning of section 1245(a)(3)(C)) is not section 1250 property.

(ii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: A owns and leases to B for a single lump-sum payment of $100,000 property consisting of land and a fully equipped factory building thereon. If 30 percent of the fair market value of such property is properly allocable to the land, 25 percent to section 1250 property (the building and its structural components), and 45 percent to section 1245 property (the equipment), then 55 percent of B's leasehold is section 1250 property.

(4) Coordination with definition of section 1245 property. (i) Property may lose its character as section 1250 property and become section 1245 property. Thus, for example, if section 1250 property of the third type described in subparagraph (3)(i)(a) of this paragraph is converted to use as an integral part of manufacturing, the property would lose its character as section 1250 property and would become section 1245 property. However, once property in the hands of a taxpayer is section 1245 property, it can never become section 1250 property in the hands of such taxpayer. See also paragraph (a) (4) and

(5) of § 1.1245-2.

(f) Treatment of partnerships and partners. If a partnership disposes of section 1250 property, the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a) by the partnership and by a partner shall be determined in a manner consistent with the principles provided in paragraph (e) of § 1.1245-1. Thus, for example, a partner's distributive share of gain recognized by the partnership under section 1250(a) shall be determined in the same manner as his distributive share of gain recognized by the partnership under section 1245(a)(1) is determined, and, if required, additional depreciation in respect of section 1250 property shall be allocated to the partner in the same manner as the adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of section 1245 property are allocated to the partner. For a further example, if on the date a partner acquires his partnership interest by way of a sale or exchange the partnership owns section 1250 property and an election under section 754 (relating to optional adjustment to basis of partnership property) is in effect with respect to the partnership, then such partner's additional depreciation in respect of such property on such date is deemed to be zero. For limitation on the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a) in respect of a partnership and for the amount of additional depreciation in respect of partnership property after certain transactions, see paragraph (f) of § 1.1250-3. For treatment of section 1250 property as an unrealized receivable, see section 751(c).

(g) Examples. The principles of this section may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Section 1250 property which has an adjusted basis of $350,000 is sold for $630,000 on December 31, 1984. The property was acquired by a calendar year taxpayer on December 31, 1969. For the taxable years from 1970 through 1980, the property qualified as residential rental property and the applicable percentage for those years is 68 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(c) of this section). For taxable years from 1981 through 1984, the property did not qualify as residential rental property and the applicable percentage for those years is 100 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(e) of this section). The additional depreciation for the years from 1970 through 1980 is $120,000. The additional depreciation for the years from 1981 through 1984 is $20,000. The gain realized is $280,000 (that is, amount realized, $630,000, minus adjusted basis $350,000). The gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(1) is computed in two steps. First, since the additional depreciation attributable to the years 1970 through 1980 ($120,000) is lower than the gain realized attributable to such years determined under paragraph (a)(6) of this section ($240,000, that is, gain realized, $280,000, multiplied by 1214), the gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(1) in the first step is $81,600, that is, 68 percent of $120,000. Second, since the additional depreciation attributable to the years 1981 through 1984 ($20,000) is lower than the gain realized attributable to those years ($40,000, that is, gain realized, $280,000, multiplied by 214), the gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(1) for the years from 1981 through 1984 is $20,000 (that is, 100 percent of $20,000). The total gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1) is $101,600 (that is, $81,600 plus $20,000).

Example 2. Section 1250 property which has an adjusted basis of $400,000 is sold for $472,000 on December 31, 1978. The property was acquired on December 31, 1966. The additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, is $40,000 and the applicable percentage under paragraph (d)(2) of this section is zero percent. The property qualifies as residential rental property for the years 1970 through 1976, but fails to qualify for 1977 and 1978. Under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the applicable percentage for the years 1970 through 1976 is 80 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(c) of this section), and the applicable percentage for the years 1977 and 1978 is 100 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(e) of this section). The additional depreciation attributable to the years 1970 through 1976 is $50,000, and the additional depreciation attributable to the years 1977 and 1978 is $10,000. The gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(1) is computed in two steps. First, since the additional depreciation attributable to the years 1970 through 1976 ($50,000) is lower than the gain realized attributable to such years ($60,000, that is, $72,000 multiplied by 56), the gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1) in the first step is $40,000 (that is, 80 percent of $50,000). Second, since the additional depreciation attributable to 1977 and 1978 ($10,000) is lower than the gain realized attributable to such years ($12,000, that is, $72,000 multiplied by 16), the gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1) in the second step is $10,000 (that is, 100 percent of $10,000). In addition, section 1250(a)(2) applies. However, since the applicable percentage is zero percent, none of the gain is recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2). Thus, the remaining $22,000 (that is, gain realized, $72,000, minus gain recognized under section 1250(a), $50,000) of the gain may be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231.

Example 3. The facts are the same as in example (2) except that the property is disposed of on December 31, 1980. The property qualifies as residential rental property for the years 1979 and 1980. Thus, the applicable percentage for years 1970 through 1976, 1979, and 1980 is 56 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(c) of this section). The applicable percentage for the years 1977 and 1978 is 100 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(e) of this section). The additional depreciation for the years 1979 and 1980 is $8,000. The gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1) is computed in two steps. First, since the additional depreciation attributable to the years 1970 through 1976, 1979, and 1980 ($58,000) is lower than the gain realized attributable to such years ($61,412, that is, $72,000 multiplied by $58,000/$68,000), the gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1) in the first step is $32,480 (that is, 56 percent of $58,000). Second, since the additional depreciation attributable to 1977 and 1978 ($10,000) is lower than the gain realized attributable to such years ($10,588, that is, $72,000 multiplied by $10,000/$68,000) the gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1) in the second step is $10,000 (that is, 100 percent of $10,000). In addition section 1250(a)(2) applies. However, since the applicable percentage is zero percent, none of the gain is recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2). Thus, the remaining $29,520 (that is, gain realized, $72,000, minus gain recognized under section 1250(a), $42,480) of the gain may be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231.

[T.D. 7084, 36 FR 271, Jan. 8, 1971, as amended by T.D. 7193, 37 FR 12953, June 30, 1972]

§ 1.1250-2 Additional depreciation defined.

(a) In general

(1) Definition for purposes of section 1250(b)(1). Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (e) of this section, for purposes of section 1250(b)(1), the term additional depreciation means:

(i) In the case of property which at the time of disposition has a holding period under section 1223 of not more than 1 year, the depreciation adjustments (as defined in paragraph (d) of this section) in respect of such property for periods after December 31, 1963, and

(ii) In the case of property which at the time of disposition has a holding period under section 1223 of more than 1 year, the depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line for periods after December 31, 1963, computed under paragraph (b)(1) of this section.

(2) Definition for purposes of section 1250(b)(4). Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (e) of this section, for purposes of section 1250(b)(4), the term additional depreciation means:

(i) In the case of property with respect to which a deduction under section 167(k) (relating to depreciation of expenditures to rehabilitate low-income rental housing) was allowed, which at the time of disposition has a holding period under section 1223 of not more than 1 year from the time the rehabilitation expenditures were incurred, the depreciation adjustments (as defined in paragraph (d) of this section) in respect of the property, and

(ii) In the case of property with respect to which a deduction under section 167(k) (relating to depreciation of expenditures to rehabilitate low-income rental housing) was allowed, which at the time of disposition has a holding period under section 1223 of more than 1 year from the time the rehabilitation expenditures were incurred, the depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line for the property, computed under paragraph (b)(2) of this section.

For purposes of this subparagraph, all rehabilitation expenditures which are incurred in connection with the rehabilitation of an element of section 1250 property shall be considered incurred on the date the last such expenditure is considered incurred under the accrual method of accounting, regardless of the method of accounting used by the taxpayer with regard to other items of income and expense. If the property consists of two or more elements (for example, if the property is placed in service at different times), then each element shall be treated as if it were a separate property and the expenditures attributable to each such element shall be considered incurred on the date the last such expenditure is considered incurred.

(3) Allocation to certain periods. With respect to a taxable year beginning in 1963 and ending in 1964, or beginning in 1969 and ending in 1970, the amount of depreciation adjustments or of depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line (as the case may be) shall be ascertained by applying the principles of paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.167(a)-8 (relating to determination of adjusted basis of retired asset), and the amount determined in such manner shall be allocated on a daily basis in order to determine the portion thereof which is attributable to a period after December 31, 1963, or after December 31, 1969, as the case may be.

(b) Computation of depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line

(1) General rule. For purposes of paragraph (a)(1) of this section, depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line shall be, in the case of any property, the excess of

(i) the sum of the depreciation adjustments (as defined in paragraph (d) of this section) in respect of the property attributable to periods after December 31, 1963, over

(ii) the sum such adjustments would have been for such periods if such adjustments had been determined for the entire period the property was held under the straight line method of depreciation (or, if applicable, under the lease-renewal-period provision in paragraph (c) of this section). Depreciation in excess of straight line may arise, for example, if the declining balance method, the sum of the years-digits method, or the units of production method is used, or for another example, if the cost of a leasehold improvement or of a leasehold is depreciated over a period which does not take into account certain renewal periods referred to in paragraph (c) of this section. For computations of depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line (or a deficit therein) both on an annual basis and on the basis of the entire period the property was held, see subparagraph (6) of this paragraph.

(2) Depreciation under section 167(k). For purposes of paragraph (a)(2) of this section, depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line shall be, in the case of any property with respect to which a deduction was allowed under section 167(k) (relating to depreciation of expenditures to rehabilitate low-income rental housing), the excess of

(i) the sum of the depreciation adjustments (as defined in paragraph (d) of this section) allowed in respect of the property, over

(ii) the sum such adjustments would have been if such adjustments had been determined for the entire period the property was held under the straight line method of depreciation permitted by section 167(b)(1).

(3) General rule for computing useful life and salvage value. For purposes of computing under subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph the sum of the depreciation adjustments would have been under the straight line method, if a useful life (or salvage value) was used in determining the amount allowed as a depreciation adjustment for any taxable year, such life (or value) shall be used in determining the amount such depreciation adjustment would have been for such taxable year under the straight line method. If, however, for any taxable year a method of depreciation was used as to which a useful life was not taken into account such as, for example, the units of production method, or as to which salvage value was not taken into account in determining the annual allowances, such as, for example, the declining balance method or the amortization of a leasehold improvement over the term of a lease, then, for the purpose of determining the amount such depreciation adjustment would have been under the straight line method for such taxable year:

(i) There shall be used the useful life (or salvage value) which would have been proper if depreciation had actually been determined under the straight line method throughout the period the property was held, and

(ii) Such useful life (or such salvage value) shall be determined by taking into account for each taxable year the same facts and circumstances as would have been taken into account if the taxpayer had used such method throughout the period the property was held.

(4) Special rule for computing useful life and salvage value (section 167(k)). For purposes of computing under subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph the sum the depreciation adjustments would have been under the straight line method, the useful life and salvage value permitted under section 167(k) shall not apply, the useful life of the property shall be determined under paragraph (b) of § 1.167(a)-1 (or, if applicable, under the lease-renewal-period provision of paragraph (c) of this section), and the salvage value of the property shall be determined under paragraph (c) of § 1.167(a)-1. Such useful life or salvage value shall be determined by taking into account for each taxable year the same facts and circumstances as would have been taken into account if the taxpayer had used the straight line method permitted under section 167(b)(1) throughout the period the property was held.

(5) Property held before January 1, 1964. In the case of property held before January 1, 1964:

(i) For purposes of computing under subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph the sum the depreciation adjustments would have been under the straight line method, the adjusted basis of the property on such date shall be the amount such adjusted basis would have been if depreciation deductions allowed or allowable before such date had been determined under the straight line method computed in accordance with subparagraph (3) of this paragraph, and

(ii) The depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line in respect of the property computed under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, but without regard to this subdivision, shall be reduced by the amount of depreciation adjustments less than straight line for periods before January 1, 1964, that is, by the excess (if any) of the sum the depreciation adjustments would have been for periods before January 1, 1964, under the straight line method, over the sum of the depreciation adjustments attributable to periods before such date.

(6) Determination of additional depreciation in certain cases. If an item of section 1250 property is subject to two (or more) applicable percentages, a separate computation of additional depreciation shall be made for the portion of the taxpayer's holding period subject to each such percentage. That is, a separate computation shall be made to determine the excess of

(i) the depreciation adjustments (as defined in paragraph (d) of this section) for each such portion of the taxpayer's holding period after December 31, 1963, over

(ii) the amount such adjustments would have been for each such portion if such adjustments were determined under the straight line method of depreciation (or, if applicable, under the lease-renewal-period provision in paragraph (c) of this section). Thus, for example, in the case of an item of section 1250 property acquired on January 1, 1968, and disposed of on January 1, 1973, if the applicable percentage for the period before January 1, 1970, were determined under paragraph (d)(2) of § 1.1250-1 and the applicable percentage for the period after December 31, 1969, were determined under paragraph (d)(1)(i)(e) of § 1.1250-1, the additional depreciation would be computed separately for the period before January 1, 1970, and for the period after December 31, 1969. If the additional depreciation attributable to any such portion of the taxpayer's holding period is a deficit (that is, if the depreciation adjustments for that portion are less than the amount such adjustments would have been for that portion if depreciation adjustments were determined for the entire period the property was held under the straight line method of depreciation, or, if applicable, under the lease-renewal-period provision in paragraph (c) of this section), then such deficit will be applied to reduce the additional depreciation for other portion (or portions) of the taxpayer's holding period. (See examples (4) and (5) of subparagraph (7) of this paragraph.)

(7) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

A calendar year taxpayer sells section 1250 property on January 1, 1968, which he purchased for $10,000 on January 1, 1963. For the period of 1963 through 1967 he computed depreciation deductions in respect of the property under the declining balance method using a rate of 200 percent of the straight line rate and a proper useful life of 10 years. Under such method salvage value is not taken into account in computing annual allowances. For purposes of applying subparagraph (3) of this paragraph, if the taxpayer had used the straight line method for such period, he would have used a salvage value of $1,000, and the depreciation under the straight line method would have been $900 each year, that is, one-tenth of $10,000 minus $1,000. As of January 1, 1968, the additional depreciation for the property is $1,123, as computed in the table below:

Year Actual depreciation Straight line Additional depreciation (deficit)
1963 $2,000 $900
1964 1,600 900 $700
1965 1,280 900 380
1966 1,024 900 124
1967 819 900 (81)
Sum for periods after Dec. 31, 1963 4,723 3,600 1,123

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that the taxpayer sells the section 1250 property on January 1, 1970. Assume further that as of January 1, 1968, the taxpayer elects under section 167(e)(1) to change to the straight line method. On that date the adjusted basis of the property is $3,277 ($10,000 minus $6,723). He redetermines the remaining useful life of the property to be 8 years and its salvage value to be $77, and thus takes depreciation deductions for 1968 and 1969 of $400 (the amount allowable) for each such year, that is, one-eighth of $3,200 (that is, $3,277 minus $77). For purposes of applying subparagraph (3) of this paragraph, if he had used the straight line method throughout the period he held the property, the adjusted basis of the property on January 1, 1968, would have been $5,500 ($10,000 minus $4,500), and the depreciation which would have resulted under such method for 1968 and 1969 would have been $678 for each such year, that is, one-eighth of $5,423 ($5,500 minus $77). As of January 1, 1970, the additional depreciation for the property is $567, as computed in the table below:

Years Depreciation Straight line Additional depreciation (deficit)
1964 through 1967 $4,723 $3,600 $1,123
1968 400 678 (278)
1969 400 678 (278)
Sum for periods after Dec. 31, 1963 5,523 4,956 567

Example 3.

On January 1, 1978, a calendar year taxpayer sells section 1250 property. The property, which is attributable to rehabilitation expenditures of $50,000 incurred in 1970, was placed in service on January 1, 1971. The taxpayer elected to compute depreciation for the period of 1971 through 1975 under section 167(k). Under such section salvage value is not taken into account in computing annual allowances, and the useful life of the property is deemed to be 5 years. For purposes of applying subparagraph (4) of this paragraph, if the taxpayer had used the straight line method permitted under section 167(b)(1) for such period, he would have used a salvage value of $5,000 and a useful life of 15 years. Depreciation under the straight line method would thus have been $3,000 each year, 115 of $45,000 (that is, $50,000 minus $5,000). As of January 1, 1978, the additional depreciation for the property is $29,000, as computed in the table below:

Year Actual depreciation Straight line Additional depreciation (deficit)
1971 $10,000 $3,000 $7,000
1972 10,000 3,000 7,000
1973 10,000 3,000 7,000
1974 10,000 3,000 7,000
1975 10,000 3,000 7,000
1976 3,000 (3,000)
1977 3,000 (3,000)
Total 50,000 21,000 29,000

Example 4. Section 1250 property which has an adjusted basis of $108,000 is sold for $146,000 on December 31, 1972, and thus the gain realized is $38,000. The property was acquired on December 31, 1963. The applicable percentage for the period before January 1, 1970, is 12 percent (paragraph (d)(2) of § 1.1250-1) and the applicable percentage for the period after December 31, 1969, is 100 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(e) of § 1.1250-1). The additional depreciation must be computed separately for the period before January 1, 1970, and for the period after December 31, 1969. Assume that the additional depreciation for the period before January 1, 1970, is $32,000 and that there is a deficit in additional depreciation of $2,000 for the period after December 31, 1969. Accordingly, the additional depreciation for the period before January 1, 1970 ($32,000) is reduced to $30,000 by the $2,000 deficit in additional depreciation for the period after December 31, 1969. Although section 1250(a)(1) applies to the property, none of the gain is recognized as ordinary income under that section since there is a deficit in additional depreciation for the period after December 31, 1969. Gain is recognized under section 1250(a)(2) since there is remaining gain of $38,000 (that is, gain realized, $38,000, minus the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, zero). Since the additional depreciation attributable to the period before January 1, 1970 ($30,000), is lower than the gain realized ($38,000), the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a)(2) is $3,600 (that is, 12 percent of $30,000).

Example 5. Section 1250 property which has an adjusted basis of $207,000 is sold for $267,000 on February 24, 1988, and thus the gain realized is $60,000. The property was acquired on April 30, 1970. The applicable percentage for the period from April 30, 1970, through December 31, 1981, is 60 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(c) of § 1.1250-1) and the applicable percentage for the period from January 1, 1982, through February 24, 1988, is 100 percent (paragraph (d)(1)(i)(e) of § 1.1250-1). The additional depreciation must be computed separately for the period before January 1, 1982, and for the period after December 31, 1981. Assume that the additional depreciation for the period before January 1, 1982, is $43,000 and that there is a deficit in additional depreciation of $6,000 for the period after December 31, 1981. Accordingly, the additional depreciation for the period before January 1, 1982 ($43,000), is reduced to $37,000 by the $6,000 deficit for the period after December 31, 1981. There is no gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1) for the period after December 31, 1981, since there is a deficit in additional depreciation for that period. The gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1) for the period before January 1, 1982, is $22,200, that is, the lower of the gain realized attributable to that period ($60,000) or the additional depreciation attributable to that period ($37,000), or $37,000, multiplied by 60 percent, the applicable percentage.

(c) Property held by lessee

(1) Amount depreciation would have been. For purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, in case of a leasehold which is section 1250 property, in determining the amount the depreciation adjustments would have been under the straight line method in respect of any building or other improvement (which is section 1250 property) erected or made on the leased property, or in respect of any cost of acquiring the lease, the lease period shall be treated as including all renewal periods. See section 1250(b)(2). For determination of the extent to which a leasehold is section 1250 property, see paragraph (e)(3) of § 1.1250-1.

(2) Renewal period.

(i) For purposes of this paragraph, the term renewal period means any period for which the lease may be renewed, extended, or continued pursuant to an option or options exercisable by the lessee (whether or not specifically provided for in the lease) except that the inclusion of one or more renewal periods shall not extend the period taken into account by more than two-thirds of the period on the basis of which the depreciation adjustments were allowed.

(ii) In respect of the cost of any building erected (or other improvement made) on the leased property by the lessee, or in respect of the portion of the cost of acquiring a leasehold which is attributable to an existing building (or other improvement) on the leasehold at the time the lessee acquires the leasehold, the inclusion of one or more renewal periods shall not extend the period taken into account to a period which exceeds the useful life remaining, at the time the leasehold is disposed of, of such building (or such other improvement). Determinations under this subdivision shall be made without regard to the proper period under section 167 or 178 for depreciating or amortizing a leasehold acquisition cost or improvement.

(iii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Assume that a leasehold improvement with a useful life of 30 years is properly amortized on the basis of a 10-year initial lease term. The lease is renewable for an additional 9 years. The period taken into account is 1623 years, that is, 10 years plus two-thirds of 10 years. If, however, the leasehold improvement were disposed of at the end of 12 years, and if its remaining useful life were only 3 years, then the period taken into account would be 15 years.

(d) Depreciation adjustments

(1) General. For purposes of this section, the term depreciation adjustments means, in respect of any property, all adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis of such property on account of deductions described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph allowed or allowable (whether in respect of the same or other property) to the taxpayer or to any other person. For cases where the taxpayer can establish that the amount allowed for any period was less than the amount allowable, see subparagraph (4) of this paragraph. For determination of adjusted basis of property in a multiple asset account, see paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.167(a)-8. The term depreciation adjustments as used in this section does not have the same meaning as the term adjustments reflected in the adjusted basis as defined in paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1245-2.

(2) Deductions. The deductions described in this subparagraph are allowances (and amounts treated as allowances) for depreciation or amortization (other than amortization under section 168, 169 (as enacted by section 704(a), Tax Reform Act of 1969 (83 Stat. 667)), or 185). Thus, for example, such deductions include a reasonable allowance for exhaustion, wear, and tear (including a reasonable allowance for obsolesence) under section 167, the periodic deductions referred to in § 1.162-11 in respect of a specified sum paid for the acquisition of a leasehold and in respect of the cost to a lessee of improvements on property of which he is the lessee. However, such deductions do not include deductions for the periodic payment of rent.

(3) Depreciation of other taxpayers or in respect of other property.

(i) The depreciation adjustments (reflected in the adjusted basis) referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph (a) are not limited to adjustments with respect to the property disposed of, nor to those allowed or allowable to the taxpayer disposing of such property, and (b) except as provided in subparagraph (4) of this paragraph, are taken into account, whether allowed or allowable in respect of the same or other property and whether to the taxpayer or to any other person. For manner of determining the amount of additional depreciation after certain dispositions, see paragraph (e) of this section.

(ii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: On January 1, 1966, a calendar year taxpayer purchases for $100,000 a building for use in his trade or business. He takes depreciation deductions of $20,000 (the amount allowable), of which $3,000 is additional depreciation, and transfers the building to his son as a gift on January 1, 1968. Since the exception for gifts in section 1250(d)(1) applies, the taxpayer does not recognize gain under section 1250(a)(2). In the son's adjusted basis of $80,000 for the building there is reflected $3,000 of additional depreciation. On January 1, 1969, after taking a depreciation deduction of $10,000 (the amount allowable), of which $1,000 is additional depreciation, the son sells the building. At the time of the sale the additional depreciation is $4,000 ($3,000 allowed the father plus $1,000 allowed the son).

(4) Depreciation allowed or allowable.

(i) For purposes of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, generally all deductions (described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph) allowed or allowable shall be taken into account. See section 1016(a)(2) and the regulations thereunder for the meaning of allowed and allowable. However, if a taxpayer can establish by adequate records or other sufficient evidence that the amount allowed for any period was less than the amount allowable for such period, the amount to be taken into account for such period shall be the amount allowed. The preceding sentence shall not apply for purposes of computing under paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section the amount such deductions would have been under the straight line method.

(ii) The provisions of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: In the year 1969 it becomes necessary to determine the additional depreciation in respect of section 1250 property, the adjusted basis of which reflects a depreciation adjustment of $1,000 with respect to depreciation deductions allowable for the calendar year 1965 under the sum of the years-digits method. Under paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section, the depreciation which would have resulted under the straight line method for 1965 is $800. If the taxpayer can establish by adequate records or other sufficient evidence that he did not take, and was not allowed, any deduction for depreciation in respect of the property in 1965, then, for purposes of computing the depreciation adjustments in excess of straight line in respect of the property, the amount to be taken into account for 1965 as allowed or allowable is zero, and the amount to be taken into account in computing deductions which would have resulted under the straight line method in 1965 is $800. Thus, in effect, there is a deficit in additional depreciation for 1965 of $800.

(5) Retired or demolished property. Depreciation adjustments referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph generally do not include adjustments in respect of retired or demolished portions of an item of section 1250 property. If a retired or demolished portion is replaced in a disposition described in section 1250(d)(4)(A) (relating to like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions), see paragraph (d)(7) of § 1.1250-3.

(6) Exempt organization. In respect of property disposed of by an organization which is or was exempt from income taxes (within the meaning of section 501(a), the depreciation adjustments (reflected in the adjusted basis) referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph shall include only adjustments allowed or allowable

(i) in computing unrelated business taxable income (as defined in section 512(a)), or

(ii) in computing taxable income of the organization for a period during which it was not exempt or, by reason of the application of section 502, 503, or 504, was denied its exemption.

(e) Additional depreciation immediately after certain acquisitions

(1) Zero. If on the date a person acquires property his basis for the property is determined solely

(i) by reference to its cost (within the meaning of section 1012),

(ii) by reason of the application of section 301(d) (relating to basis of property received in corporate distribution) or section 334(a) (relating to basis of property received in a liquidation in which gain or loss is recognized), or

(iii) under the rules of section 334 (b)(2) or (c) (relating to basis of property received in certain corporate liquidations), then on such date the additional depreciation for the property is zero.

(2) Transactions referred to in section 1250(d). In the case of property acquired in a disposition described in section 1250(d) (relating to exceptions and limitations to application of section 1250), additional depreciation shall be computed in accordance with the rules prescribed in § 1.1250-3.

(f) Records to be kept and information to be filed

(1) Records to be kept. In any case in which it is necessary to determine the additional depreciation of an item of section 1250 property, the taxpayer shall have available permanent records of all the facts necessary to determine with reasonable accuracy the amount of such additional depreciation, including the following:

(i) The date, and the manner in which, the property was acquired,

(ii) The taxpayer's basis on the date the property was acquired and the manner in which the basis was determined,

(iii) The amount and date of all adjustments to the basis of the property allowed or allowable to the taxpayer for depreciation adjustments referred to in paragraph (d)(1) of this section and the amount and date of any other adjustments by the taxpayer to the basis of the property, and

(iv) In the case of section 1250 property which has an adjusted basis reflecting depreciation adjustments referred to in paragraph (d)(1) of this section taken by the taxpayer with respect to other property, or by another taxpayer with respect to the same or other property, the information described in subdivisions (i), (ii), and (iii) of this subparagraph with respect to such other property or such other taxpayer.

(2) Information to be filed. If a taxpayer acquires in a transaction (other than a like kind exchange or involuntary conversion described in section 1250(d)(4)) section 1250 property which has a basis reflecting depreciation adjustments referred to in paragraph (d)(1) of this section allowed or allowable to another taxpayer, then the taxpayer shall file with its income tax return or information return for the taxable year in which the property is acquired a statement showing all information described in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph. See section 6012 (relating to persons required to make returns of income) and part III of subchapter A of chapter 61 of the Code (relating to information returns).

[T.D. 7084, 36 FR 273, Jan. 8, 1971, as amended by T.D. 7193, 37 FR 12956, June 30, 1972]

§ 1.1250-3 Exceptions and limitations.

(a) Exception for gifts

(1) General rule. Section 1250(d)(1) provides that no gain shall be recognized under section 1250(a) upon a disposition by gift. For purposes of this paragraph, the term gift shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (a) of § 1.1245-4. For reduction in amount of charitable contribution in case of a gift of section 1250 property, see section 170(e) and paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.170-1.

(2) Disposition in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift. Where a disposition of property is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift, the disposition shall be subject to the provisions of § 1.1250-1 and the gain to which section 1250(a) applies, shall be computed under that section.

(3) Treatment of property in hands of transferee. If property is disposed of in a transaction which is a gift:

(i) The additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the transferee immediately after the disposition shall be an amount equal to (a) the amount of the additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the transferor immediately before the disposition, minus (b) the amount of any gain (in case the disposition is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift) which would have been taken into account under section 1250(a) by the transferor upon the disposition if the applicable percentage had been 100 percent.

(ii) For purposes of computing the applicable percentage, the holding period under section 1250(e)(2) of property received as a gift in the hands of the transferee includes the transferor's holding period,

(iii) In case of a disposition which is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift, if the adjusted basis of the property in the hands of the transferee exceeds its adjusted basis immediately before the transfer, the excess is an addition to capital account under paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of § 1.1250-5 (relating to property with 2 or more elements), and

(iv) If the property disposed of consists of two or more elements within the meaning of paragraph (c) of § 1.1250-5, see paragraph (e)(1) of § 1.1250-5 for the amount of additional depreciation and holding period for each element in the hands of the transferee.

(4) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) On May 15, 1967, Smith transfers section 1250 property to his son for $45,000. In the hands of Smith the property had an adjusted basis of $40,000 and a fair market value of $70,000. Thus, the gain realized is $5,000 (amount realized, $45,000, minus adjusted basis, $40,000), and Smith has made a gift of $25,000 (fair market value, $70,000, minus amount realized, $45,000).

(ii) Smith's holding period for the property is 80 full months and, thus, the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) is 40 percent. The additional depreciation for the property is $10,000. Since the gain realized ($5,000) is lower than the additional depreciation ($10,000), Smith recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2) gain of $2,000 (that is, applicable percentage, 40 percent, multiplied by gain realized, $5,000) and the $3,000 remaining portion of the gain realized may be treated as gain from the sale of property described in section 1231.

(iii) On the date the son receives the property, the additional depreciation for the property in his hands is $5,000, that is, the additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the father immediately before the transfer ($10,000), minus the gain which would have been recognized under section 1250(a)(2) upon the transfer if the applicable percentage had been 100 percent ($5,000); for purposes of computing applicable percentage his holding period is his father's holding period of 80 full months; and under § 1.1015-4 his unadjusted basis for the property is $45,000, that is, the amount he paid ($45,000) plus the excess (zero) of his father's adjusted basis over such amount.

(iv) The son sells the property for $80,000 on March 15, 1968, 10 full months after he received it from his father. Thus, his holding period is 90 full months (his father's holding period of 80 full months plus the 10 full months the son actually owned the property) and the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) is 30 percent. Assume that no depreciation was allowed or allowable to the son. Thus, the son's adjusted basis and additional depreciation for the property on the date of the sale is the same as on the date he received it. Accordingly, the gain realized is $35,000 (selling price of $80,000, minus adjusted basis of $45,000). Since the additional depreciation ($5,000) is lower than the gain realized ($35,000), the son recognizes as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2) gain of $1,500, that is, applicable percentage (30 percent) multiplied by additional depreciation ($5,000).

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that the son sells the property on June 15, 1969, 25 full months after he received it from his father. Thus, his holding period is 105 full months (his father's holding period of 80 full months plus the 25 full months the son actually owned the property) and the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) is 15 percent. Assume further that on the date of the sale the adjusted basis of the property is $39,000, and that for the period the son actually owned the property there is a deficit in additional depreciation of $2,000. Accordingly, the gain realized is $41,000 (selling price of $80,000, minus adjusted basis of $39,000), and the additional depreciation for the property is $3,000 (that is, the additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the son on the date he received it, as determined in example (1), $5,000, minus the amount of the deficit in additional depreciation for the period the son actually owned the property, ($2,000). Since the additional depreciation ($3,000) is lower than the gain realized ($41,000), the son recognizes as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2) gain of $450, that is, applicable percentage (15 percent) multiplied by additional depreciation ($3,000).

(b) Exception for transfers at death

(1) General rule. Section 1250(d)(2) provides that, except as provided in section 691 (relating to income in respect of a decedent), no gain shall be recognized under section 1250(a) upon a transfer at death. For purposes of this paragraph, the term transfer at death shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (b) of § 1.1245-4.

(2) Treatment of transferee.

(i) If as of the date a person acquires property from a decedent such person's basis is determined, by reason of the application of section 1014(a), solely by reference to the fair market value of the property on the date of the decedent's death or on the applicable date provided in section 2032 (relating to alternate valuation date), then

(a) on the date of death the additional depreciation for the property is zero, and

(b) for purposes of computing applicable percentage the holding period of the property under section 1250(e)(1)(A) is deemed to begin on the day after the date of death.

(ii) If property is acquired in a transfer at death to which section 1250(d)(2) applies, the amount of the additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the transferee immediately after the transfer shall be the amount (if any) of the additional depreciation in respect of the property allowed the transferee before the decedent's death, but only to the extent that the basis of the property (determined under section 1014(a)) is required to be reduced under the second sentence of section 1014(b)(9) (relating to adjustments to basis where property is acquired from a decedent prior to his death) by depreciation adjustments referred to in paragraph (d)(1) of § 1.1250-2 which give rise to such additional depreciation. For treatment of such property as having a special element with additional depreciation so computed, see paragraph (c)(5)(i) of § 1.1250-5 (relating to property with two or more elements). For purposes of determining applicable percentage, such special element shall have a holding period which includes the transferee's holding period for such property for the period before the decedent's death.

(3) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On March 6, 1966, Smith dies owning an item of section 1250 property. On March 7, 1968, the executor distributes the property to Smith's son pursuant to a specific bequest of the property in Smith's will. Under section 1014(a)(2) and paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1014-4, the unadjusted basis of the property in the hands of the son is its fair market value on March 6, 1966 (the date Smith died), and the son is considered to have acquired the property on such date. Under section 1250(e)(1)(A), the son's holding period for the property begins on March 7, 1966 (the day after the day he is considered to have acquired the property). Thus, on March 7, 1968 (the date the property was distributed to the son), the holding period for the property is 24 full months, and the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) is 96 percent. On such date, the additional depreciation for the property includes any additional depreciation in respect of the property for the period the property was possessed by the estate.

Example 2. H purchases section 1250 property in 1965 which he immediately conveys to himself and W, his wife, as tenants by the entirety. Under local law each spouse is entitled to one-half the income from the property. H and W file joint income tax returns for calendar years 1965, 1966, and 1967. Over the 3 years, depreciation allowed in respect of the property was $4,000 (the amount allowable) of which $500 is additional depreciation. One-half of these amounts are allocable to W. Thus, depreciation deductions of $2,000, of which $250 is additional depreciation, are allowable to W. On January 1, 1968, H dies and the entire value of the property at the date of death is included in H's gross estate. Since W's basis for the property (determined under section 1014(a)) is reduced (under the second sentence of section 1014(b)(9)) by the $2,000 depreciation deductions allowed W before H's death of which $250 is additional depreciation, the additional depreciation for the property in the hands of W immediately after H's death is $250.

(c) Limitation for certain tax-free transactions

(1) General. Section 1250(d)(3) provides that upon a transfer of property described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the amount of gain taken into account by the transferor under section 1250(a) shall not exceed the amount of gain recognized to the transferor on the transfer (determined without regard to section 1250). For purposes of this subparagraph, in case of a transfer of both section 1250 property and nonsection 1250 property in one transaction, the amount realized from the disposition of the section 1250 property shall be deemed to consist of that portion of the fair market value of each property acquired which bears the same ratio to the fair market value of such acquired property as the amount realized from the disposition of the section 1250 property bears to the total amount realized. The preceding sentence shall be applied solely for purposes of computing the portion of the total gain (determined without regard to section 1250) which shall be recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a). Section 1250(d)(3) does not apply to a disposition of property to an organization (other than a cooperative described in section 521) which is exempt from the tax imposed by chapter 1 of the Code.

(2) Transfers covered. The transfers described in this subparagraph are transfers of property in which the basis of the property in the hands of the transferee is determined by reference to its basis in the hands of the transferor by reason of the application of any of the following provisions:

(i) Section 332 (relating to distributions in complete liquidation of an 80 percent or more controlled subsidiary corporation). For application of section 1250(d)(3) to such a complete liquidation, the principles of paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.1245-4 shall apply.

(ii) Section 351 (relating to transfer to a corporation controlled by transferor).

(iii) Section 361 (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain corporate reorganizations).

(iv) Section 371(a) (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain receivership and bankruptcy proceedings).

(v) Section 374(a) (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain railroad reorganizations).

(vi) Section 721 (relating to transfers to a partnership in exchange for a partnership interest).

(vii) Section 731 (relating to distributions by a partnership to a partner). For special carryover basis rule, see section 1250(d)(6)(A) and paragraph (f)(1) of this section.

(3) Treatment of property in hands of transferee. In the case of a transfer described in subparagraph (2) (other than subdivision (vii) thereof) of this paragraph:

(i) The additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the transferee immediately after the disposition shall be an amount equal to

(a) the amount of the additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the transferor immediately before the disposition, minus

(b) the amount of additional depreciation necessary to produce an amount equal to the gain taken into account under section 1250(a) by the transferor upon the disposition (taking into account the applicable percentage for the property),

(ii) For purposes of computing applicable percentage, the holding period under section 1250(e)(2) of the property in the hands of the transferee includes the transferor's holding period,

(iii) If the adjusted basis of the property in the hands of the transferee exceeds its adjusted basis immediately before the transferee, the excess is an addition to capital account under paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of § 1.1250-5 (relating to property with 2 or more elements), and

(iv) If the property disposed of consists of 2 or more elements within the meaning of paragraph (c) of § 1.1250-5, see paragraph (e)(1) of § 1.1250-5 for the amount of additional depreciation and the holding period for each element in the hands of the transferee.

(4) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) Green transfers section 1250 property on March 1, 1968, to a corporation, which is not exempt from taxation, in exchange for cash of $9,000 and stock in the corporation worth $91,000, in a transaction qualifying under section 351. Thus, the amount realized is $100,000 ($9,000 plus $91,000). The property has an applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) of 60 percent, an adjusted basis of $40,000, and additional depreciation of $20,000. The gain realized is $60,000, that is, amount realized ($100,000) minus adjusted basis ($40,000). Since the additional depreciation ($20,000) is lower than the gain realized ($60,000), the amount of gain which would be treated as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2) would be $12,000 (60 percent of $20,000) if the limitation provided in section 1250(d)(3) did not apply. Since under section 351(b) gain in the amount of $9,000 would be recognized to the transferor without regard to section 1250, the limitation provided in section 1250(d)(3) limits the gain taken into account by the transferor under section 1250(a)(2) to $9,000.

(ii) The amount of additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the transferee immediately after the transfer is $5,000, that is, the amount of additional depreciation before the transfer ($20,000) minus the amount of additional depreciation necessary to produce an amount equal to the gain recognized under section 1250(a)(2) upon the transfer ($15,000, that is, $9,000 of gain recognized divided by 60 percent, the applicable percentage). (If the property is subsequently disposed of, and for the period after the initial transfer there is additional depreciation in respect of the property, then at the time of the subsequent disposition the additional depreciation will exceed $5,000. If, however, for the period after the initial transfer there was a deficit in additional depreciation, then at the time of the subsequent disposition the additional depreciation would be less than $5,000.)

Example 2.

(i) Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that the additional depreciation is $10,000. Since additional depreciation ($10,000) is lower than the gain realized ($60,000), the amount of gain which would be treated as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2) would be $6,000 (60 percent of $10,000) if the limitation provided in section 1250(d)(3) did not apply. Since under section 351(b) gain in the amount of $9,000 would be recognized to the transferor without regard to section 1250, the limitation under section 1250(d)(3) does not prevent treatment of the entire $6,000 as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(2). The $3,000 remaining portion of the $9,000 gain may be treated as gain from the sale of property described in section 1231.

(ii) Immediately after the transfer, the amount of additional depreciation is zero, that is, the amount of additional depreciation before the transfer ($10,000) minus the amount of additional depreciation necessary to produce an amount equal to the gain taken into account under section 1250(a)(2) upon the transfer ($10,000) that is, $6,000 divided by 60 percent.

Example 3.

(i) Miller transfers section 1250 property after December 31, 1969, to a corporation, which is not exempt from taxation, in exchange for cash of $9,000 and stock in the corporation worth $31,000, in a transaction qualifying under section 351. Thus, the amount realized is $40,000 ($9,000 plus $31,000). The property has an applicable percentage under paragraph (d)(1)(i)(e) of this section of 100 percent and an applicable percentage under paragraph (d)(2) of this section of 50 percent. The adjusted basis of the property on the date of the transfer is $24,000, and the gain realized is $16,000 (that is, amount realized, $40,000, minus adjusted basis, $24,000). The additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, is $8,000 and the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, is $12,000. Since the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 ($8,000), is lower than the gain realized ($16,000), the amount of gain which would be recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a)(1) would be $8,000 (100 percent of $8,000) if the limitation provided in section 1250(d)(3) did not apply. In addition, gain is recognized under section 1250(a)(2) since there is a remaining potential gain of $8,000 (that is, gain realized, $16,000, minus additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 ($8,000)). Since the remaining potential gain ($8,000) is lower than the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970 ($12,000), the amount of gain which would be recognized under section 1250(a)(2) would be $4,000 (50 percent of $8,000) if the limitation in section 1250(d)(3) did not apply. Since under section 351(b) gain in the amount of $9,000 would be recognized to the transferor without regard to section 1250, the limitation in section 1250(d)(3) limits the gain taken into account by the transferor under section 1250(a) to $9,000. Since the section 1250(a)(1) gain is considered as recognized first under paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of § 1.1250-1, of the $9,000 of gain recognized, $8,000 is recognized under section 1250(a)(1) and $1,000 is recognized under section 1250(a)(2).

(ii) The amount of additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the transferee immediately after the transfer is $10,000, the amount of additional depreciation immediately before the transfer ($20,000), minus the sum of (a) the amount of additional depreciation necessary to produce an amount equal to the gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1) upon the transfer, $8,000 (that is, gain recognized under section 1250(a)(1), $8,000, divided by 100 percent, the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(1)), plus (b) the amount of additional depreciation necessary to produce an amount equal to the gain recognized under section 1250(a)(2) upon the transfer, $2,000 (that is, gain recognized under section 1250(a)(2), $1,000, divided by 50 percent, the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2)). Of this amount, zero (that is, $8,000 minus $8,000) is attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, and $10,000 ($12,000 minus $2,000) is attributable to periods before January 1, 1970.

(d) Limitation for like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions

(1) Limitation on gain.

(i) Under section 1250(d)(4)(A), if property is disposed of and gain (determined without regard to section 1250) is not recognized in whole or in part under section 1031 (relating to like kind exchanges) or section 1033 (relating to involuntary conversions), then the amount of gain taken into account by the transferor under section 1250(a) shall not exceed the greater of the two limitations set forth in subdivisions (ii) and (iii) of this subparagraph. Immediately after the transfer the basis of the acquired property shall be determined under subparagraph (2), (3), or (4) (whichever is applicable) of this paragraph, and its additional depreciation shall be computed under subparagraph (5) of this paragraph. The holding period of the acquired property for purposes of computing applicable percentage, which is determined under section 1250(e)(1), does not include the holding period of the property disposed of. In the case of a disposition of section 1250 property and other property in one transaction, see subparagraph (6) of this paragraph. In case of a disposition described in section 1250(d)(4)(A) of a portion of this item of property, see subparagraph (7) of this paragraph.

(ii) For purposes of this subparagraph, the first limitation is the sum of:

(a) The amount of gain recognized on the disposition under section 1031 or 1033 (determined without regard to section 1250), plus

(b) An amount equal to the cost of any stock purchased in a corporation which (without regard to section 1250) would result in nonrecognition of gain under section 1033(a)(3)(A).

(iii) For purposes of this subparagraph, the second limitation is the excess (if any) of:

(a) The amount of gain which would (without regard to section 1250(d)(4)) be taken into account under section 1250(a), over

(b) The fair market value (or cost in the case of a transaction described in section 1033(a)(3)) of the section 1250 property acquired in the transaction.

(iv) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

A taxpayer receives $96,000 of insurance proceeds upon the destruction of section 1250 property by fire. If section 1250(d)(4)(A) did not apply to the disposition, $16,000 of gain would be recognized under section 1250(a). In acquisitions qualifying under section 1033(a)(3)(A), he uses $90,000 of the proceeds to purchase property similar or related in service or use to the property destroyed, of which $42,000 is for one item of section 1250 property and $48,000 is for one piece of land, and $5,000 of the proceeds to purchase stock in the acquisition of control of a corporation owning property similar or related in service or use to the property destroyed. The taxpayer properly elects under section 1033(a)(3)(A) and the regulations thereunder to limit recognition of gain (determined without regard to section 1250) to $1,000, that is, the excess of the amount realized from the conversion ($96,000) over the cost of the property acquired in acquisitions qualifying under section 1033(a)(3)(A) ($95,000, that is, $90,000 plus $5,000). The amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a) is $6,000, determined in the following manner:

The first limitation:
(a) Amount of gain recognized under section 1033(a)(3), determined without regard to section 1250(a) $1,000
(b) Fair market value of stock in a corporation which qualifies under section 1033(a)(3)(A) 5,000
(c) Sum of (a) plus (b) 6,000
The second limitation:
(d) Amount of gain which would be recognized under section 1250(a) if section 1250(d)(4) did not apply 16,000
(e) Cost of section 1250 property acquired in transaction 42,000
(f) Excess of (d) over (e) 0

Since the first limitation ($6,000) exceeds the second limitation (zero), the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a) is $6,000. The balance ($10,000) of the gain realized ($16,000) is not recognized.

(2) Basis of property purchased upon involuntary conversion into money.

(i) If section 1250 property is purchased in a compulsory or involuntary conversion to which section 1033(a)(3) applies, and if by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A) all or part of the gain computed under section 1250(a) is not taken into account, then the basis of the section 1250 property and other purchased property shall be determined under the rules prescribed in this subparagraph. See section 1250(d)(4)(D).

(ii) The total basis of all purchased property, the acquisition of which results in the nonrecognition of any part of the gain realized upon the transaction, shall be

(a) its cost, reduced by

(b) the portion of the total gain realized which was not recognized. To the extent that section 1250(d)(4)(A)(i) prevents the purchase of stock from resulting in nonrecognition of gain, the basis of purchased stock is its cost.

(iii) If purchased property consists of both section 1250 property and other property, the total basis computed under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph shall be allocated between the section 1250 property (treated as a class) and the other property (treated as a class) in proportion to their respective costs, except that for purposes of this subdivision (but not subdivision (iv) of this subparagraph) the cost of the section 1250 property shall be deemed to be the excess of

(a) its actual cost, over

(b) the gain not taken into account under section 1250(a) by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A).

(iv) If the property acquired consists of more than one item of section 1250 property (or of more than one item of other property), the total basis of the section 1250 property (or of the other property), as computed under subdivisions (ii) and (iii) of this subparagraph, shall be allocated to each item of section 1250 property (or other property) in proportion to their respective actual costs.

(v) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

Assume the same facts as in the example in subparagraph (1)(iv) of this paragraph. Assume further that the portion of the gain realized which was not recognized under section 1033(a)(3) or 1250(a) upon the transaction is $60,000, of which the gain computed under section 1250(a) which is not taken into account by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A) is $10,000, that is, the excess of the gain which would have been recognized under section 1250(a) if section 1250(d)(4)(A) did not apply ($16,000) over the gain recognized under section 1250(a) ($6,000). In such example $95,000 of proceeds were used to purchase property in acquisitions qualifying under section 1033(a)(3)(A) of which $42,000 was for section 1250 property, $48,000 for land, and $5,000 for stock in a corporation. The basis of each acquired property is determined in the following manner:

(a) Under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, the total basis of the acquired properties (other than the stock) is $30,000, that is, their cost ($90,000, of which $42,000 is for section 1250 property and $48,000 is for land), reduced by the portion of the total gain realized which was not recognized ($60,000).

(b) Under subdivision (iii) of this subparagraph, such total basis is allocated between the section 1250 property and the land in proportion to their respective costs, and for this purpose the cost of the section 1250 property is considered to be $32,000, that is, its actual cost ($42,000) minus the gain not recognized under section 1250(a) by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A) ($10,000). Thus, the basis of the section 1250 property is $12,000 (32/80 of $30,000), and the basis of the land is $18,000 (48/80 of $30,000).

(c) The basis of the purchased stock is its cost of $5,000. See last sentence of subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph.

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that the section 1250 property purchased for $42,000 consists of 2 items of such property ($10,500 for C, and $31,500 for D), and that the land purchased for $48,000 consists of 2 pieces of land ($12,000 for X, and $36,000 for Y). Under subdivision (iv) of this subparagraph, the total basis for each class of property is allocated between the individual properties of such class in proportion to their respective actual costs. Thus, the total basis of $12,000, as determined in example (1), for the section 1250 property is allocated as follows:

To C: $12,000 × ($10,500/$42,000) $3,000
To D: $12,000 × ($31,500/$42,000) 9,000
Total 12,000

The total basis of $18,000, as determined in example (1), for the land is allocated as follows:

To X: $18,000 × ($12,000/$48,000) $4,500
To Y: $18,000 × ($36,000/$48,000) 13,500
Total 18,000

(3) Basis of property acquired upon involuntary conversion into similar property. If property is involuntarily converted into property similar or related in service or use in a transaction to which section 1033(a)(1) applies, and if by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A) all or part of the gain computed under section 1250(a) is not taken into account, then:

(i) The total basis of the acquired property shall be determined under the first sentence of section 1033(c), and

(ii) If more than one item of property is acquired, such total basis shall be allocated to the individual items of property acquired in accordance with the principles prescribed in subparagraph (2) (iii) and (iv) of this paragraph, except that an amount equivalent to the fair market value of each item of property on the date acquired shall be treated as its actual cost.

(4) Basis of property acquired in like kind exchange. If section 1250 property is transferred in an exchange described in section 1031 (a) or (b), and if by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A) all or part of the gain computed under section 1250(a) is not taken into account, then:

(i) The total basis of the property (including nonsection 1250 property) acquired of the type permitted to be received under section 1031 without recognition of gain or loss shall be determined under section 1031(d), and

(ii) If more than one item of property of such type was received, such total basis shall be allocated to the individual items of property of such type in accordance with the principles prescribed in subparagraph (2) (iii) and (iv) of this paragraph, except that an amount equivalent to the fair market value of each such item of property on the date received shall be treated as its actual cost.

(5) Additional depreciation for property acquired in like kind exchange or involuntary conversion.

(i) If property is disposed of in a transaction described in section 1031 or 1033, and if by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A) all or part of the gain computed under section 1250(a) is not taken into account, then the additional depreciation for the acquired property immediately after the transaction (as computed under section 1250(d)(4)(E)) shall be an amount equal to the amount of gain computed under section 1250(a) which was not taken into account by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A).

(ii) In case more than one item of section 1250 property is acquired in the transaction, the additional depreciation computed under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph shall be allocated to each such item of section 1250 property in proportion to their respective adjusted bases.

(iii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(a) On January 15, 1969, section 1250 property X is condemned and proceeds of $100,000 are received. On such date, X's adjusted basis is $25,000, the additional depreciation is $10,000, and the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) is 70 percent. Since the additional depreciation ($10,000) is less than the gain realized ($75,000, that is, $100,000 minus $25,000) the amount of gain computed under section 1250(a)(2) (without regard to section 1250(d)(4)(A)) is $7,000, that is, 70 percent of $10,000.

(b) On March 1, 1969, all the proceeds are used to purchase section 1250 property Y in a transaction qualifying under section 1033(a)(3)(A) for nonrecognition of gain. Accordingly, the gain not recognized by reason of the application of section 1033(a)(3)(A) is $75,000, of which $7,000 is gain computed under section 1250(a)(2) which is not taken into account by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A). See subparagraph (1) of this paragraph.

(c) Immediately after the transaction, Y's basis is $25,000, that is, its cost ($100,000) minus the total gain realized which was not recognized ($75,000), and the additional depreciation (as computed under section 1250(d)(4)(E)) is $7,000, that is, the amount of gain not taken into account under section 1250(a)(2) by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A).

(d) On December 15, 1969, before any depreciation deductions were allowed or allowable in respect of Y, Y is sold for $90,000. Under section 1250(e)(1), the holding period of Y is 9 months, and thus, under section 1250(a)(2), the applicable percentage is 100 percent. Since the additional depreciation ($7,000) is less than the gain realized ($65,000, that is $90,000 minus $25,000), the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a)(2) as ordinary income is $7,000, that is, 100 percent of $7,000.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that property Y was purchased on June 15, 1962, and that 90 full months thereafter, or December 15, 1969, it is sold for $35,000. Thus the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) is 30 percent. Assume further that at the time of such sale Y's adjusted basis is $5,000 and additional depreciation in respect of Y for periods after it was acquired is $2,500. Thus, the additional depreciation at the time of the sale is $9,500, that is, the sum of the additional depreciation in respect of Y attributable to X as computed under section 1250(d)(4)(E) in (c) of example (1) ($7,000), plus the additional depreciation attributable to periods after Y was acquired ($2,500). Since the additional depreciation ($9,500) is less than the gain realized ($30,000, that is, $35,000 minus $5,000), the gain recognized under section 1250(a)(2) as ordinary income is $2,850, that is, 30 percent of $9,500.

(6) Single disposition of section 1250 property and property of different class.

(i) For purposes of this subparagraph:

(a) Section 1250 property, section 1245 property (as defined in section 1245(a)(3)), and other property shall each be treated as a separate class of property, and

(b) The term qualifying property means property which may be acquired without recognition of gain under the applicable provision of section 1031 or 1033 (applied without regard to section 1250 or 1245) upon the disposition of property.

(ii) If upon a sale of section 1250 property gain would be recognized under section 1250(a) and if such section 1250 property together with property of a different class or classes are disposed of in one transaction in which gain is not recognized in whole or in part under section 1031 or 1033 (without regard to sections 1245 and 1250), then:

(a) The total amount realized shall be allocated between the different classes of property disposed of in proportion to their respective fair market values,

(b) The amount realized upon the disposition of property of a class shall be deemed to consist of so much of the fair market value of qualifying property of the same class acquired as is not in excess of the amount realized from the property of such class disposed of,

(c) The remaining portion (if any) of the amount realized upon the disposition of property of such class shall be deemed to consist of so much of the fair market value of any other property acquired as is not in excess of such remaining portion, and

(d) For purposes of applying (c) of this subdivision, the fair market value of acquired property shall be taken into account only once and in such manner as the taxpayer determines.

(iii) The amounts determined under this subparagraph in respect of property shall apply for all purposes of the Code.

(iv) The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

(a) Green owns property consisting of land and a fully equipped factory building thereon. The property is condemned and proceeds of $100,000 are received. If the property were sold for $100,000, gain of $40,000 would be recognized of which $10,000 would be recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a). Proceeds of $95,000 are used to purchase property similar or related in service or use to the condemned property and under section 1033(a)(3)(A) (without regard to sections 1245 and 1250) recognition of gain is limited to $5,000. The fair market values by classes of the property disposed of, and of the property acquired, are summarized in the table below:

Fair market value of property
Disposed of Acquired
Section 1245 property $35,000 $55,000
Section 1250 property 45,000 28,000
Land 20,000 12,000
Cash 5,000
100,000 100,000

(b) The allocations under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph are summarized in the table below:

Property disposed of Property acquired Cash
Remaining
Sec. 1245 Property Sec. 1250 Property Land
$35,000 of section 1245 property $35,000
$45,000 of section 1250 property 1 17,000 $28,000
$20,000 of land 1 3,000 $12,000 1 $5,000
Total 55,000 28,000 12,000 5,000
1 Determined by taxpayer pursuant to subdivision (ii)(d) of this subparagraph.

(c) Upon the disposition of the section 1245 property, only section 1245 property is acquired, and thus gain (if any) would not be recognized under section 1245(a)(1). See section 1245(b)(4). Upon the disposition of the section 1250 property gain under section 1250(a) would not be recognized by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(4)(A). See subparagraph (1) of this paragraph. If the gain realized on the disposition of the land is not less than $5,000, then under section 1033(a)(3)(A) the gain recognized would be $5,000, that is, an amount equal to the portion of the proceeds from the disposition of the land ($5,000) not invested in qualifying property.

(7) Disposition of portion of property. A disposition described in section 1250(d)(4)(A) of a portion of an item of property gives rise to an addition to capital account described in the last sentence of paragraph (d)(2)(i) of § 1.1250-5 (relating to property with 2 or more elements). If the addition to capital account is a separate improvement within the meaning of paragraph (d) of § 1.1250-5, and thus an element, then immediately after the addition is made the amount of additional depreciation for such separate improvement shall be computed under subparagraph (5) of this paragraph by treating such portion and such addition as separate properties. If the addition is not a separate improvement, then immediately after the addition is made such property is considered under paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of § 1.1250-5 as having a special element with the same amount of additional depreciation so computed. For purposes of computing applicable percentage, the holding period of the separate improvement or special element (as the case may be), which is determined under section 1250(e)(1), does not include the holding period of the property disposed of.

(e) Sections 1071 and 1081 transactions

(1) General. This paragraph prescribes regulations under section 1250(d)(5) which apply in the case of a disposition of section 1250 property in a transaction in which gain (determined without regard to section 1250) is not recognized in whole or in part by reason of the application of section 1071 (relating to gain from sale or exchange to effectuate policies of FCC) or section 1081 (relating to gain from sale or exchange in obedience to order of SEC).

(2) Involuntary conversion treatment under section 1071. If section 1250 property is disposed of and gain (determined without regard to section 1250) is not recognized in whole or in part solely by reason of an election under the first sentence of section 1071(a) to treat the transaction as an involuntary conversion, the consequences of the transaction shall be determined under the principles of paragraph (d) of this section.

(3) Basis reduction under sections 1071 or 1082(a)(2).

(i) If section 1250 property is disposed of and gain (determined without regard to section 1250) is not recognized in whole or in part by reason of a reduction in basis of property pursuant to an election under section 1071(a) or the application of section 1082(a)(2), then the amount of gain taken into account by the transferor under section 1250(a) shall not exceed the sum of:

(a) The amount of gain recognized on such disposition (determined without regard to section 1250), plus

(b) In case involuntary conversion treatment was also elected under section 1071(a), an amount equal to the cost of any stock purchased in a corporation which (without regard to section 1250) would result in nonrecognition of gain under section 1033(a)(3), as modified by section 1071(a), plus

(c) The portion of the gain computed under section 1250(a) (without regard to this paragraph) which is neither taken into account under (a) or (b) of this subdivision nor applied under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph to reduce the basis of section 1250 property.

(ii)

(a) The amount of gain computed under section 1250(a) (without regard to this paragraph) which is not taken into account under subdivision (i) (a) or (b) of this subparagraph shall be applied to the amount by which the basis of the section 1250 property was reduced under section 1071(a) or 1082(a)(2), as the case may be, before other gain (which is not gain computed under section 1250(a)) is so applied.

(b) If the basis of more than one item of section 1250 property was so reduced, the gain applied under (a) of this subdivision to all such section 1250 properties shall be applied to such items in proportion to the amounts of their respective basis reductions.

(c) Any gain not applied under (a) of this subdivision shall be applied to the amount by which the basis of the nonsection 1250 property was reduced.

(iii) If gain computed under section 1250 is applied under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph to reduce the basis of section 1250 property, the amount so applied shall be treated as additional depreciation in respect of such section 1250 property. For treatment of such section 1250 property as having a special element with additional depreciation consisting of such amount, see paragraph (c)(5)(i) of § 1.1250-5. For purposes of computing applicable percentage, such special element shall have a holding period beginning on the day after the date as of which the property's basis was so reduced.

(4) Section 1081(d)(1)(A) transaction. No gain shall be recognized under section 1250(a) upon an exchange of property as to which gain is not recognized (without regard to section 1250) because of the application of section 1081(d)(1)(A) (relating to transfers within system group). For treatment of property in the hands of a transferee, the principles of paragraph (c)(3) of this section shall apply.

(f) Property distributed by a partnership to a partner

(1) General. For purposes of section 1250 (d)(3) and (e)(2), the basis of section 1250 property distributed by a partnership to a partner shall be determined by reference to the adjusted basis of such property to the partnership. Thus, if section 731 applies to a distribution of section 1250 property by a partnership to a partner, then even though the partner's basis is not determined for other purposes by reference to the partnership's basis,

(i) the amount of gain taken into account by the partnership under section 1250(a) is limited by section 1250(d)(3) to the amount of gain recognized to the partnership upon the distribution (determined without regard to section 1250), and

(ii) the holding period of the property in the hands of the partner shall, under section 1250(e)(2), include the holding period of the property in the hands of the partnership. For nonapplication of section 1250(d)(3) to a disposition to an organization (other than a cooperative described in section 521) which is exempt from the tax imposed by chapter 1 of the Code, see paragraph (c)(1) of this section.

(2) Treatment of property distributed by partnership.

(i) If section 1250 property is distributed by a partnership to a partner in a distribution in which no part of the partnership's potential section 1250 income in respect of the property was recognized as ordinary income to the partnership under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.751-1, the additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the distributee attributable to periods before the distribution shall be an amount equal to the total potential section 1250 income of the partnership in respect of the property immediately before the distribution, recomputed as if the applicable percentage for the property had been 100 percent. Under paragraph (c)(4) of § 1.751-1, the potential section 1250 income is, in effect, the gain to which section 1250(a) would have applied if the property had been sold by the partnership immediately before the distribution at its fair market value at such time.

(ii) If upon the distribution any potential section 1250 income in respect of the property was recognized to the partnership under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.751-1, then after the distribution the additional depreciation shall be an amount equal to

(a) the total potential section 1250 income in respect of the property, as recomputed in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, minus

(b) the amount of potential section 1250 income which would have been recognized to the partnership under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.751-1 if the applicable percentage for the property had been 100 percent.

(iii) If the partner's basis for the property immediately after the transaction exceeds the partnership's adjusted basis for the property immediately before the transaction, the excess may be an addition to capital account under paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of § 1.1250-5 (relating to property with two or more elements).

(3) Examples. The provisions of subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) A partnership distributes a building to Smith on January 1, 1969, in a complete liquidation of his partnership interest to which section 736(a) does not apply. On the date of the distribution, the partnership's holding period for the property is 40 full months and, accordingly, the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) is 80 percent. On such date, the partnership's additional depreciation for the building ($6,250) is lower than the excess ($40,000) of its fair market value ($140,000) over adjusted basis ($100,000). Thus, under paragraph (c)(4) of § 1.751-1, the partnership's potential section 1250 income in respect of the building is $5,000 (80 percent of $6,250). Assume that section 751(b) does not apply to the distribution. Accordingly, no gain would be recognized to the partnership under section 731(b) (without regard to the application of section 1250). Smith's basis for his partnership interest was $150,000, and under section 732(b) Smith's basis for the building is equal to his basis for his partnership interest. Thus, Smith's basis for the building is not determined by reference to the partnership's basis for the building. Nevertheless, under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, no gain is recognized to the partnership under section 1250(a)(2) and Smith's holding period for the property includes the partnership's holding period.

(ii) Six full months after Smith received the building in the distribution, or July 1, 1969, he sells it for $153,000. Assume that no depreciation was allowed or allowable to Smith for the building, and that the special rules under § 1.1250-5 for property with two or more elements do not apply. Since Smith's holding period for the building includes its holding period in the hands of the partnership, his holding period is 46 full months (40 full months for the partnership plus 6 full months for Smith) and the applicable percentage under section 1250(a)(2) is 74 percent.

(iii) Since no potential section 1250 income was recognized to the partnership under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.751-1, the additional depreciation for the building attributable to periods before the distribution is determined under the provisions of subparagraph (2)(i) of this paragraph. Under such provisions, the potential section 1250 income to the partnership, which was actually $5,000 (that is, 80 percent of $6,250), is recomputed as if the applicable percentage were 100 percent, and thus such additional depreciation is $6,250 (that is, 100 percent of $6,250). Since no depreciation was allowed or allowable for the building in Smith's hands, the additional depreciation for the building attributable to Smith's total holding period (46 full months) is $6,250. Since the gain realized ($3,000, that is, amount realized, $153,000, minus adjusted basis, $150,000), is lower than the additional depreciation ($6,250), the gain recognized to Smith under section 1250(a)(2) is $2,220 (that is, 74 percent of $3,000).

Example 2. Assume the facts as in example (1) except that as a result of the distribution the partnership recognizes under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.751-1 potential section 1250 income of $1,000 (that is, 80 percent of $1,250). The additional depreciation attributable to periods before the distribution, as determined under the provisions of subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph, is $5,000, that is,

(a) the total potential section 1250 income in respect of the property, recomputed in example (1) as if the applicable percentage were 100 percent ($6,250), minus

(b) the amount of potential section 1250 income which would have been recognized to the partnership under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.751-1 if the applicable percentage for the property had been 100 percent ($1,250, that is, 100 percent of $1,250).

(4) Treatment of partnership property after certain transactions. If under paragraph (b)(3) of § 1.751-1 (relating to certain distributions of partnership property other than section 751 property treated as sales or exchanges) a partnership is treated as purchasing section 1250 property (or a portion thereof) from a distributee who relinquishes his interest in such property (or portion), then after the date of such purchase the following rules shall apply:

(i) If only a portion of the property is treated as purchased, there shall be excluded from the additional depreciation for the remaining portion any additional depreciation in respect of the purchased portion for periods before such purchase.

(ii) In respect of the purchased property (or portion),

(a) as of the date of purchase the amount of additional depreciation shall be zero, and

(b) for purposes of computing applicable percentage the holding period shall begin on the day after the date of such purchase.

(5) Cross reference. See paragraph (f) of § 1.1250-1 for the amount of additional depreciation for partnership property in respect of a partner who acquired his partnership interest in certain transactions when an election under section 754 (relating to optional adjustments to basis of partnership property) was in effect.

(g) Disposition of principal residence

(1) In general.

(i) Section 1250(d)(7)(A) provides that section 1250(a) shall not apply to a disposition of property by a taxpayer to the extent the property is used by the taxpayer as his principal residence (within the meaning of section 1034(a) and the regulations thereunder, relating to a sale or exchange of residence). Thus, for example, if a doctor sells a house, of which one portion was used as his principal residence within the meaning of section 1034(a) and the other portion was properly subject to the allowance for depreciation as property used in his trade or business, then, by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(7)(A), section 1250(a) does not apply in respect of the disposition of the portion used as his principal residence. The provisions of this subparagraph shall apply regardless of whether section 1034 applies. Thus, for example, if section 1034 did not apply to the sale because the doctor did not invest in a new principal residence within the period specified in section 1034, nevertheless section 1250(a) would not apply to the disposition of the portion used as a principal residence.

(ii) Section 1250(d)(7)(B) provides that section 1250(a) shall not apply to a disposition of section 1250 property by a taxpayer who, in respect of the property, satisfies the age and ownership requirements of section 121 (relating to exclusion from gross income of gain on sale or exchange of residence of individual who has attained age 65), but only to the extent the taxpayer satisfies the use requirements of section 121 in respect of such property. Thus, if a taxpayer has attained the age of 65 before the date on which he disposes of section 1250 property, and if during the 8-year period ending on the date of the disposition the property has been owned and used by the taxpayer solely as his principal residence for periods aggregating 5 years or more, then section 1250(a) does not apply in respect to the disposition. This result would not be changed even if the taxpayer does not or cannot make the election provided for in section 121 and even if section 121 applies to only a portion of the gain because the adjusted sales price exceeds the $20,000 limitation in section 121(b)(1). If, however, only a portion of the property has been used as his principal residence for such periods aggregating 5 years or more, then, by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(7)(B), section 1250(a) is inapplicable only to the portion so used. For special rules for determining whether the age, ownership, and use requirements of section 121 are treated as satisfied, and for the manner of applying such requirements, see section 121(d) and the regulations thereunder.

(2) Concurrent operation of section 1250(d)(7) with other provisions. Upon the disposition of a principal residence, gain computed under section 1250(a) may not be recognized in whole or in part by reason of the application of both the provisions of section 1250(d)(7) and the provisions of one of the other exceptions or limitations enumerated in section 1250(d). Thus, for example, if an entire house is transferred as a gift, and if section 1250(d)(7) applies to only a portion of the house, then section 1250(d)(1) excepts the disposition of the entire house from the application of section 1250(a).

(3) Special rule. If by reason of section 1250(d)(7) a disposition is partially excepted from the application of section 1250(a), and if no other paragraph of section 1250(d) excepts the disposition entirely from such application, then the gain to which section 1250(a) applies shall be an amount which bears the same ratio to

(i) the gain computed under section 1250(a) (without regard to section 1250(d)(7)), as

(ii) the fair market value of the portion of the property to which the exception in section 1250(d)(7) does not apply, bears to

(iii) the total fair market value of the property. Thus, for example, if under paragraph (a)(2) of this section gain of $300 would be recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a) (without regard to section 1250(d)(7)) upon a combined sale and gift of section 1250 property, and if the property has a fair market value of $25,000 of which $10,000 is properly allocable to a portion not used as a principal residence, then the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1250(a) would be $120 (10/25 of $300).

(4) Treatment of property in hands of transferee. If property is disposed of in a transaction to which section 1250(d)(7) applies, and if its basis in the hands of the transferee is determined by reference to its basis in the hands of the transferor by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(1) (relating to gifts) or section 1250(d)(3) (relating to certain tax-free transactions), then the treatment of the property in the hands of the transferee shall be determined under paragraph (a)(3) or (c)(3) (whichever is applicable) of this section

(5) Treatment of property acquired in like kind exchange or involuntary conversion. If property is disposed of in a transaction to which section 1250(d)(7) (relating to principal residence) and section 1250(d)(4) (relating to like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions) apply, then:

(i) The basis of the property acquired shall be determined under the applicable provisions of paragraph (d) (2), (3), or (4) of this section, applied as if all gain computed under section 1250(a) (except any gain not recognized solely by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(7)) were not taken into account by reason of section 1250(d)(4)(A),

(ii) The additional depreciation for the property acquired shall be determined in the manner prescribed in paragraph (d)(5) of this section, so applied, and

(iii) For purposes of computing the applicable percentage, the holding period of the acquired property shall be determined under section 1250(e)(1).

(6) Treatment of property acquired in section 1034 transaction. If a principal residence is disposed of in a transaction to which section 1250(d)(7) applies, and if by reason of the application of section 1034 (relating to sale or exchange of residence) the basis of property acquired in the transaction is determined by reference to the basis in the hands of the taxpayer of the property disposed of, then:

(i) The additional depreciation for the acquired property immediately after the transaction shall be an amount equal to

(a) the amount of the additional depreciation for the property disposed of, minus

(b) the amount of any gain which would have been taken into account under section 1250(a) by the transferor upon the disposition if the applicable percentage for the property had been 100 percent,

(ii) For purposes of computing the applicable percentage, the holding period of the acquired property includes the holding period of the disposed of property (see section 1250(e)(3)),

(iii) If the adjusted basis of the acquired property exceeds the adjusted basis immediately before the transfer of the property disposed of, the excess is an addition to capital account under paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of § 1.1250-5 (relating to property with more than one element), and

(iv) If the property disposed of consisted of two or more elements within the meaning of paragraph (c) of § 1.1250-5, see paragraph (e)(3) of § 1.1250-5 for the amount of additional depreciation and the holding period for each element in the hands of the transferee.

(h) Limitation for disposition of qualified low-income housing

(1) Limitation on gain.

(i) Under section 1250(d)(8)(A), if section 1250 property is disposed of and gain (determined without regard to section 1250) is not recognized in whole or in part under section 1039 (relating to certain sales of low-income housing projects), then the amount of gain recognized by the transferor under section 1250(a) shall not exceed the greater of:

(a) The amount of gain recognized under section 1039 (determined without regard to section 1250), or

(b) The excess, if any, of the amount of gain which would, but for section 1250(d)(8)(A), be taken into account under section 1250(a), over the cost of the section 1250 property acquired in the transaction.

For purposes of this paragraph the term qualified housing project, approved disposition, reinvestment period, and net amount realized shall have the same meaning as in section 1039 and § 1.1039-1.

(ii) The principles of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) Taxpayer A owns a qualified housing project and makes an approved disposition of the project on January 1, 1971. The net amount realized upon the disposition is $550,000, of which $475,000 is attributable to section 1250 property. The adjusted basis of the section 1250 property is $250,000 and the gain realized on the disposition of section 1250 property is $225,000. The additional depreciation for the property is $100,000, the applicable percentage is 48 percent, and if section 1250(d)(8)(A) did not apply to the disposition, $48,000 of gain would be recognized under section 1250(a). Within the reinvestment period, A purchases a replacement qualified housing project at a cost of $525,000, of which $425,000 is attributable to section 1250 property. A properly elects under section 1039(a) and the regulations thereunder to limit the recognition of gain (determined without regard to section 1250) to $25,000, that is, the excess of the net amount realized ($550,000) over the cost of the replacement housing project ($525,000).

(ii) The amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a) is limited to $25,000, that is, the greater of (a) the amount of gain recognized without regard to section 1250(a) ($25,000), or (b) the excess of (1) the amount of gain which would be taken into account under section 1250(a) if section 1250(d)(8)(A) did not apply ($225,000), over (2) the cost of the replacement section 1250 property ($425,000), or zero.

Example 2. The facts are the same as in example (1) except that only $180,000 of the cost of the replacement housing project is attributable to section 1250 property. Thus, the gain recognized under section 1250(a) is limited to $45,000, the greater of

(a) the excess of

(1) the amount of gain which would be taken into account under section 1250(a) if section 1250(d)(8)(A) did not apply ($225,000), over

(2) the cost of the replacement section 1250 property ($180,000), or

(b) the amount of gain recognized without regard to section 1250 ($25,000).

(2) Replacement project consisting of more than one element.

(i) If

(a) section 1250 property is disposed of,

(b) any portion of the gain which would have been recognized under section 1250(a) is not recognized by reason of section 1250(d)(8)(A), and

(c) the cost of the replacement section 1250 property constructed, reconstructed, or acquired during the reinvestment period exceeds the net amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of, then the section 1250 property shall consist of two elements. For purposes of this paragraph, the reinvestment element is that portion of the section 1250 property constructed, reconstructed, or acquired during the reinvestment period the cost of which does not exceed the net amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of, reduced by any gain recognized with respect to such property. The additional cost element is that portion of the section 1250 property constructed, reconstructed, or acquired during the reinvestment period whose cost exceeds the net amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of.

(ii) The principles of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example 1.

(i) Taxpayer B disposes of a qualified housing project consisting of section 1250 property with an adjusted basis of $500,000 and land with a basis of $100,000. The amount realized on the disposition is $750,000 of which $650,000 is attributable to the section 1250 property. B constructs a replacement housing project at a cost of $1,000,000 of which $850,000 is attributable to section 1250 property. B elects in accordance with the provisions of section 1039(a) and the regulations there under not to recognize the $150,000 gain realized.

(ii) Under section 1250(d)(8)(A) no gain is recognized under section 1250(a). The replacement section 1250 property consists of the two elements. The reinvestment element has a cost of $650,000, i.e., that portion of the replacement section 1250 property the cost of which does not exceed the amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of ($650,000), reduced by any gain recognized with respect to such property (zero). The additional cost element has a cost of $200,000, that is, the excess of the cost of the replacement section 1250 property ($850,000) over the amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of ($650,000).

(3) Basis of property acquired.

(i) If section 1250 property is disposed of and gain (determined without regard to section 1250) is not recognized in whole or in part under section 1039 (relating to certain sales of low-income housing projects), then the basis of the section 1250 property and other property acquired in the transaction shall be determined in accordance with the rules of this subparagraph. Generally, the basis of the property acquired in a transaction to which section 1039(a) applies is its cost reduced by the amount of any gain not recognized attributable to the property disposed of (see section 1039(d)). In a case where the replacement section 1250 property constructed, reconstructed, or acquired within the reinvestment period is treated as consisting of more than one element under section 1250(d)(8)(e), the aggregate basis of the property determined under section 1039(d) shall be allocated as follows: first, to the reinvestment element of the section 1250 property, in an amount equal to the amount determined under section 1250(d)(8)(E)(i) reduced by the amount of any gain not recognized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of; second, to the other replacement property (other than section 1250 property) in an amount equal to the amount of its cost reduced (but not below zero) by any remaining amount of gain not recognized; and finally, to the additional cost element of the section 1250 property, in an amount equal to the amount determined under section 1250(d)(8)(E)(ii) reduced by any amount of gain not recognized which has not been taken into account in determining the basis of the reinvestment element and the other replacement property that is not section 1250 property. See paragraph (h)(2) of this section for definition of the terms reinvestment element and additional cost element.

(ii) The principles of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. The facts are the same as in example (1) of subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph. The basis of the replacement section 1250 property is $225,000, the amount of the reinvestment element ($425,000) minus the gain not recognized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of ($200,000).

Example 2. Taxpayer C disposes of a qualified housing project on January 1, 1971. The adjusted basis for the project is $3,800,000, of which $3,000,000 is attributable to section 1250 property and $800,000 is attributable to land. The amount realized on the disposition is $5,000,000, of which $4,000,000 is attributable to the section 1250 property and $1,000,000 is attributable to the land. The gain realized upon the disposition is $1,200,000, that is, amount realized ($5,000,000) minus adjusted basis ($3,800,000), of which $1,000,000 is attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of. Within the reinvestment period, C purchases another qualified housing project at a cost of $5,500,000, of which $4,000,000 is attributable to section 1250 property and $1,500,000 is attributable to other property. C makes an election under section 1039(a) and the regulations thereunder and none of the $1,200,000 gain realized on the disposition is recognized (determined without regard to section 1250). Under section 1250(d)(8)(A), none of the gain realized is recognized under section 1250(a). The basis of the replacement section 1250 property is $3,000,000, that is, the amount of the reinvestment element ($4,000,000) less the amount of gain not recognized attributable to section 1250 property disposed of ($1,000,000). The basis of the other property acquired is $1,300,000, that is, its cost ($1,500,000) reduced by the remaining gain not recognized ($200,000).

Example 3. The facts are the same as in example (2) except that the cost of the replacement section 1250 property is $4,500,000 and the cost of the other property is $1,000,000. Thus, the replacement section 1250 property consists of two elements under section 1250(d)(8)(E). The reinvestment element (section 1250(d)(8)(E)(i)) has a basis of $3,000,000, that is $4,000,000 (that portion of the section 1250 property acquired the cost of which does not exceed the net amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of), reduced by $1,000,000 (the gain not recognized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of). The basis of the other property is $800,000, that is, its cost ($1,000,000) reduced by the remaining gain not recognized ($200,000). The additional cost element (section 1250(d)(8)(E)(ii)) has a basis of $500,000, that is, the portion of the section 1250 property acquired the cost of which exceeds the net amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of. This amount ($500,000) is not reduced by any amount of gain not recognized because all of the gain not recognized has already been taken into account in determining the basis of the reinvestment element and the other replacement property that is not section 1250 property.

(4) Additional depreciation for property acquired.

(i) If a qualified housing project is disposed of in a transaction to which section 1039(a) applies, the additional depreciation for the replacement property immediately after the transaction shall be an amount equal to

(a) the amount of additional depreciation for the property disposed of, minus

(b) the amount of additional depreciation necessary to produce the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a). Thus, if no gain is recognized upon a disposition of a qualified housing project, the additional depreciation for the property acquired will be the same as for the property disposed of. On the other hand, if upon disposition of a project, gain of $40,000 was recognized under section 1250(a), and if the additional depreciation for the project and the applicable percentage were $100,000 and 80 percent, respectively, the additional depreciation for the replacement housing project would be $50,000, that is, $100,000 minus $50,000, the amount of additional depreciation necessary to produce $40,000 of recognized gain where the applicable percentage is 80 percent.

(ii) If the property acquired in the transaction consists of more than one element of section 1250 property by reason of section 1250(d)(8)(E), the additional depreciation under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph shall be allocated solely to the reinvestment element.

(5) Additional limitation. If, in a transaction to which section 1039(a) applies, gain is recognized by the taxpayer, the amount of gain recognized which is attributable to section 1250 property disposed of is, under section 1250(d)(8)(F)(i), limited to an amount equal to the net amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of reduced by the greater of (i) the adjusted basis of the section 1250 property disposed of, or (ii) the cost of the section 1250 property acquired. The limitation of section 1250(d)(8)(F)(i) may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Taxpayer D owns property constituting a qualified housing project under section 1039(b)(1). In an approved disposition, the project is sold for $225,000. The net amount realized on the disposition is $225,000 of which $175,000 is attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of. The adjusted basis of such property is $150,000 and thus the gain realized upon the disposition of the section 1250 property is $25,000. Assume that the total gain realized upon disposition of the project is $45,000. Within the reinvestment period, D purchases another qualified housing project at a cost of $200,000, of which $160,000 is attributable to section 1250 property. D elects, in accordance with section 1039(a) and the regulations thereunder, to limit the recognition of gain to $25,000, that is, the net amount realized ($225,000), minus the cost of the replacement housing project ($200,000). Under this subparagraph, $15,000 of the $25,000 gain recognized is attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of, that is, the net amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of ($175,000), reduced by $160,000, the greater of the adjusted basis of the section 1250 property disposed of ($150,000) or the cost of the section 1250 property acquired ($160,000).

(6) Allocation rule.

(i) If, in a transaction to which paragraph (h)(1) of this section applies, the section 1250 property disposed of is treated as consisting of more than one element by reason of the application of section 1250(d)(8)(E) with respect to a prior transaction, then the amount of gain recognized, the net amount realized, and the additional depreciation with respect to each such element shall be allocated to the elements of the replacement section 1250 property in accordance with the provisions of this subparagraph.

(ii) The portion of the net amount realized upon such a disposition which shall be allocated to each element of the section 1250 property disposed of is that amount which bears the same ratio to the net amount realized attributable to all the section 1250 property disposed of in the transaction as the additional depreciation for that element bears to the total additional depreciation for all elements disposed of. If any gain is recognized upon disposition of the section 1250 property, such gain shall be allocated to each element in the same proportion as the gain realized for that element bears to the gain realized for all elements disposed of. The additional depreciation for each reinvestment element of the replacement section 1250 property shall be the same as for the corresponding element of the property disposed of, decreased by the amount of additional depreciation necessary to produce the amount of gain recognized for such element. The additional depreciation for any additional cost element shall be zero.

(iii) The principles of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Taxpayer E disposes of a qualified housing project in an approved disposition. The net amount realized is $1,090,000 of which $900,000 is attributable to section 1250 property. The section 1250 property consists of (1) a reinvestment element with an adjusted basis of $300,000, additional depreciation of $100,000, and an applicable percentage of 50 percent, and (2) an additional cost element with an adjusted basis of $200,000, additional depreciation of $50,000, and an applicable percentage of 80 percent. Gain of $400,000 is realized on the disposition of the section 1250 property, that is, amount realized ($900,000) minus adjusted basis ($500,000). Within the reinvestment period, E purchases another qualified housing project at a cost of $1,000,000 of which $840,000 is attributable to section 1250 property. E elects, in accordance with section 1039 and the regulations thereunder, to limit recognition of gain (determined without regard to section 1250) to $90,000, that is, the excess of the net amount realized ($1,090,000) over the cost of the replacement project ($1,000,000). Under section 1250(d)(8)(A), the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a) is limited to $90,000 (see subparagraph (1) of this paragraph). Under section 1250(d)(8)(F)(ii) and this subparagraph, $600,000 of the $900,000 net amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property is allocated to the reinvestment element, that is, additional depreciation for the element ($100,000) over total additional depreciation ($150,000) times the net amount realized ($900,000). The remaining $300,000 is allocated to the additional cost element. Thus, the gain realized attributable to the reinvestment element is $300,000, that is, net amount realized ($600,000) minus adjusted basis ($300,000). The gain realized attributable to the additional cost element is $100,000, that is, net amount realized ($300,000) minus adjusted basis ($200,000). Under subparagraph (5) of this paragraph, the gain recognized attributable to the section 1250 property is limited to $60,000, that is, the net amount realized attributable to the section 1250 property disposed of ($900,000) minus the greater of the adjusted basis of such property ($500,000) or the cost of the section 1250 property acquired in the transaction ($840,000). Under section 1250(d)(8)(F)(ii) and this subparagraph, $45,000 of the $60,000 gain recognized is attributable to the reinvestment element, that is, $60,000 multiplied by a fraction whose numerator is the gain realized attributable to the reinvestment element ($300,000) and whose denominator is the total gain realized attributable to all the section 1250 property ($400,000). The remaining $15,000 of the gain recognized is attributable to the additional cost element. The new property acquired has no additional cost element. The reinvestment element of the new property acquired consists of 2 subelements corresponding to the reinvestment element and additional cost element of the property disposed of. The subelement corresponding to the reinvestment element has additional depreciation of $10,000, that is, its additional depreciation immediately before the disposition ($100,000), minus $90,000, the amount of additional depreciation necessary to produce $45,000 of section 1250(a) gain where the applicable percentage is 50 percent. The subelement corresponding to the additional cost element has additional depreciation of $31,250, that is, its additional depreciation immediately before the disposition ($50,000), minus $18,750, the amount of additional depreciation necessary to produce $15,000 of section 1250(a) gain where the applicable percentage is 80 percent.

[T.D. 7084, 36 FR 275, Jan. 8, 1971, as amended by T.D. 7193, 37 FR 12957, June 30, 1972; T.D. 7400, 41 FR 5101, Feb. 4, 1976; 41 FR 7095, Feb. 17, 1976]

§ 1.1250-4 Holding period.

(a) General. In general, for purposes only of determining the applicable percentage (as defined in section 1250 (1)(C) and (2)(B)) of section 1250 property, the holding period of the property shall be determined under the rules of section 1250(e) and this section and not under the rules of section 1223. If the property is treated as consisting of two or more elements (within the meaning of paragraph (c)(1) of § 1.1250-5), see paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of § 1.1250-5 for application of this section to determination of holding period of each element. Section 1250(e) does not affect the determination of the amount of additional depreciation in respect of section 1250 property.

(b) Beginning of holding period.

(1) For the purpose of determining the applicable percentage, in the case of property acquired by the taxpayer (other than by means of a transaction referred to in paragraph (c) or (d) of this section), the holding period of the property shall begin on the day after the date of its acquisition. See section 1250(e)(1)(A). Thus, for example, if a taxpayer purchases section 1250 property on January 1, 1965, the holding period of the property begins on January 2, 1965. If he sells the property on October 1, 1966, the holding period on the day of the sale is 21 full months, and, accordingly, the applicable percentage is 99 percent. This result would not be changed even if the property initially had been used solely as the taxpayer's residence for a portion of the 21-month period. If, however, the property were sold on September 30, 1966, the holding period would be only 20 full months.

(2) For the purpose of determining the applicable percentage in the case of property constructed, reconstructed, or erected by the taxpayer, the holding period of the property shall begin on the first day of the month during which the property is placed in service. See section 1250(e)(1)(B). Thus, for example, if a taxpayer constructs section 1250 property and places it in service on January 15, 1965, its holding period begins on January 1, 1965. If the taxpayer sells the property on December 31, 1966, its holding period on the day of sale is 24 full months, and, accordingly, the applicable percentage is 96 percent. For purposes of this subparagraph, property is placed in service on the date on which it is first used, whether in a trade or business, in the production of income, or in a personal activity. Thus, for example, a residence constructed by a taxpayer for his personal use is placed in service on the date it is occupied as a residence. For purposes of determining the date property is placed in service, it is immaterial when the period begins for depreciation with respect to the property under any depreciation practice under which depreciation begins in any month other than the month in which the property is placed in service. If one or more units of a single property are placed in service on different dates before the completion of the property, see paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.1250-5 (relating to treatment of each such unit as an element).

(c) Property with transferred basis. Under section 1250(e)(2), if the basis of property acquired in a transaction described in this subparagraph is determined by reference to its basis in the hands of the transferor, then the holding period of the property in the hands of the transferee shall include the holding period of the property in the hands of the transferor. The transactions described in this subparagraph are:

(1) A gift described in section 1250(d)(1).

(2) Certain transfers at death to the extent provided in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.1250-3.

(3) Certain tax-free transactions to which section 1250(d)(3) applies. For application of section 1250 (d)(3) and (e)(2) to a distribution by a partnership to a partner, see paragraph (f)(1) of § 1.1250-3.

(4) A transfer described in paragraph (e)(4) of § 1.1250-3 (relating to transaction under section 1081(d)(1)(A)).

(5) A transfer at death where the basis of the property in the hands of the transferee is determined under section 1022.

(d) Principal residence acquired in certain transactions. The holding period of a principal residence acquired in a transaction to which section 1034 and paragraph (g)(6) of § 1.1250-3 apply includes the holding period of the principal residence disposed of in such transaction. See section 1250(e)(3). The holding period of a principal residence acquired does not include the period beginning on the day after the date of the disposition and ending on the date of the acquisition.

(e) Application of transferred basis and principal residence rules. The determination of holding period under this section shall be made without regard to whether a transaction occurred prior to the effective date of section 1250 and without regard to whether there was any gain upon the transaction. Thus, for example, under paragraph (c) of this section a donee's holding period for property includes his donor's holding period notwithstanding that the gift occurred on or before December 31, 1963, or that there was no additional depreciation in respect of the property at the time of the gift.

(f) Qualified low-income housing project acquired in certain transactions. The holding period of a reinvestment element (and of subelements thereof) of section 1250 property (as defined in paragraph (h) (2) of § 1.1250-3) acquired in a transaction to which sections 1039(a) and 1250(d)(8)(A) apply includes the holding period of the corresponding element of the section 1250 property disposed of. See section 1250(e)(4). The holding period of the additional cost element (as defined in paragraph (h)(2) of § 1.1250-3) begins on the date the replacement project is acquired. The holding period of a reinvestment element of section 1250 property does not include the period beginning on the day after the date of the disposition and ending

(1) on the date of the acquisition of the replacement housing project, or

(2) on the date the replacement housing project constructed or reconstructed by the taxpayer is placed in service.

(g) Cross reference. If the adjusted basis of the property in the hands of the transferee immediately after a transaction to which paragraph (c) or (d) of this section applies exceeds its adjusted basis in the hands of the transferor immediately before the transaction, the excess is an addition to capital account under paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of § 1.1250-5 (relating to property with two or more elements).

(h) Effective/applicability date. This section applies on and after January 19, 2017. For rules before January 19, 2017, see § 1.1250-4 as contained in 26 CFR part 1 revised as of April 1, 2016.

[T.D. 7084, 36 FR 281, Jan. 8, 1971, as amended by T.D. 7400, 41 FR 5103, Feb. 4, 1976; T.D. 9811, 82 FR 6241, Jan. 19, 2017]

§ 1.1250-5 Property with two or more elements.

(a) Dispositions before January 1, 1970

(1) Amount treated as ordinary income. If section 1250 property consisting of two or more elements (described in paragraph (c) of this section) is disposed of before January 1, 1970, the amount of gain taken into account under section 1250(a)(2) shall be the sum, determined in three steps under subparagraphs (2), (3), and (4) of this paragraph, of the amounts of gain for each element.

(2) Step 1. The first step is to make the following computations:

(i) In respect of the property as a whole, compute the additional depreciation (as defined in section 1250(b)), and the gain realized. For purposes of this paragraph, in the case of a transaction other than a sale, exchange or involuntary conversion, the gain realized shall be considered to be the excess of the fair market value of the property over its adjusted basis.

(ii) In respect of each element as if it were a separate property, compute the additional depreciation for the element, and the applicable percentage (as defined in section 1250(a)(2)) for the element. For additional depreciation in respect of an element of property acquired in certain transactions, see paragraph (e) of this section. For purposes of determining additional depreciation, the holding period of an element shall be determined under section 1223, applied by treating the element as a separate property. However, for the purpose of determining applicable percentage, the holding period for an element shall, except to the extent provided in paragraphs (c)(5), (e), and (f) of this section, be determined in accordance with the rules prescribed in § 1.1250-4.

(3) Step 2. The second step is to determine the amount of gain for each element in the following manner:

(i) If the amount of additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole is equal to the sum of the additional depreciation in respect of each element having additional depreciation, and if such amount is not more than the gain realized, then the amount of gain to be taken into account for an element is the product of the additional depreciation for the element, multiplied by the applicable percentage for the element.

(ii) If subdivision (i) of this subparagraph does not apply, the amount of gain to be taken into account for an element is the product of:

(a) The additional depreciation for the element, multiplied by

(b) The applicable percentage for the element, and multiplied by

(c) A ratio, computed by dividing

(1) the lower of the additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole or the gain realized, by

(2) the sum of the additional depreciation in respect of each element having additional depreciation.

(4) Step 3. The third step is to compute the sum of the amounts of gain for each element, as determined in step 2.

(5) Examples. The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

Gain of $35,000 is realized upon a sale, before January 1, 1970, of section 1250 property which consists of four elements (W, X, Y, and Z). Since on the date of the sale the amount of additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole ($24,000) is equal to the sum of the additional depreciation in respect of each element having additional depreciation and is less than the gain realized, the additional depreciation for each element is determined under subparagraph (3)(i) of this paragraph. The amount of gain taken into account under section. 1250(a)(2) is $7,500, as determined in the following table in accordance with the additional facts assumed.

Element Additional
depreciation ×
Applicable percentage= Gain for
element
W $12,000 × 0= 0
X 6,000 × 50= $3,000
Y 0 × 63= 0
Z 6,000 × 75= 4,500
Totals 24,000 7,500

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that in respect of the property as a whole the additional depreciation is $20,000 because with respect to element Y additional depreciation allowed was $4,000 less than straight line. Accordingly, the sum of the additional depreciation for each element having additional depreciation is $24,000, that is, $4,000 greater than the additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole. Thus, the additional depreciation for each element is determined under subparagraph (3)(ii) of this paragraph. The ratio referred to in subparagraph (3)(ii)(c) of this paragraph is twenty twenty-fourths, that is, the lower of additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole ($20,000) or the gain realized ($35,000), divided by the sum of the additional depreciation in respect of each element having additional depreciation ($24,000). The amount of gain taken into account under section 1250(a)(2) is $6,250, as determined in the following table:

Element Additional
depreciation ×
Applicable percentage × Ratio= Gain for
element
W $12,000 × 0 × 20:24= 0
X 6,000 × 50 × 20:24= $2,500
Y 0 × 63 × 20:24= 0
Z 6,000 × 75 × 20:24= 3,750
Totals 24,000 6,250

(b) Dispositions after December 31, 1969

(1) Amount treated as ordinary income. If section 1250 property consisting of two or more elements (described in paragraph (c) of this section) is disposed of after December 31, 1969, the amount of gain taken into account under section 1250(a) shall be the sum, determined in 5 steps under subparagraphs (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6) of this paragraph, of the amount of gain for each element. Steps 3 and 4 are used only if the gain realized exceeds the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, in respect of the property as a whole.

(2) Step 1. The first step is to make the following computations:

(i) In respect of the property as a whole, compute the additional depreciation (as defined in section 1250(b)) attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, and the gain realized. For purposes of this paragraph, in the case of a transaction other than a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion, the gain realized shall be considered to be the excess of the fair market value of the property over its adjusted basis.

(ii) In respect of each element as if it were a separate property, compute the additional depreciation for the element attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, and the applicable percentage (as defined in section 1250(a)(1)) for the element. For additional depreciation in respect of an element of property acquired in certain transactions, see paragraph (e) of this section. For purposes of determining additional depreciation, the holding period of an element shall be determined under section 1223, applied by treating the element as a separate property. However, for the purpose of determining applicable percentage, the holding period for an element shall, except to the extent provided in paragraphs (c)(5), (e), and (f) of this section, be determined in accordance with the rules prescribed in § 1.1250-4.

(3) Step 2. The second step is to determine the amount of gain recognized for each element under section 1250(a) (1) in the following manner:

(i) If the amount of additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, is equal to the sum of the additional depreciation in respect of each element having such additional depreciation, and if such amount is not more than the gain realized, then the amount of gain to be taken into account for an element under section 1250(a)(1) is the product of the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1960, for the element, multiplied by the applicable percentage for the element determined under section 1250(a)(1).

(ii) If subdivision (i) of this subparagraph does not apply, the amount of gain to be taken into account under section 1250(a)(1) for an element is the product of:

(a) The additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, for the element multiplied by

(b) The applicable percentage for the element determined under section 1250(a)(1) for the element, and multiplied by

(c) A ratio, computed by dividing

(1) the lower of the additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole which is attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, or the gain realized, by

(2) the sum of the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, in respect of each element having such additional depreciation.

(4) Step (3). If the gain realized exceeds the additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole attributable to periods after December 31, 1969.

(i) Compute the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, and the remaining gain (or remaining potential gain in the case of a transaction other than a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion), in respect of the property as a whole.

(ii) Compute the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, and the applicable percentage determined under section 1250(a)(2) in respect of each element as if it were a separate property. For additional depreciation in respect of an element of property acquired in certain transactions, see paragraph (e) of this section. For purposes of determining additional depreciation, the holding period of an element shall be determined under section 1223, applied by treating the element as a separate property. However, for the purpose of determining applicable percentage, the holding period of an element shall, except to the extent provided in paragraphs (c)(5), (e), and (f) of this section, be determined in accordance with the rules prescribed in § 1.1250-4.

(5) Step (4). The fourth step is to compute the gain recognized under section 1250(a)(2) for each element (if computation was required under step (3)) in the following manner:

(i) If the amount of additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, is equal to the sum of the additional depreciation in respect of each element having such additional depreciation, and if such amount is not more than the remaining gain (or remaining potential gain), then the amount of gain to be taken into account for an element under section 1250(a)(2) is the product of the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, for the element, multiplied by the applicable percentage determined under section 1250(a)(2) for the element.

(ii) If subdivision (i) of this subparagraph does not apply, the amount of gain to be taken into account for an element under section 1250(a)(2) is the product of:

(a) The additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, for the element, multiplied by,

(b) The applicable percentage for the element determined under section 1250(a)(2), and multiplied by,

(c) A ratio, computed by dividing (1) the lower of the additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole which is attributable to periods before January 1, 1970,

or the remaining gain (or remaining potential gain), by (2) the sum of the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970, in respect of each element having additional depreciation.

(6) Step (5). The fifth step is to compute the sum of the amount of gain for each element, as determined in steps (2) and (4).

(7) Examples. The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

Gain of $60,000 is realized upon a sale, after the December 31, 1969, of section 1250 property which was constructed by the taxpayer after such date. The property consists of four elements (W, X, Y, and Z). Since on the date of sale the amount of additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, in respect of the property as a whole ($32,000), is equal to the sum of the additional depreciation in respect of each element having such additional depreciation and is less than the gain realized, the gain recognized for each element is determined under subparagraph (3)(i) of this paragraph. The amount of gain taken into account under section 1250(a)(1) is $28,500, as determined in the following table in accordance with the additional facts assumed:

Element Additional
depreciation after
Dec. 31, 1969 ×
Applicable percentage= (1250(a)(1)) Gain for
element
W $14,000 × 80= $11,200
X 6,000 × 90= 5,400
Y 2,000 × 95= 1,900
Z 10,000 × 100= 10,000
Total 32,000 28,500

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that the property was acquired by the taxpayer before January 1, 1970. Since the gain realized ($60,000) exceeds the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 ($32,000), section 1250(a)(2) applies to the remaining gain of $28,000. Since the additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole attributable to periods before January 1, 1970 ($21,000), is equal to the sum of the additional depreciation in respect of each element having such additional depreciation and is less than the remaining gain ($28,000), the amount of gain recognized for each element under section 1250(a)(2) is determined under subparagraph (5)(i) of this paragraph. The amount of gain taken into account under section 1250(a)(1) is $28,500 the same as in example (1). The amount of gain taken into account under section 1250(a)(2) is $3,900, as determined in the following table in accordance with the additional facts assumed:

Element Additional
depreciation before
Jan. 1, 1970 ×
Applicable percentage= (1250(a)(2)) Gain for
element
(1250)(a)(2))
W $8,000 × 0= $0
X 6,000 × 10= 600
Y 2,000 × 15= 300
Z 5,000 × 60= 3,000
Total 21,000 3,900

Example 3.

(i) The facts are the same as in example (2) except that element Y has a deficit in additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, of $6,000 and thus the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969, in respect of the property as a whole is $24,000. The sum of the additional depreciation for each element having additional depreciation is $30,000, or $6,000 more than the additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole. Thus, the gain recognized for each element under section 1250(a)(1) is determined under subparagraph (3)(ii) of this paragraph. The ratio referred to in subparagraph (3)(ii) (c) of this paragraph is 24:30, that is, the lower of the additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 ($24,000), or the gain realized ($60,000), divided by the sum of the additional depreciation in respect of each element having such additional depreciation ($30,000). The amount of gain taken into account under section 1250(a)(1) is $21,280, as determined in the following table:

Element Additional
depreciation ×
Applicable
percentage × (1250(a)(1))
Ratio= Gain for
element
W $14,000 × 80 × 24:30= $8,960
X 6,000 × 90 × 24:30= 4,320
Y (6,000) × 95 × 24:30= 0
Z 10,000 × 100 × 24:30= 8,000
Total 24,000 21,280

(ii) In addition, gain is recognized under section 1250(a)(2) since there is a remaining potential gain of $36,000, that is, gain realized ($60,000) minus the additional depreciation attributable to periods after December 31, 1969 ($24,000). The gain recognized in respect of each element and the gain recognized under section 1250(a)(2) ($3,900) are the same as in example (2), since the additional depreciation attributable to periods before January 1, 1970 ($21,000) is less than the remaining gain ($36,000).

(c) Element

(1) General. For purposes of this section, in the case of section 1250 property there shall be treated as separate elements the separate improvements, units, remaining property, special elements, and low-income housing elements which are respectively referred to in paragraphs (c) (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6) of this section.

(2) Separate improvements. There shall be treated as an element each separate improvement (as defined in paragraph (d)(1) of this section) to the property.

(3) Units. If before completion of section 1250 property one or more units thereof are placed in service, each such unit of the section 1250 property shall be treated as an element.

(4) Remaining property. The remaining property which is not taken into account under subparagraph (2) or (3) of this paragraph shall be treated as an element.

(5) Special elements.

(i) If the basis of section 1250 property is reduced in the manner described in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.1250-3 (relating to property acquired from a decedent prior to his death) or in paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of § 1.1250-3 (relating to basis reduction under section 1071 or 1082(a)(2)), then such property shall be considered as having a special element with additional depreciation equal to the amount of additional depreciation included in the depreciation adjustments (referred to in paragraph (d)(1) of § 1.1250-2) to which the basis reduction is attributable. For purposes of computing applicable percentage, the holding period of a special element under this subdivision shall be determined under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) or (e)(3)(iii) (whichever is applicable) of § 1.1250-3.

(ii) If a disposition described in section 1250(d)(4)(A) (relating to like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions) of a portion of an item of property gives rise to an addition to capital account (described in the last sentence of paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section) which is not a separate improvement, then such property shall be considered as having a special element with additional depreciation and, for purposes of computing applicable percentage, a holding period determined under paragraph (d)(7) of § 1.1250-3.

(6) Low-income housing elements. If, in an approved disposition of a qualified housing project, a replacement qualified housing project is treated as consisting of more than one element of section 1250 property by reason of section 1250(d)(8)(E) (see paragraph (h)(2) of § 1.1250-3), the elements determined under such section shall be treated as elements for purposes of this section. For definition of the terms qualified housing project and approved disposition, see section 1039(b) and the regulations thereunder.

(7) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

A taxpayer constructs an apartment house which he places in service in three stages. The total cost is $1 million, of which $350,000 is allocable to the first stage, $500,000 to the second stage, and $150,000 to the third stage. The first stage, which is placed in service on January 1, 1965, consists of 300 apartments and certain facilities including a central heating system and a common lobby. The second stage, which is placed in service on July 15, 1965, consists of 550 apartments and certain facilities including the motor for a central air-conditioning system. The third stage, which is placed in service on January 19, 1966, consists of the residue of the apartment house. On December 31, 1968, the taxpayer disposes of the apartment house. On such date, the apartment house has three elements which are described in the table below:

Stage Kind of
element
Cost Full months in holding period Applicable percentage
1 Unit $350,000 48 72
2 Unit 500,000 42 78
3 Remaining property 150,000 36 84

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1) except that on January 1, 1969, two new floors, which were added after the apartment house was completed, are placed in service and that on July 1, 1972, the taxpayer disposes of the building. Assume further that the two new floors are one separate improvement (within the meaning of paragraph (d) of this section). On the date disposed of, the property consists of four elements, that is, the three elements described in example (1) and the separate improvement.

(d) Separate improvement

(1) Definition. For purposes of this section, with respect to any section 1250 property, the term separate improvement means an addition to capital account described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph which qualifies as an improvement under the 1-year test prescribed in subparagraph (3) of this paragraph and which satisfies the 36-month test prescribed in subparagraph (4) of this paragraph.

(2) Addition to capital account.

(i) In the case of any section 1250 property, an addition to capital account described in this subparagraph is any addition to capital account in respect of such property after its initial acquisition or completion by the taxpayer or by any person who held the property during a period included in the taxpayer's holding period (see § 1.1250-4) for the property. An addition to the capital account of section 1250 property may arise, for example, if there is an expenditure for section 1250 property which is an improvement, replacement, addition, or alteration to such property (regardless of whether the cost thereof is capitalized or charged against the depreciation reserve). In such a case, the addition to capital account is the gross addition, unreduced by amounts attributable to replaced property, to the net capital account and not the net addition to such account. Thus, if a roof has an adjusted basis of $20,000, and is replaced by constructing a new roof at a cost of $50,000, the gross addition of $50,000 is an addition to capital account. (The adjusted basis of the old roof is no longer included in the capital account for the property.) For purposes of this section, the status of an addition to capital account is not affected by whether or not it is treated as a separate property for purposes of determining depreciation adjustments. In case of an addition to the capital account of property arising after December 31, 1963, upon a disposition referred to in section 1250(d)(4) (relating to like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions) of a portion of an item of such property, the amount of such addition (and its basis for all purposes of the Code) shall be the basis thereof determined under paragraph (d) (2), (3), or (4) (whichever is applicable) of § 1.1250-3, applied by treating such portion and such addition as separate properties.

(ii) An addition to capital account may be attributable to an excess of the adjusted basis of section 1250 property in the hands of a transferee immediately after a transaction referred to in section 1250(e)(2) (relating to holding period of property with transferred basis) over its adjusted basis in the hands of the transferor immediately before the transaction. Thus, for example, such excess may arise from a gift which is in part a sale or exchange (see paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1250-3), from an increase in basis due to gift tax paid (see section 1015(d)), from a transfer referred to in paragraph (c)(2) of § 1.1250-3 (relating to certain tax-free transactions) in which gain is partially recognized, or from a distribution by a partnership to a partner in which no gain is recognized by reason of the application of section 731. Similarly, an addition to capital account may be attributable to an excess of the adjusted basis of a principal residence acquired in a transaction referred to in section 1250(e)(3) over the adjusted basis of the principal residence disposed of, as well as to any increase in the adjusted basis of section 1250 property of a partnership by reason of an optional basis adjustment under section 734(b) or 743(b).

(iii) Whether or not an expenditure shall be treated as an addition to capital account described in this subparagraph, as distinguished from a separate item of property, may depend on how the property or properties are disposed of. Thus, for example, if a taxpayer, who owns a motel consisting of 10 buildings with common heating and plumbing systems, adds to the motel three new buildings which are connected to the common systems, and if the taxpayer sells the motel to one person in one transaction, then for purposes of this subparagraph the cost of the three new buildings shall be treated as an addition to the capital account of the motel and, if the 1-year and 36-month tests of subparagraphs (3) and (4) of this paragraph are satisfied, the motel consists of at least two elements. If, however, the 10-building group and the three-building group were individually sold in separate transactions to two different people each of whom would operate his group as a separate business, the motel would consist of two items of property.

(3) One-year test for improvement.

(i) An addition to capital account of section 1250 property for any taxable year (including a short taxable year and the entire taxable year in which the disposition occurs) shall be treated as an improvement only if the sum of all additions to the capital account of such property for such taxable year exceeds the greater of:

(a) $2,000, or

(b) One percent of the unadjusted basis of the property, determined as of the beginning

(1) of such taxable year, or

(2) of the holding period (within the meaning of § 1.1250-4) of the property, whichever is the later.

(ii) For purposes of this section, the term unadjusted basis means the adjusted basis of the property, determined without regard to the adjustments provided in section 1016(a) (2) and (3) (relating to adjustments for depreciation, amortization, and depletion). For purposes of this paragraph, as of any particular date the unadjusted basis of section 1250 property

(a) includes the cost of any addition to capital account for the property which arises prior to such date (regardless of whether such addition qualified under this subparagraph as an improvement), and

(b) does not include the cost of a component retired before such date.

(iii) In respect of a particular disposition of section 1250 property by a person:

(a) There shall not be taken into account under the 1-year test for improvements in this subparagraph any addition to capital account which arises by reason of (or after) such disposition or which arises before the beginning of the holding period under § 1.1250-4 of such person for the property, and

(b) Such test shall be made in respect of each taxable year of such person (and of any prior transferor) any day of which is included under § 1.1250-4 in such person's holding period for the property, except that

(1) such test shall be made for a taxable year of such person only if such person actually owned the property on at least 1 day of such taxable year, and

(2) such test shall be made for a taxable year of such prior transferor only if such prior transferor actually owned the property on at least 1 day of such taxable year.

(iv) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. The unadjusted basis of section 1250 property as of the beginning of January 1, 1960, is $300,000. During the taxable year ending on December 31, 1960, the only additions to the capital account for the property are addition A on January 1, 1960, costing $1,000, and addition B on July 1, 1960, costing $600. Since the sum of the amounts added to capital account for such taxable year is less than $2,000, A and B are not treated as improvements. This result would not be changed if addition C, costing $600, were added on December 15, 1960, since although the sum of the additions ($1,000 plus $600 plus $600, or $2,200) exceeds $2,000, such sum is less than 1 percent of the unadjusted basis of the property as of the beginning of 1960 ($3,000, that is, 1 percent of $300,000). If however, C cost $1,500, then A, B, and C would each be considered an improvement since the sum of the amounts added to capital account $3,100) would exceed $3,000.

Example 2. Green and his son both use the calendar year as the taxable year. On February 1, 1965, Green makes addition A to a piece of section 1250 property. On June 15, 1965, Green transfers such property to his son as a gift which is in part a sale (see paragraph (a) of § 1.1250-3). Addition B arises by reason of the transfer. On August 1, 1965, the son makes addition C to the property. For purposes of determining the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a) to Green upon the transfer, the determination of whether addition A is an improvement is made without taking into account additions B and C. For purposes of determining the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a) upon a subsequent disposition of the property by the son, additions B and C would be taken into account in the determination of whether A is an improvement, and A would be taken into account in the determination of whether B and C are improvements.

Example 3. Assume the same facts as in example (2). Assume further that on September 15, 1965, the son transfers the property to a corporation in exchange for cash and stock in the corporation in a transaction qualifying under section 351 (see paragraph (c) of § 1.1250-3), and that the corporation uses a fiscal year ending November 30. For purposes of determining the amount of gain recognized under section 1250(a) upon a subsequent disposition by the corporation, the one-year test under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph is made for the entire taxable year of Green and of the son ending on December 31, 1965, and in respect of the corporation's taxable year ending November 30, 1965. Accordingly, if on December 7, 1965, addition D is made by the corporation, then, upon a subsequent disposition by the corporation, D is taken into account for purposes of the determination in respect of the entire taxable year of Green and of the son ending on December 31, 1965, and for the corporation's taxable year ending November 30, 1966, but not for purposes of the corporation's taxable year ending November 30, 1965. If D were made on January 3, 1966, D would still be taken into account for purposes of the determination in respect of the corporation's taxable year ending November 30, 1966. However, since neither Green nor his son actually owned the property on any day of the taxable year ending December 31, 1966, no determination is made in respect of such taxable year of Green or of the son.

(4) 36-month test for separate improvement.

(i) If, during the 36-month period ending on the last day of any taxable year (including a short taxable year and the entire taxable year in which the disposition occurs), the sum of the amounts treated under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph as improvements for such period exceeds the greatest of:

(a) 25 percent of the adjusted basis of the property,

(b) 10 percent of the unadjusted basis (determined under subparagraph (3)(ii) of this paragraph) of the property, or

(c) $5,000,

Then each such improvement during such period shall be treated as a separate improvement, and thus as an element. For purposes of (a) and (b) of this subdivision, the adjusted basis (or unadjusted basis) of section 1250 property shall be determined as of the beginning of the 36-month period, or as of the beginning of the holding period of the property (within the meaning of § 1.1250-4), whichever is the later.

(ii) In respect of a particular disposition of section 1250 property by a person:

(a) There shall not be taken into account under the 36-month test for separate improvements in this subparagraph any amount treated under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph as an improvement which arises by reason of (or after) the disposition or which arises before the beginning of the holding period under § 1.1250-4 of such person for the property, and

(b) Such test shall be made in respect of each 36-month period ending on the last day of each taxable year of such person (and of any prior transferor) if at least 1 day of such period is included under § 1.1250-4 in such person's holding period for the property, except that

(1) such test shall be made for a 36-month period ending on the last day of a taxable year of such person only if such person actually owned the property on at least 1 day of such period, and

(2) such test shall be made for a 36-month period ending on the last day of a taxable year of such prior transferor only if such prior transferor actually owned the property on at least 1 day of such period.

(iii) For illustration of the principles of subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, see examples (2) and (3) in subparagraph (3)(iv) of this paragraph.

(5) Example. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

(i) On December 31, 1967, X, a calendar year taxpayer, purchases an item of section 1250 property at a cost of $100,000. In the table below, the adjusted basis and unadjusted basis of the property are shown for the beginning of January 1 of each taxable year and it is assumed that each addition to capital was added on January 1 of the year shown.

Year Adjusted basis Unadjusted basis 1 percent of unadjusted basis Addition
1969 $94,000 $100,000 $1,000 A-$10,000
1970 97,030 110,000 1,100 B-4,000
1971 94,041 114,000 1,140 C-6,000
1972 92,799 120,000 1,200
1973 86,158 120,000 1,200 D-18,000

(ii) Since each addition to capital account for the property exceeds the greater of $2,000 or one percent of unadjusted basis, determined as of the beginning of the taxable year in which made, each addition to capital account qualifies as an improvement under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph.

(iii) Since the beginning of the holding period of the property under § 1.1250-4 (Jan. 1, 1968) is later than the beginning of the 36-month period ending on December 31, 1969, the determination as to whether there are any separate improvements on the property as of December 31, 1969, is made by examining the adjusted basis (or unadjusted basis) of the property as of the beginning of January 1, 1968. As of December 31, 1969, there were no separate improvements on the property since the only amount treated as an improvement for the period beginning on January 1, 1968, and ending on December 31, 1969, in addition A (costing $10,000), which is less than $25,000, that is, 25 percent of the adjusted basis ($100,000) of the property as of the beginning of January 1, 1968.

(iv) As of December 31, 1970, there were no separate improvements on the property since the sum of the amounts treated as improvements for the 36-month period ending on December 31, 1970, is $14,000 (that is, $10,000 for A, plus $4,000 for B), and this sum is less than $25,000, that is, 25 percent of the adjusted basis ($100,000) of the property as of the beginning of January 1, 1968.

(v) As of December 31, 1971, there were no separate improvements on the property since the sum of the amounts treated as improvements for the 36-month period ending on December 31, 1971, is $20,000 (that is, $10,000 for A, plus $4,000 for B, plus $6,000 for C), and this sum is less than $23,500, that is, 25 percent of the adjusted basis ($94,000) of the property as of the beginning of January 1, 1969.

(vi) As of December 31, 1972, there were no separate improvements on the property since the sum of the amounts treated as improvements for the 36-month period ending on December 31, 1972, is $10,000 (that is, $4,000 for B plus $6,000 for C), and this sum is less than $24,258 that is, 25 percent of the adjusted basis ($97,030) of the property as of the beginning of January 1, 1970.

(vii) As of December 31, 1973, C and D are separate improvements (notwithstanding that as of December 31, 1971 and 1972, C was not a separate improvement) since the sum of the amounts added for the 36-month period ending December 31, 1973, is $24,000 (that is, $6,000 for C plus $18,000 for D), and this sum exceeds the greatest of:

(a) $23,510, that is, 25 percent of the adjusted basis ($94,041) of the section 1250 property as of the beginning of January 1, 1971,

(b) $11,400, that is, 10 percent of the unadjusted basis ($114,000) of the property as of the beginning of such first day, or

(c) $5,000.

(e) Additional depreciation and holding period of property acquired in certain transactions

(1) Transferred basis. If property consisting of two or more elements is disposed of, and if the holding period of the property in the hands of the transferee for purposes of computing applicable percentage includes the holding period of the transferor by reason of the application of paragraph (c) (other than subparagraph (2) thereof) of § 1.1250-4, then the additional depreciation for each element of the property in the hands of the transferee immediately after the transfer shall be computed in the manner set forth in this subparagraph. First, any element having a deficit in additional depreciation in the hands of the transferor immediately before such transfer shall be considered to have the same deficit in the hands of the transferee. Second, elements having additional depreciation in the hands of the transferor immediately before the transfer shall be considered to have additional depreciation in the hands of the transferee. The sum of the transferee's additional depreciation for all elements of the property having additional depreciation in the hands of the transferor shall be an amount equal to the additional depreciation in respect of the property as a whole immediately after the transfer increased by the sum of the deficits in addition depreciation for all elements having such deficits. In case there is more than one element having additional depreciation, the additional depreciation for any such element in the hands of the transferee shall be computed by multiplying

(i) the amount computed under the preceding sentence by

(ii) the additional depreciation for such element in the hands of the transferor divided by the sum of the additional depreciation for all such elements having additional depreciation in the hands of the transferor. For purposes of computing applicable percentage, the holding period for an element of such property in the hands of the transferee shall include the holding period of such element in the hands of the transferor.

(2) Example. The provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: Section 1250 property has additional depreciation of $16,000 of which $12,000 is additional depreciation for element X and $4,000 for element Y. The property is transferred to a corporation in exchange for cash of $6,000 and for stock in the corporation. Assume that recognition of gain under section 1250(a) is limited to $6,000 (the amount of cash received) by reason of the application of section 351(b) (relating to transfer to corporation controlled by transferor) and section 1250(d)(3) (relating to limitation on application of section 1250 in certain tax-free transactions). Under paragraph (c)(3)(i) of § 1.1250-3, the additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the corporation immediately after the transfer is $10,000, that is, the additional depreciation for the property in the hands of the transferor immediately before the transfer ($16,000) minus the gain under section 1250(a) recognized upon the transfer ($6,000). Under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, in the hands of the corporation immediately after the transfer element X has additional depreciation of $7,500 (1216 of $10,000) and element Y as additional depreciation of $2,500 (416 of $10,000). Under paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section there is an addition of $6,000 to the capital account for the property.

(3) Principal residence. If a principal residence consisting of two or more elements is disposed of, and if for purposes of computing applicable percentage the holding period of the principal residence acquired includes the holding period of the principal residence disposed of by reason of the application of paragraph (d) of § 1.1250-4, then the additional depreciation (or a deficit in additional depreciation) for an element of the principal residence acquired immediately after the transaction shall be determined in a manner consistent with the principles of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph. For purposes of computing applicable percentage, the holding period for an element of the principal residence acquired includes the holding period of such element of the principal residence disposed of, but not the period beginning on the day after the date of the disposition and ending on the date of the acquisition.

(f) Holding period for small separate improvements

(1) General. This paragraph prescribes a special holding period solely for the purpose of computing the applicable percentage of a separate improvement (as defined in paragraph (d) of this section) which is treated as an element. See paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section for determination of holding period under section 1223 for purposes of computing additional depreciation. In respect of section 1250 property, if the amount of a separate improvement does not exceed the greater of:

(i) $2,000, or

(ii) One percent of the unadjusted basis (within the meaning of paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this section) of such property, determined as of the beginning of the taxable year in which such separate improvement was made,

Then such separate improvement shall be treated for purposes of computing applicable percentage as placed in service on the first day, of a calendar month, which is the closest such first day to the middle of the taxable year. See the last sentence of section 1250(f)(4)(B). If two such first days are equally close to the middle of the taxable year, the earliest of such days is the applicable day.

(2) Example. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

(i) The unadjusted basis of section 1250 property as of the beginning of January 1, 1960, is $100,000. During the taxable year ending on December 31, 1960, the only additions to the capital account for the property are addition A on March 10, 1960, costing $1,200 and addition B on September 16, 1960, costing $1,400. Since the sum of the additions ($2,600) exceeds the greater of $2,000 and 1 percent of unadjusted basis ($1,000, that is, 1 percent of $100,000), each addition is an improvement under the 1-year test of paragraph (d)(3) of this section. Assume that the 36-month test of paragraph (d)(4) of this section is satisfied and, therefore, each addition is a separate improvement treated as an element.

(ii) Since each element is less than $2,000, the provisions of this paragraph apply. Since there are 366 days in 1960, the middle of the year is at the end of 183 days, or July 1. Thus, that first day of a calendar month in 1960, which is the closest first day (of a calendar month) to the middle of the taxable year, is July 1, 1960. Accordingly, for purposes of computing applicable percentage, elements A and B are each treated as placed in service on July 1, 1960.

[T.D. 7084, 36 FR 275, Jan. 8, 1971, as amended by T.D. 7193, 37 FR 12957, June 30, 1972; T.D. 7400, 41 FR 5103, Feb. 4, 1976]

§ 1.1251-1 General rule for treatment of gain from disposition of property used in farming where farm losses offset nonfarm income.

(a) Applicability. The provisions of section 1251, this section, and §§ 1.1251-2 through 1.1251-4 shall apply with respect to any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1969, but only if

(1) there is a farm net loss (as defined in section 1251(e)(2) and paragraph (b) of § 1.1251-3) for the taxable year, or

(2) there is a balance in the excess deductions account (as described in § 1251-2) as of the close of the taxable year before subtracting any amount under paragraph (c)(1)(i) of § 1251-2. See section 1251(a). In general, a taxpayer who has a farm net loss and certain other taxpayers are required to establish and maintain an excess deductions account as provided in section 1251(b). Certain additions and subtractions are made to the excess deductions account, and upon the disposition of farm recapture property any gain to the extent of the balance in the excess deductions account is recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1). See paragraph (b)(1) of this section. Farm recapture property is, in general, certain farming property (other than section 1250 property) described in paragraph (1), (3), or (4) of section 1231(b). See paragraph (a) of § 1.1251-3.

(b) Ordinary income

(1) General rule. In general, subject to the provisions of subparagraphs (2), (3), (4), and (5) of this paragraph, upon a disposition of an item of farm recapture property during a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1969, the amount of which:

(i) In the case of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion, the amount realized, or

(ii) In the case of any other disposition, the fair market value of such property

exceeds the adjusted basis of such property shall be recognized under section 1251(c)(1) as gain from the sale or exchange of property which is neither a capital asset nor property described in section 1231 (that is, shall be recognized as ordinary income). The amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) shall be determined separately for each item of farm recapture property in a manner consistent with the principles of subparagraphs (4) and (5) of § 1.1245-1(a) (relating to gain from dispositions of certain depreciable property). Generally, such ordinary income treatment applies even though in the absence of section 1251(c)(1) no gain would be recognized under the Code. For example, if a corporation distributes farm recapture property as a dividend gain may be recognized as ordinary income to the corporation even though, in the absence of section 1251(c)(1), section 311(a) would preclude any recognition of gain to the corporation. For purposes of section 1251, the term disposition shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1245-1. For the relation of section 1251 to other provisions of the Code, see paragraph (e) of this section.

(2) Limitation as to dispositions of land

(i) In general. In the case of a disposition of land, gain shall be recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) only to the extent of the land's potential gain. See section 1251(c)(2)(C).

(ii) Potential gain. For purposes of section 1251, the term potential gain means in respect of land an amount equal to the excess of its fair market value over its adjusted basis, but limited to the extent of the deductions allowable in respect to such land pursuant to an election (if any) under sections 175 (relating to soil and water conservation expenditures) and 182 (relating to expenditures by farmers for clearing land) for the taxable year of disposition and the four immediately preceding taxable years regardless of whether any such preceding taxable year begins before December 31, 1969. See section (e)(5).

(iii) Cross reference. For additional recapture of certain deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 in respect of farm land, see section 1252.

(3) Exceptions and special rules. The amount of gain to be recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) after applying subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, if applicable, shall be subject to the exceptions and special rules of section 1251(d) and § 1.1251-4.

(4) Limitation as to amount in excess deductions account

(i) In general. The aggregate of the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) (after applying subparagraphs (2) and (3) of this paragraph, if applicable) shall not exceed the amount in the excess deductions account at the close of the taxable year after subtracting from the account the amount specified in section 1251(b)(3)(A) and paragraph (c)(1)(i) of § 1.1251-2. See section 1251(c)(2)(A). For transfer of amount in an excess deductions account, see section 1251(b)(5).

(ii) Dispositions taken into account. If the aggregate of the amount to which section 1251(c)(1) applies is limited for any taxable year by the application of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, section 1251(c)(1) shall apply in respect of dispositions of items of farm recapture property in the order made. See section 1251(c)(2)(B).

(5) Relationship to section 1245. If property is disposed of which qualifies as both section 1245 property (as defined in section 1245(a)(3)) as well as farm recapture property, then gain shall be recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) only to the extent that the amount of any gain realized (in the case of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion), or to the extent that the excess of the fair market value of the property over its adjusted basis (in the case of any other disposition), was not recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1). The amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1) upon a disposition of farm recapture property (i) is taken into account under paragraph (b)(2) of § 1.1251-3 for purposes of computing farm net loss (or farm net income) and (ii) is not under paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of § 1.1251-2 subtracted from the excess deductions account.

(6) Examples. The principles of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A, an unmarried individual who uses the calendar year as his taxable year, makes one disposition of farm recapture property during 1970. On June 30, 1970, he sells for $75,000 farm recapture property (other than land) with an adjusted basis of $43,000 for a realized gain of $32,000 none of which is recognized under section 1245. The balance in A's excess deductions account is $39,000 at the close of 1970 (after making the applicable additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (2) and (3)(A)). Hence, the entire gain of $32,000 is recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1), and the balance remaining in A's excess deductions account is $7,000. If, however, the original balance in the excess deductions account were only $15,000, then only $15,000 would be recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) and A's excess deductions account balance would be reduced to zero. The remaining gain of $17,000 may be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231.

Example 2. M, a calendar year corporation makes one disposition of farm recapture property during 1975. On January 15, 1975, M distributes as a dividend to its shareholders land which it had acquired on March 3, 1970. On that date, the excess of the fair market value ($67,500) over the adjusted basis of land ($45,000) is $22,500 and the sum of the deductions allowable in respect of such land under sections 175 and 182 is $5,000 for 1970 and $13,000 for the taxable year of disposition and the four immediately preceding taxable years. Thus, the potential gain (as defined in subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph) is limited to $13,000. At the end of M's taxable year (after making the applicable additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (2) and (3)(A) there is a balance of $25,000 in the excess deductions account of M. Since such balance exceeds the potential gain, M recognizes $13,000 as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) even though, in the absence of that provision, section 311(a) would preclude recognition of gain to M. The balance in M's excess deductions account is reduced by $13,000, from $25,000 to $12,000. With respect to the treatment of the remaining gain ($9,500) from the disposition of the land, see section 1252 and example (2) of paragraph (e) § 1.1252-1.

Example 3. Assume the same facts as in example (2), except that M makes a second disposition of farm recapture property during 1975. On June 5, 1975. M sells for $55,000 a breeding herd of cattle having an adjusted basis of $35,000 for a realized gain of $20,000. M had acquired the herd on April 1, 1971. Assume further that $6,000 of the $20,000 gain realized is treated as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1). Thus, the amount of gain M would recognize as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1), computed before applying the excess deductions account limitation, is $14,000. In accordance with the computation in example (1) of paragraph (c)(2) of § 1.1251-2, the excess deductions account limitations limit the maximum amount of gain which can be recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) upon the disposition of the land and the breeding herd to $25,000. Under subparagraph (4)(ii) of this paragraph, the amount of such limitation, $25,000, is assigned to each property in the order of disposition. Thus, the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251 is $13,000 (as in example (1) of this subparagraph) on the disposition of the land and $12,000 on the disposition of the breeding herd. The remaining gain of $2,000 (i.e., $14,000 minus $12,000) on the disposition of the breeding herd may be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231.

(c) Instances of nonapplication

(1) In general. Section 1251 does not apply with respect to dispositions of farm recapture property by a taxpayer during a taxable year if at the close of such year after making the necessary additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (2) and (3)(A), there is no balance in the taxpayer's excess deductions account.

(2) Losses. Section 1251(c)(1) does not apply to losses. Thus, section 1251(c)(1) does not apply if a loss is realized upon a sale, exchange or involuntary conversion of property, all of which is farm recapture property, nor does the section apply to a disposition of such property other than by way of sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion if at the time of the disposition the fair market value of such property is not greater than its adjusted basis.

(3) Certain dispositions of interests in land. Section 1251(c)(1) does not apply to dispositions of interests in land with respect to which no deductions were allowable pursuant to an election under section 175 (relating to soil and water conservation expenditures) and 182 (relating to expenditures by farmers for clearing land) for the taxable year of disposition and the four immediately preceding taxable years. For possible application of section 1252 in such a case, see example (1) of paragraph (e) of § 1.1252-1.

(d) Partnerships. [Reserved]

(e) Relation of section 1251 to other provisions

(1) General. The provisions of section 1251 apply (after applying paragraph (b)(5) of this section, relating to section 1245 property) notwithstanding any other provision of subtitle A of the Code. Thus, unless an exception or special rule under section 1251(d) and § 1.1251-4 applies, gain under section 1251(c)(1) is recognized notwithstanding any contrary nonrecognition provision or income characterizing provision. For example, section 1251 overrides section 1231 (relating to property used in a trade or business). Accordingly, gain recognized under section 1251(c)(1) upon a disposition of farm recapture property will be treated as ordinary income to the extent of the balance in the taxpayer's excess deductions account, and only the remaining gain, if any, from the disposition may be considered as gain from the sale or exchange of a capital asset if section 1231 is applicable. See example (3) of paragraph (d)(6) of this section.

(2) Nonrecognition sections overridden. The nonrecognition of gain provisions of subtitle A of the Code which section 1251 overrides include, but are not limited to, sections 267(d), 311(a), 336, 337, and 512(b)(5). See section 1251(d) and § 1.1251-4 for the extent to which 1251(c)(1) overrides sections 332, 351, 361, 371(a), 374(a), 721, 1031, and 1033.

(3) Treatment of gain not recognized under section 1251(c)(1). For treatment of gain not recognized under section 1251(c)(1), the principles of paragraph (f) § 1.1251-6 shall be applicable. Thus section 1251 does not prevent gain which is not recognized under section 1251 from being considered as gain under another provision of the Code, such as for example, section 1252(a)(1) (relating to treatment of gain from disposition of farm land). See example (1) of paragraph (e) of § 1.1252-1.

(4) Exempt income. With regard to exempt income, the principles of paragraph (e) of § 1.1245-6 shall be applicable.

(5) Normal retirement of asset in multiple asset account. Section 1251(c)(1) does not require recognition of gain upon normal retirements of farm recapture property in a multiple asset account as long as the taxpayer's method of accounting, as described in paragraph (e)(2) of § 1.167(a)-8 (relating to accounting treatment of asset retirements), does not require recognition of such gain.

(6) Installment method

(i) In general. Gain from a disposition to which section 1251(c)(1) applies may be reported under the installment method if such method is otherwise available under section 453 of the Code. In such case, the income (other than interest) on each installment payment shall be deemed to consist of gain to which section 1251(c)(1) applies until all such gain has been reported, and the remaining portion (if any) of such income shall be deemed to consist of gain to which section 1251(c)(1) does not apply. For treatment of amounts as interest on certain deferred payments, see section 483. For adjustments in the excess deductions account, see paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of § 1.1251-2.

(ii) Special rule. If a taxpayer disposes of property used in the trade or business of farming which qualifies as both section 1245 property as well as farm recapture property and elects to report the gain from such disposition under the installment method, then the income (other than interest) on each installment payment shall (a) first be deemed to consist of gain to which section 1245(a)(1) applies until all such gain has been reported, (b) The remaining portion (if any) of such income shall be deemed to consist of gain to which section 1251(e)(1) applies until all such gain has been reported, and (c) finally the remaining portion (if any) of such income shall be deemed to consist of gain to which neither section 1245(a)(1) nor 1251 (c)(1) applies. See paragraph (d)(3) of § 1.1252-1 with respect to the installment method in regard to the disposition of property which is both farm recapture property as well as farm land (as defined in section 1252(a)(2) and paragraph (a)(3)(i) of § 1.1252-1).

[T.D. 7418, 41 FR 18814, May 7, 1976; 41 FR 23669, June 11, 1976]

§ 1.1251-2 Excess deductions account.

(a) Establishment and maintenance of account

(1) General rule. With respect to any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1969, any taxpayer who:

(i) Has a farm net loss (as defined in section 1251(e)(2) and in paragraph (b) of § 1.1251-3) for such a taxable year, or

(ii) Has an excess deductions account balance as of the close of such a taxable year

shall establish (if not previously established) and maintain for purposes of section 1251 an excess deductions account. See section 1251(b)(1). Once an excess deductions account is established (or succeeded to under paragraph (e) of this section in the case of certain corporate transactions and gifts) all entries (including the entries prescribed by paragraph (f) of this section with respect to married taxpayers who file joint returns) with respect to the account must be part of the taxpayer's permanent records for all taxable years for which the account must be maintained. For purposes of applying section 1251 and this section, the term taxpayer in the case of a partnership means each partner of such partnership and in the case of an estate or trust means the estate or trust regardless of whether it is taxable under subpart A or E, subchapter J, chapter 1 of the Code.

(2) Distributions from estate or trust. If farm recapture property is distributed from an estate or trust in a transaction to which section 1251(d) (1) or (2) (relating to exceptions for gifts and transfers at death) applies, then the excess deductions account balance of the estate or trust shall be succeeded to by the distributee in the amount, if any, and manner prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of this section. For purposes of the preceding sentence only, the rules of paragraph (e)(2) of this section shall be applied by treating each distribution as a gift at the time made. Thus; for example, if all of the farm recapture property of an estate or trust is distributed to a distributee on the date the estate or trust terminates, the distributee will succeed on that date to the excess deductions account balance of the estate or trust.

(3) Exception. A taxpayer is not required to maintain an excess deductions account under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph for a taxable year if:

(i) For such taxable year there would be no additions to the taxpayer's excess deductions account, and

(ii) For the immediately preceding taxable year the balance in the taxpayer's excess deductions account was reduced to zero by reason of section 1251 (b)(3) (relating to subtractions from the account) or section 1251(b)(5) (relating to transfer of account).

(b) Additions to account

(1) General rule. For each taxable year, there shall be added to the excess deductions account an amount equal to the taxpayer's farm net loss. See section 1251(b)(2)(A).

(2) Exceptions. In the case of an individual and, in the case of an electing small business corporation (as defined in section 1371(b)), subparagraph (1) of this paragraph shall apply for a taxable year:

(i) Only if the taxpayer's nonfarm adjusted gross income (as defined in paragraph (d) of § 1.1251-3) for such year exceeds $50,000, and

(ii) Only to the extent the taxpayer's farm net loss for such year exceeds $25,000.

The limitations of this subparagraph apply to a person (other than a trust) to whom the tax rates set forth in section 1 are applicable and as prescribed in subparagraph (3) of this paragraph in respect of an electing small business corporation.

(3) Electing small business corporation

(i) Taxable years ending before December 11, 1971. For taxable years ending before December 11, 1971, in the case of an electing small business corporation (as defined in section 1371(b):

(a) For purposes of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the term the taxpayer means such corporation or any one of its shareholders, and the term such year, in the case of a shareholder, means his taxable year with which or within which the taxable year of the corporation ends (see paragraph (d)(2) of § 1.1251-3 for special rules relating to the computation of nonfarm adjusted gross income of a shareholder of an electing small business corporation), and

(b) The limitations in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph shall not apply to the corporation for a taxable year if on any day of such year there is a taxpayer who is a shareholder having, for his taxable year with which or within which the taxable year of such corporation ends, a farm net loss (as defined in paragraph (b) of § 1.1251-3).

For purposes of determining whether a shareholder of such corporation has a farm net loss, there shall not be taken into account his pro rata share of farm net income or loss of any other electing small business corporation for such corporation's taxable year ending with or within his taxable year.

(c) The provisions of this subdivision (i) do not apply for purposes of determining whether the shareholder must make an addition to his excess deductions account and the amount of such addition.

(ii) Taxable years ending after December 10, 1971. [Reserved]

(4) Married individuals

(i) Lower limitations for separate returns. If married taxpayers file separate returns, then for purposes of this paragraph each spouse shall be treated as a separate individual. However, in such case,

(a) the amount specified in subparagraph (2)(i) of this paragraph shall be $25,000 in lieu of $50,000, and

(b) the amount specified in subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph shall be $12,500 in lieu of $25,000. The lower limitations in the preceding sentence shall not apply if the spouse of the taxpayer does not have any nonfarm adjusted gross income for the taxable year. See section 1251(b)(2)(C).

(ii) Joint return. If married taxpayers for a taxable year file a joint return under section 6013, then for purposes of this paragraph they shall for such taxable year be treated as a single taxpayer. For rules applicable to establishing, maintaining, and allocating a joint excess deductions account, see paragraph (f) of this section.

(5) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. For 1971, the M Corporation which uses the claendar year as its taxable year and which is not an electing small business corporation has a farm net loss of $40,000 and nonfarm taxable income of $45,000. Since subparagraph (2) of this paragraph does not apply to M, it is required to make a $40,000 addition to its excess deductions account.

Example 2. For 1971, A, an unmarried individual who uses the calendar year as his taxable year, has a farm net loss of $33,000 and nonfarm adjusted gross income of $65,000. Under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, A is required to make an addition of $8,000 to his excess deductions account (that is, the excess of the farm net loss, $33,000, over the $25,000 amount referred to in subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph). If, however, A were a trust, the limitation in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph would not apply and such trust would be required to add $33,000 (the amount of the entire farm net loss) to its excess deductions account.

Example 3. H and W each use the calendar year as the taxable year. For 1971, H, a married taxpayer who files a separate return, has a farm net loss of $45,000 and nonfarm adjusted gross income of $60,000. H's spouse W does not have any nonfarm adjusted gross income for 1971. Thus, the lower limitations in subparagraph (4)(i) of this paragraph do not apply. Accordingly, H is required to make an addition of $20,000 to his excess deductions account (that is, the excess of the farm net loss, $45,000, over the $25,000 amount referred to in subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph).

Example 4. Assume the same facts as in example (3), except that for 1971 W has a farm net loss of $10,000 and nonfarm adjusted gross income of $30,000. Thus, the lower limitations in subparagraph (4)(i) of this paragraph do apply and H is required to make an addition of $32,500 to his excess deductions account (that is, the excess of his farm net loss, $45,000, over the $12,500 amount referred to in subparagraph (4)(i)(b) of this paragraph). Since, however, W did not have a farm net loss in excess of $12,500, she would not be required to make an addition to her excess deductions account. For the result if H and W were to file a joint return, see example (1) of paragraph (f)(6) of this section.

Example 5. For 1970, the M Corporation, which uses the calendar year as its taxable year and which is an electing small business corporation, has a farm net loss of $35,000 and nonfarm adjusted gross income of $60,000. A, B, and C, the sole equal shareholders of M, are cash method taxpayers and each uses a fiscal year ending on March 31. For the taxable year ending March 31, 1971, A has a farm net loss of $5,000. Thus, as M's taxable year ends within the taxable year of A during which A has a farm net loss, the limitations in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph do not apply with respect to M for 1970. See subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, to add $35,000 to its excess deductions account.

Example 6. Assume the same facts as in example (5), except that A's farm net loss occurred in his fiscal year ending March 31, 1970, and no shareholder of M has a farm net loss for the fiscal year ending March 31, 1971. Thus, the limitations in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph do apply with respect to M for 1970, and accordingly M is required to add $10,000 to its excess deductions account for 1970 (that is, the excess of M's farm net loss $35,000, over the $25,000 amount referred to in subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph).

Example 7. Assume the same facts as in example (6), except that M has $45,000 of nonfarm adjusted gross income for 1970 and A, for his taxable year ending March 31, 1971, has $40,000 of nonfarm adjusted gross income, computed without regard to his interest in M. Assume the M paid no dividends. Since, under paragraph (d)(2) of § 1.1251-3, A's income from M under section 1373(b) is computed on the basis of M's nonfarm adjusted gross income, A's gross income from M is $15,000 (13 of $45,000), and A's total nonfarm adjusted gross income is $55,000. Accordingly, M would be required to add $10,000 to its excess deductions account for 1970 for the reasons stated in example (6).

Example 8. Assume the same facts as in example (7). Assume further that A is one of two equal shareholders in N, another electing small business corporation with a taxable year ending on January 31, and that N for its taxable year ending on January 31, 1971, has a $42,000 nonfarm loss and farm net income of $23,000. Assume that N paid no dividends. Thus, A for purposes of subparagraph (2)(i) of this paragraph, would only have a total of $34,000 of nonfarm adjusted gross income ($55,000) computed per example (7) minus $21,000 (A's share of N's nonfarm net operating loss (12 of $42,000) computed in accordance with paragraph (d)(2) of § 1.1251-3)). Assuming that no other shareholder of M has nonfarm adjusted gross income in excess of $50,000, by reason of the $50,000 limitation in subparagraph (2)(i) of this paragraph, M makes no addition for 1971 to its excess deductions account. (N would make no addition to its excess deductions account as it does not have a farm net loss.) If, however, N were to have a nonfarm loss of only $8,000, A for purposes of subparagraph (2)(i) of this paragraph would have a total of $51,000 of nonfarm adjusted gross income ($51,000 of nonfarm adjusted gross income ($55,000, minus 12 of N's nonfarm loss of $8,000)). Hence, with respect to M the result would be the same as in example (7) (and N would make no addition to its excess deductions account since it does not have a farm net loss).

Example 9.

D and E are equal individual shareholders in corporations X, Y, and Z, the stock of each corporation having recently been purchased from a different unrelated person. X, Y, and Z are electing small business corporations. D, E, and the corporations all use the calendar year as the taxable year. For 1970, the farm net income of D and E (determined without regard to their respective pro rata shares of the farm net income or loss of X, Y, and Z) are $100,000 and zero, respectively. For 1970, the farm net income or loss of the corporations are losses of $80,000 and $20,000 for X and Z, respectively, and income of $60,000 for Y. For 1970, the determinations under subparagraph (3)(ii) of this paragraph as to whether a shareholder of corporation X or Z (no determination is necessary with respect to Y since Y does not have a farm net loss) has a farm net loss are made as follows:

Determinations as to whether D or E has a farm net loss

As to X As to Z
D E D E
Farm net income (determined without regard to X, Y, and Z) $100,000 $0 $100,000 $0
Pro rata (12) share of corporation's farm net income (or loss):
Of X (40,000) (40,000)
Of Y 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000
Of Z (10,000) (10,000)
Farm net income (or loss) for purposes of determination $120,000 $20,000 $90,000 ($10,000)

Accordingly, since the determination as to X indicates that neither D nor E has a farm net loss, the limitations of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph apply to X. Thus, assuming that X, D, or E has nonfarm adjusted gross income in excess of $50,000, X will add $55,000 to its excess deductions account, i.e., the excess of the farm net loss, $80,000, over the $25,000 amount referred to in subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph. Since, however, the determination as to Z indicates that E has a farm net loss, such limitations do not apply to Z. Thus, the addition for 1970 to Z's excess deductions account is the entire amount of its farm net loss, $20,000.

(c) Subtractions from account

(1) General rule. Under section 1251(b)(3), if there is any amount in the excess deductions account at the close of a taxable year (determined after making any addition required under paragraph (b) of this section for such year but before making any reduction under this paragraph for such year), then the excess deductions account shall be reduced (but not below zero) by subtracting:

(i) An amount equal to

(a) the farm net income (as defined in section 1251 (e)(3) and in paragraph (c) of § 1.1251-3) for such year, plus

(b) the amount (as determined in subparagraph (3) of this paragraph) necessary to adjust the account for deductions for any taxable year which did not result in a reduction of the taxpayer's tax under subtitle A of the Code for such taxable year or any preceding taxable year, and

(ii) After making any addition to the excess deductions account under paragraph (b) of this section and any reduction under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph for the taxable year, an amount equal to the sum of the amounts recognized as ordinary income solely by reason of the application of section 1251(c)(1). See section 1251(b)(3)(B). Thus, no amount shall be subtracted under this subdivision for gain recognized by reason of the application of section 1245(a)(1) or 1252(a)(1). For effect on computation of farm net loss or income of gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) upon a disposition of farm recapture property, see paragraph (b)(2) of § 1.1251-3. In the case of an installment sale of farm recapture property, the taxpayer's excess deductions account shall be reduced under this subdivision in the year of such sale by an amount equal to the gain (computed in the year of sale) to be recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1).

(2) Examples. The provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples in which it is assumed that there is no subtraction for lack of tax benefit under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph:

Example 1.

Assume the same facts as in example (3) of paragraph (b)(6) of § 1.1251-1. M's excess deductions account balance as of the close of 1975 is computed, in accordance with the additional facts assumed, in the table below:

M's Excess Deductions Account

(1) Balance January 1, 1975 $26,000
(2) Additions for 1975 0
(3) Subtotal 26,000
(4) Subtractions for 1975 (farm net income 1) 1,000
(5) Excess deductions account limitation on gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) for 1975 25,000
(6) Subtraction for disposition of farm recapture property:
(a) Gain from disposition of land to which section 1251(c)(1) applies (computed before applying limitation $13,000
(b) Gain from disposition of breeding herd to which section 1251(c)(1) applies (computed before applying limitation) 14,000
(c) Sum of lines (a) and (b) 27,000
(d) Excess deductions account limitation (amount in line (5)) 25,000
(e) Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) (lower of line (6)(c) or line (6)(d) 25,000
(7) Balance December 31, 1975 0
1 Computed by treating the section 1245 gain of $6,000 under paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of § 1.1251-3 as gross income derived from the trade or business of farming.

For allocation of the $25,000 of gain recognized as ordinary income to the land and herd, and for treatment of the gain recognized in excess of $25,000 see example (3) of paragraph (b)(6) of § 1.1251-1.

Example 2.

A is an unmarried individual who uses the calendar year as his taxable year. In 1971, A makes a single disposition of farm recapture property (other than land) realizing a gain of $46,000 of which $15,000 is recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1). The gain to which section 1251(c)(1) applies (computed before applying the excess deductions account limitation in section 1251(c)(2)(A) and paragraph (b)(4)(i) of § 1.1251-1) is $31,000 (i.e., $46,000 minus $15,000). The treatment of the gain realized on the disposition in excess of the $15,000 recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1) and the balance in A's excess deductions account as of the close of 1971 is computed, in accordance with the facts assumed, in the table below:

A's Excess Deductions Account

(1) Balance January 1, 1971 $50,000
(2) Additions for 1971:
(a) Farm net loss for 1971 1 $5,000
(b) Less amount in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section 25,000
(c) Total additions for 1971 0
(3) Subtotal 50,000
(4) Subtractions for 1971 0
(5) Excess deductions account limitation on gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) for 1971 50,000
(6) Subtraction for dispositions of farm recapture property:
(a) Gain to which section 1251(c)(1) applies (computed before applying limitation) 31,000
(b) Limitation (amount in line (5) 50,000
(c) Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) lower of line 6(a) or line 6(b) 31,000
(7) Balance December 31, 1971 19,000
1 Computed by treating the section 1245 gain of $15,000 under paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of § 1.1251-3 as gross income derived from the trade or business of farming.

(3) Amount necessary to adjust the excess deductions account with respect to deductions which did not result in a reduction of the taxpayer's tax

(i) In general. Under section 1251(b)(3)(A), a subtraction is made from the excess deductions account to adjust the account for deductions that did not result in a reduction of the taxpayer's tax for the taxable year or any preceding taxable year. The amounts to be subtracted are determined under subdivisions (ii) and (iii) of this subparagraph in accordance with the rules in subdivision (iv) of this subparagraph. This subtraction shall be made before determining the amount of gain to which section 1251(c) applies. The amount subtracted under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph is a temporary subtraction made solely to determine the amount in the excess deductions account for purposes of the limitation in section 1251(c)(2).

(ii) Temporary subtraction. The amount temporarily subtracted from the excess deductions account for a taxable year is the sum of the farm portion of

(a) any net operating loss for such taxable year which does not reduce taxable income (computed without regard to the deduction under section 172(a)) in a prior year, and

(b) any net operating loss from a prior taxable year which is carried to such taxable year but which does not reduce taxable income (computed without regard to the deduction under section 172(a)) in such taxable year.

(iii) Permanent subtraction. The amount permanently subtracted from the excess deductions account for a taxable year is the excess of the farm portion of any net operating loss which may be carried to the preceding year (reducing by the portion of such loss which reduced taxable income (computed without regard to the deduction under section 172(a)) for such preceding year) over the amount of such loss which may be carried to the taxable year, but the subtraction shall not be made earlier than the taxable year in which the excess deductions account is increased by reason of such loss.

(iv) Rules of application. For purposes of this subparagraph, the following rules shall apply:

(a) The farm portion of a net operating loss is that portion of such loss attributable to the trade or business of farming. Such portion and the remaining portion (hereinafter referred to as the nonfarm loss) shall be absorbed pro rata. If a farm net loss is not added to the excess deductions account in the year in which such loss occurs, the net operating loss (if any) for such year shall be treated as a nonfarm loss.

(b) In the case of an individual (other than a trust), the farm portion of a net operating loss shall be decreased by an amount, if any, equal to the excess of $25,000 (or the amount determined under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section) over the nonfarm adjusted gross income. Such amount shall be added to the nonfarm portion of such net operating loss.

(c) The amounts considered as reducing taxable income under subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph in the taxable year shall be determined on the basis of a tentative computation of taxable income for such year in which the gain realized from the disposition of property to which section 1251(c)(1) applied shall be computed without regard to the excess deductions account limitation.

(v) Example. The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example:

A is an unmarried individual who uses the calendar year as his taxable year. For the years 1970 through 1974, A's items of income and deductions are as shown in the table below. A's personal deductions are disregarded. A had no income or loss for any year prior to 1970. Based upon such amounts and the computations shown below, A must recognize as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1), $35,325 for 1971, $10,000 for 1972, $3,925 for 1973, and $150,000 for 1974.

Amounts assumed 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974
(a) Farm net income ($250,000) $20,000 $5,000 ($75,000) ($10,000)
(b) Nonfarm income 55,000 (82,000) 30,000 10,000 200,000
(c) Gain which would be recognized as ordinary income under 1251(c) (computed without regard to the EDA limitation) (hereinafter referred to as farm property disposition) 88,000 10,000 2,000 150,000
(d) Personal exemption 625 675 750 750 750
(e) Net operating loss (NOL) (computed per section 172(c)) (195,000) (45,000)
I. COMPUTATIONS FOR 1971
1. Excess Deductions Account (EDA) Limitation for 1971:
a. EDA on December 31, 1970:
1970 Farm net loss 250,000
Less (25,000)
225,000 225,000
b. Less farm net income for 1971 (20,000)
c. EDA before temporary subtraction 205,000
d. Less temporary subtraction per subdivision (ii)(b):
Aggregate farm NOL carryover to 1971 195,000
Less tentative farm NOL deduction for 1971:
Farm net income 20,000
Nonfarm income (82,000)
Farm property disposition 88,000
Exemption (675)
Tentative taxable income 25,325
Tentative NOL reducing taxable income 25,325 (25,325)
169,675 (169,675)
e. EDA limitation for 1971 35,325
2. 1971 Taxable Income:
a. Farm net income 20,000
b. Nonfarm income ($82,000)
c. Farm property disposition 88,000
d. Exemption (675)
e. Section 1202 deduction:
Farm property disposition $88,000
Less amount treated as ordinary income under section 1251(c) (lesser of amount of gain on line 1(e)) 35,325
Capital gain 52,675
Less 50 percent deduction 26,337 (26,338)
f. 1971 Taxable income (1,013)
II. COMPUTATIONS FOR 1972
1. Excess Deductions Account Limitation for 1972:
a. EDA (line 1(c) above) 205,000
b. Less recapture in 1971 (35,325)
c. Less farm net income for 1972 (5,000)
d. Less permanent subtraction per subdivision (iii):
1970 Farm NOL carryover to 1971 195,000
Less 1970 farm NOL carryover to 1972 (computed per section 172(b)(2)):
Farm NOL to 1971 $195,000
Less 1971 taxable income computed per section 172(b)(2):
Farm net income $20,000
Nonfarm income (82,000)
Farm property disposition 88,000
26,000 (26,000)
Farm NOL carryover to 1972 169,000 ($169,000)
26,000 ($26,000)
e. EDA before making temporary subtractions 138,675
f. Less temporary subtraction per subdivision (ii)(b):
Farm NOL carryover to 1972 169,000
Farm net income 5,000
Nonfarm income 30,000
Farm recapture disposition 10,000
Exemption (750)
Tentative taxable income 44,250
Tentative NOL reducing taxable income 44,250 (44,250)
124,750 (124,750)
g. EDA limitation for 1972 13,925
2. Taxable Income for 1972:
a. Farm net income 5,000
b. Nonfarm income 30,000
c. Farm property disposition 10,000
d. Exemption (750)
e. Section 1202 deduction:
Farm property disposition 10,000
Less amount treated as ordinary income under section 1251(c) (lesser of amount of gain on line 1(g)) 10,000 0
f. Taxable income before NOL deduction 44,250
g. Net operating loss deduction (44,250)
h. Taxable income for 1972 0
III. COMPUTATIONS FOR 1973
1. Excess Deductions Account Limitation for 1973:
a. Line 1(e) above 138,675
b. Less recapture in 1972 (10,000)
c. Less permanent subtraction per subdivision (iii):
1970 Farm NOL carryover to 1972 169,000
Less 1970 Farm NOL reducing taxable income in 1972 (44,250)
124,750 124,750
Less 1970 Farm NOL carryover to 1973 computed per section 172(b)(2):
Farm NOL to 1972 169,000
1972 Taxable income computed per section 172(b)(2):
Farm net income $5,000
Nonfarm income 30,000
Farm recapture disposition 10,000
45,000 ($45,000)
Farm NOL carryover to 1973 124,000 ($124,000)
750 ($750)
d. EDA before making temporary subtractions $127,925
e. Less temporary subtraction per subdivision (ii)(a)-zero (since 1973 farm loss treated as nonfarm addition to NOL per subdivision (iv)(a)) 0
f. Less temporary subtraction per subdivision (ii)(b): Aggregate farm NOL carryover to 1973 $124,000
Less tentative farm NOL deduction for 1973:
Farm net income ($75,000)
Nonfarm income 10,000
Farm property disposition 30,000
Exemption (750)
Tentative taxable income (44,250)
Tentative NOL reducing taxable income 0 0
124,000 (124,000)
g. EDA limitation for 1973 3,925
2. Taxable Income 1973:
a. Farm net income (75,000)
b. Nonfarm income 10,000
c. Farm property disposition 20,000
d. Exemption (750)
e. Section 1202 deduction:
Farm property disposition 20,000
Less amount treated as ordinary income under section 1251(c) (lesser of amount of gain on line 1(g)) 3,925
Capital gain 16,075
Less 50 percent deduction 8,038 (8,037)
f. Taxable income for 1973 (53,787)
IV. COMPUTATIONS FOR 1974
1. Excess Deductions Account Limitation for 1974:
a. Line 1(d) above 127,925
b. Less recapture in 1973 (13,925)
c. Farm loss for 1974 10,000
Plus farm NOL deduction (see § 1.1251-3(b)(3)) 45,000
55,000 55,000
Less 25,000
30,000 30,000
d. Less permanent subtraction per subdivision (iii):
1970 Farm NOL carryover to 1973 124,000
Less 1970 farm NOL carryover to 1974 per section 172(b)(2) 124,000
0 0
e. EDA before making temporary subtractions 154,000
f. Less temporary subtraction per subdivision (ii)(b):
Aggregrate farm NOL carryover to 1974 124,000
Less tentative farm NOL deduction in 1974:
Farm net income (10,000)
Nonfarm income 200,000
Farm property disposition 150,000
Exemption (750)
Tentative taxable income 339,250
Tentative NOL deduction 169,000
Farm portion of tentative NOL deduction 124,000
0 0
g. EDA limitation for 1974 $154,000
2. Taxable Income 1974:
a. Farm net income (10,000)
b. Nonfarm income 200,000
c. Farm property disposition 150,000
d. Exemption (750)
e. Section 1202 deduction:
Farm property disposition $150,000
Less amount treated as ordinary income under section 1251(c) (lesser of amount of gain on line 1(g)) 150,000 0
f. Taxable income before NOL deduction 339,250
g. Net operating loss deduction (169,000)
h. Taxable income 170,250

(vi) Electing small business corporation.

(a) In the case of an electing small business corporation, the amounts to be subtracted under subdivisions (ii) and (iii) of this subparagraph, shall be the sum of the amounts under such subdivisions computed with respect to each shareholder of the corporation for the taxable year of the shareholder with which or within which the taxable year of the corporation ends, by applying (b) of this subdivision (vi), in lieu of subdivision (iv)(a) of this subparagraph.

(b) For purposes of (a) of this subdivision, the farm portion of a shareholder's net operating loss is that portion of the net operating loss of such shareholder attributable to the corporation's farm net loss, and such portion and the remaining portion shall be considered to be absorbed pro rata. If a corporation's farm net loss is not added to its excess deduction account in the year in which such loss occurs, no portion of a shareholder's net operating loss for the taxable year of the shareholder with which or within which such taxable year of the corporation ends shall be attributable to such corporation's farm net loss.

(d) Exception for taxpayers using certain accounting methods

(1) General rule. Under section 1251(b)(4), except to the extent that a taxpayer has succeeded to an excess deductions account as provided in paragraph (e) of this section (relating to receipt of farm recapture property in certain corporate and gift transactions), additions to the account shall not be required by a taxpayer who elects to compute taxable income from the trade or business of farming (as defined in paragraph (e)(1) of § 1.1251-3:

(i) By using inventories for all property which may be inventoried except as to property to which subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph applies, and

(ii) In accordance with subparagraph (3) of this paragraph, by charging to capital account all expenditures paid or incurred which are properly chargeable to capital account including such expenditures which the taxpayer may, under chapter 1 of the Code or regulations prescribed thereunder, otherwise treat or elect to treat as expenditures which are not chargeable to capital account.

For rules as to procedure of making the election, effect of a change in method of accounting upon making the election, and conditions for revoking the election, see subparagraphs (4), (5), and (6), respectively, of this paragraph.

(2) Inventories. The absence of property which may be inventories shall not preclude a taxpayer from making an election under section 3251(b)(4). Any acceptable inventory method will satisfy the requirement of subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph.

(3) Property chargeable to capital account

(i) In general. Property subject to the capitalization requirement prescribed in subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph includes all property described in section 1231(b) (1) and (3), without regard to any holding period therein provided, which is used in the trade or business of farming. Thus, for example, property subject to the capitalization requirement includes property used in the trade or business of farming of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation and real property so used regardless of the period held, and livestock used in the trade or business of farming which is held for draft, breeding, dairy, or sporting purposes regardless of the period held.

(ii) Expenditures which must be capitalized. Expenditures subject to the requirement of subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph are all expenditures, whether direct or indirect, paid or incurred, which are properly chargeable to capital account. For examples of the meaning of the term properly chargeable to capital account, see §§ 1.61-4, 1.162-12, 1.263(a)-1, and 1.263(a)-2, and paragraph (a)(4) (ii) and (iii) of § 1.446-1. Other examples of expenditures referred to in subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph are expenditures under sections 175 (relating to soil and water conservation), 180 (relating to fertilizer, etc.), 182 (relating to land clearing), and 266 (relating to certain carrying charges) which (without regard to section 1251) a taxpayer may treat or elect to treat as expenditures which are not chargeable to capital account. Thus, for example, with respect to developing a farm, ranch, orchard, or grove, amounts properly chargeable to capital account include amounts paid or incurred for upkeep, taxes, interest, and other carrying charges, water for irrigation, fertilizing, controlling undergrowth, and the cultivating and spraying of trees. For a further example, with respect to a produced animal, amounts properly chargeable to capital account for the animal include all expenditures paid or incurred for producing the animal, such as for stud, breeding, and veterinary services, as well as all amounts paid or incurred with respect to the brood animal during the gestation period of the produced animal including all amounts paid or incurred for feed, maintenance, utilities, indirect overhead, depreciation, insurance, and carrying charges. Direct and indirect expenditures properly chargeable to capital account with respect to raising an animal may include, in addition to expenditures for feed, maintenance, etc., expenditures for training. Direct and indirect expenditures with respect to feed may include, in the case of a grazing operation, fees for the rental of grazing land, and the portion of all labor, taxes, interest, fencing costs, and carrying charges paid or incurred by the taxpayer allocable to grazing. For purposes of this subparagraph, reasonable allocations shall be made by the taxpayer of items between animals held for different purposes and as to each animal held. However, all amounts allocated to a brood animal during the period of gestation are, for purposes of this subparagraph, entirely chargeable to the capital of the produced animal.

(iii) Unharvested crops. With respect to unharvested crops to which section 1231(b)(4) applies, see section 268 and paragraph (g) of § 1.1016-5 (relating, respectively, to disallowance of certain deductions and to adjustments to basis).

(iv) Changes in character of property. If, in a taxable year subsequent to the first taxable year to which an election under section 1251(b)(4) applies, property which was not subject to the requirements of subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph becomes subject to such requirements, then the following rules shall apply:

(a) The adjusted basis of such property at the beginning of the taxable year in which it becomes subject to the requirements of subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph shall be equal to the amount its adjusted basis would have been on such date had it been accounted for in accordance with such requirements (taking into account, if applicable, the depreciation which would have been allowed as determined by the taxpayer using a period, salvage value, and methods that would have been proper).

(b) At the beginning of the taxable year in which such property becomes subject to the requirements of subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph:

(1) If such property was not included in the opening inventory, the amount equal to the excess of its adjusted basis as computed in (a) of this subdivision over its adjusted basis as of the close of the preceding taxable year, or

(2) If such property was included in the opening inventory, such opening inventory shall be reduced by the inventory value of such property included therein and the amount of the difference between the adjusted basis for the property computed in (a) of this subdivision and such inventory value,

Shall be added to gross income for such taxable year and shall be treated as gross income derived from the trade or business of farming under paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of § 1.1251-3, except that if the difference in (b)(2) of this subdivision represents an excess of such inventory value over the adjusted basis for the property computed in (a) of this subdivision then such excess shall be subtracted from gross income for such taxable year and shall be treated as a deduction allowed which is directly connected with carrying on the trade or business of farming under paragraph (b)(1)(i) of § 1.1251-3.

(c) If any deductions for depreciation are treated as amounts which would have been allowed in a prior taxable year or years for purposes of (a) of this subdivision, such deduction shall be treated as having been allowed for purposes of applying sections 1245 and 1250 in the same taxable year or years and thus included in the amount of adjustments reflected in adjusted basis within the meaning of paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of § 1.1245-2 or depreciation adjustments within the meaning of paragraph (d)(1) of § 1.1250-2 (as the case may be).

(d) For purposes of this subparagraph (3), if during a taxable year property becomes subject to the requirements of subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph, it shall be considered subject to such requirements on each day it is held during such year.

(e) The adjusted basis under (a) of this subdivision of property of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation shall be its basis for which deductions may be computed under section 167.

(v) Example. The provisions of subdivision (iv) of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: On January 1, 1974, A, an individual taxpayer who in a previous year had elected under section 1251(b)(4) to compute income from the trade or business of farming by using inventories and by charging to capital account all items properly chargeable to capital under the rules of subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, purchases a herd of six-month-old feeder calves for $13,000. During 1974, in connection with such herd, A incurred raising costs of $4,000 and carrying charges of $1,600 which would have been properly chargeable to capital account within the meaning of subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph if the herd had not been included in inventory. A determines under his unit-livestock method that on December 31, 1974, the inventory value of the herd is $17,000. On March 1, 1975, A decides to use one-half of the herd for breeding purposes with such part of the herd becoming subject to the capitalization requirements. On January 1, 1975, the adjusted basis for the animals held for breeding purposes, computed under the provisions of subdivision (iv)(a) of this subparagraph, is $9,300 (that is, the aggregate of one-half of the purchase price of $13,000 for the entire herd of feeder calves, $6,500, one-half of the carrying charges of $1,600 incurred during 1974 in connection with the entire herd, $800, and one-half of the $4,000 of raising costs incurred during 1974 for the entire herd, $2,000). There is no adjustment for the depreciation which would have been allowed since no animal in the herd had reached an acceptable breeding age. Therefore, A as of January 1, 1975, must under the provisions of subdivision (iv)(b)(2) of this subparagraph subtract $8,500 from his opening inventory value of $17,000. However, A has not changed his method of accounting with respect to such animals. Under the provisions of subdivision (iv)(b)(2) of this subparagraph, A for 1975 will add $800 to his gross income (that is, the difference between the adjusted basis for the calves to be used for breeding purposes, $9,300, over the inventory value of such animals, $8,500). Such amount under the provisions of subdivision (iv)(b) shall be treated as gross income derived from the trade or business of farming under paragraph (b)(1) of § 1.1251-3.

(4) Time and manner of making election

(i) In general. The election under section 1251(b)(4) for any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1969, shall be filed within the time prescribed by law (including extensions thereof) for filing the return for such taxable year. Such election shall be made and filed by attaching a statement of such election signed by the taxpayer to the return for the first taxable year for which the election is made. The statement shall contain a declaration that the taxpayer is making an election under section 1251(b)(4) of the Code and that taxable income from the trade or business of farming is computed by using inventories for all property, which may be inventoried and by charging to capital account all expenditures paid or incurred which are properly chargeable to capital account (including such expenditures which the taxpayer may, under chapter 1 of the Code or regulations prescribed thereunder, otherwise treat or elect to treat as expenditures which are not properly chargeable to capital account). Additionally, the statement must contain the information prescribed by subparagraph (5) of this paragraph, if applicable.

(ii) Joint return. If for a taxable year taxpayers file a joint return under section 6013, the election referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph must be made by both such taxpayers in accordance with the provisions of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph. If, however, in such case either of such taxpayers has for a previous taxable year made such an election, then only the taxpayer who has not made such election is required to comply with the provisions of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph. The taxpayer who previously made such an election shall attach a statement to the return specifying the taxable year for which the election was made and with whom the election was filed.

(5) Change in method of accounting, etc.

(i) In general. If, in order to comply with an election made under section 1251(b)(4), a taxpayer must change his method of accounting (in computing taxable income from the trade or business of farming) by placing in inventory a class of items not previously treated as in an inventory or by charging to capital account a class of items which had been consistently treated as an expense or as part of inventory (see paragraph (e)(2)(ii)(b) of § 1.446-1), the taxpayer will be deemed to have obtained the consent of the Commissioner as to such change in method of accounting solely as to such items and there shall be taken into account in accordance with section 481 of the Code and the regulations thereunder those adjustments which are determined to be necessary by reason of such change solely as to such items in order to prevent amounts from being duplicated or omitted. For purposes of section 481(a)(2), such change in method of accounting with respect to only such items shall be treated as a change not initiated by the taxpayer and, thus, under paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.481-1, no part of the adjustments required under section 481 with respect to such items shall be based on amounts which are taken into account in computing income (or which should have been taken into account had the new method of accounting been used) for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1954, or ending before August 17, 1954.

(ii) Additional information. If, in order to comply with an election made under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph a taxpayer (or in the case of a joint return one or both taxpayers) changes his method of accounting, then in addition to the information required to be filed under subparagraph (4) of this paragraph the taxpayer must file on Form 3115 as part of such election all the information described in paragraph (e)(3) of § 1.446-1 (relating to change in method of accounting), but the time prescribed in paragraph (e)(3) of § 1.446-1 for filing Form 3115 shall not apply.

(iii) Election made before May 7, 1976. If an election referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph was made before May 7, 1976, the taxpayer shall file not later than August 5, 1976, such information referred to in subparagraph (4) of this paragraph not previously required by applicable regulations to be filed in order to make such election, and, in addition, if subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph applies, the taxpayer shall file not later than August 5, 1976, on Form 3115 the information referred to in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph with the district director, or the director of the internal revenue service center, with whom the election was filed. For this purpose, Form 3115 shall be attached to a statement clearly identifying the election referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph and the first taxable year to which it applied.

(6) Revocability of election

(i) In general. An election referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph is binding on the taxpayer or in the case of a joint return both taxpayers) for the taxable year of such election and for all subsequent taxable years (regardless of whether they continue to file a joint return) and may not be revoked except with the consent of the Commissioner. Since revocation would constitute a change in method of accounting, in order to secure the Commissioner's consent to the revocation of such an election and to a change of the taxpayer's method of accounting, all the provisions of paragraph (e)(3) of § 1.446-1 must be met including the requirement that Form 3115 must be filed within 180 days after the beginning of the taxable year in which it is desired to make the change. See section 481 and the regulations thereunder (relating to certain adjustments required by such changes).

(ii) Revocation of elections made prior to May 7, 1976. If on or before May 7, 1976, an election under section 1251(b)(4) has been made, such election may be revoked without permission of the Commissioner by filing on or before August 5, 1976, with the district director or the director of the internal revenue service center with whom the election was filed a statement of revocation of an election under section 1251(b)(4). If such election to revoke is for a period which falls within one or more taxable years for which an income tax returns shall be filed for any such taxable years for which the computation of taxable income is affected by reason of such revocation.

(e) Transfer of excess deductions account

(1) Certain corporate transactions

(i) In general. Under section 1251(b)(5)(A), in the case of a transfer described in section 1251(d)(3) and paragraph (c)(2) of § 1.1251-4 to which section 371(a) (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain receivership and bankruptcy proceedings), 374(a) (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain railroad reorganizations), or 381 (relating to carryovers in certain corporate acquisitions) applies, the acquiring corporation shall succeed to and take into account as of the close of the day of distribution or transfer the excess deductions account of the transferor. Determinations under this subdivision shall be made under subdivisions (ii), (iii), and (iv) of this subparagraph regardless of whether section 381 applies. For treatment as farm recapture property of stock or securities received in certain transfers to controlled corporations to which section 1251(d)(3) (but not section 1251(b)(5)(A)) applies, see section 1251(d)(6) and paragraph (f) of § 1.1251-4.

(ii) Acquiring corporation. For purposes of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, determinations as to which corporation is the acquiring corporation shall be made under paragraph (b)(2) of § 1.381(a)-1.

(iii) Certain operating rules. For purposes of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, the operating rules of section 381(b) and § 1.381(b)-1 shall apply. Thus, for example, except in the case of a reorganization qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(F) (whether or not such reorganization also qualifies under any other provision of section 368(a)(1)), the amount of the excess deductions account of the transferor shall be computed, as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer (as determined under paragraph (b) of § 1.381(b)-1), as if the taxable year of the transferor closed on such date (regardless of whether the taxable year actually closed). In the case of a reorganization qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(F) (whether or not such reorganization also qualifies under any other provision of section 368(a)(1)), the acquiring corporation's excess deductions account shall be treated for purposes of section 1251 just as the transferor corporation's excess deductions account would have been treated if there had been no reorganization.

(iv) Excess deductions account balance. For purposes of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, the amount in the transferor's excess deductions account as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer referred to in subdivision (iii) of this subparagraph shall be the amount in such account determined after making all the applicable additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (other than subtractions under paragraph (5)(A) of section 1251(b) and this subparagraph) for the taxable year ending (or considered ending) on such date including a subtraction by reason of gain (if any) recognized under section 1251(c)(1) by reason of a disposition which is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift transaction to which section 1251(d)(1) and paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1251-4 apply.

(2) Certain gifts

(i) In general. If farm recapture property is disposed of by gift (including for purposes of this paragraph in a transaction which is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift or a transaction treated under paragraph (a)(2) of this section as a gift), and if such gift is made during any 1-year period (described in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph) for which the potential gain limitation percentage (as computed in subdivision (iii) of this subparagraph) exceeds 25 percent, then the provisions of subdivision (iv) of this subparagraph shall apply in respect of such gift.

(ii) One-year period. For purposes of this subparagraph, a 1-year period is a period of 365 days beginning on the date a gift is made by the donor.

(iii) Potential gain limitation percentage. Under this subdivision, the potential gain limitation percentage for any such 1-year period is a percentage equal to

(a) the sum of the potential gains (determined as of the first day of such period) on each item of farm recapture property held by such taxpayer on such first day disposed of by gift by the taxpayer during such period, divided by

(b) the sum of the potential gains (determined as of the first day of such period) on all farm recapture property held by such taxpayer on such first day.

(iv) Allocation ratio. With respect to each gift of property (to which the provisions of this subdivision apply) made during a taxable year, each donee shall succeed (at the time the first of such gifts is made during such taxable year) to the same proportion of

(a) the donor's excess deductions account determined, as of the close of such taxable year of the donor, after making all the applicable additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (other than subtractions under section 1251(b)(5) and this paragraph), as

(b) the potential gain (determined immediately prior to the time the first of such gifts is made during such taxable year) on the property (held by the donor immediately prior to such time) received by such donee bears to

(c) The aggregate potential gain (determined immediately prior to such time) on all farm recapture property held by the donor immediately prior to such time.

(v) Definitions and certain special rules. For purposes of this subparagraph:

(a) The term potential gain means an amount equal to the excess of the fair market value of property over its adjusted basis, but, in the case of land, limited under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.1251-1 to the extent of the deductions allowable in respect of such land pursuant to an election (if any) under sections 175 (relating to soil and water conservation expenditures) and 182 (relating to expenditures by farmers for clearing land) for the taxable year of disposition and the four immediately preceding taxable years regardless of whether any such preceding taxable year begins before December 31, 1969. See section 1251(e)(5).

(b) Property held on the first day of a one-year period shall include property received by gift during such one-year period and the potential gain with respect to such property, for purposes of making the computations under this subparagraph, shall be the potential gain in the hands of the donor reduced by the amount of gain (in the case of an exchange which is part a sale and part a gift) taken into account by the donor.

(c) Property held by a taxpayer on the first day of a one-year period which property becomes farm recapture property in the hands of such taxpayer during such one-year period shall be considered to be farm recapture property on each day of such one-year period.

(vi) Part-sale-part-gift transaction. If property is disposed of in a transaction which is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift, then for purposes of subdivisions (iii)(a) and (iv)(b) of this subparagraph the potential gain with respect to the property transferred shall be reduced by the amount of gain taken into account by the transferor.

(vii) Joint return. For application of the provisions of this subparagraph with respect to a taxable year for which a joint return is filed, see paragraph (f)(4) of this section.

(3) Examples. The provisions of subparagraph (2) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples in which it is assumed that all taxpayers are unmarried individuals.

Example 1.

The only farm recapture property A owns is a farm, consisting of farm land and certain farm equipment which is farm recapture property. During the period involved, there was no deduction allowable under section 175 or 182 to any person owning an interest in the farm. A, who uses the calendar year as his taxable year, makes a series of gifts of undivided interests in the farm. In these circumstances, computations may be made by reference to percentages of undivided interests in the farm. The potential gain limitation percentages for each applicable 1-year period are computed, in accordance with the additional facts assumed, in the table below:

Date Gift to donee 9/1/70 8/1/71 3/1/72 5/1/73
C D E F
(1) Percent of undivided interest in entire farm given as gift by A on date indicated 20% 10% 10% 60%
(2) Percent of undivided interest in entire farm held by A immediately before gift 100% 80% 70% 60%
(3) Potential gain:
(a) On all property held by A on date of gift $100,000 $96,000 $140,000 $125,000
(b) Limitation percentage (sum of amounts in line (1) during 1-year period beginning on date of gift divided by line (2)) 30% 25% 14.28% 100%

(ii) Under subparagraph (2)(iv) of this paragraph, C, D, and F each succeed to the proportion of A's excess deductions account at each applicable time as computed in accordance with the additional facts assumed, in the table below:

Taxable year ending—
Dec. 31, 1970 Dec. 31, 1971 Dec. 32, 1972 Dec. 31, 1973
Gift to donee to which subparagraph (2)(iv) of this paragraph applies during taxable year C D E F
(4) Potential gain (determined immediately prior to time first gift to which subparagraph (2)(iv) of this paragraph applies is made):
(a) On property received by donee to which such subparagraph (2)(iv) applies (line (3)(a) multiplied by line (1) divided by line (2)) $20,000 $12,000 $125,000
(b) Aggregate potential gain on all farm recapture property held by donor (line (3)(a)) $100,000 $96,000 $125,000
(5) Allocation ratio (line (4)(a), divided by line (4)(b)) 20% 12.5% 100%
(6) Excess deductions account of A:
(a) At end of previous taxable year 0 $160,000 $210,000 $200,000
(b) Net increase (decrease) for taxable year (determined before making any subtractions under section 1251(b)(5) and this paragraph) $200,000 $80,000 ($10,000) $36,000
(c) At 12/31 (so determined) $200,000 $240,000 $200,000 $236,000
(d) Less: Portion to which donee succeeds (line (5), multiplied by line (6)(c)) $40,000 $30,000 $0 $236,000
(e) At 12/31 (to line (6)(a) following taxable year) $160,000 $210,000 $200,000 $0

Since the potential gain limitation percentage for the 1-year period beginning on September 1, 1970, exceeds 25 percent, a portion of A's excess deductions account, under the provisions of subparagraph (2)(iv) of this paragraph, is succeeded to by C and D. Similarly, since such percentage for the 1-year period beginning May 1, 1973, exceeds 25 percent, such provisions apply to the gift made to F. Since, however, such percentage is 25 percent or less for all 1-year periods in which the gift to E falls (i.e., 25 percent and 14.28 percent for the 1-year periods beginning, respectively, on August 1, 1971, and March 1, 1972) such provisions do not apply to the gift to E.

Example:

2. (i) G uses the calendar year as his taxable year and H uses a taxable year ending June 30. As of the close of 1972, G has $100,000 in his excess deductions account, determined before any subtractions under section 1251(b)(5) and this paragraph. G owns only three items of farm recapture property, none of which is land. On May 1, 1972, G makes a gift of farm recapture property No. 1 to his son and on September 1, 1972, G sells to H for $80,000 farm recapture property No. 2 in a transaction which is in part a sale and in part a gift. G owns throughout all relevant periods farm recapture property No. 3. The potential gain limitation percentage for G's one-year period beginning May 1, 1972, is computed in accordance with the additional facts assumed in the table below:

Farm Recapture Property Total
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
(1) Fair market value 5/1/72 $25,000 $100,000 $800,000
(2) Adjusted basis 5/1/72 $10,000 $60,000 $795,000
(3) Potential gain (line (1), minus line (2)) $15,000 $40,000 $5,000 $60,000
(4) Sum of potential gains on properties disposed of by gift during period less gain taken into account by transferor on part-sale-part-gift $15,000 $20,000 $35,000
(5) Potential gain limitation percentage (total line (4), divided by total line (3)) 5813%

Since the potential gain limitation percentage for the one-year period beginning on May 1, 1972, exceeds 25 percent, the provisions of subparagraph (2)(iv) of this paragraph apply to the gift to the son and that portion of the disposition to H which is a gift.

(ii) The portion of G's excess deductions account determined, as of the close of 1972, before any subtraction under section 1251(b)(5) and this paragraph, allocated to the son and to H as of May 1, 1972, is computed in the table below:

Property Total
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
(1) Potential gain under part (i) of this example (since the first day of the one-year period is the same as the time as of which the first gift was made during the taxable year) $15,000 $40,000 $5,000 $60,000
(2) Potential gain less amount taken into account by transfer on part-sale-part-gift 15,000 20,000
(3) Allocation percentage (line (2), divided by $60,000) 25% 3313%
(4) Excess deductions account at close of taxable year (determine before making any subtractions under section 1251(b)(5) and this paragraph) 100,000
(5) Portion to which donee succeeds on 5/1/72 25,000 33,333 58,333
(6) G's excess deductions account 12/31/72 $41,667

Accordingly, the amount of G's excess deduction account succeeded to as of May 1, 1972, is $25,000 by the son and $33,333 by H.

(f) Joint return

(1) Joint excess deductions account. If for a taxable year a taxpayer and his spouse file a joint return under section 6013, then for such taxable year each taxpayer shall (if necessary) establish and maintain a joint excess deductions account. Such joint excess deductions account shall consist of the aggregate of the separately maintained excess deductions account of each spouse. A separately maintained excess deductions account shall be computed under the rules of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, except that for each taxable year a joint return is filed:

(i) The $50,000 amount in the nonfarm adjusted gross income limitation in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section shall be considered satisfied if the combined nonfarm adjusted gross income of both spouses exceeds $50,000,

(ii) The $25,000 amount in the farm net loss exclusion in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section shall be allocated between the two spouses in proportion to the farm net loss of each spouse having a farm net loss, and

(iii) The separately maintained excess deductions account of each spouse shall be reduced, if necessary, below zero, by the amount of such spouse's farm net income (computed as if a separate return were filed) plus the amount of gain (computed under subparagraph (3) of this paragraph) which is recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) in respect of a disposition of farm recapture property owned by the taxpayer.

(2) Surviving spouse. For purposes of this paragraph, a joint return does not include a return of a surviving spouse (as defined in section 2 relating to a spouse who died during either of his two taxable years immediate preceding the taxable year) which is treated as a joint return of a husband and wife under section 6013.

(3) Application of excess deductions account limitation in joint return year. In the case of a taxable year for which a joint return is filed, the aggregate of the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) (after applying paragraph (b) (2)(o) and (3) of § 1.125-1, if applicable) shall not exceed the amount in the joint excess deductions account (that is, the aggregate of the separately maintained excess deductions account of each spouse) at the close of the taxable year after subtracting from each such separately maintained account the amount specified in section 1251(b) (3) (A) and paragraph (c) (1) (i) of this section as modified by the rules of this paragraph. For the amount of limitation for a taxable year for which a separate return is filed, see paragraph (b)(4) of this section. For determinations as to which dispositions are taken into account for any taxable year, see paragraph (b)(4) of § 1.1251-1.

(4) Certain gifts

(i) In general. If farm recapture property is transferred as a gift by a spouse to a person other than a spouse during a taxable year for which a joint return is filed, the spouses shall for purposes of applying the provisions of section 1251(b) (5) (B) and paragraph (e)(2) of this section be treated as a single taxpayer. Thus, under paragraph (e)(2) of § 1.1251-2, the potential gain limitation percentage and the proportion for allocating the amount in the joint excess deductions account to one or more donees shall be determined by treating the spouses as a single taxpayer. However, with respect to each gift by a spouse, such spouse's separately maintained excess deductions account shall be reduced (below zero, if necessary) by the amount of the joint excess deductions account balance to which the donee of such gift succeeded under paragraph (e)(2)(iv) of this section.

(ii) Gift between spouses. If farm recapture property is transferred by gift by one spouse to another spouse during a taxable year for which a joint return is filed, such gift shall not affect the balance in the joint excess deductions account but its effect on the separately maintained excess deductions account of each spouse shall be determined as if separate returns were filed, but only after applying subdivision (i) of this subparagraph.

(5) Allocation of joint excess deductions account upon filing separate returns

(i) In general. If for any reason a taxpayer and his spouse cease to file a joint return, then except as provided in this subparagraph the amount of the separately maintained excess deductions account of each spouse as of the close of the last taxable year for which a joint return was filed shall be the amount of such spouse's excess deductions account as of the beginning of the first taxable year for which they cease filing a joint return.

(ii) Deficit. If under subparagraph (4)(i) of this paragraph one of the spouses has a deficit in his separately maintained excess deductions account as of the close of the last taxable year for which a joint return was filed, then as of the beginning of the first taxable year for which they cease filing a joint return:

(a) The spouse who had such deficit shall have an excess deductions account of zero, and

(b) The other spouse shall have an excess deductions account equal to the amount prescribed in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph minus the amount of such deficit.

(6) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 3.

Assume the same facts as in example (4) of paragraph (b)(5) of this section, except that H and W file a joint return under section 6013 and that H has a farm net loss of only $40,000. Thus, since the nonfarm adjusted gross income for calendar year 1971 was $60,000 for H and $30,000 for W, their combined nonfarm adjusted gross income exceeds $50,000, thereby satisfying under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph the $50,000 limitation of paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section. Assume further that for 1971 only W makes a dispostion of farm recapture property (other than land and section 1245 property). As a result of such disposition, W realizes a gain of $14,000. Accordingly, for 1971, the separately maintained excess deductions accounts of H and W, their joint excess deductions account, and the treatment of the gain realized by W on the disposition of the farm recapture property are computed, in accordance with the facts assumed in the table below:

Excess Deductions Accounts

H's W's Joint
(1) Balance Jan. 1, 1971 $10,000 $5,000 $15,000
(2) Additions for 1971:
(a) Farm net loss for 1971 $40,000 $10,000 $50,000
(b) Less amount in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section as allocated under subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph 20,000 5,000 25,000
(c) Total additions for 1971 20,000 5,000 25,000
(3) Subtotal 30,000 10,000 40,000
(4) Subtractions for 1971 0 0
(5) Excess deductions account limitation on gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(e)(1) for 1971 30,000 10,000 40,000
(6) Subtraction for dispositions of farm recapture property:
(a) Gain to which section 1251(c)(1) applies (computed before applying limitation) 0 14,000 14,000
(b) Limitation (amount in line (5)) 30,000 10,000 40,000
(c) Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1), computed for joint account (lower of line 6(a) or line 6(b) subject to provisions as to separately maintained accounts of subparagraph (1)(iii) 14,000 14,000
(7) Balance Dec. 31, 1971 30,000 (4,000) 26,000

If for 1972, H and W were to file separate returns, then the separately maintained excess deductions account balances as of January 1, 1972, would be $26,000 and zero respectively. See subparagraph (5)(ii) of this paragraph.

[T.D. 7418, 41 FR 18816, May 7, 1976; 41 FR 23669, June 11, 1976]

§ 1.1251-3 Definitions relating to section 1251.

(a) Farm recapture property

(1) In general.

(i) The term farm recapture property means any property (other than section 1250 property as defined in section 1250(c)) which, in the hands of the taxpayer is or was property:

(a) Which is described in section 1231(b)(1) (relating to business property held for more than 1 year (6 months for taxable years beginning before 1977; 9 months for taxable years beginning in 1977), section 1231(b)(3) (relating to livestock), or section 1231(b)(4) (relating to an unharvested crop), and

(b) Which, at the time the property qualifies under (a) of this subdivision, is used in the trade or business of farming (as defined in paragraph (e) of this section).

(ii) The term farm recapture property also includes:

(a) Property acquired by gift and property acquired in a transaction to which section 1251(b)(5)(A) applies, if such property was farm recapture property within the meaning of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph in the hands of the transferor, and

(b) Property the basis of which in the hands of the taxpayer holding such property is determined by reference to the basis of other property which in the hands of such taxpayer was farm recapture property within the meaning of subdivision (i) of this paragraph. For purposes of (b) of this subdivison (ii) property whose basis is determined in accordance with the last sentence of section 1033(c) shall be considered as having as basis determined by reference to the property whose conversion gave rise to the application of such section.

(iii) Leasehold of farm recapture property. If property is farm recapture property under this subparagraph, a leasehold of such property is also farm recapture property is also farm recapture property to the same extent as described in, and in accordance with the principles of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1245-3.

(iv) If property described in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph is stock or securities received in certain corporate transactions described in section 1251(d)(6), see paragraph (f) of § 1.1251-4 for determination as to extent such stock or securities is farm recapture property.

(2) Examples. The provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:

Example: On December 15, 1971, A, an individual calendar year taxpayer engaged in the trade or business of farming (as defined in paragraph (e) of this section) exchanges in a transaction which qualifies under section 1031(a) (relating to an exchange of property held for productive use or investment) tractor No. 1 which A acquired on March 1, 1971, for tractor No. 2. Under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph, tractor No. 1 is farm recapture property as the tractor was used in the trade or business of farming and was held for a period in excess of 6 months. Under subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph, tractor No. 2 is farm recapture property as the basis of tractor No. 2 in the hands of A is determined with reference to the adjusted basis of tractor No. 1.

(b) Farm net loss

(1) In general. The term farm net loss means the amount by which:

(i) The deductions allowed or allowable for the taxable year by chapter 1 of subtitle A of the Code which are directly connected with the carrying on of the trade or business of farming, exceed

(ii) The gross income derived from such trade or business.

(2) Disposition of farm recapture property. For purposes of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, no gain or loss (regardless of how treated) resulting from the disposition of farm recapture property shall be taken into account, except that under subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph gain upon disposition of such property which is recognized as ordinary income by reason of section 1245(a)(1) shall be taken into account. Thus, for example, if land used in the trade or business of farming were disposed of and gain of $3,000 was realized, then none of such gain would be taken into account in computing farm net loss and farm net income even if all or a portion of such gain is recognized as ordinary income by reason of section 1251(c)(1), section 1252(a)(1), or both. If such land were disposed of at a loss, the result would be the same. See paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section with respect to the exclusion of gain or loss from the disposition of farm recapture property from the computation of nonfarm adjusted gross income.

(3) Amount of deduction under section 172(a) attributable to farm net loss.

(i) If all or a portion of a net operating loss (within the meaning of section 172(c)) for a taxable year is absorbed in another taxable year as a carryover or carry back, then for purposes of determining the amount of deductions referred to in subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph for such other taxable year the portion of the amount absorbed in such other taxable year which is attributable to amounts directly connected with the carrying on of the trade or business of farming shall be an amount equal to the amount absorbed, multiplied by a fraction the numerator of which is the amount of the farm net loss for the taxable year the net operating loss arose (but not in excess of the net operating loss for such year) and the denominator of which is the amount of the net operating loss for such year.

(ii) No portion of a farm net loss added to the excess deductions account in the year a net operating loss arose (or which would have been added to such account but for the application of the $25,000 or $12,500 farm net loss exclusion under paragraph (b) (2)(ii) or (4)(i)(b) of § 1.1251-2) shall be taken into account under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph in any other taxable year. Accordingly the same farm net loss shall not be added to the excess deductions account more than once and a farm net loss for any taxable year shall not be subject to the $25,000 or $12,500 exclusion more than once.

(iii) If a net operating loss for a current taxable year attributable in whole or part to a farm net loss is carried back and absorbed in a preceding taxable year no redetermination shall be made with respect to

(a) the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) and paragraph (b) of § 1.1251-1 in any taxable year preceding the current taxable year, and

(b) the amount of the taxpayer's excess deductions account allocated under paragraph (e)(2) of § 1.1251-2 to a donee as of the close of any taxable year preceding the current taxable year.

(4) Special rules as to estates and trusts. In the case of an estate or trust, computations of amounts under this paragraph shall be made without regard to any deductions under section 651 or 661. If on the termination of an estate or trust the beneficiaries succeeding to its property are allowed a deduction under section 642(h) (relating to unused loss carryovers and excess deductions on termination available to beneficiaries), to the extent the carryover or excess deduction is attributable to a farm loss it shall have the same character in the hands of the beneficiary as in the hands of the estate or trust. The amount of a carryover or of excess deductions from a particular taxable year of an estate or trust succeeded to under section 642(h) shall be allocated between amounts attributable to a farm net loss and other amounts in the same proportion as the farm net loss for such year bears to the amount of such carryover or of excess deductions. If there is more than one beneficiary, the total farm net loss succeeded to by all the beneficiaries shall be allocated to each beneficiary in proportion to the deduction of each under section 642(h).

(c) Farm net income. The term farm net income means the amount by which the amount referred to in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section exceeds the amount referred to in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section.

(d) Nonfarm adjusted gross income

(1) In general. The term nonfarm adjusted gross income means adjusted gross income (taxable income in the case of a taxpayer other than an individual) computed without regard to:

(i) Income or deductions taken into account in computing farm net loss and farm net income,

(ii) Gains and losses (regardless of how treated) resulting from the disposition of farm recapture property, and

(iii) In the case of an estate or trust, the principles of paragraph (b)(4) of this section, to the extent applicable, shall apply.

(2) Special rules. The following rules in addition to the rules of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, shall apply in computing the adjusted gross income of a shareholder of an electing small business corporation:

(i) The amount of any distribution described in section 1373 (c)(2) made by the corporation shall be disregarded,

(ii) For purposes of computing the amount includible in the gross income of a shareholder under section 1373(b), the corporation's undistributable taxable income shall equal the corporation's nonfarm adjusted gross income (as defined in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph) minus the amount described in section 1373(c)(1), and

(iii) For purposes of computing a shareholder's deduction under section 1374, the corporation's net operating loss shall be computed without regard to the items referred to in subparagraph (1) (i) and (ii) of this paragraph.

(e) Trade or business of farming

(1) In general. For purposes of section 1251, the term trade or business of farming includes any trade or business with respect to which the taxpayer may compute gross income under § 1.61-4, expenses under § 1.162-12, make an election under section 175, 180, or 182, or use an inventory method referred to in § 1.471-6. Such term does not include any activity not engaged in for profit within the meaning of section 183 and section 183-2.

(2) Horse racing. If a taxpayer is engaged in the raising of horses, including horses which are bred or purchased, then for purposes of section 1251 the term trade or business of farming also includes the racing of such horses by the taxpayer. Thus, for example, if a taxpayer purchases a yearling and develops it to the racing stage, the term trade or business of farming includes the racing of such horse.

(3) Several businesses of farming. If a taxpayer is engaged in more than one trade or business of farming, all such trades and businesses shall be treated as one trade or business.

[T.D. 7418, 41 FR 18826, May 7, 1976, as amended by T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980]

§ 1.1251-4 Exceptions and limitations.

(a) Exception for gifts

(1) General rule. Section 1251(d)(1) provides that no gain shall be recognized under section 1251(c)(1) upon a disposition by gift. For purposes of this paragraph, the term gift shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (a) of § 1.1245-4 and, with respect to the application of this paragraph, principles illustrated by the examples of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1245-4 shall apply. For reduction in amount of charitable contribution in case of a gift of farm recapture property, see section 170(e) and § 1.170A-4.

(2) Disposition in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift. Where a disposition of farm recpature property is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift, the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) shall not exceed:

(i) In the case of farm recapture property other than land, the excess of the amount realized over adjusted basis, and

(ii) In the case of land, the lower of the amount in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph or the potential gain (as defined in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.1251-1.

(3) Treatment of land in hand of transferee. See paragraph (g) of this section for treatment of transferee in the case of a disposition of land to which this paragraph applies.

(4) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A, a calendar year taxpayer, makes one disposition of farm recapture property during 1976. On March 2, 1976, A makes a gift to B (also a calendar year taxpayer) of a parcel of land which he had on January 15, 1971. On the date of such disposition, the excess of the fair market value ($65,000) over the adjusted basis of the land ($40,000) is $25,000 and the sum of the deductions allowable in respect of such land under sections 175 and 182 is $21,000 for 1971 and $3,000 (attributable to 1975) for the taxable year of disposition and the four immediately preceding taxable years. Thus, the potential gain (as defined in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.1251-1) is limited to $3,000. At the end of 1976 (after making the applicable additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (2) and (3)(A)), there is a balance in A's excess deductions account of $25,000. However, upon making the gift, A recognizes no gain under section 1251(c)(1) or section 1252(a)(1). See subparagraph (a)(1) of this paragraph and paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1252-2. For treatment of the land in the hands of B, see example (1) of paragraph (g)(3) of this section. For effect of the gift on the excess deductions accounts of A and B, see paragraph (e)(2) of § 1.1251-2.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that A transfers the land to B for $50,000. Thus, the gain realized is $10,000 (amount realized, $50,000, minus adjusted basis $40,000), and A has made a gift of $15,000 (fair market value, $65,000, minus amount realized, $50,000). Since under subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph, the potential gain ($3,000) is lower than the gain realized ($10,000), the gain to which section 1251(c)(1) could apply is limited by subparagraph (2)(ii) of this paragraph to $3,000. Thus, as A has $25,000 in his excess deductions account, $3,000 is recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1). See example (2) of paragraph (a)(4) of § 1.1252-2 for computation of gain of $7,000 which is recognized as ordinary income by A under section 1252(a)(1). For treatment of the land in the hands of B, see example (2) of paragraph (g)(3) of this section.

(b) Exception for transfers at death

(1) General rule. Section 1251(d)(2) provides that, except as provided in section 691 (relating to income in respect of a decedent), no gain shall be recognized under section 1251(c)(1) upon a transfer at death. For purposes of this paragraph, the term transfer at death shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (b) of § 1.1245-4 and, with respect to the application of this paragraph, principles illustrated by the examples of paragraph (b)(2) of § 1.1245-4 shall apply.

(2) Treatment of land in hands of transferee. If as of the date a person acquires land which is farm recapture property from a decedent such person's basis is determined, by reason of the application of section 1014(a), solely by reference to the fair market value of the property on the date of the decedent's death or on the applicable date provided in section 2032 (relating to alternate valuation date), then on such date the potential gain in respect to such land is zero.

(c) Certain corporate transactions

(1) Limitation on amount of gain. Under section 1251(d)(3), upon a transfer of property described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income by the transferor under section 1251(c)(1) shall not exceed an amount equal to the excess (if any) of

(i) the amount of gain recognized to the transferor on the transfer (determined without regard to section 1251) over

(ii) the amount (if any) of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1). For purposes of this subparagraph, the principles of paragraph (c)(1) of § 1.1245-4 shall apply. Thus, in case of a transfer of both farm recapture property and property other than farm recapture property in a single transaction, the amount realized from the disposition of the farm recapture property (as determined in a manner consistent with the principles of paragraph (a)(5) of § 1.1245-1) shall be deemed to consist of that portion of the fair market value of each property acquired which bears the same ratio to the fair market value of such acquired property as the amount realized from the disposition of farm recapture property bears to the total amount realized. The preceding sentence shall be applied solely for purposes of computing the portion of the total gain (determined without regard to section 1251) which is eligible to be recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1). Section 1251(d)(3) does not apply to a disposition of property to an organization (other than a cooperative described in section 521) which is exempt from the tax imposed by chapter 1 of the Code.

(2) Transfers covered. The transfers referred to in subparagraphs (1) of this paragraph are transfers of farm recapture property in which the basis of such property in the hands of the transferee is determined by reference to its basis in the hands of the transferor by reason of the application of any of the following provisions:

(i) Section 332 (relating to distributions in complete liquidation of an 80-percent-or-more controlled subsidiary corporation). For the application of section 1251(d)(3) to such a complete liquidation, the principles of paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.1245-4 shall apply. Thus, for example, the provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph do not apply to a liquidating distribution of farm recapture property by an 80-percent-or-more controlled subsidiary to its parent if the parent's basis for the property is determined, under section 334(b)(2), by reference to its basis for the stock of the subsidiary.

(ii) Section 351 (relating to transfer to corporation controlled by transferor).

(iii) Section 351 (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain corporate reorganizations).

(iv) Section 371(a) (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain receivership and bankruptcy proceedings).

(v) Section 374(a) (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain railroad reorganizations).

(3) Partnerships. For the application of section 1251 to partnerships, see paragraph (e) of this section.

(4) Treatment of land in hands of transferee. See paragraph (g) of this section for treatment of transferee in the case of a disposition of land to which this paragraph applies.

(5) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) A, an individual calendar year taxpayer, makes one disposition of farm recapture property during 1971. On January 20, 1971. A transfers farm recapture property (other than land and section 1245 property), having an adjusted basis of $22,000, to corporation M in exchange for stock in M worth $35,000 plus $15,000 in cash in a transaction qualifying under section 351. Thus, the amount realized is $50,000, and the gain realized is the excess of the amount realized, $50,000, over the adjusted basis, $22,000, or $28,000. Without regard to section 1251, A would recognize gain of $15,000 under section 351(b), and M's basis for the farm recapture property would be determined under section 362(a) by reference to its basis in the hands of A. Assume further that the balance in A's excess deductions account (after making the applicable additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (2) and (3)(A)) at the close of 1971 is $20,000. Thus, since such balance in the excess deductions account ($20,000) is lower than the gain realized ($28,000), is subparagraph (1) of this paragraph did not apply, gain of $20,000 would be recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1). However, subparagraph (1) of this paragraph limits the amount of gain to be recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) to $15,000.

(ii) If, however, A transferred the farm recapture property to M solely in exchange for stock worth $50,000, then, because of the application of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph he would not recognize any gain under section 1251(c)(1). If, instead, A transferred the farm recapture property to M in exchange for stock worth $25,000 and $25,000 cash, only $20,000 (the amount of such balance in the excess deductions account) of the gain of $25,000 recognized under section 351(b) would be recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1). The remaining $5,000 of gain recognized under section 351(b) may be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231. In the hands of M, the property received from A is farm recapture property under the provisions of paragraph (a)(11)(ii) of § 1.1251-3. For treatment of the property received by A in such transaction; see section 1251(d)(6) and paragraph (f) of this section.

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in subdivision (i) of example (1), except that the farm recapture property is section 1245 property. Assume further than $5,000 is recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1), and that as of the close of 1971, A has a balance of $15,000 in his excess deductions account (after making the applicable additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (2) and (3)(A) which, under paragraph (b) of § 1.1251-3, is computed by treating the $5,000 of gain to which section 1245 applies as gross income derived from the trade or business of farming). The amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) is $10,000, computed as follows:

(1) Amount of gain under section 1251(c)(1) (determined without regard to subparagraph (1) of this paragraph):
(a) Portion of gain realized ($28,000) in excess of amount recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1) ($5,000) $23,000
(b) Excess deductions account balance 15,000
(c) Lower of (a) or (b) 15,000
(2) Limitation in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph:
(a) Gain recognized (determined without regard to section 1251) 15,000
(b) Minus: Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1) 5,000
(c) Difference 10,000
(3) Lower of line (1)(c) or line (2)(c) 10,000

(d) Limitation for like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions

(1) General rule. Under section 1251(d)(4), if farm recapture property is disposed of and gain (determined without regard to section 1251) is not recognized in whole or in part under section 1031 (relating to like kind exchanges) or section 1033 (relating to involuntary conversions), then the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income by the transferor under section 1251(c)(1) shall not exceed an amount equal to the excess (if any) of

(i) the amount of gain recognized on such disposition (determined without regard to section 1251) or

(ii) the amount (if any) of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1).

(2) Examples. The provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) A, an individual calendar year taxpayer, owns a herd of breeding cattle having an adjusted basis of $75,000 which he acquired on March 30, 1970, A receives insurance proceeds of $90,000. Thus, the gain realized is $15,000 (that is, the excess of the amount realized, $75,000), A makes no other disposition of farm recapture property during 1970. Assume that had the herd been sold at its fair market value on March 15, 1970, no gain would have been recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1). As of the close of 1970, A has a balance of $12,000 in his excess deductions account (after making the applicable additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (2) and (3)(A)). Thus, since the balance in the excess deductions account, $12,000, is lower than the gain realized, $15,000, the amount of gain which would be recognized under section 1251(c)(1) (determined without regard to subparagraph (1) of this paragraph) would be $12,000.

(ii) Assume further that A spends $72,000 of the insurance proceeds to purchase another breeding herd, $10,000 to purchase stock in the acquisition of control of a corporation which owns property similar or related in service or use to the destroyed breeding herd, and retains cash of $8,000. Both of the acquisitions by A qualify under section 1033(a)(3)(A), and A properly elects under section 1033(a)(3)(A) and the regulations thereunder to limit recognition of gain to $8,000 (that is, the amount by which the amount realized from the conversion, $90,000 exceeds the cost of the stock and other property acquired to replace the converted property, $72,000 plus $10,000). Thus, since $8,000 is the amount of gain which would be recognized under section 1033(a)(3) (determined without regard to section 1251), and since that amount is lower than the gain of $12,000 which would be recognized under section 1251(c)(1) (determined without regard to subparagraph (1) of this paragraph), under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph the amount of gain recognized under section 1251(c)(1) is limited to $8,000. The stock purchased for $10,000 qualifies under paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(b) of § 1.1251-3 as farm recapture property.

Example 2.

(i) A, an individual calendar year taxpayer, owns land which he had acquired on March 7, 1970, having an adjusted basis of $48,000, and a fair market value of $67,500. On January 15, 1975, A, as a result of a condemnation action, receives $67,500 (its fair market value) for the land. The aggregate of the deductions allowable in respect of such land under sections 175 and 182 is $18,000, with $5,000 of such aggregate attributable to 1970 and $13,000 of such aggregate attributable to 1970 and $13,000 of such aggregate attributable to 1975 and the four preceding taxable years. Thus, the potential gain (as defined in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.1251-1) is limited to $13,000, since that amount is lower than $19,500 (the excess of the fair market value of the land, $67,500, over its adjusted basis, $48,000). The gain realized by A is also $19,500. At the end of A's taxable year (after making the applicable additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (2) and (3)(A)) there is a balance of $21,000 in the excess deductions account of A. Since the potential gain, $13,000, is lower than both the excess deductions account balance, $21,000, and the gain realized, $19,500, A would recognize $13,000 as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) (determined without regard to subparagraph (1) of this paragraph).

(ii) Assume further that A spends the entire amount received, $67,500, to purchase stock in the acquisition of control of a corporation which owns property similar or related in service or use to A's condemned land which qualifies under section 1033(a)(3)(A), and A properly elects under section 1033(a)(3)(A) and the regulations thereunder to limit recognition of gain to zero (that is, the amount by which the amount realized from the conversion, $67,500, exceeds the cost of the stock acquired to replace the converted land, $67,500). Thus, since no gain would be recognized under section 1033(a)(3) (determined without regard to section 1251), under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, no gain is recognized under section 1251(c)(1). The stock purchased for $67,500 qualifies under paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(b) of § 1.1251-3 as farm recapture property. See example (1) of paragraph (d)(2) of § 1.1252-2 for a computation of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1).

Example 3.

B, an individual calendar year taxpayer, owns a herd of breeding cattle having an adjusted basis of $25,000 which he acquired on March 30, 1970. On March 15, 1976, the entire herd is destroyed by a blizzard and on March 20, 1976, B receives insurance proceeds of $90,000. Thus, the gain realized is $65,000 (that is, the excess of the amount realized, $90,000, over the adjusted basis, $25,000). B makes no other disposition of farm recapture property during 1976. B spends $60,000 of the insurance proceeds to purchase another breeding herd and retains cash of $30,000. The acquisition by B qualifies under section 1033(a)(3)(A), and B properly elects under section 1033(a)(3)(A) and the regulations thereunder to limit recognition of gain to $30,000 (that is, the amount by which the amount realized from the conversion, $90,000, exceeds the cost of the property acquired to replace the converted property, $60,000). Assume that the amount of gain recognized under section 1245(a)(1) is $20,000, and that as of the close of 1976 B has a balance of $100,000 in his excess deductions account (after making the applicable additions and subtractions under section 1251(b) (2) and (3)(A) which, under paragraph (b) of § 1.1251-3, is computed by treating the $20,000 of gain to which section 1245 applies as gross income derived from the trade or business of farming). The amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) is $10,000, computed as follows:

(1) Amount of gain under section 1251(c)(1) (determined without regard to subparagraph (1) of this paragraph):
(a) Portion of gain realized ($65,000) in excess of amount recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1) ($20,000) $45,000
(b) Excess deductions account balance 100,000
(c) Lower of (a) or (b) 45,000
(2) Limitation in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph:
(a) Gain recognized (determined without regard to section 1251) 30,000
(b) Minus: Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1245(a)(1) $20,000
(c) Difference 10,000
(3) Lower of line (1)(c) or line (2)(c) 10,000

(3) Application to single disposition of farm recapture property of one class and property of different class.

(i) If upon a sale of farm recapture property of one class gain would be recognized under section 1251(c)(1), and if such farm recapture property together with property of a different class or classes is disposed of in a single transaction in which gain is not recognized in whole or in part under section 1031 (without regard to section 1251(c)(1), then rules consistent with the principles of paragraph (d)(6) of § 1.1250-3 (relating to gain from disposition of certain depreciable realty) shall apply for purposes of allocating the amount realized to each of the classes of property disposed of and for purposes of determining what property the amount realized for each class consists of.

(ii) For purposes of this subparagraph, the classes of property other than farm recapture property are (a) section 1245 property, (b) section 1250 property, and (c) other property.

(iii) For purposes of this subparagraph, the classes of farm recapture property are (a) hand, (b) farm recapture property other than land which is section 1245 property and (c) farm recapture property other than land which is not section 1245 property.

(4) Treatment of land received in like kind exchange or involuntary conversion. The aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 in respect of land acquired in a transaction described in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph shall include the aggregate of the deductions allowable under sections 175 and 182 in respect of the land transferred or converted (as the case may be) in such transaction minus the amount of gain taken into account under sections 1251(c) and 1252(a) with respect to the land transferred or converted. Upon a subsequent disposition of such land, such deductions shall be treated as having been allowable in the same taxable year as they were allowable with respect to the land transferred or converted.

(e) Partnerships. [Reserved]

(f) Property transferred to controlled corporation. [Reserved]

(g) Treatment of land received by a transferee in a disposition by gift and certain tax-free transactions

(1) General rule. If farm recapture property which is land is disposed of in a transaction which is either a gift to which paragraph (a)(1) of this section applies or a completely tax-free transfer to which section 1251(b)(5)(A) applies, then for purposes of section 1251:

(i) The aggregate of the deductions allowable under sections 175 and 182 in respect of the land in the hands of the transferee immediately after the disposition shall be an amount equal to the aggregate of such deductions for the taxable year and the four preceding taxable years in the hands of the transferor immediately before the disposition,

(ii) Upon a subsequent disposition by the transferee (including a computation of potential gain as defined in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of § 1.1251-1), such deductions in the hands of the transferee shall be treated as having been allowable with respect to the transferee in the same taxable year they were allowable to the transferor, and

(iii) If the taxable years of the transferor and transferee regularly end on different dates, then the aggregate of such deductions allowable for taxable year with respect to the transferor shall be treated in the hands of the transferee as allowable in the transferee's taxable year in which the taxable year of the transferor regularly ends.

(2) Certain partially tax-free transfers. If farm recapture property which is land is disposed of in a transaction which either is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift to which paragraph (a)(2) of this section applies, or is a partially tax-free transfer to which section 1251(b)(5)(A) applies, then for purposes of section 1251:

(i) The amount determined under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph shall be reduced by the amount of gain taken into account under sections 1251(c) and 1252(a) to the extent such gain is attributable to the sections 175 and 182 deductions for the taxable year and the preceding four taxable years (determined by attributing gain under section 1252(a) to the oldest years first) by the transferor upon the disposition, and

(ii) For purposes of subparagraph (1)(ii) of this paragraph, the amount of such gain recognized under sections 1251(c) and 1252(a) shall reduce the aggregate of deductions allowable under sections 175 and 182 for the taxable year and each of the preceding four taxable years on a pro rata basis.

(3) Examples. The provisions of subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Assume the same facts as in example (1) of paragraph (a)(4) of this section. Therefore, on the date B receives the land in the gift transaction, under subparagraph (1) (i) and (ii) of this paragraph, the aggregate of the deductions allowable under sections 175 and 182 in respect of the land in the hands of B is the amount in the hands of A, $24,000, and for purposes of applying section 1251 upon a subsequent disposition by B (including the computation of potential gain) such deductions in the hands of B shall be treated as allowable in the same year as they were allowable to A. Thus, in respect to the land in the hands of B, the allowable section 175 and 182 deductions of $3,000 shall be treated as allowable in 1975.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (2) of Paragraph (a)(4) of this section. Under paragraph (2) of this paragraph, the aggregate of the allowable sections 175 and 182 deductions with respect to the land which pass over to B for purposes of section 1251 is zero ($3,000 deduction allowable under sections 175 and 182 for the taxable year and the four preceding taxable years minus $3,000 gain taken into account by A in accordance with example (2) of paragraph (a)(4) of this section).

[T.D. 7818, 41 FR 18828, May 7, 1976; 41 FR 23669, June 11, 1976]

§ 1.1252-1 General rule for treatment of gain from disposition of farm land.

(a) Ordinary income

(1) General rule.

(i) Except as otherwise provided in this section and § 1.1252-2, if farm land is disposed of during a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1969, then under section 1252(a)(1) there shall be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property which is neither a capital asset nor property described in section 1231 (that is, shall be recognized as ordinary income) the lower of:

(a) The applicable percentage of the amount computed in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, or

(b) The amount computed in subdivision (iii) of this subparagraph.

(ii) The amount computed in this subdivision is an amount equal to:

(a) The aggregate of the deductions allowed, in any taxable year any day of which falls within the period the taxpayer held (or is considered to have held) the farm land, under sections 175 (relating to soil and water conservation expenditures) and 182 (relating to expenditures by farmers for clearing land) for expenditures paid or incurred after December 31, 1969, with respect to the farm land disposed of, minus

(b) The amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) (relating to gain from disposition of property used in farming where farm losses offset nonfarm income) upon such disposition of such land.

(iii) The amount computed in this subdivision is an amount equal to:

(a) The gain realized, that is, the excess of the amount realized (in the case of a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion) or the fair market value of the farm land (in the case of any other disposition), over the adjusted basis of the farm land, minus

(b) The amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) upon such disposition of such land.

(iv) If a deduction under section 175 is allowed in respect of the farm land disposed of for a taxable year every day of which falls within the period after the taxpayer held (or is considered to have held) the farm land, and if the deduction is attributable to expenditures paid or incurred after December 31, 1969, with respect to such land during the period the taxpayer held (or is considered to have held) the land, then the amount of such deduction shall be applied to increase the amount computed (without regard to this subdivision) under subdivision (ii)(a) of this subparagraph.

(2) Application of section. Any gain treated as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) shall be recognized as ordinary income notwithstanding any other provision of subtitle A of the Code. For special rules with respect to the application of section 1252, see § 1.1252-2. For the relation of section 1252 to other provisions see paragraph (d) of this section.

(3) Meaning of terms. For purposes of section 1252:

(i) The term farm land means any land with respect to which deductions have been allowed under section 175 or 182. See section 1252(a)(2).

(ii) The period for which farm land shall be considered to be held shall be determined under section 1223.

(iii) The term disposition shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (a)(3) of § 1.1245-1.

(iv) The applicable percentage shall be determined as follows:

If the farm land is disposed of— The applicable
percentage is—
Within 5 years after the date it was acquired 100 percent.
Within the sixth year after it was acquired 80 percent.
Within the seventh year after it was acquired 60 percent.
Within the eighth year after it was acquired. 40 percent.
Within the ninth year after it was acquired. 20 percent.
Within the 10th year after it was acquired and thereafter. 0 percent.

(4) Portion of parcel. The amount of gain to be recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) shall be determined separately for each parcel of farm land in a manner consistent with the principles of subparagraphs (4) and

(5) of § 1.1245-1(a) (relating to gain from disposition of certain depreciable property). If

(i) only a portion of a parcel of farm land is disposed of in a transaction, or if two or more portions of a single parcel are disposed of in one transaction, and

(ii) the aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 with respect to any such portion cannot be established to the satisfaction of the Commissioner or his delegate, then the aggregate of the deductions in respect of the entire parcel shall be allocated to each portion in proportion to the fair market value of each at the time of the disposition.

(b) Instances of non-application

(1) In general. Section 1252 does not apply if a taxpayer disposes of farm land for which the holding period is in excess of 9 years or with respect to which no deductions have been allowed under sections 175 and 182.

(2) Losses. Section 1252(a)(1) does not apply to losses. Thus, section 1252(a)(1) does not apply if a loss is realized upon a sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion of property, all of which is farm land, nor does the section apply to a disposition of such property other than by way of sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion if at the time of the disposition the fair market value of such property is not greater than its adjusted basis.

(c) Treatment of partnerships and partners. [Reserved]

(d) Relation of section 1252 to other provisions

(1) General. The provisions of section 1252 apply notwithstanding any other provisions of subtitle A of the Code. Thus, unless an exception or limitation under § 1.1252-2 applies, gain under section 1252(a)(1) is recognized notwithstanding any contrary nonrecognition provision or income characterizing provision. For example, since section 1252 overrides section 1231 (relating to property used in the trade or business), the gain recognized under section 1252(a)(1) upon a disposition of farm land will be treated as ordinary income and only the remaining gain, if any, from the disposition may be considered as gain from the sale or exchange of a capital asset if section 1231 is applicable. See example (1) of paragraph (e) of this section.

(2) Nonrecognition sections overridden. The nonrecognition of gain provisions of subtitle A of the Code which section 1252 overrides include, but are not limited to, sections 267(d), 311(a), 336, 337, and 512(b)(5). See § 1.1252-2 for the extent to which section 1252(a)(1) overrides sections 332, 351, 361, 371(a), 374(a), 721, 731, 1031, and 1033.

(3) Installment method. Gain from a disposition to which section 1252(a)(1) applies may be reported under the installment method if such method is otherwise available under section 453 of the Code. In such case, the income (other than interest) on each installment payment shall

(i) first be deemed to consist of gain to which section 1251(c)(1) applies (if applicable) until all such gain has been reported,

(ii) the next portion (if any) of such income shall be deemed to consist of gain to which section 1252(a)(1) applies until all such gain has been reported, and

(iii) finally the remaining portion (if any) of such income shall be deemed to consist of gain to which neither section 1251(c)(1) nor 1252(a)(1) applies. For treatment of amounts as interest on certain deferred payments, see section 483.

(4) Exempt income. With regard to exempt income, the principles of paragraph (e) of § 1.1245-6 shall be applicable.

(5) Treatment of gain not recognized under section 1252(a)(1). For treatment of gain not recognized under this section, the principles of paragraph (f) of § 1.1245-6 shall be applicable.

(e) Examples. The provisions of this section may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Individual A uses the calendar year as his taxable year. On April 10, 1975, he sells for $75,000 a parcel of farm land which he had acquired on January 5, 1970, with an adjusted basis of $52,500 for a realized gain of $22,500. The aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 with respect to such land is $18,000 and all of such amount was allowed for 1970. Under the stated facts, none of the $22,500 gain realized is recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) as there is no potential gain (as defined in section 1251(e)(5)) with respect to the farm land. Since no gain is recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1), and since the applicable percentage, 80 percent, of the aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182, $18,000, or $14,400, is lower than the gain realized, $22,500, the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) is $14,400. The remaining $8,100 of the gain may be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231.

Example 2.

Assume the same facts as in example (2) of paragraph (b)(6) of § 1.1251-1. Assume further that the aggregate of the amount of sections 175 and 182 deductions allowable to the M corporation is equal to the amount allowed. Under paragraph (a)(1) of the section, $5,000 is recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) upon the disposition of the land as a dividend, computed as follows:

(1) Aggregate of deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 $18,000
(2) Minus: Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) $13,000
(3) Difference $5,000
(4) Multiply: Applicable percentage for property disposed of within the fifth year after it was acquired 100%
(5) Amount in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(a) of this section $5,000
(6) Gain realized (fair market value $67,500, less adjusted basis, $45,000) $22,500
(7) Minus: Amount in line (2) $13,000
(8) Amount in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(b) of this section $9,500
(9) Lower of line (5) or line (8) $5,000

The gain realized, $22,500, minus the sum of the gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1), $13,000, and under section 1252(a)(1), $5,000, equals $4,500. Assuming section 311(d) (relating to certain distributions of appreciated property to redeem stock) does not apply, under section 311(a) the corporation does not recognize gain on account of the $4,500.

Example 3.

Assume the same facts as in example (2) of this paragraph, except that M contracted to sell the land for $67,500 which would be paid in 10 equal payments of $6,750 each, plus a sufficient amount of interest so that section 483 does not apply. Assume further that the remaining gain of $4,500 is treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property described in section 1231. M properly elects under section 453 to report under the installment method gain of $13,000 to which section 1251(c)(1) applies, gain of $5,000 to which section 1252(a)(1) applies, and gain of $4,500 to which section 1231 applies. Since the total gain realized on the sale was $22,500, the gross profit realized on each installment payment is $2,250, i.e., $6,750 × ($67,500). Accordingly, the treatment of the income to be reported on each installment payment is as follows:

Payment No. Applicable sections
1251 1252 1231
1 $2,250
2 2,250
3 2,250
4 2,250
5 2,250
6 1,750 $500
7 2,250
8 2,250
9 $2,250
10 2,250
Totals 13,000 5,000 4,500

[T.D. 7418, 41 FR 18831, May 7, 1976; 41 FR 23669, June 11, 1976]

§ 1.1252-2 Special rules.

(a) Exception for gifts

(1) General rule. In general, no gain shall be recognized under section 1252(a)(1) upon a disposition of farm land by gift. For purposes of section 1252 and this paragraph, the term gift shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (a) of § 1.1245-4 and, with respect to the application of this paragraph, principles illustrated by the examples of paragraph (a)(2) of § 1.1245-4 shall apply. For reduction in amount of charitable contribution in case of a gift of farm land, see section 170(e) and § 1.170A-4.

(2) Disposition in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift. Where a disposition of farm land is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift, the amount of gain which shall be recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) shall be computed under paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1252-1, applied by treating the gain realized (for purposes of paragraph (a)(1)(iii)(a) of § 1.1252-1) as the excess of the amount realized over the adjusted basis of the farm land.

(3) Treatment of farm land in hands of transferee. See paragraph (f) of this section for treatment of the transferee in the case of a disposition to which this paragraph applies.

(4) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On March 2, 1976, A, a calendar year taxpayer, makes a gift to B of a parcel of land having an adjusted basis of $40,000, a fair market value of $65,000, and a holding period of 6 years (A, having purchased the land on January 15, 1971). On the date of such gift, the aggregate of the deductions allowed to A under sections 175 and 182 with respect to the land is $24,000 with $21,000 of such amount attributable to 1971. Upon making the gift, A recognizes no gain under section 1251(c)(1) or section 1252(a)(1). See paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1251-4 and subparagraph 1 of this paragraph. For treatment of the farm land in the hands of B, see example (1) of paragraph (f)(3) of this section. For effect of the gift on the excess deductions accounts of A and of B, see paragraph (e)(2) of § 1.1251-2.

Example 2.

(i) Assume the same facts as in example (1), except that A transfers the land to B for $50,000. Thus, the gain realized is $10,000 (amount realized, $50,000, minus adjusted basis, $40,000), and A has made a gift of $15,000 (fair market value, $65,000, minus amount realized, $50,000).

(ii) Upon the transfer of the land to B, A recognizes $3,000 of gain under section 1251(c)(1). See example (2) of paragraph (a)(4) of § 1.1251-4. Thus, A recognizes $7,000 as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1), computed under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph as follows:

(1) Aggregate of deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 $24,000
(2) Minus: Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) $3,000
(3) Difference $21,000
(4) Multiply: Applicable percentage for land disposed of within sixth year after it was acquired 80%
(5) Amount in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(a) of § 1.1252-1 $16,800
(6) Gain realized (see subdivision (i) of this example) $10,000
(7) Minus: Amount in line (2) $3,000
(8) Amount in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(b) of § 1.1252-1, applied in accordance with subparagraph (2) of this paragraph $7,000
(9) Lower of line (5) or line (8) $7,000

Thus, the entire gain realized on the transfer, $10,000, is recognized as ordinary income since that amount is equal to the sum of the gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1), $3,000, and under section 1252(a)(1), $7,000. For treatment of the farm land in the hands of B, see example (2) of paragraph (f)(3) of this section.

(b) Exception for transfers at death

(1) In general. Except as provided in section 691 (relating to income in respect of a decedent), no gain shall be recognized under section 1252(a)(1) upon a transfer at death. For purposes of section 1252 and this paragraph, the term transfer at death shall have the same meaning as in paragraph (b) of § 1.1245-4 and, with respect to the application of this paragraph, principles illustrated by the examples of paragraph (b)(2) of § 1.1245-4 shall apply.

(2) Treatment of farm land in hands of transferee. If as of the date a person acquires farm land from a decedent such person's basis is determined, by reason of the application of section 1014(a), solely by reference to the fair market value of the property on the date of the decedent's death or on the applicable date provided in section 2032 (relating to alternative valuation date), then on such date the aggregate of the sections 175 and 182 deductions allowed with respect to the farm land in the hands of such transferee is zero.

(c) Limitation for certain tax-free transactions

(1) Limitation on amount of gain. Upon a transfer of farm land described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) shall not exceed an amount equal to the excess (if any) of

(i) the amount of gain recognized to the transferor on the transfer (determined without regard to section 1252) over

(ii) the amount (if any) of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1). For purposes of this subparagraph, the principles of paragraph (c)(1) of § 1.1245-4 shall apply. Thus, in the case of a transfer of farm land and property other than farm land in one transaction, the amount realized from the disposition of the farm land (as determined in a manner consistent with the principles of paragraph (a)(5) of § 1.1245-1) shall be deemed to consist of that portion of the fair market value of each property acquired which bears the same ratio to the fair market value of such acquired property as the amount realized from the disposition of the farm land bears to the total amount realized. The preceding sentence shall be applied solely for purposes of computing the portion of the total gain (determined without regard to section 1252) which is eligible to be recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1). The provisions of this paragraph do not apply to a disposition of property to an organization (other than a cooperative described in section 521) which is exempt from the tax imposed by Chapter 1 of the Code.

(2) Transfers covered. The transfers referred to in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph are transfers of farm land in which the basis of such property in the hands of the transferee is determined by reference to its basis in the hands of the transferor by reason of the application of any of the following provisions:

(i) Section 332 (relating to distributions in complete liquidation of an 80-percent-or-more controlled subsidiary corporation). For application of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph to such a complete liquidation, the principles of paragraph (c)(3) of § 1.1245-4 shall apply. Thus, for example, the provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph do not apply to a liquidating distribution of farm land by an 80-percent-or-more controlled subsidiary to its parent if the parent's basis for the property is determined, under section 334(b)(2), by reference to its basis for the stock of the subsidiary.

(ii) Section 351 (relating to transfer to a corporation controlled by transferor).

(iii) Section 361 (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain corporate reorganizations).

(iv) Section 371(a) (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain receivership and bankruptcy proceedings).

(v) Section 374(a) (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain railroad reorganizations).

(vi) Section 721 (relating to transfers to a partnership in exchange for a partnership interest). See paragraph (e) of this section.

(vii) Section 731 (relating to distributions by a partnership to a partner). For special carryover of basis rule, see paragraph (e) of this section.

(3) Treatment of farm land in the hands of tranferee. See paragraph (f) of this section for treatment of the transferee in the case of a disposition to which this paragraph applies.

(4) Examples. The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. On January 4, 1975, A, an individual calendar year taxpayer, owns a parcel of farm land, which he acquired on March 25, 1970, having an adjusted basis of $15,000 and a fair market value of $40,000. On that date he transfers the parcel to corporation M in exchange for stock in the corporation worth $40,000 in a transaction qualifying under section 351. On the date of such transfer, the aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 with respect to the land is $18,000. Without regard to section 1252, A would recognize no gain under section 351 upon the transfer and M's basis for the land would be determined under section 362(a) by reference to its basis in the hands of A. Thus, as a result of the disposition, no gain is recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) or section 1252(a)(1) by A since the amount of gain recognized under such sections is limited to the amount of gain which is recognized under section 351 (determined without regard to sections 1251 and 1252). See paragraph (c)(1) of § 1.1251-4 and subparagraph (1) of this paragraph. For treatment of the farm land in the hands of B, see paragraph (f)(1) of this section. For effect of the transfer on the excess deductions account of A and of B, see paragraph (e)(1) of § 1.1251-2.

Example 2. Assume the same facts in example (1), except that A transferred the land to M for stock in the corporation worth $32,000 and $8,000 cash. The gain realized is $25,000 (amount realized, $40,000, minus adjusted basis, $15,000). Without regard to section 1252, A would recognize $8,000 of gain under section 351(b). Assume further that no gain is recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1). Therefore, since the applicable percentage, 100 percent, of the aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182, $18,000, is lower than the gain realized, $25,000, the amount of gain to be recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) would be $18,000 if the provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph do not apply. Since under section 351(b) gain in the amount of $8,000 would be recognized to the transferor without regard to section 1252, the limitation provided in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph limits the gain taken into account by A under section 1252(a)(1) to $8,000.

Example 3.

Assume the same facts as in example (2), except that $5,000 of gain is recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1). The amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) is $3,000 computed as follows:

(1) Amount of gain under section 1252(a)(1) (determined without regard to subparagraph (1) of this paragraph):
(a) Aggregate of deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 $18,000
(b) Minus: Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) $5,000
(c) Difference $13,000
(d) Multiply: Applicable percentage for property disposed of within the fifth year after it was acquired 100%
(e) Amount in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(a) of § 1.1252-1 $13,000
(f) Gain realized (amount realized $40,000, less adjusted basis, $15,000) $25,000
(g) Minus: Amount in line (b) $5,000
(h) Amount in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(b) of § 1.1252-1 $20,000
(i) Lower of line (e) or (h) $13,000
(2) Limitation in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph:
(a) Gain recognized (determined without regard to section 1252) $8,000
(b) Minus: Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) $5,000
(c) Difference $3,000
(3) Lower of line (1)(i) or line (2)(c) $3,000

Thus, the entire gain recognized under section 351(b) (determined without regard to sections 1251 and 1252), $8,000, is recognized as ordinary income since that amount is equal to the sum of the gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1), $5,000, and under section 1252(a)(1), $3,000.

(d) Limitation for like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions

(1) General rule. If farm land is disposed of and gain (determined without regard to section 1252) is not recognized in whole or in part under section 1031 (relating to like kind exchanges) or section 1033 (relating to involuntary conversions), then the amount of gain recognized as ordinary income by the transferor under section 1252(a)(1) shall not exceed the sum of:

(i) The excess (if any) of (a) the amount of gain recognized on such disposition (determined without regard to section 1252) over (b) the amount (if any) of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1), plus

(ii) The fair market value of property acquired which is not farm land and which is not taken into account under subdivision (i) of this subparagraph (that is, the fair market value of property other than farm land acquired which is qualifying property under section 1031 or 1033, as the case may be).

(2) Examples. The provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) Assume the same facts as in example (2)(ii) of paragraph (d)(3) of § 1.1251-4. Assume further that the aggregate of the amount of sections 175 and 182 deductions allowable is equal to the amount allowed. Under paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1252-1, $18,000 would be recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) (determined without regard to subparagraph (1) of this paragraph), computed as follows:

(1) Aggregate of deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 $18,000
(2) Minus: Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) 0
(3) Difference $18,000
(4) Multiply: Applicable percentage for property disposed of within the fifth year after it was acquired 100%
(5) Amount in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(a) of § 1.1252-1 $18,000
(6) Gain realized (amount realized, $67,500, less adjusted basis, $48,000) $19,500
(7) Minus: Amount in line (2) 0
(8) Amount in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(b) of § 1.1252-1 $19,500
(9) Lower of line (5) or line (8) $18,000

(ii) Although no gain was recognized under section 1251(c)(1) and the stock purchased by A for $67,500 is farm recapture property for purposes of section 1251, it is not farm land for purposes of section 1252. Nevertheless, although no gain would be recognized under sections 1033(a)(3) and 1251(c)(1) (determined without regard to section 1252), the limitation under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph is $67,500 (that is, the fair market value of property other than farm land acquired which is qualifying property under section 1033). Since the amount of gain which would be recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) (determined without regard to subparagraph (1) of this paragraph), $18,000 (as computed in subdivision (i) of this example), is lower than the amount of such limitation, $67,500, accordingly, only $18,000 is recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1). For determination of basis of the stock acquired, see subparagraph (5) of this paragraph.

Example 2.

(i) Assume the same facts as in example (1) of this subparagraph, except that the cost of the stock was $62,500 (its fair market value). Thus, the amount of gain recognized on the disposition under section 1033(a)(3) (determined without regard to sections 1251 and 1252) is $5,000, that is, $67,500 minus $62,500. Assume further that $5,000 (the amount of gain recognized under section 1033(a)(3) (so determined)) was recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1). The amount of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1252(a)(1) is $13,000, computed as follows:

(1) Amount of gain under section 1252(a)(1) (determined without regard to subparagraph (1) of this paragraph):
(a) Aggregate of deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 $18,000
(b) Minus: Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) $5,000
(c) Difference $13,000
(d) Multiply: Applicable percentage for property disposed of within the fifth year after it was acquired 100%
(e) Amount in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(a) of § 1.1252-1 $13,000
(f) Gain realized (amount realized, $67,500 (less adjusted basis, $48,000)) $19,500
(g) Minus: Amount in line (b) $5,000
(h) Amount in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(b) of § 1.1252-1 $14,500
(i) Lower of line (e) or (h) $13,000
(2) Limitation in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph:
(a) Gain recognized (determined without regard to section 1252) $5,000
(b) Minus: Gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1251(c)(1) $5,000
(c) Difference 0
(d) Plus; The fair market value of property other than farm land acquired which is qualifying property under section 1033 $62,500
(e) Sum of lines (c) and (d) $62,500
(3) Lower of line (1)(i) or line (2)(e) $13,000

(3) Application to single disposition of farm land and property of different class.

(i) If upon a sale of farm land gain would be recognized under section 1252(a)(1), and if such land together with property of a different class or classes is disposed of in one transaction in which gain is not recognized in whole or in part under section 1031 or 1033 (without regard to section 1252(a)(1)), then rules consistent with the principles of paragraph (d)(6) of § 1.1250-3 (relating to gain from disposition of certain depreciable realty) shall apply for purposes of allocating the amount realized to each of the classes of property disposed of and for purposes of determining what property the amount realized for each class consists of.

(ii) For purposes of this subparagraph, the classes of property other than farm recapture property (as defined in section 1251(e) and paragraph (a)(1) of § 1.1251-3) are (a) section 1245 property, (b) section 1250 property, and (c) other property.

(iii) For purposes of this subparagraph, the classes of farm recapture property are (a) land, (b) section 1245 property, and (c) other property.

(4) Treatment of farm land received in like kind exchange or involuntary conversion. The aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 in respect of land acquired in a transaction described in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph shall include the aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 in respect of the land transferred or converted (as the cr sections 175 and 182 in respect of land acquired in a transaction described in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph shall include the aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 in respect of the land transferred or converted (as the case may be) in such transaction minus the amount of gain taken into account under sections 1251(c) and 1252(a) with respect to the land transferred or converted. Upon a subsequent disposition of such land, the holding period shall include the holding period with respect to the land transferred or converted.

(5) Basis adjustment. In order to reflect gain recognized under section 1252(a)(1) if property is acquired in a transaction to which subparagraph (1) of this paragraph applies, its basis shall be determined under the rules of section 1031(d) or 1033(c).

(e) Partnerships. [Reserved]

(f) Treatment of farm land received by a transferee in a disposition by gift and certain tax-free transactions

(1) General rule. If farm land is disposed of in a transaction which is either a gift to which paragraph (a)(1) of this section applies, or a completely tax-free transfer to which paragraph (c)(1) of this section applies, then for purposes of section 1252:

(i) The aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 in respect of the land in the hands of the tranferee immediately after the disposition shall be an amount equal to the amount of such aggregate in the hands of the transferor immediately before the disposition, and

(ii) For purposes of applying section 1252 upon a subsequent disposition by the transferee (including a computation of the applicable percentage), the holding period of the transferee shall include the holding period of the transferor.

(2) Certain partially tax-free transfers. If farm land is disposed of in a transaction which either is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift to which paragraph (a)(2)of this section applies, or is a partially tax-free transfer to which paragraph (c)(1) of this section applies, then for purposes of section 1252 the amount determined under subparagraph (1)(i) of this paragraph shallbe reduced by the amount of gain taken into account under sections 1251(c) and 1252(a) by the transferor upon the disposition. Upon a subsequent disposition by the transferee, the holding period for purposes of computing the amount under section 1252(a)(1)(A), with respect to the 175 and 182 deductions taken by the transferor, shall include the holding period of the transferor. With respect to the 1975 and 182 deductions taken by the transferee, the holding period shall not include the holding period of the transferor.

(3) Examples. The provisions of subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. Assume the same facts as in example (1) of paragraph (a)(4) of this section. Therefore, on the date B receives the farm land in the gift transaction, under subparagraph (1) of this paragraph the aggregate of the deductions allowed under sections 175 and 182 in respect of the farm land in the hands of B is the amount in the hands of A, $24,000, and for purposes of applying section 1252 upon a subsequent disposition by B (including a computation of the applicable percentage) the holding period of B includes the holding period of A.

Example 2. Assume the same facts as in example (2) of paragraph (a)(4) of this section. Under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the aggregate of the sections 175 and 182 deductions which pass over to B for purposes of section 1252 is $14,000 ($24,000 deductions allowable under sections 175 and 182 minus $3,000 gain recognized under section 1251(c) in accordance with example (2) of paragraph (a)(4) of § 1.1251-4, minus $7,000 gain recognized under section 1252(a) in acordance with example (2) of paragraph (a)(4) of this section), B's holding period includes the holding period of A (i.e., the period back to January 15, 1971) with respect to A's deductions.

(g) Disposition of farm land not specifically covered. If farm land is disposed of in a transaction not specifically covered under § 1.1252-1 and this section, then the principles of section 1245 shall apply.

[T.D. 7418, 41 FR 18832, May 7, 1976; 41 FR 23669, June 11, 1976]

§ 1.1254-0 Table of contents for section 1254 recapture rules.

This section lists the major captions contained in §§ 1.1254-1 through 1.1254-6.

§ 1.1254-1 Treatment of gain from disposition of natural resource recapture property.

(a) In general.

(b) Definitions.

(1) Section 1254 costs.

(2) Natural resource recapture property.

(3) Disposition.

(c) Disposition of a portion of natural resource recapture property.

(1) Disposition of a portion (other than an undivided interest) of natural resource recapture property.

(2) Disposition of an undivided interest.

(3) Alternative allocation rule.

(d) Installment method.

§ 1.1254-2 Exceptions and limitations.

(a) Exception for gifts and section 1041 transfers.

(1) General rule.

(2) Part gift transactions.

(b) Exception for transfers at death.

(c) Limitation for certain tax-free transactions.

(1) General rule.

(2) Special rule for dispositions to certain tax exempt organizations.

(3) Transfers described.

(4) Special rules for section 332 transfers.

(d) Limitation for like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions.

(1) General rule.

(2) Disposition and acquisition of both natural resource recapture property and other property.

§ 1.1254-3 Section 1254 costs immediately after certain acquisitions.

(a) Transactions in which basis is determined by reference to cost or fair market value of property transferred.

(1) Basis determined under section 1012.

(2) Basis determined under section 301(d), 334(a), or 358(a)(2).

(3) Basis determined solely under former section 334(b)(2) or former section 334(c).

(4) Basis determined by reason of the application of section 1014(a).

(b) Gifts and certain tax-free transactions.

(1) General rule.

(2) Transactions covered.

(c) Certain transfers at death.

(d) Property received in a like kind exchange or involuntary conversion.

(1) General rule.

(2) Allocation of section 1254 costs among multiple natural resource recapture property acquired.

(e) Property transferred in cases to which section 1071 or 1081(b) applies.

§ 1.1254-4 Special rules for S corporations and their shareholders.

(a) In general.

(b) Determination of gain treated as ordinary income under section 1254 upon a disposition of natural resource recapture property by an S corporation.

(1) General rule.

(2) Examples.

(c) Character of gain recognized by a shareholder upon a sale or exchange of S corporation stock.

(1) General rule.

(2) Exceptions.

(3) Examples.

(d) Section 1254 costs of a shareholder.

(e) Section 1254 costs of an acquiring shareholder after certain acquisitions.

(1) Basis determined under section 1012.

(2) Basis determined under section 1014(a).

(3) Basis determined under section 1014(b)(9).

(4) Gifts and section 1041 transfers.

(f) Special rules for a corporation that was formerly an S corporation or formerly a C corporation.

(1) Section 1254 costs of an S corporation that was formerly a C corporation.

(2) Examples.

(3) Section 1254 costs of a C corporation that was formerly an S corporation.

(g) Determination of a shareholder's section 1254 costs upon certain stock transactions

(1) Issuance of stock.

(2) Natural resource recapture property acquired in exchange for stock.

(3) Treatment of nonvested stock.

(4) Exception.

(5) Aggregate of S corporation shareholders' section 1254 costs with respect to natural resource recapture property held by the S corporation

(6) Examples.

§ 1.1254-5 Special rules for partnerships and their partners.

(a) In general.

(b) Determination of gain treated as ordinary income under section 1254 upon the disposition of natural resource recapture property by a partnership.

(1) General rule.

(2) Exception to partner level recapture in the case of abusive allocations.

(3) Examples.

(c) Section 1254 costs of a partner.

(1) General rule.

(2) Section 1254 costs of a transferee partner after certain acquisitions.

(d) Property distributed to a partner.

(1) In general.

(2) Aggregate of partners' section 1254 costs with respect to natural resource recapture property held by a partnership.

§ 1.1254-6 Effective date of regulations.

[T.D. 8586, 60 FR 2501, Jan. 10, 1995, as amended by T.D. 8684, 61 FR 53063, Oct. 10, 1996]

§ 1.1254-1 Treatment of gain from disposition of natural resource recapture property.

(a) In general. Upon any disposition of section 1254 property or any disposition after December 31, 1975 of oil, gas, or geothermal property, gain is treated as ordinary income in an amount equal to the lesser of the amount of the section 1254 costs (as defined in paragraph (b)(1) of this section) with respect to the property, or the amount, if any, by which the amount realized on the sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion, or the fair market value of the property on any other disposition, exceeds the adjusted basis of the property. However, any amount treated as ordinary income under the preceding sentence is not included in the taxpayer's gross income from the property for purposes of section 613. Generally, the lesser of the amounts described in this paragraph (a) is treated as ordinary income even though, in the absence of section 1254(a), no gain would be recognized upon the disposition under any other provision of the Internal Revenue Code. For the definition of the term section 1254 costs, see paragraph (b)(1) of this section. For the definition of the terms section 1254 property, oil, gas, or geothermal property, and natural resource recapture property, see paragraph (b)(2) of this section. For rules relating to the disposition of natural resource recapture property, see paragraphs (b)(3), (c), and (d) of this section. For exceptions and limitations to the application of section 1254(a), see § 1.1254-2.

(b) Definitions

(1) Section 1254 costs

(i) Property placed in service after December 31, 1986. With respect to any property placed in service by the taxpayer after December 31, 1986, the term section 1254 costs means—

(A) The aggregate amount of expenditures that have been deducted by the taxpayer or any person under section 263, 616, or 617 with respect to such property and that, but for the deduction, would have been included in the adjusted basis of the property or in the adjusted basis of certain depreciable property associated with the property; and

(B) The deductions for depletion under section 611 that reduced the adjusted basis of the property.

(ii) Property placed in service before January 1, 1987. With respect to any property placed in service by the taxpayer before January 1, 1987, the term section 1254 costs means—

(A) The aggregate amount of costs paid or incurred after December 31, 1975, with respect to such property, that have been deducted as intangible drilling and development costs under section 263(c) by the taxpayer or any other person (except that section 1254 costs do not include costs incurred with respect to geothermal wells commenced before October 1, 1978) and that, but for the deduction, would be reflected in the adjusted basis of the property or in the adjusted basis of certain depreciable property associated with the property; reduced by

(B) The amount (if any) by which the deduction for depletion allowed under section 611 that was computed either under section 612 or sections 613 and 613A, with respect to the property, would have been increased if the costs (paid or incurred after December 31, 1975) had been charged to capital account rather than deducted.

(iii) Deductions under section 59 and section 291. Amounts capitalized pursuant to an election under section 59(e) or pursuant to section 291(b) are treated as section 1254 costs in the year in which an amortization deduction is claimed under section 59(e)(1) or section 291(b)(2).

(iv) Suspended deductions. If a deduction of a section 1254 cost has been suspended as of the date of disposition of section 1254 property, the deduction is not treated as a section 1254 cost if it is included in basis for determining gain or loss on the disposition. On the other hand, if the deduction will eventually be claimed, it is a section 1254 cost as of the date of disposition. For example, a deduction suspended pursuant to the 65 percent of taxable income limitation of section 613A(d)(1) may either be included in basis upon disposition of the property or may be deducted in a year after the year of disposition. See § 1.613A-4(a)(1). If it is included in the basis then it is not a section 1254 cost, but if it is deductible in a later year it is a section 1254 cost as of the date of the disposition.

(v) Previously recaptured amounts. If an amount has been previously treated as ordinary income pursuant to section 1254, it is not a section 1254 cost.

(vi) Nonproductive wells. The aggregate amount of section 1254 costs paid or incurred on any property includes the amount of intangible drilling and development costs incurred on nonproductive wells, but only to the extent that the taxpayer recognizes income on the foreclosure of a nonrecourse debt the proceeds from which were used to finance the section 1254 costs with respect to the property. For this purpose, the term nonproductive well means a well that does not produce oil or gas in commercial quantities, including a well that is drilled for the purpose of ascertaining the existence, location, or extent of an oil or gas reservoir (e.g., a delineation well). The term nonproductive well does not include an injection well (other than an injection well drilled as part of a project that does not result in production in commercial quantities).

(vii) Calculation of amount described in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(B) of this section (hypothetical depletion offset)

(A) In general. In calculating the amount described in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(B) of this section, the taxpayer shall apply the following rules. The taxpayer may use the 65-percent-of-taxable-income limitation of section 613A(d)(1). If the taxpayer uses that limitation, the taxpayer is not required to recalculate the effect of such limitation with respect to any property not disposed of. That is, the taxpayer may assume that the hypothetical capitalization of intangible drilling and development costs with respect to any property disposed of does not affect the allowable depletion with respect to property retained by the taxpayer. Any intangible drilling and development costs that, if they had not been treated as expenses under section 263(c), would have properly been capitalized under § 1.612-4(b)(2) (relating to items recoverable through depreciation under section 167 or cost recovery under section 168) are treated as costs described in § 1.612-4(b)(1) (relating to items recoverable through depletion). The increase in depletion attributable to the capitalization of intangible drilling and development costs is computed by subtracting the amount of cost or percentage depletion actually claimed from the amount of cost or percentage depletion that would have been allowable if intangible drilling and development costs had been capitalized. If the remainder is zero or less than zero, the entire amount of intangible drilling and development costs attributable to the property is recapturable.

(B) Example. The following example illustrates the principles of paragraph (b)(1)(vii)(A).

Example: Hypothetical depletion offset. In 1976, A purchased undeveloped property for $10,000. During 1977, A incurred $200,000 of productive well intangible drilling and development costs with respect to the property. A deducted the intangible drilling and development costs as expenses under section 263(c). Estimated reserves of 150,000 barrels of recoverable oil were discovered in 1977 and production began in 1978. In 1978, A produced and sold 30,000 barrels of oil at $8 per barrel, resulting in $240,000 of gross income. A had no other oil or gas production in 1978. A claimed a percentage depletion deduction of $52,800 (i.e., 22% of $240,000 gross income from the property). If A had capitalized the intangible drilling and development costs, assume that $200,000 of the costs would have been allocated to the depletable property and none to depreciable property. A's cost depletion deduction if the intangible drilling and development costs had been capitalized would have been $42,000 (i.e., (($200,000 intangible drilling and development costs + $10,000 acquisition costs) × 30,000 barrels of production)/ 150,000 barrels of estimated recoverable reserves). Since this amount is less than A's depletion deduction of $52,800 (percentage depletion), no reduction is made to the amount of intangible drilling and development costs ($200,000). On January 1, 1979, A sold the oil property to B for $360,000 and calculated section 1254 recapture without reference to the 65-percent-of-taxable-income limitation. A's gain on the sale is the entire $360,000, because A's basis in the property at the beginning of 1979 is zero (i.e., $10,000 cost less $52,800 depletion deduction for 1978). Since the section 1254 costs ($200,000) are less than A's gain on the sale, $200,000 is treated as ordinary income under section 1254(a). The remaining amount of A's gain ($160,000) is not subject to section 1254(a).

(2) Natural resource recapture property

(i) In general. The term natural resource recapture property means section 1254 property or oil, gas, or geothermal property as those terms are defined in this section.

(ii) Section 1254 property. The term section 1254 property means any property (within the meaning of section 614) that is placed in service by the taxpayer after December 31, 1986, if any expenditures described in paragraph (b)(1)(i)(A) of this section (relating to costs under section 263, 616, or 617) are properly chargeable to such property, or if the adjusted basis of such property includes adjustments for deductions for depletion under section 611.

(iii) Oil, gas, or geothermal property. The term oil, gas, or geothermal property means any property (within the meaning of section 614) that was placed in service by the taxpayer before January 1, 1987, if any expenditures described in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(A) of this section are properly chargeable to such property.

(iv) Property to which section 1254 costs are properly chargeable.

(A) An expenditure is properly chargeable to property if—

(1) The property is an operating mineral interest with respect to which the expenditure has been deducted;

(2) The property is a nonoperating mineral interest (e.g., a net profits interest or an overriding royalty interest) burdening an operating mineral interest if the nonoperating mineral interest is carved out of an operating mineral interest described in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(A)(1) of this section;

(3) The property is a nonoperating mineral interest retained by a lessor or sublessor if such lessor or sublessor held, prior to the lease or sublease, an operating mineral interest described in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(A)(1) of this section; or

(4) The property is an operating or a nonoperating mineral interest held by a taxpayer if a party related to the taxpayer (within the meaning of section 267(b) or section 707(b)) held an operating mineral interest (described in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(A)(1) of this section) in the same tract or parcel of land that terminated (in whole or in part) without being disposed of (e.g., a working interest which terminated after a specified period of time or a given amount of production), but only if there exists between the related parties an arrangement or plan to avoid recapture under section 1254. In such a case, the taxpayer's section 1254 costs with respect to the property include those of the related party.

(B) Example. The following example illustrates the provisions of paragraph (2)(iv)(A)(4) of this section:

Example: Arrangement or plan to avoid recapture. C, an individual, owns 100% of the stock of both X Co. and Y Co. On January 1, 1998, X Co. enters into a standard oil and gas lease. X Co. immediately assigns to Y Co. 1% of the working interest for one year, and 99% of the working interest thereafter. In 1998, X Co. and Y Co. expend $300 in intangible drilling and development costs developing the tract, of which $297 are deducted by X Co. under section 263(c). On January 1, 1999, Y Co. sells its 99% share of the working interest to an unrelated person. Based on all the facts and circumstances, the arrangement between X Co. and Y Co. is part of a plan or arrangement to avoid recapture under section 1254. Therefore, Y Co. must include in its section 1254 costs the $297 of intangible drilling and development costs deducted by X Co.

(v) Property the basis of which includes adjustments for depletion deductions. The adjusted basis of property includes adjustments for depletion under section 611 if—

(A) The basis of the property has been reduced by reason of depletion deductions; or

(B) The property has been carved out of or is a portion of property the basis of which has been reduced by reason of depletion deductions.

(vi) Property held by a transferee. Property held by a transferee is natural resource recapture property if the property was natural resource recapture property in the hands of the transferor and the transferee's basis in the property is determined with reference to the transferor's basis in the property (e.g., a gift) or is determined under section 732.

(vii) Property held by a transferor. Property held by a transferor of natural resource recapture property is natural resource recapture property if the transferor's basis in the property received is determined with reference to the transferor's basis in the property transferred by the transferor (e.g., a like kind exchange). For purposes of this paragraph (b)(2), property described in this paragraph (b)(2)(vii) is treated as placed in service at the time the property transferred by the transferor was placed in service by the transferor.

(3) Disposition

(i) General rule. The term disposition has the same meaning as in section 1245, relating to gain from dispositions of certain depreciable property.

(ii) Exceptions. The term disposition does not include—

(A) Any transaction that is merely a financing device, such as a mortgage or a production payment that is treated as a loan under section 636 and the regulations thereunder;

(B) Any abandonment (except that an abandonment is a disposition to the extent the taxpayer recognizes income on the foreclosure of a nonrecourse debt);

(C) Any creation of a lease or sublease of natural resource recapture property;

(D) Any termination or election of the status of an S corporation;

(E) Any unitization or pooling arrangement;

(F) Any expiration or reversion of an operating mineral interest that expires or reverts by its own terms, in whole or in part; or

(G) Any conversion of an overriding royalty interest that, at the option of the grantor or successor in interest, converts to an operating mineral interest after a certain amount of production.

(iii) Special rule for carrying arrangements. In a carrying arrangement, liability for section 1254 costs attributable to the entire operating mineral interest held by the carrying party prior to reversion or conversion remains attributable to the reduced operating mineral interest retained by the carrying party after a portion of the operating mineral interest has reverted to the carried party or after the conversion of an overriding royalty interest that, at the option of the grantor or successor in interest, converts to an operating mineral interest after a certain amount of production.

(c) Disposition of a portion of natural resource recapture property

(1) Disposition of a portion (other than an undivided interest) of natural resource recapture property

(i) Natural resource recapture property subject to the general rules of § 1.1254-1. For purposes of section 1254(a)(1) and paragraph (a) of this section, except as provided in paragraphs (c) (1)(ii) and (3) of this section, in the case of the disposition of a portion (that is not an undivided interest) of natural resource recapture property, the entire amount of the section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property is treated as allocable to that portion of the property to the extent of the amount of gain to which section 1254(a)(1) applies. If the amount of the gain to which section 1254(a)(1) applies is less than the amount of the section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property, the balance of the section 1254 costs remaining after allocation to the portion of the property that was disposed of remains subject to recapture by the taxpayer under section 1254(a)(1) upon disposition of the remaining portion of the property. For example, assume that A owns an 80-acre tract of land with respect to which A has deducted intangible drilling and development costs under section 263(c). If A sells the north 40 acres, the entire amount of the section 1254 costs with respect to the 80-acre tract is treated as allocable to the 40-acre portion sold (to the extent of the amount of gain to which section 1254(a)(1) applies).

(ii) Natural resource recapture property subject to the exceptions and limitations of § 1.1254-2. For purposes of section 1254(a)(1) and paragraph (a) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, in the case of the disposition of a portion (that is not an undivided interest) of natural resource recapture property to which section 1254(a)(1) does not apply by reason of the application of § 1.1254-2 (certain nonrecognition transactions), the following rule for allocation of costs applies. An amount of the section 1254 costs that bears the same ratio to the entire amount of such costs with respect to the entire natural resource recapture property as the value of the property transferred bears to the value of the entire natural resource recapture property is treated as allocable to the portion of the natural resource recapture property transferred. The balance of the section 1254 costs remaining after allocation to that portion of the transferred property remains subject to recapture by the taxpayer under section 1254(a)(1) upon disposition of the remaining portion of the property. For example, assume that A owns an 80-acre tract of land with respect to which A has deducted intangible drilling and development costs under section 263(c). If A gives away the north 40 acres, and if 60 percent of the value of the 80-acre tract were attributable to the north 40 acres given away, 60 percent of the section 1254 costs with respect to the 80-acre tract is allocable to the north 40 acres given away.

(2) Disposition of an undivided interest

(i) Natural resource recapture property subject to the general rules of § 1.1254-1. For purposes of section 1254(a)(1), except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (b)(3) of this section, in the case of the disposition of an undivided interest in natural resource recapture property (or a portion thereof), a proportionate part of the section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property is treated as allocable to the transferred undivided interest to the extent of the amount of gain to which section 1254(a)(1) applies. For example, assume that A owns an 80-acre tract of land with respect to which A has deducted intangible drilling and development costs under section 263(c). If A sells an undivided 40 percent interest in the 80-acre tract, 40 percent of the section 1254 costs with respect to the 80-acre tract is allocable to the transferred 40 percent interest in the 80-acre tract. However, if the amount of gain recognized on the sale of the 40 percent undivided interest were equal to only 35 percent of the amount of section 1254 costs attributable to the 80-acre tract, only 35 percent of the section 1254 costs would be treated as attributable to the undivided 40 percent interest. See paragraph (c)(3) of this section for an alternative allocation rule.

(ii) Natural resource recapture property subject to the exceptions and limitations of § 1.1254-2. For purposes of section 1254(a)(1) and paragraph (a) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, in the case of a disposition of an undivided interest in natural resource recapture property (or a portion thereof) to which section 1254 (a)(1) does not apply by reason of § 1.1254-2, a proportionate part of the section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property is treated as allocable to the transferred undivided interest. See paragraph (c)(3) of this section for an alternative allocation rule.

(3) Alternative allocation rule

(i) In general. The rules for the allocation of costs set forth in section 1254(a)(2) and paragraphs (c) (1) and (2) of this section do not apply with respect to section 1254 costs that the taxpayer establishes to the satisfaction of the Commissioner do not relate to the transferred property. Except as provided in paragraphs (c)(3) (ii) and (iii) of this section, a taxpayer may satisfy this requirement only by receiving a private letter ruling from the Internal Revenue Service that the section 1254 costs do not relate to the transferred property.

(ii) Portion of property. Upon the transfer of a portion of a natural resource recapture property (other than an undivided interest) with respect to which section 1254 costs have been incurred, a taxpayer may treat section 1254 costs as not relating to the transferred portion if the transferred portion does not include any part of any deposit with respect to which the costs were incurred.

(iii) Undivided interest. Upon the transfer of an undivided interest in a natural resource recapture property with respect to which section 1254 costs have been incurred, a taxpayer may treat costs as not relating to the transferred interest if the undivided interest is an undivided interest in a portion of the natural resource recapture property, and the portion would be eligible for the alternative allocation rule under paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section.

(iv) Substantiation. If a taxpayer treats section 1254 costs incurred with respect to a natural resource recapture property as not relating to a transferred interest in a portion of the property, the taxpayer must indicate on his or her tax return that the costs do not relate to the transferred portion and maintain the records and supporting evidence that substantiate this position.

(d) Installment method. Gain from a disposition to which section 1254(a)(1) applies is reported on the installment method if that method otherwise applies under section 453 or 453A of the Internal Revenue Code and the regulations thereunder. The portion of each installment payment as reported that represents income (other than interest) is treated as gain to which section 1254(a)(1) applies until all of the gain (to which section 1254(a)(1) applies) has been reported, and the remaining portion (if any) of the income is then treated as gain to which section 1254(a)(1) does not apply. For treatment of amounts as interest on certain deferred payments, see sections 483, 1274, and the regulations thereunder.

[T.D. 8586, 60 FR 2502, Jan. 10, 1995]

§ 1.1254-2 Exceptions and limitations.

(a) Exception for gifts and section 1041 transfers

(1) General rule. No gain is recognized under section 1254(a)(1) upon a disposition of natural resource recapture property by a gift or by a transfer in which no gain or loss is recognized pursuant to section 1041 (relating to transfers between spouses). For purposes of this paragraph (a), the term gift means, except to the extent that paragraph (a)(2) of this section applies, a transfer of natural resource recapture property that, in the hands of the transferee, has a basis determined under the provisions of section 1015(a) or 1015(d) (relating to basis of property acquired by gift) or section 1022 (relating to the basis of property acquired from certain decedents who died in 2010). For rules concerning the potential reduction in the amount of the charitable contribution in the case of natural resource recapture property, see section 170(e) and § 1.170A-4. See § 1.1254-3(b)(1) for determination of potential recapture of section 1254 costs on property acquired by gift. See § 1.1254-1 (c)(1)(ii) and (c)(2)(ii) for apportionment of section 1254 costs on a gift of a portion of natural resource recapture property.

(2) Part gift transactions. If a disposition of natural resource recapture property is in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift, the gain that is treated as ordinary income pursuant to section 1254(a)(1) is the lower of the section 1254 costs with respect to the property or the excess of the amount realized upon the disposition of the property over the adjusted basis of the property. In the case of a transfer subject to section 1011(b) (relating to bargain sales to charitable organizations), the adjusted basis for purposes of the preceding sentence is the adjusted basis for determining gain or loss under section 1011(b).

(b) Exception for transfers at death. Except as provided in section 691 (relating to income in respect of a decedent), no gain is recognized under section 1254(a)(1) upon a transfer at death. For purposes of this paragraph, the term transfer at death means a transfer of natural resource recapture property that, in the hands of the transferee, has a basis determined under the provisions of section 1014(a) (relating to basis of property acquired from a decedent) because of the death of the transferor. See § 1.1254-3 (a)(4) and (c) for the determination of potential recapture of section 1254 costs on property acquired in a transfer at death.

(c) Limitation for certain tax-free transactions

(1) General rule. Upon a transfer of property described in paragraph (c)(3) of this section, the amount of gain treated as ordinary income by the transferor under section 1254(a)(1) may not exceed the amount of gain recognized to the transferor on the transfer (determined without regard to section 1254). In the case of a transfer of both natural resource recapture property and property that is not natural resource recapture property in one transaction, the amount realized from the disposition of the natural resource recapture property is deemed to be equal to the amount that bears the same ratio to the total amount realized as the fair market value of the natural resource recapture property bears to the aggregate fair market value of all the property transferred. The preceding sentence is applied solely for purposes of computing the portion of the total gain (determined without regard to section 1254) that may be recognized as ordinary income under section 1254(a)(1).

(2) Special rule for dispositions to certain tax-exempt organizations. Paragraph (c)(1) of this section does not apply to a disposition of natural resource recapture property to an organization (other than a cooperative described in section 521) that is exempt from the tax imposed by chapter I of the Internal Revenue Code. The preceding sentence does not apply to a disposition of natural resource recapture property to an organization described in section 511 (a)(2) or (b)(2) (relating to imposition of tax on unrelated business income of charitable, etc., organizations) if, immediately after the disposition, the organization uses the property in an unrelated trade or business as defined in section 513. If any property with respect to which gain is not recognized by reason of the exception of this paragraph (c)(2) ceases to be used in an unrelated trade or business of the organization acquiring the property, that organization is, for purposes of section 1254, treated as having disposed of the property on the date of the cessation.

(3) Transfers described. The transfers referred to in paragraph (c)(1) of this section are transfers of natural resource recapture property in which the basis of the natural resource recapture property in the hands of the transferee is determined by reference to its basis in the hands of the transferor by reason of the application of any of the following provisions:

(i) Section 332 (relating to certain liquidations of subsidiaries). See paragraph (c)(4) of this section.

(ii) Section 351 (relating to transfer to a corporation controlled by transferor).

(iii) Section 361 (relating to exchanges pursuant to certain corporate reorganizations).

(iv) Section 721 (relating to transfers to a partnership in exchange for a partnership interest).

(v) Section 731 (relating to distributions by a partnership to a partner). For purposes of this paragraph, the basis of natural resource recapture property distributed by a partnership to a partner is deemed to be determined by reference to the adjusted basis of such property to the partnership.

(4) Special rules for section 332 transfers. In the case of a distribution in complete liquidation of a subsidiary to which section 332 applies, the limitation provided in this paragraph (c) is confined to instances in which the basis of the natural resource recapture property in the hands of the transferee is determined, under section 334(b)(1), by reference to its basis in the hands of the transferor. Thus, for example, the limitation may apply in respect of a liquidating distribution of natural resource recapture property by a subsidiary corporation to the parent corporation, but does not apply in respect of a liquidating distribution of natural resource recapture property to a minority shareholder. This paragraph (c) does not apply to a liquidating distribution of natural resource recapture property by a subsidiary to its parent if the parent's basis for the property is determined under section 334(b)(2) (as in effect before enactment of the Tax Reform Act of 1986), by reference to its basis for the stock of the subsidiary. This paragraph (c) does not apply to a liquidating distribution under section 332 of natural resource recapture property by a subsidiary to its parent if gain is recognized and there is a corresponding increase in the parent's basis in the property (e.g., certain distributions to a tax-exempt or foreign corporation).

(d) Limitation for like kind exchanges and involuntary conversions

(1) General rule. If natural resource recapture property is disposed of and gain (determined without regard to section 1254) is not recognized in whole or in part under section 1031 (relating to like kind exchanges) or section 1033 (relating to involuntary conversions), the amount of gain taken into account by the transferor under section 1254(a)(1) may not exceed the sum of—

(i) The amount of gain recognized on the disposition (determined without regard to section 1254); plus

(ii) The fair market value of property acquired that is not natural resource recapture property (determined without regard to § 1.1254-1(b)(2)(vii)) and is not taken into account under paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section (that is, qualifying property under section 1031 or 1033 that is not natural resource recapture property).

(2) Disposition and acquisition of both natural resource recapture property and other property. For purposes of this paragraph (d), if both natural resource recapture property and property that is not natural resource recapture property are acquired as the result of one disposition in which both natural resource recapture property and property that is not natural resource recapture property are disposed of—

(i) The total amount realized upon the disposition is allocated between the natural resource recapture property and the property that is not natural resource recapture property disposed of in proportion to their respective fair market values;

(ii) The amount realized upon the disposition of the natural resource recapture property is deemed to consist of so much of the fair market value of the natural resource recapture property acquired as is not in excess of the amount realized from the natural resource recapture property disposed of, and the remaining portion (if any) of the amount realized upon the disposition of such property is deemed to consist of so much of the fair market value of the property that is not natural resource recapture property acquired as is not in excess of the remaining portion; and

(iii) The amount realized upon the disposition of the property that is not natural resource recapture property is deemed to consist of so much of the fair market value of all the property acquired which was not taken into account under paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section. Except as provided in section 1060 and the regulations thereunder, if a buyer and seller have adverse interests as to such allocation of the amount realized, any arm's-length agreement between the buyer and seller is used to establish the allocation. In the absence of such an agreement, the allocation is made by taking into account the appropriate facts and circumstances.

[T.D. 8586, 60 FR 2505, Jan. 10, 1995, as amended by T.D. 8684, 61 FR 53063, Oct. 10, 1996; T.D. 9811, 82 FR 6241, Jan. 19, 2017]

§ 1.1254-3 Section 1254 costs immediately after certain acquisitions.

(a) Transactions in which basis is determined by reference to cost or fair market value of property transferred

(1) Basis determined under section 1012. If, on the date a person acquires natural resource recapture property, the person's basis for the property is determined solely by reference to its cost (within the meaning of section 1012), the amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property in the person's hands is zero on the acquisition date.

(2) Basis determined under section 301(d), 334(a), or 358(a)(2). If, on the date a person acquires natural resource recapture property, the person's basis for the property is determined solely by reason of the application of section 301(d) (relating to basis of property received in a corporate distribution), section 334(a) (relating to basis of property received in a liquidation in which gain or loss is recognized), or section 358(a)(2) (relating to basis of other property received in certain exchanges), the amount of the section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property in the person's hands is zero on the acquisition date.

(3) Basis determined solely under former section 334(b)(2) or former section 334(c). If, on the date a person acquires natural resource recapture property, the person's basis for the property is determined solely under the provisions of section 334(b)(2) (prior to amendment of that section by the Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act of 1982) or (c) (prior to repeal of that section by the Tax Reform Act of 1986) (relating to basis of property received in certain corporate liquidations), the amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property in the person's hands is zero on the acquisition date.

(4) Basis determined by reason of the application of section 1014(a). If, on the date a person acquires natural resource recapture property from a decedent, the person's basis is determined, by reason of the application of section 1014(a), solely by reference to the fair market value of the property on the date of the decedent's death or on the applicable date provided in section 2032 (relating to alternate valuation date), the amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property in the person's hands is zero on the acquisition date. See paragraph (c) of this section for the treatment of certain transfers at death.

(b) Gifts and certain tax-free transactions

(1) General rule. If natural resource recapture property is transferred in a transaction described in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, the amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property in the hands of the transferee immediately after the disposition is an amount equal to—

(i) The amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property in the hands of the transferor immediately before the disposition (and in the case of an S corporation or partnership transferor, the section 1254 costs of the shareholders or partners with respect to the natural resource recapture property); minus

(ii) The amount of any gain taken into account as ordinary income under section 1254(a)(1) by the transferor upon the disposition (and in the case of an S corporation or partnership transferor, any such gain taken into account as ordinary income by the shareholders or partners).

(2) Transactions covered. The transactions to which paragraph (b)(1) of this section apply are—

(i) A disposition that is a gift or in part a sale or exchange and in part a gift;

(ii) A transaction described in section 1041(a);

(iii) A disposition described in § 1.1254-2(c)(3) (relating to certain tax-free transactions); or

(iv) A transfer at death where basis of property in the hands of the transferee is determined under section 1022.

(c) Certain transfers at death. If natural resource recapture property is acquired in a transfer at death, the amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property in the hands of the transferee immediately after the transfer includes the amount, if any, of the section 1254 costs deducted by the transferee before the decedent's death, to the extent that the basis of the natural resource recapture property (determined under section 1014(a)) is required to be reduced under the second sentence of section 1014(b)(9) (relating to adjustments to basis where the property is acquired from a decedent prior to death).

(d) Property received in a like kind exchange or involuntary conversion

(1) General rule. If natural resource recapture property is disposed of in a like kind exchange under section 1031 or involuntary conversion under section 1033, then immediately after the disposition the amount of section 1254 costs with respect to any natural resource recapture property acquired for the property transferred is an amount equal to—

(i) The amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property disposed of (including the section 1254 costs of the shareholders of an S corporation or of the partners of a partnership with respect to the natural resource recapture property); minus

(ii) The amount of any gain taken into account as ordinary income under section 1254(a)(1) by the transferor upon the disposition (and in the case of an S corporation or partnership transferor, any such gain taken into account as ordinary income by the shareholders or partners).

(2) Allocation of section 1254 costs among multiple natural resource recapture properties acquired. If more than one parcel of natural resource recapture property is acquired at the same time from the same person in a transaction referred to in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the total amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the parcels is allocated to the parcels in proportion to their respective adjusted bases.

(e) Property transferred in cases to which section 1071 or 1081(b) applies. Rules similar to the rules of section 1245(b)(5) shall apply under section 1254.

[T.D. 8586, 60 FR 2506, Jan. 10, 1995, as amended by T.D. 8684, 61 FR 53063, Oct. 10, 1996; T.D. 9811, 82 FR 6242, Jan. 19, 2017]

§ 1.1254-4 Special rules for S corporations and their shareholders.

(a) In general. This section provides rules for applying the provisions of section 1254 to S corporations and their shareholders upon the disposition by an S corporation (and a corporation that was formerly an S corporation) of natural resource recapture property and upon the disposition by a shareholder of stock of an S corporation that holds natural resource recapture property.

(b) Determination of gain treated as ordinary income under section 1254 upon a disposition of natural resource recapture property by an S corporation

(1) General rule. Upon a disposition of natural resource recapture property by an S corporation, the amount of gain treated as ordinary income under section 1254 is determined at the shareholder level. Each shareholder must recognize as ordinary income under section 1254 the lesser of—

(i) The shareholder's section 1254 costs with respect to the property disposed of; or

(ii) The shareholder's share of the amount, if any, by which the amount realized on the sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion, or the fair market value of the property upon any other disposition (including a distribution), exceeds the adjusted basis of the property.

(2) Examples. The following examples illustrate the provisions of paragraph (b)(1) of this section:

Example 1. Disposition of natural resource recapture property other than oil and gas property. A and B are equal shareholders in X, an S corporation. On January 1, 1997, X acquires for $90,000 an undeveloped mineral property, its sole property. During 1997, X expends and deducts $100,000 in developing the property. On January 15, 1998, X sells the property for $250,000 when X's basis in the property is $90,000. Thus, X recognizes gain of $160,000 on the sale. A and B's share of the $160,000 gain recognized is $80,000 each. Each shareholder has $50,000 of section 1254 costs with respect to the property. Under these circumstances, A and B each are required to recognize $50,000 of the $80,000 of gain on the sale of the property as ordinary income under section 1254.

Example 2. Disposition of oil and gas property the adjusted basis of which is allocated to the shareholders under section 613A(c)(11). C and D are equal shareholders in Y, an S corporation. On January 1, 1997, Y acquires for $150,000 an undeveloped oil and gas property, its sole property. During 1997, Y expends in developing the property $40,000 in intangible drilling costs which it elects to expense under section 263(c). On January 15, 1998, Y sells the property for $200,000. C and D's share of the $200,000 amount realized on the sale is $100,000 each. C and D each have a basis of $75,000 in the property and $20,000 of section 1254 costs with respect to the property. Under these circumstances, C and D each are required to recognize $20,000 of the $25,000 gain on the sale of the property as ordinary income under section 1254.

(c) Character of gain recognized by a shareholder upon a sale or exchange of S corporation stock

(1) General rule. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, if an S corporation shareholder recognizes gain upon a sale or exchange of stock in the S corporation (determined without regard to section 1254), the gain is treated as ordinary income under section 1254 to the extent of the shareholder's section 1254 costs (with respect to the shares sold or exchanged).

(2) Exceptions

(i) Gain not attributable to section 1254 costs

(A) General rule. Paragraph (c)(1) of this section does not apply to any portion of the gain recognized on the sale or exchange of the stock that the taxpayer establishes is not attributable to section 1254 costs. The portion of the gain recognized that is not attributable to section 1254 costs is that portion of the gain recognized that exceeds the amount of ordinary income that the shareholder would have recognized under section 1254 (with respect to the shares sold or exchanged) if, immediately prior to the sale or exchange of the stock, the corporation had sold at fair market value all of the corporation's property the disposition of which would result in the recognition by the shareholder of ordinary income under section 1254.

(B) Substantiation. To establish that a portion of the gain recognized is not attributable to a shareholder's section 1254 costs so as to qualify for the exception contained in paragraph (c)(2)(i)(A) of this section, the shareholder must attach to the shareholder's tax return a statement detailing the shareholder's share of the fair market value and basis, and the shareholder's section 1254 costs, for each of the S corporation's natural resource recapture properties held immediately before the sale or exchange of stock.

(ii) Transactions entered into as part of a plan to avoid recognition of ordinary income under section 1254. In the case of a contribution of property prior to a sale or exchange of stock pursuant to a plan a principal purpose of which is to avoid recognition of ordinary income under section 1254, paragraph (c)(1) of this section does not apply. Instead, the amount recognized as ordinary income under section 1254 is the amount of ordinary income the selling or exchanging shareholder would have recognized under section 1254 (with respect to the shares sold or exchanged) had the S corporation sold its natural resource recapture property the disposition of which would have resulted in the recognition of ordinary income under section 1254. The amount recognized as ordinary income under the preceding sentence reduces the amount realized on the sale or exchange of the stock.

This reduced amount realized is used in determining any gain or loss on the sale or exchange.

(3) Examples. The following examples illustrate the provisions of this paragraph (c):

Example 1. Application of general rule upon a sale of S corporation stock. C and D are equal shareholders in Y, an S corporation. As of January 1, 1997, Y holds two mining properties: Blackacre, with an adjusted basis of $5,000 and a fair market value of $35,000, and Whiteacre, with an adjusted basis of $20,000 and a fair market value of $15,000. Y also holds securities with a basis of $5,000 and a fair market value of $10,000. On January 1, 1997, D sells 50 percent of D's Y stock to E for $15,000. As of the date of the sale, D's adjusted basis in the Y stock sold is $7,500, and D has $18,000 of section 1254 costs with respect to Blackacre and $12,000 of section 1254 costs with respect to Whiteacre. Under this paragraph (c), the gain recognized by D upon the sale of Y stock is treated as ordinary income to the extent of D's section 1254 costs with respect to the stock sold, unless D establishes that a portion of such excess is not attributable to D's section 1254 costs. However, because D would recognize $7,500 in ordinary income under section 1254 with respect to the stock sold if Y sold Blackacre (the only asset the disposition of which would result in ordinary income to D under section 1254), the $7,500 of gain recognized by D upon the sale of D's Y stock is attributable to D's section 1254 costs. Therefore, upon the sale of stock to E, D recognizes $7,500 of ordinary income under this paragraph (c).

Example 2. Sale of S corporation stock where gain is not entirely attributable to section 1254 costs. Assume the same facts as in Example 1, except that Blackacre has a fair market value of $25,000, and the securities have a fair market value of $20,000. Immediately prior to the sale of stock to E, if Y had sold Blackacre (its only asset the disposition of which would result in the recognition of ordinary income to D under section 1254), D would recognize $5,000 in ordinary income with respect to the stock sold under section 1254. D attaches a statement to D's tax return for 1997 detailing D's share of the fair market values and bases, and D's section 1254 costs with respect to Blackacre and Whiteacre. Therefore, upon the sale of stock to E, of the $7,500 gain recognized by D, $5,000 is ordinary income under this paragraph (c).

Example 3. Contribution of property prior to sale of S corporation stock as part of a plan to avoid recognition of ordinary income under section 1254. H owns all of the stock of Z, an S corporation. As of January 1, 1997, H has $3,000 of section 1254 costs with respect to property P, which is natural resource recapture property and Z's only asset. Property P has an adjusted basis of $5,000 and a fair market value of $8,000. H has a basis of $5,000 in Z stock, which has a fair market value of $8,000. On January 1, 1997, H contributes securities to Z which have a basis of $7,000 and a fair market value of $4,000. On April 15, 1997, H sells all of the Z stock to J for $12,000. On that date, H's adjusted basis in the Z stock is also $12,000. Based on all the facts and circumstances, the sale of stock is part of a plan (along with the contribution by H of the securities to Z) that has a principal purpose to avoid recognition of ordinary income under section 1254. Consequently, under paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, H must recognize $3,000 as ordinary income under section 1254, the amount of ordinary income that H would recognize as ordinary income under section 1254 if property P were sold at fair market value. In addition, H reduces the amount realized on the sale of the stock ($12,000) by $3,000. As a result, H also recognizes a $3,000 capital loss on the sale of the stock ($9,000 amount realized less $12,000 adjusted basis).

(d) Section 1254 costs of a shareholder. An S corporation shareholder's section 1254 costs with respect to any natural resource recapture property held by the corporation include all of the shareholder's section 1254 costs with respect to the property in the hands of the S corporation. See § 1.1254-1(b)(1) for the definition of section 1254 costs.

(e) Section 1254 costs of an acquiring shareholder after certain acquisitions

(1) Basis determined under section 1012. If stock in an S corporation that holds natural resource recapture property is acquired and the acquiring shareholder's basis for the stock is determined solely by reference to its cost (within the meaning of section 1012), the amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the property held by the corporation in the acquiring shareholder's hands is zero on the acquisition date.

(2) Basis determined under section 1014(a). If stock in an S corporation that holds natural resource recapture property is acquired from a decedent and the acquiring shareholder's basis is determined, by reason of the application of section 1014(a), solely by reference to the fair market value of the stock on the date of the decedent's death or on the applicable date provided in section 2032 (relating to alternate valuation date), the amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the property held by the corporation in the acquiring shareholder's hands is zero on the acquisition date.

(3) Basis determined under section 1014(b)(9). If stock in an S corporation that holds natural resource recapture property is acquired before the death of the decedent, the amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the property held by the corporation in the acquiring shareholder's hands includes the amount, if any, of the section 1254 costs deducted by the acquiring shareholder before the decedent's death, to the extent that the basis of the stock (determined under section 1014(a)) is required to be reduced under section 1014(b)(9) (relating to adjustments to basis when the property is acquired before the death of the decedent).

(4) Gifts and section 1041 transfers. If stock is acquired in a transfer that is a gift, in a transfer that is a part sale or exchange and part gift, in a transfer that is described in section 1041(a), or in a transfer at death where the basis of property in the hands of the transferee is determined under section 1022, the amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the property held by the corporation in the acquiring shareholder's hands immediately after the transfer is an amount equal to—

(i) The amount of section 1254 costs with respect to the property held by the corporation in the hands of the transferor immediately before the transfer; minus

(ii) The amount of any gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1254 by the transferor upon the transfer.

(f) Special rules for a corporation that was formerly an S corporation or formerly a C corporation

(1) Section 1254 costs of an S corporation that was formerly a C corporation. In the case of a C corporation that holds natural resource recapture property and that elects to be an S corporation, each shareholder's section 1254 costs as of the beginning of the corporation's first taxable year as an S corporation include a pro rata share of the section 1254 costs of the corporation as of the close of the last taxable year that the corporation was a C corporation.

(2) Examples. The following examples illustrate the application of the provisions of paragraph (f)(1) of this section:

Example 1. Sale of natural resource recapture property held by an S corporation that was formerly a C corporation.

(i) Y is a C corporation that elects to be an S corporation effective January 1, 1997. On that date, Y owns Oil Well, which is natural resource recapture property and a capital asset. Y has section 1254 costs of $20,000 as of the close of the last taxable year that it was a C corporation. On January 1, 1997, Oil Well has a value of $200,000 and a basis of $100,000. Thus, under section 1374, Y's net unrealized built-in gain is $100,000. Also on that date, Y's basis in Oil Well is allocated to A, Y's sole shareholder, under section 613A(c)(11) and the section 1254 costs are allocated to A under paragraph (f)(1) of this section. In addition, A has a basis in A's Y stock of $100,000.

(ii) On November 1, 1997, Y sells Oil Well for $250,000. During 1997, Y has taxable income greater than $100,000, and no other transactions or items treated as recognized built-in gain or loss. Under section 1374, Y has net recognized built-in gain of $100,000. Assuming a tax rate of 35 percent on capital gain, Y has a tax of $35,000 under section 1374. The tax of $35,000 is treated as a capital loss under section 1366(f)(2). A has a realized gain on the sale of $150,000 ($250,000 minus $100,000) of which $20,000 is recognized as ordinary income under section 1254, and $130,000 is recognized as capital gain. Consequently, A recognizes ordinary income of $20,000 and net capital gain of $95,000 ($130,000 minus $35,000) on the sale.

Example 2. Sale of stock followed by sale of natural resource recapture property held by an S corporation that was formerly a C corporation.

(i) Assume the same facts as in Example 1(i). On November 1, 1997, A sells all of A's Y stock to P for $250,000. A has a realized gain on the sale of $150,000 ($250,000 minus $100,000) of which $20,000 is recognized as ordinary income under section 1254, and $130,000 is recognized as capital gain.

(ii) On November 2, 1997, Y sells Oil Well for $250,000. During 1997, Y has taxable income greater than $100,000, and no other transactions or items treated as recognized built-in gain or loss. Under section 1374, Y has net recognized built-in gain of $100,000. Assuming a tax rate of 35 percent on capital gain, Y has a tax of $35,000 under section 1374. The tax of $35,000 is treated as a capital loss under section 1366(f)(2). P has a realized gain on the sale of $150,000 ($250,000 minus $100,000), which is recognized as capital gain. Consequently, P recognizes net capital gain of $115,000 ($150,000 minus $35,000) on the sale.

(3) Section 1254 costs of a C corporation that was formerly an S corporation. In the case of an S corporation that becomes a C corporation, the C corporation's section 1254 costs with respect to any natural resource recapture property held by the corporation as of the beginning of the corporation's first taxable year as a C corporation include the sum of its shareholders' section 1254 costs with respect to the property as of the close of the last taxable year that the corporation was an S corporation. In the case of an S termination year as defined in section 1362(e)(4), the shareholders' section 1254 costs are determined as of the close of the S short year as defined in section 1362(e)(1)(A). See paragraph (g)(5) of this section for rules on determining the aggregate amount of the shareholders' section 1254 costs.

(g) Determination of a shareholder's section 1254 costs upon certain stock transactions

(1) Issuance of stock. Upon an issuance of stock (whether such stock is newly-issued or had been held as treasury stock) by an S corporation in a reorganization described in section 368 or otherwise—

(i) Each recipient of shares must be allocated a pro rata share (determined solely with respect to the shares issued in the transaction) of the aggregate of the S corporation shareholders' section 1254 costs with respect to natural resource recapture property held by the S corporation immediately before the issuance (as determined pursuant to paragraph (g)(5) of this section); and

(ii) Each pre-existing shareholder must reduce his or her section 1254 costs with respect to natural resource recapture property held by the S corporation immediately before the issuance by an amount equal to the pre-existing shareholder's section 1254 costs immediately before the issuance multiplied by the percentage of stock of the corporation issued in the transaction.

(2) Natural resource recapture property acquired in exchange for stock. If natural resource recapture property is transferred to an S corporation in exchange for stock of the S corporation (for example, in a section 351 transaction, or in a reorganization described in section 368), the S corporation must allocate to its shareholders a pro rata share of the S corporation's section 1254 costs with respect to the property immediately after the transaction (as determined under § 1.1254-3(b)(1)).

(3) Treatment of nonvested stock. Stock issued in connection with the performance of services that is substantially nonvested (within the meaning of § 1.83-3(b)) is treated as issued for purposes of this section at the first time it is treated as outstanding stock of the S corporation for purposes of section 1361.

(4) Exception. Paragraph (g)(1) of this section does not apply to stock issued in exchange for stock of the same S corporation (as for example, in a recapitalization described in section 368(a)(1)(E)).

(5) Aggregate of S corporation shareholders' section 1254 costs with respect to natural resource recapture property held by the S corporation

(i) In general. The aggregate of S corporation shareholders' section 1254 costs is equal to the sum of each shareholder's section 1254 costs. The S corporation must determine each shareholder's section 1254 costs under either paragraph (g)(5)(ii) (written data) or paragraph (g)(5)(iii) (assumptions) of this section. The S corporation may determine the section 1254 costs of some shareholders under paragraph (g)(5)(ii) of this section and of others under paragraph (g)(5)(iii) of this section.

(ii) Written data. An S corporation may determine a shareholder's section 1254 costs by using written data provided by a shareholder showing the shareholder's section 1254 costs with respect to natural resource recapture property held by the S corporation unless the S corporation knows or has reason to know that the written data is inaccurate. If an S corporation does not receive written data upon which it may rely, the S corporation must use the assumptions provided in paragraph (g)(5)(iii) of this section in determining a shareholder's section 1254 costs.

(iii) Assumptions. An S corporation that does not use written data pursuant to paragraph (g)(5)(ii) of this section to determine a shareholder's section 1254 costs must use the following assumptions to determine the shareholder's section 1254 costs—

(A) The shareholder deducted his or her share of the amount of deductions under sections 263(c), 616, and 617 in the first year in which the shareholder could claim a deduction for such amounts, unless in the case of expenditures under sections 263(c) or 616 the S corporation elected to capitalize such amounts;

(B) The shareholder was not subject to the following limitations with respect to the shareholder's depletion allowance under section 611, except to the extent a limitation applied at the corporate level: the taxable income limitation of section 613(a); the depletable quantity limitations of section 613A(c); or the limitations of sections 613A(d)(2), (3), and (4) (exclusion of retailers and refiners).

(6) Examples. The following examples illustrate the provisions of this paragraph (g):

Example 1. Transfer of natural resource recapture property to an S corporation in a section 351 transaction. As of January 1, 1997, A owns all the stock (20 shares) in X, an S corporation. X holds property that is not natural resource recapture property that has a fair market value of $2,000 and an adjusted basis of $2,000. On January 1, 1997, B transfers natural resource recapture property, Property P, to X in exchange for 80 shares of X stock in a transaction that qualifies under section 351. Property P has a fair market value of $8,000 and an adjusted basis of $5,000. Pursuant to section 351, B does not recognize gain on the transaction. Immediately prior to the transaction, B's section 1254 costs with respect to Property P equaled $6,000. Under § 1.1254-2(c)(1), B does not recognize any gain under section 1254 on the section 351 transaction and, under § 1.1254-3(b)(1), X's section 1254 costs with respect to Property P immediately after the contribution equal $6,000. Under paragraph (g)(2) of this section, each shareholder is allocated a pro rata share of X's section 1254 costs. The pro rata share of X's section 1254 costs that is allocated to A equals $1,200 (20 percent interest in X multiplied by X's $6,000 of section 1254 costs). The pro rata share of X's section 1254 costs that is allocated to B equals $4,800 (80 percent interest in X multiplied by X's $6,000 of section 1254 costs).

Example 2. Contribution of money in exchange for stock of an S corporation holding natural resource recapture property. As of January 1, 1997, A and B each own 50 percent of the stock (50 shares each) in X, an S corporation. X holds natural resource recapture property, Property P, which has a fair market value of $20,000 and an adjusted basis of $14,000. A's and B's section 1254 costs with respect to Property P are $4,000 and $1,500, respectively. On January 1, 1997, C contributes $20,000 to X in exchange for 100 shares of X's stock. Under paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section, X must allocate to C a pro rata share of its shareholders' section 1254 costs. Using the assumptions set forth in paragraph (g)(5)(iii) of this section, X determines that A's section 1254 costs with respect to natural resource recapture property held by X equal $4,500. Using written data provided by B, X determines that B's section 1254 costs with respect to Property P equal $1,500. Thus, the aggregate of X's shareholders' section 1254 costs equals $6,000. C's pro rata share of the $6,000 of section 1254 costs equals $3,000 (C's 50 percent interest in X multiplied by $6,000). Under paragraph (g)(1)(ii) of this section, A's section 1254 costs are reduced by $2,000 (A's actual section 1254 costs ($4,000) multiplied by 50 percent). B's section 1254 costs are reduced by $750 (B's actual section 1254 costs ($1,500) multiplied by 50 percent).

Example 3. Merger involving an S corporation that holds natural resource recapture property. X, an S corporation with one shareholder, A, holds as its sole asset natural resource recapture property that has a fair market value of $120,000 and an adjusted basis of $40,000. A has section 1254 costs with respect to the property of $60,000. For valid business reasons, X merges into Y, an S corporation with one shareholder, B, in a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(A). Y holds property that is not natural resource recapture property that has a fair market value of $120,000 and basis of $120,000. Under paragraph (c) of this section, A does not recognize ordinary income under section 1254 upon the exchange of stock in the merger because A did not otherwise recognize gain on the merger. Under paragraph (g)(2) of this section, Y must allocate to A and B a pro rata share of its $60,000 of section 1254 costs. Thus, A and B are each allocated $30,000 of section 1254 costs (50 percent interest in X, each, multiplied by $60,000).

[T.D. 8684, 61 FR 53063, Oct. 10, 1996, as amended by T.D. 9811, 82 FR 6242, Jan. 19, 2017]

§ 1.1254-5 Special rules for partnerships and their partners.

(a) In general. This section provides rules for applying the provisions of section 1254 to partnerships and their partners upon the disposition of natural resource recapture property by the partnership and certain distributions of property by a partnership. See section 751 and the regulations thereunder for rules concerning the treatment of gain upon the transfer of a partnership interest.

(b) Determination of gain treated as ordinary income under section 1254 upon the disposition of natural resource recapture property by a partnership

(1) General rule. Upon a disposition of natural resource recapture property by a partnership, the amount treated as ordinary income under section 1254 is determined at the partner level. Each partner must recognize as ordinary income under section 1254 the lesser of—

(i) The partner's section 1254 costs with respect to the property disposed of; or

(ii) The partner's share of the amount, if any, by which the amount realized upon the sale, exchange, or involuntary conversion, or the fair market value of the property upon any other disposition, exceeds the adjusted basis of the property.

(2) Exception to partner level recapture in the case of abusive allocations. Paragraph (b)(1) of this section does not apply in determining the amount treated as ordinary income under section 1254 upon a disposition of section 1254 property by a partnership if the partnership has allocated the amount realized or gain recognized from the disposition with a principal purpose of avoiding the recognition of ordinary income under section 1254. In such case, the amount of gain on the disposition recaptured as ordinary income under section 1254 is determined at the partnership level.

(3) Examples. The provisions of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section are illustrated by the following examples which assume that capital accounts are maintained in accordance with section 704(b) and the regulations thereunder:

Example 1. Partner level recapture—In general. A, B, and C, have equal interests in capital in Partnership ABC that was formed on January 1, 1985. The partnership acquired an undeveloped domestic oil property on January 1, 1985, for $120,000. The partnership allocated the property's basis to each partner in proportion to the partner's interest in partnership capital, so each partner was allocated $40,000 of basis. In 1985, the partnership incurred $60,000 of productive well intangible drilling and development costs with respect to the property. The partnership elected to deduct the intangible drilling and development costs as expenses under section 263(c). Each partner deducted $20,000 of the intangible drilling and development costs. Assume that depletion allowable under section 613A(c)(7)(D) for each partner for 1985 was $10,000. On January 1, 1986, the partnership sold the oil property to an unrelated third party for $210,000. Each partner's allocable share of the amount realized is $70,000. Each partner's basis in the oil property at the end of 1985 is $30,000 ($40,000 cost—$10,000 depletion deductions claimed). Each partner has a gain of $40,000 on the sale of the oil property ($70,000 amount realized—$30,000 adjusted basis in the oil property). Assume that each partner's depletion allowance would not have been increased if the intangible drilling and development costs had been capitalized. Each partner's section 1254 costs with respect to the property are $20,000. Thus, A, B, and C each must treat $20,000 of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1254(a).

Example 2. Special allocation of intangible drilling and development costs. K and L form a partnership on January 1, 1997, to acquire and develop a geothermal property as defined under section 613(e)(2). The partnership agreement provides that all intangible drilling and development costs will be allocated to partner K, and that all other items of income, gain, or loss will be allocated equally between the two partners. Assume these allocations have substantial economic effect under section 704(b) and the regulations thereunder. The partnership acquires a lease covering undeveloped acreage located in the United States for $50,000. In 1997, the partnership incurs $50,000 of intangible drilling and development costs that are allocated to partner K. The partnership also has $30,000 of depletion deductions, which are allocated equally between K and L. On January 1, 1998, the partnership sells the geothermal property to an unrelated third party for $160,000 and recognizes a gain of $140,000 ($160,000 amount realized less $20,000 adjusted basis ($50,000 unadjusted basis less $30,000 depletion deductions)). This gain is allocated equally between K and L. Because K's section 1254 costs are $65,000 and L's section 1254 costs are $15,000, K recognizes $65,000 as ordinary income under section 1254(a) and L recognizes $15,000 as ordinary income under section 1254(a). The remaining $5,000 of gain allocated to K and $55,000 of gain allocated to L is characterized without regard to section 1254.

Example 3. Section 59(e) election to capitalize intangible drilling and development costs. Partnership DK has 50 equal partners. On January 1, 1995, the partnership purchases an undeveloped oil and gas property for $100,000. The partnership allocates the property's basis equally among the partners, so each partner is allocated $2,000 of basis. In January 1995, the partnership incurs $240,000 of intangible drilling and development costs with respect to the property. The partnership elects to deduct the intangible drilling and development costs as expenses under section 263(c). Each partner is allocated $4,800 of intangible drilling and development costs. One of the partners, H, elects under section 59(e) to capitalize his $4,800 share of intangible drilling and development costs. Therefore, H is permitted to amortize his $4,800 share of intangible drilling and development costs over 60 months. H takes a $960 amortization deduction in 1995. Each of the remaining 49 partners deducts his $4,800 share of intangible drilling and development costs in 1995. Assume that depletion allowable for each partner under section 613A(c)(7)(D) for 1995 is $1,000. On December 31, 1995, the partnership sells the property for $300,000. Each partner is allocated $6,000 of amount realized. Each partner that deducted the intangible drilling and development costs has a basis in the oil property at the end of 1995 of $1,000 ($2,000 cost − $1,000 depletion deductions claimed). Each of these partners has a gain of $5,000 on the sale of the oil property ($6,000 amount realized − $1,000 adjusted basis in the property). The section 1254 costs of each partner that deducted intangible drilling and development costs are $5,800 ($4,800 intangible drilling and development costs deducted + $1,000 depletion deductions claimed). Because each partner's section 1254 costs ($5,800) exceed each partner's share of amount realized less each partner's adjusted basis ($5,000), each partner must treat his $5,000 gain recognized on the sale of the oil property as ordinary income under section 1254(a). Because H elected under section 59(e) to capitalize the $4,800 of intangible drilling and development costs and amortized only $960 of the costs in 1995, the $3,840 of unamortized intangible drilling and development costs are included in H's basis in the oil property. Therefore, at the end of 1995 H's basis in the oil property is $4,840 (($2,000 cost + $4,800 capitalized intangible drilling and development costs) − ($960 intangible drilling and development costs amortized + $1,000 depletion deduction claimed)). H's gain on the sale of the oil property is $1,160 ($6,000 amount realized − $4,840 adjusted basis). H's section 1254 costs are $1,960 ($960 intangible drilling and development costs amortized + $1,000 depletion deductions claimed). Because H's section 1254 costs ($1,960) exceed H's share of amount realized less H's adjusted basis ($1,160), H must treat the $1,160 of gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1254(a).

(c) Section 1254 costs of a partner

(1) General rule. A partner's section 1254 costs with respect to property held by a partnership include all of the partner's section 1254 costs with respect to the property in the hands of the partnership. In the case of property contributed to a partnership in a transaction described in section 721, a partner's section 1254 costs include all of the partner's section 1254 costs with respect to the property prior to contribution. Section 1.1254-1(b)(1)(iv), which provides rules concerning the treatment of suspended deductions, applies to amounts not deductible pursuant to section 704(d).

(2) Section 1254 costs of a transferee partner after certain acquisitions

(i) Basis determined under section 1012. If a person acquires an interest in a partnership that holds natural resource recapture property (transferee partner) and the transferee partner's basis for the interest is determined by reference to its cost (within the meaning of section 1012), the amount of the transferee partner's section 1254 costs with respect to the property held by the partnership is zero on the acquisition date.

(ii) Basis determined by reason of the application of section 1014(a). If a transferee partner acquires an interest in a partnership that holds natural resource recapture property from a decedent and the transferee partner's basis is determined, by reason of the application of section 1014(a), solely by reference to the fair market value of the partnership interest on the date of the decedent's death or on the applicable date provided in section 2032 (relating to alternate valuation date), the amount of the transferee partner's section 1254 costs with respect to property held by the partnership is zero on the acquisition date.

(iii) Basis determined by reason of the application of section 1014(b)(9). If an interest in a partnership that holds natural resource recapture property is acquired before the death of the decedent, the amount of the transferee partner's section 1254 costs with respect to property held by the partnership shall include the amount, if any, of the section 1254 costs deducted by the transferee partner before the decedent's death, to the extent that the basis of the partner's interest (determined under section 1014(a)) is required to be reduced under section 1014(b)(9) (relating to adjustments to basis when the property is acquired before the death of the decedent).

(iv) Gifts and section 1041 transfers. If an interest in a partnership is transferred in a transfer that is a gift, in a transfer that is a part sale or exchange and part gift, in a transfer that is described in section 1041(a), or in a transfer at death where the basis of property in the hands of the transferee is determined under section 1022, the amount of the transferee partner's section 1254 costs with respect to property held by the partnership immediately after the transfer is an amount equal to—

(A) The amount of the transferor partner's section 1254 costs with respect to the property immediately before the transfer; minus

(B) The amount of any gain recognized as ordinary income under section 1254 by the transferor partner upon the transfer.

(d) Property distributed to a partner

(1) In general. The section 1254 costs for any natural resource recapture property received by a partner in a distribution with respect to part or all of an interest in a partnership include—

(i) The aggregate of the partners' section 1254 costs with respect to the natural resource recapture property immediately prior to the distribution; reduced by

(ii) The amount of any gain taken into account as ordinary income under section 751 by the partnership or the partners (as constituted after the distribution) on the distribution of the natural resource recapture property.

(2) Aggregate of partners' section 1254 costs with respect to natural resource recapture property held by a partnership

(i) In general. The aggregate of partners' section 1254 costs is equal to the sum of each partner's section 1254 costs. The partnership must determine each partner's section 1254 costs under either paragraph (d)(2)(i)(A) (written data) or paragraph (d)(2)(i)(B) (assumptions) of this section. The partnership may determine the section 1254 costs of some of the partners under paragraph (d)(2)(i)(A) of this section and of others under paragraph (d)(2)(i)(B) of this section.

(A) Written data. A partnership may determine a partner's section 1254 costs by using written data provided by a partner showing the partner's section 1254 costs with respect to natural resource recapture property held by the partnership unless the partnership knows or has reason to know that the written data is inaccurate. If a partnership does not receive written data upon which it may rely, the partnership must use the assumptions provided in paragraph (d)(2)(i)(B) of this section in determining a partner's section 1254 costs.

(B) Assumptions. A partnership that does not use written data pursuant to paragraph (d)(2)(i)(A) of this section to determine a partner's section 1254 costs must use the following assumptions to determine the partner's section 1254 costs:

(1) The partner deducted his or her share of deductions under section 263(c), 616, or 617 for the first year in which the partner could claim a deduction for such amounts, unless in the case of expenditures under section 263(c) or 616, the partnership elected to capitalize such amounts;

(2) The partner was not subject to the following limitations with respect to the partner's depletion allowance under section 611, except to the extent a limitation applied at the partnership level: the taxable income limitation of section 613(a); the depletable quantity limitations of section 613A(c); or the limitations of section 613A(d)(2), (3), and (4) (exclusion of retailers and refiners).

[T.D. 8586, 60 FR 2507, Jan. 10, 1995, as amended by T.D. 9811, 82 FR 6242, Jan. 19, 2017]

§ 1.1254-6 Effective/applicability date.

(a) Sections 1.1254-1 through 1.1254-3 and 1.1254-5 are effective with respect to any disposition of natural resource recapture property occurring after March 13, 1995. The rule in § 1.1254-1(b)(2)(iv)(A)(2), relating to a nonoperating mineral interest carved out of an operating mineral interest with respect to which an expenditure has been deducted, is effective with respect to any disposition occurring after March 13, 1995, of property (within the meaning of section 614) that is placed in service by the taxpayer after December 31, 1986. Section 1.1254-4 applies to dispositions of natural resource recapture property by an S corporation (and a corporation that was formerly an S corporation) and dispositions of S corporation stock occurring on or after October 10, 1996. Sections 1.1254-2(d)(1)(ii) and 1.1254-3(b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), (d)(1)(i), and (d)(1)(ii) are effective for dispositions of property occurring on or after October 10, 1996.

(b) The provisions of §§ 1.1254-2(a)(1), 1.1254-3(b)(2), 1.1254-4(e)(4), and 1.1254-5(c)(2)(iv) that relate to section 1022 are effective on and after January 19, 2017.

[T.D. 9811, 82 FR 6242, Jan. 19, 2017]

§ 1.1256(e)-1 Identification of hedging transactions.

(a) Identification and recordkeeping requirements. Under section 1256(e)(2), a taxpayer that enters into a hedging transaction must identify the transaction as a hedging transaction before the close of the day on which the taxpayer enters into the transaction.

(b) Requirements for identification. The identification of a hedging transaction for purposes of section 1256(e)(2) must satisfy the requirements of § 1.1221-2(f)(1). Solely for purposes of section 1256(f)(1), however, an identification that does not satisfy all of the requirements of § 1.1221-2(f)(1) is nevertheless treated as an identification under section 1256(e)(2).

(c) Consistency with § 1.1221-2. Any identification for purposes of § 1.1221-2(f)(1) is also an identification for purposes of this section. If a taxpayer satisfies the requirements of § 1.1221-2(g)(1)(ii), the transaction is treated as if it were not identified as a hedging transaction for purposes of section 1256(e)(2).

(d) Effective date. The rules of this section apply to transactions entered into on or after March 20, 2002.

[T.D. 8985, 67 FR 12870, Mar. 20, 2002; 67 FR 31955, May 13, 2002]

§ 1.1256(e)-2 Special rules for syndicates.

(a) Allocation of losses. For purposes of section 1256(e)(3), syndicate means any partnership or other entity (other than a corporation that is not an S corporation) if more than 35 percent of the losses of such entity during the taxable year are allocated to limited partners or limited entrepreneurs (within the meaning of section 461(k)(4)).

(b) Determination of loss amount. For purposes of section 1256(e)(3), the amount of losses to be allocated under paragraph (a) of this section is calculated without regard to section 163(j).

(c) Example. The following example illustrates the rules in this section:

(1) Facts. Entity is an S corporation that is equally owned by individuals A and B. A provides all of the goods and services provided by Entity. B provided all of the capital for Entity but does not participate in Entity's business. For the current taxable year, Entity has gross receipts of $5,000,000, non-interest expenses of $4,500,000, and interest expense of $600,000.

(2) Analysis. Under paragraph (b) of this section, Entity has a net loss of $100,000 ($5,000,000 minus $5,100,000) for the current taxable year. One half (50 percent) of this loss is allocated to B, a limited owner. Therefore, for the current taxable year, Entity is a syndicate within the meaning of section 1256(e)(3)(B).

(d) Applicability date. This section applies to taxable years beginning on or after March 22, 2021. However, taxpayers and their related parties, within the meaning of sections 267(b) (determined without regard to section 267(c)(3)) and 707(b)(1), may choose to apply the rules in this section for a taxable year beginning after December 31, 2017, and before March 22, 2021, provided that those taxpayers and their related parties consistently apply all of the rules of this section to that taxable year and each subsequent taxable year.

[T.D. 9943, 86 FR 5540, Jan. 19, 2021]

§ 1.1258-1 Netting rule for certain conversion transactions.

(a) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to provide taxpayers with a method to net certain gains and losses from positions of the same conversion transaction before determining the amount of gain treated as ordinary income under section 1258(a).

(b) Netting of gain and loss for identified transactions

(1) In general. If a taxpayer disposes of or terminates all the positions of an identified netting transaction (as defined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section) within a 14-day period in a single taxable year, all gains and losses on those positions taken into account for Federal tax purposes within that period (other than built-in losses as defined in paragraph (c) of this section) are netted solely for purposes of determining the amount of gain treated as ordinary income under section 1258(a). For purposes of the preceding sentence, a taxpayer is treated as disposing of any position that is treated as sold under any provision of the Code or regulations thereunder (for example, under section 1256(a)(1)).

(2) Identified netting transaction. For purposes of this section, an identified netting transaction is a conversion transaction (as defined in section 1258(c)) that the taxpayer identifies as an identified netting transaction on its books and records. Identification of each position of the conversion transaction must be made before the close of the day on which the position becomes part of the conversion transaction. No particular form of identification is necessary, but all the positions of a single conversion transaction must be identified as part of the same transaction and must be distinguished from all other positions.

(c) Definition of built-in loss. For purposes of this section, built-in loss means—

(1) Built-in loss as defined in section 1258(d)(3)(B); and

(2) If a taxpayer realizes gain or loss on any one position of a conversion transaction (for example, under section 1256), as of the date that gain or loss is realized, any unrecognized loss in any other position of the conversion transaction that is not disposed of, terminated, or treated as sold under any provision of the Code or regulations thereunder within 14 days of and within the same taxable year as the realization event.

(d) Examples. These examples illustrate this section:

Example 1.

Identified netting transaction with simultaneous actual dispositions. (i) On December 1, 1995, A purchases 1,000 shares of XYZ stock for $100,000 and enters into a forward contract to sell 1,000 shares of XYZ stock on November 30, 1997, for $110,000. The XYZ stock is actively traded as defined in § 1.1092(d)-1(a) and is a capital asset in A's hands. A maintains books and records on which, on December 1, 1995, it identifies the two positions as all the positions of a single conversion transaction. A owns no other XYZ stock. On December 1, 1996, when the applicable imputed income amount for the transaction is $7,000, A sells the 1,000 shares of XYZ stock for $95,000. On the same day, A terminates its forward contract with its counterparty, receiving $10,200. No dividends were received on the stock during the time it was part of the conversion transaction.

(ii) The XYZ stock and forward contract are positions of a conversion transaction. Under section 1258(c)(1), substantially all of A's expected return from the overall transaction is attributable to the time value of the net investment in the transaction. Under section 1258(c)(2)(B), the transaction is an applicable straddle as defined in section 1258(d)(1).

(iii) A disposed of or terminated all the positions of the conversion transaction within 14 days and within the same taxable year as required by paragraph (b)(1) of this section. The transaction is an identified netting transaction because it meets the identification requirement of paragraph (b)(2) of this section. Solely for purposes of section 1258(a), the $5,000 loss realized ($100,000 basis less $95,000 amount realized) on the disposition of the XYZ stock is netted against the $10,200 gain recognized on the disposition of the forward contract. Thus, the net gain from the conversion transaction for purposes of section 1258(a) is $5,200 ($10,200 gain less $5,000 loss). Only the $5,200 net gain is recharacterized as ordinary income under section 1258(a) even though the applicable imputed income amount is $7,000. For Federal tax purposes other than section 1258(a), A has recognized a $10,200 gain on the disposition of the forward contract ($5,200 of which is treated as ordinary income) and realized a separate $5,000 loss on the sale of the XYZ stock.

Example 2. Identified netting transaction with built-in loss.

(i) The facts are the same as in Example 1, except that A had purchased the XYZ stock for $104,000 on May 15, 1995. The XYZ stock had a fair market value of $100,000 on December 1, 1995, the date it became part of a conversion transaction.

(ii) The results are the same as in Example 1, except that A has built-in loss (in addition to the $5,000 loss that arose economically during the period of the conversion transaction), as defined in section 1258(d)(3)(B), of $4,000 on the XYZ stock. That $4,000 built-in loss is not netted against the $10,200 gain on the forward contract for purposes of section 1258(a). Thus, the net gain from the conversion transaction for purposes of section 1258(a) is $5,200, the same as in Example 1. The $4,000 built-in loss is recognized and has a character determined without regard to section 1258.

(e) Effective date and transition rule

(1) In general. These regulations are effective for conversion transactions that are outstanding on or after December 21, 1995.

(2) Transition rule for identification requirements. In the case of a conversion transaction entered into before February 20, 1996, paragraph (b)(2) of this section is treated as satisfied if the identification is made before the close of business on February 20, 1996.

[T.D. 8649, 60 FR 66084, Dec. 21, 1995]

§ 1.1271-0 Original issue discount; effective date; table of contents.

(a) Effective date. Except as otherwise provided, §§ 1.1271-1 through 1.1275-5 apply to debt instruments issued on or after April 4, 1994. Taxpayers, however, may rely on these sections (as contained in 26 CFR part 1 revised April 1, 1996) for debt instruments issued after December 21, 1992, and before April 4, 1994.

(b) Table of contents. This section lists captioned paragraphs contained in §§ 1.1271-1 through 1.1275-7.

§ 1.1271-1 Special rules applicable to amounts received on retirement, sale, or exchange of debt instruments.

(a) Intention to call before maturity.

(1) In general.

(2) Exceptions.

(b) Short-term obligations.

(1) In general.

(2) Method of making elections.

(3) Counting conventions.

§ 1.1272-1 Current inclusion of OID in income.

(a) Overview.

(1) In general.

(2) Debt instruments not subject to OID inclusion rules.

(b) Accrual of OID.

(1) Constant yield method.

(2) Exceptions.

(3) Modifications.

(4) Special rules for determining the OID allocable to an accrual period.

(c) Yield and maturity of certain debt instruments subject to contingencies.

(1) Applicability.

(2) Payment schedule that is significantly more likely than not to occur.

(3) Mandatory sinking fund provision.

(4) Consistency rule. [Reserved]

(5) Treatment of certain options.

(6) Subsequent adjustments.

(7) Effective date.

(d) Certain debt instruments that provide for a fixed yield.

(e) Convertible debt instruments.

(f) Special rules to determine whether a debt instrument is a short-term obligation.

(1) Counting of either the issue date or maturity date.

(2) Coordination with paragraph (c) of this section for certain sections of the Internal Revenue Code.

(g) Basis adjustment.

(h) Debt instruments denominated in a currency other than the U.S. dollar.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Examples.

§ 1.1272-2 Treatment of debt instruments purchased at a premium.

(a) In general.

(b) Definitions and special rules.

(1) Purchase.

(2) Premium.

(3) Acquisition premium.

(4) Acquisition premium fraction.

(5) Election to accrue discount on a constant yield basis.

(6) Special rules for determining basis.

(c) Examples.

§ 1.1272-3 Election by a holder to treat all interest on a debt instrument as OID.

(a) Election.

(b) Scope of election.

(1) In general.

(2) Exceptions, limitations, and special rules.

(c) Mechanics of the constant yield method.

(1) In general.

(2) Special rules to determine adjusted basis.

(d) Time and manner of making the election.

(e) Revocation of election.

(f) Effective date.

§ 1.1273-1 Definition of OID.

(a) In general.

(b) Stated redemption price at maturity.

(c) Qualified stated interest.

(1) Definition.

(2) Debt instruments subject to contingencies.

(3) Variable rate debt instrument.

(4) Stated interest in excess of qualified stated interest.

(5) Short-term obligations.

(6) Business day convention.

(d) De minimis OID.

(1) In general.

(2) De minimis amount.

(3) Installment obligations.

(4) Special rule for interest holidays, teaser rates, and other interest shortfalls.

(5) Treatment of de minimis OID by holders.

(e) Definitions.

(1) Installment obligation.

(2) Self-amortizing installment obligation.

(3) Weighted average maturity.

(f) Examples.

§ 1.1273-2 Determination of issue price and issue date.

(a) Debt instruments issued for money.

(1) Issue price.

(2) Issue date.

(b) Publicly traded debt instruments issued for property.

(1) Issue price.

(2) Issue date.

(c) Debt instruments issued for publicly traded property.

(1) Issue price.

(2) Issue date.

(d) Other debt instruments.

(1) Issue price.

(2) Issue date.

(e) Special rule for certain sales to bond houses, brokers, or similar persons.

(f) Traded on an established market (publicly traded).

(1) In general.

(2) Sales price.

(3) Firm quote.

(4) Indicative quote.

(5) Presumption that price or quote is equal to fair market value.

(6) Exception for small debt issues.

(7) Anti-abuse rules.

(8) Convertible debt instruments.

(9) Issuer-holder consistency requirement.

(10) Effective/applicability dates.

(g) Treatment of certain cash payments incident to lending transactions.

(1) Applicability.

(2) Payments from borrower to lender.

(3) Payments from lender to borrower.

(4) Payments between lender and third party.

(5) Examples.

(h) Investment units.

(1) In general.

(2) Consistent allocation by holders and issuer.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Convertible debt instruments.

(k) Below-market loans subject to section 7872(b).

(l) [Reserved]

(m) Treatment of amounts representing pre-issuance accrued interest.

(1) Applicability.

(2) Exclusion of pre-issuance accrued interest from issue price.

(3) Example.

§ 1.1274-1 Debt instruments to which section 1274 applies.

(a) In general.

(b) Exceptions.

(1) Debt instrument with adequate stated interest and no OID .

(2) Exceptions under sections 1274(c)(1)(B), 1274(c)(3), 1274A(c), and 1275(b)(1).

(3) Other exceptions to section 1274.

(c) Examples.

§ 1.1274-2 Issue price of debt instruments to which section 1274 applies.

(a) In general.

(b) Issue price.

(1) Debt instruments that provide for adequate stated interest; stated principal amount.

(2) Debt instruments that do not provide for adequate stated interest; imputed principal amount.

(3) Debt instruments issued in a potentially abusive situation; fair market value.

(c) Determination of whether a debt instrument provides for adequate stated interest.

(1) In general.

(2) Determination of present value.

(d) Treatment of certain options.

(e) Mandatory sinking funds.

(f) Treatment of variable rate debt instruments.

(1) Stated interest at a qualified floating rate.

(2) Stated interest at a single objective rate.

(g) Treatment of contingent payment debt instruments.

(h) Examples.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Special rules for tax-exempt obligations.

(1) Certain variable rate debt instruments.

(2) Contingent payment debt instruments.

(3) Effective date.

§ 1.1274-3 Potentially abusive situations defined.

(a) In general.

(b) Operating rules.

(1) Debt instrument exchanged for nonrecourse financing.

(2) Nonrecourse debt with substantial down payment.

(3) Clearly excessive interest.

(4) Debt-for-debt exchange.

(c) Other situations to be specified by Commissioner.

(d) Consistency rule.

§ 1.1274-4 Test rate.

(a) Determination of test rate of interest.

(1) In general.

(2) Test rate for certain debt instruments.

(b) Applicable Federal rate.

(c) Special rules to determine the term of a debt instrument for purposes of determining the applicable Federal rate.

(1) Installment obligations.

(2) Certain variable rate debt instruments.

(3) Counting of either the issue date or the maturity date.

(4) Certain debt instruments that provide for principal payments uncertain as to time.

(d) Foreign currency loans.

(e) Examples.

§ 1.1274-5 Assumptions.

(a) In general.

(b) Modifications of debt instruments.

(1) In general.

(2) Election to treat buyer as modifying the debt instrument.

(c) Wraparound indebtedness.

(d) Consideration attributable to assumed debt.

§ 1.1274A-1 Special rules for certain transactions where stated principal amount does not exceed $2,800,000.

(a) In general.

(b) Rules for both qualified and cash method debt instruments.

(1) Sale-leaseback transactions.

(2) Debt instruments calling for contingent payments.

(3) Aggregation of transactions.

(4) Inflation adjustment of dollar amounts.

(c) Rules for cash method debt instruments.

(1) Time and manner of making cash method election.

(2) Successors of electing parties.

(3) Modified debt instrument.

(4) Debt incurred or continued to purchase or carry a cash method debt instrument.

§ 1.1275-1 Definitions.

(a) Applicability.

(b) Adjusted issue price.

(1) In general.

(2) Adjusted issue price for subsequent holders.

(c) OID.

(d) Debt instrument.

(e) Tax-exempt obligations.

(f) Issue.

(1) Debt instruments issued on or after March 13, 2001.

(2) Debt instruments issued before March 13, 2001.

(3) Transition rule.

(4) Cross-references for reopening and aggregation rules.

(g) Debt instruments issued by a natural person.

(h) Publicly offered debt instrument.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Life annuity exception under section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

(k) Exception under section 1275(a)(1)(B)(ii) for annuities issued by an insurance company subject to tax under subchapter L of the Internal Revenue Code.

(1) Rule.

(2) Examples.

(3) Effective date.

(1) Purpose.

(2) General rule.

(3) Availability of a cash surrender option.

(4) Availability of a loan secured by the contract.

(5) Minimum payout provision.

(6) Maximum payout provision.

(7) Decreasing payout provision.

(8) Effective dates.

§ 1.1275-2 Special rules relating to debt instruments.

(a) Payment ordering rule.

(1) In general.

(2) Exceptions.

(b) Debt instruments distributed by corporations with respect to stock.

(1) Treatment of distribution.

(2) Issue date.

(c) Aggregation of debt instruments.

(1) General rule.

(2) Exception if separate issue price established.

(3) Special rule for debt instruments that provide for the issuance of additional debt instruments.

(4) Examples.

(d) Special rules for Treasury securities.

(1) Issue price and issue date.

(2) Reopenings of Treasury securities.

(e) Disclosure of certain information to holders.

(f) Treatment of pro rata prepayments.

(1) Treatment as retirement of separate debt instrument.

(2) Definition of pro rata prepayment.

(g) Anti-abuse rule.

(1) In general.

(2) Unreasonable result.

(3) Examples.

(4) Effective date.

(h) Remote and incidental contingencies.

(1) In general.

(2) Remote contingencies.

(3) Incidental contingencies.

(4) Aggregation rule.

(5) Consistency rule.

(6) Subsequent adjustments.

(7) Effective date.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Treatment of certain modifications.

(k) Reopenings.

(1) In general.

(2) Definitions.

(3) Qualified reopening.

(4) Issuer's treatment of a qualified reopening.

(5) Effective/applicability dates.

(l) OID rule for income item subject to section 451(b).

(1) In general.

(2) Applicability dates.

(m) Transition from certain interbank offered rates.

(1) In general.

(2) Single qualified floating rate.

(3) Remote contingency.

(4) Change in circumstances.

(5) Applicability date.

§ 1.1275-3 OID information reporting requirements.

(a) In general.

(b) Information required to be set forth on face of debt instruments that are not publicly offered.

(1) In general.

(2) Time for legending.

(3) Legend must survive reissuance upon transfer.

(4) Exceptions.

(c) Information required to be reported to Secretary upon issuance of publicly offered debt instruments.

(1) In general.

(2) Time for filing information return.

(3) Exceptions.

(4) Subsequent registration.

(d) Application to foreign issuers and U.S. issuers of foreigntargeted debt instruments.

(e) Penalties.

(f) Effective date.

§ 1.1275-4 Contingent payment debt instruments.

(a) Applicability.

(1) In general.

(2) Exceptions.

(3) Insolvency and default.

(4) Convertible debt instruments.

(5) Remote and incidental contingencies.

(b) Noncontingent bond method.

(1) Applicability.

(2) In general.

(3) Description of method.

(4) Comparable yield and projected payment schedule.

(5) Qualified stated interest.

(6) Adjustments.

(7) Adjusted issue price, adjusted basis, and retirement.

(8) Character on sale, exchange, or retirement.

(9) Operating rules.

(c) Method for debt instruments not subject to the noncontingent bond method.

(1) Applicability.

(2) Separation into components.

(3) Treatment of noncontingent payments.

(4) Treatment of contingent payments.

(5) Basis different from adjusted issue price.

(6) Treatment of a holder on sale, exchange, or retirement.

(7) Examples.

(d) Rules for tax-exempt obligations.

(1) In general.

(2) Certain tax-exempt obligations with interest-based or revenue-based payments

(3) All other tax-exempt obligations.

(4) Basis different from adjusted issue price.

(e) Amounts treated as interest under this section.

(f) Effective date.

§ 1.1275-5 Variable rate debt instruments.

(a) Applicability.

(1) In general.

(2) Principal payments.

(3) Stated interest.

(4) Current value.

(5) No contingent principal payments.

(6) Special rule for debt instruments issued for nonpublicly traded property.

(b) Qualified floating rate.

(1) In general.

(2) Certain rates based on a qualified floating rate.

(3) Restrictions on the stated rate of interest.

(c) Objective rate.

(1) Definition.

(2) Other objective rates to be specified by Commissioner.

(3) Qualified inverse floating rate.

(4) Significant front-loading or back-loading of interest.

(5) Tax-exempt obligations.

(d) Examples.

(e) Qualified stated interest and OID with respect to a variable rate debt instrument.

(1) In general.

(2) Variable rate debt instrument that provides for annual payments of interest at a single variable rate.

(3) All other variable rate debt instruments except for those that provide for a fixed rate.

(4) Variable rate debt instrument that provides for a single fixed rate.

(f) Special rule for certain reset bonds.

§ 1.1275-6 Integration of qualifying debt instruments.

(a) In general.

(b) Definitions.

(1) Qualifying debt instrument.

(2) Section 1.1275-6 hedge.

(3) Financial instrument.

(4) Synthetic debt instrument.

(c) Integrated transaction.

(1) Integration by taxpayer.

(2) Integration by Commissioner.

(d) Special rules for legging into and legging out of an integrated transaction.

(1) Legging into.

(2) Legging out.

(e) Identification requirements.

(f) Taxation of integrated transactions.

(1) General rule.

(2) Issue date.

(3) Term.

(4) Issue price.

(5) Adjusted issue price.

(6) Qualified stated interest.

(7) Stated redemption price at maturity.

(8) Source of interest income and allocation of expense.

(9) Effectively connected income.

(10) Not a short-term obligation.

(11) Special rules in the event of integration by the Commissioner.

(12) Retention of separate transaction rules for certain purposes.

(13) Coordination with consolidated return rules.

(g) Predecessors and successors.

(h) Examples.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Effective date.

§ 1.1275-7 Inflation-indexed debt instruments.

(a) Overview.

(b) Applicability.

(1) In general.

(2) Exceptions.

(c) Definitions.

(1) Inflation-indexed debt instrument.

(2) Reference index.

(3) Qualified inflation index.

(4) Inflation-adjusted principal amount.

(5) Minimum guarantee payment.

(d) Coupon bond method.

(1) In general.

(2) Applicability.

(3) Qualified stated interest.

(4) Inflation adjustments.

(5) Example.

(e) Discount bond method.

(1) In general.

(2) No qualified stated interest.

(3) OID.

(4) Example.

(f) Special rules.

(1) Deflation adjustments.

(2) Adjusted basis.

(3) Subsequent holders.

(4) Minimum guarantee.

(5) Temporary unavailability of a qualified inflation index.

(g) TIPS.

(1) Reopenings.

(2) TIPS issued with more than a de minimis amount of premium.

(h) Effective/applicability dates.

(1) In general.

(2) TIPS issued with more than a de minimis amount of premium.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4808, Feb. 2, 1994]

§ 1.1271-1 Special rules applicable to amounts received on retirement, sale, or exchange of debt instruments.

(a) Intention to call before maturity

(1) In general. For purposes of section 1271(a)(2), all or a portion of gain realized on a sale or exchange of a debt instrument to which section 1271 applies is treated as interest income if there was an intention to call the debt instrument before maturity. An intention to call a debt instrument before maturity means a written or oral agreement or understanding not provided for in the debt instrument between the issuer and the original holder of the debt instrument that the issuer will redeem the debt instrument before maturity. In the case of debt instruments that are part of an issue, the agreement or understanding must be between the issuer and the original holders of a substantial amount of the debt instruments in the issue. An intention to call before maturity can exist even if the intention is conditional (e.g., the issuer's decision to call depends on the financial condition of the issuer on the potential call date) or is not legally binding. For purposes of this section, original holder means the first holder (other than an underwriter or dealer that purchased the debt instrument for resale in the ordinary course of its trade or business).

(2) Exceptions. In addition to the exceptions provided in sections 1271(a)(2)(B) and 1271(b), section 1271(a)(2) does not apply to—

(i) A debt instrument that is publicly offered (as defined in § 1.1275-1(h));

(ii) A debt instrument to which section 1272(a)(6) applies (relating to certain interests in or mortgages held by a REMIC, and certain other debt instruments with payments subject to acceleration); or

(iii) A debt instrument sold pursuant to a private placement memorandum that is distributed to more than ten offerees and that is subject to the sanctions of section 12(2) of the Securities Act of 1933 (15 U.S.C. 77l) or the prohibitions of section 10(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78j).

(b) Short-term obligations

(1) In general. Under sections 1271 (a)(3) and (a)(4), all or a portion of the gain realized on the sale or exchange of a short-term government or nongovernment obligation is treated as interest income. Sections 1271 (a)(3) and (a)(4), however, do not apply to any short-term obligation subject to section 1281. See § 1.1272-1(f) for rules to determine if an obligation is a short-term obligation.

(2) Method of making elections. Elections to accrue on a constant yield basis under sections 1271 (a)(3)(E) and (a)(4)(D) are made on an obligation-by-obligation basis by reporting the transaction on the basis of daily compounding on the taxpayer's timely filed Federal income tax return for the year of the sale or exchange. These elections are irrevocable.

(3) Counting conventions. In computing the ratable share of acquisition discount under section 1271(a)(3) or OID under section 1271(a)(4), any reasonable counting convention may be used (e.g., 30 days per month/360 days per year).

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4809, Feb. 2, 1994]

§ 1.1272-1 Current inclusion of OID in income.

(a) Overview

(1) In general. Under section 1272(a)(1), a holder of a debt instrument includes accrued OID in gross income (as interest), regardless of the holder's regular method of accounting. A holder includes qualified stated interest (as defined in § 1.1273-1(c)) in income under the holder's regular method of accounting. See §§ 1.446-2 and 1.451-1.

(2) Debt instruments not subject to OID inclusion rules. Sections 1272(a)(2) and 1272(c) list exceptions to the general inclusion rule of section 1272(a)(1). For purposes of section 1272(a)(2)(E) (relating to certain loans between natural persons), a loan does not include a stripped bond or stripped coupon within the meaning of section 1286(e), and the rule in section 1272(a)(2)(E)(iii), which treats a husband and wife as 1 person, does not apply to loans made between a husband and wife.

(b) Accrual of OID

(1) Constant yield method. Except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(3) of this section, the amount of OID includible in the income of a holder of a debt instrument for any taxable year is determined using the constant yield method as described under this paragraph (b)(1).

(i) Step one: Determine the debt instrument's yield to maturity. The yield to maturity or yield of a debt instrument is the discount rate that, when used in computing the present value of all principal and interest payments to be made under the debt instrument, produces an amount equal to the issue price of the debt instrument. The yield must be constant over the term of the debt instrument and, when expressed as a percentage, must be calculated to at least two decimal places. See paragraph (c) of this section for rules relating to the yield of certain debt instruments subject to contingencies.

(ii) Step two: Determine the accrual periods. An accrual period is an interval of time over which the accrual of OID is measured. Accrual periods may be of any length and may vary in length over the term of the debt instrument, provided that each accrual period is no longer than 1 year and each scheduled payment of principal or interest occurs either on the final day of an accrual period or on the first day of an accrual period. In general, the computation of OID is simplest if accrual periods correspond to the intervals between payment dates provided by the terms of the debt instrument. In computing the length of accrual periods, any reasonable counting convention may be used (e.g., 30 days per month/360 days per year).

(iii) Step three: Determine the OID allocable to each accrual period. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4) of this section, the OID allocable to an accrual period equals the product of the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument (as defined in § 1.1275-1(b)) at the beginning of the accrual period and the yield of the debt instrument, less the amount of any qualified stated interest allocable to the accrual period. In performing this calculation, the yield must be stated appropriately taking into account the length of the particular accrual period. Example 1 in paragraph (j) of this section provides a formula for converting a yield based upon an accrual period of one length to an equivalent yield based upon an accrual period of a different length.

(iv) Step four: Determine the daily portions of OID. The daily portions of OID are determined by allocating to each day in an accrual period the ratable portion of the OID allocable to the accrual period. The holder of the debt instrument includes in income the daily portions of OID for each day during the taxable year on which the holder held the debt instrument.

(2) Exceptions. Paragraph (b)(1) of this section does not apply to—

(i) A debt instrument to which section 1272(a)(6) applies (certain interests in or mortgages held by a REMIC, and certain other debt instruments with payments subject to acceleration);

(ii) A debt instrument that provides for contingent payments, other than a debt instrument described in paragraph (c) or (d) of this section or except as provided in § 1.1275-4; or

(iii) A variable rate debt instrument to which § 1.1275-5 applies, except as provided in § 1.1275-5.

(3) Modifications. The amount of OID includible in income by a holder under paragraph (b)(1) of this section is adjusted if—

(i) The holder purchased the debt instrument at a premium or an acquisition premium (within the meaning of § 1.1272-2); or

(ii) The holder made an election for the debt instrument under § 1.1272-3 to treat all interest as OID.

(4) Special rules for determining the OID allocable to an accrual period. The following rules apply to determine the OID allocable to an accrual period under paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section.

(i) Unpaid qualified stated interest allocable to an accrual period. In determining the OID allocable to an accrual period, if an interval between payments of qualified stated interest contains more than 1 accrual period—

(A) The amount of qualified stated interest payable at the end of the interval (including any qualified stated interest that is payable on the first day of the accrual period immediately following the interval) is allocated on a pro rata basis to each accrual period in the interval; and

(B) The adjusted issue price at the beginning of each accrual period in the interval must be increased by the amount of any qualified stated interest that has accrued prior to the first day of the accrual period but that is not payable until the end of the interval. See Example 2 of paragraph (j) of this section for an example illustrating the rules in this paragraph (b)(4)(i).

(ii) Final accrual period. The OID allocable to the final accrual period is the difference between the amount payable at maturity (other than a payment of qualified stated interest) and the adjusted issue price at the beginning of the final accrual period.

(iii) Initial short accrual period. If all accrual periods are of equal length, except for either an initial shorter accrual period or an initial and a final shorter accrual period, the amount of OID allocable to the initial accrual period may be computed using any reasonable method. See Example 3 in paragraph (j) of this section.

(iv) Payment on first day of an accrual period. The adjusted issue price at the beginning of an accrual period is reduced by the amount of any payment (other than a payment of qualified stated interest) that is made on the first day of the accrual period.

(c) Yield and maturity of certain debt instruments subject to contingencies

(1) Applicability. This paragraph (c) provides rules to determine the yield and maturity of certain debt instruments that provide for an alternative payment schedule (or schedules) applicable upon the occurrence of a contingency (or contingencies). This paragraph (c) applies, however, only if the timing and amounts of the payments that comprise each payment schedule are known as of the issue date and the debt instrument is subject to paragraph (c)(2), (3), or (5) of this section. A debt instrument does not provide for an alternative payment schedule merely because there is a possibility of impairment of a payment (or payments) by insolvency, default, or similar circumstances. See § 1.1275-4 for the treatment of a debt instrument that provides for a contingency that is not described in this paragraph (c). See § 1.1273-1(c) to determine whether stated interest on a debt instrument subject to this paragraph (c) is qualified stated interest.

(2) Payment schedule that is significantly more likely than not to occur. If, based on all the facts and circumstances as of the issue date, a single payment schedule for a debt instrument, including the stated payment schedule, is significantly more likely than not to occur, the yield and maturity of the debt instrument are computed based on this payment schedule.

(3) Mandatory sinking fund provision. Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(2) of this section, if a debt instrument is subject to a mandatory sinking fund provision, the provision is ignored for purposes of computing the yield and maturity of the debt instrument if the use and terms of the provision meet reasonable commercial standards. For purposes of the preceding sentence, a mandatory sinking fund provision is a provision that meets the following requirements:

(i) The provision requires the issuer to redeem a certain amount of debt instruments in an issue prior to maturity.

(ii) The debt instruments actually redeemed are chosen by lot or purchased by the issuer either in the open market or pursuant to an offer made to all holders (with any proration determined by lot).

(iii) On the issue date, the specific debt instruments that will be redeemed on any date prior to maturity cannot be identified.

(4) Consistency rule. [Reserved]

(5) Treatment of certain options. Notwithstanding paragraphs (c) (2) and (3) of this section, the rules of this paragraph (c)(5) determine the yield and maturity of a debt instrument that provides the holder or issuer with an unconditional option or options, exercisable on one or more dates during the term of the debt instrument, that, if exercised, require payments to be made on the debt instrument under an alternative payment schedule or schedules (e.g., an option to extend or an option to call a debt instrument at a fixed premium). Under this paragraph (c)(5), an issuer is deemed to exercise or not exercise an option or combination of options in a manner that minimizes the yield on the debt instrument, and a holder is deemed to exercise or not exercise an option or combination of options in a manner that maximizes the yield on the debt instrument. If both the issuer and the holder have options, the rules of this paragraph (c)(5) are applied to the options in the order that they may be exercised. See paragraph (j) Example 5 through Example 8 of this section.

(6) Subsequent adjustments. If a contingency described in this paragraph (c) (including the exercise of an option described in paragraph (c)(5) of this section) actually occurs or does not occur, contrary to the assumption made pursuant to this paragraph (c) (a change in circumstances), then, solely for purposes of sections 1272 and 1273, the debt instrument is treated as retired and then reissued on the date of the change in circumstances for an amount equal to its adjusted issue price on that date. See paragraph (j) Example 5 and Example 7 of this section. If, however, the change in circumstances results in a substantially contemporaneous pro-rata prepayment as defined in § 1.1275-2(f)(2), the pro-rata prepayment is treated as a payment in retirement of a portion of the debt instrument, which may result in gain or loss to the holder. See paragraph (j) Example 6 and Example 8 of this section.

(7) Effective date. This paragraph (c) applies to debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996.

(d) Certain debt instruments that provide for a fixed yield. If a debt instrument provides for one or more contingent payments but all possible payment schedules under the terms of the instrument result in the same fixed yield, the yield of the debt instrument is the fixed yield. For example, the yield of a debt instrument with principal payments that are fixed in total amount but that are uncertain as to time (such as a demand loan) is the stated interest rate if the issue price of the instrument is equal to the stated principal amount and interest is paid or compounded at a fixed rate over the entire term of the instrument. This paragraph (d) applies to debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996.

(e) Convertible debt instruments. For purposes of section 1272, an option is ignored if it is an option to convert a debt instrument into the stock of the issuer, into the stock or debt of a related party (within the meaning of section 267(b) or 707(b)(1)), or into cash or other property in an amount equal to the approximate value of such stock or debt. For debt instruments issued on or after February 5, 2013, the term stock in the preceding sentence means an equity interest in any entity that is classified, for Federal tax purposes, as either a partnership or a corporation.

(f) Special rules to determine whether a debt instrument is a short-term obligation

(1) Counting of either the issue date or maturity date. For purposes of determining whether a debt instrument is a short-term obligation (i.e., a debt instrument with a fixed maturity date that is not more than 1 year from the date of issue), the term of the debt instrument includes either the issue date or the maturity date, but not both dates.

(2) Coordination with paragraph (c) of this section for certain sections of the Internal Revenue Code. Notwithstanding paragraph (c) of this section, solely for purposes of determining whether a debt instrument is a short-term obligation under sections 871(g)(1)(B)(i), 881, 1271(a)(3), 1271(a)(4), 1272(a)(2)(C), and 1283(a)(1), the maturity date of a debt instrument is the last possible date that the instrument could be outstanding under the terms of the instrument. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the last possible date that the debt instrument could be outstanding is determined without regard to § 1.1275-2(h) (relating to payments subject to remote or incidental contingencies).

(g) Basis adjustment. The basis of a debt instrument in the hands of the holder is increased by the amount of OID included in the holder's gross income and decreased by the amount of any payment from the issuer to the holder under the debt instrument other than a payment of qualified stated interest. See, however, § 1.1275-2(f) for rules regarding basis adjustments on a pro rata prepayment.

(h) Debt instruments denominated in a currency other than the U.S. dollar. Section 1272 and this section apply to a debt instrument that provides for all payments denominated in, or determined by reference to, the functional currency of the taxpayer or qualified business unit of the taxpayer (even if that currency is other than the U.S. dollar). See § 1.988-2(b) to determine interest income or expense for debt instruments that provide for payments denominated in, or determined by reference to, a nonfunctional currency.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this section. Each example assumes that all taxpayers use the calendar year as the taxable year. In addition, each example assumes a 30-day month, 360-day year, and that the initial accrual period begins on the issue date and the final accrual period ends on the day before the stated maturity date. Although, for purposes of simplicity, the yield as stated is rounded to two decimal places, the computations do not reflect any such rounding convention.

Example 1. Accrual of OID on zero coupon debt instrument; choice of accrual periods.

(i) Facts. On July 1, 1994, A purchases at original issue, for $675,564.17, a debt instrument that matures on July 1, 1999, and provides for a single payment of $1,000,000 at maturity.

(ii) Determination of yield. Under paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the yield of the debt instrument is 8 percent, compounded semiannually.

(iii) Determination of accrual period. Under paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section, accrual periods may be of any length, provided that each accrual period is no longer than 1 year and each scheduled payment of principal or interest occurs either on the first or final day of an accrual period. The yield to maturity to be used in computing OID accruals in any accrual period, however, must reflect the length of the accrual period chosen. A yield based on compounding b times per year is equivalent to a yield based on compounding c times per year as indicated by the following formula:

r = c{(1 + i/b)b/c−1}

In which:

i = The yield based on compounding b times per year expressed as a decimal

r = The equivalent yield based on compounding c times per year expressed as a decimal

b = The number of compounding periods in a year on which i is based (for example, 12, if i is based on monthly compounding)

c = The number of compounding periods in a year on which r is based

(iv) Determination of OID allocable to each accrual period. Assume that A decides to compute OID on the debt instrument using semiannual accrual periods. Under paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section, the OID allocable to the first semiannual accrual period is $27,022.56: the product of the issue price ($675,564.17) and the yield properly adjusted for the length of the accrual period (8 percent/2), less qualified stated interest allocable to the accrual period ($0). The daily portion of OID for the first semiannual accrual period is $150.13 ($27,022.56/180).

(v) Determination of OID if monthly accrual periods are used. Alternatively, assume that A decides to compute OID on the debt instrument using monthly accrual periods. Using the above formula, the yield on the debt instrument reflecting monthly compounding is 7.87 percent, compounded monthly (12{(1 + .08/2) 212−1}). Under paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section, the OID allocable to the first monthly accrual period is $4,430.48: the product of the issue price ($675,564.17) and the yield properly adjusted for the length of the accrual period (7.87 percent/12), less qualified stated interest allocable to the accrual period ($0). The daily portion of OID for the first monthly accrual period is $147.68 ($4,430.48/30).

Example 2. Accrual of OID on debt instrument with qualified stated interest.

(i) Facts. On September 1, 1994, A purchases at original issue, for $90,000, B corporation's debt instrument that matures on September 1, 2004, and has a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable on that date. The debt instrument provides for semiannual payments of interest of $3,000, payable on September 1 and March 1 of each year, beginning on March 1, 1995.

(ii) Determination of yield. The debt instrument is a 10-year debt instrument with an issue price of $90,000 and a stated redemption price at maturity of $100,000. The semiannual payments of $3,000 are qualified stated interest payments. Under paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the yield is 7.44 percent, compounded semiannually.

(iii) Accrual of OID if semiannual accrual periods are used. Assume that A decides to compute OID on the debt instrument using semiannual accrual periods. Under paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section, the OID allocable to the first semiannual accrual period equals the product of the issue price ($90,000) and the yield properly adjusted for the length of the accrual period (7.44 percent/2), less qualified stated interest allocable to the accrual period ($3,000). Therefore, the amount of OID for the first semiannual accrual period is $345.78 ($3,345.78-$3,000).

(iv) Adjustment for accrued but unpaid qualified stated interest if monthly accrual periods are used. Assume, alternatively, that A decides to compute OID on the debt instrument using monthly accrual periods. The yield, compounded monthly, is 7.32 percent. Under paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section, the OID allocable to the first monthly accrual period is the product of the issue price ($90,000) and the yield properly adjusted for the length of the accrual period (7.32 percent/12), less qualified stated interest allocable to the accrual period. Under paragraph (b)(4)(i)(A) of this section, the qualified stated interest allocable to the first monthly accrual period is the pro rata amount of qualified stated interest allocable to the interval between payment dates ($3,000 × 16, or $500). Therefore, the amount of OID for the first monthly accrual period is $49.18 ($549.18-$500). Under paragraph (b)(4)(i)(B) of this section, the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument for purposes of determining the amount of OID for the second monthly accrual period is $90,549.18 ($90,000 + $49.18 + $500). Although the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument for this purpose includes the amount of qualified stated interest allocable to the first monthly accrual period, A includes the qualified stated interest in income based on A's regular method of accounting (e.g., an accrual method or the cash receipts and disbursements method).

Example 3. Accrual of OID for debt instrument with initial short accrual period.

(i) Facts. On May 1, 1994, G purchases at original issue, for $80,000, H corporation's debt instrument maturing on July 1, 2004. The debt instrument provides for a single payment at maturity of $250,000. G computes its OID using 6-month accrual periods ending on January 1 and July 1 of each year and an initial short 2-month accrual period from May 1, 1994, through June 30, 1994.

(ii) Determination of yield. The yield on the debt instrument is 11.53 percent, compounded semiannually.

(iii) Determination of OID allocable to initial short accrual period. Under paragraph (b)(4)(iii) of this section, G may use any reasonable method to compute OID for the initial short accrual period. One reasonable method is to calculate the amount of OID pursuant to the following formula:

OIDshort = IP × (i/k) × f

In which:

OIDshort = The amount of OID allocable to the initial short accrual period

IP = The issue price of the debt instrument

i = The yield to maturity expressed as a decimal

k = The number of accrual periods in a year

f = A fraction whose numerator is the number of days in the initial short accrual period, and whose denominator is the number of days in a full accrual period

(iv) Amount of OID for the initial short accrual period. Under this method, the amount of OID for the initial short accrual period is $1,537 ($80,000 × (11.53 percent/2) × (60/180)).

(v) Alternative method. Another reasonable method is to calculate the amount of OID for the initial short accrual period using the yield based on bi-monthly compounding, computed pursuant to the formula set forth in Example 1 of paragraph (j) of this section. Under this method, the amount of OID for the initial short accrual period is $1,508.38 ($80,000 × (11.31 percent/6)).

Example 4. Impermissible accrual of OID using a method other than constant yield method.

(i) Facts. On July 1, 1994, B purchases at original issue, for $100,000, C corporation's debt instrument that matures on July 1, 1999, and has a stated principal amount of $100,000. The debt instrument provides for a single payment at maturity of $148,024.43. The yield of the debt instrument is 8 percent, compounded semiannually.

(ii) Determination of yield. Assume that C uses 6 monthly accrual periods to compute its OID for 1994. The yield must reflect monthly compounding (as determined using the formula described in Example 1 of paragraph (j) of this section). As a result, the monthly yield of the debt instrument is 7.87 percent, divided by 12. C may not compute its monthly yield for the last 6 months in 1994 by dividing 8 percent by 12.

Example 5. Debt instrument subject to put option.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, G purchases at original issue, for $70,000, H corporation's debt instrument maturing on January 1, 2010, with a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable at maturity. The debt instrument provides for semiannual payments of interest of $4,000, payable on January 1 and July 1 of each year, beginning on July 1, 1995. The debt instrument gives G an unconditional right to put the bond back to H, exercisable on January 1, 2005, in return for $85,000 (exclusive of the $4,000 of stated interest payable on that date).

(ii) Determination of yield and maturity. Yield determined without regard to the put option is 12.47 percent, compounded semiannually. Yield determined by assuming that the put option is exercised (i.e., by using January 1, 2005, as the maturity date and $85,000 as the stated principal amount payable on that date) is 12.56 percent, compounded semiannually. Thus, under paragraph (c)(5) of this section, it is assumed that G will exercise the put option, because exercise of the option would increase the yield of the debt instrument. Thus, for purposes of calculating OID, the debt instrument is assumed to be a 10-year debt instrument with an issue price of $70,000, a stated redemption price at maturity of $85,000, and a yield of 12.56 percent, compounded semiannually.

(iii) Consequences if put option is, in fact, not exercised. If the put option is, in fact, not exercised, then, under paragraph (c)(6) of this section, the debt instrument is treated, solely for purposes of sections 1272 and 1273, as if it were reissued on January 1, 2005, for an amount equal to its adjusted issue price on that date, $85,000. The new debt instrument matures on January 1, 2010, with a stated principal amount of $100,000 payable on that date and provides for semiannual payments of interest of $4,000. The yield of the new debt instrument is 12.08 percent, compounded semiannually.

Example 6. Debt instrument subject to partial call option.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, H purchases at original issue, for $95,000, J corporation's debt instrument that matures on January 1, 2000, and has a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable on that date. The debt instrument provides for semiannual payments of interest of $4,000, payable on January 1 and July 1 of each year, beginning on July 1, 1995. On January 1, 1998, J has an unconditional right to call 50 percent of the principal amount of the debt instrument for $55,000 (exclusive of the $4,000 of stated interest payable on that date). If the call is exercised, the semiannual payments of interest made after the call date will be reduced to $2,000.

(ii) Determination of yield and maturity. Yield determined without regard to the call option is 9.27 percent, compounded semiannually. Yield determined by assuming J exercises its call option is 10.75 percent, compounded semiannually. Thus, under paragraph (c)(5) of this section, it is assumed that J will not exercise the call option because exercise of the option would increase the yield of the debt instrument. Thus, for purposes of calculating OID, the debt instrument is assumed to be a 5-year debt instrument with a single principal payment at maturity of $100,000, and a yield of 9.27 percent, compounded semiannually.

(iii) Consequences if the call option is, in fact, exercised. If the call option is, in fact, exercised, then under paragraph (c)(6) of this section, the debt instrument is treated as if the issuer made a pro rata prepayment of $55,000 that is subject to § 1.1275-2(f). Consequently, under § 1.1275-2(f)(1), the instrument is treated as consisting of two debt instruments, one that is retired on the call date and one that remains outstanding after the call date. The adjusted issue price, adjusted basis in the hands of the holder, and accrued OID of the original debt instrument is allocated between the two instruments based on the portion of the original instrument treated as retired. Since each payment remaining to be made after the call date is reduced by one-half, one-half of the adjusted issue price, adjusted basis, and accrued OID is allocated to the debt instrument that is treated as retired. The adjusted issue price of the original debt instrument immediately prior to the call date is $97,725.12, which equals the issue price of the original debt instrument ($95,000) increased by the OID previously includible in gross income ($2,725.12). One-half of this adjusted issue price is allocated to the debt instrument treated as retired, and the other half is allocated to the debt instrument that is treated as remaining outstanding. Thus, the debt instrument treated as remaining outstanding has an adjusted issue price immediately after the call date of $97,725.12/2, or $48,862.56. The yield of this debt instrument continues to be 9.27 percent, compounded semiannually. In addition, the portion of H's adjusted basis allocated to the debt instrument treated as retired is $97,725.12/2 or $48,862.56. Accordingly, under section 1271, H realizes a gain on the deemed retirement equal to $6,137.44 ($55,000 − $48,862.56).

Example 7. Debt instrument issued at par that provides for payment of interest in kind.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, A purchases at original issue, for $100,000, X corporation's debt instrument maturing on January 1, 2000, at a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable on that date. The debt instrument provides for annual payments of interest of $6,000 on January 1 of each year, beginning on January 1, 1996. The debt instrument gives X the unconditional right to issue, in lieu of the first interest payment, a second debt instrument (PIK instrument) maturing on January 1, 2000, with a stated principal amount of $6,000. The PIK instrument, if issued, would provide for annual payments of interest of $360 on January 1 of each year, beginning on January 1, 1997.

(ii) Aggregation of PIK instrument with original debt instrument. Under § 1.1275-2(c)(3), the issuance of the PIK instrument is not considered a payment made on the original debt instrument, and the PIK instrument is aggregated with the original debt instrument. The issue date of the PIK instrument is the same as the original debt instrument.

(iii) Determination of yield and maturity. The right to issue the PIK instrument is treated as an option to defer the initial interest payment until maturity. Yield determined without regard to the option is 6 percent, compounded annually, Yield determined by assuming X exercises the option is 6 percent, compounded annually. Thus, under paragraph (c)(5) of this section, it is assumed that X will not exercise the option by issuing the PIK instrument because exercise of the option would not decrease the yield of the debt instrument. For purposes of calculating OID, the debt instrument is assumed to be a 5-year debt instrument with a single principal payment at maturity of $100,000 and ten semiannual interest payments of $6,000, beginning on January 1, 1996. As a result, the debt instrument's yield is 6 percent, compounded annually.

(iv) Determination of OID. Under the payment schedule that would result if the option was exercised, none of the interest on the debt instrument would be qualified stated interest. Accordingly, under § 1.1273-1(c)(2), no payments on the debt instrument are qualified stated interest payments. Thus, $6,000 of OID accrues during the first annual accrual period. If the PIK instrument is not issued, $6,000 of OID accrues during each annual accrual period.

(v) Consequences if the PIK instrument is issued. Under paragraph (c)(6) of this section, if X issues the PIK instrument on January 1, 1996, the issuance of the PIK instrument is not a payment on the debt instrument. Solely for purposes of sections 1272 and 1273, the debt instrument is deemed reissued on January 1, 1996, for an issue price of $106,000. The recomputed yield is 6 percent, compounded annually. The OID for the first annual accrual period after the deemed reissuance is $6,360. The adjusted issue price of the debt instrument at the beginning of the next annual accrual period is $106,000 ($106,000 + $6,360 − $6,360). The OID for each of the four remaining annual accrual periods is $6,360.

Example 8. Debt instrument issued at a discount that provides for payment of interest in kind.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, T purchases at original issue, for $75,500, U corporation's debt instrument maturing on January 1, 2000, at a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable on that date. The debt instrument provides for annual payments of interest of $4,000 on January 1 of each year, beginning on January 1, 1996. The debt instrument gives U the unconditional right to issue, in lieu of the first interest payment, a second debt instrument (PIK instrument) maturing on January 1, 2000, with a stated principal amount of $4,000. The PIK instrument, if issued, would provide for annual payments of interest of $160 on January 1 of each year, beginning on January 1, 1997.

(ii) Aggregation of PIK instrument with original debt instrument. Under § 1.1275-2(c)(3), the issuance of the PIK instrument is not considered a payment made on the original debt instrument, and the PIK instrument is aggregated with the original debt instrument. The issue date of the PIK instrument is the same as the original debt instrument.

(iii) Determination of yield and maturity. The right to issue the PIK instrument is treated as an option to defer the initial interest payment until maturity. Yield determined without regard to the option is 10.55 percent, compounded annually. Yield determined by assuming U exercises the option is 10.32 percent, compounded annually. Thus, under paragraph (c)(5) of this section, it is assumed that U will exercise the option by issuing the PIK instrument because exercise of the option would decrease the yield of the debt instrument. For purposes of calculating OID, the debt instrument is assumed to be a 5-year debt instrument with a single principal payment at maturity of $104,000 and four annual interest payments of $4,160, beginning on January 1, 1997. As a result, the yield is 10.32 percent, compounded annually.

(iv) Consequences if the PIK instrument is not issued. Assume that T chooses to compute OID accruals on the basis of an annual accrual period. On January 1, 1996, the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument, and T's adjusted basis in the instrument, is $83,295.15. Under paragraph (c)(6) of this section, if U actually makes the $4,000 interest payment on January 1, 1996, the debt instrument is treated as if U made a pro rata prepayment (within the meaning of § 1.1275-2(f)(2)) of $4,000, which reduces the amount of each payment remaining on the instrument by a factor of 4/104, or 1/26. Thus, under § 1.1275-2(f)(1) and section 1271, T realizes a gain of $796.34 ($4,000 −($83,295.15/26)). The adjusted issue price of the debt instrument and T's adjusted basis immediately after the payment is $80,091.49 ($83,295.15 × 25/26) and the yield continues to be 10.32 percent, compounded annually.

Example 9. Debt instrument with stepped interest rate.

(i) Facts. On July 1, 1994, G purchases at original issue, for $85,000, H corporation's debt instrument maturing on July 1, 2004. The debt instrument has a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable on the maturity date and provides for semiannual interest payments on January 1 and July 1 of each year, beginning on January 1, 1995. The amount of each payment is $2,000 for the first 5 years and $5,000 for the final 5 years.

(ii) Determination of OID. Assume that G computes its OID using 6-month accrual periods ending on January 1 and July 1 of each year. The yield of the debt instrument, determined under paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, is 8.65 percent, compounded semiannually. Interest is unconditionally payable at a fixed rate of at least 4 percent, compounded semiannually, for the entire term of the debt instrument. Consequently, under § 1.1273-1(c)(1), the semiannual payments are qualified stated interest payments to the extent of $2,000. The amount of OID for the first 6-month accrual period is $1,674.34 (the issue price of the debt instrument ($85,000) times the yield of the debt instrument for that accrual period (.0865/2) less the amount of any qualified stated interest allocable to that accrual period ($2,000)).

Example 10. Debt instrument payable on demand that provides for interest at a constant rate.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, V purchases at original issue, for $100,000, W corporation's debt instrument. The debt instrument calls for interest to accrue at a rate of 9 percent, compounded annually. The debt instrument is redeemable at any time at the option of V for an amount equal to $100,000, plus accrued interest. V uses annual accrual periods to accrue OID on the debt instrument.

(ii) Amount of OID. Pursuant to paragraph (d) of this section, the yield of the debt instrument is 9 percent, compounded annually. If the debt instrument is not redeemed during 1995, the amount of OID allocable to the year is $9,000.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4810, Feb. 2, 1994, as amended by T.D. 8674, 61 FR 30140, June 14, 1996; T.D. 9612, 78 FR 8015, Feb. 5, 2013]

§ 1.1272-2 Treatment of debt instruments purchased at a premium.

(a) In general. Under section 1272(c)(1), if a holder purchases a debt instrument at a premium, the holder does not include any OID in gross income. Under section 1272(a)(7), if a holder purchases a debt instrument at an acquisition premium, the holder reduces the amount of OID includible in gross income by the fraction determined under paragraph (b)(4) of this section.

(b) Definitions and special rules

(1) Purchase. For purposes of section 1272 and this section, purchase means any acquisition of a debt instrument, including the acquisition of a newly issued debt instrument in a debt-for-debt exchange or the acquisition of a debt instrument from a donor.

(2) Premium. A debt instrument is purchased at a premium if its adjusted basis, immediately after its purchase by the holder (including a purchase at original issue), exceeds the sum of all amounts payable on the instrument after the purchase date other than payments of qualified stated interest (as defined in § 1.1273-1(c)).

(3) Acquisition premium. A debt instrument is purchased at an acquisition premium if its adjusted basis, immediately after its purchase (including a purchase at original issue), is—

(i) Less than or equal to the sum of all amounts payable on the instrument after the purchase date other than payments of qualified stated interest (as defined in § 1.1273-1(c)); and

(ii) Greater than the instrument's adjusted issue price (as defined in § 1.1275-1(b)).

(4) Acquisition premium fraction. In applying section 1272(a)(7), the cost of a debt instrument is its adjusted basis immediately after its acquisition by the purchaser. Thus, the numerator of the fraction determined under section 1272(a)(7)(B) is the excess of the adjusted basis of the debt instrument immediately after its acquisition by the purchaser over the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument. The denominator of the fraction determined under section 1272(a)(7)(B) is the excess of the sum of all amounts payable on the debt instrument after the purchase date, other than payments of qualified stated interest, over the instrument's adjusted issue price.

(5) Election to accrue discount on a constant yield basis. Rather than applying the acquisition premium fraction, a holder of a debt instrument purchased at an acquisition premium may elect under § 1.1272-3 to compute OID accruals by treating the purchase as a purchase at original issuance and applying the mechanics of the constant yield method.

(6) Special rules for determining basis

(i) Debt instruments acquired in exchange for other property. For purposes of section 1272(a)(7), section 1272(c)(1), and this section, if a debt instrument is acquired in an exchange for other property (other than in a reorganization defined in section 368) and the basis of the debt instrument is determined, in whole or in part, by reference to the basis of the other property, the basis of the debt instrument may not exceed its fair market value immediately after the exchange. For example, if a debt instrument is distributed by a partnership to a partner in a liquidating distribution and the partner's basis in the debt instrument would otherwise be determined under section 732, the partner's basis in the debt instrument may not exceed its fair market value for purposes of this section.

(ii) Acquisition by gift. For purposes of this section, a donee's adjusted basis in a debt instrument is the donee's basis for determining gain under section 1015(a).

(c) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this section.

Example 1. Debt instrument purchased at an acquisition premium.

(i) Facts. On July 1, 1994, A purchased at original issue, for $500, a debt instrument issued by Corporation X. The debt instrument matures on July 1, 1999, and calls for a single payment at maturity of $1,000. Under section 1273(a), the debt instrument has a stated redemption price at maturity of $1,000 and, thus, OID of $500. On July 1, 1996, when the debt instrument's adjusted issue price is $659.75, A sells the debt instrument to B for $750 in cash.

(ii) Acquisition premium fraction. Because the cost to B of the debt instrument is less than the amount payable on the debt instrument after the purchase date, but is greater than the debt instrument's adjusted issue price, B has paid an acquisition premium for the debt instrument. Accordingly, the daily portion of OID for any day that B holds the debt instrument is reduced by a fraction, the numerator of which is $90.25 (the excess of the cost of the debt instrument over its adjusted issue price) and the denominator of which is $340.25 (the excess of the sum of all payments after the purchase date over its adjusted issue price).

Example 2. Debt-for-debt exchange where holder is considered to purchase new debt instrument at a premium.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, H purchases at original issue, for $1,000, a debt instrument issued by Corporation X. On July 1, 1997, when H's adjusted basis in the debt instrument is $1,000, Corporation X issues a new debt instrument with a stated redemption price at maturity of $750 to H in exchange for the old debt instrument. Assume that the issue price of the new debt instrument is $600. Thus, under section 1273(a), the debt instrument has OID of $150. The exchange qualifies as a recapitalization under section 368(a)(1)(E), with the consequence that, under sections 354 and 358, H recognizes no loss on the exchange and has an adjusted basis in the new debt instrument of $1,000.

(ii) Application of section 1272(c)(1). Under paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section, H purchases the new debt instrument at a premium of $250. Accordingly, under section 1272(c)(1), H is not required to include OID in income with respect to the new debt instrument.

Example 3. Debt-for-debt exchange where holder is considered to purchase new debt instrument at an acquisition premium.

(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example 2 of paragraph (c) of this section, except that H purchases the old debt instrument from another holder on July 1, 1995, and on July 1, 1997, H's adjusted basis in the old debt instrument is $700. Under section 1273(a), the new debt instrument is issued with OID of $150.

(ii) Application of section 1272(a)(7). Under paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(3) of this section, H purchases the new debt instrument at an acquisition premium of $100. Accordingly, the daily portion of OID that is includible in H's income is reduced by the fraction determined under section 1272(a)(7).

Example 4. Treatment of acquisition premium for debt instrument acquired by gift.

(i) Facts. On July 1, 1994, D receives as a gift a debt instrument with a stated redemption price at maturity of $1,000 and an adjusted issue price of $800. On that date, the fair market value of the debt instrument is $900 and the donor's adjusted basis in the debt instrument is $950.

(ii) Application of section 1272(a)(7). Under paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(3), and (b)(6)(ii) of this section, D is considered to have purchased the debt instrument at an acquisition premium of $150. Accordingly, the daily portion of OID that is includible in D's income is reduced by the fraction determined under section 1272(a)(7).

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4814, Feb. 2, 1994]

§ 1.1272-3 Election by a holder to treat all interest on a debt instrument as OID.

(a) Election. A holder of a debt instrument may elect to include in gross income all interest that accrues on the instrument by using the constant yield method described in paragraph (c) of this section. For purposes of this election, interest includes stated interest, acquisition discount, OID, de minimis OID, market discount, de minimis market discount, and unstated interest, as adjusted by any amortizable bond premium or acquisition premium.

(b) Scope of election

(1) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, a holder may make the election for any debt instrument.

(2) Exceptions, limitations, and special rules

(i) Debt instrument with amortizable bond premium (as determined under section 171).

(A) A holder may make the election for a debt instrument with amortizable bond premium only if the instrument qualifies as a bond under section 171(d).

(B) If a holder makes the election under this section for a debt instrument with amortizable bond premium, the holder is deemed to have made the election under section 171(c)(2) for the taxable year in which the instrument was acquired. If the holder has previously made the election under section 171(c)(2), the requirements of that election with respect to any debt instrument are satisfied by electing to amortize the bond premium under the rules provided by this section.

(ii) Debt instrument with market discount.

(A) A holder may make the election under this section for a debt instrument with market discount only if the holder is eligible to make an election under section 1278(b).

(B) If a holder makes the election under this section for a debt instrument with market discount, the holder is deemed to have made both the election under section 1276(b)(2) for that instrument and the election under section 1278(b) for the taxable year in which the instrument was acquired. If the holder has previously made the election under section 1278(b), the requirements of that election with respect to any debt instrument are satisfied by electing to include the market discount in income in accordance with the rules provided by this section.

(iii) Tax-exempt debt instrument. A holder may not make the election for a tax-exempt obligation as defined in section 1275(a)(3).

(c) Mechanics of the constant yield method

(1) In general. For purposes of this section, the amount of interest that accrues during an accrual period is determined under rules similar to those under section 1272 (the constant yield method). In applying the constant yield method, however, a debt instrument subject to the election is treated as if—

(i) The instrument is issued for the holder's adjusted basis immediately after its acquisition by the holder;

(ii) The instrument is issued on the holder's acquisition date; and

(iii) None of the interest payments provided for in the instrument are qualified stated interest payments.

(2) Special rules to determine adjusted basis. For purposes of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section—

(i) If the debt instrument is acquired in an exchange for other property (other than in a reorganization defined in section 368) and the basis of the debt instrument is determined, in whole or in part, by reference to the basis of the other property, the adjusted basis of the debt instrument may not exceed its fair market value immediately after the exchange; and

(ii) If the debt instrument was acquired with amortizable bond premium (as determined under section 171), the adjusted basis of the debt instrument is reduced by an amount equal to the value attributable to any conversion feature.

(d) Time and manner of making the election. The election must be made for the taxable year in which the holder acquires the debt instrument. A holder makes the election by attaching to the holder's timely filed Federal income tax return a statement that the holder is making an election under this section and that identifies the debt instruments subject to the election. A holder may make the election for a class or group of debt instruments by attaching a statement describing the type or types of debt instruments being designated for the election.

(e) Revocation of election. The election may not be revoked unless approved by the Commissioner.

(f) Effective date. This section applies to debt instruments acquired on or after April 4, 1994.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4815, Feb. 2, 1994]

§ 1.1273-1 Definition of OID.

(a) In general. Section 1273(a)(1) defines OID as the excess of a debt instrument's stated redemption price at maturity over its issue price. Section 1.1273-2 defines issue price, and paragraph (b) of this section defines stated redemption price at maturity. Paragraph (d) of this section provides rules for de minimis amounts of OID. Although the total amount of OID for a debt instrument may be indeterminate, § 1.1272-1(d) provides a rule to determine OID accruals on certain debt instruments that provide for a fixed yield. See Example 10 in § 1.1272-1(j).

(b) Stated redemption price at maturity. A debt instrument's stated redemption price at maturity is the sum of all payments provided by the debt instrument other than qualified stated interest payments. If the payment schedule of a debt instrument is determined under § 1.1272-1(c) (relating to certain debt instruments subject to contingencies), that payment schedule is used to determine the instrument's stated redemption price at maturity.

(c) Qualified stated interest

(1) Definition

(i) In general. Qualified stated interest is stated interest that is unconditionally payable in cash or in property (other than debt instruments of the issuer), or that will be constructively received under section 451, at least annually at a single fixed rate (within the meaning of paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section).

(ii) Unconditionally payable. Interest is unconditionally payable only if reasonable legal remedies exist to compel timely payment or the debt instrument otherwise provides terms and conditions that make the likelihood of late payment (other than a late payment that occurs within a reasonable grace period) or nonpayment a remote contingency (within the meaning of § 1.1275-2(h)). For purposes of the preceding sentence, remedies or other terms and conditions are not taken into account if the lending transaction does not reflect arm's length dealing and the holder does not intend to enforce the remedies or other terms and conditions. For purposes of determining whether interest is unconditionally payable, the possibility of nonpayment due to default, insolvency, or similar circumstances, or due to the exercise of a conversion option described in § 1.1272-1(e) is ignored. This paragraph (c)(1)(ii) applies to debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996.

(iii) Single fixed rate

(A) In general. Interest is payable at a single fixed rate only if the rate appropriately takes into account the length of the interval between payments. Thus, if the interval between payments varies during the term of the debt instrument, the value of the fixed rate on which a payment is based generally must be adjusted to reflect a compounding assumption that is consistent with the length of the interval preceding the payment. See Example 1 in paragraph (f) of this section.

(B) Special rule for certain first and final payment intervals. Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section, if a debt instrument provides for payment intervals that are equal in length throughout the term of the instrument, except that the first or final payment interval differs in length from the other payment intervals, the first or final interest payment is considered to be made at a fixed rate if the value of the rate on which the payment is based is adjusted in any reasonable manner to take into account the length of the interval. See Example 2 of paragraph (f) of this section. The rule in this paragraph (c)(1)(iii)(B) also applies if the lengths of both the first and final payment intervals differ from the length of the other payment intervals.

(2) Debt instruments subject to contingencies. The determination of whether a debt instrument described in § 1.1272-1(c) (a debt instrument providing for an alternative payment schedule (or schedules) upon the occurrence of one or more contingencies) provides for qualified stated interest is made by analyzing each alternative payment schedule (including the stated payment schedule) as if it were the debt instrument's sole payment schedule. Under this analysis, the debt instrument provides for qualified stated interest to the extent of the lowest fixed rate at which qualified stated interest would be payable under any payment schedule. See Example (4) of paragraph (f) of this section.

(3) Variable rate debt instrument. In the case of a variable rate debt instrument, qualified stated interest is determined under § 1.1275-5(e).

(4) Stated interest in excess of qualified stated interest. To the extent that stated interest payable under a debt instrument exceeds qualified stated interest, the excess is included in the debt instrument's stated redemption price at maturity.

(5) Short-term obligations. In the case of a debt instrument with a term that is not more than 1 year from the date of issue, no payments of interest are treated as qualified stated interest payments.

(6) Business day convention

(i) Rule. For purposes of this paragraph (c), if a scheduled payment date for stated interest falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or Federal holiday (within the meaning of 5 U.S.C. 6103) but, under the terms of the debt instrument, the stated interest is payable on the first business day that immediately follows the scheduled payment date, the stated interest is treated as payable on the scheduled payment date, provided no additional interest is payable as a result of the deferral.

(ii) Effective/applicability date. Paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this section applies to a debt instrument issued on or after September 13, 2012. A taxpayer, however, may rely on paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this section for a debt instrument issued before that date.

(d) De minimis OID

(1) In general. If the amount of OID with respect to a debt instrument is less than the de minimis amount, the amount of OID is treated as zero, and all stated interest (including stated interest that would otherwise be characterized as OID) is treated as qualified stated interest.

(2) De minimis amount. The de minimis amount is an amount equal to 0.0025 multiplied by the product of the stated redemption price at maturity and the number of complete years to maturity from the issue date.

(3) Installment obligations. In the case of an installment obligation (as defined in paragraph (e)(1) of this section), paragraph (d)(2) of this section is applied by substituting for the number of complete years to maturity the weighted average maturity (as defined in paragraph (e)(3) of this section). Alternatively, in the case of a debt instrument that provides for payments of principal no more rapidly than a self-amortizing installment obligation (as defined in paragraph (e)(2) of this section), the de minimis amount defined in paragraph (d)(2) of this section may be calculated by substituting 0.00167 for 0.0025.

(4) Special rule for interest holidays, teaser rates, and other interest shortfalls

(i) In general. This paragraph (d)(4) provides a special rule to determine whether a debt instrument with a teaser rate (or rates), an interest holiday, or any other interest shortfall has de minimis OID. This rule applies if—

(A) The amount of OID on the debt instrument is more than the de minimis amount as otherwise determined under paragraph (d) of this section; and

(B) All stated interest provided for in the debt instrument would be qualified stated interest under paragraph (c) of this section except that for 1 or more accrual periods the interest rate is below the rate applicable for the remainder of the instrument's term (e.g., if as a result of an interest holiday, none of the stated interest is qualified stated interest).

(ii) Redetermination of OID for purposes of the de minimis test. For purposes of determining whether a debt instrument described in paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section has de minimis OID, the instrument's stated redemption price at maturity is treated as equal to the instrument's issue price plus the greater of the amount of foregone interest or the excess (if any) of the instrument's stated principal amount over its issue price. The amount of foregone interest is the amount of additional stated interest that would be required to be payable on the debt instrument during the period of the teaser rate, holiday, or shortfall so that all stated interest would be qualified stated interest under paragraph (c) of this section. See Example 5 and Example 6 of paragraph (f) of this section. In addition, for purposes of computing the de minimis amount of OID, the weighted average maturity of the debt instrument is determined by treating all stated interest payments as qualified stated interest payments.

(5) Treatment of de minimis OID by holders

(i) Allocation of de minimis OID to principal payments. The holder of a debt instrument includes any de minimis OID (other than de minimis OID treated as qualified stated interest under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, such as de minimis OID attributable to a teaser rate or interest holiday) in income as stated principal payments are made. The amount includible in income with respect to each principal payment equals the product of the total amount of de minimis OID on the debt instrument and a fraction, the numerator of which is the amount of the principal payment made and the denominator of which is the stated principal amount of the instrument.

(ii) Character of de minimis OID

(A) De minimis OID treated as gain recognized on retirement. Any amount of de minimis OID includible in income under this paragraph (d)(5) is treated as gain recognized on retirement of the debt instrument. See section 1271 to determine whether a retirement is treated as an exchange of the debt instrument.

(B) Treatment of de minimis OID on sale or exchange. Any gain attributable to de minimis OID that is recognized on the sale or exchange of a debt instrument is capital gain if the debt instrument is a capital asset in the hands of the seller.

(iii) Treatment of subsequent holders. If a subsequent holder purchases a debt instrument issued with de minimis OID at a premium (as defined in § 1.1272-2(b)(2)), the subsequent holder does not include the de minimis OID in income. Otherwise, a subsequent holder includes any discount in income under the market discount rules (sections 1276 through 1278) rather than under the rules of this paragraph (d)(5).

(iv) Cross-reference. See § 1.1272-3 for an election by a holder to treat de minimis OID as OID.

(e) Definitions

(1) Installment obligation. An installment obligation is a debt instrument that provides for the payment of any amount other than qualified stated interest before maturity.

(2) Self-amortizing installment obligation. A self-amortizing installment obligation is an obligation that provides for equal payments composed of principal and qualified stated interest that are unconditionally payable at least annually during the entire term of the debt instrument with no significant additional payment required at maturity.

(3) Weighted average maturity. The weighted average maturity of a debt instrument is the sum of the following amounts determined for each payment under the instrument (other than a payment of qualified stated interest)—

(i) The number of complete years from the issue date until the payment is made; multiplied by

(ii) A fraction, the numerator of which is the amount of the payment and the denominator of which is the debt instrument's stated redemption price at maturity.

(f) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this section.

Example 1. Qualified stated interest.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, A purchases at original issue, for $100,000, a debt instrument that matures on January 1, 1999, and has a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable at maturity. The debt instrument provides for interest payments of $8,000 on January 1, 1996, and January 1, 1997, and quarterly interest payments of $1,942.65, beginning on April 1, 1997.

(ii) Amount of qualified stated interest. The annual payments of $8,000 and the quarterly payments of $1,942.65 are payable at a single fixed rate because 8 percent, compounded annually, is equivalent to 7.77 percent, compounded quarterly. Consequently, all stated interest payments under the debt instrument are qualified stated interest payments.

Example 2. Qualified stated interest with short initial payment interval. On October 1, 1994, A purchases at original issue, for $100,000, a debt instrument that matures on January 1, 1998, and has a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable at maturity. The debt instrument provides for an interest payment of $2,000 on January 1, 1995, and interest payments of $8,000 on January 1, 1996, January 1, 1997, and January 1, 1998. Under paragraph (c)(1)(iii)(B) of this section, all stated interest payments on the debt instrument are computed at a single fixed rate and are qualified stated interest payments.

Example 3. Stated interest in excess of qualified stated interest.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, B purchases at original issue, for $100,000, C corporation's 5-year debt instrument. The debt instrument provides for a principal payment of $100,000, payable at maturity, and calls for annual interest payments of $10,000 for the first 3 years and annual interest payments of $10,600 for the last 2 years.

(ii) Payments in excess of qualified stated interest. All of the first three interest payments and $10,000 of each of the last two interest payments are qualified stated interest payments within the meaning of paragraph (c)(1) of this section. Under paragraph (c)(4) of this section, the remaining $600 of each of the last two interest payments is included in the stated redemption price at maturity, so that the stated redemption price at maturity is $101,200. Pursuant to paragraph (e)(3) of this section, the weighted average maturity of the debt instrument is 4.994 years [(4 years × $600/$101,200) + (5 years × $100,600/$101,200)]. The de minimis amount, or one-fourth of 1 percent of the stated redemption price at maturity multiplied by the weighted average maturity, is $1,263.50. Because the actual amount of discount, $1,200, is less than the de minimis amount, the instrument is treated as having no OID, and, under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all of the interest payments are treated as qualified stated interest payments.

Example 4. Qualified stated interest on a debt instrument that is subject to an option.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1997, A issues, for $100,000, a 10-year debt instrument that provides for a $100,000 principal payment at maturity and for annual interest payments of $10,000. Under the terms of the debt instrument, A has the option, exercisable on January 1, 2002, to lower the annual interest payments to $8,000. In addition, the debt instrument gives the holder an unconditional right to put the debt instrument back to A, exercisable on January 1, 2002, in return for $100,000.

(ii) Amount of qualified stated interest. Under paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the debt instrument provides for qualified stated interest to the extent of the lowest fixed rate at which qualified stated interest would be payable under any payment schedule. If the payment schedule determined by assuming that the issuer's option will be exercised and the put option will not be exercised were treated as the debt instrument's sole payment schedule, only $8,000 of each annual interest payment would be qualified stated interest. Under any other payment schedule, the debt instrument would provide for annual qualified stated interest payments of $10,000. Accordingly, only $8,000 of each annual interest payment is qualified stated interest. Any excess of each annual interest payment over $8,000 is included in the debt instrument's stated redemption price at maturity.

Example 5. De minimis OID; interest holiday.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, C purchases at original issue, for $97,561, a debt instrument that matures on January 1, 2007, and has a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable at maturity. The debt instrument provides for an initial interest holiday of 1 quarter and quarterly interest payments of $2,500 thereafter (beginning on July 1, 1995). The issue price of the debt instrument is $97,561. C chooses to accrue OID based on quarterly accrual periods.

(ii) De minimis amount of OID. But for the interest holiday, all stated interest on the debt instrument would be qualified stated interest. Under paragraph (d)(4) of this section, for purposes of determining whether the debt instrument has de minimis OID, the stated redemption price at maturity of the instrument is $100,061 ($97,561 (issue price) plus $2,500 (the greater of the amount of foregone interest ($2,500) and the amount equal to the excess of the instrument's stated principal amount over its issue price ($2,439)). Thus, the debt instrument is treated as having OID of $2,500 ($100,061 minus $97,561). Because this amount is less than the de minimis amount of $3,001.83 (0.0025 multiplied by $100,061 multiplied by 12 complete years to maturity), the debt instrument is treated as having no OID, and all stated interest is treated as qualified stated interest.

Example 6. De minimis OID; teaser rate.

(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example 5 of this paragraph (f) except that C uses an initial semiannual accrual period rather than an initial quarterly accrual period.

(ii) De minimis amount of OID. The debt instrument provides for an initial teaser rate because the interest rate for the semiannual accrual period is less than the interest rate applicable to the subsequent quarterly accrual periods. But for the initial teaser rate, all stated interest on the debt instrument would be qualified stated interest. Under paragraph (d)(4) of this section, for purposes of determining whether the debt instrument has de minimis OID, the stated redemption price at maturity of the instrument is $100,123.50 ($97,561 (issue price) plus $2,562.50 (the greater of the amount of foregone interest ($2,562.50) and the amount equal to the excess of the instrument's stated principal amount over its issue price ($2,439)). Thus, the debt instrument is treated as having OID of $2,562.50 ($100,123.50 minus $97,561). Because this amount is less than the de minimis amount of $3,003.71 (0.0025 multiplied by $100,123.50 multiplied by 12 complete years to maturity), the debt instrument is treated as having no OID, and all stated interest is treated as qualified stated interest.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4815, Feb. 2, 1994, as amended by T.D. 8674, 61 FR 30141, June 14, 1996; T.D. 9599, 77 FR 56536, Sept. 13, 2012]

§ 1.1273-2 Determination of issue price and issue date.

(a) Debt instruments issued for money

(1) Issue price. If a substantial amount of the debt instruments in an issue is issued for money, the issue price of each debt instrument in the issue is the first price at which a substantial amount of the debt instruments is sold for money. Thus, if an issue consists of a single debt instrument that is issued for money, the issue price of the debt instrument is the amount paid for the instrument. For example, in the case of a debt instrument evidencing a loan to a natural person, the issue price of the instrument is the amount loaned. See § 1.1275-2(d) for rules regarding Treasury securities. For purposes of this paragraph (a), money includes functional currency and, in certain circumstances, nonfunctional currency. See § 1.988-2(b)(2) for circumstances when nonfunctional currency is treated as money rather than as property.

(2) Issue date. The issue date of an issue described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section is the first settlement date or closing date, whichever is applicable, on which a substantial amount of the debt instruments in the issue is sold for money.

(b) Publicly traded debt instruments issued for property

(1) Issue price. If a substantial amount of the debt instruments in an issue is traded on an established market (within the meaning of paragraph (f) of this section) and the issue is not described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the issue price of each debt instrument in the issue is the fair market value of the debt instrument, determined as of the issue date (as defined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section). See paragraph (f) of this section for rules to determine the fair market value of a debt instrument for purposes of this section.

(2) Issue date. The issue date of an issue described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section is the first date on which a substantial amount of the traded debt instruments in the issue is issued.

(c) Debt instruments issued for publicly traded property

(1) Issue price. If a substantial amount of the debt instruments in an issue is issued for property that is traded on an established market (within the meaning of paragraph (f) of this section) and the issue is not described in paragraph (a)(1) or (b)(1) of this section, the issue price of each debt instrument in the issue is the fair market value of the property, determined as of the issue date (as defined in paragraph (c)(2) of this section). For purposes of the preceding sentence, property means a debt instrument, stock, security, contract, commodity, or nonfunctional currency. But see § 1.988-2(b)(2) for circumstances when nonfunctional currency is treated as money rather than as property. See paragraph (f) of this section for rules to determine the fair market value of property for purposes of this section.

(2) Issue date. The issue date of an issue described in paragraph (c)(1) of this section is the first date on which a substantial amount of the debt instruments in the issue is issued for traded property.

(d) Other debt instruments

(1) Issue price. If an issue of debt instruments is not described in paragraph (a)(1), (b)(1), or (c)(1) of this section, the issue price of each debt instrument in the issue is determined as if the debt instrument were a separate issue. If the issue price of a debt instrument that is treated as a separate issue under the preceding sentence is not determined under paragraph (a)(1), (b)(1), or (c)(1) of this section, and if section 1274 applies to the debt instrument, the issue price of the instrument is determined under section 1274. Otherwise, the issue price of the debt instrument is its stated redemption price at maturity under section 1273(b)(4). See section 1274(c) and § 1.1274-1 to determine if section 1274 applies to a debt instrument.

(2) Issue date. The issue date of an issue described in paragraph (d)(1) of this section is the date on which the debt instrument is issued for money or in a sale or exchange.

(e) Special rule for certain sales to bond houses, brokers, or similar persons. For purposes of determining the issue price and issue date of a debt instrument under this section, sales to bond houses, brokers, or similar persons or organizations acting in the capacity of underwriters, placement agents, or wholesalers are ignored.

(f) Traded on an established market (publicly traded)

(1) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (f)(6) of this section, property (including a debt instrument described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section) is traded on an established market for purposes of this section if, at any time during the 31-day period ending 15 days after the issue date—

(i) There is a sales price for the property as described in paragraph (f)(2) of this section;

(ii) There are one or more firm quotes for the property as described in paragraph (f)(3) of this section; or

(iii) There are one or more indicative quotes for the property as described in paragraph (f)(4) of this section.

(2) Sales price

(i) In general. A sales price exists if the price for an executed purchase or sale of the property within the 31-day period described in paragraph (f)(1) of this section is reasonably available within a reasonable period of time after the sale.

(ii) Pricing information for a debt instrument. For purposes of paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, the price of a debt instrument is considered reasonably available if the sales price (or information sufficient to calculate the sales price) appears in a medium that is made available to issuers of debt instruments, persons that regularly purchase or sell debt instruments (including a price provided only to certain customers or to subscribers), or persons that broker purchases or sales of debt instruments.

(3) Firm quote. A firm quote is considered to exist when a price quote is available from at least one broker, dealer, or pricing service (including a price provided only to certain customers or to subscribers) for property and the quoted price is substantially the same as the price for which the person receiving the quoted price could purchase or sell the property. A price quote is considered to be available whether the quote is initiated by a person providing the quote or provided at the request of the person receiving the quote. The identity of the person providing the quote must be reasonably ascertainable for a quote to be considered a firm quote for purposes of this paragraph (f)(3). A quote will be considered a firm quote if the quote is designated as a firm quote by the person providing the quote or if market participants typically purchase or sell, as the case may be, at the quoted price, even if the party providing the quote is not legally obligated to purchase or sell at that price.

(4) Indicative quote. An indicative quote is considered to exist when a price quote is available from at least one broker, dealer, or pricing service (including a price provided only to certain customers or to subscribers) for property and the price quote is not a firm quote described in paragraph (f)(3) of this section.

(5) Presumption that price or quote is equal to fair market value

(i) In general. For purposes of this section, the fair market value of property will be presumed to be equal to its sales price or quoted price determined under paragraphs (f)(2) through (f)(4) of this section. If there is more than one sales price under paragraph (f)(2) of this section, more than one quoted price under paragraph (f)(3) or (f)(4) of this section, or both one or more sales prices under paragraph (f)(2) of this section and quoted prices under paragraph (f)(3) or (f)(4) of this section, a taxpayer may use any reasonable method, consistently applied to the same or substantially similar facts, to determine the fair market value. For example, to determine the fair market value under a reasonable method, a taxpayer may consider factors such as (but not necessarily limited to) the timing of each relevant sale or quote in relation to the issue date; whether the price is derived from a sale, a firm quote, or an indicative quote; the size of each relevant sale or quote; or whether the sales price or quote corresponds to pricing information provided by an independent bond or loan pricing service.

(ii) Special rule for property for which there is only an indicative quote. If property is described only in paragraph (f)(4) of this section, and the taxpayer determines that the quote (or an average of the quotes) materially misrepresents the fair market value of the property, the taxpayer can use any method that provides a reasonable basis to determine the fair market value of the property. A taxpayer must establish that the method chosen more accurately reflects the value of the property than the quote or quotes for the property to use the method provided in this paragraph (f)(5)(ii). For an equity or debt instrument, a volume discount or control premium will not be considered to create a material misrepresentation of value for purposes of this paragraph (f)(5)(ii).

(6) Exception for small debt issues. Notwithstanding any other provision in paragraph (f) of this section, a debt instrument will not be treated as traded on an established market if at the time the determination is made the outstanding stated principal amount of the issue that includes the debt instrument does not exceed US$100 million (or, for a debt instrument denominated in a currency other than the U.S. dollar, the equivalent amount in the currency in which the debt instrument is denominated).

(7) Anti-abuse rules

(i) Effect of certain temporary restrictions on trading. If there is any temporary restriction on trading a purpose of which is to avoid the characterization of the property as one that is traded on an established market for Federal income tax purposes, then the property is treated as traded on an established market. For purposes of the preceding sentence, a temporary restriction on trading need not be imposed by the issuer.

(ii) Artificial pricing information. If a principal purpose for the existence of any sale or price quotation is to cause the property to be traded on an established market or to materially misrepresent the value of property, that sale or price quotation is disregarded.

(8) Convertible debt instruments. A debt instrument is not treated as traded on an established market solely because the debt instrument is convertible into property that is so traded.

(9) Issuer-holder consistency requirement

(i) General rule. For purposes of this section, an issuer must determine whether property is traded on an established market and, if so, the fair market value of the property. An issuer is required to exercise reasonable diligence to determine whether purchases or sales have taken place, the quantity of purchases and sales, the price at which purchases or sales occurred, the existence of firm or indicative quotes, and any other relevant information using the rules provided in paragraph (f) of this section to determine the fair market value of the property. If an issuer determines that property is traded on an established market, the issuer is required to make that determination as well as the fair market value of the property (which can be stated as the issue price of the debt instrument) available to holders in a commercially reasonable fashion, including by electronic publication, within 90 days of the date that the debt instrument is issued. Each determination by an issuer is binding on a holder of the debt instrument unless the holder explicitly discloses that its determination is different from the issuer's determination (for example, the holder determines a different fair market value for the property or determines that the property is not traded on an established market). A holder must describe in the disclosure the reasons for its different determination and, if applicable, how the holder determined the fair market value. A holder's disclosure must be filed on a timely filed Federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the acquisition date of the debt instrument. If an issuer for any reason does not make the fair market value or issue price of a debt instrument reasonably available to a holder, the holder must determine the fair market value of the property and issue price of the debt instrument using the rules provided in paragraph (f) of this section.

(ii) Co-obligors. If a debt instrument has more than one obligor, the obligors must designate one obligor (issuer) to determine whether property is traded on an established market and, if so, the fair market value of the property and issue price of the debt instrument and make the price available to holders using the rules provided in paragraph (f)(9)(i) of this section.

(10) Effective/applicability dates

(i) This paragraph (f) applies to a debt instrument issued on or after November 13, 2012.

(ii) For rules applying to a debt instrument issued before November 13, 2012, see paragraph (f) of this section as contained in 26 CFR part 1, revised April 1, 2011.

(g) Treatment of certain cash payments incident to lending transactions

(1) Applicability. The provisions of this paragraph (g) apply to cash payments made incident to private lending transactions (including seller financing).

(2) Payments from borrower to lender

(i) Money lending transaction. In a lending transaction to which section 1273(b)(2) applies, a payment from the borrower to the lender (other than a payment for property or for services provided by the lender, such as commitment fees or loan processing costs) reduces the issue price of the debt instrument evidencing the loan. However, solely for purposes of determining the tax consequences to the borrower, the issue price is not reduced if the payment is deductible under section 461(g)(2).

(ii) Section 1274 transaction. In a lending transaction to which section 1274 applies, a payment from the buyer-borrower to the seller-lender that is designated as interest or points reduces the stated principal amount of the debt instrument evidencing the loan, but is included in the purchase price of the property. If the payment is deductible under section 461(g)(2), however, the issue price of the debt instrument (as otherwise determined under section 1274 and the rule in the preceding sentence) is increased by the amount of the payment to compute the buyer-borrower's interest deductions under section 163.

(3) Payments from lender to borrower. A payment from the lender to the borrower in a lending transaction is treated as an amount loaned.

(4) Payments between lender and third party. If, as part of a lending transaction, a party other than the borrower (the third party) makes a payment to the lender, that payment is treated in appropriate circumstances as made from the third party to the borrower followed by a payment in the same amount from the borrower to the lender and governed by the provisions of paragraph (g)(2) of this section. If, as part of a lending transaction, the lender makes a payment to a third party, that payment is treated in appropriate circumstances as an additional amount loaned to the borrower and then paid by the borrower to the third party. The character of the deemed payment between the borrower and the third party depends on the substance of the transaction.

(5) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (g).

Example 1. Payments from borrower to lender in a cash transaction.

(i) Facts. A lends $100,000 to B for a term of 10 years. At the time the loan is made, B pays $4,000 in points to A. Assume that the points are not deductible by B under section 461(g)(2) and that the stated redemption price at maturity of the debt instrument is $100,000.

(ii) Payment results in OID. Under paragraph (g)(2)(i) of this section, the issue price of B's debt instrument evidencing the loan is $96,000. Because the amount of OID on the debt instrument ($4,000) is more than a de minimis amount of OID, A accounts for the OID under § 1.1272-1. B accounts for the OID under § 1.163-7.

Example 2. Payments from borrower to lender in a section 1274 transaction.

(i) Facts. A sells property to B for $1,000,000 in a transaction that is not a potentially abusive situation (within the meaning of § 1.1274-3). In consideration for the property, B gives A $300,000 and issues a 5-year debt instrument that has a stated principal amount of $700,000, payable at maturity, and that calls for semiannual payments of interest at a rate of 8.5 percent. In addition to the cash downpayment, B pays A $14,000 designated as points on the loan. Assume that the points are not deductible under section 461(g)(2).

(ii) Issue price. Under paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section, the stated principal amount of B's debt instrument is −$686,000 ($700,000 minus $14,000). Assuming a test rate of 9 percent, compounded semiannually, the imputed principal amount of B's debt instrument under § 1.1274-2(c)(1) is $686,153. Under § 1.1274-2(b)(1), the issue price of B's debt instrument is the stated principal amount of $686,000. Because the amount of OID on the debt instrument ($700,000−$686,000, or $14,000) is more than a de minimis amount of OID, A accounts for the OID under § 1.1272-1 and B accounts for the OID under § 1.163-7. B's basis in the property purchased is $1,000,000 ($686,000 debt instrument plus $314,000 cash payments).

Example 3. Payments between lender and third party (seller-paid points).

(i) Facts. A sells real property to B for $500,000 in a transaction that is not a potentially abusive situation (within the meaning of § 1.1274-3). B makes a cash down payment of $100,000 and borrows $400,000 of the purchase price from a lender, L, repayable in annual installments over a term of 15 years calling for interest at a rate of 9 percent, compounded annually. As part of the transaction, A makes a payment of $8,000 to L to facilitate the loan to B.

(ii) Payment results in a de minimis amount of OID. Under the provisions of paragraphs (g)(2)(i) and (g)(4) of this section, B is treated as having made an $8,000 payment directly to L and a payment of only $492,000 to A for the property. Thus, B's basis in the property is $492,000. The payment to L reduces the issue price of B's debt instrument to $392,000, resulting in $8,000 of OID ($400,000−$392,000). Because the amount of OID is de minimis under § 1.1273-1(d), L accounts for the de minimis OID under § 1.1273-1(d)(5). But see § 1.1272-3 (election to treat de minimis OID as OID). B accounts for the de minimis OID under § 1.163-7.

(h) Investment units

(1) In general. Under section 1273(c)(2), an investment unit is treated as if the investment unit were a debt instrument. The issue price of the investment unit is determined under paragraph (a)(1), (b)(1), or (c)(1) of this section, if applicable. The issue price of the investment unit is then allocated between the debt instrument and the property right (or rights) that comprise the unit based on their relative fair market values. If paragraphs (a)(1), (b)(1), and (c)(1) of this section are not applicable, however, the issue price of the debt instrument that is part of the investment unit is determined under section 1273(b)(4) or 1274, whichever is applicable.

(2) Consistent allocation by holders and issuer. The issuer's allocation of the issue price of the investment unit is binding on all holders of the investment unit. However, the issuer's determination is not binding on a holder that explicitly discloses that its allocation is different from the issuer's allocation. Unless otherwise provided by the Commissioner, the disclosure must be made on a statement attached to the holder's timely filed Federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the acquisition date of the investment unit. See § 1.1275-2(e) for rules relating to the issuer's obligation to disclose certain information to holders.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Convertible debt instruments. The issue price of a debt instrument includes any amount paid for an option to convert the instrument into stock (or another debt instrument) of either the issuer or a related party (within the meaning of section 267(b) or 707(b)(1)) or into cash or other property in an amount equal to the approximate value of such stock (or debt instrument). For debt instruments issued on or after February 5, 2013, the term stock in the preceding sentence means an equity interest in any entity that is classified, for Federal tax purposes, as either a partnership or a corporation.

(k) Below-market loans subject to section 7872(b). The issue price of a below-market loan subject to section 7872(b) (a term loan other than a gift loan) is the issue price determined under this section, reduced by the excess amount determined under section 7872(b)(1).

(l) [Reserved]

(m) Treatment of amounts representing pre-issuance accrued interest

(1) Applicability. Paragraph (m)(2) of this section provides an alternative to the general rule of this section for determining the issue price of a debt instrument if—

(i) A portion of the initial purchase price of the instrument is allocable to interest that has accrued prior to the issue date (pre-issuance accrued interest); and

(ii) The instrument provides for a payment of stated interest on the first payment date within 1 year of the issue date that equals or exceeds the amount of the pre-issuance accrued interest.

(2) Exclusion of pre-issuance accrued interest from issue price. If a debt instrument meets the requirements of paragraph (m)(1) of this section, the instrument's issue price may be computed by subtracting from the issue price (as otherwise computed under this section) the amount of pre-issuance accrued interest. If the issue price of the debt instrument is computed in this manner, a portion of the stated interest payable on the first payment date must be treated as a return of the excluded pre-issuance accrued interest, rather than as an amount payable on the instrument.

(3) Example. The following example illustrates the rule of paragraph (m) of this section.

Example:

(i) Facts. On January 15, 1995, A purchases at original issue, for $1,005, B corporation's debt instrument. The debt instrument provides for a payment of principal of $1,000 on January 1, 2005, and provides for semiannual interest payments of $60 on January 1 and July 1 of each year, beginning on July 1, 1995.

(ii) Determination of pre-issuance accrued interest. Under paragraphs (m)(1) and (m)(2) of this section, $5 of the $1,005 initial purchase price of the debt instrument is allocable to pre-issuance accrued interest. Accordingly, the debt instrument's issue price may be computed by subtracting the amount of pre-issuance accrued interest ($5) from the issue price otherwise computed under this section ($1,005), resulting in an issue price of $1,000. If the issue price is computed in this manner, $5 of the $60 payment made on July 1, 1995, must be treated as a repayment by B of the pre-issuance accrued interest.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4817, Feb. 2, 1994, as amended by T.D. 9599, 77 FR 56536, Sept. 13, 2012; T.D. 9612, 78 FR 8016, Feb. 5, 2013]

§ 1.1274-1 Debt instruments to which section 1274 applies.

(a) In general. Subject to the exceptions and limitations in paragraph (b) of this section, section 1274 and this section apply to any debt instrument issued in consideration for the sale or exchange of property. For purposes of section 1274, property includes debt instruments and investment units, but does not include money, services, or the right to use property. For the treatment of certain obligations given in exchange for services or the use of property, see sections 404 and 467. For purposes of this paragraph (a), money includes functional currency and, in certain circumstances, nonfunctional currency. See § 1.988-2(b)(2) for circumstances when nonfunctional currency is treated as money rather than as property.

(b) Exceptions

(1) Debt instrument with adequate stated interest and no OID. Section 1274 does not apply to a debt instrument if—

(i) All interest payable on the instrument is qualified stated interest;

(ii) The stated rate of interest is at least equal to the test rate of interest (as defined in § 1.1274-4);

(iii) The debt instrument is not issued in a potentially abusive situation (as defined in § 1.1274-3); and

(iv) No payment from the buyer-borrower to the seller-lender designated as points or interest is made at the time of issuance of the debt instrument.

(2) Exceptions under sections 1274(c)(1)(B), 1274(c)(3), 1274A(c), and 1275(b)(1)

(i) In general. Sections 1274(c)(1)(B), 1274(c)(3), 1274A(c), and 1275(b)(1) describe certain transactions to which section 1274 does not apply. This paragraph (b)(2) provides certain rules to be used in applying those exceptions.

(ii) Special rules for certain exceptions under section 1274(c)(3)

(A) Determination of sales price for certain sales of farms. For purposes of section 1274(c)(3)(A), the determination as to whether the sales price cannot exceed $1,000,000 is made without regard to any other exception to, or limitation on, the applicability of section 1274 (e.g., without regard to the special rules regarding sales of principal residences and land transfers between related persons). In addition, the sales price is determined without regard to section 1274 and without regard to any stated interest. The sales price includes the amount of any liability included in the amount realized from the sale or exchange. See § 1.1001-2.

(B) Sales involving total payments of $250,000 or less. Under section 1274(c)(3)(C), the determination of the amount of payments due under all debt instruments and the amount of other consideration to be received is made as of the date of the sale or exchange or, if earlier, the contract date. If the precise amount due under any debt instrument or the precise amount of any other consideration to be received cannot be determined as of that date, section 1274(c)(3)(C) applies only if it can be determined that the maximum of the aggregate amount of payments due under the debt instruments and other consideration to be received cannot exceed $250,000. For purposes of section 1274(c)(3)(C), if a liability is assumed or property is taken subject to a liability, the aggregate amount of payments due includes the outstanding principal balance or adjusted issue price (in the case of an obligation originally issued at a discount) of the obligation.

(C) Coordination with section 1273 and § 1.1273-2. In accordance with section 1274(c)(3)(D), section 1274 and this section do not apply if the issue price of a debt instrument issued in consideration for the sale or exchange of property is determined under paragraph (a)(1), (b)(1), or (c)(1) of § 1.1273-2.

(3) Other exceptions to section 1274

(i) Holders of certain below-market instruments. Section 1274 does not apply to any holder of a debt instrument that is issued in consideration for the sale or exchange of personal use property (within the meaning of section 1275(b)(3)) in the hands of the issuer and that evidences a below-market loan described in section 7872(c)(1).

(ii) Transactions involving certain demand loans. Section 1274 does not apply to any debt instrument that evidences a demand loan that is a below-market loan described in section 7872(c)(1).

(iii) Certain transfers subject to section 1041. Section 1274 does not apply to any debt instrument issued in consideration for a transfer of property subject to section 1041 (relating to transfers of property between spouses or incident to divorce).

(c) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this section.

Example 1. Single stated rate paid semiannually. A debt instrument issued in consideration for the sale of nonpublicly traded property in a transaction that is not a potentially abusive situation calls for the payment of a principal amount of $1,000,000 at the end of a 10-year term and 20 semiannual interest payments of $60,000. Assume that the test rate of interest is 12 percent, compounded semiannually. The debt instrument is not subject to section 1274 because it provides for interest equal to the test rate and all interest payable on the instrument is qualified stated interest.

Example 2. Sale of farm for debt instrument with contingent interest.

(i) Facts. On July 1, 1995, A, an individual, sells to B land used as a farm within the meaning of section 6420(c)(2). As partial consideration for the sale, B issues a debt instrument calling for a single $500,000 payment due in 10 years unless profits from the land in each of the 10 years preceding maturity of the debt instrument exceed a specified amount, in which case B is to make a payment of $1,200,000. The debt instrument does not provide for interest.

(ii) Total payments may exceed $1,000,000. Even though the total payments ultimately payable under the contract may be less than $1,000,000, at the time of the sale or exchange it cannot be determined that the sales price cannot exceed $1,000,000. Thus, the sale of the land used as a farm is not an excepted transaction described in section 1274(c)(3)(A).

Example 3. Sale between related parties subject to section 483(e).

(i) Facts. On July 1, 1995, A, an individual, sells land (not used as a farm within the meaning of section 6420(c)(2)) to A's child B for $650,000. In consideration for the sale, B issues a 10-year debt instrument to A that calls for a payment of $650,000. No other consideration is given. The debt instrument does not provide for interest.

(ii) Treatment of debt instrument. For purposes of section 483(e), the $650,000 debt instrument is treated as two separate debt instruments: a $500,000 debt instrument and a $150,000 debt instrument. The $500,000 debt instrument is subject to section 483(e), and accordingly is covered by the exception from section 1274 described in section 1274(c)(3)(F). Because the amount of the payments due as consideration for the sale exceeds $250,000, however, the $150,000 debt instrument is subject to section 1274.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4820, Feb. 2, 1994]

§ 1.1274-2 Issue price of debt instruments to which section 1274 applies.

(a) In general. If section 1274 applies to a debt instrument, section 1274 and this section determine the issue price of the debt instrument. For rules relating to the determination of the amount and timing of OID to be included in income, see section 1272 and the regulations thereunder.

(b) Issue price

(1) Debt instruments that provide for adequate stated interest; stated principal amount. The issue price of a debt instrument that provides for adequate stated interest is the stated principal amount of the debt instrument. For purposes of section 1274, the stated principal amount of a debt instrument is the aggregate amount of all payments due under the debt instrument, excluding any amount of stated interest. Under § 1.1273-2(g)(2)(ii), however, the stated principal amount of a debt instrument is reduced by any payment from the buyer- borrower to the seller-lender that is designated as interest or points. See Example 2 of § 1.1273-2(g)(5).

(2) Debt instruments that do not provide for adequate stated interest; imputed principal amount. The issue price of a debt instrument that does not provide for adequate stated interest is the imputed principal amount of the debt instrument.

(3) Debt instruments issued in a potentially abusive situation; fair market value. Notwithstanding paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section, in the case of a debt instrument issued in a potentially abusive situation (as defined in § 1.1274-3), the issue price of the debt instrument is the fair market value of the property received in exchange for the debt instrument, reduced by the fair market value of any consideration other than the debt instrument issued in consideration for the sale or exchange.

(c) Determination of whether a debt instrument provides for adequate stated interest

(1) In general. A debt instrument provides for adequate stated interest if its stated principal amount is less than or equal to its imputed principal amount. Imputed principal amount means the sum of the present values, as of the issue date, of all payments, including payments of stated interest, due under the debt instrument (determined by using a discount rate equal to the test rate of interest as determined under § 1.1274-4). If a debt instrument has a single fixed rate of interest that is paid or compounded at least annually, and that rate is equal to or greater than the test rate, the debt instrument has adequate stated interest.

(2) Determination of present value. The present value of a payment is determined by discounting the payment from the date it becomes due to the date of the sale or exchange at the test rate of interest. To determine present value, a compounding period must be selected, and the test rate must be based on the same compounding period.

(d) Treatment of certain options. This paragraph (d) provides rules for determining the issue price of a debt instrument to which section 1274 applies (other than a debt instrument issued in a potentially abusive situation) that is subject to one or more options described in both paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(5) of § 1.1272-1. Under this paragraph (d), an issuer will be deemed to exercise or not exercise an option or combination of options in a manner that minimizes the instrument's imputed principal amount, and a holder will be deemed to exercise or not exercise an option or combination of options in a manner that maximizes the instrument's imputed principal amount. If both the issuer and the holder have options, the rules of this paragraph (d) are applied to the options in the order that they may be exercised. Thus, the deemed exercise of one option may eliminate other options that are later in time. See § 1.1272-1(c)(5) to determine the debt instrument's yield and maturity for purposes of determining the accrual of OID with respect to the instrument.

(e) Mandatory sinking funds. In determining the issue price of a debt instrument to which section 1274 applies (other than a debt instrument issued in a potentially abusive situation) and that is subject to a mandatory sinking fund provision described in § 1.1272-1(c)(3), the mandatory sinking fund provision is ignored.

(f) Treatment of variable rate debt instruments

(1) Stated interest at a qualified floating rate

(i) In general. For purposes of paragraph (c) of this section, the imputed principal amount of a variable rate debt instrument (within the meaning of § 1.1275-5(a)) that provides for stated interest at a qualified floating rate (or rates) is determined by assuming that the instrument provides for a fixed rate of interest for each accrual period to which a qualified floating rate applies. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the assumed fixed rate in each accrual period is the greater of—

(A) The value of the applicable qualified floating rate as of the first date on which there is a binding written contract that substantially sets forth the terms under which the sale or exchange is ultimately consummated; or

(B) The value of the applicable qualified floating rate as of the date on which the sale or exchange occurs.

(ii) Interest rate restrictions. Notwithstanding paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, if, as a result of interest rate restrictions (such as an interest rate cap), the expected yield of the debt instrument taking the restrictions into account is significantly less than the expected yield of the debt instrument without regard to the restrictions, the interest payments on the debt instrument (other than any fixed interest payments) are treated as contingent payments. Reasonably symmetric interest rate caps and floors, or reasonably symmetric governors, that are fixed throughout the term of the debt instrument do not result in the debt instrument being subject to this rule.

(2) Stated interest at a single objective rate. For purposes of paragraph (c) of this section, the imputed principal amount of a variable rate debt instrument (within the meaning of § 1.1275-5(a)) that provides for stated interest at a single objective rate is determined by treating the interest payments as contingent payments.

(g) Treatment of contingent payment debt instruments. Notwithstanding paragraph (b) of this section, if a debt instrument subject to section 1274 provides for one or more contingent payments, the issue price of the debt instrument is the lesser of the instrument's noncontingent principal payments and the sum of the present values of the noncontingent payments (as determined under paragraph (c) of this section). However, if the debt instrument is issued in a potentially abusive situation, the issue price of the debt instrument is the fair market value of the noncontingent payments. For additional rules relating to a debt instrument that provides for one or more contingent payments, see § 1.1275-4. This paragraph (g) applies to debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996.

(h) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this section. Each example assumes a 30-day month, 360-day year. In addition, each example assumes that the debt instrument is not a qualified debt instrument (as defined in section 1274A(b)) and is not issued in a potentially abusive situation.

Example 1. Debt instrument without a fixed rate over its entire term.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, A sells nonpublicly traded property to B for a stated purchase price of $3,500,000. In consideration for the sale, B makes a down payment of $500,000 and issues a 10-year debt instrument with a stated principal amount of $3,000,000, payable at maturity. The debt instrument calls for no interest in the first 2 years and interest at a rate of 15 percent payable annually over the remaining 8 years of the debt instrument. The first interest payment of $450,000 is due on December 31, 1997, and the last interest payment is due on December 31, 2004, together with the $3,000,000 payment of principal. Assume that the test rate of interest applicable to the debt instrument is 10.5 percent, compounded annually.

(ii) Applicability of section 1274. Because the debt instrument does not provide for any interest during the first 2 years, none of the interest on the debt instrument is qualified stated interest. Therefore, the issue price of the debt instrument is determined under section 1274. See § 1.1274-1(b)(1). If the debt instrument has adequate stated interest, the issue price of the instrument is its stated principal amount. Otherwise, the issue price of the debt instrument is its imputed principal amount. The debt instrument has adequate stated interest only if the stated principal amount is less than or equal to the imputed principal amount.

(iii) Determination of imputed principal amount. To compute the imputed principal amount of the debt instrument, all payments due under the debt instrument are discounted back to the issue date at 10.5 percent, compounded annually, as follows:

(A) The present value of the $3,000,000 principal payment payable on December 31, 2004, is $1,105,346.59, determined as follows:

(B) The present value of the eight interest payments of $450,000 as of January 1, 1997, is $2,357,634.55, determined as follows:

(C) The present value of this interim amount as of January 1, 1995, is $1,930,865.09, determined as follows:

(iv) Determination of issue price. The debt instrument's imputed principal amount (that is, the present value of all payments due under the debt instrument) is $3,036,211.68 ($1,105,346.59 + $1,930,865.09). Because the stated principal amount ($3,000,000) is less than the imputed principal amount, the debt instrument provides for adequate stated interest. Therefore, the issue price of the debt instrument is its stated principal amount ($3,000,000).

Example 2. Debt instrument subject to issuer call option.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, in partial consideration for the sale of nonpublicly traded property, H corporation issues to G a 10-year debt instrument, maturing on January 1, 2005, with a stated principal amount of $10,000,000, payable on that date. The debt instrument provides for annual payments of interest of 8 percent for the first 5 years and 14 percent for the final 5 years, payable on January 1 of each year, beginning on January 1, 1996. In addition the debt instrument provides H with the unconditional option to call (prepay) the debt instrument at the end of 5 years for its stated principal amount of $10,000,000. Assume that the Federal mid-term and long-term rates applicable to the sale based on annual compounding are 9 percent and 10 percent, respectively.

(ii) Option presumed exercised. Assuming exercise of the call option, the imputed principal amount as determined under paragraph (d) of this section is $9,611,034.87 (the present value of all of the payments due within a 5-year term discounted at a test rate of 9 percent, compounded annually). Assuming nonexercise of the call option, the imputed principal amount is $10,183,354.78 (the present value of all of the payments due within a 10-year term discounted at a test rate of 10 percent, compounded annually). For purposes of determining the imputed principal amount, the option is presumed exercised because the imputed principal amount, assuming exercise of the option, is less than the imputed principal amount, assuming the option is not exercised. Because the option is presumed exercised, the debt instrument fails to provide for adequate stated interest because the imputed principal amount ($9,611,034.87) is less than the stated principal amount ($10,000,000). Thus, the issue price of the debt instrument is $9,611,034.87.

Example 3. Variable rate debt instrument with a single rate over its entire term.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, A sells B nonpublicly traded property. In partial consideration for the sale, B issues a debt instrument in the principal amount of $1,000,000, payable in 5 years. The debt instrument calls for interest payable monthly at a rate of 1 percentage point above the average prime lending rate of a major bank for the month preceding the month of the interest payment. Assume that the test rate of interest applicable to the debt instrument is 10.5 percent, compounded monthly. Assume also that 1 percentage point above the prime lending rate of the designated bank on the date of the sale is 12.5 percent, compounded monthly, which is greater than 1 percentage point above the prime lending rate of the designated bank on the first date on which there is a binding written contract that substantially sets forth the terms under which the sale is consummated.

(ii) Debt instrument has adequate stated interest. The debt instrument is a variable rate debt instrument (within the meaning of § 1.1275-5) that provides for stated interest at a qualified floating rate. Under paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, the debt instrument is treated as if it provided for a fixed rate of interest equal to 12.5 percent, compounded monthly. Because the test rate of interest is 10.5 percent, compounded monthly, the debt instrument provides for adequate stated interest.

Example 4. Debt instrument with a capped variable rate. On July 1, 1995, A sells nonpublicly traded property to B in return for a debt instrument with a stated principal amount of $10,000,000, payable on July 1, 2005. Interest is payable on July 1 of each year, beginning on July 1, 1996, at the Federal short-term rate for June of the same year. The debt instrument provides, however, that the interest rate cannot rise above 8.5 percent, compounded annually. Assume that, as of the date the test rate of interest for the debt instrument is determined, the Federal short-term rate is 8 percent, compounded annually. Assume further that, as a result of the interest rate cap of 8.5 percent, compounded annually, the expected yield of the debt instrument is significantly less than the expected yield of the debt instrument if it did not include the interest rate cap. Under paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section, the variable payments are treated as contingent payments for purposes of this section.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Special rules for tax-exempt obligations

(1) Certain variable rate debt instruments. Notwithstanding paragraph (b) of this section, if a tax-exempt obligation (as defined in section 1275(a)(3)) is a variable rate debt instrument (within the meaning of § 1.1275-5) that pays interest at an objective rate and is subject to section 1274, the issue price of the obligation is the greater of the obligation's fair market value and its stated principal amount.

(2) Contingent payment debt instruments. Notwithstanding paragraphs (b) and (g) of this section, if a tax-exempt obligation (as defined in section 1275(a)(3)) is subject to section 1274 and § 1.1275-4, the issue price of the obligation is the fair market value of the obligation. However, in the case of a tax-exempt obligation that is subject to § 1.1275-4(d)(2) (an obligation that provides for interest-based or revenue-based payments), the issue price of the obligation is the greater of the obligation's fair market value and its stated principal amount.

(3) Effective date. This paragraph (j) applies to debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4821, Feb. 2, 1994, as amended by T.D. 8674, 61 FR 30141, June 14, 1996]

§ 1.1274-3 Potentially abusive situations defined.

(a) In general. For purposes of section 1274, a potentially abusive situation means-—

(1) A tax shelter (as defined in section 6662(d)(2)(C)(ii)); or

(2) Any other situation involving—

(i) A recent sales transaction;

(ii) Nonrecourse financing;

(iii) Financing with a term in excess of the useful life of the property; or

(iv) A debt instrument with clearly excessive interest.

(b) Operating rules

(1) Debt instrument exchanged for nonrecourse financing. Nonrecourse financing does not include an exchange of a nonrecourse debt instrument for an outstanding recourse or nonrecourse debt instrument.

(2) Nonrecourse debt with substantial down payment. Nonrecourse financing does not include a sale or exchange of a real property interest financed by a nonrecourse debt instrument if, in addition to the nonrecourse debt instrument, the purchaser makes a down payment in money that equals or exceeds 20 percent of the total stated purchase price of the real property interest. For purposes of the preceding sentence, a real property interest means any interest, other than an interest solely as a creditor, in real property.

(3) Clearly excessive interest. Interest on a debt instrument is clearly excessive if the interest, in light of the terms of the debt instrument and the creditworthiness of the borrower, is clearly greater than the arm's length amount of interest that would have been charged in a cash lending transaction between the same two parties.

(4) Debt-for-debt exchange

(i) Rule. A debt instrument issued in a debt-for-debt exchange, including a deemed exchange under § 1.1001-3, will not be treated as the subject of a recent sales transaction for purposes of section 1274(b)(3)(B)(ii)(I) even if the debt instrument exchanged for the newly issued debt instrument was recently acquired prior to the exchange. Therefore, the issue price of the debt instrument will not be determined under section 1274(b)(3). However, if the debt instrument or the property for which the debt instrument is issued is publicly traded within the meaning of § 1.1273-2(f), the rules of § 1.1273-2 will apply to determine the issue price of the debt instrument.

(ii) Effective/applicability date. Paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section applies to a debt instrument issued on or after November 13, 2012.

(c) Other situations to be specified by Commissioner. The Commissioner may designate in the Internal Revenue Bulletin situations that, although described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, will not be treated as potentially abusive because they do not have the effect of significantly misstating basis or amount realized (see § 601.601(d)(2)(ii) of this chapter).

(d) Consistency rule. The issuer's determination that the debt instrument is or is not issued in a potentially abusive situation is binding on all holders of the debt instrument. However, the issuer's determination is not binding on a holder who explicitly discloses a position that is inconsistent with the issuer's determination. Unless otherwise prescribed by the Commissioner, the disclosure must be made on a statement attached to the holder's timely filed Federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the acquisition date of the debt instrument. See § 1.1275-2(e) for rules relating to the issuer's obligation to disclose certain information to holders.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4822, Feb. 2, 1994, as amended by T.D. 9599, 77 FR 56538, Sept. 13, 2012]

§ 1.1274-4 Test rate.

(a) Determination of test rate of interest

(1) In general

(i) Test rate is the 3-month rate. Except as provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the test rate of interest for a debt instrument issued in consideration for the sale or exchange of property is the 3-month rate.

(ii) The 3-month rate. Except as provided in paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section, the 3-month rate is the lower of—

(A) The lowest applicable Federal rate (based on the appropriate compounding period) in effect during the 3-month period ending with the first month in which there is a binding written contract that substantially sets forth the terms under which the sale or exchange is ultimately consummated; or

(B) The lowest applicable Federal rate (based on the appropriate compounding period) in effect during the 3-month period ending with the month in which the sale or exchange occurs.

(iii) Special rule if there is no binding written contract. If there is no binding written contract that substantially sets forth the terms under which the sale or exchange is ultimately consummated, the 3-month rate is the lowest applicable Federal rate (based on the appropriate compounding period) in effect during the 3-month period ending with the month in which the sale or exchange occurs.

(2) Test rate for certain debt instruments

(i) Sale-leaseback transactions. Under section 1274(e) (relating to certain sale-leaseback transactions), the test rate is 110 percent of the 3-month rate determined under paragraph (a)(1) of this section. For purposes of section 1274(e)(3), related party means a person related to the transferor within the meaning of section 267(b) or 707(b)(1).

(ii) Qualified debt instrument. Under section 1274A(a), the test rate for a qualified debt instrument is no greater than 9 percent, compounded semiannually, or an equivalent rate based on an appropriate compounding period.

(iii) Alternative test rate for short-term obligations

(A) Requirements. This paragraph (a)(2)(iii)(A) provides an alternative test rate under section 1274(d)(1)(D) for a debt instrument with a maturity of 1 year or less. This alternative test rate applies, however, only if the debt instrument provides for adequate stated interest using the alternative test rate, the issuer provides on the face of the debt instrument that the instrument qualifies as having adequate stated interest under section 1274(d)(1)(D), and the issuer and holder treat or agree to treat the instrument as having adequate stated interest.

(B) Alternative test rate. For purposes of paragraph (a)(2)(iii)(A), the alternative test rate is the market yield on U.S. Treasury bills with the same maturity date as the debt instrument. If the same maturity date is not available, the market yield on U.S. Treasury bills that mature in the same week or month as the debt instrument is used. The alternative test rate is determined as of the date on which there is a binding written contract that substantially sets forth the terms under which the sale or exchange is ultimately consummated or as of the date of the sale or exchange, whichever date results in a lower rate. If there is no binding written contract, however, the alternative test rate is determined as of the date of the sale or exchange.

(b) Applicable Federal rate. Except as otherwise provided in this section, the applicable Federal rate for a debt instrument is based on the term of the instrument (i.e., short-term, mid-term, or long-term). See section 1274(d)(1). The Internal Revenue Service publishes the applicable Federal rates for each month in the Internal Revenue Bulletin (see § 601.601(d)(2)(ii) of this chapter). The applicable Federal rates are based on the yield to maturity of outstanding marketable obligations of the United States of similar maturities during the one month period ending on the 14th day of the month preceding the month for which the rates are applicable.

(c) Special rules to determine the term of a debt instrument for purposes of determining the applicable Federal rate

(1) Installment obligation. If a debt instrument is an installment obligation (as defined in § 1.1273-1(e)(1)), the term of the instrument is the instrument's weighted average maturity (as defined in § 1.1273-1(e)(3)).

(2) Certain variable rate debt instruments

(i) In general. Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, if a variable rate debt instrument (as defined in § 1.1275-5(a)) provides for stated interest at a qualified floating rate (or rates), the term of the instrument is determined by reference to the longest interval between interest adjustment dates, or, if the variable rate debt instrument provides for a fixed rate, the interval between the issue date and the last day on which the fixed rate applies, if this interval is longer.

(ii) Restrictions on adjustments. If, due to significant restrictions on variations in a qualified floating rate or the use of certain formulae pursuant to § 1.1275-5(b)(2) (e.g., 15 percent of 1-year LIBOR, plus 800 basis points), the rate in substance resembles a fixed rate, the applicable Federal rate is determined by reference to the term of the debt instrument.

(3) Counting of either the issue date or the maturity date. The term of a debt instrument includes either the issue date or the maturity date, but not both dates.

(4) Certain debt instruments that provide for principal payments uncertain as to time. If a debt instrument provides for principal payments that are fixed in total amount but uncertain as to time, the term of the instrument is determined by reference to the latest possible date on which a principal payment can be made or, in the case of an installment obligation, by reference to the longest weighted average maturity under any possible payment schedule.

(d) Foreign currency loans. If all of the payments of a debt instrument are denominated in, or determined by reference to, a currency other than the U.S. dollar, the applicable Federal rate for the debt instrument is a foreign currency rate of interest that is analogous to the applicable Federal rate described in this section. For this purpose, an analogous rate of interest is a rate based on yields (with the appropriate compounding period) of the highest grade of outstanding marketable obligations denominated in such currency (excluding any obligations that benefit from special tax exemptions or preferential tax rates not available to debt instruments generally) with due consideration given to the maturities of the obligations.

(e) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this section.

Example 1. Variable rate debt instrument that limits the amount of increase and decrease in the rate.

(i) Facts. On July 1, 1996, A sells nonpublicly traded property to B in return for a 5-year debt instrument that provides for interest to be paid on July 1 of each year, beginning on July 1, 1997, based on the prime rate of a local bank on that date. However, the interest rate cannot increase or decrease from one year to the next by more than .25 percentage points (25 basis points).

(ii) Significant restriction. The debt instrument is a variable rate debt instrument (as defined in § 1.1275-5) that provides for stated interest at a qualified floating rate. Assume that based on all the facts and circumstances, the restriction is a significant restriction on the variations in the rate of interest. Under paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, the applicable Federal rate is determined by reference to the term of the debt instrument, and the applicable Federal rate is the Federal mid-term rate.

Example 2. Installment obligation.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1996, A sells nonpublicly traded property to B in exchange for a debt instrument that calls for a payment of $500,000 on January 1, 2001, and a payment of $1,000,000 on January 1, 2006. The debt instrument does not provide for any stated interest.

(ii) Determination of term. The debt instrument is an installment obligation. Under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the term of the debt instrument is its weighted average maturity (as defined in § 1.1273-1(e)(3)). The debt instrument's weighted average maturity is 8.33 years, which is the sum of (A) the ratio of the first payment to total payments (500,000/1,500,000), multiplied by the number of complete years from the issue date until the payment is due (5 years), and (B) the ratio of the second payment to total payments (1,000,000/1,500,000), multiplied by the number of complete years from the issue date until the second payment is due (10 years).

(iii) Applicable Federal rate. Based on the calculation in paragraph (ii) of this example, the term of the debt instrument is treated as 8.33 years. Consequently, the applicable Federal rate is the Federal mid-term rate.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4823, Feb. 2, 1994]

§ 1.1274-5 Assumptions.

(a) In general. Section 1274 does not apply to a debt instrument if the debt instrument is assumed, or property is taken subject to the debt instrument, in connection with a sale or exchange of property, unless the terms of the debt instrument, as part of the sale or exchange, are modified in a manner that would constitute an exchange under section 1001.

(b) Modifications of debt instruments

(1) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, if a debt instrument is assumed, or property is taken subject to a debt instrument, in connection with a sale or exchange of property, the terms of the debt instrument are modified as part of the sale or exchange, and the modification triggers an exchange under section 1001, the modification is treated as a separate transaction taking place immediately before the sale or exchange and is attributed to the seller of the property. For purposes of this paragraph (b), a debt instrument is not considered to be modified as part of the sale or exchange unless the seller knew or had reason to know about the modification.

(2) Election to treat buyer as modifying the debt instrument

(i) In general. Rather than having the rules in paragraph (b)(1) of this section apply, the seller and buyer may jointly elect to treat the transaction as one in which the buyer first assumed the original (unmodified) debt instrument and then subsequently modified the debt instrument. For this purpose, the modification is treated as a separate transaction taking place immediately after the sale or exchange.

(ii) Time and manner of making the election. The buyer and seller make the election under paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section by jointly signing a statement that includes the names, addresses, and taxpayer identification numbers of the seller and buyer, and a clear indication that the election is being made under paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section. Both the buyer and the seller must sign this statement not later than the earlier of the last day (including extensions) for filing the Federal income tax return of the buyer or seller for the taxable year in which the sale or exchange of the property occurs. The buyer and seller should attach this signed statement (or a copy thereof) to their timely filed Federal income tax returns.

(c) Wraparound indebtedness. For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, the issuance of wraparound indebtedness is not considered an assumption.

(d) Consideration attributable to assumed debt. If, as part of the consideration for the sale or exchange of property, the buyer assumes, or takes the property subject to, an indebtedness that was issued with OID (including a debt instrument issued in a prior sale or exchange to which section 1274 applied), the portion of the buyer's basis in the property and the seller's amount realized attributable to the debt instrument equals the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument as of the date of the sale or exchange.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4824, Feb. 2, 1994]

§ 1.1274A-1 Special rules for certain transactions where stated principal amount does not exceed $2,800,000.

(a) In general. Section 1274A allows the use of a lower test rate for purposes of sections 483 and 1274 in the case of a qualified debt instrument (as defined in section 1274A(b)) and, if elected by the borrower and the lender, the use of the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting for interest on a cash method debt instrument (as defined in section 1274A(c)(2)). This section provides special rules for qualified debt instruments and cash method debt instruments.

(b) Rules for both qualified and cash method debt instruments

(1) Sale-leaseback transactions. A debt instrument issued in a sale-leaseback transaction (within the meaning of section 1274(e)) cannot be either a qualified debt instrument or a cash method debt instrument.

(2) Debt instruments calling for contingent payments. A debt instrument that provides for contingent payments cannot be a qualified debt instrument unless it can be determined at the time of the sale or exchange that the maximum stated principal amount due under the debt instrument cannot exceed the amount specified in section 1274A(b). Similarly, a debt instrument that provides for contingent payments cannot be a cash method debt instrument unless it can be determined at the time of the sale or exchange that the maximum stated principal amount due under the debt instrument cannot exceed the amount specified in section 1274A(c)(2)(A).

(3) Aggregation of transactions

(i) General rule. The aggregation rules of section 1274A(d)(1) are applied using a facts and circumstances test.

(ii) Examples. The following examples illustrate the application of section 1274A(d)(1) and paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.

Example 1. Aggregation of two sales to a single person. In two transactions evidenced by separate sales agreements, A sells undivided half interests in Blackacre to B. The sales are pursuant to a plan for the sale of a 100 percent interest in Blackacre to B. These sales or exchanges are part of a series of related transactions and, thus, are treated as a single sale for purposes of section 1274A.

Example 2. Aggregation of two purchases by unrelated individuals. Pursuant to a plan, unrelated individuals X and Y purchase undivided half interests in Blackacre from A and subsequently contribute these interests to a partnership in exchange for equal interests in the partnership. These purchases are treated as part of the same transaction and, thus, are treated as a single sale for purposes of section 1274A.

Example 3. Aggregation of sales made pursuant to a tender offer. Fifteen unrelated individuals own all of the stock of X Corporation. Y Corporation makes a tender offer to these 15 shareholders. The terms offered to each shareholder are identical. Shareholders holding a majority of the shares of X Corporation elect to tender their shares pursuant to Y Corporation's offer. These sales are part of the same transaction and, thus, are treated as a single sale for purposes of section 1274A.

Example 4. No aggregation for separate sales of similar property to unrelated persons. Pursuant to a newspaper advertisement, X Corporation offers for sale similar condominiums in a single building. The prices of the units vary due to a variety of factors, but the financing terms offered by X Corporation to all buyers are identical. The units are purchased by unrelated buyers who decided whether to purchase units in the building at the price and on the terms offered by X Corporation, without regard to the actions of other buyers. Because each buyer acts individually, the sales are not part of the same transaction or a series of related transactions and, thus, are treated as separate sales.

(4) Inflation adjustment of dollar amounts. Under section 1274A(d)(2), the dollar amounts specified in sections 1274A(b) and 1274A(c)(2)(A) are adjusted for inflation. The dollar amounts, adjusted for inflation, are published in the Internal Revenue Bulletin (see § 601.601(d)(2)(ii) of this chapter).

(c) Rules for cash method debt instruments

(1) Time and manner of making cash method election. The borrower and lender make the election described in section 1274A(c)(2)(D) by jointly signing a statement that includes the names, addresses, and taxpayer identification numbers of the borrower and lender, a clear indication that an election is being made under section 1274A(c)(2), and a declaration that the debt instrument with respect to which the election is being made fulfills the requirements of a cash method debt instrument. Both the borrower and the lender must sign this statement not later than the earlier of the last day (including extensions) for filing the Federal income tax return of the borrower or lender for the taxable year in which the debt instrument is issued. The borrower and lender should attach this signed statement (or a copy thereof) to their timely filed Federal income tax returns.

(2) Successors of electing parties. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (c)(2), the cash method election under section 1274A(c) applies to any successor of the electing lender or borrower. Thus, for any period after the transfer of a cash method debt instrument, the successor takes into account the interest (including unstated interest) on the instrument under the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting. Nevertheless, if the lender (or any successor thereof) transfers the cash method debt instrument to a taxpayer who uses an accrual method of accounting, section 1272 rather than section 1274A(c) applies to the successor of the lender with respect to the debt instrument for any period after the date of the transfer. The borrower (or any successor thereof), however, remains on the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting with respect to the cash method debt instrument.

(3) Modified debt instrument. In the case of a debt instrument issued in a debt-for-debt exchange that qualifies as an exchange under section 1001, the debt instrument is eligible for the election to be a cash method debt instrument if the other prerequisites to making the election in section 1274A(c) are met. However, if a principal purpose of the modification is to defer interest income or deductions through the use of the election, then the debt instrument is not eligible for the election.

(4) Debt incurred or continued to purchase or carry a cash method debt instrument. If a debt instrument is incurred or continued to purchase or carry a cash method debt instrument, rules similar to those under section 1277 apply to determine the timing of the interest deductions for the debt instrument. For purposes of the preceding sentence, rules similar to those under section 265(a)(2) apply to determine whether a debt instrument is incurred or continued to purchase or carry a cash method debt instrument.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4824, Feb. 2, 1994]

§ 1.1275-1 Definitions.

(a) Applicability. The definitions contained in this section apply for purposes of sections 163(e) and 1271 through 1275 and the regulations thereunder.

(b) Adjusted issue price

(1) In general. The adjusted issue price of a debt instrument at the beginning of the first accrual period is the issue price. Thereafter, the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument is the issue price of the debt instrument—

(i) Increased by the amount of OID previously includible in the gross income of any holder (determined without regard to section 1272(a)(7) and section 1272(c)(1)); and

(ii) Decreased by the amount of any payment previously made on the debt instrument other than a payment of qualified stated interest. See § 1.1275-2(f) for rules regarding adjustments to adjusted issue price on a pro rata prepayment.

(2) Bond issuance premium. If a debt instrument is issued with bond issuance premium (as defined in § 1.163-13(c)), for purposes of determining the issuer's adjusted issue price, the adjusted issue price determined under paragraph (b)(1) of this section is also decreased by the amount of bond issuance premium previously allocable under § 1.163-13(d)(3).

(3) Adjusted issue price for subsequent holders. For purposes of calculating OID accruals, acquisition premium, or market discount, a holder (other than a purchaser at original issuance) determines adjusted issue price in any manner consistent with the regulations under sections 1271 through 1275.

(c) OID. OID means original issue discount (as defined in section 1273(a) and § 1.1273-1).

(d) Debt instrument. Except as provided in section 1275(a)(1)(B) (relating to certain annuity contracts; see paragraph (j) of this section), debt instrument means any instrument or contractual arrangement that constitutes indebtedness under general principles of Federal income tax law (including, for example, a certificate of deposit or a loan). Nothing in the regulations under sections 163(e), 483, and 1271 through 1275, however, shall influence whether an instrument constitutes indebtedness for Federal income tax purposes. See § 1.385-3 for rules that treat certain instruments that otherwise would be treated as indebtedness as stock for Federal tax purposes.

(e) Tax-exempt obligations. For purposes of section 1275(a)(3)(B), exempt from tax means exempt from Federal income tax.

(f) Issue.

(1) Debt instruments issued on or after March 13, 2001.

(2) Debt instruments issued before March 13, 2001.

(3) Transition rule.

(4) Cross-references for reopening and aggregation rules.

(g) Debt instruments issued by a natural person. If an entity is a primary obligor under a debt instrument, the debt instrument is considered to be issued by the entity and not by a natural person even if a natural person is a co-maker and is jointly liable for the debt instrument's repayment. A debt instrument issued by a partnership is considered to be issued by the partnership as an entity even if the partnership is composed entirely of natural persons.

(h) Publicly offered debt instrument. A debt instrument is publicly offered if it is part of an issue of debt instruments the initial offering of which—

(1) Is registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission; or

(2) Would be required to be registered under the Securities Act of 1933 (15 U.S.C. 77a et seq.) but for an exemption from registration—

(i) Under section 3 of the Securities Act of 1933 (relating to exempted securities);

(ii) Under any law (other than the Securities Act of 1933) because of the identity of the issuer or the nature of the security; or

(iii) Because the issue is intended for distribution to persons who are not United States persons.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Life annuity exception under section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i)

(1) Purpose. Section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i) excepts an annuity contract from the definition of debt instrument if section 72 applies to the contract and the contract depends (in whole or in substantial part) on the life expectancy of one or more individuals. This paragraph (j) provides rules to ensure that an annuity contract qualifies for the exception in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i) only in cases where the life contingency under the contract is real and significant.

(2) General rule

(i) Rule. For purposes of section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i), an annuity contract depends (in whole or in substantial part) on the life expectancy of one or more individuals only if—

(A) The contract provides for periodic distributions made not less frequently than annually for the life (or joint lives) of an individual (or a reasonable number of individuals); and

(B) The contract does not contain any terms or provisions that can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with the longevity of the annuitant (or annuitants).

(ii) Terminology. For purposes of this paragraph (j):

(A) Contract. The term contract includes all written or unwritten understandings among the parties as well as any person or persons acting in concert with one or more of the parties.

(B) Annuitant. The term annuitant refers to the individual (or reasonable number of individuals) referred to in paragraph (j)(2)(i)(A) of this section.

(C) Terminating death. The phrase terminating death refers to the annuitant death that can terminate periodic distributions under the contract. (See paragraph (j)(2)(i)(A) of this section.) For example, if a contract provides for periodic distributions until the later of the death of the last-surviving annuitant or the end of a term certain, the terminating death is the death of the last-surviving annuitant.

(iii) Coordination with specific rules. Paragraphs (j) (3) through (7) of this section describe certain terms and conditions that can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with the longevity of the annuitant (or annuitants). If a term or provision is not specifically described in paragraphs (j) (3) through (7) of this section, the annuity contract must be tested under the general rule of paragraph (j)(2)(i) of this section to determine whether it depends (in whole or in substantial part) on the life expectancy of one or more individuals.

(3) Availability of a cash surrender option

(i) Impact on life contingency. The availability of a cash surrender option can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with the longevity of the annuitant (or annuitants). Thus, the availability of any cash surrender option causes the contract to fail to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i). A cash surrender option is available if there is reason to believe that the issuer (or a person acting in concert with the issuer) will be willing to terminate or purchase all or a part of the annuity contract by making one or more payments of cash or property (other than an annuity contract described in this paragraph (j)).

(ii) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (j)(3):

Example 1.

(i) Facts. On March 1, 1998, X issues a contract to A for cash. The contract provides that, effective on any date chosen by A (the annuity starting date), X will begin equal monthly distributions for A's life. The amount of each monthly distribution will be no less than an amount based on the contract's account value as of the annuity starting date, A's age on that date, and permanent purchase rate guarantees contained in the contract. The contract also provides that, at any time before the annuity starting date, A may surrender the contract to X for the account value less a surrender charge equal to a declining percentage of the account value. For this purpose, the initial account value is equal to the cash invested. Thereafter, the account value increases annually by at least a minimum guaranteed rate.

(ii) Analysis. The ability to obtain the account value less the surrender charge, if any, is a cash surrender option. This ability can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with A's longevity. Thus, the contract fails to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

Example 2.

(i) Facts. On March 1, 1998, X issues a contract to B for cash. The contract provides that beginning on March 1, 1999, X will distribute to B a fixed amount of cash each month for B's life. Based on X's advertisements, marketing literature, or illustrations or on oral representations by X's sales personnel, there is reason to believe that an affiliate of X stands ready to purchase B's contract for its commuted value.

(ii) Analysis. Because there is reason to believe that an affiliate of X stands ready to purchase B's contract for its commuted value, a cash surrender option is available within the meaning of paragraph (j)(3)(i) of this section. This availability can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with B's longevity. Thus, the contract fails to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

(4) Availability of a loan secured by the contract

(i) Impact on life contingency. The availability of a loan secured by the contract can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with the longevity of the annuitant (or annuitants). Thus, the availability of any such loan causes the contract to fail to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i). A loan secured by the contract is available if there is reason to believe that the issuer (or a person acting in concert with the issuer) will be willing to make a loan that is directly or indirectly secured by the annuity contract.

(ii) Example. The following example illustrates the rules of this paragraph (j)(4):

Example:

(i) Facts. On March 1, 1998, X issues a contract to C for $100,000. The contract provides that, effective on any date chosen by C (the annuity starting date), X will begin equal monthly distributions for C's life. The amount of each monthly distribution will be no less than an amount based on the contract's account value as of the annuity starting date, C's age on that date, and permanent purchase rate guarantees contained in the contract. From marketing literature circulated by Y, there is reason to believe that, at any time before the annuity starting date, C may pledge the contract to borrow up to $75,000 from Y. Y is acting in concert with X.

(ii) Analysis. Because there is reason to believe that Y, a person acting in concert with X, is willing to lend money against C's contract, a loan secured by the contract is available within the meaning of paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section. This availability can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with C's longevity. Thus, the contract fails to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

(5) Minimum payout provision

(i) Impact on life contingency. The existence of a minimum payout provision can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with the longevity of the annuitant (or annuitants). Thus, the existence of any minimum payout provision causes the contract to fail to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

(ii) Definition of minimum payout provision. A minimum payout provision is a contractual provision (for example, an agreement to make distributions over a term certain) that provides for one or more distributions made—

(A) After the terminating death under the contract; or

(B) By reason of the death of any individual (including distributions triggered by or increased by terminal or chronic illness, as defined in section 101(g)(1) (A) and (B)).

(iii) Exceptions for certain minimum payouts

(A) Recovery of consideration paid for the contract. Notwithstanding paragraphs (j)(2)(i)(A) and (j)(5)(i) of this section, a contract does not fail to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i) merely because it provides that, after the terminating death, there will be one or more distributions that, in the aggregate, do not exceed the consideration paid for the contract less total distributions previously made under the contract.

(B) Payout for one-half of life expectancy. Notwithstanding paragraphs (j)(2)(i)(A) and (j)(5)(i) of this section, a contract does not fail to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i) merely because it provides that, if the terminating death occurs after the annuity starting date, distributions under the contract will continue to be made after the terminating death until a date that is no later than the halfway date. This exception does not apply unless the amounts distributed in each contract year will not exceed the amounts that would have been distributed in that year if the terminating death had not occurred until the expected date of the terminating death, determined under paragraph (j)(5)(iii)(C) of this section.

(C) Definition of halfway date. For purposes of this paragraph (j)(5)(iii), the halfway date is the date halfway between the annuity starting date and the expected date of the terminating death, determined as of the annuity starting date, with respect to all then-surviving annuitants. The expected date of the terminating death must be determined by reference to the applicable mortality table prescribed under section 417(e)(3)(A)(ii)(I).

(iv) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (j)(5):

Example 1.

(i) Facts. On March 1, 1998, X issues a contract to D for cash. The contract provides that, effective on any date D chooses (the annuity starting date), X will begin equal monthly distributions for the greater of D's life or 10 years, regardless of D's age as of the annuity starting date. The amount of each monthly distribution will be no less than an amount based on the contract's account value as of the annuity starting date, D's age on that date, and permanent purchase rate guarantees contained in the contract.

(ii) Analysis. A minimum payout provision exists because, if D dies within 10 years of the annuity starting date, one or more distributions will be made after D's death. The minimum payout provision does not qualify for the exception in paragraph (j)(5)(iii)(B) of this section because D may defer the annuity starting date until his remaining life expectancy is less than 20 years. If, on the annuity starting date, D's life expectancy is less than 20 years, the minimum payout period (10 years) will last beyond the halfway date. The minimum payout provision, therefore, can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with D's longevity. Thus, the contract fails to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

Example 2.

(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example 1 of this paragraph (j)(5)(iv) except that the monthly distributions will last for the greater of D's life or a term certain. D may choose the length of the term certain subject to the restriction that, on the annuity starting date, the term certain must not exceed one-half of D's life expectancy as of the annuity starting date. The contract also does not provide for any adjustment in the amount of distributions by reason of the death of D or any other individual, except for a refund of D's aggregate premium payments less the sum of all prior distributions under the contract.

(ii) Analysis. The minimum payout provision qualifies for the exception in paragraph (j)(5)(iii)(B) of this section because distributions under the minimum payout provision will not continue past the halfway date and the contract does not provide for any adjustments in the amount of distributions by reason of the death of D or any other individual, other than a guaranteed death benefit described in paragraph (j)(5)(iii)(A) of this section. Accordingly, the existence of this minimum payout provision does not prevent the contract from being described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

(6) Maximum payout provision

(i) Impact on life contingency. The existence of a maximum payout provision can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with the longevity of the annuitant (or annuitants). Thus, the existence of any maximum payout provision causes the contract to fail to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

(ii) Definition of maximum payout provision. A maximum payout provision is a contractual provision that provides that no distributions under the contract may be made after some date (the termination date), even if the terminating death has not yet occurred.

(iii) Exception. Notwithstanding paragraphs (j)(2)(i)(A) and (j)(6)(i) of this section, an annuity contract does not fail to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i) merely because the contract contains a maximum payout provision, provided that the period of time from the annuity starting date to the termination date is at least twice as long as the period of time from the annuity starting date to the expected date of the terminating death, determined as of the annuity starting date, with respect to all then-surviving annuitants. The expected date of the terminating death must be determined by reference to the applicable mortality table prescribed under section 417(e)(3)(A)(ii)(I).

(iv) Example. The following example illustrates the rules of this paragraph (j)(6):

Example:

(i) Facts. On March 1, 1998, X issues a contract to E for cash. The contract provides that beginning on April 1, 1998, X will distribute to E a fixed amount of cash each month for E's life but that no distributions will be made after April 1, 2018. On April 1, 1998, E's life expectancy is 9 years.

(ii) Analysis. A maximum payout provision exists because if E survives beyond April 1, 2018, E will receive no further distributions under the contract. The period of time from the annuity starting date (April 1, 1998) to the termination date (April 1, 2018) is 20 years. Because this 20-year period is more than twice as long as E's life expectancy on April 1, 1998, the maximum payout provision qualifies for the exception in paragraph (j)(6)(iii) of this section. Accordingly, the existence of this maximum payout provision does not prevent the contract from being described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

(7) Decreasing payout provision

(i) General rule. If the amount of distributions during any contract year (other than the last year during which distributions are made) may be less than the amount of distributions during the preceding year, this possibility can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with the longevity of the annuitant (or annuitants). Thus, the existence of this possibility causes the contract to fail to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

(ii) Exception for certain variable distributions. Notwithstanding paragraph (j)(7)(i) of this section, if an annuity contract provides that the amount of each distribution must increase and decrease in accordance with investment experience, cost of living indices, or similar fluctuating criteria, then the possibility that the amount of a distribution may decrease for this reason does not significantly reduce the probability that the distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with the longevity of the annuitant (or annuitants).

(iii) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (j)(7):

Example 1.

(i) Facts. On March 1, 1998, X issues a contract to F for $100,000. The contract provides that beginning on March 1, 1999, X will make distributions to F each year until F's death. Prior to March 1, 2009, distributions are to be made at a rate of $12,000 per year. Beginning on March 1, 2009, distributions are to be made at a rate of $3,000 per year.

(ii) Analysis. If F is alive in 2009, the amount distributed in 2009 ($3,000) will be less than the amount distributed in 2008 ($12,000). The exception in paragraph (j)(7)(ii) of this section does not apply. The decrease in the amount of any distributions made on or after March 1, 2009, can significantly reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with F's longevity. Thus, the contract fails to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

Example 2.

(i) Facts. On March 1, 1998, X issues a contract to G for cash. The contract provides that, effective on any date G chooses (the annuity starting date), X will begin monthly distributions to G for G's life. Prior to the annuity starting date, the account value of the contract reflects the investment return, including changes in the market value, of an identifiable pool of assets. When G chooses the annuity starting date, G must also choose whether the distributions are to be fixed or variable. If fixed, the amount of each monthly distribution will remain constant at an amount that is no less than an amount based on the contract's account value as of the annuity starting date, G's age on that date, and permanent purchase rate guarantees contained in the contract. If variable, the monthly distributions will fluctuate to reflect the investment return, including changes in the market value, of the pool of assets. The monthly distributions under the contract will not otherwise decline from year to year.

(ii) Analysis. Because the only possible year-to-year declines in annuity distributions are described in paragraph (j)(7)(ii) of this section, the possibility that the amount of distributions may decline from the previous year does not reduce the probability that total distributions under the contract will increase commensurately with G's longevity. Thus, the potential fluctuation in the annuity distributions does not cause the contract to fail to be described in section 1275(a)(1)(B)(i).

(8) Effective dates

(i) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (j)(8) (ii) and (iii) of this section, this paragraph (j) is applicable for interest accruals on or after February 9, 1998 on annuity contracts held on or after February 9, 1998.

(ii) Grandfathered contracts. This paragraph (j) does not apply to an annuity contract that was purchased before April 7, 1995. For purposes of this paragraph (j)(8), if any additional investment in such a contract is made on or after April 7, 1995, and the additional investment is not required to be made under a binding contractual obligation that was entered into before April 7, 1995, then the additional investment is treated as the purchase of a contract after April 7, 1995.

(iii) Contracts consistent with the provisions of FI-33-94, published at 1995-1 C.B. 920. See § 601.601(d)(2)(ii)(b) of this chapter. This paragraph (j) does not apply to a contract purchased on or after April 7, 1995, and before February 9, 1998, if all payments under the contract are periodic payments that are made at least annually for the life (or lives) of one or more individuals, do not increase at any time during the term of the contract, and are part of a series of distributions that begins within one year of the date of the initial investment in the contract. An annuity contract that is otherwise described in the preceding sentence does not fail to be described therein merely because it also provides for a payment (or payments) made by reason of the death of one or more individuals.

(k) Exception under section 1275(a)(1)(B)(ii) for annuities issued by an insurance company subject to tax under subchapter L of the Internal Revenue Code

(1) Rule. For purposes of section 1275(a)(1)(B)(ii), an annuity contract issued by a foreign insurance company is considered as issued by an insurance company subject to tax under subchapter L if the insurance company is subject to tax under subchapter L with respect to income earned on the annuity contract.

(2) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rule of paragraph (k)(1) of this section. Each example assumes that the annuity contract is a contract to which section 72 applies and was issued in a transaction where there is no consideration other than cash or another qualifying annuity contract, pursuant to the exercise of an election under an insurance contract by a beneficiary thereof on the death of the insured party, or in a transaction involving a qualified pension or employee benefit plan. The examples are as follows:

Example 1. Company X is an insurance company that is organized, licensed and doing business in Country Y. Company X does not have a U.S. trade or business and is not, under section 842, subject to U.S. income tax under subchapter L with respect to income earned on annuity contracts. A, a U.S. taxpayer, purchases an annuity contract from Company X in Country Y. The annuity contract is not excepted from the definition of a debt instrument by section 1275(a)(1)(B)(ii).

Example 2. The facts are the same as in Example 1, except that Company X has a U.S. trade or business. A purchased the annuity from Company X's U.S. trade or business. Under section 842(a), Company X is subject to tax under subchapter L with respect to income earned on the annuity contract. Under these facts, the annuity contract is excepted from the definition of a debt instrument by section 1275(a)(1)(B)(ii).

Example 3. The facts are the same as in Example 2, except that there is a tax treaty between Country Y and the United States. Company X is a resident of Country Y for purposes of the U.S.-Country Y tax treaty. Company X's activities in the U.S. do not constitute a permanent establishment under the U.S.-Country Y tax treaty. Because Company X does not have a U.S. permanent establishment, Company X is not subject to tax under subchapter L with respect to income earned on the annuity contract. Thus, the annuity contract is not excepted from the definition of a debt instrument by section 1275(a)(1)(B)(ii).

Example 4. The facts are the same as in Example 1, except that Company X is a foreign insurance corporation controlled by a U.S. shareholder. Company X does not make an election 1 under section 953(d) to be treated as a domestic corporation. The controlling U.S. shareholder is required under sections 953 and 954 to include income earned on the annuity contract in its taxable income under subpart F. However, Company X is not subject to tax under subchapter L with respect to income earned on the annuity contract. Thus, the annuity contract is not excepted from the definition of a debt instrument by section 1275(a)(1)(B)(ii).

Example 5. The facts are the same as in Example 4, except that Company X properly elects under section 953(d) to be treated as a domestic corporation. By reason of its election, Company X is subject to tax under subchapter L with respect to income earned on the annuity contract. Thus, the annuity contract is excepted from the definition of a debt instrument by section 1275(a)(1)(B)(ii).

(3) Effective date. This paragraph (k) is applicable for interest accruals on or after June 6, 2002. This paragraph (k) does not apply to an annuity contract that was purchased before January 12, 2001. For purposes of this paragraph (k), if any additional investment in a contract purchased before January 12, 2001, is made on or after January 12, 2001, and the additional investment is not required to be made under a binding written contractual obligation that was entered into before that date, then the additional investment is treated as the purchase of a contract after January 12, 2001.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4825, Feb. 2, 1994, as amended by T.D. 8746, 62 FR 68183, Dec. 31, 1997; T.D. 8754, 63 FR 1057, Jan. 8, 1998; T.D. 8934, 66 FR 2815, Jan. 12, 2001; T.D. 8993, 67 FR 30548, May 7, 2002; T.D. 9790, 81 FR 72984, Oct. 21, 2016: T.D. 9880, 84 FR 59302, Nov. 4, 2019]

§ 1.1275-2 Special rules relating to debt instruments.

(a) Payment ordering rule

(1) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, each payment under a debt instrument is treated first as a payment of OID to the extent of the OID that has accrued as of the date the payment is due and has not been allocated to prior payments, and second as a payment of principal. Thus, no portion of any payment is treated as prepaid interest.

(2) Exceptions. The rule in paragraph (a)(1) of this section does not apply to—

(i) A payment of qualified stated interest;

(ii) A payment of points deductible under section 461(g)(2), in the case of the issuer;

(iii) A pro rata prepayment described in paragraph (f)(2) of this section; or

(iv) A payment of additional interest or a similar charge provided with respect to amounts that are not paid when due.

(b) Debt instruments distributed by corporations with respect to stock

(1) Treatment of distribution. For purposes of determining the issue price of a debt instrument distributed by a corporation with respect to its stock, the instrument is treated as issued by the corporation for property. See section 1275(a)(4). Thus, under section 1273(b)(3), the issue price of a distributed debt instrument that is traded on an established market is its fair market value. The issue price of a distributed debt instrument that is not traded on an established market is determined under section 1274 or section 1273(b)(4).

(2) Issue date. The issue date of a debt instrument distributed by a corporation with respect to its stock is the date of the distribution.

(c) Aggregation of debt instruments

(1) General rule. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, debt instruments issued in connection with the same transaction or related transactions (determined based on all the facts and circumstances) are treated as a single debt instrument for purposes of sections 1271 through 1275 and the regulations thereunder. This rule ordinarily applies only to debt instruments of a single issuer that are issued to a single holder. The Commissioner may, however, aggregate debt instruments that are issued by more than one issuer or that are issued to more than one holder if the debt instruments are issued in an arrangement that is designed to avoid the aggregation rule (e.g., debt instruments issued by or to related parties or debt instruments originally issued to different holders with the understanding that the debt instruments will be transferred to a single holder).

(2) Exception if separate issue price established. Paragraph (c)(1) of this section does not apply to a debt instrument if—

(i) The debt instrument is part of an issue a substantial portion of which is traded on an established market within the meaning of § 1.1273-2(f); or

(ii) The debt instrument is part of an issue a substantial portion of which is issued for money (or for property traded on an established market within the meaning of § 1.1273-2(f)) to parties who are not related to the issuer or holder and who do not purchase other debt instruments of the same issuer in connection with the same transaction or related transactions.

(3) Special rule for debt instruments that provide for the issuance of additional debt instruments. If, under the terms of a debt instrument (the original debt instrument), the holder may receive one or more additional debt instruments of the issuer, the additional debt instrument or instruments are aggregated with the original debt instrument. Thus, the payments made pursuant to an additional debt instrument are treated as made on the original debt instrument, and the distribution by the issuer of the additional debt instrument is not considered to be a payment made on the original debt instrument. This paragraph (c)(3) applies regardless of whether the right to receive an additional debt instrument is fixed as of the issue date or is contingent upon subsequent events. See § 1.1272-1(c) for the treatment of certain rights to issue additional debt instruments in lieu of cash payments.

(4) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules set forth in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this section.

Example 1. Exception for debt instruments issued separately to other purchasers. On January 1, 1995, Corporation M issues two series of bonds, Series A and Series B. The two series are sold for cash and have different terms. Although some holders purchase bonds from both series, a substantial portion of the bonds is issued to different holders. H purchases bonds from both series. Under the exception in paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, the Series A and Series B bonds purchased by H are not aggregated.

Example 2. Tiered REMICs. Z forms a dual tier real estate mortgage investment conduit (REMIC). In the dual tier structure, Z forms REMIC A to acquire a pool of real estate mortgages and to issue a residual interest and several classes of regular interests. Contemporaneously, Z forms REMIC B to acquire as qualified mortgages all of the regular interests in REMIC A. REMIC B issues several classes of regular interests and a residual interest, and Z sells all of those interests to unrelated parties in a public offering. Under the general rule set out in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, all of the regular interests issued by REMIC A and held by REMIC B are treated as a single debt instrument for purposes of sections 1271 through 1275.

(d) Special rules for Treasury securities

(1) Issue price and issue date. The issue price of an issue of Treasury securities is the average price of the securities sold. The issue date of an issue of Treasury securities is the first settlement date on which a substantial amount of the securities in the issue is sold. For an issue of Treasury securities sold from November 1, 1998, to March 13, 2001, the issue price of the issue is the price of the securities sold at auction.

(2) Reopenings of Treasury securities

(i) Treatment of additional Treasury securities. Notwithstanding § 1.1275-1(f), additional Treasury securities issued in a qualified reopening are part of the same issue as the original Treasury securities. As a result, the additional Treasury securities have the same issue price, issue date, and (with respect to holders) the same adjusted issue price as the original Treasury securities. This paragraph (d)(2) applies to qualified reopenings that occur on or after March 25, 1992.

(ii) Definitions

(A) Additional Treasury securities. Additional Treasury securities are Treasury securities with terms that are in all respects identical to the terms of the original Treasury securities.

(B) Original Treasury securities. Original Treasury securities are securities comprising any issue of outstanding Treasury securities.

(C) Qualified reopening—reopenings on or after March 13, 2001. For a reopening of Treasury securities that occurs on or after March 13, 2001, a qualified reopening is a reopening that occurs not more than one year after the original Treasury securities were first issued to the public or, under paragraph (k)(3)(iii) of this section, a reopening in which the additional Treasury securities are issued with no more than a de minimis amount of OID. For a reopening of Treasury securities that occurs on or after September 13, 2012, a qualified reopening also is a reopening of Treasury securities that is described in paragraph (k)(3)(v) of this section.

(D) Qualified reopening—reopenings before March 13, 2001. For a reopening of Treasury securities that occurs before March 13, 2001, a qualified reopening is a reopening that occurs not more than one year after the original Treasury securities were first issued to the public. However, for a reopening of Treasury securities (other than Treasury Inflation-Indexed Securities) that occurred prior to November 5, 1999, a qualified reopening is a reopening of Treasury securities that satisfied the preceding sentence and that was intended to alleviate an acute, protracted shortage of the original Treasury securities.

(e) Disclosure of certain information to holders. Certain provisions of the regulations under section 163(e) and sections 1271 through 1275 provide that the issuer's determination of an item controls the holder's treatment of the item. In such a case, the issuer must provide the relevant information to the holder in a reasonable manner. For example, the issuer may provide the name or title and either the address or telephone number of a representative of the issuer who will make available to holders upon request the information required for holders to comply with these provisions of the regulations.

(f) Treatment of pro rata prepayments

(1) Treatment as retirement of separate debt instrument. A pro rata prepayment is treated as a payment in retirement of a portion of a debt instrument, which may result in a gain or loss to the holder. Generally, the gain or loss is calculated by assuming that the original debt instrument consists of two instruments, one that is retired and one that remains outstanding. The adjusted issue price, holder's adjusted basis, and accrued but unpaid OID of the original debt instrument, determined immediately before the pro rata prepayment, are allocated between these two instruments based on the portion of the instrument that is treated as retired by the pro rata prepayment.

(2) Definition of pro rata prepayment. For purposes of paragraph (f)(1) of this section, a pro rata prepayment is a payment on a debt instrument made prior to maturity that—

(i) Is not made pursuant to the instrument's payment schedule (including a payment schedule determined under § 1.1272-1(c)); and

(ii) Results in a substantially pro rata reduction of each payment remaining to be paid on the instrument.

(g) Anti-abuse rule

(1) In general. If a principal purpose in structuring a debt instrument or engaging in a transaction is to achieve a result that is unreasonable in light of the purposes of section 163(e), sections 1271 through 1275, or any related section of the Code, the Commissioner can apply or depart from the regulations under the applicable sections as necessary or appropriate to achieve a reasonable result. For example, if this paragraph (g) applies to a debt instrument that provides for a contingent payment, the Commissioner can treat the contingency as if it were a separate position. See also § 1.988-2(b)(18) for debt instruments with payments denominated in (or determined by reference to) a currency other than the taxpayer's functional currency.

(2) Unreasonable result. Whether a result is unreasonable is determined based on all the facts and circumstances. In making this determination, a significant fact is whether the treatment of the debt instrument is expected to have a substantial effect on the issuer's or a holder's U.S. tax liability. In the case of a contingent payment debt instrument, another significant fact is whether the result is obtainable without the application of § 1.1275-4 and any related provisions (e.g., if the debt instrument and the contingency were entered into separately). A result will not be considered unreasonable, however, in the absence of an expected substantial effect on the present value of a taxpayer's tax liability.

(3) Examples. The following examples illustrate the provisions of this paragraph (g):

Example 1. A issues a current-pay, increasing-rate note that provides for an early call option. Although the option is deemed exercised on the call date under § 1.1272-1(c)(5), the option is not expected to be exercised by A. In addition, a principal purpose of including the option in the terms of the note is to limit the amount of interest income includible by the holder in the period prior to the call date by virtue of the option rules in § 1.1272-1(c)(5). Moreover, the application of the option rules is expected to substantially reduce the present value of the holder's tax liability. Based on these facts, the application of § 1.1272-1(c)(5) produces an unreasonable result. Therefore, under this paragraph (g), the Commissioner can apply the regulations (in whole or in part) to the note without regard to § 1.1272-1(c)(5).

Example 2. C, a foreign corporation not subject to U.S. taxation, issues to a U.S. holder a debt instrument that provides for a contingent payment. The debt instrument is issued for cash and is subject to the noncontingent bond method in § 1.1275-4(b). Six months after issuance, C and the holder modify the debt instrument so that there is a deemed reissuance of the instrument under section 1001. The new debt instrument is subject to the rules of § 1.1275-4(c) rather than § 1.1275-4(b). The application of § 1.1275-4(c) is expected to substantially reduce the present value of the holder's tax liability as compared to the application of § 1.1275-4(b). In addition, a principal purpose of the modification is to substantially reduce the present value of the holder's tax liability through the application of § 1.1275-4(c). Based on these facts, the application of § 1.1275-4(c) produces an unreasonable result. Therefore, under this paragraph (g), the Commissioner can apply the noncontingent bond method to the modified debt instrument.

Example 3. D issues a convertible debt instrument rather than an economically equivalent investment unit consisting of a debt instrument and a warrant. The convertible debt instrument is issued at par and provides for annual payments of interest. D issues the convertible debt instrument rather than the investment unit so that the debt instrument would not have OID. See § 1.1273-2(j). In general, this is a reasonable result in light of the purposes of the applicable statutes. Therefore, the Commissioner generally will not use the authority under this paragraph (g) to depart from the application of § 1.1273-2(j) in this case.

(4) Effective date. This paragraph (g) applies to debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996.

(h) Remote and incidental contingencies

(1) In general. This paragraph (h) applies to a debt instrument if one or more payments on the instrument are subject to either a remote or incidental contingency. Whether a contingency is remote or incidental is determined as of the issue date of the debt instrument, including any date there is a deemed reissuance of the debt instrument under paragraph (h)(6) (ii) or (j) of this section or § 1.1272-1(c)(6). Except as otherwise provided, the treatment of the contingency under this paragraph (h) applies for all purposes of sections 163(e) (other than sections 163(e)(5)) and 1271 through 1275 and the regulations thereunder. For purposes of this paragraph (h), the possibility of impairment of a payment by insolvency, default, or similar circumstances is not a contingency.

(2) Remote contingencies. A contingency is remote if there is a remote likelihood either that the contingency will occur or that the contingency will not occur. If there is a remote likelihood that the contingency will occur, it is assumed that the contingency will not occur. If there is a remote likelihood that the contingency will not occur, it is assumed that the contingency will occur.

(3) Incidental contingencies

(i) Contingency relating to amount. A contingency relating to the amount of a payment is incidental if, under all reasonably expected market conditions, the potential amount of the payment is insignificant relative to the total expected amount of the remaining payments on the debt instrument. If a payment on a debt instrument is subject to an incidental contingency described in this paragraph (h)(3)(i), the payment is ignored until the payment is made. However, see paragraph (h)(6)(i)(B) of this section for the treatment of the debt instrument if a change in circumstances occurs prior to the date the payment is made.

(ii) Contingency relating to time. A contingency relating to the timing of a payment is incidental if, under all reasonably expected market conditions, the potential difference in the timing of the payment (from the earliest date to the latest date) is insignificant. If a payment on a debt instrument is subject to an incidental contingency described in this paragraph (h)(3)(ii), the payment is treated as made on the earliest date that the payment could be made pursuant to the contingency. If the payment is not made on this date, a taxpayer makes appropriate adjustments to take into account the delay in payment. However, see paragraph (h)(6)(i)(C) of this section for the treatment of the debt instrument if the delay is not insignificant.

(4) Aggregation rule. For purposes of paragraph (h)(2) of this section, if a debt instrument provides for multiple contingencies each of which has a remote likelihood of occurring but, when all of the contingencies are considered together, there is a greater than remote likelihood that at least one of the contingencies will occur, none of the contingencies is treated as a remote contingency. For purposes of paragraph (h)(3)(i) of this section, if a debt instrument provides for multiple contingencies each of which is incidental but the potential total amount of all of the payments subject to the contingencies is not, under reasonably expected market conditions, insignificant relative to the total expected amount of the remaining payments on the debt instrument, none of the contingencies is treated as incidental.

(5) Consistency rule. For purposes of paragraphs (h) (2) and (3) of this section, the issuer's determination that a contingency is either remote or incidental is binding on all holders. However, the issuer's determination is not binding on a holder that explicitly discloses that its determination is different from the issuer's determination. Unless otherwise prescribed by the Commissioner, the disclosure must be made on a statement attached to the holder's timely filed Federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the acquisition date of the debt instrument. See § 1.1275-2(e) for rules relating to the issuer's obligation to disclose certain information to holders.

(6) Subsequent adjustments

(i) Applicability. This paragraph (h)(6) applies to a debt instrument when there is a change in circumstances. For purposes of the preceding sentence, there is a change in circumstances if—

(A) A remote contingency actually occurs or does not occur, contrary to the assumption made in paragraph (h)(2) of this section;

(B) A payment subject to an incidental contingency described in paragraph (h)(3)(i) of this section becomes fixed in an amount that is not insignificant relative to the total expected amount of the remaining payments on the debt instrument; or

(C) A payment subject to an incidental contingency described in paragraph (h)(3)(ii) of this section becomes fixed such that the difference between the assumed payment date and the due date of the payment is not insignificant.

(ii) In general. If a change in circumstances occurs, solely for purposes of sections 1272 and 1273, the debt instrument is treated as retired and then reissued on the date of the change in circumstances for an amount equal to the instrument's adjusted issue price on that date.

(iii) Contingent payment debt instruments. Notwithstanding paragraph (h)(6)(ii) of this section, in the case of a contingent payment debt instrument subject to § 1.1275-4, if a change in circumstances occurs, no retirement or reissuance is treated as occurring, but any payment that is fixed as a result of the change in circumstances is governed by the rules in § 1.1275-4 that apply when the amount of a contingent payment becomes fixed.

(7) Effective date. This paragraph (h) applies to debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Treatment of certain modifications. If the terms of a debt instrument are modified to defer one or more payments, and the modification does not cause an exchange under section 1001, then, solely for purposes of sections 1272 and 1273, the debt instrument is treated as retired and then reissued on the date of the modification for an amount equal to the instrument's adjusted issue price on that date. This paragraph (j) applies to debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996.

(k) Reopenings

(1) In general. Notwithstanding § 1.1275-1(f), additional debt instruments issued in a qualified reopening are part of the same issue as the original debt instruments. As a result, the additional debt instruments have the same issue date, the same issue price, and (with respect to holders) the same adjusted issue price as the original debt instruments.

(2) Definitions

(i) Original debt instruments. Original debt instruments are debt instruments comprising any single issue of outstanding debt instruments. For purposes of determining whether a particular reopening is a qualified reopening, debt instruments issued in prior qualified reopenings are treated as original debt instruments and debt instruments issued in the particular reopening are not so treated.

(ii) Additional debt instruments. Additional debt instruments are debt instruments that, without the application of this paragraph (k)

(A) Are part of a single issue of debt instruments;

(B) Are not part of the same issue as the original debt instruments; and

(C) Have terms that are in all respects identical to the terms of the original debt instruments as of the reopening date.

(iii) Reopening date. The reopening date is the issue date of the additional debt instruments (determined without the application of this paragraph (k)).

(iv) Announcement date. The announcement date is the later of seven days before the date on which the price of the additional debt instruments is established or the date on which the issuer's intent to reopen a security is publicly announced through one or more media, including an announcement reported on the standard electronic news services used by security broker-dealers (for example, Reuters, Telerate, or Bloomberg).

(3) Qualified reopening

(i) Definition. A qualified reopening is a reopening of original debt instruments that is described in paragraph (k)(3)(ii), (k)(3)(iii), (k)(3)(iv), or (k)(3)(v) of this section. In addition, see paragraph (d)(2) of this section to determine if a reopening of Treasury securities is a qualified reopening.

(ii) Reopening within six months. A reopening is described in this paragraph (k)(3)(ii) if—

(A) The original debt instruments are publicly traded (within the meaning of § 1.1273-2(f)) as of the date on which the price of the additional debt instruments is established (or, if earlier, the announcement date);

(B) The reopening date of the additional debt instruments is not more than six months after the issue date of the original debt instruments; and

(C) On the date on which the price of the additional debt instruments is established (or, if earlier, the announcement date), the yield of the original debt instruments (based on their fair market value) is not more than 110 percent of the yield of the original debt instruments on their issue date (or, if the original debt instruments were issued with no more than a de minimis amount of OID, the coupon rate).

(iii) Reopening with de minimis OID. A reopening (including a reopening of Treasury securities) is described in this paragraph (k)(3)(iii) if—

(A) The original debt instruments are publicly traded (within the meaning of § 1.1273-2(f)) as of the date on which the price of the additional debt instruments is established (or, if earlier, the announcement date); and

(B) The additional debt instruments are issued with no more than a de minimis amount of OID (determined without the application of this paragraph (k)).

(iv) Non-publicly traded debt issued for cash. A reopening is described in this paragraph (k)(3)(iv) if the additional debt instruments are issued for cash to persons unrelated to the issuer (as determined under section 267(b) or 707(b)) for an arm's length price and either the requirements in paragraphs (k)(3)(ii)(B) and (k)(3)(ii)(C) of this section for a reopening within six months are satisfied or the requirements in paragraph (k)(3)(iii)(B) of this section for a reopening with de minimis OID are satisfied. For purposes of paragraph (k)(3)(ii)(C) of this section, the yield test is satisfied if, on the date on which the price of the additional debt instruments is established (or, if earlier, the announcement date), the yield of the additional debt instruments (based on their cash purchase price) is not more than 110 percent of the yield of the original debt instruments on their issue date (or, if the original debt instruments were issued with no more than a de minimis amount of OID, the coupon rate).

(v) 100 Percent yield test for reopening after six months. A reopening is described in this paragraph (k)(3)(v) if the additional debt instruments are issued more than six months after the issue date of the original debt instruments and either the requirements in paragraphs (k)(3)(ii)(A) and (k)(3)(ii)(C) of this section are satisfied or the additional debt instruments are issued for cash to persons unrelated to the issuer (as determined under section 267(b) or 707(b)) for an arm's length price and the requirements in paragraph (k)(3)(ii)(C) of this section are satisfied. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the yield test in paragraph (k)(3)(ii)(C) of this section is satisfied if, on the date on which the price of the additional debt instruments is established (or, if earlier, the announcement date), the yield of the additional debt instruments (based on their fair market value or cash purchase price, whichever is applicable) is not more than 100 percent of the yield of the original debt instruments on their issue date (or, if the original debt instruments were issued with no more than a de minimis amount of OID, the coupon rate).

(vi) Exceptions. This paragraph (k)(3) does not apply to a reopening of tax-exempt obligations (as defined in section 1275(a)(3)) or contingent payment debt instruments (within the meaning of § 1.1275-4).

(4) Issuer's treatment of a qualified reopening. See § 1.163-7(e) for the issuer's treatment of the debt instruments that are part of a qualified reopening.

(5) Effective/applicability dates

(i) Except as provided in paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section, this paragraph (k) applies to debt instruments that are part of a reopening if the reopening date is on or after March 13, 2001.

(ii) Paragraphs (k)(3)(ii)(A), (k)(3)(iii)(A), (k)(3)(iv) and (k)(3)(v) of this section apply to debt instruments that are part of a reopening if the reopening date is on or after September 13, 2012.

(l) OID rule for income item subject to section 451(b)

(1) In general. Notwithstanding any other rule in sections 1271 through 1275 and §§ 1.1271-1 through 1.1275-7, if, and to the extent, a taxpayer's item of income with respect to a debt instrument is subject to the timing rules in § 1.451-3 because the item of income is a specified fee described in § 1.451-3(j) (such as credit card late fees, credit card cash advance fees, or interchange fees), then the taxpayer does not take the item into account to determine whether the debt instrument has any OID. As a result, the taxpayer does not treat the item as creating or increasing any OID on the debt instrument.

(2) Applicability dates

(i) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (l)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this section, for a specified credit card fee as defined in § 1.451-3(j)(2), paragraph (l)(1) of this section applies for taxable years beginning on or after January 1, 2021, and, for a specified fee that is not a specified credit card fee, paragraph (l)(1) of this section applies for taxable years beginning on or after January 6, 2022.

(ii) Early application. For a taxable year beginning after December 31, 2018, and before January 1, 2021, a taxpayer and its related parties, within the meaning of sections 267(b) and 707(b), may choose to apply both paragraph (l)(1) of this section and the rules in § 1.451-3, in their entirety and in a consistent manner, to all specified credit card fees subject to § 1.451-3, provided that once applied to a taxable year the rules in paragraph (l)(1) of this section and the rules in § 1.451-3 that apply to specified credit card fees, are applied in their entirety and in a consistent manner for all subsequent taxable years. See section 7508(b)(7).

(iii) Applicability date for accounting method changes. Paragraph (l)(1) of this section will not apply in applying section 13221(e) of Public Law 115-97, 131 Stat. 2054 (2017), to determine the section 481(a) adjustment period for any adjustment under section 481(a) for a qualified change in method of accounting required under section 451(b) and § 1.451-3 for a specified credit card fee.

(m) Transition from certain interbank offered rates

(1) In general. This paragraph (m) applies to a variable rate debt instrument (as defined in § 1.1275-5(a)) that provides both for a qualified floating rate that references a discontinued IBOR and for a methodology to change that rate referencing a discontinued IBOR to a different rate in anticipation of the discontinued IBOR becoming unavailable or unreliable. For purposes of this paragraph (m), discontinued IBOR has the meaning provided in § 1.1001-6(h)(4). See § 1.1001-6 for additional rules that may apply to a debt instrument that provides for a rate referencing a discontinued IBOR.

(2) Single qualified floating rate. If a debt instrument is described in paragraph (m)(1) of this section, the rate referencing a discontinued IBOR and the different rate are treated as a single qualified floating rate for purposes of § 1.1275-5.

(3) Remote contingency. If a debt instrument is described in paragraph (m)(1) of this section, the possibility that the discontinued IBOR will become unavailable or unreliable is treated as a remote contingency for purposes of paragraph (h) of this section.

(4) Change in circumstances. If a debt instrument is described in paragraph (m)(1) of this section, the fact that the discontinued IBOR has become unavailable or unreliable is not treated as a change in circumstances for purposes of paragraph (h)(6) of this section.

(5) Applicability date. Paragraph (m) of this section applies to debt instruments issued on or after March 7, 2022. A taxpayer may choose to apply paragraph (m) of this section to debt instruments issued before March 7, 2022, provided that the taxpayer and all related parties (within the meaning of section 267(b) or section 707(b)(1) or within the meaning of § 1.150-1(b) for a taxpayer that is a State or local governmental unit (as defined in § 1.103-1(a)) or a 501(c)(3) organization (as defined in section 150(a)(4))) apply paragraph (m) of this section to all debt instruments issued before that date. See section 7805(b)(7).

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4826, Feb. 2, 1994, as amended by T.D. 8674, 61 FR 30142, June 14, 1996; T.D. 8840, 64 FR 60343, Nov. 5, 1999; T.D. 8934, 66 FR 2816, Jan. 12, 2001; T.D. 9157, 69 FR 52829, Aug. 30, 2004; T.D. 9599, 77 FR 56538, Sept. 13, 2012; T.D. 9941, 86 FR 862, Jan. 6, 2021; 86 FR 1256, Jan. 8, 2021; 86 FR 2974, Jan. 14, 2021; T.D. 9961, 87 FR 182, Jan. 4, 2022]

§ 1.1275-3 OID information reporting requirements.

(a) In general. This section provides legending and information reporting requirements intended to facilitate the reporting of OID.

(b) Information required to be set forth on face of debt instruments that are not publicly offered

(1) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4) or paragraph (d) of this section, this paragraph (b) applies to any debt instrument that is not publicly offered (within the meaning of § 1.1275-1(h)), is issued in physical form, and has OID. The issuer of any such debt instrument must legend the instrument by stating on the face of the instrument that the debt instrument was issued with OID. In addition, the issuer must either—

(i) Set forth on the face of the debt instrument the issue price, the amount of OID, the issue date, the yield to maturity, and, in the case of a debt instrument subject to the rules of § 1.1275-4(b), the comparable yield and projected payment schedule; or

(ii) Provide the name or title and either the address or telephone number of a representative of the issuer who will, beginning no later than 10 days after the issue date, promptly make available to holders upon request the information described in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section.

(2) Time for legending. An issuer may satisfy the requirements of this paragraph (b) by legending the debt instrument when it is first issued in physical form. Legending is not required, however, before the first holder of the debt instrument disposes of the instrument.

(3) Legend must survive reissuance upon transfer. Any new physical security that is issued (for example, upon registration of transfer of ownership) must contain any required legend.

(4) Exceptions. Paragraph (b)(1) of this section does not apply to debt instruments described in section 1272(a)(2) (relating to debt instruments not subject to the periodic OID inclusion rules), debt instruments issued by natural persons (as defined in § 1.6049-4(f)(2)), REMIC regular interests or other debt instruments subject to section 1272(a)(6), or stripped bonds and coupons within the meaning of section 1286.

(c) Information required to be reported to Secretary upon issuance of publicly offered debt instruments

(1) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(3) or paragraph (d) of this section, the information reporting requirements of this paragraph (c) apply to any debt instrument that is publicly offered and has original issue discount. The issuer of any such debt instrument must make an information return on the form prescribed by the Commissioner (Form 8281, as of September 2, 1992). The prescribed form must be filed with the Internal Revenue Service in the manner specified on the form. The taxpayer must use the prescribed form even if other information returns are filed using other methods (e.g., electronic media), unless the Commissioner announces otherwise in a revenue procedure.

(2) Time for filing information return. The prescribed form must be filed for each issue of publicly offered debt instruments within 30 days after the issue date of the issue.

(3) Exceptions. The rules of paragraph (c)(1) of this section do not apply to debt instruments described in section 1272(a)(2), debt instruments issued by natural persons (as defined in § 1.6049-4(f)(2)), certificates of deposit, REMIC regular interests or other debt instruments subject to section 1272(a)(6), or (unless otherwise required by the Commissioner pursuant to a revenue ruling or revenue procedure) stripped bonds and coupons (within the meaning of section 1286).

(4) Subsequent registration. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(3) or (d) of this section, the information reporting requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section apply to any debt instrument that has original issue discount if the instrument is part of an issue the offering of which is registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) after the issue date of the debt instrument. For example, this paragraph (c)(4) applies to a newly issued debt instrument (B bond) exchanged for an otherwise identical non-SEC-registered debt instrument (A bond) if the B bond is part of an issue the offering of which is registered with the SEC and the B bond has an issue date that is the same as the issue date of the A bond for federal tax purposes because the exchange is not a realization event under § 1.1001-3. If a debt instrument is subject to this paragraph (c)(4), the prescribed form (Form 8281 or any successor) must be filed with the Internal Revenue Service within 30 days after the date the offering is registered with the SEC. This paragraph (c)(4) applies to a debt instrument that is part of an issue the offering of which is registered with the SEC on or after January 1, 2014.

(d) Application to foreign issuers and U.S. issuers of foreign-targeted debt instruments. A foreign or domestic issuer is subject to the rules of this section with respect to an issue of debt instruments unless the issue is not offered for sale or resale in the United States in connection with its original issuance.

(e) Penalties. See section 6706 for rules relating to the penalty imposed for failure to meet the information reporting requirements imposed by this section.

(f) Effective date. Paragraphs (c), (d), and (e) of this section are effective for an issue of debt instruments issued after September 2, 1992.

[T.D. 8431, 57 FR 40322, Sept. 3, 1992; 57 FR 46243, Oct. 7, 1992, as amended by T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4827, Feb. 2, 1994; T.D. 8674, 61 FR 30143, June 14, 1996; T.D. 9616, 78 FR 23126, Apr. 18, 2013]

§ 1.1275-4 Contingent payment debt instruments.

(a) Applicability

(1) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, this section applies to any debt instrument that provides for one or more contingent payments. In general, paragraph (b) of this section applies to a contingent payment debt instrument that is issued for money or publicly traded property and paragraph (c) of this section applies to a contingent payment debt instrument that is issued for nonpublicly traded property. Paragraph (d) of this section provides special rules for tax-exempt obligations. See § 1.1275-6 for a taxpayer's treatment of a contingent payment debt instrument and a hedge.

(2) Exceptions. This section does not apply to—

(i) A debt instrument that has an issue price determined under section 1273(b)(4) (e.g., a debt instrument subject to section 483);

(ii) A variable rate debt instrument (as defined in § 1.1275-5);

(iii) A debt instrument subject to § 1.1272-1(c) (a debt instrument that provides for certain contingencies) or § 1.1272-1(d) (a debt instrument that provides for a fixed yield);

(iv) A debt instrument subject to section 988 (except as provided in § 1.988-6);

(v) A debt instrument to which section 1272(a)(6) applies (certain interests in or mortgages held by a REMIC, and certain other debt instruments with payments subject to acceleration);

(vi) A debt instrument (other than a tax-exempt obligation) described in section 1272(a)(2) (e.g., U.S. savings bonds, certain loans between natural persons, and short-term taxable obligations);

(vii) An inflation-indexed debt instrument (as defined in § 1.1275-7); or

(viii) A debt instrument issued pursuant to a plan or arrangement if—

(A) The plan or arrangement is created by a state statute;

(B) A primary objective of the plan or arrangement is to enable the participants to pay for the costs of post-secondary education for themselves or their designated beneficiaries; and

(C) Contingent payments on the debt instrument are related to such objective.

(3) Insolvency and default. A payment is not contingent merely because of the possibility of impairment by insolvency, default, or similar circumstances.

(4) Convertible debt instruments. A debt instrument does not provide for contingent payments merely because it provides for an option to convert the debt instrument into the stock of the issuer, into the stock or debt of a related party (within the meaning of section 267(b) or 707(b)(1)), or into cash or other property in an amount equal to the approximate value of such stock or debt. For debt instruments issued on or after February 5, 2013, the term stock in the preceding sentence means an equity interest in any entity that is classified, for Federal tax purposes, as either a partnership or a corporation.

(5) Remote and incidental contingencies. A payment is not a contingent payment merely because of a contingency that, as of the issue date, is either remote or incidental. See § 1.1275-2(h) for the treatment of remote and incidental contingencies.

(b) Noncontingent bond method

(1) Applicability. The noncontingent bond method described in this paragraph (b) applies to a contingent payment debt instrument that has an issue price determined under § 1.1273-2 (e.g., a contingent payment debt instrument that is issued for money or publicly traded property).

(2) In general. Under the noncontingent bond method, interest on a debt instrument must be taken into account whether or not the amount of any payment is fixed or determinable in the taxable year. The amount of interest that is taken into account for each accrual period is determined by constructing a projected payment schedule for the debt instrument and applying rules similar to those for accruing OID on a noncontingent debt instrument. If the actual amount of a contingent payment is not equal to the projected amount, appropriate adjustments are made to reflect the difference.

(3) Description of method. The following steps describe how to compute the amount of income, deductions, gain, and loss under the noncontingent bond method:

(i) Step one: Determine the comparable yield. Determine the comparable yield for the debt instrument under the rules of paragraph (b)(4) of this section. The comparable yield is determined as of the debt instrument's issue date.

(ii) Step two: Determine the projected payment schedule. Determine the projected payment schedule for the debt instrument under the rules of paragraph (b)(4) of this section. The projected payment schedule is determined as of the issue date and remains fixed throughout the term of the debt instrument (except under paragraph (b)(9)(ii) of this section, which applies to a payment that is fixed more than 6 months before it is due).

(iii) Step three: Determine the daily portions of interest. Determine the daily portions of interest on the debt instrument for a taxable year as follows. The amount of interest that accrues in each accrual period is the product of the comparable yield of the debt instrument (properly adjusted for the length of the accrual period) and the debt instrument's adjusted issue price at the beginning of the accrual period. See paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section to determine the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument. The daily portions of interest are determined by allocating to each day in the accrual period the ratable portion of the interest that accrues in the accrual period. Except as modified by paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section, the daily portions of interest are includible in income by a holder for each day in the holder's taxable year on which the holder held the debt instrument and are deductible by the issuer for each day during the issuer's taxable year on which the issuer was primarily liable on the debt instrument.

(iv) Step four: Adjust the amount of income or deductions for differences between projected and actual contingent payments. Make appropriate adjustments to the amount of income or deductions attributable to the debt instrument in a taxable year for any differences between projected and actual contingent payments. See paragraph (b)(6) of this section to determine the amount of an adjustment and the treatment of the adjustment.

(4) Comparable yield and projected payment schedule. This paragraph (b)(4) provides rules for determining the comparable yield and projected payment schedule for a debt instrument. The comparable yield and projected payment schedule must be supported by contemporaneous documentation showing that both are reasonable, are based on reliable, complete, and accurate data, and are made in good faith.

(i) Comparable yield

(A) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4)(i)(B) of this section, the comparable yield for a debt instrument is the yield at which the issuer would issue a fixed rate debt instrument with terms and conditions similar to those of the contingent payment debt instrument (the comparable fixed rate debt instrument), including the level of subordination, term, timing of payments, and general market conditions. For example, if a § 1.1275-6 hedge (or the substantial equivalent) is available, the comparable yield is the yield on the synthetic fixed rate debt instrument that would result if the issuer entered into the § 1.1275-6 hedge. If a § 1.1275-6 hedge (or the substantial equivalent) is not available, but similar fixed rate debt instruments of the issuer trade at a price that reflects a spread above a benchmark rate, the comparable yield is the sum of the value of the benchmark rate on the issue date and the spread. In determining the comparable yield, no adjustments are made for the riskiness of the contingencies or the liquidity of the debt instrument. The comparable yield must be a reasonable yield for the issuer and must not be less than the applicable Federal rate (based on the overall maturity of the debt instrument).

(B) Presumption for certain debt instruments. This paragraph (b)(4)(i)(B) applies to a debt instrument if the instrument provides for one or more contingent payments not based on market information and the instrument is part of an issue that is marketed or sold in substantial part to persons for whom the inclusion of interest under this paragraph (b) is not expected to have a substantial effect on their U.S. tax liability. If this paragraph (b)(4)(i)(B) applies to a debt instrument, the instrument's comparable yield is presumed to be the applicable Federal rate (based on the overall maturity of the debt instrument). A taxpayer may overcome this presumption only with clear and convincing evidence that the comparable yield for the debt instrument should be a specific yield (determined using the principles in paragraph (b)(4)(i)(A) of this section) that is higher than the applicable Federal rate. The presumption may not be overcome with appraisals or other valuations of nonpublicly traded property. Evidence used to overcome the presumption must be specific to the issuer and must not be based on comparable issuers or general market conditions.

(ii) Projected payment schedule. The projected payment schedule for a debt instrument includes each noncontingent payment and an amount for each contingent payment determined as follows:

(A) Market-based payments. If a contingent payment is based on market information (a market-based payment), the amount of the projected payment is the forward price of the contingent payment. The forward price of a contingent payment is the amount one party would agree, as of the issue date, to pay an unrelated party for the right to the contingent payment on the settlement date (e.g., the date the contingent payment is made). For example, if the right to a contingent payment is substantially similar to an exchange-traded option, the forward price is the spot price of the option (the option premium) compounded at the applicable Federal rate from the issue date to the date the contingent payment is due.

(B) Other payments. If a contingent payment is not based on market information (a non-market-based payment), the amount of the projected payment is the expected value of the contingent payment as of the issue date.

(C) Adjustments to the projected payment schedule. The projected payment schedule must produce the comparable yield. If the projected payment schedule does not produce the comparable yield, the schedule must be adjusted consistent with the principles of this paragraph (b)(4) to produce the comparable yield. For example, the adjusted amounts of non-market-based payments must reasonably reflect the relative expected values of the payments and must not be set to accelerate or defer income or deductions. If the debt instrument contains both market-based and non-market-based payments, adjustments are generally made first to the non-market-based payments because more objective information is available for the market-based payments.

(iii) Market information. For purposes of this paragraph (b), market information is any information on which an objective rate can be based under § 1.1275-5(c) (1) or (2).

(iv) Issuer/holder consistency. The issuer's projected payment schedule is used to determine the holder's interest accruals and adjustments. The issuer must provide the projected payment schedule to the holder in a manner consistent with the issuer disclosure rules of § 1.1275-2(e). If the issuer does not create a projected payment schedule for a debt instrument or the issuer's projected payment schedule is unreasonable, the holder of the debt instrument must determine the comparable yield and projected payment schedule for the debt instrument under the rules of this paragraph (b)(4). A holder that determines its own projected payment schedule must explicitly disclose this fact and the reason why the holder set its own schedule (e.g., why the issuer's projected payment schedule is unreasonable). Unless otherwise prescribed by the Commissioner, the disclosure must be made on a statement attached to the holder's timely filed Federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the acquisition date of the debt instrument.

(v) Issuer's determination respected

(A) In general. If the issuer maintains the contemporaneous documentation required by this paragraph (b)(4), the issuer's determination of the comparable yield and projected payment schedule will be respected unless either is unreasonable.

(B) Unreasonable determination. For purposes of paragraph (b)(4)(v)(A) of this section, a comparable yield or projected payment schedule generally will be considered unreasonable if it is set with a purpose to overstate, understate, accelerate, or defer interest accruals on the debt instrument. In a determination of whether a comparable yield or projected payment schedule is unreasonable, consideration will be given to whether the treatment of the debt instrument under this section is expected to have a substantial effect on the issuer's or holder's U.S. tax liability. For example, if a taxable issuer markets a debt instrument to a holder not subject to U.S. taxation, the comparable yield will be given close scrutiny and will not be respected unless contemporaneous documentation shows that the yield is not too high.

(C) Exception. Paragraph (b)(4)(v)(A) of this section does not apply to a debt instrument subject to paragraph (b)(4)(i)(B) of this section (concerning a yield presumption for certain debt instruments that provide for non-market-based payments).

(vi) Examples. The following examples illustrate the provisions of this paragraph (b)(4). In each example, assume that the instrument described is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes. No inference is intended, however, as to whether the instrument is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes.

Example 1. Market-based payment.

(i) Facts. On December 31, 1996, X corporation issues for $1,000,000 a debt instrument that matures on December 31, 2006. The debt instrument provides for annual payments of interest, beginning in 1997, at the rate of 6 percent and for a payment at maturity equal to $1,000,000 plus the excess, if any, of the price of 10,000 shares of publicly traded stock in an unrelated corporation on the maturity date over $350,000, or less the excess, if any, of $350,000 over the price of 10,000 shares of the stock on the maturity date. On the issue date, the forward price to purchase 10,000 shares of the stock on December 31, 2006, is $350,000.

(ii) Comparable yield. Under paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section, the debt instrument's comparable yield is the yield on the synthetic debt instrument that would result if X corporation entered into a § 1.1275-6 hedge. A § 1.1275-6 hedge in this case is a forward contract to purchase 10,000 shares of the stock on December 31, 2006. If X corporation entered into this hedge, the resulting synthetic debt instrument would yield 6 percent, compounded annually. Thus, the comparable yield on the debt instrument is 6 percent, compounded annually.

(iii) Projected payment schedule. Under paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section, the projected payment schedule for the debt instrument consists of 10 annual payments of $60,000 and a projected amount for the contingent payment at maturity. Because the right to the contingent payment is based on market information, the projected amount of the contingent payment is the forward price of the payment. The right to the contingent payment is substantially similar to a right to a payment of $1,000,000 combined with a cash-settled forward contract for the purchase of 10,000 shares of the stock for $350,000 on December 31, 2006. Because the forward price to purchase 10,000 shares of the stock on December 31, 2006, is $350,000, the amount to be received or paid under the forward contract is projected to be zero. As a result, the projected amount of the contingent payment at maturity is $1,000,000, consisting of the $1,000,000 base amount and no additional amount to be received or paid under the forward contract.

(A) Assume, alternatively, that on the issue date the forward price to purchase 10,000 shares of the stock on December 31, 2006, is $370,000. If X corporation entered into a § 1.1275-6 hedge (a forward contract to purchase the shares for $370,000), the resulting synthetic debt instrument would yield 6.15 percent, compounded annually. Thus, the comparable yield on the debt instrument is 6.15 percent, compounded annually. The projected payment schedule for the debt instrument consists of 10 annual payments of $60,000 and a projected amount for the contingent payment at maturity. The projected amount of the contingent payment is $1,020,000, consisting of the $1,000,000 base amount plus the excess $20,000 of the forward price of the stock over the purchase price of the stock under the forward contract.

(B) Assume, alternatively, that on the issue date the forward price to purchase 10,000 shares of the stock on December 31, 2006, is $330,000. If X corporation entered into a § 1.1275-6 hedge, the resulting synthetic debt instrument would yield 5.85 percent, compounded annually. Thus, the comparable yield on the debt instrument is 5.85 percent, compounded annually. The projected payment schedule for the debt instrument consists of 10 annual payments of $60,000 and a projected amount for the contingent payment at maturity. The projected amount of the contingent payment is $980,000, consisting of the $1,000,000 base amount minus the excess $20,000 of the purchase price of the stock under the forward contract over the forward price of the stock.

Example 2. Non-market-based payments.

(i) Facts. On December 31, 1996, Y issues to Z for $1,000,000 a debt instrument that matures on December 31, 2000. The debt instrument has a stated principal amount of $1,000,000, payable at maturity, and provides for payments on December 31 of each year, beginning in 1997, of $20,000 plus 1 percent of Y's gross receipts, if any, for the year. On the issue date, Y has outstanding fixed rate debt instruments with maturities of 2 to 10 years that trade at a price that reflects an average of 100 basis points over Treasury bonds. These debt instruments have terms and conditions similar to those of the debt instrument. Assume that on December 31, 1996, 4-year Treasury bonds have a yield of 6.5 percent, compounded annually, and that no § 1.1275-6 hedge is available for the debt instrument. In addition, assume that the interest inclusions attributable to the debt instrument are expected to have a substantial effect on Z's U.S. tax liability.

(ii) Comparable yield. The comparable yield for the debt instrument is equal to the value of the benchmark rate (i.e., the yield on 4-year Treasury bonds) on the issue date plus the spread. Thus, the debt instrument's comparable yield is 7.5 percent, compounded annually.

(iii) Projected payment schedule. Y anticipates that it will have no gross receipts in 1997, but that it will have gross receipts in later years, and those gross receipts will grow each year for the next three years. Based on its business projections, Y believes that it is not unreasonable to expect that its gross receipts in 1999 and each year thereafter will grow by between 6 percent and 13 percent over the prior year. Thus, Y must take these expectations into account in establishing a projected payment schedule for the debt instrument that results in a yield of 7.5 percent, compounded annually. Accordingly, Y could reasonably set the following projected payment schedule for the debt instrument:

Date Noncontingent payment Contingent payment
12/31/1997 $20,000 $0
12/31/1998 20,000 70,000
12/31/1999 20,000 75,600
12/31/2000 1,020,000 83,850

(5) Qualified stated interest. No amounts payable on a debt instrument to which this paragraph (b) applies are qualified stated interest within the meaning of § 1.1273-1(c).

(6) Adjustments. This paragraph (b)(6) provides rules for the treatment of positive and negative adjustments under the noncontingent bond method. A taxpayer takes into account only those adjustments that occur during a taxable year while the debt instrument is held by the taxpayer or while the taxpayer is primarily liable on the debt instrument.

(i) Determination of positive and negative adjustments. If the amount of a contingent payment is more than the projected amount of the contingent payment, the difference is a positive adjustment on the date of the payment. If the amount of a contingent payment is less than the projected amount of the contingent payment, the difference is a negative adjustment on the date of the payment (or on the scheduled date of the payment if the amount of the payment is zero).

(ii) Treatment of net positive adjustments. The amount, if any, by which total positive adjustments on a debt instrument in a taxable year exceed the total negative adjustments on the debt instrument in the taxable year is a net positive adjustment. A net positive adjustment is treated as additional interest for the taxable year.

(iii) Treatment of net negative adjustments. The amount, if any, by which total negative adjustments on a debt instrument in a taxable year exceed the total positive adjustments on the debt instrument in the taxable year is a net negative adjustment. A taxpayer's net negative adjustment on a debt instrument for a taxable year is treated as follows:

(A) Reduction of interest accruals. A net negative adjustment first reduces interest for the taxable year that the taxpayer would otherwise account for on the debt instrument under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section.

(B) Ordinary income or loss. If the net negative adjustment exceeds the interest for the taxable year that the taxpayer would otherwise account for on the debt instrument under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section, the excess is treated as ordinary loss by a holder and ordinary income by an issuer. However, the amount treated as ordinary loss by a holder is limited to the amount by which the holder's total interest inclusions on the debt instrument exceed the total amount of the holder's net negative adjustments treated as ordinary loss on the debt instrument in prior taxable years. The amount treated as ordinary income by an issuer is limited to the amount by which the issuer's total interest deductions on the debt instrument exceed the total amount of the issuer's net negative adjustments treated as ordinary income on the debt instrument in prior taxable years.

(C) Carryforward. If the net negative adjustment exceeds the sum of the amounts treated by the taxpayer as a reduction of interest and as ordinary income or loss (as the case may be) on the debt instrument for the taxable year, the excess is a negative adjustment carryforward for the taxable year. In general, a taxpayer treats a negative adjustment carryforward for a taxable year as a negative adjustment on the debt instrument on the first day of the succeeding taxable year. However, if a holder of a debt instrument has a negative adjustment carryforward on the debt instrument in a taxable year in which the debt instrument is sold, exchanged, or retired, the negative adjustment carryforward reduces the holder's amount realized on the sale, exchange, or retirement. If an issuer of a debt instrument has a negative adjustment carryforward on the debt instrument for a taxable year in which the debt instrument is retired, the issuer takes the negative adjustment carryforward into account as ordinary income.

(D) Treatment under section 67. A net negative adjustment is not subject to section 67 (the 2-percent floor on miscellaneous itemized deductions).

(iv) Cross-references. If a holder has a basis in a debt instrument that is different from the debt instrument's adjusted issue price, the holder may have additional positive or negative adjustments under paragraph (b)(9)(i) of this section. If the amount of a contingent payment is fixed more than 6 months before the date it is due, the amount and timing of the adjustment are determined under paragraph (b)(9)(ii) of this section.

(7) Adjusted issue price, adjusted basis, and retirement

(i) In general. If a debt instrument is subject to the noncontingent bond method, this paragraph (b)(7) provides rules to determine the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument, the holder's basis in the debt instrument, and the treatment of any scheduled or unscheduled retirements. In general, because any difference between the actual amount of a contingent payment and the projected amount of the payment is taken into account as an adjustment to income or deduction, the projected payments are treated as the actual payments for purposes of making adjustments to issue price and basis and determining the amount of any contingent payment made on a scheduled retirement.

(ii) Definition of adjusted issue price. The adjusted issue price of a debt instrument is equal to the debt instrument's issue price, increased by the interest previously accrued on the debt instrument under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section (determined without regard to any adjustments taken into account under paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section), and decreased by the amount of any noncontingent payment and the projected amount of any contingent payment previously made on the debt instrument. See paragraph (b)(9)(ii) of this section for special rules that apply when a contingent payment is fixed more than 6 months before it is due.

(iii) Adjustments to basis. A holder's basis in a debt instrument is increased by the interest previously accrued by the holder on the debt instrument under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section (determined without regard to any adjustments taken into account under paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section), and decreased by the amount of any noncontingent payment and the projected amount of any contingent payment previously made on the debt instrument to the holder. See paragraph (b)(9)(i) of this section for special rules that apply when basis is different from adjusted issue price and paragraph (b)(9)(ii) of this section for special rules that apply when a contingent payment is fixed more than 6 months before it is due.

(iv) Scheduled retirements. For purposes of determining the amount realized by a holder and the repurchase price paid by the issuer on the scheduled retirement of a debt instrument, a holder is treated as receiving, and the issuer is treated as paying, the projected amount of any contingent payment due at maturity. If the amount paid or received is different from the projected amount, see paragraph (b)(6) of this section for the treatment of the difference by the taxpayer. Under paragraph (b)(6)(iii)(C) of this section, the amount realized by a holder on the retirement of a debt instrument is reduced by any negative adjustment carryforward determined in the taxable year of the retirement.

(v) Unscheduled retirements. An unscheduled retirement of a debt instrument (or the receipt of a pro-rata prepayment that is treated as a retirement of a portion of a debt instrument under § 1.1275-2(f)) is treated as a repurchase of the debt instrument (or a pro-rata portion of the debt instrument) by the issuer from the holder for the amount paid by the issuer to the holder.

(vi) Examples. The following examples illustrate the provisions of paragraphs (b) (6) and (7) of this section. In each example, assume that the instrument described is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes. No inference is intended, however, as to whether the instrument is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes.

Example 1. Treatment of positive and negative adjustments.

(i) Facts. On December 31, 1996, Z, a calendar year taxpayer, purchases a debt instrument subject to this paragraph (b) at original issue for $1,000. The debt instrument's comparable yield is 10 percent, compounded annually, and the projected payment schedule provides for payments of $500 on December 31, 1997 (consisting of a noncontingent payment of $375 and a projected amount of $125) and $660 on December 31, 1998 (consisting of a noncontingent payment of $600 and a projected amount of $60). The debt instrument is a capital asset in the hands of Z.

(ii) Adjustment in 1997. Based on the projected payment schedule, Z's total daily portions of interest on the debt instrument are $100 for 1997 (issue price of $1,000 × 10 percent). Assume that the payment actually made on December 31, 1997, is $375, rather than the projected $500. Under paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section, Z has a negative adjustment of $125 on December 31, 1997, attributable to the difference between the amount of the actual payment and the amount of the projected payment. Because Z has no positive adjustments for 1997, Z has a net negative adjustment of $125 on the debt instrument for 1997. This net negative adjustment reduces to zero the $100 total daily portions of interest Z would otherwise include in income in 1997. Accordingly, Z has no interest income on the debt instrument for 1997. Because Z had no interest inclusions on the debt instrument for prior taxable years, the remaining $25 of the net negative adjustment is a negative adjustment carryforward for 1997 that results in a negative adjustment of $25 on January 1, 1998.

(iii) Adjustment to issue price and basis. Z's total daily portions of interest on the debt instrument are $100 for 1997. The adjusted issue price of the debt instrument and Z's adjusted basis in the debt instrument are increased by this amount, despite the fact that Z does not include this amount in income because of the net negative adjustment for 1997. In addition, the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument and Z's adjusted basis in the debt instrument are decreased on December 31, 1997, by the projected amount of the payment on that date ($500). Thus, on January 1, 1998, Z's adjusted basis in the debt instrument and the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument are $600.

(iv) Adjustments in 1998. Based on the projected payment schedule, Z's total daily portions of interest are $60 for 1998 (adjusted issue price of $600 × 10 percent). Assume that the payment actually made on December 31, 1998, is $700, rather than the projected $660. Under paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section, Z has a positive adjustment of $40 on December 31, 1998, attributable to the difference between the amount of the actual payment and the amount of the projected payment. Because Z also has a negative adjustment of $25 on January 1, 1998, Z has a net positive adjustment of $15 on the debt instrument for 1998 (the excess of the $40 positive adjustment over the $25 negative adjustment). As a result, Z has $75 of interest income on the debt instrument for 1998 (the $15 net positive adjustment plus the $60 total daily portions of interest that are taken into account by Z in that year).

(v) Retirement. Based on the projected payment schedule, Z's adjusted basis in the debt instrument immediately before the payment at maturity is $660 ($600 plus $60 total daily portions of interest for 1998). Even though Z receives $700 at maturity, for purposes of determining the amount realized by Z on retirement of the debt instrument, Z is treated as receiving the projected amount of the contingent payment on December 31, 1998. Therefore, Z is treated as receiving $660 on December 31, 1998. Because Z's adjusted basis in the debt instrument immediately before its retirement is $660, Z recognizes no gain or loss on the retirement.

Example 2. Negative adjustment carryforward for year of sale.

(i) Facts. Assume the same facts as in Example 1 of this paragraph (b)(7)(vi), except that Z sells the debt instrument on January 1, 1998, for $630.

(ii) Gain on sale. On the date the debt instrument is sold, Z's adjusted basis in the debt instrument is $600. Because Z has a negative adjustment of $25 on the debt instrument on January 1, 1998, and has no positive adjustments on the debt instrument in 1998, Z has a net negative adjustment for 1998 of $25. Because Z has not included in income any interest on the debt instrument, the entire $25 net negative adjustment is a negative adjustment carryforward for the taxable year of the sale. Under paragraph (b)(6)(iii)(C) of this section, the $25 negative adjustment carryforward reduces the amount realized by Z on the sale of the debt instrument from $630 to $605. Thus, Z has a gain on the sale of $5 ($605−$600). Under paragraph (b)(8)(i) of this section, the gain is treated as interest income.

Example 3. Negative adjustment carryforward for year of retirement.

(i) Facts. Assume the same facts as in Example 1 of this paragraph (b)(7)(vi), except that the payment actually made on December 31, 1998, is $615, rather than the projected $660.

(ii) Adjustments in 1998. Under paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section, Z has a negative adjustment of $45 on December 31, 1998, attributable to the difference between the amount of the actual payment and the amount of the projected payment. In addition, Z has a negative adjustment of $25 on January 1, 1998. See Example 1(ii) of this paragraph (b)(7)(vi). Because Z has no positive adjustments in 1998, Z has a net negative adjustment of $70 for 1998. This net negative adjustment reduces to zero the $60 total daily portions of interest Z would otherwise include in income for 1998. Therefore, Z has no interest income on the debt instrument for 1998. Because Z had no interest inclusions on the debt instrument for 1997, the remaining $10 of the net negative adjustment is a negative adjustment carryforward for 1998 that reduces the amount realized by Z on retirement of the debt instrument.

(iii) Loss on retirement. Immediately before the payment at maturity, Z's adjusted basis in the debt instrument is $660. Under paragraph (b)(7)(iv) of this section, Z is treated as receiving the projected amount of the contingent payment, or $660, as the payment at maturity. Under paragraph (b)(6)(iii)(C) of this section, however, this amount is reduced by any negative adjustment carryforward determined for the taxable year of retirement to calculate the amount Z realizes on retirement of the debt instrument. Thus, Z has a loss of $10 on the retirement of the debt instrument, equal to the amount by which Z's adjusted basis in the debt instrument ($660) exceeds the amount Z realizes on the retirement of the debt instrument ($660 minus the $10 negative adjustment carryforward). Under paragraph (b)(8)(ii) of this section, the loss is a capital loss.

(8) Character on sale, exchange, or retirement

(i) Gain. Any gain recognized by a holder on the sale, exchange, or retirement of a debt instrument subject to this paragraph (b) is interest income.

(ii) Loss. Any loss recognized by a holder on the sale, exchange, or retirement of a debt instrument subject to this paragraph (b) is ordinary loss to the extent that the holder's total interest inclusions on the debt instrument exceed the total net negative adjustments on the debt instrument the holder took into account as ordinary loss. Any additional loss is treated as loss from the sale, exchange, or retirement of the debt instrument. However, any loss that would otherwise be ordinary under this paragraph (b)(8)(ii) and that is attributable to the holder's basis that could not be amortized under section 171(b)(4) is loss from the sale, exchange, or retirement of the debt instrument.

(iii) Special rule if there are no remaining contingent payments on the debt instrument

(A) In general. Notwithstanding paragraphs (b)(8) (i) and (ii) of this section, if, at the time of the sale, exchange, or retirement of the debt instrument, there are no remaining contingent payments due on the debt instrument under the projected payment schedule, any gain or loss recognized by the holder is gain or loss from the sale, exchange, or retirement of the debt instrument. See paragraph (b)(9)(ii) of this section to determine whether there are no remaining contingent payments on a debt instrument that provides for fixed but deferred contingent payments.

(B) Exception for certain positive adjustments. Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(8)(iii)(A) of this section, if a positive adjustment on a debt instrument is spread under paragraph (b)(9)(ii) (F) or (G) of this section, any gain recognized by the holder on the sale, exchange, or retirement of the instrument is treated as interest income to the extent of the positive adjustment that has not yet been accrued and included in income by the holder.

(iv) Examples. The following examples illustrate the provisions of this paragraph (b)(8). In each example, assume that the instrument described is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes. No inference is intended, however, as to whether the instrument is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes.

Example 1. Gain on sale.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1998, D, a calendar year taxpayer, sells a debt instrument that is subject to paragraph (b) of this section for $1,350. The projected payment schedule for the debt instrument provides for contingent payments after January 1, 1998. On January 1, 1998, D has an adjusted basis in the debt instrument of $1,200. In addition, D has a negative adjustment carryforward of $50 for 1997 that, under paragraph (b)(6)(iii)(C) of this section, results in a negative adjustment of $50 on January 1, 1998. D has no positive adjustments on the debt instrument on January 1, 1998.

(ii) Character of gain. Under paragraph (b)(6) of this section, the $50 negative adjustment on January 1, 1998, results in a negative adjustment carryforward for 1998, the taxable year of the sale of the debt instrument. Under paragraph (b)(6)(iii)(C) of this section, the negative adjustment carryforward reduces the amount realized by D on the sale of the debt instrument from $1,350 to $1,300. As a result, D realizes a $100 gain on the sale of the debt instrument, equal to the $1,300 amount realized minus D's $1,200 adjusted basis in the debt instrument. Under paragraph (b)(8)(i) of this section, the gain is interest income to D.

Example 2. Loss on sale.

(i) Facts. On December 31, 1996, E, a calendar year taxpayer, purchases a debt instrument at original issue for $1,000. The debt instrument is a capital asset in the hands of E. The debt instrument provides for a single payment on December 31, 1998 (the maturity date of the instrument), of $1,000 plus an amount based on the increase, if any, in the price of a specified commodity over the term of the instrument. The comparable yield for the debt instrument is 9.54 percent, compounded annually, and the projected payment schedule provides for a payment of $1,200 on December 31, 1998. Based on the projected payment schedule, the total daily portions of interest are $95 for 1997 and $105 for 1998.

(ii) Ordinary loss. Assume that E sells the debt instrument for $1,050 on December 31, 1997. On that date, E has an adjusted basis in the debt instrument of $1,095 ($1,000 original basis, plus total daily portions of $95 for 1997). Therefore, E realizes a $45 loss on the sale of the debt instrument ($1,050-$1,095). The loss is ordinary to the extent E's total interest inclusions on the debt instrument ($95) exceed the total net negative adjustments on the instrument that E took into account as an ordinary loss. Because E has not had any net negative adjustments on the debt instrument, the $45 loss is an ordinary loss.

(iii) Capital loss. Alternatively, assume that E sells the debt instrument for $990 on December 31, 1997. E realizes a $105 loss on the sale of the debt instrument ($990 − $1,095). The loss is ordinary to the extent E's total interest inclusions on the debt instrument ($95) exceed the total net negative adjustments on the instrument that E took into account as an ordinary loss. Because E has not had any net negative adjustments on the debt instrument, $95 of the $105 loss is an ordinary loss. The remaining $10 of the $105 loss is a capital loss.

(9) Operating rules. The rules of this paragraph (b)(9) apply to a debt instrument subject to the noncontingent bond method notwithstanding any other rule of this paragraph (b).

(i) Basis different from adjusted issue price. This paragraph (b)(9)(i) provides rules for a holder whose basis in a debt instrument is different from the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument (e.g., a subsequent holder that purchases the debt instrument for more or less than the instrument's adjusted issue price).

(A) General rule. The holder accrues interest under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section and makes adjustments under paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section based on the projected payment schedule determined as of the issue date of the debt instrument. However, upon acquiring the debt instrument, the holder must reasonably allocate any difference between the adjusted issue price and the basis to daily portions of interest or projected payments over the remaining term of the debt instrument. Allocations are taken into account under paragraphs (b)(9)(i) (B) and (C) of this section.

(B) Basis greater than adjusted issue price. If the holder's basis in the debt instrument exceeds the debt instrument's adjusted issue price, the amount of the difference allocated to a daily portion of interest or to a projected payment is treated as a negative adjustment on the date the daily portion accrues or the payment is made. On the date of the adjustment, the holder's adjusted basis in the debt instrument is reduced by the amount the holder treats as a negative adjustment under this paragraph (b)(9)(i)(B). See paragraph (b)(9)(ii)(E) of this section for a special rule that applies when a contingent payment is fixed more than 6 months before it is due.

(C) Basis less than adjusted issue price. If the holder's basis in the debt instrument is less than the debt instrument's adjusted issue price, the amount of the difference allocated to a daily portion of interest or to a projected payment is treated as a positive adjustment on the date the daily portion accrues or the payment is made. On the date of the adjustment, the holder's adjusted basis in the debt instrument is increased by the amount the holder treats as a positive adjustment under this paragraph (b)(9)(i)(C). See paragraph (b)(9)(ii)(E) of this section for a special rule that applies when a contingent payment is fixed more than 6 months before it is due.

(D) Premium and discount rules do not apply. The rules for accruing premium and discount in sections 171, 1272(a)(7), 1276, and 1281 do not apply. Other rules of those sections, such as section 171(b)(4), continue to apply to the extent relevant.

(E) Safe harbor for exchange listed debt instruments. If the debt instrument is exchange listed property (within the meaning of § 1.1273-2(f)(2) as contained in 26 CFR part 1, revised April 1, 2011), it is reasonable for the holder to allocate any difference between the holder's basis and the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument pro-rata to daily portions of interest (as determined under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section) over the remaining term of the debt instrument. A pro-rata allocation is not reasonable, however, to the extent the holder's yield on the debt instrument, determined after taking into account the amounts allocated under this paragraph (b)(9)(i)(E), is less than the applicable Federal rate for the instrument. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the applicable Federal rate for the debt instrument is determined as if the purchase date were the issue date and the remaining term of the instrument were the term of the instrument.

(F) Examples. The following examples illustrate the provisions of this paragraph (b)(9)(i). In each example, assume that the instrument described is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes. No inference is intended, however, as to whether the instrument is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes. In addition, assume that each instrument is not exchange listed property.

Example 1. Basis greater than adjusted issue price.

(i) Facts. On July 1, 1998, Z purchases for $1,405 a debt instrument that matures on December 31, 1999, and promises to pay on the maturity date $1,000 plus the increase, if any, in the price of a specified amount of a commodity from the issue date to the maturity date. The debt instrument was originally issued on December 31, 1996, for an issue price of $1,000. The comparable yield for the debt instrument is 10.25 percent, compounded semiannually, and the projected payment schedule for the debt instrument (determined as of the issue date) provides for a single payment at maturity of $1,350. At the time of the purchase, the debt instrument has an adjusted issue price of $1,162, assuming semiannual accrual periods ending on December 31 and June 30 of each year. The increase in the value of the debt instrument over its adjusted issue price is due to an increase in the expected amount of the contingent payment and not to a decrease in market interest rates. The debt instrument is a capital asset in the hands of Z. Z is a calendar year taxpayer.

(ii) Allocation of the difference between basis and adjusted issue price. Z's basis in the debt instrument on July 1, 1998, is $1,405. Under paragraph (b)(9)(i)(A) of this section, Z allocates the $243 difference between basis ($1,405) and adjusted issue price ($1,162) to the contingent payment at maturity. Z's allocation of the difference between basis and adjusted issue price is reasonable because the increase in the value of the debt instrument over its adjusted issue price is due to an increase in the expected amount of the contingent payment.

(iii) Treatment of debt instrument for 1998. Based on the projected payment schedule, $60 of interest accrues on the debt instrument from July 1, 1998 to December 31, 1998 (the product of the debt instrument's adjusted issue price on July 1, 1998 ($1,162) and the comparable yield properly adjusted for the length of the accrual period (10.25 percent/2)). Z has no net negative or positive adjustments for 1998. Thus, Z includes in income $60 of total daily portions of interest for 1998. On December 31, 1998, Z's adjusted basis in the debt instrument is $1,465 ($1,405 original basis, plus total daily portions of $60 for 1998).

(iv) Effect of allocation to contingent payment at maturity. Assume that the payment actually made on December 31, 1999, is $1,400, rather than the projected $1,350. Thus, under paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section, Z has a positive adjustment of $50 on December 31, 1999. In addition, under paragraph (b)(9)(i)(B) of this section, Z has a negative adjustment of $243 on December 31, 1999, which is attributable to the difference between Z's basis in the debt instrument on July 1, 1998, and the instrument's adjusted issue price on that date. As a result, Z has a net negative adjustment of $193 for 1999. This net negative adjustment reduces to zero the $128 total daily portions of interest Z would otherwise include in income in 1999. Accordingly, Z has no interest income on the debt instrument for 1999. Because Z had $60 of interest inclusions for 1998, $60 of the remaining $65 net negative adjustment is treated by Z as an ordinary loss for 1999. The remaining $5 of the net negative adjustment is a negative adjustment carryforward for 1999 that reduces the amount realized by Z on the retirement of the debt instrument from $1,350 to $1,345.

(v) Loss at maturity. On December 31, 1999, Z's basis in the debt instrument is $1,350 ($1,405 original basis, plus total daily portions of $60 for 1998 and $128 for 1999, minus the negative adjustment of $243). As a result, Z realizes a loss of $5 on the retirement of the debt instrument (the difference between the amount realized on the retirement ($1,345) and Z's adjusted basis in the debt instrument ($1,350)). Under paragraph (b)(8)(ii) of this section, the $5 loss is treated as loss from the retirement of the debt instrument. Consequently, Z realizes a total loss of $65 on the debt instrument for 1999 (a $60 ordinary loss and a $5 capital loss).

Example 2. Basis less than adjusted issue price.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1999, Y purchases for $910 a debt instrument that pays 7 percent interest semiannually on June 30 and December 31 of each year, and that promises to pay on December 31, 2001, $1,000 plus or minus $10 times the positive or negative difference, if any, between a specified amount and the value of an index on December 31, 2001. However, the payment on December 31, 2001, may not be less than $650. The debt instrument was originally issued on December 31, 1996, for an issue price of $1,000. The comparable yield for the debt instrument is 9.80 percent, compounded semiannually, and the projected payment schedule for the debt instrument (determined as of the issue date) provides for semiannual payments of $35 and a contingent payment at maturity of $1,175. On January 1, 1999, the debt instrument has an adjusted issue price of $1,060, assuming semiannual accrual periods ending on December 31 and June 30 of each year. Y is a calendar year taxpayer.

(ii) Allocation of the difference between basis and adjusted issue price. Y's basis in the debt instrument on January 1, 1999, is $910. Under paragraph (b)(9)(i)(A) of this section, Y must allocate the $150 difference between basis ($910) and adjusted issue price ($1,060) to daily portions of interest or to projected payments. These amounts will be positive adjustments taken into account at the time the daily portions accrue or the payments are made.

(A) Assume that, because of a decrease in the relevant index, the expected value of the payment at maturity has declined by about 9 percent. Based on forward prices on January 1, 1999, Y determines that approximately $105 of the difference between basis and adjusted issue price is allocable to the contingent payment. Y allocates the remaining $45 to daily portions of interest on a pro-rata basis (i.e., the amount allocated to an accrual period equals the product of $45 and a fraction, the numerator of which is the total daily portions for the accrual period and the denominator of which is the total daily portions remaining on the debt instrument on January 1, 1999). This allocation is reasonable.

(B) Assume alternatively that, based on yields of comparable debt instruments and its purchase price for the debt instrument, Y determines that an appropriate yield for the debt instrument is 13 percent, compounded semiannually. Based on this determination, Y allocates $55.75 of the difference between basis and adjusted issue price to daily portions of interest as follows: $15.19 to the daily portions of interest for the taxable year ending December 31, 1999; $18.40 to the daily portions of interest for the taxable year ending December 31, 2000; and $22.16 to the daily portions of interest for the taxable year ending December 31, 2001. Y allocates the remaining $94.25 to the contingent payment at maturity. This allocation is reasonable.

(ii) Fixed but deferred contingent payments. This paragraph (b)(9)(ii) provides rules that apply when the amount of a contingent payment becomes fixed before the payment is due. For purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, if a contingent payment becomes fixed within the 6-month period ending on the due date of the payment, the payment is treated as a contingent payment even after the payment is fixed. If a contingent payment becomes fixed more than 6 months before the payment is due, the following rules apply to the debt instrument.

(A) Determining adjustments. The amount of the adjustment attributable to the contingent payment is equal to the difference between the present value of the amount that is fixed and the present value of the projected amount of the contingent payment. The present value of each amount is determined by discounting the amount from the date the payment is due to the date the payment becomes fixed, using a discount rate equal to the comparable yield on the debt instrument. The adjustment is treated as a positive or negative adjustment, as appropriate, on the date the contingent payment becomes fixed. See paragraph (b)(9)(ii)(G) of this section to determine the timing of the adjustment if all remaining contingent payments on the debt instrument become fixed substantially contemporaneously.

(B) Payment schedule. The contingent payment is no longer treated as a contingent payment after the date the amount of the payment becomes fixed. On the date the contingent payment becomes fixed, the projected payment schedule for the debt instrument is modified prospectively to reflect the fixed amount of the payment. Therefore, no adjustment is made under paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section when the contingent payment is actually made.

(C) Accrual period. Notwithstanding the determination under § 1.1272-1(b)(1)(ii) of accrual periods for the debt instrument, an accrual period ends on the day the contingent payment becomes fixed, and a new accrual period begins on the day after the day the contingent payment becomes fixed.

(D) Adjustments to basis and adjusted issue price. The amount of any positive adjustment on a debt instrument determined under paragraph (b)(9)(ii)(A) of this section increases the adjusted issue price of the instrument and the holder's adjusted basis in the instrument. Similarly, the amount of any negative adjustment on a debt instrument determined under paragraph (b)(9)(ii)(A) of this section decreases the adjusted issue price of the instrument and the holder's adjusted basis in the instrument.

(E) Basis different from adjusted issue price. If a holder's basis in a debt instrument exceeds the debt instrument's adjusted issue price, the amount allocated to a projected payment under paragraph (b)(9)(i) of this section is treated as a negative adjustment on the date the payment becomes fixed. If a holder's basis in a debt instrument is less than the debt instrument's adjusted issue price, the amount allocated to a projected payment under paragraph (b)(9)(i) of this section is treated as a positive adjustment on the date the payment becomes fixed.

(F) Special rule for certain contingent interest payments. Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(9)(ii)(A) of this section, this paragraph (b)(9)(ii)(F) applies to contingent stated interest payments that are adjusted to compensate for contingencies regarding the reasonableness of the debt instrument's stated rate of interest. For example, this paragraph (b)(9)(ii)(F) applies to a debt instrument that provides for an increase in the stated rate of interest if the credit quality of the issuer or liquidity of the debt instrument deteriorates. Contingent stated interest payments of this type are recognized over the period to which they relate in a reasonable manner.

(G) Special rule when all contingent payments become fixed. Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(9)(ii)(A) of this section, if all the remaining contingent payments on a debt instrument become fixed substantially contemporaneously, any positive or negative adjustments on the instrument are taken into account in a reasonable manner over the period to which they relate. For purposes of the preceding sentence, a payment is treated as a fixed payment if all remaining contingencies with respect to the payment are remote or incidental (within the meaning of § 1.1275-2(h)).

(H) Example. The following example illustrates the provisions of this paragraph (b)(9)(ii). In this example, assume that the instrument described is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes. No inference is intended, however, as to whether the instrument is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes.

Example: Fixed but deferred payments.

(i) Facts. On December 31, 1996, B, a calendar year taxpayer, purchases a debt instrument at original issue for $1,000. The debt instrument matures on December 31, 2002, and provides for a payment of $1,000 at maturity. In addition, on December 31, 1999, and December 31, 2002, the debt instrument provides for payments equal to the excess of the average daily value of an index for the 6-month period ending on September 30 of the preceding year over a specified amount. The debt instrument's comparable yield is 10 percent, compounded annually, and the instrument's projected payment schedule consists of a payment of $250 on December 31, 1999, and a payment of $1,439 on December 31, 2002. B uses annual accrual periods.

(ii) Interest accrual for 1997. Based on the projected payment schedule, B includes a total of $100 of daily portions of interest in income in 1997. B's adjusted basis in the debt instrument and the debt instrument's adjusted issue price on December 31, 1997, is $1,100.

(iii) Interest accrual for 1998—(A) Adjustment. Based on the projected payment schedule, B would include $110 of total daily portions of interest in income in 1998. However, assume that on September 30, 1998, the payment due on December 31, 1999, fixes at $300, rather than the projected $250. Thus, on September 30, 1998, B has an adjustment equal to the difference between the present value of the $300 fixed amount and the present value of the $250 projected amount of the contingent payment. The present values of the two payments are determined by discounting each payment from the date the payment is due (December 31, 1999) to the date the payment becomes fixed (September 30, 1998), using a discount rate equal to 10 percent, compounded annually. The present value of the fixed payment is $266.30 and the present value of the projected amount of the contingent payment is $221.91. Thus, on September 30, 1998, B has a positive adjustment of $44.39 ($266.30-$221.91).

(B) Effect of adjustment. Under paragraph (b)(9)(ii)(C) of this section, B's accrual period ends on September 30, 1998. The daily portions of interest on the debt instrument for the period from January 1, 1998 to September 30, 1998 total $81.51. The adjusted issue price of the debt instrument and B's adjusted basis in the debt instrument are thus increased over this period by $125.90 (the sum of the daily portions of interest of $81.51 and the positive adjustment of $44.39 made at the end of the period) to $1,225.90. For purposes of all future accrual periods, including the new accrual period from October 1, 1998, to December 31, 1998, the debt instrument's projected payment schedule is modified to reflect a fixed payment of $300 on December 31, 1999. Based on the new adjusted issue price of the debt instrument and the new projected payment schedule, the yield on the debt instrument does not change.

(C) Interest accrual for 1998. Based on the modified projected payment schedule, $29.56 of interest accrues during the accrual period that ends on December 31, 1998. Because B has no other adjustments during 1998, the $44.39 positive adjustment on September 30, 1998, results in a net positive adjustment for 1998, which is additional interest for that year. Thus, B includes $155.46 ($81.51 + $29.56 + $44.39) of interest in income in 1998. B's adjusted basis in the debt instrument and the debt instrument's adjusted issue price on December 31, 1998, is $1,255.46 ($1,225.90 from the end of the prior accrual period plus $29.56 total daily portions for the current accrual period).

(iii) Timing contingencies. This paragraph (b)(9)(iii) provides rules for debt instruments that have payments that are contingent as to time.

(A) Treatment of certain options. If a taxpayer has an unconditional option to put or call the debt instrument, to exchange the debt instrument for other property, or to extend the maturity date of the debt instrument, the projected payment schedule is determined by using the principles of § 1.1272-1(c)(5).

(B) Other timing contingencies. [Reserved]

(iv) Cross-border transactions

(A) Allocation of deductions. For purposes of § 1.861-8, the holder of a debt instrument shall treat any deduction or loss treated as an ordinary loss under paragraph (b)(6)(iii)(B) or (b)(8)(ii) of this section as a deduction that is definitely related to the class of gross income to which income from such debt instrument belongs. Accordingly, if a U.S. person holds a debt instrument issued by a related controlled foreign corporation and, pursuant to section 904(d)(3) and the regulations thereunder, any interest accrued by such U.S. person with respect to such debt instrument would be treated as foreign source general limitation income, any deductions relating to a net negative adjustment will reduce the U.S. person's foreign source general limitation income. The holder shall apply the general rules relating to allocation and apportionment of deductions to any other deduction or loss realized by the holder with respect to the debt instrument.

(B) Investments in United States real property. Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(8)(i) of this section, gain on the sale, exchange, or retirement of a debt instrument that is a United States real property interest is treated as gain for purposes of sections 897, 1445, and 6039C.

(v) Coordination with subchapter M and related provisions. For purposes of sections 852(c)(2) and 4982 and § 1.852-11, any positive adjustment, negative adjustment, income, or loss on a debt instrument that occurs after October 31 of a taxable year is treated in the same manner as foreign currency gain or loss that is attributable to a section 988 transaction.

(vi) Coordination with section 1092. A holder treats a negative adjustment and an issuer treats a positive adjustment as a loss with respect to a position in a straddle if the debt instrument is a position in a straddle and the contingency (or any portion of the contingency) to which the adjustment relates would be part of the straddle if entered into as a separate position.

(c) Method for debt instruments not subject to the noncontingent bond method

(1) Applicability. This paragraph (c) applies to a contingent payment debt instrument (other than a tax-exempt obligation) that has an issue price determined under § 1.1274-2. For example, this paragraph (c) generally applies to a contingent payment debt instrument that is issued for nonpublicly traded property.

(2) Separation into components. If paragraph (c) of this section applies to a debt instrument (the overall debt instrument), the noncontingent payments are subject to the rules in paragraph (c)(3) of this section, and the contingent payments are accounted for separately under the rules in paragraph (c)(4) of this section.

(3) Treatment of noncontingent payments. The noncontingent payments are treated as a separate debt instrument. The issue price of the separate debt instrument is the issue price of the overall debt instrument, determined under § 1.1274-2(g). No interest payments on the separate debt instrument are qualified stated interest payments (within the meaning of § 1.1273-1(c)) and the de minimis rules of section 1273(a)(3) and § 1.1273-1(d) do not apply to the separate debt instrument.

(4) Treatment of contingent payments

(i) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(iii) of this section, the portion of a contingent payment treated as interest under paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section is includible in gross income by the holder and deductible from gross income by the issuer in their respective taxable years in which the payment is made.

(ii) Characterization of contingent payments as principal and interest

(A) General rule. A contingent payment is treated as a payment of principal in an amount equal to the present value of the payment, determined by discounting the payment at the test rate from the date the payment is made to the issue date. The amount of the payment in excess of the amount treated as principal under the preceding sentence is treated as a payment of interest.

(B) Test rate. The test rate used for purposes of paragraph (c)(4)(ii)(A) of this section is the rate that would be the test rate for the overall debt instrument under § 1.1274-4 if the term of the overall debt instrument began on the issue date of the overall debt instrument and ended on the date the contingent payment is made. However, in the case of a contingent payment that consists of a payment of stated principal accompanied by a payment of stated interest at a rate that exceeds the test rate determined under the preceding sentence, the test rate is the stated interest rate.

(iii) Certain delayed contingent payments

(A) General rule. Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section, if a contingent payment becomes fixed more than 6 months before the payment is due, the issuer and holder are treated as if the issuer had issued a separate debt instrument on the date the payment becomes fixed, maturing on the date the payment is due. This separate debt instrument is treated as a debt instrument to which section 1274 applies. The stated principal amount of this separate debt instrument is the amount of the payment that becomes fixed. An amount equal to the issue price of this debt instrument is characterized as interest or principal under the rules of paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section and accounted for as if this amount had been paid by the issuer to the holder on the date that the amount of the payment becomes fixed. To determine the issue price of the separate debt instrument, the payment is discounted at the test rate from the maturity date of the separate debt instrument to the date that the amount of the payment becomes fixed.

(B) Test rate. The test rate used for purposes of paragraph (c)(4)(iii)(A) of this section is determined in the same manner as the test rate under paragraph (c)(4)(ii)(B) of this section is determined except that the date the contingent payment is due is used rather than the date the contingent payment is made.

(5) Basis different from adjusted issue price. This paragraph (c)(5) provides rules for a holder whose basis in a debt instrument is different from the instrument's adjusted issue price (e.g., a subsequent holder). This paragraph (c)(5), however, does not apply if the holder is reporting income under the installment method of section 453.

(i) Allocation of basis. The holder must allocate basis to the noncontingent component (i.e., the right to the noncontingent payments) and to any separate debt instruments described in paragraph (c)(4)(iii) of this section in an amount up to the total of the adjusted issue price of the noncontingent component and the adjusted issue prices of the separate debt instruments. The holder must allocate the remaining basis, if any, to the contingent component (i.e., the right to the contingent payments).

(ii) Noncontingent component. Any difference between the holder's basis in the noncontingent component and the adjusted issue price of the noncontingent component, and any difference between the holder's basis in a separate debt instrument and the adjusted issue price of the separate debt instrument, is taken into account under the rules for market discount, premium, and acquisition premium that apply to a noncontingent debt instrument.

(iii) Contingent component. Amounts received by the holder that are treated as principal payments under paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section reduce the holder's basis in the contingent component. If the holder's basis in the contingent component is reduced to zero, any additional principal payments on the contingent component are treated as gain from the sale or exchange of the debt instrument. Any basis remaining on the contingent component on the date the final contingent payment is made increases the holder's adjusted basis in the noncontingent component (or, if there are no remaining noncontingent payments, is treated as loss from the sale or exchange of the debt instrument).

(6) Treatment of a holder on sale, exchange, or retirement. This paragraph (c)(6) provides rules for the treatment of a holder on the sale, exchange, or retirement of a debt instrument subject to this paragraph (c). Under this paragraph (c)(6), the holder must allocate the amount received from the sale, exchange, or retirement of a debt instrument first to the noncontingent component and to any separate debt instruments described in paragraph (c)(4)(iii) of this section in an amount up to the total of the adjusted issue price of the noncontingent component and the adjusted issue prices of the separate debt instruments. The holder must allocate the remaining amount received, if any, to the contingent component.

(i) Amount allocated to the noncontingent component. The amount allocated to the noncontingent component and any separate debt instruments is treated as an amount realized from the sale, exchange, or retirement of the noncontingent component or separate debt instrument.

(ii) Amount allocated to the contingent component. The amount allocated to the contingent component is treated as a contingent payment that is made on the date of the sale, exchange, or retirement and is characterized as interest and principal under the rules of paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section.

(7) Examples. The following examples illustrate the provisions of this paragraph (c). In each example, assume that the instrument described is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes. No inference is intended, however, as to whether the instrument is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes.

Example 1. Contingent interest payments.

(i) Facts. A owns Blackacre, unencumbered depreciable real estate. On January 1, 1997, A sells Blackacre to B. As consideration for the sale, B makes a downpayment of $1,000,000 and issues to A a debt instrument that matures on December 31, 2001. The debt instrument provides for a payment of principal at maturity of $5,000,000 and a contingent payment of interest on December 31 of each year equal to a fixed percentage of the gross rents B receives from Blackacre in that year. Assume that the debt instrument is not issued in a potentially abusive situation. Assume also that on January 1, 1997, the short-term applicable Federal rate is 5 percent, compounded annually, and the mid-term applicable Federal rate is 6 percent, compounded annually.

(ii) Determination of issue price. Under § 1.1274-2(g), the issue price of the debt instrument is $3,736,291, which is the present value, as of the issue date, of the $5,000,000 noncontingent payment due at maturity, calculated using a discount rate equal to the mid-term applicable Federal rate. Under § 1.1012-1(g)(1), B's basis in Blackacre on January 1, 1997, is $4,736,291 ($1,000,000 down payment plus the $3,736,291 issue price of the debt instrument).

(iii) Noncontingent payment treated as separate debt instrument. Under paragraph (c)(3) of this section, the right to the noncontingent payment of principal at maturity is treated as a separate debt instrument. The issue price of this separate debt instrument is $3,736,291 (the issue price of the overall debt instrument). The separate debt instrument has a stated redemption price at maturity of $5,000,000 and, therefore, OID of $1,263,709.

(iv) Treatment of contingent payments. Assume that the amount of contingent interest that is fixed and paid on December 31, 1997, is $200,000. Under paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section, this payment is treated as consisting of a payment of principal of $190,476, which is the present value of the payment, determined by discounting the payment at the test rate of 5 percent, compounded annually, from the date the payment is made to the issue date. The remainder of the $200,000 payment ($9,524) is treated as interest. The additional amount treated as principal gives B additional basis in Blackacre on December 31, 1997. The portion of the payment treated as interest is includible in gross income by A and deductible by B in their respective taxable years in which December 31, 1997 occurs. The remaining contingent payments on the debt instrument are accounted for similarly, using a test rate of 5 percent, compounded annually, for the contingent payments due on December 31, 1998, and December 31, 1999, and a test rate of 6 percent, compounded annually, for the contingent payments due on December 31, 2000, and December 31, 2001.

Example 2. Fixed but deferred payment.

(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (c)(7) Example 1 of this section, except that the contingent payment of interest that is fixed on December 31, 1997, is not payable until December 31, 2001, the maturity date.

(ii) Treatment of deferred contingent payment. Assume that the amount of the payment that becomes fixed on December 31, 1997, is $200,000. Because this amount is not payable until December 31, 2001, under paragraph (c)(4)(iii) of this section, a separate debt instrument to which section 1274 applies is treated as issued by B on December 31, 1997 (the date the payment is fixed). The maturity date of this separate debt instrument is December 31, 2001 (the date on which the payment is due). The stated principal amount of this separate debt instrument is $200,000, the amount of the payment that becomes fixed. The imputed principal amount of the separate debt instrument is $158,419, which is the present value, as of December 31, 1997, of the $200,000 payment, computed using a discount rate equal to the test rate of the overall debt instrument (6 percent, compounded annually). An amount equal to the issue price of the separate debt instrument is treated as an amount paid on December 31, 1997, and characterized as interest and principal under the rules of paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section. The amount of the deemed payment characterized as principal is equal to $150,875, which is the present value, as of January 1, 1997 (the issue date of the overall debt instrument), of the deemed payment, computed using a discount rate of 5 percent, compounded annually. The amount of the deemed payment characterized as interest is $7,544 ($158,419 −$150,875), which is includible in gross income by A and deductible by B in their respective taxable years in which December 31, 1997 occurs.

(d) Rules for tax-exempt obligations

(1) In general. Except as modified by this paragraph (d), the noncontingent bond method described in paragraph (b) of this section applies to a tax-exempt obligation (as defined in section 1275(a)(3)) to which this section applies. Paragraph (d)(2) of this section applies to certain tax-exempt obligations that provide for interest-based payments or revenue-based payments and paragraph (d)(3) of this section applies to all other obligations. Paragraph (d)(4) of this section provides rules for a holder whose basis in a tax-exempt obligation is different from the adjusted issue price of the obligation.

(2) Certain tax-exempt obligations with interest-based or revenue-based payments

(i) Applicability. This paragraph (d)(2) applies to a tax-exempt obligation that provides for interest-based payments or revenue-based payments.

(ii) Interest-based payments. A tax-exempt obligation provides for interest-based payments if the obligation would otherwise qualify as a variable rate debt instrument under § 1.1275-5 except that—

(A) The obligation provides for more than one fixed rate;

(B) The obligation provides for one or more caps, floors, or governors (or similar restrictions) that are fixed as of the issue date;

(C) The interest on the obligation is not compounded or paid at least annually; or

(D) The obligation provides for interest at one or more rates equal to the product of a qualified floating rate and a fixed multiple greater than zero and less than .65, or at one or more rates equal to the product of a qualified floating rate and a fixed multiple greater than zero and less than .65, increased or decreased by a fixed rate.

(iii) Revenue-based payments. A tax-exempt obligation provides for revenue-based payments if the obligation—

(A) Is issued to refinance (including a series of refinancings) an obligation (in a series of refinancings, the original obligation), the proceeds of which were used to finance a project or enterprise; and

(B) Would otherwise qualify as a variable rate debt instrument under § 1.1275-5 except that it provides for stated interest payments at least annually based on a single fixed percentage of the revenue, value, change in value, or other similar measure of the performance of the refinanced project or enterprise.

(iv) Modifications to the noncontingent bond method. If a tax-exempt obligation is subject to this paragraph (d)(2), the following modifications to the noncontingent bond method described in paragraph (b) of this section apply to the obligation.

(A) Daily portions and net positive adjustments. The daily portions of interest determined under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section and any net positive adjustment on the obligation are interest for purposes of section 103.

(B) Net negative adjustments. A net negative adjustment for a taxable year reduces the amount of tax-exempt interest the holder would otherwise account for on the obligation for the taxable year under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section. If the net negative adjustment exceeds this amount, the excess is a nondeductible, noncapitalizable loss. If a regulated investment company (RIC) within the meaning of section 851 has a net negative adjustment in a taxable year that would be a nondeductible, noncapitalizable loss under the prior sentence, the RIC must use this loss to reduce its tax-exempt interest income on other tax-exempt obligations held during the taxable year.

(C) Gains. Any gain recognized on the sale, exchange, or retirement of the obligation is gain from the sale or exchange of the obligation.

(D) Losses. Any loss recognized on the sale, exchange, or retirement of the obligation is treated the same as a net negative adjustment under paragraph (d)(2)(iv)(B) of this section.

(E) Special rule for losses and net negative adjustments. Notwithstanding paragraphs (d)(2)(iv) (B) and (D) of this section, on the sale, exchange, or retirement of the obligation, the holder may claim a loss from the sale or exchange of the obligation to the extent the holder has not received in cash or property the sum of its original investment in the obligation and any amounts included in income under paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section.

(3) All other tax-exempt obligations

(i) Applicability. This paragraph (d)(3) applies to a tax-exempt obligation that is not subject to paragraph (d)(2) of this section.

(ii) Modifications to the noncontingent bond method. If a tax-exempt obligation is subject to this paragraph (d)(3), the following modifications to the noncontingent bond method described in paragraph (b) of this section apply to the obligation.

(A) Modification to projected payment schedule. The comparable yield for the obligation is the greater of the obligation's yield, determined without regard to the contingent payments, and the tax-exempt applicable Federal rate that applies to the obligation. The Internal Revenue Service publishes the tax-exempt applicable Federal rate for each month in the Internal Revenue Bulletin (see § 601.601(d)(2)(ii) of this chapter).

(B) Daily portions. The daily portions of interest determined under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section are interest for purposes of section 103.

(C) Adjustments. A net positive adjustment on the obligation is treated as gain to the holder from the sale or exchange of the obligation in the taxable year of the adjustment. A net negative adjustment on the obligation is treated as a loss to the holder from the sale or exchange of the obligation in the taxable year of the adjustment.

(D) Gains and losses. Any gain or loss recognized on the sale, exchange, or retirement of the obligation is gain or loss from the sale or exchange of the obligation.

(4) Basis different from adjusted issue price. This paragraph (d)(4) provides rules for a holder whose basis in a tax-exempt obligation is different from the adjusted issue price of the obligation. The rules of paragraph (b)(9)(i) of this section do not apply to tax-exempt obligations.

(i) Basis greater than adjusted issue price. If the holder's basis in the obligation exceeds the obligation's adjusted issue price, the holder, upon acquiring the obligation, must allocate this difference to daily portions of interest on a yield to maturity basis over the remaining term of the obligation. The amount allocated to a daily portion of interest is not deductible by the holder. However, the holder's basis in the obligation is reduced by the amount allocated to a daily portion of interest on the date the daily portion accrues.

(ii) Basis less than adjusted issue price. If the holder's basis in the obligation is less than the obligation's adjusted issue price, the holder, upon acquiring the obligation, must allocate this difference to daily portions of interest on a yield to maturity basis over the remaining term of the obligation. The amount allocated to a daily portion of interest is includible in income by the holder as ordinary income on the date the daily portion accrues. The holder's adjusted basis in the obligation is increased by the amount includible in income by the holder under this paragraph (d)(4)(ii) on the date the daily portion accrues.

(iii) Premium and discount rules do not apply. The rules for accruing premium and discount in sections 171, 1276, and 1288 do not apply. Other rules of those sections continue to apply to the extent relevant.

(e) Amounts treated as interest under this section. Amounts treated as interest under this section are treated as OID for all purposes of the Internal Revenue Code.

(f) Effective date. This section applies to debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996.

[T.D. 8674, 61 FR 30143, June 14, 1996, as amended by T.D. 8709, 62 FR 618, Jan. 6, 1997; T.D. 8838, 64 FR 48547, Sept. 7, 1999; T.D. 9157, 69 FR 52829, Aug. 30, 2004; T.D. 9599, 77 FR 56538, Sept. 13, 2012; T.D. 9612, 78 FR 8016, Feb. 5, 2013]

§ 1.1275-5 Variable rate debt instruments.

(a) Applicability

(1) In general. This section provides rules for variable rate debt instruments. Except as provided in paragraph (a)(6) of this section, a variable rate debt instrument is a debt instrument that meets the conditions described in paragraphs (a)(2), (3), (4), and (5) of this section. If a debt instrument that provides for a variable rate of interest does not qualify as a variable rate debt instrument, the debt instrument is a contingent payment debt instrument. See § 1.1275-4 for the treatment of a contingent payment debt instrument. See § 1.1275-6 for a taxpayer's treatment of a variable rate debt instrument and a hedge.

(2) Principal payments. The issue price of the debt instrument must not exceed the total noncontingent principal payments by more than an amount equal to the lesser of—

(i) .015 multiplied by the product of the total noncontingent principal payments and the number of complete years to maturity from the issue date (or, in the case of an installment obligation, the weighted average maturity as defined in § 1.1273-1(e)(3)); or

(ii) 15 percent of the total noncontingent principal payments.

(3) Stated interest

(i) General rule. The debt instrument must not provide for any stated interest other than stated interest (compounded or paid at least annually) at—

(A) One or more qualified floating rates;

(B) A single fixed rate and one or more qualified floating rates;

(C) A single objective rate; or

(D) A single fixed rate and a single objective rate that is a qualified inverse floating rate.

(ii) Certain debt instruments bearing interest at a fixed rate for an initial period. If interest on a debt instrument is stated at a fixed rate for an initial period of 1 year or less followed by a variable rate that is either a qualified floating rate or an objective rate for a subsequent period, and the value of the variable rate on the issue date is intended to approximate the fixed rate, the fixed rate and the variable rate together constitute a single qualified floating rate or objective rate. A fixed rate and a variable rate will be conclusively presumed to meet the requirements of the preceding sentence if the value of the variable rate on the issue date does not differ from the value of the fixed rate by more than .25 percentage points (25 basis points).

(4) Current value. The debt instrument must provide that a qualified floating rate or objective rate in effect at any time during the term of the instrument is set at a current value of that rate. A current value is the value of the rate on any day that is no earlier than 3 months prior to the first day on which that value is in effect and no later than 1 year following that first day.

(5) No contingent principal payments. Except as provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the debt instrument must not provide for any principal payments that are contingent (within the meaning of § 1.1275-4(a)).

(6) Special rule for debt instruments issued for nonpublicly traded property. A debt instrument (other than a tax-exempt obligation) that would otherwise qualify as a variable rate debt instrument under this section is not a variable rate debt instrument if section 1274 applies to the instrument and any stated interest payments on the instrument are treated as contingent payments under § 1.1274-2. This paragraph (a)(6) applies to debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996.

(b) Qualified floating rate

(1) In general. A variable rate is a qualified floating rate if variations in the value of the rate can reasonably be expected to measure contemporaneous variations in the cost of newly borrowed funds in the currency in which the debt instrument is denominated. The rate may measure contemporaneous variations in borrowing costs for the issuer of the debt instrument or for issuers in general. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, a multiple of a qualified floating rate is not a qualified floating rate. If a debt instrument provides for two or more qualified floating rates that can reasonably be expected to have approximately the same values throughout the term of the instrument, the qualified floating rates together constitute a single qualified floating rate. Two or more qualified floating rates will be conclusively presumed to meet the requirements of the preceding sentence if the values of all rates on the issue date are within .25 percentage points (25 basis points) of each other.

(2) Certain rates based on a qualified floating rate. For a debt instrument issued on or after August 13, 1996, a variable rate is a qualified floating rate if it is equal to either—

(i) The product of a qualified floating rate described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section and a fixed multiple that is greater than .65 but not more than 1.35; or

(ii) The product of a qualified floating rate described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section and a fixed multiple that is greater than .65 but not more than 1.35, increased or decreased by a fixed rate.

(3) Restrictions on the stated rate of interest. A variable rate is not a qualified floating rate if it is subject to a restriction or restrictions on the maximum stated interest rate (cap), a restriction or restrictions on the minimum stated interest rate (floor), a restriction or restrictions on the amount of increase or decrease in the stated interest rate (governor), or other similar restrictions. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, the following restrictions will not cause a variable rate to fail to be a qualified floating rate—

(i) A cap, floor, or governor that is fixed throughout the term of the debt instrument;

(ii) A cap or similar restriction that is not reasonably expected as of the issue date to cause the yield on the debt instrument to be significantly less than the expected yield determined without the cap;

(iii) A floor or similar restriction that is not reasonably expected as of the issue date to cause the yield on the debt instrument to be significantly more than the expected yield determined without the floor; or

(iv) A governor or similar restriction that is not reasonably expected as of the issue date to cause the yield on the debt instrument to be significantly more or significantly less than the expected yield determined without the governor.

(c) Objective rate

(1) Definition

(i) In general. For debt instruments issued on or after August 13, 1996, an objective rate is a rate (other than a qualified floating rate) that is determined using a single fixed formula and that is based on objective financial or economic information. For example, an objective rate generally includes a rate that is based on one or more qualified floating rates or on the yield of actively traded personal property (within the meaning of section 1092(d)(1)).

(ii) Exception. For purposes of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, an objective rate does not include a rate based on information that is within the control of the issuer (or a related party within the meaning of section 267(b) or 707(b)(1)) or that is unique to the circumstances of the issuer (or a related party within the meaning of section 267(b) or 707(b)(1)), such as dividends, profits, or the value of the issuer's stock. However, a rate does not fail to be an objective rate merely because it is based on the credit quality of the issuer.

(2) Other objective rates to be specified by Commissioner. The Commissioner may designate in the Internal Revenue Bulletin variable rates other than those described in paragraph (c)(1) of this section that will be treated as objective rates (see § 601.601(d)(2)(ii) of this chapter).

(3) Qualified inverse floating rate. An objective rate described in paragraph (c)(1) of this section is a qualified inverse floating rate if—

(i) The rate is equal to a fixed rate minus a qualified floating rate; and

(ii) The variations in the rate can reasonably be expected to inversely reflect contemporaneous variations in the qualified floating rate (disregarding any restrictions on the rate that are described in paragraphs (b)(3)(i), (b)(3)(ii), (b)(3)(iii), and (b)(3)(iv) of this section).

(4) Significant front-loading or back-loading of interest. Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(1) of this section, a variable rate of interest on a debt instrument is not an objective rate if it is reasonably expected that the average value of the rate during the first half of the instrument's term will be either significantly less than or significantly greater than the average value of the rate during the final half of the instrument's term.

(5) Tax-exempt obligations. Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(1) of this section, in the case of a tax-exempt obligation (within the meaning of section 1275(a)(3)), a variable rate is an objective rate only if it is a qualified inverse floating rate or a qualified inflation rate. A rate is a qualified inflation rate if the rate measures contemporaneous changes in inflation based on a general inflation index.

(d) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section. For purposes of these examples, assume that the debt instrument is not a tax-exempt obligation. In addition, unless otherwise provided, assume that the rate is not reasonably expected to result in a significant front-loading or back-loading of interest and that the rate is not based on objective financial or economic information that is within the control of the issuer (or a related party) or that is unique to the circumstances of the issuer (or a related party).

Example 1. Rate based on LIBOR. X issues a debt instrument that provides for annual payments of interest at a rate equal to the value of the 1-year London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR) at the end of each year. Variations in the value of 1-year LIBOR over the term of the debt instrument can reasonably be expected to measure contemporaneous variations in the cost of newly borrowed funds over that term. Accordingly, the rate is a qualified floating rate.

Example 2. Rate increased by a fixed amount. X issues a debt instrument that provides for annual payments of interest at a rate equal to 200 basis points (2 percent) plus the current value, at the end of each year, of the average yield on 1-year Treasury securities as published in Federal Reserve bulletins. Variations in the value of this interest rate can reasonably be expected to measure contemporaneous variations in the cost of newly borrowed funds. Accordingly, the rate is a qualified floating rate.

Example 3. Rate based on commercial paper rate. X issues a debt instrument that provides for a rate of interest that is periodically adjusted to equal the current interest rate of Bank's commercial paper. Variations in the value of this interest rate can reasonably be expected to measure contemporaneous variations in the cost of newly borrowed funds. Accordingly, the rate is a qualified floating rate.

Example 4. Rate based on changes in the value of a commodity index. On January 1, 1997, X issues a debt instrument that provides for annual interest payments at the end of each year at a rate equal to the percentage increase, if any, in the value of an index for the year immediately preceding the payment. The index is based on the prices of several actively traded commodities. Variations in the value of this interest rate cannot reasonably be expected to measure contemporaneous variations in the cost of newly borrowed funds. Accordingly, the rate is not a qualified floating rate. However, because the rate is based on objective financial information using a single fixed formula, the rate is an objective rate.

Example 5. Rate based on a percentage of S&P 500 Index. On January 1, 1997, X issues a debt instrument that provides for annual interest payments at the end of each year based on a fixed percentage of the value of the S&P 500 Index. Variations in the value of this interest rate cannot reasonably be expected to measure contemporaneous variations in the cost of newly borrowed funds and, therefore, the rate is not a qualified floating rate. Although the rate is described in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, the rate is not an objective rate because, based on historical data, it is reasonably expected that the average value of the rate during the first half of the instrument's term will be significantly less than the average value of the rate during the final half of the instrument's term.

Example 6. Rate based on issuer's profits. On January 1, 1997, Z issues a debt instrument that provides for annual interest payments equal to 1 percent of Z's gross profits earned during the year immediately preceding the payment. Variations in the value of this interest rate cannot reasonably be expected to measure contemporaneous variations in the cost of newly borrowed funds. Accordingly, the rate is not a qualified floating rate. In addition, because the rate is based on information that is unique to the issuer's circumstances, the rate is not an objective rate.

Example 7. Rate based on a multiple of an interest index. On January 1, 1997, Z issues a debt instrument with annual interest payments at a rate equal to two times the value of 1-year LIBOR as of the payment date. Because the rate is a multiple greater than 1.35 times a qualified floating rate, the rate is not a qualified floating rate. However, because the rate is based on objective financial information using a single fixed formula, the rate is an objective rate.

Example 8. Variable rate based on the cost of borrowed funds in a foreign currency. On January 1, 1997, Y issues a 5-year dollar denominated debt instrument that provides for annual interest payments at a rate equal to the value of 1-year French franc LIBOR as of the payment date. Variations in the value of French franc LIBOR do not measure contemporaneous changes in the cost of newly borrowed funds in dollars. As a result, the rate is not a qualified floating rate for an instrument denominated in dollars. However, because the rate is based on objective financial information using a single fixed formula, the rate is an objective rate.

Example 9. Qualified inverse floating rate. On January 1, 1997, X issues a debt instrument that provides for annual interest payments at the end of each year at a rate equal to 12 percent minus the value of 1-year LIBOR as of the payment date. On the issue date, the value of 1-year LIBOR is 6 percent. Because the rate can reasonably be expected to inversely reflect contemporaneous variations in 1-year LIBOR, it is a qualified inverse floating rate. However, if the value of 1-year LIBOR on the issue date were 11 percent rather than 6 percent, the rate would not be a qualified inverse floating rate because the rate could not reasonably be expected to inversely reflect contemporaneous variations in 1-year LIBOR.

Example 10. Rate based on an inflation index. On January 1, 1997, X issues a debt instrument that provides for annual interest payments at the end of each year at a rate equal to 400 basis points (4 percent) plus the annual percentage change in a general inflation index (e.g., the Consumer Price Index, U.S. City Average, All Items, for all Urban Consumers, seasonally unadjusted). The rate, however, may not be less than zero. Variations in the value of this interest rate cannot reasonably be expected to measure contemporaneous variations in the cost of newly borrowed funds. Accordingly, the rate is not a qualified floating rate. However, because the rate is based on objective economic information using a single fixed formula, the rate is an objective rate.

(e) Qualified stated interest and OID with respect to a variable rate debt instrument

(1) In general. This paragraph (e) provides rules to determine the amount and accrual of OID and qualified stated interest on a variable rate debt instrument. In general, the rules convert the debt instrument into a fixed rate debt instrument and then apply the general OID rules to the debt instrument. The issue price of a variable rate debt instrument, however, is not determined under this paragraph (e). See §§ 1.1273-2 and 1.1274-2 to determine the issue price of a variable rate debt instrument.

(2) Variable rate debt instrument that provides for annual payments of interest at a single variable rate. If a variable rate debt instrument provides for stated interest at a single qualified floating rate or objective rate and the interest is unconditionally payable in cash or in property (other than debt instruments of the issuer), or will be constructively received under section 451, at least annually, the following rules apply to the instrument:

(i) All stated interest with respect to the debt instrument is qualified stated interest.

(ii) The amount of qualified stated interest and the amount of OID, if any, that accrues during an accrual period is determined under the rules applicable to fixed rate debt instruments by assuming that the variable rate is a fixed rate equal to—

(A) In the case of a qualified floating rate or qualified inverse floating rate, the value, as of the issue date, of the qualified floating rate or qualified inverse floating rate; or

(B) In the case of an objective rate (other than a qualified inverse floating rate), a fixed rate that reflects the yield that is reasonably expected for the debt instrument.

(iii) The qualified stated interest allocable to an accrual period is increased (or decreased) if the interest actually paid during an accrual period exceeds (or is less than) the interest assumed to be paid during the accrual period under paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section.

(3) All other variable rate debt instruments except for those that provide for a fixed rate. If a variable rate debt instrument is not described in paragraph (e)(2) of this section and does not provide for interest payable at a fixed rate (other than an initial fixed rate described in paragraph (a)(3)(ii) of this section), the amount of interest and OID accruals for the instrument are determined under this paragraph (e)(3).

(i) Step one: Determine the fixed rate substitute for each variable rate provided under the debt instrument

(A) Qualified floating rate. The fixed rate substitute for each qualified floating rate provided for in the debt instrument is the value of each rate as of the issue date. If, however, a variable rate debt instrument provides for two or more qualified floating rates with different intervals between interest adjustment dates, the fixed rate substitutes for the rates must be based on intervals that are equal in length. For example, if a 4-year debt instrument provides for 24 monthly interest payments based on the value of the 30-day commercial paper rate on each payment date followed by 8 quarterly interest payments based on the value of quarterly LIBOR on each payment date, the fixed rate substitutes may be based on the values, as of the issue date, of the 90-day commercial paper rate and quarterly LIBOR. Alternatively, the fixed rate substitutes may be based on the values, as of the issue date, of the 30-day commercial paper rate and monthly LIBOR.

(B) Qualified inverse floating rate. The fixed rate substitute for a qualified inverse floating rate is the value of the qualified inverse floating rate as of the issue date.

(C) Objective rate. The fixed rate substitute for an objective rate (other than a qualified inverse floating rate) is a fixed rate that reflects the yield that is reasonably expected for the debt instrument.

(ii) Step two: Construct the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument. The equivalent fixed rate debt instrument has terms that are identical to those provided under the variable rate debt instrument, except that the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument provides for the fixed rate substitutes (determined in paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section) in lieu of the qualified floating rates or objective rate provided under the variable rate debt instrument.

(iii) Step three: Determine the amount of qualified stated interest and OID with respect to the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument. The amount of qualified stated interest and OID, if any, are determined for the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument under the rules applicable to fixed rate debt instruments and are taken into account as if the holder held the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument.

(iv) Step four: Make appropriate adjustments for actual variable rates. Qualified stated interest or OID allocable to an accrual period must be increased (or decreased) if the interest actually accrued or paid during an accrual period exceeds (or is less than) the interest assumed to be accrued or paid during the accrual period under the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument. This increase or decrease is an adjustment to qualified stated interest for the accrual period if the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument (as determined under paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section) provides for qualified stated interest and the increase or decrease is reflected in the amount actually paid during the accrual period. Otherwise, this increase or decrease is an adjustment to OID for the accrual period.

(v) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules in paragraphs (e) (2) and (3) of this section:

Example 1. Equivalent fixed rate debt instrument.

(i) Facts. X purchases at original issue a 6-year variable rate debt instrument that provides for semiannual payments of interest. For the first 3 years, the rate of interest is the value of 6-month LIBOR on the payment date. For the final 3 years, the rate is the value of the 6-month T-bill rate on the payment date. On the issue date, the value of 6-month LIBOR is 3 percent, compounded semiannually, and the 6-month T-bill rate is 2 percent, compounded semiannually.

(ii) Determination of equivalent fixed rate debt instrument. Under paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section, the fixed rate substitute for 6-month LIBOR is 3 percent, compounded semiannually, and the fixed rate substitute for the 6-month T-bill rate is 2 percent, compounded semiannually. Under paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section, the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument is a 6-year debt instrument that provides for semiannual payments of interest at 3 percent, compounded semiannually, for the first 3 years followed by 2 percent, compounded semiannually, for the final 3 years.

Example 2. Equivalent fixed rate debt instrument with de minimis OID.

(i) Facts. Y purchases at original issue, for $100,000, a 4-year variable rate debt instrument that has a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable at maturity. The debt instrument provides for monthly payments of interest at the end of each month. For the first year, the interest rate is the monthly commercial paper rate and for the last 3 years, the interest rate is the monthly commercial paper rate plus 100 basis points. On the issue date, the monthly commercial paper rate is 3 percent, compounded monthly.

(ii) Equivalent fixed rate debt instrument. Under paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section, the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument for the variable rate debt instrument is a 4-year debt instrument that has an issue price and stated principal amount of $100,000. The equivalent fixed rate debt instrument provides for monthly payments of interest at 3 percent, compounded monthly, for the first year ($250 per month) and monthly payments of interest at 4 percent, compounded monthly, for the last 3 years ($333.33 per month).

(iii) De minimis OID. Under § 1.1273-1(a), because a portion (100 basis points) of each interest payment in the final 3 years is not a qualified stated interest payment, the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument has OID of $2,999.88 ($102,999.88 −$100,000). However, under § 1.1273-1(d)(4) (the de minimis rule relating to teaser rates and interest holidays), the stated redemption price at maturity of the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument is $100,999.96 ($100,000 (issue price) plus $999.96 (the greater of the amount of foregone interest ($999.96) and the amount equal to the excess of the instrument's stated principal amount over its issue price ($0)). Thus, the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument is treated as having OID of $999.96 ($100,999.96 −$100,000). Because this amount is less than the de minimis amount of $1,010 (0.0025 multiplied by $100,999.96 multiplied by 4 complete years to maturity), the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument has de minimis OID. Therefore, the variable rate debt instrument has zero OID and all stated interest payments are qualified stated interest payments.

Example 3. Adjustment to qualified stated interest for actual payment of interest.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, Z purchases at original issue, for $90,000, a variable rate debt instrument that matures on January 1, 1997, and has a stated principal amount of $100,000, payable at maturity. The debt instrument provides for annual payments of interest on January 1 of each year, beginning on January 1, 1996. The amount of interest payable is the value of annual LIBOR on the payment date. The value of annual LIBOR on January 1, 1995, and January 1, 1996, is 5 percent, compounded annually. The value of annual LIBOR on January 1, 1997, is 7 percent, compounded annually.

(ii) Accrual of OID and qualified stated interest. Under paragraph (e)(2) of this section, the variable rate debt instrument is treated as a 2-year debt instrument that has an issue price of $90,000, a stated principal amount of $100,000, and interest payments of $5,000 at the end of each year. The debt instrument has $10,000 of OID and the annual interest payments of $5,000 are qualified stated interest payments. Under § 1.1272-1, the debt instrument has a yield of 10.82 percent, compounded annually. The amount of OID allocable to the first annual accrual period (assuming Z uses annual accrual periods) is $4,743.25 (($90,000 × .1082)− $5,000), and the amount of OID allocable to the second annual accrual period is $5,256.75 ($100,000−$94,743.25). Under paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section, the $2,000 difference between the $7,000 interest payment actually made at maturity and the $5,000 interest payment assumed to be made at maturity under the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument is treated as additional qualified stated interest for the period.

(4) Variable rate debt instrument that provides for a single fixed rate

(i) General rule. If a variable rate debt instrument provides for stated interest either at one or more qualified floating rates or at a qualified inverse floating rate and in addition provides for stated interest at a single fixed rate (other than an initial fixed rate described in paragraph (a)(3)(ii) of this section), the amount of interest and OID are determined using the method of paragraph (e)(3) of this section, as modified by this paragraph (e)(4). For purposes of paragraphs (e)(3)(i) through (e)(3)(iii) of this section, the variable rate debt instrument is treated as if it provided for a qualified floating rate (or a qualified inverse floating rate, if the debt instrument provides for a qualified inverse floating rate), rather than the fixed rate. The qualified floating rate (or qualified inverse floating rate) replacing the fixed rate must be such that the fair market value of the variable rate debt instrument as of the issue date would be approximately the same as the fair market value of an otherwise identical debt instrument that provides for the qualified floating rate (or qualified inverse floating rate) rather than the fixed rate.

(ii) Example. The following example illustrates the rule in paragraph (e)(4)(i) of this section.

Example: Variable rate debt instrument that provides for a single fixed rate.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1995, X purchases at original issue, for $100,000, a variable rate debt instrument that matures on January 1, 2001, and that has a stated principal amount of $100,000. The debt instrument provides for payments of interest on January 1 of each year, beginning on January 1, 1996. For the first 4 years, the interest rate is 4 percent, compounded annually, and for the last 2 years the interest rate is the value of 1-year LIBOR, as of the payment date, plus 200 basis points. On January 1, 1995, the value of 1-year LIBOR is 2 percent, compounded annually. In addition, assume that on January 1, 1995, the variable rate debt instrument has approximately the same fair market value as an otherwise identical debt instrument that provides for an interest rate equal to the value of 1-year LIBOR, as of the payment date, for the first 4 years.

(ii) Equivalent fixed rate debt instrument. Under paragraph (e)(4)(i) of this section, for purposes of paragraphs (e)(3)(i) through (e)(3)(iii) of this section, the variable rate debt instrument is treated as if it provided for an interest rate equal to the value of 1-year LIBOR, as of the payment date, for the first 4 years. Under paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section, the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument for the variable rate debt instrument is a 6-year debt instrument that has an issue price and stated principal amount of $100,000. The equivalent fixed rate debt instrument provides for interest payments of $2,000 for the first 4 years and $4,000 for the last 2 years.

(iii) Accrual of OID and qualified stated interest. Under § 1.1273-1, the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument has OID of $4,000 because a portion (200 basis points) of each interest payment in the last 2 years is not a qualified stated interest payment. The $4,000 of OID is allocable over the 6-year term of the debt instrument under § 1.1272-1. Under paragraph (e)(3)(iv) of this section, the difference between the $4,000 payment made in the first 4 years and the $2,000 payment assumed to be made on the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument in those years is an adjustment to qualified stated interest. In addition, any difference between the amount actually paid in each of the last 2 years and the $4,000 payment assumed to be made on the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument is an adjustment to qualified stated interest.

(f) Special rule for certain reset bonds. Notwithstanding paragraph (e) of this section, this paragraph (f) provides a special rule for a variable rate debt instrument that provides for stated interest at a fixed rate for an initial interval, and provides that on the date immediately following the end of the initial interval (the effective date) the stated interest rate will be a rate determined under a procedure (such as an auction procedure) so that the fair market value of the instrument on the effective date will be a fixed amount (the reset value). Solely for purposes of calculating the accrual of OID, the variable rate debt instrument is treated as—

(1) Maturing on the date immediately preceding the effective date for an amount equal to the reset value; and

(2) Reissued on the effective date for an amount equal to the reset value.

[T.D. 8517, 59 FR 4827, Feb. 2, 1994, as amended by T.D. 8674, 61 FR 30153, June 14, 1996]

§ 1.1275-6 Integration of qualifying debt instruments.

(a) In general. This section generally provides for the integration of a qualifying debt instrument with a hedge or combination of hedges if the combined cash flows of the components are substantially equivalent to the cash flows on a fixed or variable rate debt instrument. The integrated transaction is generally subject to the rules of this section rather than the rules to which each component of the transaction would be subject on a separate basis. The purpose of this section is to permit a more appropriate determination of the character and timing of income, deductions, gains, or losses than would be permitted by separate treatment of the components. The rules of this section affect only the taxpayer who holds (or issues) the qualifying debt instrument and enters into the hedge.

(b) Definitions

(1) Qualifying debt instrument. A qualifying debt instrument is any debt instrument (including an integrated transaction as defined in paragraph (c) of this section) other than—

(i) A tax-exempt obligation as defined in section 1275(a)(3);

(ii) A debt instrument to which section 1272(a)(6) applies (certain interests in or mortgages held by a REMIC, and certain other debt instruments with payments subject to acceleration); or

(iii) A debt instrument that is subject to § 1.483-4 or § 1.1275-4(c) (certain contingent payment debt instruments issued for nonpublicly traded property).

(2) Section 1.1275-6 hedge

(i) In general. A § 1.1275-6 hedge is any financial instrument (as defined in paragraph (b)(3) of this section) if the combined cash flows of the financial instrument and the qualifying debt instrument permit the calculation of a yield to maturity (under the principles of section 1272), or the right to the combined cash flows would qualify under § 1.1275-5 as a variable rate debt instrument that pays interest at a qualified floating rate or rates (except for the requirement that the interest payments be stated as interest). A financial instrument is not a § 1.1275-6 hedge, however, if the resulting synthetic debt instrument does not have the same term as the remaining term of the qualifying debt instrument. A financial instrument that hedges currency risk is not a § 1.1275-6 hedge.

(ii) Limitations

(A) A debt instrument issued by a taxpayer and a debt instrument held by the taxpayer cannot be part of the same integrated transaction.

(B) A debt instrument can be a § 1.1275-6 hedge only if it is issued substantially contemporaneously with, and has the same maturity (including rights to accelerate or delay payments) as, the qualifying debt instrument.

(3) Financial instrument. For purposes of this section, a financial instrument is a spot, forward, or futures contract, an option, a notional principal contract, a debt instrument, or a similar instrument, or combination or series of financial instruments. Stock is not a financial instrument for purposes of this section.

(4) Synthetic debt instrument. The synthetic debt instrument is the hypothetical debt instrument with the same cash flows as the combined cash flows of the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge.

(c) Integrated transaction

(1) Integration by taxpayer. Except as otherwise provided in this section, a qualifying debt instrument and a § 1.1275-6 hedge are an integrated transaction if all of the following requirements are satisfied:

(i) The taxpayer satisfies the identification requirements of paragraph (e) of this section on or before the date the taxpayer enters into the § 1.1275-6 hedge.

(ii) None of the parties to the § 1.1275-6 hedge are related within the meaning of section 267(b) or 707(b)(1), or, if the parties are related, the party providing the hedge uses, for Federal income tax purposes, a mark-to-market method of accounting for the hedge and all similar or related transactions.

(iii) Both the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge are entered into by the same individual, partnership, trust, estate, or corporation (regardless of whether the corporation is a member of an affiliated group of corporations that files a consolidated return).

(iv) If the taxpayer is a foreign person engaged in a U.S. trade or business and the taxpayer issues or acquires a qualifying debt instrument, or enters into a § 1.1275-6 hedge, through the trade or business, all items of income and expense associated with the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge (other than interest expense that is subject to § 1.882-5) would have been effectively connected with the U.S. trade or business throughout the term of the qualifying debt instrument had this section not applied.

(v) Neither the qualifying debt instrument, nor any other debt instrument that is part of the same issue as the qualifying debt instrument, nor the § 1.1275-6 hedge was, with respect to the taxpayer, part of an integrated transaction that was terminated or otherwise legged out of within the 30 days immediately preceding the date that would be the issue date of the synthetic debt instrument.

(vi) The qualifying debt instrument is issued or acquired by the taxpayer on or before the date of the first payment on the § 1.1275-6 hedge, whether made or received by the taxpayer (including a payment made to purchase the hedge). If the qualifying debt instrument is issued or acquired by the taxpayer after, but substantially contemporaneously with, the date of the first payment on the § 1.1275-6 hedge, the qualifying debt instrument is treated, solely for purposes of this paragraph (c)(1)(vi), as meeting the requirements of the preceding sentence.

(vii) Neither the § 1.1275-6 hedge nor the qualifying debt instrument was, with respect to the taxpayer, part of a straddle (as defined in section 1092(c)) prior to the issue date of the synthetic debt instrument.

(2) Integration by Commissioner. The Commissioner may treat a qualifying debt instrument and a financial instrument (whether entered into by the taxpayer or by a related party) as an integrated transaction if the combined cash flows on the qualifying debt instrument and financial instrument are substantially the same as the combined cash flows required for the financial instrument to be a § 1.1275-6 hedge. The Commissioner, however, may not integrate a transaction unless the qualifying debt instrument either is subject to § 1.1275-4 or is subject to § 1.1275-5 and pays interest at an objective rate. The circumstances under which the Commissioner may require integration include, but are not limited to, the following:

(i) A taxpayer fails to identify a qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge under paragraph (e) of this section.

(ii) A taxpayer issues or acquires a qualifying debt instrument and a related party (within the meaning of section 267(b) or 707(b)(1)) enters into the § 1.1275-6 hedge.

(iii) A taxpayer issues or acquires a qualifying debt instrument and enters into the § 1.1275-6 hedge with a related party (within the meaning of section 267(b) or 707(b)(1)).

(iv) The taxpayer legs out of an integrated transaction and within 30 days enters into a new § 1.1275-6 hedge with respect to the same qualifying debt instrument or another debt instrument that is part of the same issue.

(d) Special rules for legging into and legging out of an integrated transaction

(1) Legging into

(i) Definition. Legging into an integrated transaction under this section means that a § 1.1275-6 hedge is entered into after the date the qualifying debt instrument is issued or acquired by the taxpayer, and the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section are satisfied on the date the § 1.1275-6 hedge is entered into (the leg-in date).

(ii) Treatment. If a taxpayer legs into an integrated transaction, the taxpayer treats the qualifying debt instrument under the applicable rules for taking interest and OID into account up to the leg-in date, except that the day before the leg-in date is treated as the end of an accrual period. As of the leg-in date, the qualifying debt instrument is subject to the rules of paragraph (f) of this section.

(iii) Anti-abuse rule. If a taxpayer legs into an integrated transaction with a principal purpose of deferring or accelerating income or deductions on the qualifying debt instrument, the Commissioner may—

(A) Treat the qualifying debt instrument as sold for its fair market value on the leg-in date; or

(B) Refuse to allow the taxpayer to integrate the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge.

(2) Legging out

(i) Definition

(A) Legging out if the taxpayer has integrated. If a taxpayer has integrated a qualifying debt instrument and a § 1.1275-6 hedge under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, legging out means that, prior to the maturity of the synthetic debt instrument, the § 1.1275-6 hedge ceases to meet the requirements for a § 1.1275-6 hedge, the taxpayer fails to meet any requirement of paragraph (c)(1) of this section, or the taxpayer disposes of or otherwise terminates all or a part of the qualifying debt instrument or § 1.1275-6 hedge. If the taxpayer fails to meet the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section but meets the requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the Commissioner may treat the taxpayer as not legging out.

(B) Legging out if the Commissioner has integrated. If the Commissioner has integrated a qualifying debt instrument and a financial instrument under paragraph (c)(2) of this section, legging out means that, prior to the maturity of the synthetic debt instrument, the requirements for Commissioner integration under paragraph (c)(2) of this section are not met or the taxpayer fails to meet the requirements for taxpayer integration under paragraph (c)(1) of this section and the Commissioner agrees to allow the taxpayer to be treated as legging out.

(C) Exception for certain nonrecognition transactions. If, in a single nonrecognition transaction, a taxpayer disposes of, or ceases to be primarily liable on, the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge, the taxpayer is not treated as legging out. Instead, the integrated transaction is treated under the rules governing the nonrecognition transaction. For example, if a holder of an integrated transaction is acquired in a reorganization under section 368(a)(1)(A), the holder is treated as disposing of the synthetic debt instrument in the reorganization rather than legging out. If the successor holder is not eligible for integrated treatment, the successor is treated as legging out.

(ii) Operating rules. If a taxpayer legs out (or is treated as legging out) of an integrated transaction, the following rules apply:

(A) The transaction is treated as an integrated transaction during the time the requirements of paragraph (c) (1) or (2) of this section, as appropriate, are satisfied.

(B) Immediately before the taxpayer legs out, the taxpayer is treated as selling or otherwise terminating the synthetic debt instrument for its fair market value and, except as provided in paragraph (d)(2)(ii)(D) of this section, any income, deduction, gain, or loss is realized and recognized at that time.

(C) If, immediately after the taxpayer legs out, the taxpayer holds or remains primarily liable on the qualifying debt instrument, adjustments are made to reflect any difference between the fair market value of the qualifying debt instrument and the adjusted issue price of the qualifying debt instrument. If, immediately after the taxpayer legs out, the taxpayer is a party to a § 1.1275-6 hedge, the § 1.1275-6 hedge is treated as entered into at its fair market value.

(D) If a taxpayer legs out of an integrated transaction by disposing of or otherwise terminating a § 1.1275-6 hedge within 30 days of legging into the integrated transaction, then any loss or deduction determined under paragraph (d)(2)(ii)(B) of this section is not allowed. Appropriate adjustments are made to the qualifying debt instrument for any disallowed loss. The adjustments are taken into account on a yield to maturity basis over the remaining term of the qualifying debt instrument.

(E) If a holder of a debt instrument subject to § 1.1275-4 legs into an integrated transaction with respect to the instrument and subsequently legs out of the integrated transaction, any gain recognized under paragraph (d)(2)(ii) (B) or (C) of this section is treated as interest income to the extent determined under the principles of § 1.1275-4(b)(8)(iii)(B) (rules for determining the character of gain on the sale of a debt instrument all of the payments on which have been fixed). If the synthetic debt instrument would qualify as a variable rate debt instrument, the equivalent fixed rate debt instrument determined under § 1.1275-5(e) is used for this purpose.

(e) Identification requirements. For each integrated transaction, a taxpayer must enter and retain as part of its books and records the following information—

(1) The date the qualifying debt instrument was issued or acquired (or is expected to be issued or acquired) by the taxpayer and the date the § 1.1275-6 hedge was entered into by the taxpayer;

(2) A description of the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge; and

(3) A summary of the cash flows and accruals resulting from treating the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge as an integrated transaction (i.e., the cash flows and accruals on the synthetic debt instrument).

(f) Taxation of integrated transactions

(1) General rule. An integrated transaction is generally treated as a single transaction by the taxpayer during the period that the transaction qualifies as an integrated transaction. Except as provided in paragraph (f)(12) of this section, while a qualifying debt instrument and a § 1.1275-6 hedge are part of an integrated transaction, neither the qualifying debt instrument nor the § 1.1275-6 hedge is subject to the rules that would apply on a separate basis to the debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge, including section 1092 or § 1.446-4. The rules that would govern the treatment of the synthetic debt instrument generally govern the treatment of the integrated transaction. For example, the integrated transaction may be subject to section 263(g) or, if the synthetic debt instrument would be part of a straddle, section 1092. Generally, the synthetic debt instrument is subject to sections 163(e) and 1271 through 1275, with terms as set forth in paragraphs (f) (2) through (13) of this section.

(2) Issue date. The issue date of the synthetic debt instrument is the first date on which the taxpayer entered into all of the components of the synthetic debt instrument.

(3) Term. The term of the synthetic debt instrument is the period beginning on the issue date of the synthetic debt instrument and ending on the maturity date of the qualifying debt instrument.

(4) Issue price. The issue price of the synthetic debt instrument is the adjusted issue price of the qualifying debt instrument on the issue date of the synthetic debt instrument. If, as a result of entering into the § 1.1275-6 hedge, the taxpayer pays or receives one or more payments that are substantially contemporaneous with the issue date of the synthetic debt instrument, the payments reduce or increase the issue price as appropriate.

(5) Adjusted issue price. In general, the adjusted issue price of the synthetic debt instrument is determined under the principles of § 1.1275-1(b).

(6) Qualified stated interest. No amounts payable on the synthetic debt instrument are qualified stated interest within the meaning of § 1.1273-1(c).

(7) Stated redemption price at maturity

(i) Synthetic debt instruments that are borrowings. In general, if the synthetic debt instrument is a borrowing, the instrument's stated redemption price at maturity is the sum of all amounts paid or to be paid on the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge, reduced by any amounts received or to be received on the § 1.1275-6 hedge.

(ii) Synthetic debt instruments that are held by the taxpayer. In general, if the synthetic debt instrument is held by the taxpayer, the instrument's stated redemption price at maturity is the sum of all amounts received or to be received by the taxpayer on the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge, reduced by any amounts paid or to be paid by the taxpayer on the § 1.1275-6 hedge.

(iii) Certain amounts ignored. For purposes of this paragraph (f)(7), if an amount paid or received on the § 1.1275-6 hedge is taken into account under paragraph (f)(4) of this section to determine the issue price of the synthetic debt instrument, the amount is not taken into account to determine the synthetic debt instrument's stated redemption price at maturity.

(8) Source of interest income and allocation of expense. The source of interest income from the synthetic debt instrument is determined by reference to the source of income of the qualifying debt instrument under sections 861(a)(1) and 862(a)(1). For purposes of section 904, the character of interest from the synthetic debt instrument is determined by reference to the character of the interest income from the qualifying debt instrument. Interest expense is allocated and apportioned under regulations under section 861 or under § 1.882-5.

(9) Effectively connected income. If the requirements of paragraph (c)(1)(iv) of this section are satisfied, any interest income resulting from the synthetic debt instrument entered into by the foreign person is treated as effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business, and any interest expense resulting from the synthetic debt instrument entered into by the foreign person is allocated and apportioned under § 1.882-5.

(10) Not a short-term obligation. For purposes of section 1272(a)(2)(C), a synthetic debt instrument is not treated as a short-term obligation.

(11) Special rules in the event of integration by the Commissioner. If the Commissioner requires integration, appropriate adjustments are made to the treatment of the synthetic debt instrument, and, if necessary, the qualifying debt instrument and financial instrument. For example, the Commissioner may treat a financial instrument that is not a § 1.1275-6 hedge as a § 1.1275-6 hedge when applying the rules of this section. The issue date of the synthetic debt instrument is the date determined appropriate by the Commissioner to require integration.

(12) Retention of separate transaction rules for certain purposes. This paragraph (f)(12) provides for the retention of separate transaction rules for certain purposes. In addition, by publication in the Internal Revenue Bulletin (see § 601.601(d)(2)(ii) of this chapter), the Commissioner may require use of separate transaction rules for any aspect of an integrated transaction.

(i) Foreign persons that enter into integrated transactions giving rise to U.S. source income not effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business. If a foreign person enters into an integrated transaction that gives rise to U.S. source interest income (determined under the source rules for the synthetic debt instrument) not effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business of the foreign person, paragraph (f) of this section does not apply for purposes of sections 871(a), 881, 1441, 1442, and 6049. These sections of the Internal Revenue Code are applied to the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge on a separate basis.

(ii) Relationship between taxpayer and other persons. Because the rules of this section affect only the taxpayer that enters into an integrated transaction (i.e., either the issuer or a particular holder of a qualifying debt instrument), any provisions of the Internal Revenue Code or regulations that govern the relationship between the taxpayer and any other person are applied on a separate basis. For example, taxpayers must comply with any reporting or disclosure requirements on any qualifying debt instrument as if it were not part of an integrated transaction. Thus, if required under § 1.1275-4(b)(4), an issuer of a contingent payment debt instrument subject to integrated treatment must provide the projected payment schedule to holders. Similarly, if a U.S. corporation enters into an integrated transaction that includes a notional principal contract, the source of any payment received by the counterparty on the notional principal contract is determined under § 1.863-7 as if the contract were not part of an integrated transaction, and, if received by a foreign person who is not engaged in a U.S. trade or business, the payment is non-U.S. source income that is not subject to U.S. withholding tax.

(iii) Excise tax on repurchase of corporate stock

(A) Application. If a taxpayer enters into an integrated transaction (for example, a convertible debt instrument integrated with one or more § 1.1275-6 hedges consisting of an option on the taxpayer's own stock), then, solely for purposes of section 4501 of the Code and the stock repurchase excise tax regulations (as defined in § 58.4501-1(b)(37) of this chapter), the taxpayer must apply the rules that would apply on a separate basis to the components of the integrated transaction, rather than the rules that otherwise would apply to the integrated transaction under this section.

(B) Applicability date. Notwithstanding paragraph (j) of this section, paragraph (f)(12)(iii)(A) of this section applies to an integrated transaction outstanding after December 31, 2022 (regardless of when such integrated transaction was entered into by the taxpayer).

(13) Coordination with consolidated return rules. If a taxpayer enters into a § 1.1275-6 hedge with a member of the same consolidated group (the counterparty) and the § 1.1275-6 hedge is part of an integrated transaction for the taxpayer, the § 1.1275-6 hedge is not treated as an intercompany transaction for purposes of § 1.1502-13. If the taxpayer legs out of integrated treatment, the taxpayer and the counterparty are each treated as disposing of its position in the § 1.1275-6 hedge under the principles of paragraph (d)(2) of this section. If the § 1.1275-6 hedge remains in existence after the leg-out date, the § 1.1275-6 hedge is treated under the rules that would otherwise apply to the transaction (including § 1.1502-13 if the transaction is between members).

(g) Predecessors and successors. For purposes of this section, any reference to a taxpayer, holder, issuer, or person includes, where appropriate, a reference to a predecessor or successor. For purposes of the preceding sentence, a predecessor is a transferor of an asset or liability (including an integrated transaction) to a transferee (the successor) in a nonrecognition transaction. Appropriate adjustments, if necessary, are made in the application of this section to predecessors and successors.

(h) Examples. The following examples illustrate the provisions of this section. In each example, assume that the qualifying debt instrument is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes. No inference is intended, however, as to whether the debt instrument is a debt instrument for Federal income tax purposes.

Example 1. Issuer hedge.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1997, V, a domestic corporation, issues a 5-year debt instrument for $1,000. The debt instrument provides for annual payments of interest at a rate equal to the value of 1-year LIBOR and a principal payment of $1,000 at maturity. On the same day, V enters into a 5-year interest rate swap agreement with an unrelated party. Under the swap, V pays 6 percent and receives 1-year LIBOR on a notional principal amount of $1,000. The payments on the swap are fixed and made on the same days as the payments on the debt instrument. On January 1, 1997, V identifies the debt instrument and the swap as an integrated transaction in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section.

(ii) Eligibility for integration. The debt instrument is a qualifying debt instrument. The swap is a § 1.1275-6 hedge because it is a financial instrument and a yield to maturity on the combined cash flows of the swap and the debt instrument can be calculated. V has met the identification requirements, and the other requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section are satisfied. Therefore, the transaction is an integrated transaction under this section.

(iii) Treatment of the synthetic debt instrument. The synthetic debt instrument is a 5-year debt instrument that has an issue price of $1,000 and provides for annual interest payments of $60 and a principal payment of $1,000 at maturity. Under paragraph (f)(6) of this section, no amounts payable on the synthetic debt instrument are qualified stated interest. Thus, under paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section, the synthetic debt instrument has a stated redemption price at maturity of $1,300 (the sum of all amounts to be paid on the qualifying debt instrument and the swap, reduced by amounts to be received on the swap). The synthetic debt instrument, therefore, has $300 of OID.

Example 2. Issuer hedge with an option.

(i) Facts. On December 31, 1996, W, a domestic corporation, issues for $1,000 a debt instrument that matures on December 31, 1999. The debt instrument has a stated principal amount of $1,000 payable at maturity. The debt instrument also provides for a payment at maturity equal to $10 times the increase, if any, in the value of a nationally known composite index of stocks from December 31, 1996, to the maturity date. On December 31, 1996, W purchases from an unrelated party an option that pays $10 times the increase, if any, in the stock index from December 31, 1996, to December 31, 1999. W pays $250 for the option. On December 31, 1996, W identifies the debt instrument and option as an integrated transaction in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section.

(ii) Eligibility for integration. The debt instrument is a qualifying debt instrument. The option is a § 1.1275-6 hedge because it is a financial instrument and a yield to maturity on the combined cash flows of the option and the debt instrument can be calculated. W has met the identification requirements, and the other requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section are satisfied. Therefore, the transaction is an integrated transaction under this section.

(iii) Treatment of the synthetic debt instrument. Under paragraph (f)(4) of this section, the issue price of the synthetic debt instrument is equal to the issue price of the debt instrument ($1,000) reduced by the payment for the option ($250). As a result, the synthetic debt instrument is a 3-year debt instrument with an issue price of $750. Under paragraph (f)(7) of this section, the synthetic debt instrument has a stated redemption price at maturity of $1,000 (the $250 payment for the option is not taken into account). The synthetic debt instrument, therefore, has $250 of OID.

Example 3. Hedge with prepaid swap.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1997, H purchases for £1,000 a 5-year debt instrument that provides for semiannual payments based on 6-month pound LIBOR and a payment of the £1,000 principal at maturity. On the same day, H enters into a swap with an unrelated third party under which H receives semiannual payments, in pounds, of 10 percent, compounded semiannually, and makes semiannual payments, in pounds, of 6-month pound LIBOR on a notional principal amount of £1,000. Payments on the swap are fixed and made on the same dates as the payments on the debt instrument. H also makes a £162 prepayment on the swap. On January 1, 1997, H identifies the swap and the debt instrument as an integrated transaction in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section.

(ii) Eligibility for integration. The debt instrument is a qualifying debt instrument. The swap is a § 1.1275-6 hedge because it is a financial instrument and a yield to maturity on the combined cash flows of the swap and the debt instrument can be calculated. Although the debt instrument is denominated in pounds, the swap hedges only interest rate risk, not currency risk. Therefore, the transaction is an integrated transaction under this section. See § 1.988-5(a) for the treatment of a debt instrument and a swap if the swap hedges currency risk.

(iii) Treatment of the synthetic debt instrument. Under paragraph (f)(4) of this section, the issue price of the synthetic debt instrument is equal to the issue price of the debt instrument (£1,000) increased by the prepayment on the swap (£162). As a result, the synthetic debt instrument is a 5-year debt instrument that has an issue price of £1,162 and provides for semiannual interest payments of £50 and a principal payment of £1,000 at maturity. Under paragraph (f)(6) of this section, no amounts payable on the synthetic debt instrument are qualified stated interest. Thus, under paragraph (f)(7)(ii) of this section, the synthetic debt instrument's stated redemption price at maturity is £1,500 (the sum of all amounts to be received on the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge, reduced by all amounts to be paid on the § 1.1275-6 hedge other than the £162 prepayment for the swap). The synthetic debt instrument, therefore, has £338 of OID.

Example 4. Legging into an integrated transaction by a holder.

(i) Facts. On December 31, 1996, X corporation purchases for $1,000,000 a debt instrument that matures on December 31, 2006. The debt instrument provides for annual payments of interest at the rate of 6 percent and for a payment at maturity equal to $1,000,000, increased by the excess, if any, of the price of 1,000 units of a commodity on December 31, 2006, over $350,000, and decreased by the excess, if any, of $350,000 over the price of 1,000 units of the commodity on that date. The projected amount of the payment at maturity determined under § 1.1275-4(b)(4) is $1,020,000. On December 31, 1999, X enters into a cash-settled forward contract with an unrelated party to sell 1,000 units of the commodity on December 31, 2006, for $450,000. On December 31, 1999, X also identifies the debt instrument and the forward contract as an integrated transaction in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section.

(ii) Eligibility for integration. X meets the requirements for integration as of December 31, 1999. Therefore, X legged into an integrated transaction on that date. Prior to that date, X treats the debt instrument under the applicable rules of § 1.1275-4.

(iii) Treatment of the synthetic debt instrument. As of December 31, 1999, the debt instrument and the forward contract are treated as an integrated transaction. The issue price of the synthetic debt instrument is equal to the adjusted issue price of the qualifying debt instrument on the leg-in date, $1,004,804 (assuming one year accrual periods). The term of the synthetic debt instrument is from December 31, 1999, to December 31, 2006. The synthetic debt instrument provides for annual interest payments of $60,000 and a principal payment at maturity of $1,100,000 ($1,000,000 + $450,000 − $350,000). Under paragraph (f)(6) of this section, no amounts payable on the synthetic debt instrument are qualified stated interest. Thus, under paragraph (f)(7)(ii) of this section, the synthetic debt instrument's stated redemption price at maturity is $1,520,000 (the sum of all amounts to be received by X on the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge, reduced by all amounts to be paid by X on the § 1.1275-6 hedge). The synthetic debt instrument, therefore, has $515,196 of OID.

Example 5. Abusive leg-in.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1997, Y corporation purchases for $1,000,000 a debt instrument that matures on December 31, 2001. The debt instrument provides for annual payments of interest at the rate of 6 percent, a payment on December 31, 1999, of the increase, if any, in the price of a commodity from January 1, 1997, to December 31, 1999, and a payment at maturity of $1,000,000 and the increase, if any, in the price of the commodity from December 31, 1999 to maturity. Because the debt instrument is a contingent payment debt instrument subject to § 1.1275-4, Y accrues interest based on the projected payment schedule.

(ii) Leg-in. By late 1999, the price of the commodity has substantially increased, and Y expects a positive adjustment on December 31, 1999. In late 1999, Y enters into an agreement to exchange the two commodity based payments on the debt instrument for two payments on the same dates of $100,000 each. Y identifies the transaction as an integrated transaction in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section. Y disposes of the hedge in early 2000.

(iii) Treatment. The legging into an integrated transaction has the effect of deferring the positive adjustment from 1999 to 2000. Because Y legged into the integrated transaction with a principal purpose to defer the positive adjustment, the Commissioner may treat the debt instrument as sold for its fair market value on the leg-in date or refuse to allow integration.

Example 6. Integration of offsetting debt instruments.

(i) Facts. On January 1, 1997, Z issues two 10-year debt instruments. The first, Issue 1, has an issue price of $1,000, pays interest annually at 6 percent, and, at maturity, pays $1,000, increased by $1 times the increase, if any, in the value of the S&P 100 Index over the term of the instrument and reduced by $1 times the decrease, if any, in the value of the S&P 100 Index over the term of the instrument. However, the amount paid at maturity may not be less than $500 or more than $1,500. The second, Issue 2, has an issue price of $1,000, pays interest annually at 8 percent, and, at maturity, pays $1,000, reduced by $1 times the increase, if any, in the value of the S&P 100 Index over the term of the instrument and increased by $1 times the decrease, if any, in the value of the S&P 100 Index over the term of the instrument. The amount paid at maturity may not be less than $500 or more than $1,500. On January 1, 1997, Z identifies Issue 1 as the qualifying debt instrument, Issue 2 as a § 1.1275-6 hedge, and otherwise meets the identification requirements of paragraph (e) of this section.

(ii) Eligibility for integration. Both Issue 1 and Issue 2 are qualifying debt instruments. Z has met the identification requirements by identifying Issue 1 as the qualifying debt instrument and Issue 2 as the § 1.1275-6 hedge. The other requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section are satisfied. Therefore, the transaction is an integrated transaction under this section.

(iii) Treatment of the synthetic debt instrument. The synthetic debt instrument has an issue price of $2,000, provides for a payment at maturity of $2,000, and, in addition, provides for annual payments of $140. Under paragraph (f)(6) of this section, no amounts payable on the synthetic debt instrument are qualified stated interest. Thus, under paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section, the synthetic debt instrument's stated redemption price at maturity is $3,400 (the sum of all amounts to be paid on the qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge, reduced by amounts to be received on the § 1.1275-6 hedge other than the $1,000 payment received on the issue date). The synthetic debt instrument, therefore, has $1,400 of OID.

Example 7. Integrated transaction entered into by a foreign person.

(i) Facts. X, a foreign person, enters into an integrated transaction by purchasing a qualifying debt instrument that pays U.S. source interest and entering into a notional principal contract with a U.S. corporation. Neither the income from the qualifying debt instrument nor the income from the notional principal contract is effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business. The notional principal contract is a § 1.1275-6 hedge.

(ii) Treatment of integrated transaction. Under paragraph (f)(8) of this section, X will receive U.S. source income from the integrated transaction. However, under paragraph (f)(12)(i) of this section, the qualifying debt instrument and the notional principal contract are treated as if they are not part of an integrated transaction for purposes of determining whether tax is due and must be withheld on income. Accordingly, because the § 1.1275-6 hedge would produce foreign source income under § 1.863-7 to X if it were not part of an integrated transaction, any income on the § 1.1275-6 hedge generally will not be subject to tax under sections 871(a) and 881, and the U.S. corporation that is the counterparty will not be required to withhold tax on payments under the § 1.1275-6 hedge under sections 1441 and 1442.

(i) [Reserved]

(j) Effective date. This section applies to a qualifying debt instrument issued on or after August 13, 1996. This section also applies to a qualifying debt instrument acquired by the taxpayer on or after August 13, 1996, if—

(1) The qualifying debt instrument is a fixed rate debt instrument or a variable rate debt instrument; or

(2) The qualifying debt instrument and the § 1.1275-6 hedge are acquired by the taxpayer substantially contemporaneously.

[T.D. 8674, 61 FR 30155, June 14, 1996, as amended by T.D. 10037, 90 FR 53159, Nov. 24, 2025]

§ 1.1275-7 Inflation-indexed debt instruments.

(a) Overview. This section provides rules for the Federal income tax treatment of an inflation-indexed debt instrument. If a debt instrument is an inflation-indexed debt instrument, one of two methods will apply to the instrument: the coupon bond method (as described in paragraph (d) of this section) or the discount bond method (as described in paragraph (e) of this section). Both methods determine the amount of OID that is taken into account each year by a holder or an issuer of an inflation-indexed debt instrument.

(b) Applicability

(1) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, this section applies to an inflation-indexed debt instrument as defined in paragraph (c)(1) of this section. For example, this section applies to Treasury Inflation-Protected Securities (TIPS).

(2) Exceptions. This section does not apply to an inflation-indexed debt instrument that is also—

(i) A debt instrument (other than a tax-exempt obligation) described in section 1272(a)(2) (for example, U.S. savings bonds, certain loans between natural persons, and short-term taxable obligations); or

(ii) A debt instrument subject to section 529 (certain debt instruments issued by qualified state tuition programs).

(c) Definitions. The following definitions apply for purposes of this section:

(1) Inflation-indexed debt instrument. An inflation-indexed debt instrument is a debt instrument that satisfies the following conditions:

(i) Issued for cash. The debt instrument is issued for U.S. dollars and all payments on the instrument are denominated in U.S. dollars.

(ii) Indexed for inflation and deflation. Except for a minimum guarantee payment (as defined in paragraph (c)(5) of this section), each payment on the debt instrument is indexed for inflation and deflation. A payment is indexed for inflation and deflation if the amount of the payment is equal to—

(A) The amount that would be payable if there were no inflation or deflation over the term of the debt instrument, multiplied by

(B) A ratio, the numerator of which is the value of the reference index for the date of the payment and the denominator of which is the value of the reference index for the issue date.

(iii) No other contingencies. No payment on the debt instrument is subject to a contingency other than the inflation contingency or the contingencies described in this paragraph (c)(1)(iii). A debt instrument may provide for—

(A) A minimum guarantee payment as defined in paragraph (c)(5) of this section; or

(B) Payments under one or more alternate payment schedules if the payments under each payment schedule are indexed for inflation and deflation and a payment schedule for the debt instrument can be determined under § 1.1272-1(c). (For purposes of this section, the rules of § 1.1272-1(c) are applied to the debt instrument by assuming that no inflation or deflation will occur over the term of the instrument.)

(2) Reference index. The reference index is an index used to measure inflation and deflation over the term of a debt instrument. To qualify as a reference index, an index must satisfy the following conditions:

(i) The value of the index is reset once a month to a current value of a single qualified inflation index (as defined in paragraph (c)(3) of this section). For this purpose, a value of a qualified inflation index is current if the value has been updated and published within the preceding six month period.

(ii) The reset occurs on the same day of each month (the reset date).

(iii) The value of the index for any date between reset dates is determined through straight-line interpolation.

(3) Qualified inflation index. A qualified inflation index is a general price or wage index that is updated and published at least monthly by an agency of the United States Government (for example, the non-seasonally adjusted U.S. City Average All Items Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers (CPI-U), which is published by the Bureau of Labor Statistics of the Department of Labor).

(4) Inflation-adjusted principal amount. For any date, the inflation-adjusted principal amount of an inflation-indexed debt instrument is an amount equal to—

(i) The outstanding principal amount of the debt instrument (determined as if there were no inflation or deflation over the term of the instrument), multiplied by

(ii) A ratio, the numerator of which is the value of the reference index for the date and the denominator of which is the value of the reference index for the issue date.

(5) Minimum guarantee payment. In general, a minimum guarantee payment is an additional payment made at maturity on a debt instrument if the total amount of inflation-adjusted principal paid on the instrument is less than the instrument's stated principal amount. The amount of the additional payment must be no more than the excess, if any, of the debt instrument's stated principal amount over the total amount of inflation-adjusted principal paid on the instrument. An additional payment is not a minimum guarantee payment unless the qualified inflation index used to determine the reference index is either the CPI-U or an index designated for this purpose by the Commissioner in the Federal Register or the Internal Revenue Bulletin (see § 601.601(d)(2)(ii) of this chapter). See paragraph (f)(4) of this section for the treatment of a minimum guarantee payment.

(d) Coupon bond method

(1) In general. This paragraph (d) describes the method (coupon bond method) to be used to account for qualified stated interest and inflation adjustments (OID) on an inflation-indexed debt instrument described in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.

(2) Applicability. The coupon bond method applies to an inflation-indexed debt instrument that satisfies the following conditions:

(i) Issued at par. The debt instrument is issued at par. A debt instrument is issued at par if the difference between its issue price and principal amount for the issue date is less than the de minimis amount. For this purpose, the de minimis amount is determined using the principles of § 1.1273-1(d). See paragraph (g)(2) of this section, however, for the treatment of TIPS issued with more than a de minimis amount of premium.

(ii) All stated interest is qualified stated interest. All stated interest on the debt instrument is qualified stated interest. For purposes of this paragraph (d), stated interest is qualified stated interest if the interest is unconditionally payable in cash, or is constructively received under section 451, at least annually at a single fixed rate. Stated interest is payable at a single fixed rate if the amount of each interest payment is determined by multiplying the inflation adjusted principal amount for the payment date by the single fixed rate.

(3) Qualified stated interest. Under the coupon bond method, qualified stated interest is taken into account under the taxpayer's regular method of accounting. The amount of accrued but unpaid qualified stated interest as of any date is determined by using the principles of § 1.446-3(e)(2)(ii) (relating to notional principal contracts). For example, if the interval between interest payment dates spans two taxable years, a taxpayer using an accrual method of accounting determines the amount of accrued qualified stated interest for the first taxable year by reference to the inflation-adjusted principal amount at the end of the first taxable year.

(4) Inflation adjustments

(i) Current accrual. Under the coupon bond method, an inflation adjustment is taken into account for each taxable year in which the debt instrument is outstanding.

(ii) Amount of inflation adjustment. For any relevant period (such as the taxable year or the portion of the taxable year during which a taxpayer holds an inflation-indexed debt instrument), the amount of the inflation adjustment is equal to—

(A) The sum of the inflation-adjusted principal amount at the end of the period and the principal payments made during the period, minus

(B) The inflation-adjusted principal amount at the beginning of the period.

(iii) Positive inflation adjustments. A positive inflation adjustment is OID.

(iv) Negative inflation adjustments. A negative inflation adjustment is a deflation adjustment that is taken into account under the rules of paragraph (f)(1) of this section.

(5) Example. The following example illustrates the coupon bond method:

Example:

(i) Facts. On October 15, 1997, X purchases at original issue, for $100,000, a debt instrument that is indexed for inflation and deflation. The debt instrument matures on October 15, 1999, has a stated principal amount of $100,000, and has a stated interest rate of 5 percent, compounded semiannually. The debt instrument provides that the principal amount is indexed to the CPI-U. Interest is payable on April 15 and October 15 of each year. The amount of each interest payment is determined by multiplying the inflation-adjusted principal amount for each interest payment date by the stated interest rate, adjusted for the length of the accrual period. The debt instrument provides for a single payment of the inflation-adjusted principal amount at maturity. In addition, the debt instrument provides for an additional payment at maturity equal to the excess, if any, of $100,000 over the inflation-adjusted principal amount at maturity. X uses the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting and the calendar year as its taxable year.

(ii) Indexing methodology. The debt instrument provides that the inflation-adjusted principal amount for any day is determined by multiplying the principal amount of the instrument for the issue date by a ratio, the numerator of which is the value of the reference index for the day the inflation-adjusted principal amount is to be determined and the denominator of which is the value of the reference index for the issue date. The value of the reference index for the first day of a month is the value of the CPI-U for the third preceding month. The value of the reference index for any day other than the first day of a month is determined based on a straight-line interpolation between the value of the reference index for the first day of the month and the value of the reference index for the first day of the next month.

(iii) Inflation-indexed debt instrument subject to the coupon bond method. Under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the debt instrument is an inflation-indexed debt instrument. Because there is no difference between the debt instrument's issue price ($100,000) and its principal amount for the issue date ($100,000) and because all stated interest is qualified stated interest, the coupon bond method applies to the instrument.

(iv) Reference index values. Assume the following table lists the relevant reference index values for 1997 through 1999:

Date Reference index value
Oct. 15, 1997 100
Jan. 1, 1998 101
Apr. 15, 1998 103
Oct. 15, 1998 105
Jan. 1, 1999 99

(v) Treatment of X in 1997. X does not receive any payments of interest on the debt instrument in 1997. Therefore, X has no qualified stated interest income for 1997. X, however, must take into account the inflation adjustment for 1997. The inflation-adjusted principal amount for January 1, 1998, is $101,000 ($100,000 × 101/100). Therefore, the inflation adjustment for 1997 is $1,000, the inflation-adjusted principal amount for January 1, 1998 ($101,000) minus the principal amount for the issue date ($100,000). X includes the $1,000 inflation adjustment in income as OID in 1997.

(vi) Treatment of X in 1998. In 1998, X receives two payments of interest: On April 15, 1998, X receives a payment of $2,575 ($100,000 × 103/100 × .05/2), and on October 15, 1998, X receives a payment of $2,625 ($100,000 × 105/100 × .05/2). Therefore, X's qualified stated interest income for 1998 is $5,200 ($2,575 + $2,625). X also must take into account the inflation adjustment for 1998. The inflation-adjusted principal amount for January 1, 1999, is $99,000 ($100,000 × 99/100). Therefore, the inflation adjustment for 1998 is negative $2,000, the inflation-adjusted principal amount for January 1, 1999 ($99,000) minus the inflation-adjusted principal amount for January 1, 1998 ($101,000). Because the amount of the inflation adjustment is negative, it is a deflation adjustment. Under paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, X uses this $2,000 deflation adjustment to reduce the interest otherwise includible in income by X with respect to the debt instrument in 1998. Therefore, X includes $3,200 in income for 1998, the qualified stated interest income for 1998 ($5,200) minus the deflation adjustment ($2,000).

(e) Discount bond method

(1) In general. This paragraph (e) describes the method (discount bond method) to be used to account for OID on an inflation-indexed debt instrument that does not qualify for the coupon bond method.

(2) No qualified stated interest. Under the discount bond method, no interest on an inflation-indexed debt instrument is qualified stated interest.

(3) OID. Under the discount bond method, the amount of OID that accrues on an inflation-indexed debt instrument is determined as follows:

(i) Step one: Determine the debt instrument's yield to maturity. The yield of the debt instrument is determined under the rules of § 1.1272-1(b)(1)(i). In calculating the yield under those rules for purposes of this paragraph (e)(3)(i), the payment schedule of the debt instrument is determined as if there were no inflation or deflation over the term of the instrument.

(ii) Step two: Determine the accrual periods. The accrual periods are determined under the rules of § 1.1272-1(b)(1)(ii). However, no accrual period can be longer than 1 month.

(iii) Step three: Determine the percentage change in the reference index during the accrual period. The percentage change in the reference index during the accrual period is equal to—

(A) The ratio of the value of the reference index at the end of the period to the value of the reference index at the beginning of the period,

(B) Minus one.

(iv) Step four: Determine the OID allocable to each accrual period. The OID allocable to an accrual period (n) is determined by using the following formula:

OID((n) = AIP(n) × [r + inf(n) + (r × inf(n))]

in which,

r = yield of the debt instrument as determined under paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section (adjusted for the length of the accrual period);

inf(n) = percentage change in the value of the reference index for period (n) as determined under paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of this section; and

AIP(n) = adjusted issue price at the beginning of period (n).

(v) Step five: Determine the daily portions of OID. The daily portions of OID are determined and taken into account under the rules of § 1.1272-1(b)(1)(iv). If the daily portions determined under this paragraph (e)(3)(v) are negative amounts, however, these amounts (deflation adjustments) are taken into account under the rules for deflation adjustments described in paragraph (f)(1) of this section.

(4) Example. The following example illustrates the discount bond method:

Example:

(i) Facts. On November 15, 1997, X purchases at original issue, for $91,403, a zero-coupon debt instrument that is indexed for inflation and deflation. The principal amount of the debt instrument for the issue date is $100,000. The debt instrument provides for a single payment on November 15, 2000. The amount of the payment will be determined by multiplying $100,000 by a fraction, the numerator of which is the CPI-U for September 2000, and the denominator of which is the CPI-U for September 1997. The debt instrument also provides that in no event will the payment on November 15, 2000, be less than $100,000. X uses the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting and the calendar year as its taxable year.

(ii) Inflation-indexed debt instrument. Under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the instrument is an inflation-indexed debt instrument. The debt instrument's principal amount for the issue date ($100,000) exceeds its issue price ($91,403) by $8,597, which is more than the de minimis amount for the debt instrument ($750). Therefore, the coupon bond method does not apply to the debt instrument. As a result, the discount bond method applies to the debt instrument.

(iii) Yield and accrual period. Assume X chooses monthly accrual periods ending on the 15th day of each month. The yield of the debt instrument is determined as if there were no inflation or deflation over the term of the instrument. Therefore, based on the issue price of $91,403 and an assumed payment at maturity of $100,000, the yield of the debt instrument is 3 percent, compounded monthly.

(iv) Percentage change in reference index. Assume that the CPI-U for September 1997 is 160; for October 1997 is 161.2; and for November 1997 is 161.7. The value of the reference index for November 15, 1997, is 160, the value of the CPI-U for September 1997. Similarly, the value of the reference index for December 15, 1997, is 161.2, and for January 15, 1998, is 161.7. The percentage change in the reference index from November 15, 1997, to December 15, 1997, (inf1) is 0.0075 (161.2/160-1); the percentage change in the reference index from December 15, 1997, to January 15, 1998, (inf2) is 0.0031 (161.7/161.2-1).

(v) Treatment of X in 1997. For the accrual period ending on December 15, 1997, r is .0025 (.03/12), inf1 is .0075, and the product of r and inf1 is .00001875. Under paragraph (e)(3) of this section, the amount of OID allocable to the accrual period ending on December 15, 1997, is $916. This amount is determined by multiplying the issue price of the debt instrument ($91,403) by .01001875 (the sum of r, inf1, and the product of r and inf1). The adjusted issue price of the debt instrument on December 15, 1997, is $92,319 ($91,403 + $916). For the accrual period ending on January 15, 1998, r is .0025 (.03/12), inf2 is .0031, and the product of r and inf2 is .00000775. Under paragraph (e)(3) of this section, the amount of OID allocable to the accrual period ending on January 15, 1998, is $518. This amount is determined by multiplying the adjusted issue price of the debt instrument ($92,319) by .00560775 (the sum of r, inf2, and the product of r and inf2). Because the accrual period ending on January 15, 1998, spans two taxable years, only $259 of this amount ($518/30 days × 15 days) is allocable to 1997. Therefore, X includes $1,175 of OID in income for 1997 ($916 + $259).

(f) Special rules. The following rules apply to an inflation-indexed debt instrument:

(1) Deflation adjustments

(i) Holder. A deflation adjustment reduces the amount of interest otherwise includible in income by a holder with respect to the debt instrument for the taxable year. For purposes of this paragraph (f)(1)(i), interest includes OID, qualified stated interest, and market discount. If the amount of the deflation adjustment exceeds the interest otherwise includible in income by the holder with respect to the debt instrument for the taxable year, the excess is treated as an ordinary loss by the holder for the taxable year. However, the amount treated as an ordinary loss is limited to the amount by which the holder's total interest inclusions on the debt instrument in prior taxable years exceed the total amount treated by the holder as an ordinary loss on the debt instrument in prior taxable years. If the deflation adjustment exceeds the interest otherwise includible in income by the holder with respect to the debt instrument for the taxable year and the amount treated as an ordinary loss for the taxable year, this excess is carried forward to reduce the amount of interest otherwise includible in income by the holder with respect to the debt instrument for subsequent taxable years.

(ii) Issuer. A deflation adjustment reduces the interest otherwise deductible by the issuer with respect to the debt instrument for the taxable year. For purposes of this paragraph (f)(1)(ii), interest includes OID and qualified stated interest. If the amount of the deflation adjustment exceeds the interest otherwise deductible by the issuer with respect to the debt instrument for the taxable year, the excess is treated as ordinary income by the issuer for the taxable year. However, the amount treated as ordinary income is limited to the amount by which the issuer's total interest deductions on the debt instrument in prior taxable years exceed the total amount treated by the issuer as ordinary income on the debt instrument in prior taxable years. If the deflation adjustment exceeds the interest otherwise deductible by the issuer with respect to the debt instrument for the taxable year and the amount treated as ordinary income for the taxable year, this excess is carried forward to reduce the interest otherwise deductible by the issuer with respect to the debt instrument for subsequent taxable years. If there is any excess remaining upon the retirement of the debt instrument, the issuer takes the excess amount into account as ordinary income.

(2) Adjusted basis. A holder's adjusted basis in an inflation-indexed debt instrument is determined under § 1.1272-1(g). However, a holder's adjusted basis in the debt instrument is decreased by the amount of any deflation adjustment the holder takes into account to reduce the amount of interest otherwise includible in income or treats as an ordinary loss with respect to the instrument during the taxable year. The decrease occurs when the deflation adjustment is taken into account under paragraph (f)(1) of this section.

(3) Subsequent holders. A holder determines the amount of acquisition premium or market discount on an inflation-indexed debt instrument by reference to the adjusted issue price of the instrument on the date the holder acquires the instrument. A holder determines the amount of bond premium on an inflation-indexed debt instrument by assuming that the amount payable at maturity on the instrument is equal to the instrument's inflation-adjusted principal amount for the day the holder acquires the instrument. Any premium or market discount is taken into account over the remaining term of the debt instrument as if there were no further inflation or deflation. See section 171 for additional rules relating to the amortization of bond premium and sections 1276 through 1278 for additional rules relating to market discount.

(4) Minimum guarantee. Under both the coupon bond method and the discount bond method, a minimum guarantee payment is ignored until the payment is made. If there is a minimum guarantee payment, the payment is treated as interest on the date it is paid.

(5) Temporary unavailability of a qualified inflation index. Notwithstanding any other rule of this section, an inflation-indexed debt instrument may provide for a substitute value of the qualified inflation index if and when the publication of the value of the qualified inflation index is temporarily delayed. The substitute value may be determined by the issuer under any reasonable method. For example, if the CPI-U is not reported for a particular month, the debt instrument may provide that a substitute value may be determined by increasing the last reported value by the average monthly percentage increase in the qualified inflation index over the preceding twelve months. The use of a substitute value does not result in a reissuance of the debt instrument.

(g) TIPS

(1) Reopenings. For rules concerning a reopening of TIPS, see paragraphs (d)(2), (k)(3)(iii), and (k)(3)(v) of § 1.1275-2.

(2) TIPS issued with more than a de minimis amount of premium

(i) Coupon bond method. Notwithstanding paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section, the coupon bond method described in paragraph (d) of this section applies to TIPS issued with more than a de minimis amount of premium. For this purpose, the de minimis amount is determined using the principles of § 1.1273-1(d).

(ii) Example. The following example illustrates the application of the bond premium rules to a TIPS issued with bond premium:

Example.

(i) Facts. X, a calendar year taxpayer, purchases at original issuance TIPS with a stated principal amount of $100,000 and a stated interest rate of .125 percent, compounded semiannually. For purposes of this example, assume that the TIPS are issued in Year 1 on January 1, stated interest is payable on June 30 and December 31 of each year, and that the TIPS mature on December 31, Year 5. X pays $102,000 for the TIPS, which is the issue price for the TIPS as determined under § 1.1275-2(d)(1). Assume that the inflation-adjusted principal amount for the first coupon in Year 1 is $101,225 (resulting in an interest payment of $63.27) and for the second coupon in Year 1 is $102,500 (resulting in an interest payment of $64.06). X elects to amortize bond premium under § 1.171-4. (For simplicity, contrary to actual practice, the TIPS in this example were issued on the date with respect to which the calculation of the first coupon began.)

(ii) Bond premium. The stated interest on the TIPS is qualified stated interest under § 1.1273-1(c). X acquired the TIPS with bond premium of $2,000 (basis of $102,000 minus the TIPS' stated principal amount of $100,000). See §§ 1.171-1(d), 1.171-3(b), and paragraph (f)(3) of this section. The $2,000 is more than the de minimis amount of premium for the TIPS of $1,250 (.0025 times the stated principal amount of the TIPS ($100,000) times the number of complete years to the TIPS' maturity (5 years)). Under paragraph (g)(2)(i) of this section, X must use the coupon bond method to determine X's income from the TIPS.

(iii) Allocation of bond premium. Under § 1.171-3(b), the bond premium of $2,000 is allocable to each semiannual accrual period by assuming that there will be no inflation or deflation over the term of the TIPS. Moreover, for purposes of § 1.171-2, the yield of the securities is determined by assuming that there will be no inflation or deflation over their term. Based on this assumption, for purposes of section 171, the TIPS provide for semiannual interest payments of $62.50 and a $100,000 payment at maturity. As a result, the yield of the securities for purposes of section 171 is −0.2720 percent, compounded semiannually. Under § 1.171-2, the bond premium allocable to an accrual period is the excess of the qualified stated interest allocable to the accrual period ($62.50 for each accrual period) over the product of the taxpayer's adjusted acquisition price at the beginning of the accrual period (determined without regard to any inflation or deflation) and the taxpayer's yield. Therefore, the $2,000 of bond premium is allocable to each semiannual accrual period in Year 1 as follows: $201.22 to the accrual period ending on June 30, Year 1 (the excess of the stated interest of $62.50 over ($102,000 × −0.002720/2)); and $200.95 to the accrual period ending on December 31, Year 1 (the excess of the stated interest of $62.50 over ($101,798.78 × −0. 002720/2)). The adjusted acquisition price at the beginning of the accrual period ending on December 31, Year 1 is $101,798.78 (the adjusted acquisition price of $102,000 at the beginning of the accrual period ending on June 30, Year 1 reduced by the $201.22 of premium allocable to that accrual period).

(iv) Income determined by applying the coupon bond method and the bond premium rules. Under paragraph (d)(4) of this section, the application of the coupon bond method to the TIPS results in a positive inflation adjustment in Year 1 of $2,500, which is includible in X's income for Year 1. However, because X acquired the TIPS at a premium and elected to amortize the premium, the premium allocable to Year 1 will offset the income on the TIPS as follows: The premium allocable to the first accrual period of $201.22 first offsets the interest payable for that period of $63.27. The remaining $137.95 of premium is treated as a deflation adjustment that offsets the positive inflation adjustment. See § 1.171-3(b). The premium allocable to the second accrual period of $200.95 first offsets the interest payable for that period of $64.06. The remaining $136.89 of premium is treated as a deflation adjustment that further offsets the positive inflation adjustment. As a result, X does not include in income any of the stated interest received in Year 1 and includes in Year 1 income only $2,225.16 of the positive inflation adjustment for Year 1 ($2,500 − $137.94 − $136.89).

(h) Effective/applicability dates

(1) In general. This section applies to an inflation-indexed debt instrument issued on or after January 6, 1997.

(2) TIPS issued with more than a de minimis amount of premium. Notwithstanding paragraph (h)(1) of this section, paragraph (g)(2) of this section applies to TIPS issued with more than a de minimis amount of premium on or after April 8, 2011.

[T.D. 8709, 62 FR 618, Jan. 6, 1997. Redesignated by T.D. 8838, 64 FR 48547, Sept. 7, 1999, as amended by T.D. 8840, 64 FR 60343, Nov. 5, 1999; T.D. 8934, 66 FR 2817, Jan. 12, 2001; T.D. 9609, 78 FR 668, Jan. 4, 2013]

§ 1.1286-1 Tax treatment of certain stripped bonds and stripped coupons.

(a) De minimis OID. If the original issue discount determined under section 1286(a) with respect to the purchase of a stripped bond or stripped coupon is less than the amount computed under subparagraphs (A) and (B) of section 1273(a)(3) and the regulations thereunder, then the amount of original issue discount with respect to that purchase (other than any tax-exempt portion thereof, determined under section 1286(d)(2)) shall be considered to be zero. For purposes of this computation, the number of complete years to maturity is measured from the date the stripped bond or stripped coupon is purchased.

(b) Treatment of certain stripped bonds as market discount bonds

(1) In general. By publication in the Internal Revenue Bulletin (see § 601.601(d)(2)(ii)(b) of the Statement of Procedural Rules), the Internal Revenue Service may (subject to the limitation of paragraph (b)(2) of this section) provide that certain mortgage loans that are stripped bonds are to be treated as market discount bonds under section 1278. Thus, any purchaser of such a bond is to account for any discount on the bond as market discount rather than original issue discount.

(2) Limitation. This treatment may be provided for a stripped bond only if, immediately after the most recent disposition referred to in section 1286(b)—

(i) The amount of original issue discount with respect to the stripped bond is determined under paragraph (a) of this section (concerning de minimis OID); or

(ii) The annual stated rate of interest payable on the stripped bond is no more than 100 basis points lower than the annual stated rate of interest payable on the original bond from which it and any other stripped bond or bonds and any stripped coupon or coupons were stripped.

(c) Effective date. This section is effective on and after August 8, 1991.

[T.D. 8463, 57 FR 61812, Dec. 29, 1992]

§ 1.1286-2 Stripped inflation-protected debt instruments.

Stripped inflation-protected debt instruments. If a Treasury Inflation-Protected Security is stripped under the Department of the Treasury's Separate Trading of Registered Interest and Principal of Securities (STRIPS) program, the holders of the principal and coupon components must use the discount bond method (as described in § 1.1275-7(e)) to account for the original issue discount on the components.

[T.D. 8709, 62 FR 621, Jan. 6, 1997. Redesignated by T.D. 8838, 64 FR 48547, Sept. 7, 1999; T.D. 9609, 78 FR 668, Jan. 4, 2013]

§ 1.1287-1 Denial of capital gains treatment for gains on registration-required obligations not in registered form.

(a) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, any gain on the sale or other disposition of a registration-required obligation held after December 31, 1982, that is not in registered form shall be treated as ordinary income unless the issuance of the obligation was subject to tax under section 4701. The term registration-required obligation has the meaning given to that term in section 163(f)(2), except that clause (iv) of subparagraph (A) thereof shall not apply. Therefore, although an obligation that is not in registered form is described in § 1.163-5(c)(1), the holder of such an obligation shall be required to treat the gain on the sale or other disposition of such obligation as ordinary income. The term holder means the person that would be denied a loss deduction under section 165(j)(1) or denied capital gain treatment under section 1287(a).

(b) Registered form

(1) Obligations issued after September 21, 1984. With respect to any obligation originally issued after September 21, 1984, the term registered form has the meaning given that term in section 103(j)(3) and the regulations thereunder. Therefore, an obligation that would otherwise be in registered form is not considered to be in registered form if it can be transferred at that time or at any time until its maturity by any means not described in § 5f.103-1(c). An obligation that, as of a particular time, is not considered to be in registered form because it can be transferred by any means not described in § 5f.103-1(c) is considered to be in registered form at all times during the period beginning with a later time and ending with the maturity of the obligation in which the obligation can be transferred only by a means described in § 5f.103-1(c).

(2) Obligations issued after December 31, 1982, and on or before September 21, 1984. With respect to any obligation originally issued after December 31, 1982, and on or before September 21, 1984, or an obligation originally issued after September 21, 1984, pursuant to the exercise of a warrant or the conversion of a convertible obligation, which warrant or obligation (including conversion privilege) was issued after December 31, 1982, and on or before September 21, 1984, that obligation will be considered to be in registered form if it satisfied § 5f.163-1 or the proposed regulations provided in § 1.163.-5(c) and published in the Federal Register on September 2, 1983 (48 FR 39953).

(c) Registration-required obligations not in registered form which are not subject to section 1287(c). Notwithstanding the fact than an obligation is a registration-required obligation that is not in registered form, the holder will not be subject to section 1287(a) if the holder meets the conditions of § 1.165-12(c).

(d) Effective date. These regulations apply generally to obligations issued after January 20, 1987. However, a taxpayer may choose to apply the rules of § 1.1287-1 with respect to an obligation issued after December 31, 1982, and on or before January 20, 1987, which obligation is held after January 20, 1987.

[T.D. 8110, 51 FR 45461, Dec. 19, 1986]

§ 1.1288-1 Adjustment of applicable Federal rate for tax-exempt obligations.

(a) In general. In applying section 483 or section 1274 to a tax-exempt obligation, the applicable Federal rate is adjusted to take into account the tax exemption for interest on the obligation. For each applicable Federal rate determined under section 1274(d), the Secretary computes a corresponding adjusted applicable Federal rate by multiplying the applicable Federal rate by the adjustment factor described in paragraph (b) of this section. The Internal Revenue Service publishes the applicable Federal rates and the adjusted applicable Federal rates for each month in the Internal Revenue Bulletin (see § 601.601(d)(2)(ii) of this chapter).

(b) Adjustment factor. The adjustment factor is a percentage equal to—

(1) The excess of 100 percent, over

(2) The product of—

(i) 59 percent, and

(ii) The sum of the maximum rate in effect under section 1 applicable to individuals and the maximum rate in effect under section 1411 applicable to individuals for the month to which the adjusted applicable Federal rate applies.

(c) Effective/applicability date. The rules of this section apply to the determination of adjusted applicable Federal rates beginning with the rates determined during August 2016 that apply during September 2016.

[T.D. 9763, 81 FR 24484, Apr. 26, 2016]

§ 1.1291-0 Treatment of shareholders of certain passive foreign investment companies; table of contents.

This section contains a listing of the headings for §§ 1.1291-1, 1.1291-9, and 1.1291-10.

§ 1.1291-1 Taxation of U.S. persons that are shareholders of section 1291 funds.

(a) through (b)(2)(i) [Reserved]

(ii) Pedigreed QEF.

(b)(2)(iii) and (iv) [Reserved]

(v) Section 1291 fund.

(3) through (6) [Reserved]

(7) Shareholder.

(8) Indirect shareholder.

(i) In general.

(ii) Ownership through a corporation.

(A) Ownership through a non-PFIC foreign corporation.

(B) Ownership through a PFIC.

(C) Ownership through a domestic corporation.

(iii) Ownership through pass-through entities.

(A) Partnerships.

(B) S Corporations.

(C) Estates and nongrantor trusts.

(D) Grantor trusts.

(iv) Successive application.

(v) Examples.

(A) Example 1.

(1) Facts.

(2) Results.

(i) Treatment of DC.

(ii) Treatment of A.

(B) Example 2.

(1) Facts.

(2) Results.

(C) Example 3.

(1) Facts.

(2) Results.

(D) Example 4.

(1) Facts.

(2) Results.

(c) Coordination with other PFIC rules.

(1) and (2) [Reserved]

(3) Coordination with section 1296: Distributions and dispositions.

(4) Coordination with mark to market rules under chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code other than section 1296.

(i) In general.

(ii) Coordination rule.

(d) [Reserved]

(e) Exempt organization as shareholder.

(1) In general.

(2) Ownership through certain tax-exempt organizations and accounts.

(f) through (i) [Reserved]

(j) Applicability dates.

§ 1.1291-9 Deemed dividend election.

(a) Deemed dividend election.

(1) In general.

(2) Post-1986 earnings and profits defined.

(i) In general.

(ii) Pro rata share of post-1986 earnings and profits attributable to shareholder's stock.

(A) In general.

(B) Reduction for previously taxed amounts.

(b) Who may make the election.

(c) Time for making the election.

(d) Manner of making the election.

(1) In general.

(2) Attachment to Form 8621.

(e) Qualification date.

(1) In general.

(2) Elections made after March 31, 1995, and before January 27, 1997.

(i) In general.

(ii) Exception.

(3) Examples.

(f) Adjustment to basis.

(g) Treatment of holding period.

(h) Coordination with section 959(e).

(i) Election inapplicable to shareholder of former PFIC.

(1) [Reserved]

(2) Former PFIC.

(j) Definitions.

(1) Passive foreign investment company (PFIC).

(2) Types of PFICs.

(i) Qualified electing fund (QEF).

(ii) Pedigreed QEF.

(iii) Unpedigreed QEF.

(iv) Former PFIC.

(3) Shareholder.

(k) Effective/applicability dates.

§ 1.1291-10 Deemed sale election.

(a) Deemed sale election.

(b) Who may make the election.

(c) Time for making the election.

(d) Manner of making the election.

(e) Qualification date.

(1) In general.

(2) Elections made after March 31, 1995, and before January 27, 1997.

(i) In general.

(ii) Exception.

(f) Adjustments to basis.

(1) In general.

(2) Adjustment to basis for section 1293 inclusion with respect to deemed sale election made after March 31, 1995, and before January 27, 1997.

(g) Treatment of holding period.

(h) Election inapplicable to shareholder of former PFIC.

(i) Effective date.

[T.D. 8701, 61 FR 68151, Dec. 27, 1996, as amended by T.D. 8750, 63 FR 13, Jan. 2, 1998; T.D. 9123, 69 FR 24073, May 3, 2004; T.D. 9806, 81 FR 95465, Dec. 28, 2016; T.D. 9936, 86 FR 4555, Jan. 15, 2021]

§ 1.1291-1 Taxation of U.S. persons that are shareholders of section 1291 funds.

(a) through (b) (2)(i) [Reserved]

(ii) Pedigreed QEF. A PFIC is a pedigreed QEF with respect to a shareholder if the PFIC has been a QEF with respect to the shareholder for all taxable years during which the corporation was a PFIC that are included wholly or partly in the shareholder's holding period of the PFIC stock.

(b) (2)(iii) and (iv) [Reserved]

(v) Section 1291 fund. A PFIC is a section 1291 fund with respect to a shareholder unless the PFIC is a pedigreed QEF with respect to the shareholder or a section 1296 election is in effect with respect to the shareholder.

(3) through (6) [Reserved]

(7) Shareholder. A shareholder is a United States person that directly owns stock of a PFIC (a direct shareholder), or that is an indirect shareholder (as defined in section 1298(a) and paragraph (b)(8) of this section), except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section. For purposes of sections 1291 and 1298, a domestic partnership or S corporation (as defined in section 1361(a)(1)) is not treated as a shareholder of a PFIC except for purposes of any information reporting requirements, including the requirement to file an annual report under section 1298(f). In addition, to the extent that a person is treated under sections 671 through 678 as the owner of a portion of a domestic trust, the trust is not treated as a shareholder of a PFIC with respect to PFIC stock held by that portion of the trust, except for purposes of the information reporting requirements of § 1.1298-1(b)(3)(i) (imposing an information reporting requirement on domestic liquidating trusts and fixed investment trusts).

(8) Indirect shareholder

(i) In general. An indirect shareholder of a PFIC is a United States person that indirectly owns stock of a PFIC. A person indirectly owns stock when it is treated as owning stock of a corporation owned by another person, including another United States person, under this paragraph (b)(8). In applying this paragraph (b)(8), the determination of a person's indirect ownership is made on the basis of all the facts and circumstances in each case; the substance rather than the form of ownership is controlling, taking into account the purposes of sections 1291 through 1298.

(ii) Ownership through a corporation

(A) Ownership through a non-PFIC foreign corporation. A person that directly or indirectly owns 50 percent or more in value of the stock of a foreign corporation that is not a PFIC is considered to own a proportionate amount (by value) of any stock owned directly or indirectly by the foreign corporation.

(B) Ownership through a PFIC. A person that directly or indirectly owns stock of a PFIC is considered to own a proportionate amount (by value) of any stock owned directly or indirectly by the PFIC. Section 1297(d) does not apply in determining whether a corporation is a PFIC for purposes of this paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(B).

(C) Ownership through a domestic corporation

(1) In general. Solely for purposes of determining whether a person satisfies the ownership threshold described in paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(A) of this section, a person that directly or indirectly owns 50 percent or more in value of the stock of a domestic corporation is considered to own a proportionate amount (by value) of any stock owned directly or indirectly by the domestic corporation.

(2) Non-duplication. Paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(C)(1) of this section does not apply to treat a United States person as owning (other than for purposes of applying the ownership threshold in paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(A) of this section) stock of a PFIC that is directly owned or considered owned indirectly within the meaning of this paragraph (b)(8) by another United States person (determined without regard to paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(C)(1)). See Example 1 of paragraph (b)(8)(iv) of this section.

(3) S corporations. The 50 percent limitation in paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(C)(1) of this section does not apply with respect to stock owned directly or indirectly by an S corporation. See paragraph (b)(8)(iii)(B) of this section for rules regarding stock owned directly or indirectly by an S corporation.

(iii) Ownership through pass-through entities

(A) Partnerships. If a foreign or domestic partnership directly or indirectly owns stock, the partners of the partnership are considered to own such stock proportionately in accordance with their ownership interests in the partnership.

(B) S Corporations. If an S corporation directly or indirectly owns stock, each S corporation shareholder is considered to own such stock proportionately in accordance with the shareholder's ownership interest in the S corporation.

(C) Estates and nongrantor trusts. If a foreign or domestic estate or nongrantor trust (other than an employees' trust described in section 401(a) that is exempt from tax under section 501(a)) directly or indirectly owns stock, each beneficiary of the estate or trust is considered to own a proportionate amount of such stock. For purposes of this paragraph (b)(8)(iii)(C), a nongrantor trust is any trust or portion of a trust that is not treated as owned by one or more persons under sections 671 through 679.

(D) Grantor trusts. If a foreign or domestic trust directly or indirectly owns stock, a person that is treated under sections 671 through 679 as the owner of any portion of the trust that holds an interest in the stock is considered to own the interest in the stock held by that portion of the trust.

(iv) Successive application. Stock considered to be owned by a person by reason of paragraphs (b)(8)(ii) or (iii) of this section is, for purposes of applying such paragraphs, considered to be actually owned by such person. Subject to the limitations provided in section 1298(a) and paragraphs (b)(8)(ii) and (b)(8)(iii) of this section, this paragraph applies by successively considering a person as actually owning its proportionate share of stock or other equity interest directly held by an entity directly owned by the person. Paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(C)(2) of this section applies after the other subparagraphs of paragraph (b)(8) of this section.

(v) Examples. The rules of this paragraph (b)(8) are illustrated by the following examples:

(A) Example 1

(1) Facts. A is a United States person who owns 49% of the stock of FC1, a foreign corporation that is not a PFIC, and separately all of the stock of DC, a domestic corporation that is not an S corporation. DC, in turn, owns the remaining 51% of the stock of FC1, and FC1 owns 100 shares of stock in a PFIC that is not a controlled foreign corporation (CFC) within the meaning of section 957(a). The remainder of the PFIC's shares are owned by unrelated foreign persons.

(2) Results

(i) Treatment of DC. Under paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(A) of this section, DC is considered to actually own 51 shares of the PFIC stock directly held by FC1 because DC directly owns 50% or more of the stock of FC1.

(ii) Treatment of A. In determining whether A is considered to own 50% or more of the value of FC1 for purposes of applying paragraphs (b)(8)(ii)(A) and (b)(8)(iv) of this section to the PFIC stock held through FC1, A is considered under paragraphs (b)(8)(ii)(C)(1) and (b)(8)(iv) of this section as indirectly owning all the stock of FC1 that DC directly owns, before the application of paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(C)(2) of this section. Because A also directly owns 49% of the stock of FC1, before the application of paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(C)(2) of this section A would be treated as owning all 100 shares of PFIC stock held by FC1. However, because 51 shares of the PFIC stock held by FC1 are indirectly owned by DC under paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(A) of this section, pursuant to the limitation imposed by paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(C)(2) of this section, only the remaining 49 shares of the PFIC stock are considered as indirectly owned by A under paragraph (b)(8) of this section.

(B) Example 2

(1) Facts. B, a United States citizen, owns 50% of the interests in Foreign Partnership, a foreign partnership treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes, the remaining interests in which are owned by an unrelated foreign person. Foreign Partnership owns 100% of the stock of FC1 and 50% of the stock of FC2, the remainder of which is owned by an unrelated foreign person. Both FC1 and FC2 are foreign corporations that are not PFICs. FC1 and FC2 each own 50% of the stock of FC3, a foreign corporation that is a PFIC.

(2) Results. Under paragraphs (b)(8)(iii)(A) and (b)(8)(iv) of this section, for purposes of determining whether B is a shareholder of FC3, B is considered to actually own 50% (50% × 100%) of the stock of FC1 and 25% (50% × 50%) of the stock of FC2. Under paragraphs (b)(8)(ii)(A) and (b)(8)(iv) of this section, B is then considered to own 25% (50% × 100% × 50%) of the stock of FC3 indirectly through FC1, and thus is a shareholder of FC3 for purposes of the PFIC provisions. Because B is considered to own less than 50% of FC2, B is not considered to own any stock of FC3 indirectly through FC2.

(C) Example 3

(1) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (b)(8)(v)(B)(1) of this section (the facts in Example 2), except that B owns 40% of the interests in Foreign Partnership.

(2) Results. Under paragraph (b)(8)(iii)(A) and (b)(8)(iv) of this section, for purposes of determining whether B is a shareholder of FC3, B is considered to actually own 40% (40% × 100%) of the stock of FC1 and 20% (40% × 50%) of the stock of FC2, and thus is not considered to own 50% or more of the stock of FC1 or FC2. Under paragraphs (b)(8)(ii)(A) and (b)(8)(iv) of this section, B is not considered to own any stock of FC3 indirectly through FC1 or FC2.

(D) Example 4

(1) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (b)(8)(v)(C)(1) of this section (the facts in Example 3), except that FP owns only 80% of FC1 and B also directly owns 20% of FC1.

(2) Results. Under paragraph (b)(8)(iii)(A) and (b)(8)(iv) of this section, for purposes of determining whether B is a shareholder of FC3, B is considered to own 32% (40% × 80%) of the stock of FC1 and 20% (40% × 50%) of the stock of FC2. Because B directly owns 20% of FC1, B is considered to actually own 52% (32% + 20%) of the stock of FC1 in total. Under paragraphs (b)(8)(ii)(A) and (b)(8)(iv) of this section, B is considered to own 26% (52% × 50%) of the stock of FC3 indirectly through FC1, and thus is a shareholder of FC3 for purposes of the PFIC provisions. B is not considered to own any stock of FC3 indirectly through FC2.

(c) Coordination with other PFIC rules.

(1)-(2) [Reserved]

(3) Coordination with section 1296: distributions and dispositions. If PFIC stock is marked to market under section 1296 for any taxable year, then, except as provided in § 1.1296-1(i), section 1291 and the regulations thereunder shall not apply to any distribution with respect to section 1296 stock (as defined in § 1.1296-1(a)(2)), or to any disposition of such stock, for such taxable year.

(4) Coordination with mark to market rules under chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code other than section 1296

(i) In general. If PFIC stock is marked to market for any taxable year under section 475 or any other provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code, other than section 1296, regardless of whether the application of such provision is mandatory or results from an election by the taxpayer or another person, then, except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section, section 1291 and the regulations thereunder shall not apply to any distribution with respect to such PFIC stock or to any disposition of such PFIC stock for such taxable year. See §§ 1.1295-1(i)(3) and 1.1296-1(h)(3)(i) for rules regarding the automatic termination of an existing election under section 1295 or section 1296 when a taxpayer marks to market PFIC stock under section 475 or any other provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code.

(ii) Coordination rule.

(A) Notwithstanding any provision in this section to the contrary, the rule of paragraph (c)(4)(ii)(B) of this section shall apply to the first taxable year in which a United States person marks to market its PFIC stock under a provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code, other than section 1296, if such foreign corporation was a PFIC for any taxable year, prior to such first taxable year, during the United States person's holding period (as defined in section 1291(a)(3)(A) and § 1.1296-1(f)) in such stock, and for which such corporation was not treated as a QEF with respect to such United States person.

(B) For the first taxable year of a United States person that marks to market its PFIC stock under any provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code, other than section 1296, such United States person shall, in lieu of the rules under which the United States person marks to market, apply the rules of § 1.1296-1(i)(2) and (3) as if the United States person had made an election under section 1296 for such first taxable year.

(d) [Reserved]

(e) Exempt organization as shareholder

(1) In general. If the shareholder of a PFIC is an organization exempt from tax under this chapter, section 1291 and these regulations apply to such shareholder only if a dividend from the PFIC would be taxable to the organization under subchapter F.

(2) Ownership through certain tax-exempt organizations and accounts. To the extent a United States person owns stock of a PFIC through an organization or account described in § 1.1298-1(c)(1), that person is not treated as a shareholder with respect to the PFIC stock.

(f)-(i) [Reserved]

(j) Applicability dates.

(1) Paragraphs (c)(3) and (4) of this section apply for taxable years beginning on or after May 3, 2004.

(2) Paragraph (e)(1) of this section is applicable on and after April 1, 1992.

(3) Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (j)(4) of this section, paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (v), (b)(7) and (8), and (e)(2) of this section apply to taxable years of shareholders ending on or after December 31, 2013.

(4) Paragraphs (b)(8)(iv) and (b)(8)(v)(A), (B), (C), and (D) of this section apply for taxable years of shareholders beginning on or after January 14, 2021. A shareholder may choose to apply such paragraphs for any open taxable year beginning before January 14, 2021, provided that, with respect to a tested foreign corporation, the shareholder consistently applies such paragraphs and the provisions of §§ 1.1297-1 (except that consistent treatment is not required with respect to § 1.1297-1(c)(1)(i)(A)), 1.1297-2, 1.1297-4, 1.1297-6, 1.1298-2, and 1.1298-4 for such year and all subsequent years.

[T.D. 8750, 63 FR 13, Jan. 2, 1998. Redesignated by T.D. 8870, 65 FR 5779, Feb. 7, 2000, as amended by T.D. 9123, 69 FR 24073, May 3, 2004; T.D. 9806, 81 FR 95465, Dec. 28, 2016; T.D. 9936, 86 FR 4555, Jan. 15, 2021]

§ 1.1291-9 Deemed dividend election.

(a) Deemed dividend election

(1) In general. This section provides rules for making the election under section 1291(d)(2)(B) (deemed dividend election). Under that section, a shareholder (as defined in paragraph (j)(3) of this section) of a PFIC that is an unpedigreed QEF may elect to include in income as a dividend the shareholder's pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC attributable to the stock held on the qualification date (as defined in paragraph (e) of this section), provided the PFIC is a controlled foreign corporation (CFC) within the meaning of section 957(a) for the taxable year for which the shareholder elects under section 1295 to treat the PFIC as a QEF (section 1295 election). If the shareholder makes the deemed dividend election, the PFIC will become a pedigreed QEF with respect to the shareholder. The deemed dividend is taxed under section 1291 as an excess distribution received on the qualification date. The excess distribution determined under this paragraph (a) is allocated under section 1291(a)(1)(A) only to those days in the shareholder's holding period during which the foreign corporation qualified as a PFIC. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the holding period of the PFIC stock with respect to which the election is made ends on the day before the qualification date. For the definitions of PFIC, QEF, unpedigreed QEF, and pedigreed QEF, see paragraph (j) (1) and (2) of this section.

(2) Post-1986 earnings and profits defined

(i) In general. For purposes of this section, the term post-1986 earnings and profits means the undistributed earnings and profits, within the meaning of section 902(c)(1), as of the day before the qualification date, that were accumulated and not distributed in taxable years of the PFIC beginning after 1986 and during which it was a PFIC, but without regard to whether the earnings relate to a period during which the PFIC was a CFC.

(ii) Pro rata share of post-1986 earnings and profits attributable to shareholder's stock

(A) In general. A shareholder's pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC attributable to the stock held by the shareholder on the qualification date is the amount of post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC accumulated during any portion of the shareholder's holding period ending at the close of the day before the qualification date and attributable, under the principles of section 1248 and the regulations under that section, to the PFIC stock held on the qualification date.

(B) Reduction for previously taxed amounts. A shareholder's pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC does not include any amount that the shareholder demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Commissioner (in the manner provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section) was, pursuant to another provision of the law, previously included in the income of the shareholder, or of another U.S. person if the shareholder's holding period of the PFIC stock includes the period during which the stock was held by that other U.S. person.

(b) Who may make the election. A shareholder of an unpedigreed QEF that is a CFC for the taxable year of the PFIC for which the shareholder makes the section 1295 election may make the deemed dividend election provided the shareholder held stock of that PFIC on the qualification date. A shareholder is treated as holding stock of the PFIC on the qualification date if its holding period with respect to that stock under section 1223 includes the qualification date. A shareholder may make the deemed dividend election without regard to whether the shareholder is a United States shareholder within the meaning of section 951(b). A deemed dividend election may be made by a shareholder whose pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC attributable to the PFIC stock held on the qualification date is zero.

(c) Time for making the election. The shareholder makes the deemed dividend election in the shareholder's return for the taxable year that includes the qualification date. If the shareholder and the PFIC have the same taxable year, the shareholder makes the deemed dividend election in either the original return for the taxable year for which the shareholder makes the section 1295 election, or in an amended return for that year. If the shareholder and the PFIC have different taxable years, the deemed dividend election must be made in an amended return for the taxable year that includes the qualification date. If the deemed dividend election is made in an amended return, the amended return must be filed by a date that is within three years of the due date, as extended under section 6081, of the original return for the taxable year that includes the qualification date.

(d) Manner of making the election

(1) In general. A shareholder makes the deemed dividend election by filing Form 8621 and the attachment to Form 8621 described in paragraph (d)(2) of this section with the return for the taxable year of the shareholder that includes the qualification date, reporting the deemed dividend as an excess distribution pursuant to section 1291(a)(1), and paying the tax and interest due on the excess distribution. A shareholder that makes the deemed dividend election after the due date of the return (determined without regard to extensions) for the taxable year that includes the qualification date must pay additional interest, pursuant to section 6601, on the amount of the underpayment of tax for that year.

(2) Attachment to Form 8621. The shareholder must attach a schedule to Form 8621 that demonstrates the calculation of the shareholder's pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC that is treated as distributed to the shareholder on the qualification date pursuant to this section. If the shareholder is claiming an exclusion from its pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits for an amount previously included in its income or the income of another U.S. person, the shareholder must include the following information:

(i) The name, address, and taxpayer identification number of each U.S. person that previously included an amount in income, the amount previously included in income by each such U.S. person, the provision of the law pursuant to which the amount was previously included in income, and the taxable year or years of inclusion of each amount; and

(ii) A description of the transaction pursuant to which the shareholder acquired, directly or indirectly, the stock of the PFIC from another U.S. person, and the provisions of law pursuant to which the shareholder's holding period includes the period the other U.S. person held the CFC stock.

(e) Qualification date

(1) In general. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (e), the qualification date is the first day of the PFIC's first taxable year as a QEF (first QEF year).

(2) Elections made after March 31, 1995, and before January 27, 1997

(i) In general. The qualification date for deemed dividend elections made after March 31, 1995, and before January 27, 1997, is the first day of the shareholder's election year. The shareholder's election year is the taxable year of the shareholder for which it made the section 1295 election.

(ii) Exception. A shareholder who made the deemed dividend election after May 1, 1992, and before January 27, 1997, may elect to change its qualification date to the first day of the first QEF year, provided the periods of limitations on assessment for the taxable year that includes that date and for the shareholder's election year have not expired. A shareholder changes the qualification date by filing amended returns, with revised Forms 8621 and the attachments described in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, for the shareholder's election year and the shareholder's taxable year that includes the first day of the first QEF year, and making all appropriate adjustments and payments.

(3) Examples. The rules of this paragraph (e) are illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1.

(i) Eligibility to make deemed dividend election. A is a U.S. person who files its income tax return on a calendar year basis. On January 2, 1994, A purchased one percent of the stock of M, a PFIC with a taxable year ending November 30. M was both a CFC and a PFIC, but not a QEF, for all of its taxable years. On December 3, 1996, M made a distribution to its shareholders. A received $100, all of which A reported in its 1996 return as an excess distribution as provided in section 1291(a)(1). A decides to make the section 1295 election in A's 1997 taxable year to treat M as a QEF effective for M's taxable year beginning December 1, 1996. Because A did not make the section 1295 election in 1994, the first year in its holding period of M stock that M qualified as a PFIC, M would be an unpedigreed QEF and A would be subject to both sections 1291 and 1293. A, however, may elect under section 1291(d)(2) to purge the years M was not a QEF from A's holding period. If A makes the section 1291(d)(2) election, the December 3 distribution will not be taxable under section 1291(a). Because M is a CFC, even though A is not a U.S. shareholder within the meaning of section 951(b), A may make the deemed dividend election under section 1291(d)(2)(B).

(ii) Making the election. Under paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the qualification date, and therefore the date of the deemed dividend, is December 1, 1996. Accordingly, to make the deemed dividend election, A must file an amended return for 1996, and include the deemed dividend in income in that year. As a result, M will be a pedigreed QEF as of December 1, 1996, and the December 3, 1996, distribution will not be taxable as an excess distribution. Therefore, in its amended return, A may report the December 3, 1996, distribution consistent with section 1293 and the general rules applicable to corporate distributions.

Example 2. X, a U.S. person, owned a five percent interest in the stock of FC, a PFIC with a taxable year ending June 30. X never made the section 1295 election with respect to FC. X transferred her interest in FC to her granddaughter, Y, a U.S. person, on February 14, 1996. The transfer qualified as a gift for Federal income tax purposes, and no gain was recognized on the transfer (see Regulation Project INTL-656-87, published in 1992-1 C.B. 1124; see § 601.601(d)(2)(ii)(b) of this chapter). As provided in section 1223(2), Y's holding period includes the period that X held the FC stock. Y decides to make the section 1295 election in her 1996 return to treat FC as a QEF for its taxable year beginning July 1, 1995. However, because Y's holding period includes the period that X held the FC stock, and FC was a PFIC but not a QEF during that period, FC will be an unpedigreed QEF with respect to Y unless Y makes a section 1291(d)(2) election. Although Y did not actually own the stock of FC on the qualification date (July 1, 1995), Y's holding period includes that date. Therefore, provided FC is a CFC for its taxable year beginning July 1, 1995, Y may make a section 1291(d)(2)(B) election to treat FC as a pedigreed QEF.

(f) Adjustment to basis. A shareholder that makes the deemed dividend election increases its adjusted basis of the stock of the PFIC owned directly by the shareholder by the amount of the deemed dividend. If the shareholder makes the deemed dividend election with respect to a PFIC of which it is an indirect shareholder, the shareholder's adjusted basis of the stock or other property owned directly by the shareholder, through which ownership of the PFIC is attributed to the shareholder, is increased by the amount of the deemed dividend. In addition, solely for purposes of determining the subsequent treatment under the Code and regulations of a shareholder of the stock of the PFIC, the adjusted basis of the direct owner of the stock of the PFIC is increased by the amount of the deemed dividend.

(g) Treatment of holding period. For purposes of applying sections 1291 through 1297 to the shareholder after the deemed dividend, the shareholder's holding period of the stock of the PFIC begins on the qualification date. For other purposes of the Code and regulations, this holding period rule does not apply.

(h) Coordination with section 959(e). For purposes of section 959(e), the entire deemed dividend is treated as included in gross income under section 1248(a).

(i) Election inapplicable to shareholder of a former PFIC or of a section 1297(e) PFIC. A shareholder may not make the section 1295 and deemed dividend elections if the foreign corporation is a former PFIC (as defined in paragraph (j)(2)(iv) of this section) or a section 1297(e) PFIC (as defined in paragraph (j)(2)(v) of this section) with respect to the shareholder. For the rules regarding the election by a shareholder of a former PFIC, see § 1.1298-3. For the rules regarding the election by a shareholder of a section 1297(e) PFIC, see § 1.1297-3.

(j) Definitions

(1) Passive foreign investment company (PFIC). A passive foreign investment company (PFIC) is a foreign corporation that satisfies either the income test of section 1296(a)(1) or the asset test of section 1296(a)(2). A corporation will not be treated as a PFIC with respect to a shareholder for those days included in the shareholder's holding period when the shareholder, or a person whose holding period of the stock is included in the shareholder's holding period, was not a United States person within the meaning of section 7701(a)(30).

(2) Types of PFICs

(i) Qualified electing fund (QEF). A PFIC is a qualified electing fund (QEF) with respect to a shareholder that has elected, under section 1295, to be taxed currently on its share of the PFIC's earnings and profits pursuant to section 1293.

(ii) Pedigreed QEF. A PFIC is a pedigreed QEF with respect to a shareholder if the PFIC has been a QEF with respect to the shareholder for all taxable years during which the corporation was a PFIC that are included wholly or partly in the shareholder's holding period of the PFIC stock.

(iii) Unpedigreed QEF. A PFIC is an unpedigreed QEF for a taxable year if—

(A) An election under section 1295 is in effect for that year;

(B) The PFIC has been a QEF with respect to the shareholder for at least one, but not all, of the taxable years during which the corporation was a PFIC that are included wholly or partly in the shareholder's holding period of the PFIC stock; and

(C) The shareholder has not made an election under section 1291(d)(2) and this section or § 1.1291-10 with respect to the PFIC to purge the nonQEF years from the shareholder's holding period.

(iv) Former PFIC. A foreign corporation is a former PFIC with respect to a shareholder if the corporation satisfies neither the income test of section 1297(a)(1) nor the asset test of section 1297(a)(2), but its stock, held by that shareholder, is treated as stock of a PFIC, pursuant to section 1298(b)(1), because the corporation was a PFIC that was not a QEF at some time during the shareholder's holding period of the stock.

(v) Section 1297(e) PFIC. A foreign corporation is a section 1297(e) PFIC with respect to a shareholder (as defined in paragraph (j)(3) of this section) if—

(A) The foreign corporation qualifies as a PFIC under section 1297(a) on the first day on which the qualified portion of the shareholder's holding period in the foreign corporation begins, as determined under section 1297(e)(2); and

(B) The stock of the foreign corporation held by the shareholder is treated as stock of a PFIC, pursuant to section 1298(b)(1), because, at any time during the shareholder's holding period of the stock, other than the qualified portion, the corporation was a PFIC that was not a QEF.

(3) A shareholder is a United States person that is a shareholder as defined in § 1.1291-1(b)(7) or an indirect shareholder as defined in § 1.1291-1(b)(8), except as provided in § 1.1291-1(e).

(k) Effective/applicability date.

(1) The rules of this section, except for paragraph (j)(2)(v) of this section, are applicable as of April 1, 1995.

(2) The rules of paragraph (j)(2)(v) of this section are applicable as of December 8, 2005.

(3) Paragraph (j)(3) of this section applies to taxable years of shareholders ending on or after December 31, 2013.

[T.D. 8701, 61 FR 68151, Dec. 27, 1996; 62 FR 7155, Feb. 18, 1997, as amended by T.D. 8750, 63 FR 13, Jan. 2, 1998; T.D. 9231, 70 FR 72915, Dec. 8, 2005; T.D. 9360, 72 FR 54821, Sept. 27, 2007; T.D. 9650, 78 FR 79608, Dec. 31, 2013; T.D. 9806, 81 FR 95466, Dec. 28, 2016]

§ 1.1291-10 Deemed sale election.

(a) Deemed sale election. This section provides rules for making the election under section 1291(d)(2)(A) (deemed sale election). Under that section, a shareholder (as defined in § 1.1291-9(j)(3)) of a PFIC that is an unpedigreed QEF may elect to recognize gain with respect to the stock of the unpedigreed QEF held on the qualification date (as defined in paragraph (e) of this section). If the shareholder makes the deemed sale election, the PFIC will become a pedigreed QEF with respect to the shareholder. A shareholder that makes the deemed sale election is treated as having sold, for its fair market value, the stock of the PFIC that the shareholder held on the qualification date. The gain recognized on the deemed sale is taxed under section 1291 as an excess distribution received on the qualification date. In the case of an election made by an indirect shareholder, the amount of gain to be recognized and taxed as an excess distribution is the amount of gain that the direct owner of the stock of the PFIC would have realized on an actual sale or other disposition of the stock of the PFIC indirectly owned by the shareholder. Any loss realized on the deemed sale is not recognized. For the definitions of PFIC, QEF, unpedigreed QEF, and pedigreed QEF, see § 1.1291-9(j) (1) and (2).

(b) Who may make the election. A shareholder of an unpedigreed QEF may make the deemed sale election provided the shareholder held stock of that PFIC on the qualification date. A shareholder is treated as holding stock of the PFIC on the qualification date if its holding period with respect to that stock under section 1223 includes the qualification date. A deemed sale election may be made by a shareholder that would realize a loss on the deemed sale.

(c) Time for making the election. The shareholder makes the deemed sale election in the shareholder's return for the taxable year that includes the qualification date. If the shareholder and the PFIC have the same taxable year, the shareholder makes the deemed sale election in either the original return for the taxable year for which the shareholder makes the section 1295 election, or in an amended return for that year. If the shareholder and the PFIC have different taxable years, the deemed sale election must be made in an amended return for the taxable year that includes the qualification date. If the deemed sale election is made in an amended return, the amended return must be filed by a date that is within three years of the due date, as extended under section 6081, of the original return for the taxable year that includes the qualification date.

(d) Manner of making the election. A shareholder makes the deemed sale election by filing Form 8621 with the return for the taxable year of the shareholder that includes the qualification date, reporting the gain as an excess distribution pursuant to section 1291(a), and paying the tax and interest due on the excess distribution. A shareholder that makes the deemed sale election after the due date of the return (determined without regard to extensions) for the taxable year that includes the qualification date must pay additional interest, pursuant to section 6601, on the amount of the underpayment of tax for that year. A shareholder that realizes a loss on the deemed sale reports the loss on Form 8621, but does not recognize the loss.

(e) Qualification date

(1) In general. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (e), the qualification date is the first day of the PFIC's first taxable year as a QEF (first QEF year).

(2) Elections made after March 31, 1995, and before January 27, 1997

(i) In general. The qualification date for deemed sale elections made after March 31, 1995, and before January 27, 1997, is the first day of the shareholder's election year. The shareholder's election year is the taxable year of the shareholder for which it made the section 1295 election.

(ii) Exception. A shareholder who made the deemed sale election after May 1, 1992, and before January 27, 1997, may elect to change its qualification date to the first day of the first QEF year, provided the periods of limitations on assessment for the taxable year that includes that date and for the shareholder's election year have not expired. A shareholder changes the qualification date by filing amended returns, with revised Forms 8621, for the shareholder's election year and the shareholder's taxable year that includes the first day of the first QEF year, and making all appropriate adjustments and payments.

(f) Adjustments to basis

(1) In general. A shareholder that makes the deemed sale election increases its adjusted basis of the PFIC stock owned directly by the amount of gain recognized on the deemed sale. If the shareholder makes the deemed sale election with respect to a PFIC of which it is an indirect shareholder, the shareholder's adjusted basis of the stock or other property owned directly by the shareholder, through which ownership of the PFIC is attributed to the shareholder, is increased by the amount of gain recognized by the shareholder. In addition, solely for purposes of determining the subsequent treatment under the Code and regulations of a shareholder of the stock of the PFIC, the adjusted basis of the direct owner of the stock of the PFIC is increased by the amount of gain recognized on the deemed sale. A shareholder shall not adjust the basis of any stock with respect to which the shareholder realized a loss on the deemed sale.

(2) Adjustment of basis for section 1293 inclusion with respect to deemed sale election made after March 31, 1995, and before January 27, 1997. For purposes of determining the amount of gain recognized with respect to a deemed sale election made after March 31, 1995, and before January 27, 1997, by a shareholder that treats the first day of the shareholder's election year as the qualification date, the adjusted basis of the stock deemed sold includes the shareholder's section 1293(a) inclusion attributable to the period beginning with the first day of the PFIC's first QEF year and ending on the day before the qualification date.

(g) Treatment of holding period. For purposes of applying sections 1291 through 1297 to the shareholder after the deemed sale, the shareholder's holding period of the stock of the PFIC begins on the qualification date, without regard to whether the shareholder recognized gain on the deemed sale. For other purposes of the Code and regulations, this holding period rule does not apply.

(h) Election inapplicable to shareholder of former PFIC. A shareholder may not make the section 1295 and deemed sale elections if the foreign corporation is a former PFIC (as defined in § 1.1291-9(j)(2)(iv)) with respect to the shareholder. For the rules regarding the election by a shareholder of a former PFIC, see § 1.1297-3T.

(i) Effective date. The rules of this section are applicable as of April 1, 1995.

[T.D. 8701, 61 FR 68153, Dec. 27, 1996]

§ 1.1293-0 Table of contents.

This section contains a listing of the headings for § 1.1293-1.

§ 1.1293-1 Current inclusion of income of qualified electing funds.

(a) In general. [Reserved]

(1) Other rules. [Reserved]

(2) Net capital gain defined.

(i) In general.

(ii) Effective date.

(b) Other rules. [Reserved]

(c) Application of rules of inclusion with respect to stock held by a pass through entity.

(1) In general.

(2) QEF stock transferred to a pass through entity.

(i) Pass through entity makes a section 1295 election.

(ii) Pass through entity does not make a section 1295 election.

(3) Effective date.

[T.D. 8750, 63 FR 13, Jan. 2, 1998, as amended by T.D. 8870, 65 FR 16319, Mar. 28, 2000]

§ 1.1293-1 Current taxation of income from qualified electing funds.

(a) In general. [Reserved]

(1) Other rules. [Reserved]

(2) Net capital gain defined

(i) In general. This paragraph (a)(2) defines the term net capital gain for purposes of sections 1293 and 1295 and the regulations under those sections. The QEF, as defined in § 1.1291-9(j)(2)(i), in determining its net capital gain for a taxable year, may either—

(A) Calculate and report the amount of each category of long-term capital gain provided in section 1(h) that was recognized by the PFIC in the taxable year;

(B) Calculate and report the amount of net capital gain recognized by the PFIC in the taxable year, stating that that amount is subject to the highest capital gain rate of tax applicable to the shareholder; or

(C) Calculate its earnings and profits for the taxable year and report the entire amount as ordinary earnings.

(ii) Effective date. Paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section is applicable to sales by QEFs during their taxable years ending on or after May 7, 1997.

(b) Other rules. [Reserved]

(c) Application of rules of inclusion with respect to stock held by a pass through entity

(1) In general. If a domestic pass through entity makes a section 1295 election, as provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, with respect to the PFIC shares that it owns, directly or indirectly, the domestic pass through entity takes into account its pro rata share of the ordinary earnings and net capital gain attributable to the QEF shares held by the pass through entity. A U.S. person that indirectly owns QEF shares through the domestic pass through entity accounts for its pro rata shares of ordinary earnings and net capital gain attributable to the QEF shares according to the general rules applicable to inclusions of income from the domestic pass through entity. For the definition of pass through entity, see § 1.1295-1(j).

(2) QEF stock transferred to a pass through entity

(i) Pass through entity makes a section 1295 election. If a shareholder transfers stock subject to a section 1295 election to a domestic pass through entity of which it is an interest holder and the pass through entity makes a section 1295 election with respect to that stock, as provided in § 1.1295-1(d)(2), the shareholder takes into account its pro rata shares of the ordinary earnings and net capital gain attributable to the QEF shares under the rules applicable to inclusions of income from the pass through entity.

(ii) Pass through entity does not make a section 1295 election. If the pass through entity does not make a section 1295 election with respect to the PFIC, the shares of which were transferred to the pass through entity subject to the 1295 election of the shareholder, the shareholder continues to be subject, in its capacity as an indirect shareholder, to the income inclusion rules of section 1293 and reporting rules required of shareholders of QEFs. Proper adjustments to reflect an inclusion in income under section 1293 by the indirect shareholder must be made, under the principles of § 1.1291-9(f), to the basis of the indirect shareholder's interest in the pass through entity.

(3) Effective date. Paragraph (c) of this section is applicable to taxable years of shareholders beginning after December 31, 1997.

[T.D. 8750, 63 FR 14, Jan. 2, 1998. Redesignated and amended by T.D. 8870, 65 FR 5779, 5781, Feb. 7, 2000]

§ 1.1294-0 Table of contents.

This section contains a listing of the headings for § 1.1294-1T.

§ 1.1294-1T Election to extend the time for payment of tax on undistributed earnings of a qualified electing fund.

(a) Purpose and scope.

(b) Election to extend time for payment of tax.

(1) In general.

(2) Exception.

(3) Undistributed earnings.

(i) In general.

(ii) Effect of loan, pledge or guarantee.

(c) Time for making the election.

(1) In general.

(2) Exception.

(d) Manner of making the election.

(1) In general.

(2) Information to be included in the election.

(e) Termination of the extension.

(f) Undistributed PFIC earnings tax liability.

(g) Authority to require a bond.

(h) Annual reporting requirement.

[T.D. 8750, 63 FR 13, Jan. 2, 1998]

§ 1.1294-1T Election to extend the time for payment of tax on undistributed earnings of a qualified electing fund (temporary).

(a) Purpose and scope. This section provides rules for making the annual election under section 1294. Under that section, a U.S. person that is a shareholder in a qualified electing fund (QEF) may elect to extend the time for payment of its tax liability which is attributable to its share of the undistributed earnings of the QEF. In general, a QEF is a passive foreign investment company (PFIC), as defined in section 1296, that makes the election under section 1295. Under section 1293, a U.S. person that owns, or is treated as owning, stock of a QEF at any time during the taxable year of the QEF shall include in gross income, as ordinary income, its pro rata share of the ordinary earnings of the QEF for the taxable year and, as long-term capital gain, its pro rata share of the net capital gain of the QEF for the taxable year. The shareholder's share of the earnings shall be included in the shareholder's taxable year in which or with which the taxable year of the QEF ends.

(b) Election to extend time for payment

(1) In general. A U.S. person that is a shareholder of a QEF on the last day of the QEF's taxable year may elect under section 1294 to extend the time for payment of that portion of its tax liability which is attributable to the inclusion in income pursuant to section 1293 of the shareholder's share of the QEF's undistributed earnings. The election under section 1294 may be made only with respect to undistributed earnings, and interest is imposed under section 6601 on the amount of the tax liability which is subject to the extension. This interest must be paid on the termination of the election.

(2) Exception. An election under this § 1.1294-1T cannot be made for a taxable year of the shareholder if any portion of the QEF's earning is includible in the gross income of the shareholder for such year under either section 551 (relating to foreign personal holding companies) or section 951 (relating to controlled foreign corporations).

(3) Undistributed earnings

(i) In general. For purposes of this § 1.1294-1T the term undistributed earnings means the excess, if any, of the amount includible in gross income by reason of section 1293(a) for the shareholder's taxable year (the includible amount) over the sum of

(A) the amount of any distribution to the shareholder during the QEF's taxable year and

(B) the portion of the includible amount that is attributable to stock in the QEF that the shareholder transferred or otherwise disposed of before the end of the QEF's year. For purposes of this paragraph, a distribution will be treated as made from the most recently accumulated earnings and profits.

(ii) Effect of a loan, pledge or guarantee. A loan, pledge, or guarantee described in § 1.1294-1T(e) (2) or (4) will be treated as a distribution of earnings for purposes of paragraph (b)(3)(i)(A). If earnings are treated as distributed in a taxable year by reason of a loan, pledge or guarantee described in § 1.1294-1T(e) (2) or (4), but the amount of the deemed distribution resulting therefrom was less than the amount of the actual loan by the QEF (or the amount of the loan secured by the pledge or guarantee), earnings derived by the QEF in a subsequent taxable year will be treated as distributed in such subsequent year to the shareholder for purposes of paragraph (b)(3)(i)(A) by virtue of such loan, but only to the extent of the difference between the outstanding principal balance on the loan in such subsequent year and the prior years' deemed distributions resulting from the loan. For this purpose, the outstanding principal balance on a loan in a taxable year shall be treated as equal to the greatest amount of the outstanding balance at any time during such year.

Example 1.

(i) Facts. FC is a PFIC that made the election under section 1295 to be a QEF for its taxable year beginning January 1, 1987. S owned 500 shares, or 50 percent, of FC throughout the first six months of 1987, but on June 30, 1987 sold 10 percent, or 50 shares, of the FC stock that it held. FC had $100,000x of ordinary earnings but no net capital gain in 1987. No part of FC's earnings is includible in S's income under either section 551 or 951. FC made no distributions to its shareholders in 1987. S's pro rata share of income is determined by attributing FC's income ratably to each day in FC's year. Accordingly, FC's daily earnings are $274x ($100,000x/365). S's share of the earnings of FC is $47,484x, determined as follows.

FC's daily earnings × number of days percentage held by S × percentage of ownership in FC.

Accordingly, S's pro rata share of FC's earnings for the first six months of FC's year deemed earned while S held 50 percent of FC's stock is $24,797x ($274x × 181 days × 50%). S's pro rata share of FC's earnings for remainder of FC's year deemed earned while S held 45 percent of FC's stock is $22,687x ($274x × 184 days × 45%). Therefore, S's total share of FC's earnings to be included in income under section 1293 is $47,484x ($24,797x + $22,687x).

(ii) Election. S intends to make the election under section 1294 to defer the payment of its tax liability that is attributable to the undistributed earnings of FC. The amount of current year undistributed earnings as defined in § 1.1294-1T(b)(3) with respect to which S can make the election is the excess of S's inclusion in gross income under section 1293(a) for the taxable year over the sum of (1) the cash and other property distributed to S during FC's tax year out of earnings included in income pursuant to section 1293(a), and (2) the earnings attributable to stock disposed of during FC's tax year. Because S sold 10 percent, or 50 shares, of the FC stock that it held during the first six months of the year, 10 percent of its share of the earnings for that part of the year, which is $2,480x ($24,797x × 10%), is attributable to the shares sold. S therefore cannot make the election under section 1294 to extend the time for payment of its tax liability on that amount. Accordingly, S can make the election under section 1294 with respect to its tax on $45,004x ($47,484x less $2,480x), which is its pro rata share of FC's earnings, reduced by the earnings attributable to the stock disposed of during the year.

Example 2.

(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example 1 with the following exceptions. S did not sell any FC stock during 1987. Therefore, because S held 50 percent of the FC stock throughout 1987, S's pro rata share of FC's ordinary earnings was $50,000x, no part of which was includible in S's income under either section 551 or 951. There were no actual distributions of earnings to S in 1988. On December 31, 1987, S pledged the FC stock as security for a bank loan of $75,000x. The pledge is treated as a disposition of the FC stock and therefore a distribution of S's share of the undistributed earnings of FC up to the amount of the loan principal. S's entire share of the undistributed earnings of FC are deemed distributed as a result of the pledge of the FC stock. S therefore cannot make the election under section 1294 to extend the time for payment of its tax liability on its share of FC's earnings for 1987.

(ii) Deemed distribution. In 1988, FC has ordinary earnings of $100,000x but no net capital gain. S's pro rata share of FC's 1988 ordinary earnings was $50,000x. S's loan remained outstanding throughout 1988; the highest loan balance during 1988 was $74,000x. Of S's share of the ordinary earnings of FC of $50,000x, $24,000x is deemed distributed to S. This is the amount by which the highest loan balance for the year ($74,000x) exceeds the portion of the undistributed earnings of FC deemed distributed to S in 1987 by reason of the pledge ($50,000x). S may make the election under section 1294 to extend the time for payment of its tax liability on $26,000x, which is the amount by which S's includible amount for 1988 exceeds the amount deemed distributed to S during 1988.

(c) Time for making the election

(1) In general. An election under this § 1.1294-1T may be made for any taxable year in which a shareholder reports income pursuant to section 1293. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2), the election shall be made by the due date, as extended, of the tax return for the shareholder's taxable year for which the election is made.

(2) Exception. An election under this section may be made within 60 days of receipt of notification from the QEF of the shareholder's pro rata share of the ordinary earnings and net capital gain if notification is received after the time for filing the election provided in paragraph (c)(1) (and requires the filing of an amended return to report income pursuant to section 1293). If the notification reports an increase in the shareholder's pro rata share of the earnings previously reported to the shareholder by the QEF, the shareholder may make the election under this paragraph (c)(2) only with respect to the amount of such increase.

(d) Manner of making the election

(1) In general. A shareholder shall make the election by

(i) attaching to its return for the year of the election Form 8621 or a statement containing the information and representations required by this section and

(ii) filing a copy of Form 8621 or the statement with the Internal Revenue Service Center, P.O. Box 21086, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19114.

(2) Information to be included in the election statement. If a statement is used in lieu of Form 8621, the statement should be identified, in a heading, as an election under section 1294 of the Code. The statement must include the following information and representations:

(i) The name, address, and taxpayer identification number of the electing shareholder and the taxable year of the shareholder for which the election is being made;

(ii) The name, address and taxpayer identification number of the QEF if provided to the shareholder;

(iii) A statement that the shareholder is making the election under section 1294 of the Code;

(iv) A schedule containing the following information:

(A) The ordinary earnings and net capital gain for the current year included in the shareholder's income under section 1293;

(B) The amount of cash and other property distributed by the QEF during its taxable year with respect to stock held directly or indirectly by the shareholder during that year, identifying the amount of such distributions that is paid out of current earnings and profits and the amount paid out of each prior year's earnings and profits; and

(C) The undistributed PFIC earnings tax liability (as defined in paragraph (f) of this section) for the taxable year, payment of which is being deferred by reason of the election under section 1294;

(v) The number of shares of stock held in the QEF during the QEF's taxable year which gave rise to the section 1293 inclusion and the number of such shares transferred, deemed transferred or otherwise disposed of by the electing shareholder before the end of the QEF's taxable year, and the data of transfer; and

(vi) The representations of the electing shareholder that—

(A) No part of the QEF's earnings for the taxable year is includible in the electing shareholder's gross income under either section 551 or 951 of the Code;

(B) The election is made only with respect to the shareholder's pro rata share of the undistributed earnings of the QEF; and

(C) The electing shareholder, upon termination of the election to extend the date for payment, shall pay the undistributed PFIC earnings tax liability attributable to those earnings to which the termination applies as well as interest on such tax liability pursuant to section 6601. Payment of this tax and interest must be made by the due date (determined without extensions) of the tax return for the taxable year in which the termination occurs.

(e) Termination of the extension. The election to extend the date for payment of tax will be terminated in whole or in part upon the occurrence of any of the following events:

(1) The QEF's distribution of earnings to which the section 1294 extension to pay tax is attributable; the extension will terminate only with respect to the tax attributable to the earnings that were distributed.

(2) The electing shareholder's transfer of stock in the QEF (or use thereof as security for a loan) with respect to which an election under this § 1.1294-1T was made. The election will be terminated with respect to the undistributed earnings attributable to the shares of the stock transferred. In the case of a pledge of the stock, the election will be terminated with respect to undistributed earnings equal to the amount of the loan for which the stock is pledged.

(3) Revocation of the QEF's election as a QEF or cessation of the QEF's status as a PFIC. A revocation of the QEF election or cessation of PFIC status will result in the complete termination of the extension.

(4) A loan of property by the QEF directly or indirectly to the electing shareholder or related person, or a pledge or guarantee by the QEF with respect to a loan made by another party to the electing shareholder or related person. The election will be terminated with respect to undistributed earnings in an amount equal to the amount of the loan, pledge, or guarantee.

(5) A determination by the District Director pursuant to section 1294(c)(3) that collection of the tax is in jeopardy. The amount of undistributed earnings with respect to which the extension is terminated under this paragraph (d)(5) will be left to the discretion of the District Director.

(f) Undistributed PFIC earnings tax liability. The electing shareholder's tax liability attributable to the ordinary earnings and net capital gain included in gross income under section 1293 shall be the excess of the tax imposed under chapter 1 of the Code for the taxable year over the tax that would be imposed for the taxable year without regard to the inclusion in income under section 1293 of the undistributed earnings as defined in paragraph (b)(3) of this section.

Example:

The facts are the same as in § 1.1294-1T (b)(3), Example 1, with the following exceptions. S, a domestic corporation, did not dispose of any FC stock in 1987. Therefore, because S held 50 percent of the FC stock throughout 1987, S's pro rata share of FC's ordinary earnings was $50,000x. In addition to $50,000x of ordinary earnings from FC, S had $12,500x of domestic source income and $6,000x of expenses (other than interest expense) not definitely related to any gross income. These expenses are apportioned, pursuant to § 1.861-8(c)(2), on a pro rata basis between the domestic and foreign source income—$1,200x of expenses, or one-fifth, to domestic source income, and $4,800x of expenses, or four-fifths, to the section 1293 inclusion. FC paid foreign taxes of $25,000x in 1987. Accordingly, S is entitled to claim as an indirect foreign tax credit pursuant to section 1293(f) a proportionate amount of the foreign taxes paid by FC, which is $12,500x ($25,000x × $50,000x/$100,000x). S is taxed in the U.S. at the rate of 34 percent. The amount of tax liability for which S may extend the time for payment is determined as follows:

1987 Tax Liability (With Section 1293 Inclusion)

Source U.S. Foreign
Income 12,500x 0
Section 1293 0 50,000x
Expenses −1,200x −4,800x
Taxable income 11,300x 45,200x
Total taxable income 56,500x
U.S. income tax rate x34%
Pre-credit U.S. tax 19,210x
Foreign tax credit −12,500x
1987 Tax Liability 6,710x

1987 Tax Liability (Without Section 1293 Inclusion)

Source U.S. Foreign
Income 12,500x 0
Expenses −6,000x
Taxable income 6,500x
U.S. tax rate x34%
U.S. Tax 2,210x
Foreign tax credit 0
Hypothetical 1987 Tax Liability 2,210x

The amount of tax, payment of which S may defer pursuant to section 1294, is $4,500x ($6,710x less $2,210x).

(g) Authority to require a bond. Pursuant to the authority granted in section 6165 and in the manner provided therein, and subject to notification, the District Director may require the electing shareholder to furnish a bond to secure payment of the tax, the time for payment of which is extended under this section. If the electing shareholder does not furnish the bond within 60 days after receiving a request from the District Director, the election will be revoked.

(h) Annual reporting requirement. The electing shareholder must attach Form 8621 or a statement to its income tax return for each year during which an election under this section is outstanding. The statement must contain the following information:

(1) The total amount of undistributed earnings as of the end of the taxable year to which the outstanding elections apply;

(2) The total amount of the undistributed PFIC earnings tax liability and accrued interest charge as of the end of the year;

(3) The total amount of distributions received during the taxable year; and

(4) A description of the occurrence of any other termination event described in paragraph (e) of this section that occurred during the taxable year.

The electing shareholder also shall file by the due date, as extended, for its return a copy of Form 8621 or the statement with the Philadelphia Service Center, P.O. Box 21086, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19114.

[T.D. 8178, 53 FR 6773, Mar. 2, 1988; 53 FR 11731, Apr. 8, 1988]

§ 1.1295-0 Table of contents.

This section contains a listing of the headings for §§ 1.1295-1 and 1.1295-3.

§ 1.1295-1 Qualified electing funds.

(a) In general. [Reserved]

(b) Application of section 1295 election. [Reserved]

(1) Election personal to shareholder. [Reserved]

(2) Election applicable to specific corporation only.

(i) In general. [Reserved]

(ii) Stock of QEF received in a nonrecognition transfer. [Reserved]

(iii) Exception for options.

(3) Application of general rules to stock held by a pass through entity.

(i) Stock subject to a section 1295 election transferred to a pass through entity.

(ii) Limitation on application of pass through entity's section 1295 election.

(iii) Effect of partnership termination on section 1295 election.

(iv) Characterization of stock held through a pass through entity.

(4) Application of general rules to a taxpayer filing a joint return under section 6013.

(c) Effect of section 1295 election.

(1) In general.

(2) Years to which section 1295 election applies.

(i) In general.

(ii) Effect of PFIC status on election.

(iii) Effect on election of complete termination of a shareholder's interest in the PFIC.

(iv) Effect on section 1295 election of transfer of stock to a domestic pass through entity.

(v) Examples.

(d) Who may make a section 1295 election.

(1) General rule.

(2) Application of general rule to pass through entities.

(i) Partnerships.

(A) Domestic partnership.

(B) Foreign partnership.

(ii) S corporation.

(iii) Trust or estate.

(A) Domestic trust or estate.

(1) Nongrantor trust or estate.

(2) Grantor trust.

(B) Foreign trust or estate.

(1) Nongrantor trust or estate.

(2) Grantor trust.

(iv) Indirect ownership of the pass through entity or the PFIC.

(3) Indirect ownership of a PFIC through other PFICs.

(4) Member of consolidated return group as shareholder.

(5) Option holder.

(6) Exempt organization.

(e) Time for making a section 1295 election.

(1) General rule.

(2) Examples.

(f) Manner of making a section 1295 election and the annual election requirements of the shareholder.

(1) Manner of making the election.

(2) Annual election requirements.

(i) In general.

(ii) Retention of documents.

(g) Annual election requirements of the PFIC or intermediary.

(1) PFIC Annual Information Statement.

(2) Alternative documentation.

(3) Annual Intermediary Statement.

(4) Combined statements.

(i) PFIC Annual Information Statement.

(ii) Annual Intermediary Statement.

(h) Transition rules.

(i) Invalidation, termination or revocation of section 1295 election.

(1) Invalidation or termination of election at the discretion of the Commissioner.

(i) In general.

(ii) Deferral of section 1293 inclusion.

(iii) When effective.

(2) Shareholder revocation.

(i) In general.

(ii) Time for and manner of requesting consent to revoke.

(A) Time.

(B) Manner of making request.

(iii) When effective.

(3) Automatic termination.

(4) Effect of invalidation, termination or revocation.

(5) Election after invalidation, termination or revocation.

(i) In general.

(ii) Special rule.

(j) Definitions.

(k) Effective dates.

§ 1.1295-3 Retroactive elections.

(a) In general.

(b) General rule.

(c) Protective Statement.

(1) In general.

(2) Reasonable belief statement.

(3) Who executes and files the Protective Statement.

(4) Waiver of the periods of limitations.

(i) Time for and manner of extending periods of limitations.

(A) In general.

(B) Application of general rule to domestic partnerships.

(1) In general

(2) Special rules.

(i) Addition of partner to non-TEFRA partnership.

(ii) Change in status from non-TEFRA partnership to TEFRA partnership.

(C) Application of general rule to domestic nongrantor trusts and domestic estates.

(D) Application of general rule to S corporations.

(E) Effect on waiver of complete termination of a pass through entity or pass through entity's business.

(F) Application of general rule to foreign partnerships, foreign trusts, domestic or foreign grantor trusts, and foreign estates.

(ii) Terms of waiver.

(A) Scope of waiver.

(B) Period of waiver.

(5) Time for and manner of filing a Protective Statement.

(i) In general.

(ii) Special rule for taxable years ended before January 2, 1998

(6) Applicability of the Protective Statement.

(i) In general.

(ii) Invalidity of the Protective Statement.

(7) Retention of Protective Statement and information demonstrating reasonable belief.

(d) Reasonable belief.

(1) In general.

(2) Knowledge of law required.

(e) Special rules for qualified shareholders.

(1) In general.

(2) Qualified shareholder.

(3) Exceptions.

(f) Special consent.

(1) In general.

(2) Reasonable reliance on a qualified tax professional.

(i) In general.

(ii) Shareholder deemed to have not reasonably relied on a qualified tax professional.

(3) Prejudice to the interests of the United States government.

(i) General rule.

(ii) Elimination of prejudice to the interests of the United States government.

(4) Procedural requirements.

(i) Filing instructions.

(ii) Affidavit from shareholder.

(iii) Affidavits from other persons.

(iv) Other information.

(v) Notification of Internal Revenue Service.

(vi) Who requests special consent under this paragraph (f) and who enters into a closing agreement.

(g) Time for and manner of making a retroactive election.

(1) Time for making a retroactive election.

(i) In general.

(ii) Transition rule.

(iii) Ownership not required at time retroactive election is made.

(2) Manner of making a retroactive election.

(3) Who makes the retroactive election.

(4) Other elections.

(i) Section 1291(d)(2) election.

(ii) Section 1294 election.

(h) Effective date.

[T.D. 8750, 63 FR 14, Jan. 2, 1998, as amended by T.D. 8870, 65 FR 5779, Feb. 7, 2000; 65 FR 16319, Mar. 28, 2000; T.D. 9123, 69 FR 24073, May 3, 2004]

§ 1.1295-1 Qualified electing funds.

(a) In general. [Reserved]

(b) Application of section 1295 election. [Reserved]

(1) Election personal to shareholder. [Reserved]

(2) Election applicable to specific corporation only—

(i) In general. [Reserved]

(ii) Stock of QEF received in a nonrecognition transfer. [Reserved]

(iii) Exception for options. A shareholder's section 1295 election does not apply to any option to buy stock of the PFIC.

(3) Application of general rules to stock held by a pass through entity

(i) Stock subject to a section 1295 election transferred to a pass through entity. A shareholder's section 1295 election will not apply to a domestic pass through entity to which the shareholder transfers stock subject to section 1295 election, or to any other U.S. person that is an interest holder or beneficiary of the domestic pass through entity. However, as provided in paragraph (c)(2)(iv) of this section (relating to a transfer to a domestic pass through entity of stock subject to a section 1295 election), a shareholder that transfers stock subject to a section 1295 election to a pass through entity will continue to be subject to the section 1295 election with respect to the stock indirectly owned through the pass through entity and any other stock of that PFIC owned by the shareholder.

(ii) Limitation on application of pass through entity's section 1295 election. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)(iv) of this section, a section 1295 election made by a domestic pass through entity does not apply to other stock of the PFIC held directly or indirectly by the interest holder or beneficiary.

(iii) Effect of partnership termination on section 1295 election. Termination of a section 1295 election made by a domestic partnership by reason of the termination of the partnership under section 708(b) will not terminate the section 1295 election with respect to partners of the terminated partnership that are partners of the new partnership. Except as otherwise provided, the stock of the PFIC of which the new partners are indirect shareholders will be treated as stock of a QEF only if the new domestic partnership makes a section 1295 election with respect to that stock.

(iv) Characterization of stock held through a pass through entity. Stock of a PFIC held through a pass through entity will be treated as stock of a pedigreed QEF with respect to an interest holder or beneficiary only if—

(A) In the case of PFIC stock acquired (other than in a transaction in which gain is not recognized pursuant to regulations under section 1291(f) with respect to that stock) and held by a domestic pass through entity, the pass through entity makes the section 1295 election and the PFIC has been a QEF with respect to the pass through entity for all taxable years that are included wholly or partly in the pass through entity's holding period of the PFIC stock and during which the foreign corporation was a PFIC within the meaning of § 1.1291-9(j)(1); or

(B) In the case of PFIC stock transferred by an interest holder or beneficiary to a pass through entity in a transaction in which gain is not fully recognized (including pursuant to regulations under section 1291(f)), the pass through entity makes the section 1295 election with respect to the PFIC stock transferred for the taxable year in which the transfer was made. The PFIC stock transferred will be treated as stock of a pedigreed QEF by the pass through entity, however, only if that stock was treated as stock of a pedigreed QEF with respect to the interest holder or beneficiary at the time of the transfer, and the PFIC has been a QEF with respect to the pass through entity for all taxable years of the PFIC that are included wholly or partly in the pass through entity's holding period of the PFIC stock during which the foreign corporation was a PFIC within the meaning of § 1.1291-9(j).

(v) Characterization of stock distributed by a partnership. In the case of PFIC stock distributed by a partnership to a partner in a transaction in which gain is not fully recognized, the PFIC stock will be treated as stock of a pedigreed QEF by the partners only if that stock was treated as stock of a pedigreed QEF with respect to the partnership for all taxable years of the PFIC that are included wholly or partly in the partnership's holding period of the PFIC stock during which the foreign corporation was a PFIC within the meaning of § 1.1291-9(j), and the partner has a section 1295 election in effect with respect to the distributed PFIC stock for the partner's taxable year in which the distribution was made. If the partner does not have a section 1295 election in effect, the stock shall be treated as stock in a section 1291 fund. See paragraph (k) of this section for special applicability date of paragraph (b)(3)(v) of this section.

(4) Application of general rules to a taxpayer filing a joint return under section 6013. A section 1295 election made by a taxpayer in a joint return, within the meaning of section 6013, will be treated as also made by the spouse that joins in the filing of that return. See paragraph (k) of this section for special applicability date of paragraph (b)(4) of this section.

(c) Effect of section 1295 election

(1) In general. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (c), the effect of a shareholder's section 1295 election is to treat the foreign corporation as a QEF with respect to the shareholder for each taxable year of the foreign corporation ending with or within a taxable year of the shareholder for which the election is effective. A section 1295 election is effective for the shareholder's election year and all subsequent taxable years of the shareholder unless invalidated, terminated or revoked as provided in paragraph (i) of this section. The terms shareholder and shareholder's election year are defined in paragraph (j) of this section.

(2) Years to which section 1295 election applies

(i) In general. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (c), a foreign corporation with respect to which a section 1295 election is made will be treated as a QEF for its taxable year ending with or within the shareholder's election year and all subsequent taxable years of the foreign corporation that are included wholly or partly in the shareholder's holding period (or periods) of stock of the foreign corporation.

(ii) Effect of PFIC status on election. A foreign corporation will not be treated as a QEF for any taxable year of the foreign corporation that the foreign corporation is not a PFIC under section 1297(a) and is not treated as a PFIC under section 1298(b)(1). Therefore, a shareholder shall not be required to include pursuant to section 1293 the shareholder's pro rata share of ordinary earnings and net capital gain for such year and shall not be required to satisfy the section 1295 annual reporting requirement of paragraph (f)(2) of this section for such year. Cessation of a foreign corporation's status as a PFIC will not, however, terminate a section 1295 election. Thus, if the foreign corporation is a PFIC in any taxable year after a year in which it is not treated as a PFIC, the shareholder's original election under section 1295 continues to apply and the shareholder must take into account its pro rata share of ordinary earnings and net capital gain for such year and comply with the section 1295 annual reporting requirement.

(iii) Effect on election of complete termination of a shareholder's interest in the PFIC. Complete termination of a shareholder's direct and indirect interest in stock of a foreign corporation will not terminate a shareholder's section 1295 election with respect to the foreign corporation. Therefore, if a shareholder reacquires a direct or indirect interest in any stock of the foreign corporation, that stock is considered to be stock for which an election under section 1295 has been made and the shareholder is subject to the income inclusion and reporting rules required of a shareholder of a QEF.

(iv) Effect on section 1295 election of transfer of stock to a domestic pass through entity. The transfer of a shareholder's direct or indirect interest in stock of a foreign corporation to a domestic pass through entity (as defined in paragraph (j) of this section) will not terminate the shareholder's section 1295 election with respect to the foreign corporation, whether or not the pass through entity makes a section 1295 election. For the rules concerning the application of section 1293 to stock transferred to a domestic pass through entity, see § 1.1293-1(c).

(v) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (c)(2).

Example 1. In 1998, C, a U.S. person, purchased stock of FC, a foreign corporation that is a PFIC. Both FC and C are calendar year taxpayers. C made a timely section 1295 election to treat FC as a QEF in C's 1998 return, and FC was therefore a pedigreed QEF. C included its shares of FC's 1998 ordinary earnings and net capital gain in C's 1998 Income and did not make a section 1294 election to defer the time for payment of tax on that income. In 1999, 2000, and 2001, FC did not satisfy either the income or asset test of section 1296(a), and therefore was neither a PFIC nor a QEF. C therefore did not have to include its pro rata shares of the ordinary earnings and net capital gain of FC pursuant to section 1293, or satisfy the section 1295 annual reporting requirements for any of those years. FC qualified as a PFIC again in 2002. Because C had made a section 1295 election in 1998, and the election had not been invalidated, terminated, or revoked, within the meaning of paragraph (i) of this section, C's section 1295 election remains in effect for 2002. C therefore is subject in 2002 to the income inclusion and reporting rules required of shareholders of QEFs.

Example 2. The facts are the same as in Example (1) except that FC did not lose PFIC status in any year and C sold all the FC stock in 1999 and repurchased stock of FC in 2002. Because C had made a section 1295 election in 1998 with respect to stock of FC, and the election had not been invalidated, terminated, or revoked, within the meaning of paragraph (i) of this section, C's section 1295 election remained in effect and therefore applies to the stock of FC purchased by C in 2002. C therefore is subject in 2002 to the income inclusion and reporting rules required of shareholders of QEFs.

Example 3. The facts are the same as in Example (2) except that C is a partner in domestic partnership P and C transferred its FC stock to P in 1999. Because C had made a section 1295 election in 1998 with respect to stock of FC, and the election had not been invalidated, terminated, or revoked, within the meaning of paragraph (i) of this section, C's section 1295 election remains in effect with respect to its indirect interest in the stock of FC. If P does not make the section 1295 election with respect to the FC stock, C will continue to be subject, in C's capacity as an indirect shareholder of FC, to the income inclusion and reporting rules required of shareholders of QEFs in 1999 and subsequent years for that portion of the FC stock C is treated as owning indirectly through the partnership. If P makes the section 1295 election, C will take into account its pro rata shares of the ordinary earnings and net capital gain of the FC under the rules applicable to inclusions of income from P.

(d) Who may make a section 1295 election

(1) General rule. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (d), any U.S. person that is a shareholder (as defined in paragraph (j) of this section) of a PFIC, including a shareholder that holds stock of a PFIC in bearer form, may make a section 1295 election with respect to that PFIC. The shareholder need not own directly or indirectly any stock of the PFIC at the time the shareholder makes the section 1295 election provided the shareholder is a shareholder of the PFIC during the taxable year of the PFIC that ends with or within the taxable year of the shareholder for which the section 1295 election is made. Except in the case of a shareholder that is an exempt organization that may not make a section 1295 election, as provided in paragraph (d)(6) of this section, in a chain of ownership only the first U.S. person that is a shareholder of the PFIC may make the section 1295 election.

(2) Application of general rule to pass through entities

(i) Partnerships

(A) Domestic partnership. A domestic partnership that holds an interest in stock of a PFIC makes the section 1295 election with request to that PFIC. The partnership election applies only to the stock of the PFIC held directly or indirectly by the partnership and not to any other stock held directly or indirectly by any partner. As provided in § 1.1293-1(c)(1), shareholders owning stock of a QEF by reason of an interest in the partnership take into account the section 1293 inclusions with respect to the QEF shares owned by the partnership under the rules applicable to inclusions of income from the partnership.

(B) Foreign partnership. A U.S. person that holds an interest in a foreign partnership that, in turn, holds an interest in stock of a PFIC makes the section 1295 election with respect to that PFIC. A partner's election applies to the stock of the PFIC owned directly or indirectly by the foreign partnership and to any other stock of the PFIC owned by that partner. A section 1295 election by a partner applies only to that partner.

(ii) S corporation. An S corporation that holds an interest in stock of a PFIC makes the section 1295 election with respect to that PFIC. The S corporation election applies only to the stock of the PFIC held directly or indirectly by the S corporation and not to any other stock held directly or indirectly by any S corporation shareholder. As provided in § 1.1293-1(c)(1), shareholders owning stock of a QEF by reason of an interest in the S corporation take into account the section 1293 inclusions with respect to the QEF shares under the rules applicable to inclusions of income from the S corporation.

(iii) Trust or estate

(A) Domestic trust or estate

(1) Nongrantor trust or estate. A domestic nongrantor trust or a domestic estate that holds an interest in stock of a PFIC makes the section 1295 election with respect to that PFIC. The trust or estate's election applies only to the stock of the PFIC held directly or indirectly by the trust or estate and not to any other stock held directly or indirectly by any beneficiary. As provided in § 1.1293-1(c)(1), shareholders owning stock of a QEF by reason of an interest in a domestic trust or estate take into account the section 1293 inclusions with respect to the QEF shares under the rules applicable to inclusions of income from the trust or estate.

(2) Grantor trust. A U.S. person that is treated under sections 671 through 678 as the owner of the portion of a domestic trust that owns an interest in stock of a PFIC makes the section 1295 election with respect to that PFIC. If that person ceases to be treated as the owner of the portion of the trust that owns an interest in the PFIC stock and is a beneficiary of the trust, that person's section 1295 election will continue to apply to the PFIC stock indirectly owned by that person under the rules of paragraph (c)(2)(iv) of this section as if the person had transferred its interest in the PFIC stock to the trust. However, the stock will be treated as stock of a PFIC that is not a QEF with respect to other beneficiaries of the trust, unless the trust makes the section 1295 election as provided in paragraph (d)(2)(iii)(A)(1) of this section.

(B) Foreign trust or estate

(1) Nongrantor trust or estate. A U.S. person that is a beneficiary of a foreign nongrantor trust or estate that holds an interest in stock of a PFIC makes the section 1295 election with respect to that PFIC. A beneficiary's section 1295 election applies to all the PFIC stock owned directly and indirectly by the trust or estate and to the other PFIC stock owned directly or indirectly by the beneficiary. A section 1295 election by a beneficiary applies only to that beneficiary.

(2) Grantor trust. A U.S. person that is treated under sections 671 through 679 as the owner of the portion of a foreign trust that owns an interest in stock of a PFIC stock makes the section 1295 election with respect to that PFIC. If that person ceases to be treated as the owner of the portion of the trust that owns an interest in the PFIC stock and is a beneficiary of the trust, that person's section 1295 election will continue to apply to the PFIC stock indirectly owned by that person under the rules of paragraph (c)(2)(iv) of this section. However, as provided in paragraph (d)(2)(iii)(B)(1) of this section, any other shareholder that is a beneficiary of the trust and that wishes to treat the PFIC as a QEF must make the section 1295 election.

(iv) Indirect ownership of the pass through entity or the PFIC. The rules of this paragraph (d)(2) apply whether or not the shareholder holds its interest in the pass through entity directly or indirectly and whether or not the pass through entity holds its interest in the PFIC directly or indirectly.

(3) Indirect ownership of a PFIC through other PFIC s—

(i) In general. An election under section 1295 shall apply only to the foreign corporation for which an election is made. Therefore, if a shareholder makes an election under section 1295 to treat a PFIC as a QEF, that election applies only to stock in that foreign corporation and not to the stock in any other corporation which the shareholder is treated as owning by virtue of its ownership of stock in the QEF.

(ii) Example. The following example illustrates the rules of paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this section:

Example. In 1988, T, a U.S. person, purchased stock of FC, a foreign corporation that is a PFIC. FC also owns the stock of SC, a foreign corporation that is a PFIC. T makes an election under section 1295 to treat FC as a QEF. T's section 1295 election applies only to the stock T owns in FC, and does not apply to the stock T indirectly owns in SC.

(4) Member of consolidated return group as shareholder. Pursuant to § 1.1502-77(a), the common parent of an affiliated group of corporations that join in filing a consolidated income tax return makes a section 1295 election for all members of the affiliated group. An election by a common parent will be effective for all members of the affiliated group with respect to interests in PFIC stock held at the time the election is made or at any time thereafter. A separate election must be made by the common parent for each PFIC of which a member of the affiliated group is a shareholder.

(5) Option holder. A holder of an option to acquire stock of a PFIC may not make a section 1295 election that will apply to the option or to the stock subject to the option.

(6) Exempt organization. A tax-exempt organization that is not taxable under section 1291, pursuant to § 1.1291-1(e), with respect to a PFIC may not make a section 1295 election with respect to that PFIC. In addition, such an exempt organization will not be subject to any section 1295 election made by a domestic pass through entity.

(e) Time for making a section 1295 election—

(1) In general. Except as provided in § 1.1295-3, a shareholder making the section 1295 election must make the election on or before the due date, as extended under section 6081 (election due date), for filing the shareholder's income tax return for the first taxable year to which the election will apply. The section 1295 election must be made in the original return for that year, or in an amended return, provided the amended return is filed on or before the election due date.

(2) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of paragraph (e)(1) of this section:

Example 1. In 1998, C, a domestic corporation, purchased stock of FC, a foreign corporation that is a PFIC. Both C and FC are calendar year taxpayers. C wishes to make the section 1295 election for its taxable year ended December 31, 1998. The section 1295 election must be made on or before March 15, 1999, the due date of C's 1998 income tax return as provided by section 6072(b). On March 14, 1999, C files a request for a three-month extension of time to file its 1998 income tax return under section 6081(b). C's time to file its 1998 income tax return and to make the section 1295 election is thereby extended to June 15, 1999.

Example 2. The facts are the same as in Example 1 except that on May 1, 1999, C filed its 1998 income tax return and failed to include the section 1295 election. C may file an amended income tax return for 1998 to make the section 1295 election provided the amended return is filed on or before the extended due date of June 15, 1999.

(f) Manner of making a section 1295 election and the annual election requirements of the shareholder

(1) Manner of making the election. A shareholder must make a section 1295 election by—

(i) Completing Form 8621 in the manner required by that form and this section for making the section 1295 election;

(ii) Attaching Form 8621 to its Federal income tax return filed by the election due date for the shareholder's election year; and

(iii) Receiving and reflecting in Form 8621 the information provided in the PFIC Annual Information Statement described in paragraph (g)(1) of this section, the Annual Intermediary Statement described in paragraph (g)(3) of this section, or the applicable combined statement described in paragraph (g)(4) of this section, for the taxable year of the PFIC ending with or within the taxable year for which Form 8621 is being filed. If the PFIC Annual Information Statement contains a statement described in paragraph (g)(1)(ii)(C) of this section, the shareholder must attach a statement to Form 8621 that indicates that the shareholder rather than the PFIC calculated the PFIC's ordinary earnings and net capital gain.

(2) Annual election requirements

(i) In general. A shareholder that makes a section 1295 election with respect to a PFIC held directly or indirectly, for each taxable year to which the section 1295 election applies, must—

(A) Complete Form 8621 in the manner required by that form and this section;

(B) Attach Form 8621 to its Federal income tax return filed by the due date of the return, as extended; and

(C) Receive and reflect in Form 8621 the PFIC Annual Information Statement described in paragraph (g)(1) of this section, the Annual Intermediary Statement described in paragraph (g)(3) of this section, or the applicable combined statement described in paragraph (g)(4) of this section, for the MTtaxable year of the PFIC ending with or within the taxable year for which Form 8621 is being filed. If the PFIC Annual Information Statement contains a statement described in paragraph (g)(1)(ii)(C) of this section, the shareholder must attach a statement to its Form 8621 that the shareholder rather than the PFIC provided the calculations of the PFIC's ordinary earnings and net capital gain.

(ii) Retention of documents. For all taxable years subject to the section 1295 election, the shareholder must retain copies of all Forms 8621, with their attachments, and PFIC Annual Information Statements or Annual Intermediary Statements. Failure to produce those documents at the request of the Commissioner in connection with an examination may result in invalidation or termination of the shareholder's section 1295 election.

(3) Effective date. See paragraph (k) of this section for special applicability date of paragraph (f) of this section.

(g) Annual election requirements of the PFIC or intermediary

(1) PFIC Annual Information Statement. For each year of the PFIC ending in a taxable year of a shareholder to which the shareholder's section 1295 election applies, the PFIC must provide the shareholder with a PFIC Annual Information Statement. The PFIC Annual Information Statement is a statement of the PFIC, signed by the PFIC or an authorized representative of the PFIC, that contains the following information and representations—

(i) The first and last days of the taxable year of the PFIC to which the PFIC Annual Information Statement applies;

(ii) Either—

(A) The shareholder's pro rata shares of the ordinary earnings and net capital gain (as defined in § 1.1295-1(a)(2)) of the PFIC for the taxable year indicated in paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section; or

(B) Sufficient information to enable the shareholder to calculate its pro rata shares of the PFIC's ordinary earnings and net capital gain, for that taxable year; or

(C) A statement that the foreign corporation has permitted the shareholder to examine the books of account, records, and other documents of the foreign corporation for the shareholder to calculate the amounts of the PFIC's ordinary earnings and the net capital gain according to Federal income tax accounting principles and to calculate the shareholder's pro rata shares of the PFIC's ordinary earnings and net capital gain;

(iii) The amount of cash and the fair market value of other property distributed or deemed distributed to the shareholder during the taxable year of the PFIC to which the PFIC Annual Information Statement pertains; and

(iv) Either—

(A) A statement that the PFIC will permit the shareholder to inspect and copy the PFIC's permanent books of account, records, and such other documents as may be maintained by the PFIC to establish that the PFIC's ordinary earnings and net capital gain are computed in accordance with U.S. income tax principles, and to verify these amounts and the shareholder's pro rata shares thereof; or

(B) In lieu of the statement required in paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(A) of this section, a description of the alternative documentation requirements approved by the Commissioner, with a copy of the private letter ruling and the closing agreement entered into by the Commissioner and the PFIC pursuant to paragraph (g)(2) of this section.

(2) Alternative documentation. In rare and unusual circumstances, the Commissioner will consider alternative documentation requirements necessary to verify the ordinary earnings and net capital gain of a PFIC other than the documentation requirements described in paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(A) of this section. Alternative documentation requirements will be allowed only pursuant to a private letter ruling and a closing agreement entered into by the Commissioner and the PFIC describing an alternative method of verifying the PFIC's ordinary earnings and net capital gain. If the PFIC has not obtained a private letter ruling from the Commissioner approving an alternative method of verifying the PFIC's ordinary earnings and net capital gain by the time a shareholder is required to make a section 1295 election, the shareholder may not use an alternative method for that taxable year.

(3) Annual Intermediary Statement. In the case of a U.S. person that is an indirect shareholder of a PFIC that is owned through an intermediary, as defined in paragraph (j) of this section, an Annual Intermediary Statement issued by an intermediary containing the information described in paragraph (g)(1) of this section and reporting the indirect shareholder's pro rata share of the ordinary earnings and net capital gain of the QEF as described in paragraph (g)(1)(ii)(A) of this section, may be provided to the indirect shareholder in lieu of the PFIC Annual Information Statement if the following conditions are satisfied—

(i) The intermediary receives a copy of the PFIC Annual Information Statement or the intermediary receives an annual intermediary statement from another intermediary which contains a statement that the other intermediary has received a copy of the PFIC Annual Information Statement and represents that the conditions of paragraphs (g)(3)(ii) and (g)(3)(iii) of this section are met;

(ii) The representations and information contained in the Annual Intermediary Statement reflect the representations and information contained in the PFIC Annual Information Statement; and

(iii) The PFIC Annual Information Statement issued to the intermediary contains either the representation set forth in paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(A) of this section, or, if alternative documentation requirements were approved by the Commissioner pursuant to paragraph (g)(2) of this section, a copy of the private letter ruling and closing agreement between the Commissioner and the PFIC, agreeing to an alternative method of verifying PFIC ordinary earnings and net capital gain as described in paragraph (g)(2) of this section;

(4) Combined statements

(i) PFIC Annual Information Statement. A PFIC that owns directly or indirectly any stock of one or more PFICs with respect to which a shareholder may make the section 1295 election may prepare a PFIC Annual Information Statement that combines with its own information and representations the information and representations of all the PFICs. The PFIC may use any format for a combined PFIC Annual Information Statement provided the required information and representations are separately stated and identified with the respective corporations.

(ii) Annual Intermediary Statement. An intermediary described in paragraph (g)(3) of this section that owns directly or indirectly stock of one or more PFICs with respect to which an indirect shareholder may make the section 1295 election may prepare an Annual Intermediary Statement that combines with its own information and representations the information and representations with respect to all the PFICs. The intermediary may use any format for a combined Annual Intermediary Statement provided the required information and representations are separately stated and identified with the intermediary and the respective corporations.

(5) Effective date. See paragraph (k) of this section for special applicability date of paragraph (g) of this section.

(h) Transition rules. Taxpayers may rely on Notice 88-125 (1988-2 C.B. 535) (see § 601.601(d)(2) of this chapter), for rules on making and maintaining elections for shareholder election years (as defined in paragraph (j) of this section) beginning after December 31, 1986, and before January 1, 1998. Elections made under Notice 88-125 must be maintained as provided in § 1.1295-1 for taxable years beginning after December 31, 1997. A section 1295 election made prior to February 2, 1998 that was intended to be effective for the taxable year of the PFIC that began during the shareholder's election year will be effective for that taxable year of the foreign corporation provided that it is clear from all the facts and circumstances that the shareholder intended the election to be effective for that taxable year of the foreign corporation.

(i) Invalidation, termination, or revocation of section 1295 election

(1) Invalidation or termination of election at the discretion of the Commissioner

(i) In general. The Commissioner, in the Commissioner's discretion, may invalidate or terminate a section 1295 election applicable to a shareholder if the shareholder, the PFIC, or any intermediary fails to satisfy the requirements for making a section 1295 election or the annual election requirements of this section to which the shareholder, PFIC, or intermediary is subject, including the requirement to provide, on request, copies of the books and records of the PFIC or other documentation substantiating the ordinary earnings and net capital gain of the PFIC.

(ii) Deferral of section 1293 inclusion. The Commissioner may invalidate any pass through entity section 1295 election with respect to an interest holder or beneficiary if the section 1293 inclusion with respect to that interest holder or beneficiary is not included in the gross income of either the pass through entity, an intermediate pass through entity, or the interest holder or beneficiary within two years of the end of the PFIC's taxable year due to nonconforming taxable years of the interest holder and the pass through entity or any intermediate pass through entity.

(iii) When effective. Termination of a shareholder's section 1295 election will be effective for the taxable year of the PFIC determined by the Commissioner in the Commissioner's discretion. An invalidation of a shareholder's section 1295 election will be effective for the first taxable year to which the section 1295 election applied, and the shareholder whose election is invalidated will be treated as if the section 1295 election was never made.

(2) Shareholder revocation

(i) In general. In the Commissioner's discretion, upon a finding of a substantial change in circumstances, the Commissioner may consent to a shareholder's request to revoke a section 1295 election. Request for revocation must be made by the shareholder that made the election and at the time and in the manner provided in paragraph (i)(2)(ii) of this section.

(ii) Time for and manner of requesting consent to revoke

(A) Time. The shareholder must request consent to revoke the section 1295 election no later than 12 calendar months after the discovery of the substantial change of circumstances that forms the basis for the shareholder's request to revoke the section 1295 election.

(B) Manner of making request. A shareholder requests consent to revoke a section 1295 election by filing a ruling request with the Office of the Associate Chief Counsel (International). The ruling request must satisfy the requirements, including payment of the user fee, for filing ruling requests with that office.

(iii) When effective. Unless otherwise determined by the Commissioner, revocation of a section 1295 election will be effective for the first taxable year of the PFIC beginning after the date the Commissioner consents to the revocation.

(3) Automatic termination. If a United States person, or the United States shareholder on behalf of a controlled foreign corporation, makes an election pursuant to section 1296 and the regulations thereunder with respect to PFIC stock for which a QEF election is in effect, or marks to market such stock under another provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code, the QEF election is automatically terminated with respect to such stock that is marked to market under section 1296 or another provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code. Such termination shall be effective on the last day of the shareholder's taxable year preceding the first taxable year for which the section 1296 election is in effect or such stock is marked to market under another provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code.

Example. Corp Y, a domestic corporation, owns directly 100 shares of marketable stock in foreign corporation FX, a PFIC. Corp Y also owns a 50 percent interest in FP, a foreign partnership that owns 200 shares of FX stock. Accordingly, under section 1298(a)(3) and § 1.1296-1(e)(1), Corp Y is treated as indirectly owning 100 shares of FX stock. Corp Y also owns 100 percent of the stock of FZ, a foreign corporation that is not a PFIC. FZ owns 100 shares of FX stock, and therefore under section 1298(a)(2)(A), Corp Y is treated as owning the 100 shares of FX stock owned by FZ. For taxable year 2005, Corp Y has a QEF election in effect with respect to all 300 shares of FX stock that it owns directly or indirectly. See generally § 1.1295-1(c)(1). For taxable year 2006, Corp Y makes a timely election pursuant to section 1296 and the regulations thereunder. For purposes of section 1296, Corp Y is treated as owning stock held indirectly through a partnership, but not through a foreign corporation. Section 1296(g); § 1.1296-1(e)(1). Accordingly, Corp Y's section 1296 election covers the 100 shares it owns directly and the 100 shares it owns indirectly through FP, but not the 100 shares owned by FZ. With respect to the first 200 shares, Corp Y's QEF election is automatically terminated effective December 31, 2005. With respect to the 100 shares Corp Y owns through foreign FZ, Corp Y's QEF election remains in effect unless invalidated, terminated, or revoked pursuant to this paragraph (i).

(4) Effect of invalidation, termination, or revocation. An invalidation, termination, or revocation of a section 1295 election—

(i) Terminates all section 1294 elections, as provided in § 1.1294-1T(e), and the undistributed PFIC earnings tax liability and interest thereon are due by the due date, without regard to extensions, for the return for the last taxable year of the shareholder to which the section 1295 election applies;

(ii) In the Commissioner's discretion, results in a deemed sale of the QEF stock on the last day of the PFIC's last taxable year as a QEF, in which gain, but not loss, will be recognized and with respect to which appropriate basis and holding period adjustments will be made; and

(iii) Subjects the shareholder to any other terms and conditions that the Commissioner determines are necessary to ensure the shareholder's compliance with sections 1291 through 1298 or any other provisions of the Code.

(5) Effect after invalidation, termination, or revocation

(i) In general. Without the Commissioner's consent, a shareholder whose section 1295 election was invalidated, terminated, or revoked under this paragraph (i) may not make the section 1295 election with respect to the PFIC before the sixth taxable year in which the invalidation, termination, or revocation became effective.

(ii) Special rule. Notwithstanding paragraph (i)(5)(i) of this section, a shareholder whose section 1295 election was terminated pursuant to paragraph (i)(3) of this section, and either whose section 1296 election has subsequently been terminated because its PFIC stock ceased to be marketable or who no longer marks to market such stock under another provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code, may make a section 1295 election with respect to its PFIC stock before the sixth taxable year in which its prior section 1295 election was terminated.

(j) Definitions. For purposes of this section—

Intermediary is a nominee or shareholder of record that holds stock on behalf of the shareholder or on behalf of another person in a chain of ownership between the shareholder and the PFIC, and any direct or indirect beneficial owner of PFIC stock (including a beneficial owner that is a pass through entity) in the chain of ownership between the shareholder and the PFIC.

Pass through entity is a partnership, S corporation, trust, or estate.

Shareholder has the same meaning as the term shareholder in § 1.1291-9(j)(3), except that for purposes of this section, a partnership and an S corporation also are treated as shareholders. Furthermore, unless otherwise provided, an interest holder of a pass through entity, which is treated as a shareholder of a PFIC, also will be treated as a shareholder of the PFIC.

Shareholder's election year is the taxable year of the shareholder for which it made the section 1295 election.

(k) Effective dates. Except as otherwise provided, paragraphs (b)(2)(iii), (b)(3), (b)(4), and (c) through (j) of this section are applicable to taxable years of shareholders beginning after December 31, 1997. However, taxpayers may apply the rules under paragraphs (b)(4), (f) and (g) of this section to a taxable year beginning before January 1, 1998, provided the statute of limitations on the assessment of tax has not expired as of April 27, 1998, and, in the case of paragraph (b)(4) of this section, the taxpayers who filed the joint return have consistently applied the rules of that section to all taxable years following the year the election was made. Paragraph (b)(3)(v) of this section is applicable as of February 7, 2000, however, a taxpayer may apply the rules to a taxable year prior to the applicable date provided the statute of limitations on the assessment of tax for that taxable year has not expired. Paragraphs (i)(3) and (i)(5)(ii) of this section are applicable for taxable years beginning on or after May 3, 2004.

[T.D. 8750, 63 FR 15, Jan. 2, 1998. Redesignated and amended by T.D. 8870, 65 FR 5779, 5781, Feb. 7, 2000; T.D. 9123, 69 FR 24073, May 3, 2004]

§ 1.1295-3 Retroactive elections.

(a) In general. This section prescribes the exclusive rules under which a shareholder, as defined in § 1.1295-1(j), may make a section 1295 election for a taxable year after the election due date, as defined in § 1.1295-1(e) (retroactive election). Therefore, a shareholder may not seek such relief under any other provision of the law, including § 301.9100 of this chapter. Paragraph (b) of this section describes the general rules for a shareholder to preserve the ability to make a retroactive election. These rules require that the shareholder possess reasonable belief as of the election due date that the foreign corporation was not a PFIC for its taxable year that ended in the shareholder's taxable year to which the election due date pertains, and that the shareholder file a Protective Statement to preserve its ability to make a retroactive election. Paragraph (c) of this section establishes the terms, conditions and other requirements with respect to a Protective Statement required to be filed under the general rules. Paragraph (d) of this section sets forth factors that establishes a shareholder's reasonable belief that a foreign corporation was not a PFIC. Paragraph (e) of this section prescribes special rules for certain shareholders that are deemed to satisfy the reasonable belief requirement and therefore are not required to file a Protective Statement. Paragraph (f) of this section describes the limited circumstances under which the Commissioner may permit a shareholder that lacked the requisite reasonable belief or failed to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (b) or (e) of this section to make a retroactive election. Paragraph (g) of this section provides the time for and manner of making a retroactive election. Paragraph (h) of this section provides the effective date of this section.

(b) General rule. Except as provided in paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section, a shareholder may make a retroactive election for a taxable year of the shareholder (retroactive election year) only if the shareholder—

(1) Reasonably believed, within the meaning of paragraph (d) of this section, that as of the election due date, as defined in § 1.1295-1(e), the foreign corporation was not a PFIC for its taxable year that ended during the retroactive election year;

(2) Filed a Protective Statement with respect to the foreign corporation, applicable to the retroactive election year, in which the shareholder described the basis for its reasonable belief and extended, in the manner provided in paragraph (c)(4) of this section, the periods of limitations on the assessment of taxes determined under sections 1291 and 1298 with respect to the foreign corporation (PFIC related taxes) for all taxable years of the shareholder to which the Protective Statement applies; and

(3) Complied with the other terms and conditions of the Protective Statement.

(c) Protective Statement

(1) In general. A Protective Statement is a statement executed under penalties of perjury by the shareholder, or a person authorized to sign a Federal income tax return on behalf of the shareholder, that preserves the shareholder's ability to make a retroactive election. To file a Protective Statement that applies to a taxable year of the shareholder, the shareholder must reasonably believe as of the election due date that the foreign corporation was not a PFIC for the foreign corporation's taxable year that ended during the retroactive election year. The Protective Statement must contain—

(i) The shareholder's reasonable belief statement, as described in paragraph (c)(2) of this section;

(ii) The shareholder's agreement extending the periods of limitations on the assessment of PFIC related taxes for all taxable years to which the Protective Statement applies, as provided in paragraph (c)(4) of this section; and

(iii) The following information and representations—

(A) The shareholder's name, address, taxpayer identification number, and the shareholder's first taxable year to which the Protective Statement applies;

(B) The foreign corporation's name, address, and taxpayer identification number, if any; and

(C) The highest percentage of shares of each class of stock of the foreign corporation held directly or indirectly by the shareholder during the shareholder's first taxable year to which the Protective Statement applies.

(2) Reasonable belief statement. The Protective Statement must contain a reasonable belief statement, as described in paragraph (c)(1) of this section. The reasonable belief statement is a description of the shareholder's basis for its reasonable belief that the foreign corporation was not a PFIC for its taxable year that ended with or within the shareholder's first taxable year to which the Protective Statement applies. If the Protective Statement applies to a taxable year or years described in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section, the reasonable belief statement must describe the shareholder's basis for its reasonable belief that the foreign corporation was not a PFIC for the foreign corporation's taxable year or years that ended in such taxable year or years of the shareholder. The reasonable belief statement must discuss the application of the income and asset tests to the foreign corporation and the factors, including those stated in paragraph (d) of this section, that affect the results of those tests.

(3) Who executes and files the Protective Statement. The person that executes and files and Protective Statement is the person that makes the section 1295 election, as provided in § 1.1295-1(d).

(4) Waiver of the periods of limitations

(i) Time for and manner of extending periods of limitations.

(A) In general. A shareholder that files the Protective Statement with the Commissioner must extend the periods of limitations on the assessment of all PFIC related taxes for all of the shareholder's taxable years to which the Protective Statement applies, as provided in this paragraph (c)(4). The shareholder is required to execute the waiver on such form as the Commission may prescribe for purposes of this paragraph (c)(4). Until that form is published, the shareholder must execute a statement in which the shareholder agrees to extend the periods of limitations on the assessment of all PFIC related taxes for all the shareholder's taxable years to which the Protective Statement applies, as provided in this paragraph (c)(4), and agrees to the restrictions in paragraph (c)(4)(ii)(A) of this section. The shareholder or a person authorized to sign the shareholder's Federal income tax return must sign the form or statement. A properly executed form or statement authorized by this paragraph (c)(4) will be deemed consented to and signed by a Service Center Director or the Assistant Commissioner (International) for purposes of § 301.6501(c)-1(d) of this chapter.

(B) Application of general rule to domestic partnerships—

(1) In general. A domestic partnership that holds an interest in stock of a PFIC satisfies the waiver requirement of paragraph (c)(4) of this section pursuant to the rules of this paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B)(1). The partnership must file one or more waivers obtained or arranged under this paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B) as part of the Protective Statement, as provided in paragraph (c)(1) of this section. The partnership must either—

(i) Obtain from each partner the partner's waiver of the periods of limitations;

(ii) Obtain from each partner a duly executed power of attorney under § 601.501 of this chapter authorizing the partnership to extend that partner's periods of limitations, and execute a waiver on behalf of the partners; or

(iii) In the case of a domestic partnership governed by the unified audit and litigation procedures of sections 6221 through 6233 (TEFRA partnership), arrange for the tax matters partner (or any other person authorized to enter into an agreement to extend the periods of limitations), as provided in section 6229(b), to execute a waiver on behalf of all the partners.

(2) Special rules

(i) Addition of partner to non-TEFRA partnership. In the case of any individual who becomes a partner in a domestic partnership other than a TEFRA partnership (non-TEFRA partnership) in a taxable year subsequent to the year in which the partnership filed a Protective Statement, the partner and the partnership must comply with the rules applicable to non-TEFRA partnerships, as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B)(1) of this section, by the due date, as extended, for the Federal income tax return of the partnership for the taxable year during which the individual became a partner. Failure to so comply will render the Protective Statement invalid with respect to the partnership and partners.

(ii) Change in status from non-TEFRA partnership to TEFRA partnership. If a partnership is a non-TEFRA partnership in one taxable year but becomes a TEFRA partnership in a subsequent taxable year, the partnership must file one or more waivers obtained or arranged under this paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B)(2)(ii), as part of the Protective Statement, as provided in paragraph (c)(1) of this section. The partnership must either—obtain from any new partner the partner's waiver described in this paragraph (c)(4); obtain from the new partner a duly executed power of attorney under § 601.501 of this chapter authorizing the partnership to extend the partner's periods of limitations, and execute a waiver on behalf of the new partner; or arrange for the tax matters partner (or any other person authorized to enter into an agreement to extend the periods of limitations) to execute a waiver on behalf of all the partners. In each case, the partnership must attach any new waiver of a partner's periods of limitations, and a copy of the Protective Statement to its Federal income tax return for that taxable year.

(C) Application of general rule to domestic nongrantor trusts and domestic estates. A domestic nongrantor trust or a domestic estate that holds an interest in stock of a PFIC satisfies the waiver requirement of this paragraph (c)(4) at the entity level. For this purpose, such entity must comply with rules similar to those applicable to non-TEFRA partnerships, as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B)(1) of this section.

(D) Application of general rule to S corporations. An S corporation that holds an interest in stock of a PFIC satisfies the waiver requirement of this paragraph (c)(4) at the S corporation level. For this purpose, the S corporation must comply with rules similar to those applicable to non-TEFRA partnerships, as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B)(1) of this section. However, in the case of an S corporation that was governed by the unified audit corporate proceedings of sections 6241 through 6245 for any taxable year to which a Protective Statement applies (former TEFRA S corporation), the tax matters person (or any other person authorized to enter into such an agreement), as was provided in sections 6241 through 6245, may execute a waiver described in this paragraph (c)(4) that applies to such taxable year; for any other taxable year, the former TEFRA S corporation must comply with rules similar to those applicable to non-TEFRA partnerships.

(E) Effect on waiver of complete termination of a pass through entity or pass through entity's business. The complete termination of a pass through entity described in paragraphs (c)(4)(i) (B) through (D) of this section, or a pass through entity's trade or business, will not terminate a waiver that applies to a partner, shareholder, or beneficiary.

(F) Application of general rule to foreign partnerships, foreign trusts, domestic or foreign grantor trusts, and foreign estates. A U.S. person that is a partner or beneficiary of a foreign partnership, foreign trust, or foreign estate that holds an interest in stock of a PFIC satisfies the waiver requirement of this paragraph (c)(4) at the partner or beneficiary level. A U.S. person that is treated under sections 671 through 679 as the owner of the portion of a domestic or foreign trust that owns an interest in PFIC stock also satisfies the waiver requirement at the owner level. A waiver by a partner or beneficiary applies only to that partner or beneficiary, and is not affected by a complete termination of the entity or the entity's trade or business.

(ii) Terms of waiver

(A) Scope of waiver. The waiver of the periods of limitations is limited to the assessment of PFIC related taxes. If the period of limitations for a taxable year affected by a retroactive election has expired with respect to the assessment of other non-PFIC related taxes, no adjustments, other than consequential changes, may be made by the Internal Revenue Service or by the shareholder to any other item of income, deduction, or credit for that year. If the period of limitations for refunds or credits for a taxable year affected by a retroactive election is open only by virtue of the assessment period extension and section 6511(c), no refund or credit is allowable on grounds other than adjustments to PFIC related taxes and consequential changes.

(B) Period of Waiver. The extension of the periods of limitations on the assessment of PFIC related taxes will be effective for all of the shareholder's taxable years to which the Protective Statement applies. In addition, the waiver, to the extent it applies to the period of limitations for a particular year, will terminate with respect to that year no sooner than three years from the date on which the shareholder files an amended return, as provided in paragraph (g) of this section, for that year. For the suspension of the running of the period of limitations for the collection of taxes for which a shareholder has elected under section 1294 to extend the time for payment, as provided in paragraph (g)(3)(ii) of this section, see sections 6503(i) and 6229(h).

(5) Time of and manner for filing a Protective Statement

(i) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section, a Protective Statement must be attached to the shareholder's federal income tax return for the shareholder's first taxable year to which the Protective Statement will apply. The shareholder must file its return and the copy of the Protective Statement by the due date, as extended under section 6081, for the return.

(ii) Special rule for taxable years ended before January 2, 1998. A shareholder may file a Protective Statement that applies to the shareholder's taxable year or years that ended before January 2, 1998, provided the period of limitations on the assessment of taxes for any such year has not expired (open year). The shareholder must file the Protective Statement applicable to such open year or years, as provided in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section, by the due date, as extended, for the shareholder's return for the first taxable year ending after January 2, 1998.

(6) Applicability of the Protective Statement

(i) In general. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (c)(6), a Protective Statement applies to the shareholder's first taxable year for which the Protective Statement was filed and to each subsequent taxable year. The Protective Statement will not apply to any taxable year of the shareholder during which the shareholder does not own any stock of the foreign corporation or to any taxable year thereafter. Accordingly, if the shareholder has not made a retroactive election with respect to the previously owned stock by the time the shareholder reacquires stock of the foreign corporation, the shareholder must file another Protective Statement to preserve its right to make a retroactive election with respect to the later acquired stock. For the rule that provides that a section 1295 election made with respect to a foreign corporation applies to stock of that corporation acquired after a lapse in ownership, see § 1.1295-1(c)(2)(iii).

(ii) Invalidity of the Protective Statement. A shareholder will be treated as if it never filed a Protective Statement if—

(A) The shareholder failed to make a retroactive election by the date prescribed for making the retroactive election in paragraph (g)(1) of this section; or

(B) The waiver of the periods of limitations terminates (by reason of a court decision or other determination) with respect to any taxable year before the expiration of three years from the date of filing of an amended return for that year pursuant to paragraph (g) of this section.

(7) Retention of Protective Statement and information demonstrating reasonable belief. A shareholder that files a Protective Statement must retain a copy of the Protective Statement and its attachments and must, for each taxable year of the shareholder to which the Protective Statement applies, retain information sufficient to demonstrate the shareholder's reasonable belief that the foreign corporation was not a PFIC for the taxable year of the foreign corporation ending during each such taxable year of the shareholder.

(d) Reasonable belief

(1) In general. A foreign corporation is a PFIC for a taxable year if the foreign corporation satisfies either the income or asset test of section 1297(a). To determine whether a shareholder had reasonable belief that the foreign corporation is not a PFIC under section 1297(a), the shareholder must consider all relevant facts and circumstances. Reasonable belief may be based on a variety of factors, including reasonable asset valuations as well as reasonable interpretations of the applicable provisions of the Code, regulations, and administrative guidance regarding the direct and indirect ownership of the income or assets of the foreign corporation, the proper character of that income or those assets, and similar issues. Reasonable belief may be based on reasonable predictions regarding income to be earned and assets to be owned in subsequent years where qualifications of the foreign corporation as a PFIC for the current taxable year will depend on the qualification of the corporation as a PFIC in a subsequent year. Reasonable belief may be based on an analysis of generally available financial information of the foreign corporation. To determine whether a shareholder had reasonable belief that the foreign corporation was not a PFIC, the Commissioner may consider the size of the shareholder's interest in the foreign corporation.

(2) Knowledge of law required. Reasonable belief must be based on a good faith effort to apply the Code, regulations, and related administrative guidance. Any person's failure to know or apply these provisions will not form the basis of reasonable belief.

(e) Special rules for qualified shareholders

(1) In general. A shareholder that is a qualified shareholder, as defined in paragraph (e)(2) of this section, for a taxable year of the shareholder is not required to satisfy the reasonable belief requirement of paragraph (b)(1) of this section or file a Protective Statement to preserve its ability to make a retroactive election with respect to such taxable year. Accordingly, a qualified shareholder may make a retroactive election for any open taxable year in the shareholder's holding period. The retroactive election will be treated as made in the earliest taxable year of the shareholder during which the foreign corporation qualified as a PFIC (including a taxable year ending prior to January 2, 1998) and the shareholder will be treated as a shareholder of a pedigreed QEF, as defined in § 1.1291-9(j)(2)(ii), provided the shareholder—

(i) Has been a qualified shareholder with respect to the foreign corporation for all taxable years of the shareholder included in the shareholder's holding period during which the foreign corporation was a PFIC, or in the case of taxable years ending before January 2, 1998, the shareholder satisfies the criteria of a qualified shareholder, for all such years; or

(ii) Has been a qualified shareholder, or in the case of taxable years ending before January 2, 1998 satisfies the criteria of a qualified shareholder, for all taxable years in its holding period before it filed a Protective Statement, which Protective Statement is applicable to all subsequent years, beginning with the first taxable year in which the shareholder is not a qualified shareholder.

(2) Qualified shareholder. A shareholder will be treated as a qualified shareholder for a taxable year if the shareholder did not file a Protective Statement applicable to an earlier taxable year included in the shareholder's holding period of the stock of the foreign corporation currently held and—

(i) At all times during the taxable year the shareholder owned, within the meaning of section 958, directly, indirectly, or constructively, less than two percent of the vote and value of each class of stock of the foreign corporation; and

(ii) With respect to the taxable year of the foreign corporation ending within the shareholder's taxable year, the foreign corporation or U.S. counsel for the foreign corporation indicated in a public filing, disclosure statement or other notice provided to U.S. persons that are shareholders of the foreign corporation (corporate filing) that the foreign corporation—

(A) Reasonably believes that it is not or should not constitute a PFIC for the corporation's taxable year; or

(B) Is unable to conclude that it is not or should not be a PFIC (due to certain asset valuation or interpretation issues, or because PFIC status will depend on the income or assets of the foreign corporation in the corporation's subsequent taxable years) but reasonably believes that, more likely than not, it ultimately will not be a PFIC.

(3) Exceptions. Notwithstanding paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section, a shareholder will not be treated as a qualified shareholder for a taxable year of the shareholder if the shareholder knew or had reason to know that a corporate filing regarding the foreign corporation's PFIC status was inaccurate, or knew that the foreign corporation was a PFIC for the taxable year of the foreign corporation ending with or within such taxable year of the shareholder. For purposes of this paragraph, a shareholder will be treated as knowing that a foreign corporation was a PFIC if the principal activity of the foreign corporation, directly or indirectly, is owning or trading a diversified portfolio of stock, securities, or other financial contracts.

(f) Special consent

(1) In general. A shareholder that has not satisfied the requirements of paragraph (b) or (e) of this section may request the consent of the Commissioner to make a retroactive election for a taxable year of the shareholder provided the shareholder satisfies the requirements set forth in this paragraph (f). The Commissioner will grant relief under this paragraph (f) only if—

(i) The shareholder reasonably relied on a qualified tax professional, within the meaning of paragraph (f)(2) of this section;

(ii) Granting consent will not prejudice the interests of the United States government, as provided in paragraph (f)(3) of this section;

(iii) The shareholder requests consent under paragraph (f) of this section before a representative of the Internal Revenue Service raises upon audit the PFIC status of the corporation for any taxable year of the shareholder; and

(iv) The shareholder satisfies the procedural requirements set forth in paragraph (f)(4) of this section.

(2) Reasonable reliance on a qualified tax professional

(i) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (f)(2)(ii) of this section, a shareholder is deemed to have reasonably relied on a qualified tax professional only if the shareholder reasonably relied on a qualified tax professional (including a tax professional employed by the shareholder) who failed to identify the foreign corporation as a PFIC or failed to advise the shareholder of the consequences of making, or failing to make, the section 1295 election. A shareholder will not be considered to have reasonably relied on a qualified tax professional if the shareholder knew, or reasonably should have known, that the foreign corporation was a PFIC and of the availability of a section 1295 election, or knew or reasonably should have known that the qualified tax professional—

(A) Was not competent to render tax advice with respect to the ownership of shares of a foreign corporation; or

(B) Did not have access to all relevant facts and circumstances.

(ii) Shareholder deemed to have not reasonably relied on a qualified tax professional. For purposes of this paragraph (f)(2), a shareholder is deemed to have not reasonably relied on a qualified tax professional if the shareholder was informed by the qualified tax professional that the foreign corporation was a PFIC and of the availability of the section 1295 election and related tax consequences, but either chose not to make the section 1295 election or was unable to make a valid section 1295 election.

(3) Prejudice to the interests of the United States government —(1) General rule. Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section, the Commissioner will not grant consent under paragraph (f) of this section if doing so would prejudice the interests of the United States government. The interests of the United States government are prejudiced if granting relief would result in the shareholder having a lower tax liability, taking into account applicable interest charges, in the aggregate for all years affected by the retroactive election (other than by a de minimis amount) than the shareholder would have had if the shareholder had made the section 1295 election by the election due date. The time value of money is taken into account for purposes of this computation.

(ii) Elimination of prejudice to the interests of the United States government. Notwithstanding the general rule of paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this section, if granting relief would prejudice the interests of the United States government, the Commissioner may, in the Commissioner's sole discretion, grant consent to make the election provided the shareholder enters into a closing agreement with the Commissioner that requires the shareholder to pay an amount sufficient to eliminate any prejudice to the United States government as a consequence of the shareholder's inability to file amended returns for closed taxable years.

(4) Procedural requirements

(i) Filing instructions. A shareholder requests consent under paragraph (f) of this section to make a retroactive election by filing with the Office of the Associate Chief Counsel (International) a ruling request that includes the affidavits required by this paragraph (f)(4). The ruling request must satisfy the requirements, including payment of the user fee, for ruling requests filed with that office.

(ii) Affidavit from shareholder. The shareholder, or a person authorized to sign a Federal income tax return on behalf of the shareholder, must submit a detailed affidavit describing the events that led to the failure to make a section 1295 election by the election due date, and to the discovery thereof. The shareholder's affidavit must describe the engagement and responsibilities of the qualified tax professional as well as the extent to which the shareholder relied on the tax professional. The shareholder must sign the affidavit under penalties of perjury. An individual who signs for an entity must have personal knowledge of the facts and circumstances at issue.

(iii) Affidavits from other persons. The shareholder must submit detailed affidavits from individuals having knowledge or information about the events that led to the failure to make a section 1295 election by the election due date, and to the discovery thereof. These individuals must include the qualified tax professional upon whose advice the shareholder relied, as well as any individual (including an employee of the shareholder) who made a substantial contribution to the return's preparation, and any accountant or attorney, knowledgeable in tax matters, who advised the shareholder with regard to its ownership of the stock of the foreign corporation. Each affidavit must describe the individual's engagement and responsibilities as well as the advice concerning the tax treatment of the foreign corporation that that individual provided to the shareholder. Each affidavit also must include the individual's name, address, and taxpayer identification number, and must be signed by the individual under penalties of perjury.

(iv) Other information. In connection with a request for consent under this paragraph (f), a shareholder must provide any additional information requested by the Commissioner.

(v) Notification of Internal Revenue Service. The shareholder must notify the branch of the Associate Chief Counsel (International) considering the request for relief under this paragraph (f) if, while the shareholder's request for consent is pending, the Internal Revenue Service begins an examination of the shareholder's return for the retroactive election year or for any subsequent taxable year during which the shareholder holds stock of the foreign corporation.

(vi) Who requests special consent under this paragraph (f) and who enters into a closing agreement. The person that requests consent under this paragraph (f) is the person that makes the section 1295 election, as provided in § 1.1295-1(d). If a shareholder is required to enter into a closing agreement with the Commissioner, as described in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section, rules similar to those under paragraphs (c)(4)(i) (B) through (E) of this section apply for purposes of determining the person that enters into the closing agreement.

(g) Time for and manner of making a retroactive election

(1) Time for making a retroactive election

(i) In general. Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (g)(1)(ii) of this section, a shareholder must make a retroactive election, in the manner provided in paragraph (g)(2) of this section, on or before the due date, as extended, for the shareholder's return—

(A) In the case of a shareholder that makes a retroactive election pursuant to paragraph (b) or (e) of this section, for the taxable year in which the shareholder determines or reasonably should have determined that the foreign corporation was a PFIC; or

(B) In the case of a shareholder that obtains the consent of the Commissioner pursuant to paragraph (f) of this section for the taxable year in which such consent is granted.

(ii) Transition rule. A shareholder that files a Protective Statement for a taxable year described in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section may make a retroactive election by the due date, as extended, for the return for the first taxable year ended after January 2, 1998 even if the shareholder determined or should have determined that the foreign corporation was a PFIC for a year described in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section at any time on or before January 2, 1998.

(iii) Ownership not required at time retroactive election is made. The shareholder need not own shares of the foreign corporation at the time the shareholder makes a retroactive election with respect to the foreign corporation.

(2) Manner of making a retroactive election. A shareholder that has satisfied the requirements of paragraph (b) or (e) of this section, or a shareholder that has been granted consent under paragraph (f) of this section, must make a retroactive election in the manner provided in Form 8621 for making a section 1295 election, and must attach Form 8621 to an amended return for the later of the retroactive election year or the earliest open taxable year of the shareholder. The shareholder also must file an amended return for each of its subsequent taxable years affected by the retroactive election. In each amended return the shareholder must redetermine its income tax liability for that year to take into account the assessment of PFIC related taxes. If the period of limitations for the assessment of taxes for a taxable year affected by the retroactive election has expired except to the extent the waiver of limitations, described in paragraph (c)(4) of this section, has extended such period, no adjustments, other than consequential changes, may be made to any other items of income, deduction, or credit in that year. In addition, the shareholder must pay all taxes and interest owing by reason of the PFIC and QEF status of the foreign corporation in those years (except to the extent a section 1294 election extends the time to pay the taxes and interest). A shareholder that filed a Protective Statement must attach to Form 8621 filed with each amended return a representation that the shareholder, until the taxable year in which it determined or reasonably should have determined that the foreign corporation was a PFIC, reasonably believed, within the meaning of paragraph (d) of this section, that the foreign corporation was not a PFIC in the taxable year for which the amended return is filed, and in all other taxable years to which the Protective Statement applies. A shareholder that entered into a closing agreement must comply with the terms of that agreement, as provided in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section, to eliminate any prejudice to the United States government's interests, as described in paragraph (f)(3) of this section.

(3) Who makes the retroactive election. The person that makes the retroactive election is the person that makes the section 1295 election, as provided in § 1.1295-1(d). A partner, shareholder, or beneficiary for which a pass through entity, as described in paragraphs (c)(4)(i) (B) through (D) of this section, filed a Protective Statement may make a retroactive election, if the pass through entity completely terminates its business or otherwise ceases to exist.

(4) Other elections

(i) Section 1291(d)(2) election. If the foreign corporation for which the shareholder makes a retroactive election will be treated as an unpedigreed QEF, as defined in § 1.1291-9(j)(2)(iii), with respect to the shareholder, the shareholder may make an election under section 1291(d)(2) to purge its holding period of the years or parts of years before the effective date of the retroactive election. If the qualification date, within the meaning of § 1.1291-9(e) or 1.1291-10(e), falls in a taxable year for which the period of limitations has expired, the shareholder may treat the first day of the retroactive election year as the qualification date. The shareholder may make a section 1291(d)(2) election at the time that it makes the retroactive election, but no later than two years after the date that the amended return in which the retroactive election is made is filed. For the requirements for making a section 1291(d)(2) election, see §§ 1.1291-9 and 1.1291-10.

(ii) Section 1294 election. A shareholder may make an election under section 1294 to extend the time for payment of tax on the shareholder's pro rata shares of the ordinary earnings and net capital gain of the foreign corporation reported in the shareholder's amended return, and section 6621 interest attributable to such tax, but only to the extent the tax and interest are attributable to earnings that have not been distributed to the shareholder. The shareholder must make a section 1294 election for a taxable year at the time that it files its amended return for that year, as provided in paragraph (g)(1) of this section. For the requirements for making a section 1294 election, see § 1.1294-1T.

(h) Effective date. The rules of this section are effective as of January 2, 1998.

[T.D. 8750, 63 FR 19, Jan. 2, 1998. Redesignated and amended by T.D. 8870, 65 FR 5781, Feb. 7, 2000]

§ 1.1296-1 Mark to market election for marketable stock.

(a) Definitions

(1) Eligible RIC. An eligible RIC is a regulated investment company that offers for sale, or has outstanding, any stock of which it is the issuer and which is redeemable at net asset value, or that publishes net asset valuations at least annually.

(2) Section 1296 stock. The term section 1296 stock means marketable stock in a passive foreign investment company (PFIC), including any PFIC stock owned directly or indirectly by an eligible RIC, for which there is a valid section 1296 election. Section 1296 stock does not include stock of a foreign corporation that previously had been a PFIC, and for which a section 1296 election remains in effect.

(3) Unreversed inclusions

(i) General rule. The term unreversed inclusions means with respect to any section 1296 stock, the excess, if any, of—

(A) The amount of mark to market gain included in gross income of the United States person under paragraph (c)(1) of this section with respect to such stock for prior taxable years; over

(B) The amount allowed as a deduction to the United States person under paragraph (c)(3) of this section with respect to such stock for prior taxable years.

(ii) Section 1291 adjustment. The amount referred to in paragraph (a)(3)(i)(A) of this section shall include any amount subject to section 1291 under the coordination rule of paragraph (i)(2)(ii) of this section.

(iii) Example. An example of the computation of unreversed inclusions is as follows:

Example. A, a United States person, acquired stock in Corp X, a foreign corporation, on January 1, 2005 for $150. At such time and at all times thereafter, Corp X was a PFIC and A's stock in Corp X was marketable. For taxable years 2005 and 2006, Corp X was a nonqualified fund subject to taxation under section 1291. A made a timely section 1296 election with respect to the X stock, effective for taxable year 2007. The fair market value of the X stock was $200 as of December 31, 2006, and $240 as of December 31, 2007. Additionally, Corp X made no distribution with respect to its stock for the taxable years at issue. In 2007, pursuant to paragraph (i)(2)(ii) of this section, A must include the $90 gain in the X stock in accordance with the rules of section 1291 for purposes of determining the deferred tax amount and any applicable interest. Nonetheless, for purposes of determining the amount of the unreversed inclusions pursuant to paragraph (a)(3)(ii) of this section, A will include the $90 of gain that was taxed under section 1291 and not the interest thereon.

(iv) Special rule for regulated investment companies. In the case of a regulated investment company which had elected to mark to market the PFIC stock held by such company as of the last day of the taxable year preceding such company's first taxable year for which such company makes a section 1296 election, the amount referred to in paragraph (a)(3)(i)(A) of this section shall include amounts previously included in gross income by the company pursuant to such mark to market election with respect to such stock for prior taxable years. For further guidance, see Notice 92-53 (1992-2 C.B. 384) (see also 601.601(d)(2) of this chapter).

(b) Application of section 1296 election

(1) In general. Any United States person and any controlled foreign corporation (CFC) that owns directly, or is treated as owning under this section, marketable stock, as defined in § 1.1296-2, in a PFIC may make an election to mark to market such stock in accordance with the provisions of section 1296 and this section.

(2) Election applicable to specific United States person. A section 1296 election applies only to the United States person (or CFC that is treated as a U.S. person under paragraph (g)(2) of this section) that makes the election. Accordingly, a United States person's section 1296 election will not apply to a transferee of section 1296 stock.

(3) Election applicable to specific corporation only. A section 1296 election is made with respect to a single foreign corporation, and thus a separate section 1296 election must be made for each foreign corporation that otherwise meets the requirements of this section. A United States person's section 1296 election with respect to stock in a foreign corporation applies to all marketable stock of the corporation that the person owns directly, or is treated as owning under paragraph (e) of this section, at the time of the election or that is subsequently acquired.

(c) Effect of election

(1) Recognition of gain. If the fair market value of section 1296 stock on the last day of the United States person's taxable year exceeds its adjusted basis, the United States person shall include in gross income for its taxable year the excess of the fair market value of such stock over its adjusted basis (mark to market gain).

(2) Character of gain. Mark to market gain, and any gain on the sale or other disposition of section 1296 stock, shall be treated as ordinary income.

(3) Recognition of loss. If the adjusted basis of section 1296 stock exceeds its fair market value on the last day of the United States person's taxable year, such person shall be allowed a deduction for such taxable year equal to the lesser of the amount of such excess or the unreversed inclusions with respect to such stock (mark to market loss).

(4) Character of loss

(i) Losses not in excess of unreversed inclusions. Any mark to market loss allowed as a deduction under paragraph (c)(3) of this section, and any loss on the sale or other disposition of section 1296 stock, to the extent that such loss does not exceed the unreversed inclusions attributable to such stock, shall be treated as an ordinary loss, deductible in computing adjusted gross income.

(ii) Losses in excess of unreversed inclusions. Any loss recognized on the sale or other disposition of section 1296 stock in excess of any prior unreversed inclusions will be subject to the rules generally applicable to losses provided elsewhere in the Internal Revenue Code and the regulations thereunder.

(5) Application of election to separate lots of stock. In the case in which a United States person purchased or acquired shares of stock in a PFIC at different prices, the rules of this section shall be applied in a manner consistent with the rules of § 1.1012-1.

(6) Source rules. The source of any amount included in gross income under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, or the allocation and apportionment of any amount allowed as a deduction under paragraph (c)(3) of this section, shall be determined in the same manner as if such amounts were gain or loss (as the case may be) from the sale of stock in the PFIC.

(7) Examples. The following examples illustrate this paragraph (c):

Example 1. Treatment of gain as ordinary income. A, a United States individual, purchases stock in FX, a foreign corporation that is not a PFIC, in 1990 for $1,000. On January 1, 2005, when the fair market value of the FX stock is $1,100, FX becomes a PFIC. A makes a timely section 1296 election for taxable year 2005. On December 31, 2005, the fair market value of the FX stock is $1,200. For taxable year 2005, A includes $200 of mark to market gain (the excess of the fair market value of FX stock ($1,200) over A's adjusted basis ($1,000)) in gross income as ordinary income and pursuant to paragraph (d)(1) of this section increases his basis in the FX stock by that amount.

Example 2. Treatment of gain as capital gain. The facts are the same as in Example 1. For taxable year 2006, FX does not satisfy either the asset test or the income test of section 1297(a). A does not revoke the section 1296 election it made with respect to the FX stock. On December 1, 2006, A sells the FX stock when the fair market value of the stock is $1,500. For taxable year 2006, A includes $300 of gain (the excess of the fair market value of FX stock ($1,500) over A's adjusted basis ($1,200)) in gross income as long-term capital gain because at the time of sale of the FX stock by A, FX did not qualify as a PFIC, and, therefore, the FX stock was not section 1296 stock at the time of the disposition. Further, A's holding period for non-PFIC purposes was more than one year.

Example 3. Treatment of losses as ordinary where they do not exceed unreversed inclusions. The facts are the same as in Example 1. On December 1, 2006, A sells the stock in FX for $1,100. At that time, A's unreversed inclusions (the amount A included in income as mark to market gain) with respect to the stock in FX are $200. Accordingly, for taxable year 2006, A recognizes a loss on the sale of the FX stock of $100, (the fair market value of the FX stock ($1,100) minus A's adjusted basis ($1,200) in the stock) that is treated as an ordinary loss because the loss does not exceed the unreversed inclusions attributable to the stock of FX.

Example 4. Treatment of losses as long-term capital losses. The facts are the same as in Example 3, except that FX does not satisfy either the asset test or the income test of section 1297(a) for taxable year 2006. For taxable year 2006, A's $100 loss from the sale of the FX stock is treated as long-term capital loss because at the time of the sale of the FX stock by A FX did not qualify as a PFIC, and, therefore, the FX stock was not section 1296 stock at the time of the disposition. Further, A's holding period in the FX stock for non-PFIC purposes was more than one year.

Example 5. Long-term capital loss treatment of losses in excess of unreversed inclusions. The facts are the same as in Example 3, except that A sells his FX stock for $900. At the time of A's sale of the FX stock on December 1, 2006, A's unreversed inclusions with respect to the FX stock are $200. Accordingly, the $300 loss recognized by A on the disposition is treated as an ordinary loss to the extent of his unreversed inclusions ($200). The amount of the loss in excess of A's unreversed inclusions ($100) will be treated as a long-term capital loss because A's holding period in the FC stock for non-PFIC purposes was more than one year.

Example 6. Application of section 1296 election to separate lots of stock. On January 1, 2005, Corp A, a domestic corporation, purchased 100 shares (first lot) of stock in FX, a PFIC, for $500 ($5 per share). On June 1, 2005, Corp A purchased 100 shares (second lot) of FX stock for $1,000 ($10 per share). Corp A made a timely section 1296 election with respect to its FX stock for taxable year 2005. On December 31, 2005, the fair market value of FX stock was $8 per share. For taxable year 2005, Corp A includes $300 of gain in gross income as ordinary income under paragraph (c)(1) of this section with respect to the first lot, and adjusts its basis in that lot to $800 pursuant to paragraph (d)(1) of this section. With respect to the second lot, Corp A is not permitted to recognize a loss under paragraph (c)(3) of this section for taxable year 2005. Although Corp A's adjusted basis in that stock exceeds its fair market value by $200, Corp A has no unreversed inclusions with respect to that particular lot of stock. On July 1, 2006, Corp A sells 100 shares of FX stock for $900. Assuming that Corp A adequately identifies (in accordance with the rules of § 1.1012-1(c)) the shares of FX stock sold as being from the second lot, Corp A recognizes $100 of long term capital loss pursuant to paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section.

(d) Adjustment to basis

(1) Stock held directly. The adjusted basis of the section 1296 stock shall be increased by the amount included in the gross income of the United States person under paragraph (c)(1) of this section with respect to such stock, and decreased by the amount allowed as a deduction to the United States person under paragraph (c)(3) of this section with respect to such stock.

(2) Stock owned through certain foreign entities.

(i) In the case of section 1296 stock that a United States person is treated as owning through certain foreign entities pursuant to paragraph (e) of this section, the basis adjustments under paragraph (d)(1) of this section shall apply to such stock in the hands of the foreign entity actually holding such stock, but only for purposes of determining the subsequent treatment under chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code of the United States person with respect to such stock. Such increase or decrease in the adjusted basis of the section 1296 stock shall constitute an adjustment to the basis of partnership property only with respect to the partner making the section 1296 election. Corresponding adjustments shall be made to the adjusted basis of the United States person's interest in the foreign entity and in any intermediary entity described in paragraph (e) of this section through which the United States person holds the PFIC stock.

(ii) Example. The following example illustrates this paragraph (d)(2):

Example. FP is a foreign partnership. Corp A, a domestic corporation, owns a 20 percent interest in FP. Corp B, a domestic corporation, owns a 30 percent interest in FP. Corp C, a foreign corporation, with no direct or indirect shareholders that are U.S. persons, owns a 50% interest in FP. Corp A, Corp B, and FP all use a calendar year for their taxable year. In 2005, FP purchases stock in FX, a foreign corporation and a PFIC, for $1,000. Corp A makes a timely section 1296 election for taxable year 2005. On December 31, 2005, the fair market value of the PFIC stock is $1,100. Corp A includes $20 of ordinary income in taxable year 2005 under paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section. Corp A increases its basis in its FP partnership interest by $20. FP increases its basis in the FX stock to $1,020 solely for purposes of determining the subsequent treatment of Corp A, under chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code, with respect to such stock. In 2006, FP sells the FX stock for $1,200. For purposes of determining the amount of gain of Corp A, FP will be treated as having $180 in gain of which $20 is allocated to Corp A. Corp A's $20 of gain will be treated as ordinary income under paragraph (c)(2) of this section. For purposes of determining the amount of gain attributable to Corp B, FP will be treated as having $200 gain, $60 of which will be allocated to Corp B.

(3) Stock owned indirectly by an eligible RIC. Paragraph (d)(2) of this section shall also apply to an eligible RIC which is an indirect shareholder under § 1.1296-2(f) of stock in a PFIC and has a valid section 1296 election in effect with respect to the PFIC stock.

(4) Stock acquired from a decedent. In the case of stock of a PFIC that is acquired by bequest, devise, or inheritance (or by the decedent's estate) and with respect to which a section 1296 election was in effect as of the date of the decedent's death, notwithstanding section 1014 or section 1022, the basis of such stock in the hands of the person so acquiring it shall be the adjusted basis of such stock in the hands of the decedent immediately before his death (or, if lesser, the basis that would have been determined under section 1014 or section 1022 without regard to this paragraph (d)).

(5) Transition rule for individuals becoming subject to United States income taxation

(i) In general. If any individual becomes a United States person in a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1997, solely for purposes of this section, the adjusted basis, before adjustments under this paragraph (d), of any section 1296 stock owned by such individual on the first day of such taxable year shall be treated as being the greater of its fair market value or its adjusted basis on such first day.

(ii) An example of the transition rule for individuals becoming subject to United States income taxation is as follows:

Example. A, a nonresident alien individual, purchases marketable stock in FX, a PFIC, for $50 in 1995. On January 1, 2005, A becomes a United States person and makes a timely section 1296 election with respect to the stock in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section. The fair market value of the FX stock on January 1, 2005, is $100. The fair market value of the FX stock on December 31, 2005, is $110. Under paragraph (d)(5)(i) of this section, A computes the amount of mark to market gain or loss for the FX stock in 2005 by reference to an adjusted basis of $100, and therefore A includes $10 in gross income as mark to market gain under paragraph (c)(1) of this section. Additionally, under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, A's adjusted basis in the FX stock for purposes of this section is increased to $110 (and to $60 for all other tax purposes). A sells the FX stock in 2006 for $120. For purposes of applying section 1001, A must use its original basis of $50, with any adjustments under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, $10 in this case, and therefore A recognizes $60 of gain. Under paragraph (c)(2) of this section (which is applied using an adjusted basis of $110), $10 of such gain is treated as ordinary income. The remaining $50 of gain from the sale of the FX stock is long term capital gain because A held such stock for more than one year.

(e) Stock owned through certain foreign entities

(1) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (e)(2) of this section, the following rules shall apply in determining stock ownership for purposes of this section. PFIC stock owned, directly or indirectly, by or for a foreign partnership, foreign trust (other than a foreign trust described in sections 671 through 679), or foreign estate shall be considered as being owned proportionately by its partners or beneficiaries. PFIC stock owned, directly or indirectly, by or for a foreign trust described in sections 671 through 679 shall be considered as being owned proportionately by its grantors or other persons treated as owners under sections 671 through 679 of any portion of the trust that includes the stock. The determination of a person's proportionate interest in a foreign partnership, foreign trust or foreign estate will be made on the basis of all the facts and circumstances. Stock considered owned by reason of this paragraph shall, for purposes of applying the rules of this section, be treated as actually owned by such person.

(2) Stock owned indirectly by eligible RICs. The rules for attributing ownership of stock contained in § 1.1296-2(f) will apply to determine the indirect ownership of PFIC stock by an eligible RIC.

(f) Holding period. Solely for purposes of sections 1291 through 1298, if section 1296 applied to stock with respect to the taxpayer for any prior taxable year, the taxpayer's holding period in such stock shall be treated as beginning on the first day of the first taxable year beginning after the last taxable year for which section 1296 so applied.

(g) Special rules

(1) Certain dispositions of stock. To the extent a United States person is treated as actually owning stock in a PFIC under paragraph (e) of this section, any disposition which results in the United States person being treated as no longer owning such stock, and any disposition by the person owning such stock, shall be treated as a disposition by the United States person of the stock in the PFIC.

(2) Treatment of CFC as a United States person. In the case of a CFC that owns, or is treated as owning under paragraph (e) of this section, section 1296 stock:

(i) Other than with respect to the sourcing rules in paragraph (c)(6) of this section, this section shall apply to the CFC in the same manner as if such corporation were a United States person. The CFC will be treated as a foreign person for purposes of applying the source rules of paragraph (c)(6).

(ii) For purposes of subpart F of part III of subchapter N of the Internal Revenue Code—

(A) Amounts included in the CFC's gross income under paragraph (c)(1) or (i)(2)(ii) of this section shall be treated as foreign personal holding company income under section 954(c)(1)(A); and

(B) Amounts allowed as a deduction under paragraph (c)(3) of this section shall be treated as a deduction allocable to foreign personal holding company income for purposes of computing net foreign base company income under § 1.954-1(c).

(iii) A United States shareholder, as defined in section 951(b), of the CFC shall not be subject to section 1291 with respect to any stock of the PFIC for the period during which the section 1296 election is in effect for that stock, and the holding period rule of paragraph (f) of this section shall apply to such United States shareholder.

(iv) The rules of this paragraph (g)(2) shall not apply to a United States person that is a shareholder of the PFIC for purposes of section 1291, but is not a United States shareholder under section 951(b) with respect to the CFC making a section 1296 election.

(3) Timing of inclusions for stock owned through certain foreign entities. In the case of section 1296 stock that a United States person is treated as owning through certain foreign entities pursuant to paragraph (e) of this section, the mark to market gain or mark to market loss is determined in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (i)(2)(ii) of this section as of the last day of the taxable year of the foreign partnership, foreign trust or foreign estate and then included in the taxable year of such United States person that includes the last day of the taxable year of the entity.

(h) Elections

(1) Timing and manner for making a section 1296 election

(i) United States persons. A United States person that owns marketable stock in a PFIC, or is treated as owning marketable stock under paragraph (e) of this section, on the last day of the taxable year of such person, and that wants to make a section 1296 election, must make a section 1296 election for such taxable year on or before the due date (including extensions) of the United States person's income tax return for that year. The section 1296 election must be made on the Form 8621, “Return by a Shareholder of a Passive Foreign Investment Company or Qualified Electing Fund”, included with the original tax return of the United States person for that year, or on an amended return, provided that the amended return is filed on or before the election due date.

(ii) Controlled foreign corporations. A section 1296 election by a CFC shall be made by its controlling United States shareholders, as defined in § 1.964-1(c)(5), and shall be included with the Form 5471, “Information Return of U.S. Persons With Respect to Certain Foreign Corporations”, for that CFC by the due date (including extensions) of the original income tax returns of the controlling United States shareholders for that year. A section 1296 election by a CFC shall be binding on all United States shareholders of the CFC.

(iii) Retroactive elections for PFIC stock held in prior years. A late section 1296 election may be permitted only in accordance with § 301.9100 of this chapter.

(2) Effect of section 1296 election

(i) A section 1296 election will apply to the taxable year for which such election is made and remain in effect for each succeeding taxable year unless such election is revoked or terminated pursuant to paragraph (h)(3) of this section.

(ii) Cessation of a foreign corporation as a PFIC. A United States person will not include mark to market gain or loss pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section with respect to any stock of a foreign corporation for any taxable year that such foreign corporation is not a PFIC under section 1297 or treated as a PFIC under section 1298(b)(1) (taking into account the holding period rule of paragraph (f) of this section). Cessation of a foreign corporation's status as a PFIC will not, however, terminate a section 1296 election. Thus, if a foreign corporation is a PFIC in a taxable year after a year in which it is not treated as a PFIC, the United States person's original election (unless revoked or terminated in accordance with paragraph (h)(3) of this section) continues to apply and the shareholder must include any mark to market gain or loss in such year.

(3) Revocation or termination of election

(i) In general. A United States person's section 1296 election is terminated if the section 1296 stock ceases to be marketable; if the United States person elects, or is required, to mark to market the section 1296 stock under another provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code; or if the Commissioner, in the Commissioner's discretion, consents to the United States person's request to revoke its section 1296 election upon a finding of a substantial change in circumstances. A substantial change in circumstances for this purpose may include a foreign corporation ceasing to be a PFIC.

(ii) Timing of termination or revocation. Where a section 1296 election is terminated automatically (e.g., the stock ceases to be marketable), section 1296 will cease to apply beginning with the taxable year in which such termination occurs. Where a section 1296 election is revoked with the consent of the Commissioner, section 1296 will cease to apply beginning with the first taxable year of the United States person after the revocation is granted unless otherwise provided by the Commissioner.

(4) Examples. The operation of the rules of this paragraph (h) is illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1. A, a United States person, owns stock in FX, a PFIC. A makes a QEF election in 1996 with respect to the FX stock. For taxable year 2005, A makes a timely section 1296 election with respect to its stock, and thus its QEF election is automatically terminated pursuant to § 1.1295-1(i)(3). In 2006, A's stock in FX ceases to be marketable, and therefore its section 1296 election is automatically terminated under paragraph (h)(3) of this section. Beginning with taxable year 2006, A is subject to the rules of section 1291 with respect to its FX stock unless it makes a new QEF election. See § 1.1295-1(i)(5).

Example 2. The facts are the same as in Example 1, except that A's stock in FX becomes marketable again in 2007. A may make a new section 1296 election with respect to the FX stock for its taxable year 2007, or thereafter. A will be subject to the coordination rules under paragraph (i) of this section unless it made a new QEF election in 2006.

(i) Coordination rules for first year of election

(1) In general. Notwithstanding any provision in this section to the contrary, the rules of this paragraph (i) shall apply to the first taxable year in which a section 1296 election is effective with respect to marketable stock of a PFIC if such foreign corporation was a PFIC for any taxable year, prior to such first taxable year, during the United States person's holding period (as defined in paragraph (f) of this section) in such stock, and for which such corporation was not treated as a QEF with respect to such United States person.

(2) Shareholders other than regulated investment companies. For the first taxable year of a United States person (other than a regulated investment company) for which a section 1296 election is in effect with respect to the stock of a PFIC, such United States person shall, in lieu of the rules of paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section—

(i) Apply the rules of section 1291 to any distributions with respect to, or disposition of, section 1296 stock;

(ii) Apply section 1291 to the amount of the excess, if any, of the fair market value of such section 1296 stock on the last day of the United States person's taxable year over its adjusted basis, as if such amount were gain recognized from the disposition of stock on the last day of the taxpayer's taxable year; and

(iii) Increase its adjusted basis in the section 1296 stock by the amount of excess, if any, subject to section 1291 under paragraph (i)(2)(ii) of this section.

(3) Shareholders that are regulated investment companies. For the first taxable year of a regulated investment company for which a section 1296 election is in effect with respect to the stock of a PFIC, such regulated investment company shall increase its tax under section 852 by the amount of interest that would have been imposed under section 1291(c)(3) for such taxable year if such regulated investment company were subject to the rules of paragraph (i)(2) of this section, and not this paragraph (i)(3). No deduction or increase in basis shall be allowed for the increase in tax imposed under this paragraph (i)(3).

(4) The operation of the rules of this paragraph (i) is illustrated by the following examples:

Example (1). A, a United States person and a calendar year taxpayer, owns marketable stock in FX, a PFIC that it acquired on January 1, 1992. At all times, A's FX stock was a nonqualified fund subject to taxation under section 1291. A made a timely section 1296 election effective for taxable year 2005. At the close of taxable year 2005, the fair market value of A's FX stock exceeded its adjusted basis by $10. Pursuant to paragraph (i)(2)(ii) of this section, A must treat the $10 gain under section 1291 as if the FX stock were disposed of on December 31, 2005. Further, A increases its adjusted basis in the FX stock by the $10 in accordance with paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section.

Example (2). Assume the same facts as in Example (1), except that A is a RIC that had not made an election prior to 2005 to mark to market the PFIC stock. In taxable year 2005, A includes $10 of ordinary income under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, and such amount is not subject to section 1291. A also increases its tax imposed under section 852 by the amount of interest that would have been determined under section 1291(c)(3), and no deduction is permitted for such amount. Finally, under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, A increases its adjusted basis in the FX stock by $10.

(j) Effective/applicability date. The provisions in this section are applicable for taxable years beginning on or after May 3, 2004. The provisions of paragraph (d)(4) of this section relating to section 1022 are effective on and after January 19, 2017.

[T.D. 9123, 69 FR 24074, May 3, 2004, as amended by T.D. 9811, 82 FR 6242, Jan. 19, 2017]

§ 1.1296-2 Definition of marketable stock.

(a) General rule. For purposes of section 1296, the term marketable stock means—

(1) Passive foreign investment company (PFIC) stock that is regularly traded, as defined in paragraph (b) of this section, on a qualified exchange or other market, as defined in paragraph (c) of this section;

(2) Stock in certain PFICs, as described in paragraph (d) of this section; and

(3) Options on stock that is described in paragraph (a)(1) or (2) of this section, to the extent provided in paragraph (e) of this section.

(b) Regularly traded

(1) General rule. For purposes of paragraph (a)(1) of this section, a class of stock that is traded on one or more qualified exchanges or other markets, as defined in paragraph (c) of this section, is regularly traded on such exchanges or markets for any calendar year during which such class of stock is traded, other than in de minimis quantities, on at least 15 days during each calendar quarter.

(2) Special rule for year of initial public offering. For the calendar year in which a corporation initiates a public offering of a class of stock for trading on one or more qualified exchanges or other markets, as defined in paragraph (c) of this section, such class of stock meets the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of this section for such year if the stock is regularly traded on such exchanges or markets, other than in de minimis quantities, on 16 of the days remaining in the quarter in which the offering occurs, and on at least 15 days during each remaining quarter of the taxpayer's calendar year. In cases where a corporation initiates a public offering of a class of stock in the fourth quarter of the calendar year, such class of stock meets the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of this section in the calendar year of the offering if the stock is regularly traded on such exchanges or markets, other than in de minimis quantities, on the greater of 16 of the days remaining in the quarter in which the offering occurs, or 5 days.

(3) Anti-abuse rule. Trades that have as one of their principal purposes the meeting of the trading requirements of paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section shall be disregarded. Further, a class of stock shall not be treated as meeting the trading requirement of paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section if there is a pattern of trades conducted to meet the requirement of paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section. Similarly, paragraph (b)(2) of this section shall not apply to a public offering of stock that has as one of its principal purposes to avail itself of the reduced trading requirements under the special rule for the calendar year of an initial public offering. For purposes of applying the immediately preceding sentence, consideration will be given to whether the trading requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of this section are satisfied in the subsequent calendar year.

(c) Qualified exchange or other market

(1) General rule. For purposes of paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the term qualified exchange or other market means, for any calendar year—

(i) A national securities exchange that is registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission or the national market system established pursuant to section 11A of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78f); or

(ii) A foreign securities exchange that is regulated or supervised by a governmental authority of the country in which the market is located and which has the following characteristics—

(A) The exchange has trading volume, listing, financial disclosure, surveillance, and other requirements designed to prevent fraudulent and manipulative acts and practices, to remove impediments to and perfect the mechanism of a free and open, fair and orderly, market, and to protect investors; and the laws of the country in which the exchange is located and the rules of the exchange ensure that such requirements are actually enforced; and

(B) The rules of the exchange effectively promote active trading of listed stocks.

(2) Exchange with multiple tiers. If an exchange in a foreign country has more than one tier or market level on which stock may be separately listed or traded, each such tier shall be treated as a separate exchange.

(d) Stock in certain PFICs

(1) General rule. Except as provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, a foreign corporation is a corporation described in section 1296(e)(1)(B), and paragraph (a)(2) of this section, if the foreign corporation offers for sale or has outstanding stock of which it is the issuer and which is redeemable at its net asset value and if the foreign corporation satisfies the following conditions with respect to the class of shares held by the electing taxpayer—

(i) At all times during the calendar year, the foreign corporation has more than one hundred shareholders with respect to the class, other than shareholders who are related under section 267(b);

(ii) At all times during the calendar year, the class of shares of the foreign corporation is readily available for purchase by the general public at its net asset value and the foreign corporation does not require a minimum initial investment of greater than $10,000 (U.S.);

(iii) At all times during the calendar year, quotations for the class of shares of the foreign corporation are determined and published no less frequently than on a weekly basis in a widely-available permanent medium not controlled by the issuer of the shares, such as a newspaper of general circulation or a trade publication;

(iv) No less frequently than annually, independent auditors prepare financial statements of the foreign corporation that include balance sheets (statements of assets, liabilities, and net assets) and statements of income and expenses, and those statements are made available to the public;

(v) The foreign corporation is supervised or regulated as an investment company by a foreign government or an agency or instrumentality thereof that has broad inspection and enforcement authority and effective oversight over investment companies;

(vi) At all times during the calendar year, the foreign corporation has no senior securities authorized or outstanding, including any debt other than in de minimis amounts;

(vii) Ninety percent or more of the gross income of the foreign corporation for its taxable year is passive income, as defined in section 1297(a)(1) and the regulations thereunder; and

(viii) The average percentage of assets held by the foreign corporation during its taxable year which produce passive income or which are held for the production of passive income, as defined in section 1297(a)(2) and the regulations thereunder, is at least 90 percent.

(2) Anti-abuse rule. If a foreign corporation undertakes any actions that have as one of their principal purposes the manipulation of the net asset value of a class of its shares, for the calendar year in which the manipulation occurs, the shares are not marketable stock for purposes of paragraph (d)(1) of this section.

(e) [Reserved]

(f) Special rules for regulated investment companies (RICs)

(1) General rule. In the case of any RIC that is offering for sale, or has outstanding, any stock of which it is the issuer and which is redeemable at net asset value, if the RIC owns directly or indirectly, as defined in section 1298(a), stock in any passive foreign investment company, that stock will be treated as marketable stock owned by that RIC for purposes of section 1296. Except as provided in paragraph (f)(2) of this section, in the case of any other RIC that publishes net asset valuations at least annually, if the RIC owns directly or indirectly, as defined in section 1298(a), stock in any passive foreign investment company, that stock will be treated as marketable stock owned by that RIC for purposes of section 1296.

(2) [Reserved]

(g) Effective date. This section applies to shareholders whose taxable year ends on or after January 25, 2000 for stock in a foreign corporation whose taxable year ends with or within the shareholder's taxable year. In addition, shareholders may elect to apply these regulations to any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1997, for stock in a foreign corporation whose taxable year ends with or within the shareholder's taxable year.

[T.D. 8867, 65 FR 3819, Jan. 25, 2000. Redesignated and amended by T.D. 9123, 69 FR 24073, May 3, 2004]

§ 1.1297-0 Table of contents.

This section contains a listing of the headings for §§ 1.1297-1, 1.1297-2, 1.1297-3, 1.1297-4, 1.1297-5, and 1.1297-6.

§ 1.1297-1 Definition of passive foreign investment company.

(a) Overview.

(b) Dividends included in gross income.

(1) General rule.

(2) Example.

(i) Facts.

(ii) Results.

(c) Passive income.

(1) Foreign personal holding company income.

(i) General rule.

(ii) Determination of gross income or gain on a net basis for certain items of foreign personal holding company income.

(iii) Amounts treated as dividends.

(2) [Reserved]

(3) Passive treatment of dividends and distributive share of partnership income.

(4) Exception for certain interest, dividends, rents, and royalties received from a related person.

(i) In general.

(ii) Ordering rule.

(iii) Allocation of interest.

(iv) Allocation of dividends.

(A) In general.

(B) Dividends paid out of current earnings and profits.

(C) Dividends paid out of accumulated earnings and profits.

(v) Allocation of rents and royalties.

(vi) Determination of whether amounts are received or accrued from a related person.

(vii) Allocation of distributive share of income from related partnership.

(d) Asset test.

(1) Calculation of average annual value (or adjusted bases).

(i) General rule.

(ii) Measuring period.

(A) General rule.

(B) Election to use alternative measuring period.

(C) Short taxable year.

(iii) Adjusted basis election.

(iv) Time and manner of elections and revocations.

(A) Elections.

(B) Revocations and subsequent elections.

(v) Method of measuring assets.

(A) Publicly traded foreign corporations.

(B) Non-publicly traded controlled foreign corporation.

(1) In general.

(2) Controlled foreign corporation determination.

(C) Other foreign corporations.

(1) In general.

(2) Lower-tier subsidiaries.

(i) Lower-tier subsidiaries that are publicly traded foreign corporations.

(ii) Lower-tier subsidiaries that are non-publicly traded controlled foreign corporations.

(iii) Other lower-tier subsidiaries.

(D) [Reserved]

(E) Examples.

(1) Example 1.

(i) Facts.

(ii) Results.

(2) Example 2.

(i) Facts.

(ii) Results.

(3) Example 3.

(i) Facts.

(ii) Results.

(2) [Reserved]

(3) Dual-character assets.

(i) General rule.

(ii) Special rule when only part of an asset produces income.

(iii) Special rule for stock that previously produced income that was excluded from passive income under section 1297(b)(2)(C).

(iv) Example.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(4) Passive treatment of stock and partnership interests.

(5) Dealer property.

(e) Stapled stock.

(f) Definitions.

(1) Measuring date.

(2) Measuring period.

(3) Non-passive asset.

(4) Non-passive income.

(5) Passive asset.

(6) Passive income.

(7) Publicly traded foreign corporation.

(8) Related person.

(9) Tested foreign corporation.

(g) Applicability date.

(1) In general.

(2) Paragraph (d)(1)(v)(B)(2) of this section.

§ 1.1297-2 Special rules regarding look-through subsidiaries and look-through partnerships.

(a) Overview.

(b) General rules.

(1) Tested foreign corporation's ownership of a corporation.

(2) Tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of the assets and income of a look-through subsidiary.

(i) Proportionate share of subsidiary assets.

(ii) Proportionate share of subsidiary income.

(A) General rule.

(B) Partial year.

(iii) Coordination of section 1297(c) with section 1298(b)(7).

(3) Tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of the assets and income of a look-through partnership.

(i) Proportionate share of partnership assets.

(ii) Proportionate share of partnership income.

(A) General rule.

(B) Partial year.

(4) Examples.

(i) Example 1.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(1) LTS.

(2) TFC.

(ii) Example 2.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(iii) Example 3.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(c) Elimination of certain intercompany assets and income.

(1) General rule for asset test.

(i) LTS stock.

(ii) LTS obligation.

(2) General rule for income test.

(i) LTS stock.

(ii) LTS obligation.

(3) Partnerships.

(4) Examples.

(i) Example 1.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(1) LTS.

(2) TFC.

(ii) Example 2.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(iii) Example 3.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(iv) Example 4.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(v) Example 5.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(1) Asset test.

(2) Income test.

(3) Treatment of intangible and rental property.

(d) Related person determination for purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C).

(1) General rule.

(2) Example.

(i) Facts.

(ii) Results.

(e) Treatment of activities of certain look-through subsidiaries and look-through partnerships for purposes of certain exceptions.

(1) General rule.

(2) Qualified affiliate.

(3) Examples.

(i) Example 1.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(1) Qualified affiliates.

(2) FS1 and FS2.

(3) FS4.

(ii) Example 2.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(iii) Example 3.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(f) Gain on disposition of a look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership.

(1) [Reserved]

(2) Amount of gain taken into account from disposition of look-through subsidiary.

(3) Characterization of residual gain as passive income.

(4) Gain taken into account from disposition of 25%-owned partnerships and look-through partnerships.

(i) Section 954(c)(4) partnerships.

(ii) Look-through partnerships.

(5) Examples.

(i) Example 1.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(ii) Example 2.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(iii) Example 3.

(A) Facts.

(B) Results.

(g) Definitions.

(1) Direct LTS obligation.

(2) Indirect LTS obligation.

(3) Look-through subsidiary.

(4) Look-through partnership.

(i) In general.

(ii) Active partner test.

(A) Partnership interest under asset test.

(B) Partnership income under income test.

(iii) Election.

(iv) Examples.

(A) Example 1.

(1) Facts.

(2) Results.

(i) Active partner test with respect to partnership interest.

(ii) Active partner test with respect to partnership income.

(iii) Qualification of look-through partnership.

(B) Example 2.

(1) Facts.

(2) Results.

(i) Active partner test with respect to partnership interest.

(ii) Active partner test with respect to partnership income.

(iii) Failure to qualify as look-through partnership.

(5) LTS debt.

(6) LTS lease.

(7) LTS license.

(8) LTS obligation.

(9) LTS stock.

(10) Qualified affiliate.

(11) Residual gain.

(12) TFC obligation.

(13) Unremitted earnings.

(h) Applicability date.

§ 1.1297-3 Deemed sale or deemed dividend election by a U.S. person that is a shareholder of a section 1297(e) PFIC.

(a) In general.

(b) Application of deemed sale election rules.

(1) Eligibility to make the deemed sale election.

(2) Effect of the deemed sale election.

(3) Time for making the deemed sale election.

(4) Manner of making the deemed sale election.

(5) Adjustments to basis.

(6) Treatment of holding period.

(c) Application of deemed dividend election rules.

(1) Eligibility to make the deemed dividend election.

(2) Effect of the deemed dividend election.

(3) Post-1986 earnings and profits defined.

(4) Time for making the deemed dividend election.

(5) Manner of making the deemed dividend election.

(6) Adjustments to basis.

(7) Treatment of holding period.

(8) Coordination with section 959(e).

(d) CFC qualification date.

(e) Late purging elections requiring special consent.

(1) In general.

(2) Prejudice to the interests of the U.S. government.

(3) Procedural requirements.

(4) Time and manner of making late election.

(5) Multiple late elections.

(f) Effective/applicability date.

§ 1.1297-4 Qualifying insurance corporation.

(a) Scope.

(b) Qualifying insurance corporation.

(c) 25 percent test.

(d) Election to apply the alternative facts and circumstances test.

(1) In general.

(2) Predominantly engaged in an insurance business.

(i) In general.

(ii) Facts and circumstances.

(iii) Examples of facts indicating a foreign corporation is not predominantly engaged in an insurance business.

(3) Runoff-related circumstances.

(4) Rating-related circumstances.

(5) Election.

(i) In general.

(ii) Information provided by foreign corporation.

(iii) Time and manner for making the election.

(iv) Deemed election for small shareholders in publicly traded companies.

(A) In general.

(B) Publicly traded stock.

(v) Options.

(6) Stock ownership.

(e) Rules limiting the amount of applicable insurance liabilities.

(1) In general.

(2) General limitation on applicable insurance liabilities.

(3) Discounting.

(4) [Reserved]

(5) [Reserved]

(f) Definitions.

(1) Applicable financial statement.

(i) GAAP statements.

(ii) IFRS statements.

(iii) Regulatory annual statement.

(iv) [Reserved]

(2) Applicable insurance liabilities.

(i) In general.

(ii) Amounts not specified in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section.

(3) Applicable insurance regulatory body.

(4) Applicable reporting period.

(5) Financial guaranty insurance company.

(6) Financial statements.

(i) In general.

(ii) [Reserved]

(iii) [Reserved]

(7) Generally accepted accounting principles or GAAP.

(8) Insurance business.

(9) International financial reporting standards or IFRS.

(10) Mortgage insurance company.

(11) Total assets.

(g) Applicability date.

§ 1.1297-5 [Reserved]

§ 1.1297-6 Exception from the definition of passive income for active insurance income.

(a) Scope.

(b) Exclusion from passive income of active insurance income.

(c) Exclusion of assets for purposes of the passive asset test under section 1297(a)(2).

(d) Treatment of income and assets of certain look-through subsidiaries and look through partnerships for purposes of the section 1297(b)(2)(B) exception.

(1) General rule.

(2) Limitation.

(3) Examples.

(i) Example 1: QIC holds all the stock of an investment subsidiary.

(A) Facts.

(B) Result.

(C) Alternative Facts.

(1) Facts.

(2) Result.

(ii) Example 2: QIC holds all the stock of an operating subsidiary.

(A) Facts.

(B) Result.

(e) Qualifying domestic insurance corporation.

(1) General rule.

(2) [Reserved]

(3) [Reserved]

(f) Applicability date.

[T.D. 9360, 72 FR 54821, Sept. 27, 2007, as amended by T.D. 9936, 86 FR 4556, Jan. 15, 2021; T.D. 9936, 86 FR 13648, Mar. 10, 2021]

§ 1.1297-1 Definition of passive foreign investment company.

(a) Overview. This section provides rules concerning the income test set forth in section 1297(a)(1) and the asset test set forth in section 1297(a)(2). Paragraph (b) of this section provides a rule relating to the definition of gross income with respect to certain dividends that are excluded from gross income under section 1502 for purposes of section 1297. Paragraph (c) of this section provides rules relating to the definition of passive income for purposes of section 1297. Paragraph (d) of this section provides rules relating to the asset test of section 1297. See §§ 1.1297-2 and 1.1297-6 for additional rules concerning the treatment of the income and assets of a corporation subject to look-through treatment under section 1297(c). Paragraph (e) of this section provides rules relating to the determination of passive foreign investment company (PFIC) status for stapled entities. Paragraph (f) of this section provides definitions applicable for this section, and paragraph (g) of this section provides the applicability date of this section.

(b) Dividends included in gross income

(1) General rule. For purposes of section 1297, gross income includes dividends that are excluded from gross income under section 1502 and § 1.1502-13.

(2) Example

(i) Facts. USP is a domestic corporation that owns 30% of TFC, a foreign corporation. The remaining 70% of TFC is owned by FP, a foreign corporation that is unrelated to USP. TFC owns 25% of the value of USS1, a domestic corporation. USS1 owns 80% of the value of USS2, a domestic corporation. USS1 and USS2 are members of an affiliated group (as defined in section 1504(a)) filing a consolidated return. USS2 distributes a dividend to USS1 that is excluded from USS1's income pursuant to § 1.1502-13 for purposes of determining the U.S. Federal income tax liability of the affiliated group of which USS1 and USS2 are members.

(ii) Results. Although the dividend received by USS1 from USS2 is excluded from USS1's income for purposes of determining the U.S. Federal income tax liability of the affiliated group of which USS1 and USS2 are members, pursuant to paragraph (b)(1) of this section, for purposes of section 1297, USS1's gross income includes the USS2 dividend. Accordingly, for purposes of section 1297, TFC's gross income includes 25% of the dividend received by USS1 from USS2 pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2)(ii). See section 1298(b)(7) and § 1.1298-4 for rules concerning the characterization of the USS2 dividend.

(c) Passive income

(1) Foreign personal holding company income

(i) General rule. For purposes of section 1297(b)(1), except as otherwise provided in section 1297(b)(2), this section, and § 1.1297-6, the term passive income means income of a kind that would be foreign personal holding company income as defined under section 954(c). For the purpose of this paragraph (c)(1)

(A) The exceptions to foreign personal holding company income in section 954(c)(1), 954(c)(2)(A) (relating to active rents and royalties), 954(c)(2)(B) (relating to export financing income), and 954(c)(2)(C) (relating to dealers) are taken into account;

(B) The exceptions in section 954(c)(3) (relating to certain income received from related persons), 954(c)(6) (relating to certain amounts received from related controlled foreign corporations), and 954(i) (relating to entities engaged in the active conduct of an insurance business) are not taken into account;

(C) The rules in section 954(c)(4) (relating to sales of certain partnership interests) and 954(c)(5) (relating to certain commodity hedging transactions) are taken into account; and

(D) An entity is treated as a controlled foreign corporation within the meaning of section 957(a) for purposes of applying an exception to foreign personal holding company income in section 954(c)(1)(B)'s flush language, (1)(C)(ii), (1)(D), (4), and (5) and § 1.954-2 and for purposes of identifying whether a person is a related person with respect to such entity within the meaning of section 954(d)(3).

(ii) Determination of gross income or gain on a net basis for certain items of foreign personal holding company income. For purposes of section 1297, the excess of gains over losses from property transactions described in section 954(c)(1)(B), the excess of gains over losses from transactions in commodities described in section 954(c)(1)(C), the excess of foreign currency gains over foreign currency losses described in section 954(c)(1)(D), and positive net income from notional principal contracts described in section 954(c)(1)(F) are taken into account as gross income. The excess of gains over losses (or, with respect to notional principal contracts, positive net income) for a category of transactions is calculated by a tested foreign corporation taking into account individual items of gain or loss (or, with respect to notional principal contracts, net income or net deduction) recognized by the tested foreign corporation and those items of gain or loss (or, with respect to notional principal contracts, net income or net deduction) treated as recognized by the tested foreign corporation with respect to its look-through subsidiaries and look-through partnerships pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2) or (3).

(iii) Amounts treated as dividends. For purposes of section 1297, the term dividend includes all amounts treated as dividends for purposes of this chapter, including amounts treated as dividends pursuant to sections 302, 304, 356(a)(2), 964(e), and 1248.

(2) [Reserved]

(3) Passive treatment of dividends and distributive share of partnership income. For purposes of section 1297, a tested foreign corporation's share of dividends received from a corporation that is not a look-through subsidiary (as defined in § 1.1297-2(g)(3)) and distributive share of any item of income of a partnership that is not a look-through partnership (as defined in § 1.1297-2(g)(4)) with respect to a tested foreign corporation are treated as passive income, except to the extent that the item of income would not be treated as passive under section 1297(b)(2)(C) and paragraph (c)(4) of this section.

(4) Exception for certain interest, dividends, rents, and royalties received from a related person

(i) In general. For purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C), interest, dividends, rents, or royalties actually received or accrued by a tested foreign corporation are considered received or accrued from a related person only if the payor of the interest, dividend, rent, or royalty is a related person (within the meaning of section 954(d)(3)) with respect to the tested foreign corporation, taking into account paragraph (c)(1)(i)(D) of this section. For rules determining when amounts received or accrued by a look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership (and treated as received directly by a tested foreign corporation pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2) and (b)(3)) are treated as received from a related person, see § 1.1297-2(d).

(ii) Ordering rule. Gross income that is interest, a dividend, or a rent or royalty that is, in each case, received or accrued from a related person is allocated to income that is not passive under the rules of this paragraph (c)(4). If the related person is also a look-through subsidiary or a look-through partnership with respect to the tested foreign corporation, this paragraph (c)(4) applies after the application of the intercompany income rules of § 1.1297-2(c).

(iii) Allocation of interest. For purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C), interest that is received or accrued, as applicable based on the recipient's method of accounting, from a related person is allocated to income of the related person that is not passive income in proportion to the ratio of the portion of the related person's non-passive gross income for its taxable year that ends with or within the taxable year of the recipient to the total amount of the related person's gross income for the taxable year. If the related person does not have gross income for the taxable year that ends with or within the taxable year of the recipient, the interest is either allocated to income of the related person that is not passive income to the extent the related person's deduction for the interest would be allocable to non-passive income of the related person under the principles of §§ 1.861-9 through 1.861-13T, applied in a reasonable and consistent manner taking into account the general operation of the PFIC rules and the purpose of section 1297(b)(2)(C) or, alternatively, at the election of the tested foreign corporation is treated as allocated entirely to passive income.

(iv) Allocation of dividends

(A) In general. For purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C), the principles of § 1.316-2(a) apply in determining from what year's earnings and profits a dividend from a related person is treated as distributed. A dividend is considered to be distributed, first, out of the earnings and profits of the taxable year of the related person that includes the date the dividend is distributed (current earnings and profits) and that ends with or within the taxable year of the recipient; second, out of the earnings and profits accumulated for the immediately preceding taxable year of the related person; third, out of the earnings and profits accumulated for the second preceding taxable year of the related person; and so forth. For purposes of paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section, the principles of § 1.243-4(a)(6) apply with respect to a deficit in an earnings and profits account for a prior year.

(B) Dividends paid out of current earnings and profits. To the extent that a dividend is paid out of current earnings and profits of the related person for its taxable year that ends with or within the taxable year of the recipient, the dividend is treated as paid ratably out of earnings and profits attributable to passive income and to non-passive income. The portion of the current earnings and profits that is treated as paid out of non-passive income of the related person may be determined by multiplying the current earnings and profits by the ratio of the related person's non-passive gross income as determined under this section (including paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section) for the taxable year to its total gross income as determined under this section (including paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section) for that year.

(C) Dividends paid out of accumulated earnings and profits. To the extent that a dividend from a related person is treated as paid out of the related person's accumulated earnings and profits, the dividend is treated as paid ratably out of accumulated earnings and profits of the related person for prior taxable years (beginning with the most recently accumulated) that are attributable to passive income and to non-passive income, which may be determined in the same manner as in paragraph (c)(4)(iv)(B) of this section. Alternatively, the accumulated earnings and profits may be allocated based on the ratio of accumulated earnings and profits that are attributable to passive income and to non-passive income during either the related party period or the three-year period. The related party period is the entire period during which the related person was related to the recipient. The three-year period is the three taxable years immediately preceding the related person's taxable year that ends with or within the current taxable year of the recipient. The three-year period may be used only if the related person has been related to the recipient for a period longer than the three taxable years immediately preceding the recipient's taxable year.

(v) Allocation of rents and royalties. For purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C), rents and royalties that are received or accrued, as applicable based on the recipient's method of accounting, from a related person are allocable to income of the related person that is not passive income to the extent the related person's deduction for the rent or royalty is allocable to non-passive gross income of the related person under the principles of §§ 1.861-8 through 1.861-14T.

(vi) Determination of whether amounts are received or accrued from a related person. For purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C), the determination of whether interest, dividends, rents, and royalties were received or accrued from a related person is made on the date of the receipt or accrual, as applicable based on the recipient's method of accounting, of the interest, dividend, rent, or royalty.

(vii) Allocation of distributive share of income from related partnership. For purposes of section 1297(a)(1), a tested foreign corporation includes its distributive share as provided in section 704 of the separate items of passive or non-passive income from a partnership that is a related person (and not a look-through partnership) with respect to the tested foreign corporation for the taxable year of the tested foreign corporation.

(d) Asset test

(1) Calculation of average annual value (or adjusted bases)

(i) General rule. For purposes of section 1297, the calculation of the average percentage of assets held by a tested foreign corporation during its taxable year that produce passive income or that are held for the production of passive income is determined based on the average of the fair market values, or the average of the adjusted bases, as appropriate, of the passive assets and total assets held (including assets treated as held pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2)(i) and (b)(3)) by the foreign corporation on the last day of each measuring period (measuring date) of the foreign corporation's taxable year. The average of the fair market values (or the average of the adjusted bases) of the foreign corporation's passive assets or total assets for the taxable year is equal to the sum of the values (or adjusted bases) of the passive assets or total assets, as applicable, on each measuring date of the foreign corporation's taxable year, divided by the number of measuring dates in the taxable year.

(ii) Measuring period

(A) General rule. Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)(B) of this section, the measuring periods for a tested foreign corporation are the four quarters that make up the foreign corporation's taxable year.

(B) Election to use alternative measuring period. The average percentage of assets held by a tested foreign corporation during its taxable year that produce passive income or that are held for the production of passive income may be calculated using a period that is shorter than a quarter (such as a week or month). The same period must be used to measure the assets of the foreign corporation for the first year (including a short taxable year) that this alternative measuring period is used, and for any and all subsequent years, unless a revocation is made. An election to use an alternative measuring period or a revocation of such an election must be made in accordance with the rules of paragraph (d)(1)(iv) of this section.

(C) Short taxable year. For purposes of applying section 1297 to a tested foreign corporation that has a taxable year of less than twelve months (short taxable year), the average values (or adjusted bases) are determined based on the measuring dates of the foreign corporation's taxable year that fall within the short taxable year, and by treating the last day of the short taxable year as a measuring date.

(iii) Adjusted basis election. An election under section 1297(e)(2)(B) with respect to an eligible tested foreign corporation or a revocation of such an election may be made by the tested foreign corporation or alternatively by the owner (as defined in paragraph (d)(1)(iv) of this section). If made by the owner, the election must be made in accordance with the rules of paragraph (d)(1)(iv) of this section.

(iv) Time and manner of elections and revocations

(A) Elections. An owner (as defined in this paragraph (d)(1)(iv)) of a foreign corporation makes an election described in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)(B) or (d)(1)(iii) of this section for a taxable year in the manner provided in the Instructions to Form 8621 (or successor form), if the owner is required to file a Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the foreign corporation for the taxable year of the owner in which or with which the taxable year of the foreign corporation for which the election is made ends. If the owner is not required to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the foreign corporation for the taxable year, the owner makes such an election by filing a written statement providing for the election and attaching the statement to an original or amended Federal income tax return for the taxable year of the owner in which or with which the taxable year of the foreign corporation for which the election is made ends clearly indicating that such election has been made. An election can be made by an owner only if the owner's taxable year for which the election is made, and all taxable years that are affected by the election, are not closed by the period of limitations on assessments under section 6501. Elections described in paragraphs (d)(1)(ii)(B) and (d)(1)(iii) of this section are not eligible for relief under § 301.9100-3 of this chapter. For purposes of this paragraph (d)(1)(iv), an owner of a foreign corporation is a United States person that is eligible under § 1.1295-1(d) to make a section 1295 election with respect to the foreign corporation, or would be eligible under § 1.1295-1(d) to make a section 1295 election if the foreign corporation were a PFIC.

(B) Revocations and subsequent elections. An election described in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)(B) or (d)(1)(iii) of this section made pursuant to paragraph (d)(1)(iv)(A) of this section is effective for the taxable year of the foreign corporation for which it is made and all subsequent taxable years of such corporation unless revoked by the Commissioner or the owner (as defined in paragraph (d)(1)(iv)(A) of this section) of the foreign corporation. The owner of a foreign corporation may revoke such an election at any time. If an election described in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)(B) or (d)(1)(iii) of this section has been revoked under this paragraph (d)(1)(iv)(B), a new election described in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)(B) or (d)(1)(iii) of this section, as applicable, cannot be made until the sixth taxable year following the year for which the previous election was revoked, and such subsequent election cannot be revoked until the sixth taxable year following the year for which the subsequent election was made. The owner revokes the election for a taxable year in the manner provided in the Instructions to Form 8621 (or successor form), if the owner is required to file a Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the foreign corporation for the taxable year of the owner in which or with which the taxable year of the foreign corporation for which the election is revoked ends, or by filing a written statement providing for the revocation and attaching the statement to an original or amended Federal income tax return for the taxable year of the owner in which or with which the taxable year of the foreign corporation for which the election is revoked ends clearly indicating that such election has been revoked, if the owner is not required to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the foreign corporation for the taxable year.

(v) Method of measuring assets

(A) Publicly traded foreign corporations. For purposes of section 1297, the assets of a publicly traded foreign corporation as defined in paragraph (f)(7) of this section (including assets treated as held pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2)(i) and (b)(3)(i), other than assets of a look-through subsidiary described in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(B) of this section) must be measured for all measuring periods of the taxable year on the basis of value.

(B) Non-publicly traded controlled foreign corporation

(1) In general. For purposes of section 1297, the assets of a controlled foreign corporation that is not described in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(A) of this section (including assets treated as held pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2)(i) and (b)(3)(i), other than assets held by a look-through subsidiary described in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(A) of this section) must be measured for all measuring periods of the taxable year during which the foreign corporation is a controlled foreign corporation on the basis of adjusted basis.

(2) Controlled foreign corporation determination. For purposes of section 1297(e)(2)(A) and this paragraph (d)(1)(v), the term controlled foreign corporation has the meaning provided in section 957, determined without applying subparagraphs (A), (B), and (C) of section 318(a)(3) so as to consider a United States person as owning stock which is owned by a person who is not a United States person.

(C) Other foreign corporations

(1) In general. Except as provided in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(C)(2) of this section, the assets of a foreign corporation that is not described in paragraphs (d)(1)(v)(A) or (d)(1)(v)(B) of this section (including assets treated as held pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2)(i) and (b)(3)(i), other than assets held by a look-through subsidiary described in paragraphs (d)(1)(v)(A) or (d)(1)(v)(B) of this section) are measured for all measuring periods of the taxable year on the basis of value, unless a tested foreign corporation or a shareholder makes an election under section 1297(e)(2)(B) in accordance with paragraph (d)(1)(iii) of this section. In the case of a foreign corporation that is described in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(B) of this section for some but not all measuring periods during a taxable year, this paragraph (d)(1)(v)(C)(1) applies to the remaining measuring period or periods during that taxable year.

(2) Lower-tier subsidiaries

(i) Lower-tier subsidiaries that are publicly traded foreign corporations. For purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to the assets of a foreign corporation that is a lower-tier subsidiary of a foreign corporation that directly or indirectly owns all or part of the lower-tier subsidiary (a parent foreign corporation), if the lower-tier subsidiary is described in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(A), the rules of paragraph (d)(1)(v)(A) apply. The previous sentence applies both for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to the lower-tier subsidiary as a tested foreign corporation, and for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to a parent foreign corporation with respect to the assets of the lower-tier subsidiary.

(ii) Lower-tier subsidiaries that are non-publicly traded controlled foreign corporations. For purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to the assets of a foreign corporation that is a lower-tier subsidiary of a parent foreign corporation, if the lower-tier subsidiary is described in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(B), the rules of paragraph (d)(1)(v)(B) apply. The previous sentence applies both for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to the lower-tier subsidiary as a tested foreign corporation, and for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to a parent foreign corporation with respect to the assets of the lower-tier subsidiary.

(iii) Other lower-tier subsidiaries. For purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to a foreign corporation that is a lower-tier subsidiary of a parent foreign corporation, if the lower-tier subsidiary is not described in paragraphs (d)(1)(v)(A) or (d)(1)(v)(B) of this section, the assets of the lower-tier subsidiary (including assets treated as held pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2)(i) and (b)(3)(i)) must be measured under the rules of the same paragraph of this section (d)(1)(v) that applies to the parent foreign corporation. The previous sentence applies both for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to the lower-tier subsidiary as a tested foreign corporation, and for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to a parent foreign corporation. If a tested foreign corporation indirectly owns a lower-tier subsidiary that is not described in paragraphs (d)(1)(v)(A) or (d)(1)(v)(B) of this section through one or more other foreign corporations, the status of any parent foreign corporation in that chain of corporations that is described in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(A) of this section, or if there is no such parent foreign corporation then the status of any parent foreign corporation in that chain of corporations that is described in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(B) of this section, determines the basis on which the assets of the lower-tier subsidiary are measured. In the case of a foreign corporation that is a lower-tier subsidiary with respect to more than one parent foreign corporation, this rule applies separately to measure the assets of the lower-tier subsidiary with respect to each parent foreign corporation.

(D) [Reserved]

(E) Examples. The following examples illustrate the application of this paragraph (d)(1)(v).

(1) Example 1

(i) Facts. USP, a domestic corporation, owns 60% of TFC1, which is a foreign corporation. The remaining 40% of TFC1's stock is regularly traded on a national securities exchange that is registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission and continues to be until September 1 of the taxable year, when USP acquires all of TFC1's stock pursuant to a tender offer. TFC1 owns 30% of the stock of FS1, a foreign corporation that is neither a publicly traded foreign corporation nor a controlled foreign corporation.

(ii) Results. TFC1 is a controlled foreign corporation with respect to USP. TFC1 also is a publicly traded foreign corporation until September 1 of the taxable year. For purposes of section 1297, the assets of TFC1 (including the assets of FS1 treated as held by TFC1 pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2)(i)) must be measured on the basis of value for each measuring period ending before September 1, pursuant to paragraph (d)(1)(v)(A) of this section. For purposes of applying section 1297 to FS1 as a tested foreign corporation with respect to USP, the assets of FS1 must be measured using the same method as is used for TFC1's assets, pursuant to paragraph (d)(1)(v)(C)(2) of this section.

(2) Example 2

(i) Facts. A, a United States person, owns 1% of the stock of TFC2, a foreign corporation that is neither a publicly traded foreign corporation nor a controlled foreign corporation. TFC2 owns 25% of the stock of FS2, a foreign corporation that is neither a publicly traded foreign corporation nor a controlled foreign corporation.

(ii) Results. For purposes of applying section 1297 to TFC2, the assets of TFC2 (including the assets of FS2 treated as held by TFC2 pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2)(i)) are measured for all measuring periods of the taxable year on the basis of value, unless A or TFC2 makes an election under section 1297(e)(2)(B) in accordance with paragraph (d)(1)(iii) of this section, pursuant to paragraph (d)(1)(v)(C)(1) of this section. For purposes of applying section 1297 to FS2 as a tested foreign corporation with respect to A, the assets of FS2 must be measured using the same method as is used for TFC2's assets, pursuant to paragraph (d)(1)(v)(C)(2) of this section.

(3) Example 3

(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(E)(2)(i) (the facts in Example 2), except that the 75% of FS2's stock not owned by TFC2 is owned by TFC3, a publicly traded foreign corporation that is neither related to TFC2 nor to A. B, a United States person that is neither related to A nor to TFC2, owns 1% of the stock of TFC3.

(ii) Results. For purposes of applying section 1297 to TFC2, the results are the same as in paragraph (d)(1)(v)(E)(2)(ii) (the results in Example 2). For purposes of applying section 1297 to FS2 as a tested foreign corporation with respect to A, the assets of FS2 must be measured using the same method as is used for TFC2's assets, pursuant to paragraph (d)(1)(v)(C)(2) of this section. For purposes of applying section 1297 to TFC3, the assets of TFC3 must be measured by reference to value pursuant to paragraph (d)(1)(v)(A) because it is a publicly traded corporation. For purposes of applying section 1297 to FS2 as a tested foreign corporation with respect to B, the assets of FS2 must be measured by reference to value because TFC3 is a publicly traded foreign corporation, pursuant to paragraphs (d)(1)(v)(C)(2) and (d)(1)(v)(A) of this section.

(2) [Reserved]

(3) Dual-character assets

(i) General rule. Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) or (d)(3)(iii) of this section and in § 1.1297-2(c), for purposes of section 1297, an asset (or portion of an asset) that produces both passive income and non-passive income during a taxable year (dual-character asset), including stock and other assets that produce passive and non-passive income under section 1297(b)(2)(C) and paragraph (c)(4) of this section, is treated as two assets for each measuring period in the taxable year, one of which is a passive asset and one of which is a non-passive asset. The value (or adjusted basis) of the dual-character asset is allocated between the passive asset and the non-passive asset in proportion to the relative amounts of passive income and non-passive income produced by the asset (or portion of an asset) during the taxable year. See paragraph (d)(3)(iii) of this section for a special rule concerning stock that has previously produced dividends subject to the exception provided in section 1297(b)(2)(C). For purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C), a partnership interest in a partnership that is a related person to the tested foreign corporation is treated as producing passive or non-passive income in proportion to the tested foreign corporation's distributive share of partnership passive or non-passive income for the taxable year under paragraph (c)(4)(vii) of this section.

(ii) Special rule when only part of an asset produces income. For purposes of section 1297, when only a portion of an asset produces income during a taxable year or a portion of a taxable year, the asset is treated as two assets for that period, one of which is characterized as a passive asset or a non-passive asset based on the income that it produces, and one of which is characterized based on the income that it is held to produce. The value (or adjusted basis) of the asset is allocated between the two assets pursuant to the method that most reasonably reflects the uses of the property. In the case of real property, an allocation based on the physical use of the property generally is the most reasonable method.

(iii) Special rule for stock that previously produced income that was excluded from passive income under section 1297(b)(2)(C). Stock with respect to which no dividends are received during a taxable year, but with respect to which dividends were received during one or both of the prior two taxable years, is characterized based on the relative portion of the dividends received that was passive or non-passive. If the dividends were in whole excluded from passive income under section 1297(b)(2)(C) and paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section, the stock is treated as a single non-passive asset. If the dividends were in part excluded from passive income under section 1297(b)(2)(C) and paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section, the stock is treated as two assets, one of which is a passive asset and one of which is a non-passive asset. The value (or adjusted basis) of the stock is allocated between the two assets in proportion to the average percentage of aggregate dividends received in the prior two taxable years that were characterized as passive income and the average percentage of aggregate dividends received in the prior two years that were characterized as non-passive income, for the previous two taxable years pursuant to section 1297(b)(2)(C) and paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section. If the tested foreign corporation did not receive any dividends from the stock for the current taxable year or within either of the prior two taxable years of the tested foreign corporation, then the stock is treated as a passive asset.

(iv) Example. The following example illustrates the application of this paragraph (d)(3).

(A) Facts.

(1) USP is a domestic corporation that owns 30% of TFC, a foreign corporation. The remaining 70% of TFC is owned by FP, a foreign corporation that is unrelated to USP. TFC owns 20% of the value of FS1, a foreign corporation, and FP owns the remaining 80% of the value of FS1. FP, TFC, and FS1 are not controlled foreign corporations within the meaning of section 957(a), and each has a calendar year taxable year.

(2) In Year 1, FS1 had current earnings and profits of $1000x, attributable to passive income of $500x and non-passive income of $500x, and paid $300x of dividends to TFC. In Year 2, FS1 had current earnings and profits of $1000x, attributable to passive income of $100x and non-passive income of $900x, and paid $100x of dividends to TFC. In Year 3, FS1 has passive income of $200x and non-passive income of $800x and does not pay a dividend.

(3) Throughout Year 3, TFC holds an obligation of FS1 with respect to which FS1 pays $100x of interest.

(4) In addition to the stock in FS1 and the FS1 obligation, TFC holds an office building, 40% of which is rented to FP throughout Year 3 for $100x per quarter. During Year 3, FP has only passive income. The remaining 60% of the office building is leased throughout Year 3 to an unrelated person for $300x per quarter, and TFC's own officers or staff of employees regularly perform active and substantial management and operational functions while the property is leased.

(B) Results.

(1) For purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C), FP is a “related person” with respect to TFC because FP owns more than 50% of the vote or value of TFC, and FS1 is a “related person” with respect to TFC because FP owns more than 50% of the vote or value of both TFC and of FS1.

(2) Under paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section, the dividends paid by FS1 in Year 1 were characterized as 50% passive income ($150x) and 50% non-passive income ($150x). Under paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section, the dividends paid by FS1 in Year 2 were characterized as 10% passive income ($10x) and 90% non-passive income ($90x). Accordingly, the average percentage of dividends for the previous two taxable years that were characterized as passive income is 40% (((10% × $100x) + (50% × $300x))/($100x + $300x)), and the average percentage of dividends characterized as non-passive income is 60% (((90% × $100x) + (50% × $300x))/($100x + $300x)). Thus, under paragraph (d)(3)(iii) of this section, 60% of each share of stock of FS1 is characterized as a non-passive asset and 40% is characterized as a passive asset for each quarter of Year 3 for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to determine whether TFC is a PFIC.

(3) Under paragraph (c)(4)(iii) of this section, the interest received by TFC from FS1 is characterized as 20% ($200x/($200x + $800x)) passive income and thus 80% non-passive income for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(1) to determine whether TFC is a PFIC. Accordingly, under paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this section, 20% of the obligation of FS1 is characterized as a passive asset and 80% as a non-passive asset for each quarter of Year 3 for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to determine whether TFC is a PFIC.

(4) Under paragraph (c)(4)(v) of this section, the rent received from FP throughout Year 3 is characterized as 100% passive income. Under paragraph (c)(1)(i)(A) of this section and section 954(c)(2)(A), the rent received from the unrelated person is characterized as 100% non-passive income. Accordingly, under paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this section, the 40% of the office building rented to FP has a value of 25% (($100x × 4)/(($100x × 4) + ($300x × 4))) of the value of the office building and that 25% is a passive asset, and the 60% of the office building rented to the unrelated person has a value of 75% (($300x × 4)/(($100x × 4) + ($300x × 4))) of the value of the office building and is a non-passive asset for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to determine whether TFC is a PFIC.

(4) Passive treatment of stock and partnership interests. For purposes of section 1297(a)(2), shares of stock in a corporation that is not a look-through subsidiary (as defined in § 1.1297-2(g)(3)) and partnership interests in a partnership that is not a look-through partnership (as defined in § 1.1297-2(g)(4)) with respect to a tested foreign corporation for a taxable year or portion thereof are treated as passive assets for the taxable year or relevant portion thereof, except to the extent the stock or partnership interest is treated as a dual-character asset under section 1297(b)(2)(C) and paragraph (d)(3) of this section because it produces both passive and non-passive income, or the stock or partnership interest produces solely non-passive income for the taxable year under section 1297(b)(2)(C) and paragraph (c)(4) of this section or under paragraph (d)(5) of this section.

(5) Dealer property. For purposes of section 1297(a)(2), an asset that produces, or would produce upon disposition, income or gain that is, or would be, excluded from passive income pursuant to section 954(c)(2)(C) is treated as a non-passive asset.

(e) Stapled stock. If a United States person that would be a shareholder (within the meaning of § 1.1291-1(b)(7) and (b)(8)) of a stapled entity (as defined in section 269B(c)(2)) owns stock in all entities that are stapled entities with respect to each other and the shares are stapled interests (as defined in section 269B(c)(3)), the United States person's interests in the stapled entities are treated as an interest in a single entity that holds all of the assets of the stapled entities, conducts all of the activities of the stapled entities, and derives all of the income of the stapled entities for all purposes of the PFIC regime.

(f) Definitions. The following definitions apply for purposes of this section and § 1.1297-2:

(1) Measuring date. The term measuring date has the meaning provided in paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section.

(2) Measuring period. The term measuring period means a three-month period or an alternative measuring period, within the meaning provided in paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section.

(3) Non-passive asset. The term non-passive asset means an asset other than a passive asset.

(4) Non-passive income. The term non-passive income means income other than passive income.

(5) Passive asset. The term passive asset means an asset that produces passive income, or which is held for the production of passive income, taking into account the rules in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.

(6) Passive income. The term passive income has the meaning provided in paragraph (c)(1) of this section.

(7) Publicly traded foreign corporation. The term publicly traded foreign corporation means a foreign corporation the stock of which is regularly traded on an exchange described in section 1297(e)(3), other than in de minimis quantities, for at least twenty trading days during a taxable year.

(8) Related person. For purposes of applying the rules of this section and § 1.1297-2 with respect to section 1297(b)(2)(C), the term means a related person within the meaning of section 954(d)(3).

(9) Tested foreign corporation. The term tested foreign corporation means a foreign corporation the PFIC status of which is being tested under section 1297(a).

(g) Applicability date

(1) In general. Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (g)(2) of this section, the rules of this section apply to taxable years of shareholders beginning on or after January 14, 2021. A shareholder may choose to apply such rules for any open taxable year beginning before January 14, 2021, provided that, with respect to a tested foreign corporation, the shareholder consistently applies the provisions of this section (except that consistent treatment is not required with respect to paragraph (c)(1)(i)(A) of this section) and § 1.1291-1(b)(8)(iv) and (b)(8)(v)(A), (B), (C), and (D) and §§ 1.1297-2, 1.1298-2, and 1.1298-4 for such year and all subsequent years.

(2) Paragraph (d)(1)(v)(B)(2) of this section. Paragraph (d)(1)(v)(B)(2) of this section applies to taxable years of shareholders ending on or after October 1, 2019. For taxable years of shareholders ending before October 1, 2019, a shareholder may apply paragraph (d)(1)(v)(B)(2) of this section to the last taxable year of a foreign corporation beginning before January 1, 2018, and each subsequent taxable year of the foreign corporation, provided that the shareholder and United States persons that are related (within the meaning of section 267 or 707) to the taxpayer consistently apply such paragraph with respect to all foreign corporations.

[T.D. 9936, 86 FR 4557, Jan. 15, 2021, as amended at 86 FR 13648, Mar. 10, 2021]

§ 1.1297-2 Special rules regarding look-through subsidiaries and look-through partnerships.

(a) Overview. This section provides rules concerning the treatment of income and assets of a look-through subsidiary (as defined in § 1.1297-2(g)(3)) or look-through partnership (as defined in § 1.1297-2(g)(4)) for purposes of determining whether a tested foreign corporation (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(9)) is a passive foreign investment company (PFIC) under section 1297(a). Paragraph (b) of this section provides guidance for purposes of section 1297(c) on how to determine a tested foreign corporation's ownership in a corporation and how to determine a tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of a look-through subsidiary's or look-through partnership's assets and income. Paragraph (c) of this section provides rules that eliminate certain income and assets related to look-through subsidiaries and look-through partnerships for purposes of determining a tested foreign corporation's PFIC status. Paragraph (d) of this section provides a rule to determine whether certain income received or accrued by look-through subsidiaries and look-through partnerships is received or accrued from a related person for purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C). Paragraph (e) of this section provides rules concerning the attribution of activities from qualified affiliates (as defined in § 1.1297-2(e)(2)) for purposes of characterizing the income and assets of a look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership. Paragraph (f) of this section provides rules for determining the amount of gain from the direct or indirect sale or exchange of stock of a look-through subsidiary or partnership interests in a partnership described in section 954(c)(4) that is taken into account under section 1297(a) and for determining the passive or non-passive character of gain from the sale of a look-through subsidiary. Paragraph (g) of this section provides definitions applicable for this section, and paragraph (h) of this section provides the applicability date of this section.

(b) General rules

(1) Tested foreign corporation's ownership of a corporation. For purposes of section 1297(c) and this section, the principles of section 958(a) and the regulations in this chapter under that section applicable to determining direct or indirect ownership by value apply to determine a tested foreign corporation's percentage ownership (by value) in the stock of another corporation. These principles apply whether an intermediate entity is domestic or foreign.

(2) Tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of the assets and income of a look-through subsidiary

(i) Proportionate share of subsidiary assets. For each measuring period (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(2)), a tested foreign corporation is treated as if it held its proportionate share of each asset of a look-through subsidiary, determined based on the tested foreign corporation's percentage ownership (by value) (as determined under paragraph (b)(1) of this section)) of the look-through subsidiary on the measuring date (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(1)). A tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of a look-through subsidiary's asset is treated as producing passive income, or being held to produce passive income, to the extent the asset produced, or was held to produce, passive income in the hands of such look-through subsidiary under the rules of paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section.

(ii) Proportionate share of subsidiary income

(A) General rule. A tested foreign corporation is treated as if it received directly its proportionate share of each item of gross income or loss of a corporation for a taxable year if the corporation is a look-through subsidiary with respect to the tested foreign corporation for the taxable year of the tested foreign corporation. In such case, a tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of a look-through subsidiary's gross income or loss is determined based on the corporation's average percentage ownership (by value) of the look-through subsidiary. The exceptions to passive income in section 1297(b)(2) and the relevant exceptions to foreign personal holding company income in section 954(c) that are based on whether income is derived in the active conduct of a business or whether a corporation is engaged in the active conduct of a business apply to such income only if the exception would have applied to exclude the income from passive income or foreign personal holding company income in the hands of the subsidiary, determined by taking into account only the activities of the subsidiary except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section. See paragraph (d) of this section for rules determining whether a person is a related person for purposes of applying section 1297(b)(2)(C) in the case of income received or accrued by a subsidiary that is treated as received directly by a tested foreign corporation pursuant to this paragraph (b)(2).

(B) Partial year. When a corporation is not a look-through subsidiary with respect to a tested foreign corporation for an entire taxable year of the tested foreign corporation, the tested foreign corporation may be treated as if it received directly its proportionate share of the gross income or loss of the first corporation for each measuring period in the year for which the first corporation is a look-through subsidiary, if the conditions in paragraph (g)(3)(ii)(B) of this section are satisfied. In such case, a tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of a look-through subsidiary's gross income or loss is determined based on the tested foreign corporation's percentage ownership (by value) (as determined under paragraph (b)(1) of this section) of the look-through subsidiary on the relevant measuring date.

(iii) Coordination of section 1297(c) with section 1298(b)(7). A tested foreign corporation is not treated under section 1297(c) and this paragraph (b) as holding its proportionate share of the assets of a domestic corporation, or receiving directly its proportionate share of the gross income or loss of the domestic corporation, if the stock of the domestic corporation is treated as an asset that is not a passive asset (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(5)) that produces income that is not passive income (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(6)) under section 1298(b)(7) (concerning the treatment of certain foreign corporations owning stock in certain 25-percent-owned domestic corporations). See § 1.1298-4 for rules governing the application of section 1298(b)(7).

(3) Tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of the assets and income of a look-through partnership

(i) Proportionate share of partnership assets. For each measuring period (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(2)), a tested foreign corporation is treated as if it held its proportionate share of each asset of a look-through partnership, determined based on the tested foreign corporation's percentage ownership (by value) (as determined under paragraph (b)(1) of this section) of the look-through partnership on the measuring date (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(1)). A tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of a look-through partnership's asset is treated as producing passive income, or being held to produce passive income, to the extent the asset produced, or was held to produce, passive income in the hands of the partnership under the rules in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section.

(ii) Proportionate share of partnership income

(A) General rule. A tested foreign corporation is treated as if it received directly its proportionate share of any item of gross income or loss of a partnership that is a look-through partnership with respect to the tested foreign corporation for the taxable year of the tested foreign corporation. The exceptions to passive income in section 1297(b)(2) and the relevant exceptions to foreign personal holding company income in section 954(c) that are based on whether income is derived in the active conduct of a business or whether a corporation is engaged in the active conduct of a business apply to such income only if the exception would have applied to exclude the income from passive income or foreign personal holding company income in the hands of the partnership, determined by taking into account only the activities of the partnership except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section. See paragraph (d) of this section for rules determining whether a person is a related person for purposes of applying section 1297(b)(2)(C) in the case of income received or accrued by a partnership that is treated as received directly by a tested foreign corporation pursuant to this paragraph (b)(3).

(B) Partial year. When a partnership is not a look-through partnership with respect to a tested foreign corporation for an entire taxable year of the tested foreign corporation, the tested foreign corporation may be treated as if it received directly its proportionate share of the gross income of the partnership for each measuring period in the year for which the partnership is a look-through partnership, provided that the conditions set forth in paragraph (g)(3)(ii)(B) of this section would be satisfied if the partnership were a corporation.

(4) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (b). For purposes of these examples, USP is a domestic corporation; TFC, LTS, and FS are foreign corporations that are not controlled foreign corporations within the meaning of section 957(a); USP owns 30% of TFC; and LTS owns 25% of the only class of FS stock.

(i) Example 1

(A) Facts. TFC directly owns 80% of the only class of LTS stock for TFC's and LTS's entire taxable year.

(B) Results

(1) LTS. Under paragraph (b)(1) of this section and pursuant to the principles of section 958(a), LTS owns 25% of the value of FS. Under paragraph (b)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section, in determining whether LTS is a PFIC under section 1297(a), LTS is treated as if it held 25% of each of FS's assets on each of the measuring dates in its taxable year and received directly 25% of the gross income of FS for the taxable year.

(2) TFC. Under paragraph (b)(1) of this section and pursuant to the principles of section 958(a), TFC owns 80% of the value of LTS and indirectly owns 20% of the value of FS. Under paragraph (b)(2) of this section, in determining whether TFC is a PFIC under section 1297(a), TFC is treated as if it held 80% of each of LTS's assets on each of the measuring dates in its taxable year and received directly 80% of the gross income of LTS for the taxable year. However, because TFC indirectly owns less than 25% of FS, FS is not a look-through subsidiary with respect to TFC and, therefore, TFC is treated as if it held a 20% interest in the stock of FS (and not the assets of FS), and received 80% of any dividends paid from FS to LTS (and not any income of FS).

(ii) Example 2

(A) Facts. TFC directly owns 25% of the only class of LTS stock on the last day of each of the first three quarters of its taxable year but disposes of its entire interest in LTS during the fourth quarter of its taxable year.

(B) Results. Under paragraph (b)(1) and pursuant to the principles of section 958(a), on each of its first three measuring dates, TFC owns 25% of the value of LTS and indirectly owns 6.25% of the value of FS. Under paragraph (g)(3) of this section, if information about the gross income of LTS for each of the first three quarters of its taxable year is available to TFC, LTS is treated as a look-through subsidiary with respect to TFC for those quarters because TFC owned 25% of the value of LTS on the measuring dates with respect to those measuring periods. In that case, under paragraph (b)(2) of this section, in determining whether TFC is a PFIC under section 1297(a), TFC is treated as if it held 25% of each of LTS's assets and received directly 25% of the gross income of LTS on each of the first three measuring dates in its taxable year. For each of its first three quarters, if LTS is treated as a look-through subsidiary with respect to TFC under paragraph (g)(3) of this section, then TFC is treated as if it held a 6.25% interest in the stock of FS (and not the assets of FS) and received 25% of any dividends paid from FS to LTS (and not any income of FS). Under paragraph (g)(3) of this section, if information about the gross income of LTS for each of the first three quarters of its taxable year is not available to TFC, then LTS is not a look-through subsidiary with respect to TFC.

(iii) Example 3

(A) Facts. TFC directly owns 100% of the only class of LTS stock for TFC's and LTS's entire taxable year. TFC sells one item of property described in section 954(c)(1)(B)(i) for a gain of $25x and another for a loss of $10x, and no exception from passive income applies to either amount. During the taxable year, FS sells one item of property described in section 954(c)(1)(B)(i) for a gain of $50x and another for a loss of $55x; no exception from passive income applies to either amount.

(B) Results. Under paragraph (b)(1) of this section and pursuant to the principles of section 958(a), TFC owns 100% of the value of LTS, and TFC indirectly owns 25% of the value of FS. Under paragraph (b) of this section, in determining whether TFC is a PFIC under section 1297(a), TFC is treated as if it held 100% of LTS's assets on each of the measuring dates in its taxable year and received directly 100% of the gross income of LTS for the taxable year. Furthermore, TFC is treated as if it held 25% of each of FS's assets and received directly 25% of the gross income of FS. Pursuant to § 1.1297-1(c)(1)(ii), the excess of gains over losses from property transactions described in section 954(c)(1)(B) is taken into account as gross income for purposes of section 1297, and items of gain or loss of look-through subsidiaries are treated as recognized by a tested foreign corporation. Accordingly, TFC takes into account the net $5x loss from the sales of property by FS. TFC's income from its own sales of property constitutes passive income pursuant to § 1.1297-1(c) and section 954(c)(1)(B), although, pursuant to § 1.1297-1(c)(1)(ii), only the excess of gains over losses, $15x ($25x − $10x), is taken into account as gross income for purposes of section 1297. As a result, TFC's income (including the $5x loss from FS), all of which is passive income, equals $10x ($15x − $5x) of gross income.

(c) Elimination of certain intercompany assets and income

(1) General rule for asset test

(i) LTS stock. For purposes of section 1297(a)(2), a tested foreign corporation does not take into account the value (or adjusted basis) of stock of a look-through subsidiary (LTS stock), including LTS stock that the tested foreign corporation is treated as owning on a measuring date pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section. Furthermore, for purposes of section 1297(a)(2), a tested foreign corporation does not take into account the value (or adjusted basis) of its own stock that it is treated as owning on a measuring date pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section.

(ii) LTS obligation. For purposes of section 1297(a)(2), a tested foreign corporation does not take into account the value (or adjusted basis) of its proportionate share of a direct LTS obligation, an indirect LTS obligation or a TFC obligation that it is treated as owning on a measuring date. The term direct LTS obligation means a debt obligation of, lease to, or license to a look-through subsidiary (LTS debt, LTS lease, and LTS license, respectively, and LTS obligation collectively) from the tested foreign corporation that the tested foreign corporation owns on a measuring date, and the term indirect LTS obligation means a LTS obligation from a look-through subsidiary that the tested foreign corporation is treated as owning on a measuring date pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section. The term TFC obligation means a debt obligation of, lease to, or a license to the tested foreign corporation from a look-through subsidiary that the tested foreign corporation is treated as owning on a measuring date pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section. The tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of a LTS obligation or a TFC obligation is the value (or adjusted basis) of the item multiplied by the tested foreign corporation's percentage ownership (by value) in each relevant look-through subsidiary. For purposes of section 1297(a)(2) and § 1.1297-1(d) as applied to a tested foreign corporation, property subject to a LTS lease or LTS license or a lease or license to the tested foreign corporation is characterized as either producing passive income or non-passive income (or both) by taking into account the activities of the qualified affiliates (as defined in paragraph (e)(2) of this section) of the entity that owns the property. For this purpose, the activities of the entity that owns the property that is subject to the lease or license are not taken into account to the extent that they relate to the lease or license.

(2) General rule for income test

(i) LTS stock. For purposes of section 1297(a)(1), a tested foreign corporation does not take into account dividends derived with respect to LTS stock, including dividends that the tested foreign corporation is treated as receiving on a measuring date pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section; provided that, notwithstanding the foregoing, a tested foreign corporation takes into account dividends that are attributable to income that was not treated as received directly by the tested foreign corporation pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) of this section. For this purpose, the rules of § 1.1297-1(c)(4)(iv)(A) apply to determine the earnings and profits from which a dividend is paid, substituting the term “look-through subsidiary” for “related person.”

(ii) LTS obligation. For purposes of section 1297(a)(1), a tested foreign corporation does not take into account its proportionate share of interest, rents, or royalties derived with respect to direct or indirect LTS obligations or TFC obligations. The tested foreign corporation's proportionate share of interest, rents, or royalties is the amount of the item multiplied by the tested foreign corporation's percentage ownership (by value) in each relevant look-through subsidiary.

(3) Partnerships. For purposes of section 1297(a)(1) and (a)(2), the principles of paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section apply with respect to ownership interests in, debt of, and leases or licenses to a look-through partnership (as defined in paragraph (g)(4) of this section), and with respect to distributions and the distributive shares of income from a look-through partnership and interest, rents, or royalties derived with respect to the debt, leases or licenses of a look-through partnership.

(4) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (c). For purposes of these examples, USP is a domestic corporation; USP owns 30% of TFC; TFC, LTS, LTS1, LTS2, and FS are foreign corporations that are not controlled foreign corporations within the meaning of section 957(a); FPS is a foreign partnership; and TFC, LTS1, and LTS2 measure assets for purposes of section 1297(a)(2) based on value.

(i) Example 1

(A) Facts. TFC directly owns 80% of the only class of LTS stock for TFC's and LTS's entire taxable year, and LTS is a look-through subsidiary (as defined in paragraph (g)(3) of this section) with respect to TFC. LTS owns 25% of the only class of FS stock, and FS is a look-through subsidiary with respect to LTS. Pursuant to the principles of section 958(a), TFC owns 80% of the value of LTS, LTS owns 25% of the value of FS, and TFC indirectly owns 20% of the value of FS. During the first quarter of the taxable year, LTS received a $20x dividend from FS.

(B) Results

(1) LTS. Under paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to LTS, LTS's assets do not include the stock of FS. Under paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section, for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(1) to LTS, LTS's income does not include the $20x dividend from FS.

(2) TFC. Under paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to TFC, TFC's assets do not include the stock of LTS. Under paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(A) of this section, for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(1) to TFC, TFC is treated as receiving directly the income of LTS. Because TFC indirectly owns less than 25% of FS, FS is not a look-through subsidiary with respect to TFC and, therefore, TFC's assets include the value of TFC's 20% interest in the stock of FS and do not include 20% of FS's assets. Similarly, TFC is treated as if it received $16x (80% × $20x) of the $20x dividend paid from FS to LTS (and not any income of FS). Because the dividend constitutes gross income to LTS (although it is eliminated for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(1) to LTS), TFC is treated as receiving the dividend from FS directly under paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(A) of this section. Because the dividend is from a subsidiary that is not a look-through subsidiary with respect to TFC, paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section does not apply to eliminate the $16x dividend for purposes of section 1297(a).

(ii) Example 2

(A) Facts. TFC directly owns 40% of the value of LTS1 stock on each of the measuring dates, and thus is treated under paragraph (b)(1) of this section as owning 40% of LTS1's assets on each of the measuring dates. TFC's assets include a loan to LTS1 with a balance of $1,000x on each of the measuring dates. During the first quarter of the taxable year, TFC received $20x of dividends from LTS1, which were attributable to income of LTS1 treated as received directly by TFC pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and $30x of interest on the loan, both of which were paid in cash.

(B) Results. Under paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, for purposes of applying section 1297(a), TFC's assets do not include the stock of LTS1, and TFC's income does not include the $20x of dividends received from LTS1 pursuant to paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section. Similarly, under paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section TFC's assets include only $600x ($1,000x loan −(40% × $1,000x)) of the loan to LTS1, and under paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, TFC's income includes only $18x ($30x interest − (40% × $30x)) of the interest from LTS1. However, TFC's assets include the entire $50x of cash ($20x of dividends and $30x of interest) received from LTS1.

(iii) Example 3

(A) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (c)(4)(ii)(A) of this section (the facts in Example 2), except that TFC also directly owns 30% of the value of LTS2 stock on each of the measuring dates, and thus is treated under paragraph (b)(1) of this section as owning 30% of LTS2's assets, and LTS1's assets also include a loan to LTS2 with a balance of $200x on each of the measuring dates. During the first quarter of the taxable year, LTS1 received $5x of interest on the loan, which was paid in cash.

(B) Results. The results are the same as in paragraph (c)(4)(ii)(B) of this section (the results in Example 2), except that TFC's assets also do not include the stock of LTS2. Similarly, although TFC would be treated under paragraph (b)(2) of this section as owning $80x (40% × $200x) of the LTS1 loan to LTS2, under paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section TFC does not take into account its proportionate share of an indirect LTS obligation and accordingly, TFC does not take into account $24x (30% × $80x) of the loan to LTS2. As a result, TFC's assets include only $56x ($80x − $24x) of the LTS1 loan to LTS2. Furthermore, although TFC would be treated under paragraph (b)(2) of this section as receiving $2x (40% × $5x) of the interest received by LTS1 from LTS2, under paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section TFC does not take into account its proportionate share of interest with respect to an indirect LTS obligation and thus, TFC does not take into account $0.60x (30% × $2x) of the interest received by LTS1. Accordingly, TFC's income includes only $1.40x ($2x − $0.60x) of the interest from LTS2. Furthermore, TFC's assets include $2x (40% × $5x) of LTS1's cash received from LTS2.

(iv) Example 4

(A) Facts. TFC directly owns 80% of the value of LTS1 stock on each of the measuring dates, and thus is treated under paragraph (b)(1) of this section as owning 80% of LTS1's assets on each of the measuring dates. TFC also directly owns 50% of the value in FPS on each of the measuring dates. LTS1's assets include the remaining 50% of the value in FPS and a loan to FPS with a balance of $500x on each of the measuring dates. FPS's assets include a loan to TFC with a balance of $1000x on each of the measuring dates. During the first measuring period of the taxable year, FPS received $30x of interest from TFC, and LTS1 received $15x of interest from FPS, both of which were paid in cash. During the last measuring period of the taxable year, FPS received $80x of income from an unrelated person in cash and distributed $60x of such income in cash to TFC and LTS1 in proportion to their interests in FPS.

(B) Results. Under paragraph (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section, for purposes of applying section 1297(a), TFC's assets do not include the stock of LTS1, the interests in FPS owned by TFC directly and through LTS1, any of the loan by FPS to TFC, or any of the loan by LTS1 to FPS. Similarly, under paragraph (c)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section, TFC's income does not include any of the $30x of interest received by FPS from TFC, any of the $15x of interest received by LTS1 from FPS, or any of the $60x of distributions received by TFC and LTS1 from FPS. However, on each of the measuring dates, TFC's assets include $27x ((50% × $30x) + (80% × 50% × $30x)) of the $30 of cash received by FPS from TFC and $12x (80% × $15x) of the $15x of cash received by LTS1 from FPS. Moreover, on the last measuring date of the taxable year, TFC's assets include $18x ((50% × $20x) + (80% × 50% × $20x)) of the $20x ($80x−$60x) of cash received by FPS from the unrelated person and retained by FPS and $54x ((50% × $60x) + (80% × 50% × $60x)) of the $60x cash received by FPS from the unrelated person and distributed. Furthermore, TFC's income includes $72x ((50% × $80x) + (80% × 50% × $80x)) of the $80x of income received by FPS from an unrelated person.

(v) Example 5

(A) Facts. TFC directly owns 80% of the value of the stock of LTS1 and 60% of the value of the stock of LTS2 on each of the measuring dates, and thus is treated under paragraph (b)(1) of this section as owning 80% of LTS1's assets and 60% of LTS2's assets on each of the measuring dates. TFC's assets include a license for the use of its intangible property by LTS1 with a value of $5,000x on each of the measuring dates, LTS1's assets include a sub-license of such license to LTS2 with a value of $2,000x on each of the measuring dates, and LTS2's assets include a lease of its building to LTS1 with a value of $4,000x on each of the measuring dates. LTS1 and LTS2 each use the intangible property that is the subject of the license and sub-license in its respective trade or business, and LTS1 uses the building in its trade or business. During the last quarter of the taxable year, TFC received a royalty of $500x from LTS1 with respect to the license, and LTS1 received a royalty of $200x from LTS2 with respect to the sub-license, both of which were paid in cash. LTS2 received $100x of rent paid in cash from LTS1 during each quarter of the taxable year with respect to the building lease.

(B) Results

(1) Asset test. Under paragraph (c) of this section, for purposes of applying section 1297(a)(2) to TFC's final measuring period, the following analysis applies. TFC's assets do not include the stock of LTS1 and LTS2. Similarly, TFC's assets include only $1,000x ($5,000x license − (80% × $5,000x)) of the license to LTS1. However, TFC's assets include the entire $500x of cash it received from LTS1 as a result of the royalty. Moreover, although TFC would be treated under paragraph (b)(2) of this section as owning $1,600x (80% × $2,000x) of the LTS1 sub-license to LTS2, under paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section TFC does not take into account its proportionate share of an indirect LTS obligation, and accordingly TFC does not take into account $960x (60% × $1,600x) of LTS1's sub-license to LTS2. As a result, TFC's assets include $640x ($1,600x − $960x) of the sub-license. In addition, TFC's assets include $160x (80% × $200x) of LTS1's cash received from LTS2 as a result of the royalty to LTS1. Similarly, although TFC would be treated under paragraph (b)(2) of this section as owning $2,400x (60% × $4,000x) of the LTS2 lease to LTS1, under paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section TFC does not take into account $1,920x (80% × $2,400x) of the LTS2 building lease, and accordingly, its assets include $480x ($2,400x − $1,920x) of the lease. TFC's assets also include $240x (60% × $100x × 4) of LTS2's cash received from LTS1 as a result of the rental payment to LTS2.

(2) Income test. Under paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, because TFC does not take into account its proportionate share of a direct LTS obligation, TFC's income includes only $100x ($500x royalty − (80% × $500x)) of the royalties from LTS1. Furthermore, although TFC would be treated under paragraph (b)(2) of this section as receiving $160x (80% × $200x) of the royalty received by LTS1 from LTS2, under paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section TFC does not take into account its proportionate share of royalties derived with respect to an indirect LTS obligation, and accordingly TFC does not take into account $96x (60% × $160x) of the royalty received by LTS1. As a result, TFC's income includes only $64x ($160x − $96x) of the royalty from LTS2. Similarly, although TFC would be treated under paragraph (b)(2) of this section as receiving $240x (60% × $100x × 4) of the rent received by LTS2 from LTS1, under paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section TFC does not take into account its proportionate share of rent derived with respect to an indirect LTS obligation, and accordingly TFC does not take into account $192x (80% × $240) of the rent received by LTS2. Therefore, TFC's income includes only $48 ($240x − $192x) of the rent received from LTS1.

(3) Treatment of intangible and rental property. For purposes of determining whether the intangible property that TFC owns and the building that TFC is treated as owning under paragraph (b)(2) of this section is held in the production of passive income, the activities performed by TFC and its qualified affiliates with respect to the property are taken into account under paragraphs (c)(1)(ii) and (e) of this section. Because TFC is the common parent of the affiliated group (as determined under paragraph (e)(2) of this section) that includes LTS1 and LTS2, LTS1 and LTS2 are qualified affiliates of TFC and the activities of their officers and employees with respect to the intangible property and building are taken into account to determine whether the building and intangible property would be treated as passive assets.

(d) Related person determination for purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C)

(1) General rule. For purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C), interest, dividends, rents or royalties received or accrued by a look-through subsidiary (and treated as received directly by a tested foreign corporation pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) of this section) are considered received or accrued from a related person only if the payor of the interest, dividend, rent or royalty is a related person (within the meaning of section 954(d)(3)) with respect to the look-through subsidiary, taking into account § 1.1297-1(c)(1)(i)(D). Similarly, for purposes of 1297(b)(2)(C), interest, dividends, rents or royalties received or accrued by a look-through partnership (and treated as received directly by a tested foreign corporation pursuant to paragraph (b)(3) of this section) are considered received or accrued from a related person only if the payor of the interest, dividend, rent or royalty is a related person (within the meaning of section 954(d)(3)) with respect to the look-through partnership, taking into account § 1.1297-1(c)(1)(i)(D).

(2) Example. The following example illustrates the rule of this paragraph (d).

(i) Facts. USP is a domestic corporation that owns 30% of TFC. TFC directly owns 30% of the value of FS1 stock, and thus under paragraph (b) of this section is treated as owning 30% of FS1's assets and earning 30% of FS1's gross income. The remaining FS1 stock is owned by an unrelated foreign person. FS1 directly owns 60% of the vote of FS2 stock and 20% of the value of FS2 stock. The remaining vote and value of FS2 stock are owned by an unrelated foreign person. TFC, FS1, and FS2 are foreign corporations that are not controlled foreign corporations within the meaning of section 957(a). FS1 receives a $100x dividend from FS2.

(ii) Results. Pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) of this section, TFC is treated as receiving directly $30x of the dividend income received by FS1. FS2 is a related person (within the meaning of section 954(d)(3)) with respect to FS1 for purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C) because FS1 owns more than 50% of the vote of FS2. FS2 is not a related person (within the meaning of section 954(d)(3)) with respect to TFC for purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(C) because TFC indirectly does not own more than 50% of the vote or value of the FS2 stock. Under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, for purposes of determining whether the dividend income received by FS1 is subject to the exception in section 1297(b)(2)(C) for purposes of testing the PFIC status of TFC, the dividend is treated as received from a related person because FS1 and FS2 are related persons within the meaning of section 1297(b)(2)(C). Therefore, to the extent the dividend income received by FS1 would be properly allocable to income of FS2 that is not passive income, the dividend income that TFC is treated as receiving under section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section is treated as non-passive income (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(4)).

(e) Treatment of activities of certain look-through subsidiaries and look-through partnerships for purposes of certain exceptions

(1) General rule. An item of income received by a tested foreign corporation (including an amount treated as received or accrued pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section) that would be passive income in the hands of the entity that actually received or accrued it is not passive if the item would be excluded from foreign personal holding company income under the following exceptions contained in section 954(c) that are based on whether the entity is engaged in the active conduct of a trade or business, determined by taking into account the activities performed by the officers and employees of the tested foreign corporation as well as activities performed by the officers and employees of any qualified affiliate of the tested foreign corporation—

(i) Section 954(c)(1)(B) and § 1.954-2(e)(1)(ii) and (3)(ii), (iii) and (iv);

(ii) Section 954(c)(1)(C) and § 1.954-2(f)(1)(ii) and (2)(iii)(D);

(iii) Section 954(c)(1)(D) and § 1.954-2(g)(2)(ii);

(iv) Section 954(c)(2)(A) and § 1.954-2(b)(6), (c), and (d);

(v) Section 954(c)(2)(B) and § 1.954-2(b)(2); and

(vi) Section 954(c)(2)(C) and § 1.954-2(h)(3)(ii).

(2) Qualified affiliate. The term qualified affiliate means a corporation or a partnership that is included in an affiliated group that includes the tested foreign corporation. For purposes of this paragraph (e), the term affiliated group has the meaning provided in section 1504(a), except that—

(i) The affiliated group is determined without regard to sections 1504(a)(2)(A), (b)(2) and (b)(3);

(ii) Subject to paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section, a partnership is treated as an includible corporation;

(iii) The common parent of the affiliated group is not a domestic corporation or domestic partnership;

(iv) Section 1504(a)(2)(B) is applied by substituting “more than 50 percent” for “at least 80 percent”;

(v) A foreign corporation or foreign partnership must be the common parent of the affiliated group;

(vi) Subject to paragraph (e)(2)(vii) of this section, a partnership is included as a member of the affiliated group if more than 50 percent of the value of its capital interests or profits interests is owned by one or more corporations or partnerships that are included in the affiliated group; and

(vii) A corporation or a partnership that is not the common parent of an affiliated group is included in the affiliated group only if it would be a look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership, as applicable, of the common parent if the common parent were a tested foreign corporation.

(3) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rule of this paragraph (e).

(i) Example 1

(A) Facts. USP is a domestic corporation that directly owns 20% of the outstanding stock of FS1. The remaining 80% of the outstanding stock of FS1 is directly owned by a foreign person that is not related to USP. FS1 directly owns 100% of the value of the outstanding stock of FS2 and directly owns 80% of the value of the outstanding stock of FS3. The remaining 20% of the value of the outstanding stock of FS3 is directly owned by a foreign person that is not related to USP. FS2 directly owns 80% of the value of the outstanding stock of FS4. The remaining 20% of the value of the outstanding stock of FS4 is directly owned by a foreign person that is not related to USP. FS1, FS2, FS3 and FS4 are all organized in Country A and are not controlled foreign corporations within the meaning of section 957(a). FS4 owns real property that is leased to a person that is not a related person, but does not perform any activities. FS1 and FS2 also do not perform any activities. Officers and employees of FS3 in Country A perform activities with respect to the real property of FS4 that, if performed by officers or employees of FS4, would allow the rental income in the hands of FS4 to qualify for the exception from foreign personal holding company income in section 954(c)(2)(A) and § 1.954-2(b)(6) and (c)(1)(ii).

(B) Results

(1) Qualified affiliates. FS1 is the common parent of the affiliated group (as determined under paragraph (e)(2) of this section) that includes FS2, FS3, and FS4 because (i) FS1 owns more than 50% by value of FS2 and FS3, (ii) FS2 owns more than 50% by value of FS4, and (iii) FS2, FS3, and FS4 would be look-through subsidiaries with respect to FS1 if FS1 were the tested foreign corporation. Accordingly, each of FS1, FS2, FS3 and FS4 are qualified affiliates (as determined under paragraph (e)(2) of this section) with respect to the other members of the group for purposes of determining whether FS1, FS2, FS3, or FS4 is a PFIC.

(2) FS1 and FS2. Under this paragraph (e), for purposes of determining whether the rental income actually received by FS4 with respect to the real property owned and rented by FS4 and treated under section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) of this section as received directly by FS1 or by FS2, respectively, is passive income for purposes of section 1297, the activities of FS3 are taken into account because FS3 is a qualified affiliate of FS1 and FS2, respectively. Thus, the exception in section 954(c)(2)(A) would apply, and the rental income treated as received by FS1 or by FS2, respectively, would be treated as non-passive income for purposes of determining whether FS1 or FS2 is a PFIC.

(3) FS4. Under this paragraph (e), for purposes of determining whether the rental income received by FS4 with respect to the real property owned and rented by FS4 is passive income for purposes of section 1297, the activities of FS3 are taken into account, because FS3 is a qualified affiliate of FS4. Thus, the exception in section 954(c)(2)(A) would apply, and the rental income received by FS4 would be treated as non-passive income for purposes of determining whether FS4 is a PFIC.

(ii) Example 2

(A) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (e)(3)(i)(A) of this section (the facts in Example 1), except that FS2 also owns real property that is leased to a person that is not a related person, and the officers and employees of FS2 in Country A engage in activities that would allow rental income received by FS2 with respect to its real property to qualify for the exception in section 954(c)(2)(A) and § 1.954-2(b)(6) and (c)(1)(iv), relying on the rule in § 1.954-2(c)(2)(ii) that provides that an organization is substantial in relation to rents if active leasing expenses equal or exceed 25% of adjusted leasing profit. However, the active leasing expenses of FS1 are less than 25% of its adjusted leasing profit, which includes the rental income of FS4 treated as received directly by FS1 as well as the rental income of FS2 treated as received directly by FS1.

(B) Results. Because FS2's rental income constitutes non-passive income as a result of the application of § 1.1297-1(c)(1)(i)(A) and section 954(c)(2)(A), it is treated as non-passive income that FS1 is treated as receiving directly under section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) of this section for purposes of determining whether FS1 is a PFIC, and accordingly, it is not necessary to rely on paragraph (e) of this section.

(iii) Example 3

(A) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (e)(3)(i)(A) of this section (the facts in Example 1), except that USP directly owns 60% of the outstanding stock of FS1.

(B) Results. Under paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section, USP cannot be the common parent of an affiliated group for purposes of paragraph (e)(2) of this section because it is a domestic corporation. Because FS1 is a foreign corporation, FS1 may be the common parent of an affiliated group for purposes of paragraph (e)(2) of this section. The results therefore are the same as in paragraph (e)(3)(i)(B) of this section (the results in Example 1).

(f) Gain on disposition of a look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership

(1) [Reserved].

(2) Amount of gain taken into account from disposition of look-through subsidiary. For purposes of section 1297(a)(1), section 1298(b)(3), and § 1.1298-2, the amount of gain that is taken into account by a tested foreign corporation from the tested foreign corporation's direct disposition of stock of a look-through subsidiary, or an indirect disposition resulting from the disposition of stock of a look-through subsidiary by other look-through subsidiaries or by look-through partnerships, is the residual gain. The residual gain equals the total gain recognized by the tested foreign corporation (including gain treated as recognized by the tested foreign corporation pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section) from the disposition of the stock of the look-through subsidiary reduced (but not below zero) by unremitted earnings. Unremitted earnings are the excess (if any) of the aggregate income (if any) taken into account by the tested foreign corporation pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section with respect to the stock of the disposed-of look-through subsidiary (including with respect to any other look-through subsidiary, to the extent it is owned by the tested foreign corporation indirectly through the disposed-of look-through subsidiary) over the aggregate dividends (if any) received by the tested foreign corporation from the disposed-of look-through subsidiary with respect to the stock, determined without regard to paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section. For purposes of this paragraph (f)(2), the amount of gain derived from the disposition of stock of a look-through subsidiary and income of and dividends received from the look-through subsidiary is determined on a share-by-share basis under a reasonable method.

(3) Characterization of residual gain as passive income. For purposes of section 1297(a)(1), section 1298(b)(3), and § 1.1298-2, the residual gain from the direct or indirect disposition of stock of a look-through subsidiary is characterized as passive income or non-passive income based on the relative amounts of passive assets and non-passive assets (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(5) and (3), respectively) of the disposed-of look-through subsidiary (and any other look-through subsidiary to the extent owned indirectly through the look-through subsidiary) treated as held by the tested foreign corporation on the date of the disposition of the look-through subsidiary. For the purpose of this paragraph (f)(3), the relative amounts of passive assets and non-passive assets held by the look-through subsidiary are measured under the same method (value or adjusted bases) used to measure the assets of the tested foreign corporation for purposes of section 1297(a)(2).

(4) Gain taken into account from disposition of 25%-owned partnerships and look-through partnerships

(i) Section 954(c)(4) partnerships. The amount of gain derived from a tested foreign corporation's direct or indirect (through a look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership) disposition of partnership interests in a partnership described in section 954(c)(4) (treating the tested foreign corporation as if it were a controlled foreign corporation) that is taken into account by the tested foreign corporation for purposes of section 1297(a)(1), section 1298(b)(3), and § 1.1298-2 is determined under section 954(c)(4).

(ii) Look-through partnerships. In the case of a look-through partnership that is not described in paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section, the principles of paragraphs (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section apply to determine the amount and characterization of gain derived from a tested foreign corporation's direct or indirect (through a look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership) disposition of partnership interests of the look-through partnership that is taken into account by the tested foreign corporation for purposes of section 1297(a)(1), section 1298(b)(3), and § 1.1298-2.

(5) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (f). For purposes of the examples in this paragraph (f)(5), USP is a domestic corporation, TFC and FS are foreign corporations that are not controlled foreign corporations within the meaning of section 957(a), and USP, TFC, and FS each has a single class of stock with 100 shares outstanding and a calendar taxable year.

(i) Example 1

(A) Facts. USP owned 30% of the outstanding stock of TFC throughout Years 1, 2, 3, and 4. In Year 1, TFC purchased 5 shares of FS stock, representing 5% of the stock of FS, from an unrelated person. On the first day of Year 3, TFC purchased 20 shares of FS stock, representing 20% of the stock of FS, from an unrelated person. TFC owned 25% of the outstanding stock of FS throughout Years 3 and 4. Before Year 3, TFC did not include any amount in income with respect to FS under section 1297(c)(2). During Years 3 and 4, for purposes of section 1297(a)(1), TFC included in income, in the aggregate, $40x of income with respect to FS under section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) of this section. TFC did not receive dividends from FS during Year 1, 2, 3, or 4. For purposes of section 1297(a)(2), TFC measures its assets based on their fair market value as provided under section 1297(e). On the last day of Year 4, TFC recognizes a loss with respect to the sale of 5 shares of FS stock, and a $110x gain with respect to the sale of 20 shares of FS stock. On the date of the sale, FS owns non-passive assets with an aggregate fair market value of $150x, and passive assets with an aggregate fair market value of $50x.

(B) Results. For purposes of applying section 1297(a)(1) to TFC for Year 4, TFC must take into account $78x of residual gain, as provided by paragraph (f)(2) of this section, which equals the amount by which the $110x gain recognized on the sale of 20 shares in FS exceeds the aggregate pro rata share of $32x income ($40x × 20/25) taken into account by TFC with respect to the 20 shares in FS under section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) of this section during Years 3 and 4. There is zero residual gain on the sale of 5 shares of FS stock because they were sold at a loss. Under paragraph (f)(3) of this section, $58.50x of the residual gain is non-passive income ($78x × ($150x/$200x)) and $19.50x is passive income ($78x × ($50x/$200x)).

(ii) Example 2

(A) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (f)(5)(i)(A) of this section (the facts in Example 1), except that in Year 1, TFC purchased 15 shares of FS stock, representing 15% of the stock of FS, from an unrelated person, and on the first day of Year 3, TFC purchased an additional 15 shares of FS stock, representing 15% of the stock of FS, from an unrelated person, and on the last day of Year 4, TFC recognizes gain of $10x of the sale of 15 shares of FS stock purchased in Year 1, and gain of $60x on the sale of the other 15 shares of FS stock purchased in Year 3.

(B) Results. For purposes of applying section 1297(a)(1) to TFC for Year 4, TFC must take into account $40x of residual gain with respect to the 15 shares acquired in Year 3, as provided by paragraph (f)(2) of this section, which equals the amount by which the $60x gain recognized on the sale of those 15 shares exceeds the aggregate pro rata share of $20x income ($40x × 15/30) taken into account by TFC with respect to those 15 shares in FS under section 1297(c)(2) during Years 3 and 4. There is zero residual gain on the sale of the 15 shares of FS stock acquired in Year 1 because the $10x of gain does not exceed the aggregate pro rata share of $20x income taken into account by TFC with respect to those 15 shares of FS under section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) of this section. Under paragraph (f)(3) of this section, $30x of the residual gain is non-passive income ($40x × ($150x/$200x)) and $10x is passive income ($40x × ($50x/$200x)).

(iii) Example 3

(A) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (f)(5)(ii)(A) of this section (the facts in Example 2), except that TFC received, in the aggregate, $20x of dividends from FS during Year 2.

(B) Results. The results are the same as in paragraph (f)(5)(ii)(B) of this section (the results in Example 2) with respect to the 15 shares acquired in Year 3 ($40x of residual gain attributable to the 15 shares acquired in Year 3). For purposes of applying section 1297(a)(1) to TFC for Year 4, TFC must also take into account $10x of residual gain with respect to the 15 shares acquired in Year 1. As provided by paragraph (f)(2) of this section, the residual gain equals the amount by which the $10x gain recognized on the sale of those 15 shares exceeds the unremitted earnings with respect to those shares. The unremitted earnings with respect to the 15 shares acquired in Year 1 are $0x, the amount by which the pro rata share of aggregate income ($20x) taken into account by TFC with respect to those 15 shares of FS stock under section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) of this section in Years 3 and 4 exceeds the aggregate pro rata amount of dividends with respect to those 15 shares of FS stock ($20x) received by TFC from FS in Year 2. Total residual gain therefore is $50x ($40x + $10x). Under paragraph (f)(3) of this section, $37.50x of the residual gain is non-passive income ($50x × ($150x/$200x)) and $12.50x is passive income ($50x × ($50x/$200x)).

(g) Definitions. The following definitions apply for purposes of § 1.1297-1 and this section:

(1) Direct LTS obligation. The term direct LTS obligation has the meaning provided in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section.

(2) Indirect LTS obligation. The term indirect LTS obligation has the meaning provided in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section.

(3) Look-through subsidiary. The term look-through subsidiary means, with respect to a tested foreign corporation, a corporation as to which the asset test of paragraph (g)(3)(i) and the income test of paragraph (g)(3)(ii) of this section are satisfied on each measuring date during the taxable year of a tested foreign corporation. If a corporation satisfies both the asset test of paragraph (g)(3)(i) and the income test of paragraph (g)(3)(ii)(B) for some but not all measuring periods within the taxable year of a tested foreign corporation, the subsidiary is treated as a look-through subsidiary only for those measuring periods in which both tests are satisfied.

(i) For purposes of section 1297(a)(2) and paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section, a corporation at least 25 percent of the value of the stock of which is owned (as determined under paragraph (b)(1) of this section) by the tested foreign corporation on the measuring date (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(1));

(ii) For purposes of section 1297(a)(1), either—

(A) For the taxable year, a corporation with respect to which the average percentage ownership (which is equal to the percentage ownership (by value) (as determined under paragraph (b)(1) of this section) on each measuring date during the taxable year, divided by the number of measuring dates in the year) by the tested foreign corporation during the tested foreign corporation's taxable year is at least 25 percent; or

(B) For a measuring period (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(2)), a corporation at least 25 percent of the value of the stock of which is owned (as determined under paragraph (b)(1) of this section) by the tested foreign corporation on the measuring date, provided all items of gross income of the corporation for each of the measuring periods in the taxable year for which the tested foreign corporation owns at least 25 percent of the value (as determined under paragraph (b)(1) of this section) on the relevant measuring dates can be established; and

(iii) For purposes of paragraph (f) of this section and § 1.1298-2, a corporation at least 25 percent of the value of the stock of which is owned (as determined under paragraph (b)(1) of this section) by the tested foreign corporation immediately before the disposition of stock of the corporation.

(4) Look-through partnership

(i) In general. The term look-through partnership means, with respect to a tested foreign corporation—

(A) A partnership that would be a look-through subsidiary (as defined in paragraph (g)(3) of this section) if such partnership were a corporation; or

(B) A partnership that is not described in paragraph (g)(4)(i)(A) of this section, if the tested foreign corporation satisfies both of the active partner tests set forth in paragraphs (g)(4)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section on the measurement date or for the taxable year, as applicable, unless an election is made under paragraph (g)(4)(iii) of this section.

(ii) Active partner test

(A) Partnership interest under asset test. For purposes of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section, paragraph (g)(4)(i)(B) of this section applies for the measuring period only if the tested foreign corporation would not be a PFIC if section 1297(a)(1) and (2) and the regulations thereunder were applied to the tested foreign corporation without regard to any partnership interest owned by the tested foreign corporation that is not a partnership described in paragraph (g)(4)(i)(A) of this section. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the active partner test is applied on the measurement date (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(1)).

(B) Partnership income under income test. For purposes of paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section, paragraph (g)(4)(i)(B) of this section applies for the taxable year of the tested foreign corporation or for a measuring period (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(2)), as applicable, only if the tested foreign corporation would not be a PFIC if section 1297(a)(1) and (2) and the regulations thereunder were applied to the tested foreign corporation without regard to any partnership interest owned by the tested foreign corporation that is not a partnership described in paragraph (g)(4)(i)(A) of this section. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the active partner test is applied on the measuring date (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(1)) or for the taxable year, as applicable using the same period that was used under paragraph (g)(3)(ii) of this section.

(iii) Election. For any taxable year, an election may be made with respect to a partnership described in paragraph (g)(4)(i)(B) of this section to not apply the provisions of this paragraph (g)(4) to such partnership.

(iv) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (g)(4). For purposes of the examples in this paragraph (g)(4)(iv), TFC is a foreign corporation that is not a controlled foreign corporation; FC1 and FC2 are foreign corporations that are not controlled foreign corporations; FPS is a foreign partnership; TFC owns 100% of the single class of stock of FC1 and FC2; FC2 owns 10% of the value of FPS, and the remaining 90% of FPS is owned by an unrelated foreign person; and TFC, FC1, FC2, and FPS are all calendar year taxpayers.

(A) Example 1

(1) Facts. During Year 1, FC1 generated $100x of non-passive income, FC2 generated $150x of non-passive income, and FPS generated $50x of income. On all of the measurement dates in Year 1, FC1 has assets with a value of $1000x that FC1 uses in its trade or business generating non-passive income, FC2 has assets with a value of $1500x that FC2 uses in its trade or business generating non-passive income, and FPS has assets with a value of $500x.

(2) Results

(i) Active partner test with respect to partnership interest. Pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2), TFC is treated as holding directly the assets held by FC1 and FC2. For purposes of the active partner test under paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) of this section, TFC does not take into account its interest in FPS to determine whether it would be a PFIC. Because 100% ($2500x/$2500x) of the assets of FC1 and FC2 that TFC is treated as directly holding, without taking into account the interest in FPS, generates non-passive income, TFC satisfies the active partner test in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) of this section.

(ii) Active partner test with respect to partnership income. Pursuant to section 1297(c) and paragraph (b)(2) of this section, TFC is treated as if it received directly its proportionate share of income of FC1 and FC2. For purposes of the active partner test under paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(A) of this section, TFC does not take into account its interest in FPS to determine whether it would be a PFIC. Because 100% ($250x/$250x) of the income of FC1 and FC2 that TFC is treated as directly receiving, without taking into account the interest in FPS, is non-passive income, TFC satisfies the active partner test in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(A) of this section with respect to the income of FPS.

(iii) Qualification of look-through partnership. For purposes of paragraph (b)(3) of this section, FPS qualifies as a look-through partnership because TFC satisfies the active partner tests of both paragraphs (g)(4)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section. Unless an election is made not to treat FPS as a look-through partnership under paragraph (g)(4)(iii) of this section, TFC is treated as receiving directly $5x of income (10% × $50x), TFC's pro rata share of the income of FPS, the character of which is determined at the level of FPS for purposes of section 1297. In addition, TFC is treated as holding directly $50x of FPS's assets (10% × $500x), TFC's proportionate share of the assets held by FPS. The character of those assets as passive or non-passive is determined in the hands of FPS for purposes of section 1297.

(B) Example 2

(1) Facts. During Year 1, FC1 generated $50x of passive income, FC2 earned $175x of non-passive income, and FPS generated $50x of income. On all of the measurement dates in Year 1, FC1 has assets with a value of $1100x that produce passive income, and FC2 has assets with a value of $900x that FC2 uses in its trade or business generating non-passive income. The value of FPS is $1000x taking into account its assets and liabilities.

(2) Results

(i) Active partner test with respect to partnership interest. Pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2), TFC is treated as holding directly the assets held by FC1 and FC2. For purposes of the active partner test under paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) of this section, TFC does not take into account its interest in FPS to determine whether it would be a PFIC. Accordingly, 55% ($1100x/$2000x) of the assets that TFC is treated as directly holding, without taking into account the interest in FPS, generate passive income.

(ii) Active partner test with respect to partnership income. Pursuant to section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2), TFC is treated as if it received directly its proportionate share of income of FC1 and FC2. For purposes of the active partner test under paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(A) of this section, TFC does not take into account its interest in FPS to determine whether it would be a PFIC. Accordingly, 77.8% ($175x/$225x) of the income that TFC is treated as directly receiving, without taking into account the interest in FPS, is non-passive income.

(iii) Failure to qualify as look-through partnership. TFC satisfies the active partner test in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(A) of this section but does not satisfy the active partner test in paragraph (g)(4)(ii) (B) of this section. Therefore, FPS does not qualify as a look-though partnership. Under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section, TFC's share of income with respect to FPS is treated as passive income for purposes of section 1297 and TFC's $100x interest (10% × $1000x) in FPS is treated as a passive asset for purposes of section 1297.

(5) LTS debt. The term LTS debt has the meaning provided in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section.

(6) LTS lease. The term LTS lease has the meaning provided in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section.

(7) LTS license. The term LTS license has the meaning provided in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section.

(8) LTS obligation. The term LTS obligation has the meaning provided in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section.

(9) LTS stock. The term LTS stock has the meaning provided in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section.

(10) Qualified affiliate. The term qualified affiliate has the meaning provided in paragraph (e)(2) of this section.

(11) Residual gain. The term residual gain has the meaning provided in paragraph (f)(2) of this section.

(12) TFC obligation. The term TFC obligation has the meaning provided in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section.

(13) Unremitted earnings. The term unremitted earnings has the meaning provided in paragraph (f)(2) of this section.

(h) Applicability date. The rules of this section apply to taxable years of shareholders beginning on or after January 14, 2021. A shareholder may choose to apply such rules for any open taxable year beginning before January 14, 2021, provided that, with respect to a tested foreign corporation, the shareholder consistently applies the provisions of § 1.1291-1(b)(8)(iv) and (b)(8)(v)(A), (B), (C), and (D) and §§ 1.1297-1 (except that consistent treatment is not required with respect to § 1.1297-1(c)(1)(i)(A)), 1.1298-2, and 1.1298-4 for such year and all subsequent years.

[T.D. 9936, 86 FR 4557, Jan. 15, 2021, as amended at 86 FR 13648, Mar. 10, 2021]

§ 1.1297-3 Deemed sale or deemed dividend election by a U.S. person that is a shareholder of a section 1297(e) PFIC.

(a) In general. A shareholder (as defined in § 1.1291-9(j)(3)) of a foreign corporation that is a section 1297(e) passive foreign investment company (PFIC) (as defined in § 1.1291-9(j)(2)(v)) with respect to such shareholder, shall be treated for tax purposes as holding stock in a PFIC and therefore continues to be subject to taxation under section 1291 unless the shareholder makes a purging election under section 1298(b)(1). A purging election under section 1298(b)(1) is made under rules similar to the rules of section 1291(d)(2). Section 1291(d)(2) allows a shareholder to purge the continuing PFIC taint by either making a deemed sale election or a deemed dividend election.

(b) Application of deemed sale election rules

(1) Eligibility to make the deemed sale election. A shareholder of a foreign corporation that is a section 1297(e) PFIC with respect to such shareholder may make a deemed sale election under section 1298(b)(1) by applying the rules of this paragraph (b).

(2) Effect of the deemed sale election. A shareholder making the deemed sale election with respect to a section 1297(e) PFIC shall be treated as having sold all of its stock in the section 1297(e) PFIC for its fair market value on the controlled foreign corporation (CFC) qualification date, as defined in paragraph (d) of this section. A deemed sale under this section is treated as a disposition subject to taxation under section 1291. Thus, the gain from the deemed sale is taxed as an excess distribution received on the CFC qualification date. In the case of an election made by an indirect shareholder, the amount of gain to be recognized and taxed as an excess distribution is the amount of gain that the direct owner of the stock of the PFIC would have realized on an actual sale or disposition of the stock of the PFIC indirectly owned by the shareholder. Any loss realized on the deemed sale is not recognized. After the deemed sale election, the shareholder's stock with respect to which the election was made under this paragraph (b) shall not be treated as stock in a PFIC and the shareholder shall not be subject to taxation under section 1291 with respect to such stock unless the qualified portion of the shareholder's holding period ends, as determined under section 1297(e)(2), and the foreign corporation thereafter qualifies as a PFIC under section 1297(a).

(3) Time for making the deemed sale election. Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, a shareholder shall make the deemed sale election under this paragraph (b) and section 1298(b)(1) in the shareholder's original or amended return for the taxable year that includes the CFC qualification date (election year). If the deemed sale election is made in an amended return, the return must be filed by a date that is within three years of the due date, as extended under section 6081, of the original return for the election year.

(4) Manner of making the deemed sale election. A shareholder makes the deemed sale election under this paragraph (b) by filing Form 8621, “Return by a Shareholder of a Passive Foreign Investment Company or Qualified Electing Fund”, with the return of the shareholder for the election year, reporting the gain as an excess distribution pursuant to section 1291(a) as if such sale occurred under section 1291(d)(2), and paying the tax and interest due on the excess distribution. A shareholder that makes the deemed sale election after the due date of the return (determined without regard to extensions) for the election year must pay additional interest, pursuant to section 6601, on the amount of underpayment of tax for that year. An electing shareholder that realizes a loss shall report the loss on Form 8621, but shall not recognize the loss.

(5) Adjustments to basis. A shareholder that makes the deemed sale election increases its adjusted basis of the PFIC stock owned directly by the amount of gain recognized on the deemed sale. If the shareholder makes the deemed sale election with respect to a PFIC of which it is an indirect shareholder, the shareholder's adjusted basis of the stock or other property owned directly by the shareholder, through which ownership of the PFIC is attributed to the shareholder, is increased by the amount of gain recognized by the shareholder. In addition, solely for purposes of determining the subsequent treatment under the Internal Revenue Code (Code) and regulations of a shareholder of the stock of the PFIC, the adjusted basis of the direct owner of the stock of the PFIC is increased by the amount of gain recognized on the deemed sale. A shareholder shall not adjust the basis of any stock with respect to which the shareholder realized a loss on the deemed sale, which loss is not recognized under paragraph (b)(2) of this section.

(6) Treatment of holding period. If a shareholder of a foreign corporation has made a deemed sale election, then, for purposes of applying sections 1291 through 1298 to such shareholder after the deemed sale, the shareholder's holding period in the stock of the foreign corporation begins on the CFC qualification date, without regard to whether the shareholder recognized gain on the deemed sale. For other purposes of the Code and regulations, this holding period rule does not apply.

(c) Application of deemed dividend election rules

(1) Eligibility to make the deemed dividend election. A shareholder of a foreign corporation that is a section 1297(e) PFIC with respect to such shareholder may make the deemed dividend election under the rules of this paragraph (c). A deemed dividend election may be made by a shareholder whose pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC attributable to the PFIC stock held on the CFC qualification date is zero.

(2) Effect of the deemed dividend election. A shareholder making the deemed dividend election with respect to a section 1297(e) PFIC shall include in income as a dividend its pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC attributable to all of the stock it held, directly or indirectly on the CFC qualification date, as defined in paragraph (d) of this section. The deemed dividend is taxed under section 1291 as an excess distribution received on the CFC qualification date. The excess distribution determined under this paragraph (c) is allocated under section 1291(a)(1)(A) only to each day of the shareholder's holding period of the stock during which the foreign corporation qualified as a PFIC. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the shareholder's holding period of the PFIC stock ends on the day before the CFC qualification date. After the deemed dividend election, the shareholder's stock with respect to which the election was made under this paragraph (c) shall not be treated as stock in a PFIC and the shareholder shall not be subject to taxation under section 1291 with respect to such stock unless the qualified portion of the shareholder's holding period ends, as determined under section 1297(e)(2), and the foreign corporation thereafter qualifies as a PFIC under section 1297(a).

(3) Post-1986 earnings and profits defined

(i) In general

(A) General rule. For purposes of this section, the term post-1986 earnings and profits means the post-1986 undistributed earnings, within the meaning of section 902(c)(1) (determined without regard to section 902(c)(3)), as of the day before the CFC qualification date, that were accumulated and not distributed in taxable years of the PFIC beginning after 1986 and during which it was a PFIC, without regard to whether the earnings related to a period during which the PFIC was a CFC.

(B) Special rule. If the CFC qualification date is a day that is after the first day of the taxable year, the term post-1986 earnings and profits means the post-1986 undistributed earnings, within the meaning of section 902(c)(1) (determined without regard to section 902(c)(3)), as of the close of the taxable year that includes the CFC qualification date. For purposes of this computation, only earnings and profits accumulated in taxable years during which the foreign corporation was a PFIC shall be taken into account, but without regard to whether the earnings related to a period during which the PFIC was a CFC.

(ii) Pro rata share of post-1986 earnings and profits attributable to shareholder's stock

(A) In general. A shareholder's pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC attributable to the stock held by the shareholder on the CFC qualification date is the amount of post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC accumulated during any portion of the shareholder's holding period ending at the close of the day before the CFC qualification date and attributable, under the principles of section 1248 and the regulations under that section, to the PFIC stock held on the CFC qualification date.

(B) Reduction for previously taxed amounts. A shareholder's pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC does not include any amount that the shareholder demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Commissioner (in the manner provided in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section) was, pursuant to another provision of the law, previously included in the income of the shareholder, or of another U.S. person if the shareholder's holding period of the PFIC stock includes the period during which the stock was held by that other U.S. person.

(4) Time for making the deemed dividend election. Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, the shareholder shall make the deemed dividend election under this paragraph (c) and section 1298(b)(1) in the shareholder's original or amended return for the taxable year that includes the CFC qualification date (election year). If the deemed dividend election is made in an amended return, the return must be filed by a date that is within three years of the due date, as extended under section 6081, of the original return for the election year.

(5) Manner of making the deemed dividend election

(i) In general. A shareholder makes the deemed dividend election by filing Form 8621 and the attachment to Form 8621 described in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section with the return of the shareholder for the election year, reporting the deemed dividend as an excess distribution pursuant to section 1291(a)(1), and paying the tax and interest due on the excess distribution. A shareholder that makes the deemed dividend election after the due date of the return (determined without regard to extensions) for the election year must pay additional interest, pursuant to section 6601, on the amount of underpayment of tax for that year.

(ii) Attachment to Form 8621. The shareholder must attach a schedule to Form 8621 that demonstrates the calculation of the shareholder's pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC that is treated as distributed to the shareholder on the CFC qualification date, pursuant to this paragraph (c). If the shareholder is claiming an exclusion from its pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits for an amount previously included in its income or the income of another U.S. person, the shareholder must include the following information:

(A) The name, address and taxpayer identification number of each U.S. person that previously included an amount in income, the amount previously included in income by each such U.S. person, the provision of law, pursuant to which the amount was previously included in income, and the taxable year or years of inclusion of each amount.

(B) A description of the transaction pursuant to which the shareholder acquired, directly or indirectly, the stock of the PFIC from another U.S. person, and the provision of law pursuant to which the shareholder's holding period includes the period the other U.S. person held the CFC stock.

(6) Adjustments to basis. A shareholder that makes the deemed dividend election increases its adjusted basis of the stock of the PFIC owned directly by the shareholder by the amount of the deemed dividend. If the shareholder makes the deemed dividend election with respect to a PFIC of which it is an indirect shareholder, the shareholder's adjusted basis of the stock or other property owned directly by the shareholder, through which ownership of the PFIC is attributed to the shareholder, is increased by the amount of the deemed dividend. In addition, solely for purposes of determining the subsequent treatment under the Code and regulations of a shareholder of the stock of the PFIC, the adjusted basis of the direct owner of the stock of the PFIC is increased by the amount of the deemed dividend.

(7) Treatment of holding period. If the shareholder of a foreign corporation has made a deemed dividend election, then, for purposes of applying sections 1291 through 1298 to such shareholder after the deemed dividend, the shareholder's holding period of the stock of the foreign corporation begins on the CFC qualification date. For other purposes of the Code and regulations, this holding period rule does not apply.

(8) Coordination with section 959(e). For purposes of section 959(e), the entire deemed dividend is treated as having been included in gross income under section 1248(a).

(d) CFC qualification date. For purposes of this section, the CFC qualification date is the first day on which the qualified portion of the shareholder's holding period in the section 1297(e) PFIC begins, as determined under section 1297(e).

(e) Late purging elections requiring special consent

(1) In general. This section prescribes the exclusive rules under which a shareholder of a section 1297(e) PFIC may make a section 1298(b)(1) election after the time prescribed in paragraph (b)(3) or (c)(4) of this section for making a deemed sale or a deemed dividend election has elapsed (late purging election). Therefore, a shareholder may not seek such relief under any other provisions of the law, including § 301.9100-3 of this chapter. A shareholder may request the consent of the Commissioner to make a late deemed sale or deemed dividend election for the taxable year of the shareholder that includes the CFC qualification date provided the shareholder satisfies the requirements set forth in this paragraph (e). The Commissioner may, in his discretion, grant relief under this paragraph (e) only if—

(i) In a case where the shareholder is requesting consent under this paragraph (e) after December 31, 2005, the shareholder requests such consent before a representative of the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) raises upon audit the PFIC status of the foreign corporation for any taxable year of the shareholder;

(ii) The shareholder has agreed in a closing agreement with the Commissioner, described in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, to eliminate any prejudice to the interests of the U.S. government, as determined under paragraph (e)(2) of this section, as a consequence of the shareholder's inability to file amended returns for its taxable year in which the CFC qualification date falls or an earlier closed taxable year in which the shareholder has taken a position that is inconsistent with the treatment of the foreign corporation as a PFIC; and

(iii) The shareholder satisfies the procedural requirements set forth in paragraph (e)(3) of this section.

(2) Prejudice to the interests of the U.S. government. The interests of the U.S. government are prejudiced if granting relief would result in the shareholder having a lower tax liability (other than by a de minimis amount), taking into account applicable interest charges, for the taxable year that includes the CFC qualification date (or a prior taxable year in which the taxpayer took a position on a return that was inconsistent with the treatment of the foreign corporation as a PFIC) than the shareholder would have had if the shareholder had properly made the section 1298(b)(1) election in the time prescribed in paragraph (b)(2) or (c)(3) of this section (or had not taken a position in a return for an earlier year that was inconsistent with the status of the foreign corporation as a PFIC). The time value of money is taken into account for purposes of this computation.

(3) Procedural requirements

(i) In general. The amount due with respect to a late purging election is determined in the same manner as if the purging election had been timely filed. However, the shareholder is also liable for interest on the amount due, pursuant to section 6601, determined for the period beginning on the due date (without extensions) for the taxpayer's income tax return for the year in which the CFC qualification date falls and ending on the date the late purging election is filed with the IRS.

(ii) Filing instructions. A late purging election is made by filing a completed Form 8621-A, “Return by a Shareholder Making Certain Late Elections to End Treatment as a Passive Foreign Investment Company.”

(4) Time and manner of making late election

(i) Time for making a late purging election. A shareholder may make a late purging election in the manner provided in paragraph (e)(4)(ii) of this section at any time. The date the election is filed with the IRS will determine the amount of interest due under paragraph (e)(3) of this section.

(ii) Manner of making a late purging election. A shareholder makes a late purging election by completing Form 8621-A in the manner required by that form and this section and filing that form with the Internal Revenue Service, DP 8621-A, Ogden, UT 84201.

(5) Multiple late elections

(i) General rule. A shareholder of a foreign corporation may make multiple late purging elections under the rules of this paragraph (e) or § 1.1298-3(e) to the same extent such multiple purging elections could have been made if those purging elections had been filed within the time prescribed under paragraph (b)(3) or (c)(4) of this section or § 1.1298-3(b)(3) or (c)(4).

(ii) Example. The rule of this paragraph (e)(5) is illustrated by the following example:

Example.

(i) In 1991, X, a U.S. person, acquired a five percent interest in the stock of FC, a controlled foreign corporation, as defined in section 957(a). In years 1991, 1992, 1995, 1996 and 1997, FC satisfied either the income test or the asset test of section 1297(a). X did not make a QEF election with regard to FC. In years 1993 and 1994, FC did not satisfy either the income or the asset test of section 1297(a). In 1998, X acquired additional stock in FC such that X was a U.S. shareholder (as defined in section 951(b)) of FC.

(ii) Because FC qualified as a PFIC in 1991, FC will be treated as a PFIC with respect to all of the stock held by X, under the “once a PFIC always a PFIC” rule of section 1298(b)(1), unless X makes an election to purge the PFIC taint. Because X ceased to satisfy either the income or asset test in 1993, X could have made an election under § 1.1298-3 to purge the PFIC taint of FC for that year if X had filed such an election within the time prescribed under § 1.1298-3(b)(3) or (c)(4). If X had done so, the stock X held in FC would not be treated as stock in a PFIC for the years 1993 and 1994. Because X became a U.S. shareholder of FC in 1998, X then could have made a deemed sale or deemed dividend election under this section to purge the PFIC taint of FC for the years 1995 through 1997 if X had filed within the time prescribed under paragraph (b)(3) or (c)(4) of this section. Accordingly, X may make a late purging election to purge the PFIC taint of FC for the years 1991 and 1992 under the rules of § 1.1298-3(e) and may also make a late purging election to purge the PFIC taint of FC for the years 1995 through 1997 under the rules of this paragraph (e).

(f) Effective/applicability date. The rules of this section are applicable as of December 8, 2005.

[T.D. 9360, 72 FR 54821, Sept. 27, 2007, as amended at 72 FR 58758, Oct. 17, 2007]

§ 1.1297-4 Qualifying insurance corporation.

(a) Scope. This section provides rules for determining whether a foreign corporation is a qualifying insurance corporation for purposes of section 1297(f). Paragraph (b) of this section provides the general rule for determining whether a foreign corporation is a qualifying insurance corporation. Paragraph (c) of this section describes the 25 percent test in section 1297(f)(1)(B). Paragraph (d) of this section contains rules for applying the alternative facts and circumstances test in section 1297(f)(2). Paragraph (e) of this section contains rules limiting the amount of applicable insurance liabilities for purposes of the 25 percent test described in paragraph (c) of this section and the alternative facts and circumstances test described in paragraph (d) of this section. Paragraph (f) of this section provides definitions that apply for purposes of this section. Paragraph (g) of this section provides the applicability date of this section.

(b) Qualifying insurance corporation. For purposes of section 1297(b)(2)(B), this section, and §§ 1.1297-5 and 1.1297-6, with respect to a U.S. person, a qualifying insurance corporation (QIC) is a foreign corporation that—

(1) Is an insurance company as defined in section 816(a) that would be subject to tax under subchapter L if the corporation were a domestic corporation; and

(2) Satisfies—

(i) The 25 percent test described in paragraph (c) of this section; or

(ii) The requirements for an election to apply the alternative facts and circumstances test as described in paragraph (d) of this section and a United States person has made an election as described in paragraph (d)(5) of this section.

(c) 25 percent test. A foreign corporation satisfies the 25 percent test if the amount of its applicable insurance liabilities exceeds 25 percent of its total assets. This determination is made on the basis of the applicable insurance liabilities and total assets reported on the corporation's applicable financial statement for the applicable reporting period.

(d) Election to apply the alternative facts and circumstances test

(1) In general. A United States person that owns stock in a foreign corporation that fails to qualify as a QIC solely because of the 25 percent test may elect to treat the stock of the corporation as stock of a QIC if the foreign corporation—

(i) Is predominantly engaged in an insurance business as described in paragraph (d)(2) of this section;

(ii) Failed to satisfy the 25 percent test solely due to runoff-related circumstances, as described in paragraph (d)(3) of this section, or rating-related circumstances, as described in paragraph (d)(4) of this section; and

(iii) Reports an amount of applicable insurance liabilities that is at least 10 percent of the amount of the total assets on the corporation's applicable financial statement for the applicable reporting period.

(2) Predominantly engaged in an insurance business

(i) In general. A foreign corporation is not considered predominantly engaged in an insurance business in any taxable year unless more than half of the business of the foreign corporation is the issuing of insurance or annuity contracts or the reinsuring of risks underwritten by insurance companies. This determination is made based on the character of the business actually conducted in the taxable year. The fact that a foreign corporation has been holding itself out as an insurer for a long period is not determinative of whether the foreign corporation is predominantly engaged in an insurance business.

(ii) Facts and circumstances. Facts and circumstances to consider in determining whether a foreign corporation is predominantly engaged in an insurance business include (but are not limited to)—

(A) Claims payment patterns for the current year and prior years;

(B) The foreign corporation's loss exposure as calculated for a regulator or for a credit rating agency, or, if those are not calculated, for internal pricing purposes;

(C) The percentage of gross receipts constituting premiums for the current and prior years; and

(D) The number and size of insurance contracts issued or taken on through reinsurance by the foreign corporation.

(iii) Examples of facts indicating a foreign corporation is not predominantly engaged in an insurance business. Examples of facts that may indicate a foreign corporation is not predominantly engaged in an insurance business include (but are not limited to)—

(A) A small overall number of insured risks with low likelihood but large potential costs;

(B) Employees and agents of the foreign corporation focused to a greater degree on investment activities than underwriting activities; and

(C) Low loss exposure.

(3) Runoff-related circumstances. During the annual reporting period covered by the applicable financial statement, a foreign corporation fails to satisfy the 25 percent test solely due to runoff-related circumstances only if the corporation—

(i) Was engaged in the process of terminating its pre-existing, active conduct of an insurance business (within the meaning of section 1297(b)(2)(B)) under the supervision of its applicable insurance regulatory body or pursuant to any court-ordered receivership proceeding (liquidation, rehabilitation, or conservation) and fails to satisfy the 25 percent test because the corporation is required to hold additional assets due to its business being in runoff;

(ii) Has no plan or intention to enter into, and did not issue or enter into, any insurance, annuity, or reinsurance contract, other than a contractually obligated renewal of an existing insurance contract or a reinsurance contract pursuant to and consistent with the termination of its active conduct of an insurance business; and

(iii) Made payments during the annual reporting period covered by the applicable financial statement as required to satisfy claims under insurance, annuity, or reinsurance contracts.

(4) Rating-related circumstances. A foreign corporation fails to satisfy the 25 percent test solely due to rating-related circumstances only if—

(i) The 25 percent test is not met due to capital and surplus amounts that a generally recognized credit rating agency considers necessary for the foreign corporation to obtain a public rating with respect to its financial strength, and the foreign corporation maintains such capital and surplus in order to obtain the minimum credit rating necessary for the annual reporting period by the foreign corporation to be able to write the business in its regulatory or board supervised business plan. This paragraph (c)(4)(i) applies only if the foreign corporation is a mortgage insurance company (as defined in paragraph (f)(10) of this section) or if more than half of the foreign corporation's net written premiums for the annual reporting period (or the average of the net written premiums for the foreign corporation's annual reporting period and the two immediately preceding annual reporting periods) are from insurance coverage against the risk of loss from a catastrophic loss event (that is, a low frequency but high severity loss event); or

(ii) The foreign corporation is a financial guaranty insurance company (as defined in paragraph (f)(5) of this section).

(5) Election

(i) In general. A United States person may make the election under section 1297(f)(2) for its taxable year if the foreign corporation directly provides the United States person a statement, signed by a responsible officer of the foreign corporation or an authorized representative of the foreign corporation, or the foreign corporation (or its foreign parent corporation on its behalf) makes a publicly available statement (such as in a public filing, disclosure statement, or other notice provided to United States persons that are shareholders of the foreign corporation) that it satisfied the requirements of section 1297(f)(2) and paragraph (d)(1) of this section during the foreign corporation's applicable reporting period. However, a United States person may not rely upon any statement by the foreign corporation (or its foreign parent corporation) to make the election under section 1297(f)(2) if the shareholder knows or has reason to know based on reasonably accessible information that the statement made by the foreign corporation (or its foreign parent corporation) was incorrect.

(ii) Information provided by foreign corporation. In addition to a statement that the foreign corporation satisfied the requirements of section 1297(f)(2) and paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the statement described in paragraph (d)(5)(i) of this section also must include:

(A) The ratio of applicable insurance liabilities to total assets for the applicable reporting period; and

(B) A statement indicating whether the failure to satisfy the 25 percent test described in paragraph (c) of this section was the result of runoff-related or rating-related circumstances, along with a brief description of those circumstances.

(iii) Time and manner for making the election. Except as provided in paragraph (d)(5)(iv), the election described in paragraph (d)(1) of this section may be made by a United States person who owns stock in the foreign corporation by completing the appropriate part of Form 8621 (or successor form) for each taxable year of the United States person in which the election applies. A United States person must attach the Form 8621 (or successor form) to its original or amended Federal income tax return for the taxable year of the United States person to which the election relates. A United States person can attach the Form 8621 (or successor form) to an amended return for the taxable year of the United States person to which the election relates if the United States person can demonstrate the reason for not filing the form with its original return was due to reasonable cause.

(iv) Deemed election for small shareholders in publicly traded companies

(A) In general. A United States person who owns publicly traded stock in a foreign corporation will be deemed to make the election under section 1297(f)(2) with respect to the foreign corporation and its subsidiaries if the following requirements are satisfied:

(1) The stock of the foreign corporation that is owned by the United States person (including stock owned indirectly) has a value of $25,000 or less ($50,000 or less in the case of a joint return) on the last day of the United States person's taxable year and on any day during the taxable year on which the United States person disposes of stock of the foreign corporation; and

(2) If the United States person owns stock of the foreign corporation indirectly through a domestic partnership, domestic trust, domestic estate, or S corporation (a domestic pass-through entity), the stock of the foreign corporation that is owned by the domestic pass-through entity has a value of $25,000 or less on the last day of the taxable year of the domestic pass-through entity that ends with or within the United States person's taxable year and on any day during the taxable year of the domestic pass-through entity on which it disposes of stock of the foreign corporation.

(B) Publicly traded stock. For the purpose of paragraph (d)(5)(iv)(A) of this section, stock is publicly traded if it would be treated as marketable stock within the meaning of section 1296(e) and § 1.1296-2 (without regard to § 1.1296-2(d)) if the election under section 1297(f)(2) is not made.

(v) Options. If a United States person is considered to own stock in a foreign corporation by reason of holding an option, the United States person may make the election under section 1297(f)(2) (or may be deemed to make an election under paragraph (d)(5)(iv) of this section) with respect to the foreign corporation or its subsidiaries in the same manner as if the United States person owned stock in the foreign corporation.

(6) Stock ownership. For purposes of this section, ownership of stock in a foreign corporation means either direct ownership of such stock or indirect ownership determined using the rules specified in § 1.1291-1(b)(8) (but without regard to the 50 percent ownership requirement of § 1.1291-1(b)(8)(ii)(A)).

(e) Rules limiting the amount of applicable insurance liabilities

(1) In general. For purposes of determining whether a foreign corporation satisfies the 25 percent test described in paragraph (c) of this section or the 10 percent test described in paragraph (d)(1)(iii) of this section, the rules of this paragraph (e) apply to limit the amount of applicable insurance liabilities of the foreign corporation.

(2) General limitation on applicable insurance liabilities. The amount of applicable insurance liabilities may not exceed any of the amounts described in paragraphs (e)(2)(i) to (iii) of this section. This paragraph (e)(2) applies after applying paragraph (e)(3) of this section.

(i) The amount of applicable insurance liabilities of the foreign corporation shown on any financial statement that the foreign corporation filed or was required to file with its applicable insurance regulatory body for the financial statement's applicable reporting period;

(ii) If the foreign corporation's applicable financial statement is prepared on the basis of either GAAP or IFRS, the amount of the foreign corporation's applicable insurance liabilities determined on the basis of its applicable financial statement, whether or not the foreign corporation files the statement with its applicable insurance regulatory body; or

(iii) The amount of applicable insurance liabilities required for the foreign corporation by the applicable law or regulation of the jurisdiction of the applicable insurance regulatory body at the end of the applicable reporting period (or a lesser amount of applicable insurance liabilities, if the foreign corporation is holding a lesser amount as a permitted practice of the applicable regulatory body).

(3) Discounting. If an applicable financial statement or a financial statement described in paragraph (e)(2) of this section is prepared on the basis of an accounting method other than GAAP or IFRS and does not discount applicable insurance liabilities on an economically reasonable basis, the amount of applicable insurance liabilities may not exceed the amount of applicable insurance liabilities on the financial statement reduced by applying the discounting methods that would apply under either GAAP or IFRS to the insurance or annuity contracts to which the applicable insurance liabilities at issue relate. The foreign corporation may choose whether to apply either GAAP or IFRS discounting methods for this purpose.

(4) [Reserved]

(5) [Reserved]

(f) Definitions. The following definitions apply for purposes of this section.

(1) Applicable financial statement. The term applicable financial statement means the foreign corporation's financial statement prepared for financial reporting purposes, listed in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section, and that has the highest priority. The financial statements are, in order of descending priority—

(i) GAAP statements. A financial statement that is prepared in accordance with GAAP;

(ii) IFRS statements. A financial statement that is prepared in accordance with IFRS; or

(iii) Regulatory annual statement. A financial statement required to be filed with the applicable insurance regulatory body.

(iv) [Reserved]

(2) Applicable insurance liabilities

(i) In general. The term applicable insurance liabilities means, with respect to any life or property and casualty insurance business—

(A) Reported losses (which are expected payments to policyholders for sustained losses related to insured events under an insurance contract that have occurred and have been reported to, but not paid by, the insurer as of the financial statement end date), and incurred but not reported losses (which are expected payments to policyholders for sustained losses relating to insured events under an insurance contract that have occurred but have not been reported to the insurer as of the financial statement end date);

(B) Unpaid loss adjustment expenses (including reasonable estimates of anticipated loss adjustment expenses) associated with investigating, defending, settling, and adjusting paid losses, unpaid reported losses, and incurred but not reported losses (of the type described in paragraph (f)(2)(i)(A) of this section) as of the financial statement end date; and

(C) The aggregate amount of reserves (excluding deficiency, contingency, or unearned premium reserves) held as of the financial statement end date to mature or liquidate potential, future claims for death, annuity, or health benefits that may become payable under contracts providing, at the time the reserve is computed, coverage for mortality or morbidity risks;

(D) Provided, however, that—

(1) No item or amount shall be taken into account more than once in determining applicable insurance liabilities;

(2) The applicable insurance liabilities eligible to be taken into account in applying this paragraph (f)(2) include only the applicable insurance liabilities of the foreign corporation whose QIC status is being determined; and

(3) [Reserved]

(ii) Amounts not specified in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section. Amounts not specified in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section are not applicable insurance liabilities. For example, the term applicable insurance liability does not include any amount held by an insurance company as a deposit liability that is not an insurance liability, such as a funding agreement, a guaranteed investment contract, premium or other deposit funds, structured settlements, or any other substantially similar contract issued by an insurance company. The term applicable insurance liabilities also does not include the amount of any reserve for a life insurance or annuity contract the payments of which do not depend on the life or life expectancy of one or more individuals.

(3) Applicable insurance regulatory body. The term applicable insurance regulatory body means the entity that has been established by law to license or authorize a corporation to engage in an insurance business, to regulate insurance company solvency, and, in the case of an applicable financial statement described in paragraph (f)(1)(iii), is the entity to which the applicable financial statement is provided.

(4) Applicable reporting period. The term applicable reporting period is the last annual reporting period for a financial statement ending with or within the taxable year of a U.S. person owning stock in a foreign corporation, within the meaning of paragraph (d)(6) of this section.

(5) Financial guaranty insurance company. The term financial guaranty insurance company means any insurance company whose sole business is to insure or reinsure only the type of business written by, or that would be permitted to be written by, a company licensed under, and compliant with, a U.S. state law, modeled after the Financial Guaranty Insurance Guideline as established by National Association of Insurance Companies, that specifically governs the licensing and regulation of financial guaranty insurance companies.

(6) Financial statements

(i) In general. The term financial statement means a statement prepared for a legal entity for a reporting period in accordance with the rules of a financial accounting or statutory accounting standard that includes a complete balance sheet, statement of income, and a statement of cash flows (or equivalent statements under the applicable reporting standard).

(ii) [Reserved]

(iii) [Reserved]

(7) Generally accepted accounting principles or GAAP. The term generally accepted accounting principles or GAAP means United States generally accepted accounting principles described in standards established and made effective by the Financial Accounting Standards Board.

(8) Insurance business. For purposes of this section, § 1.1297-5, and § 1.1297-6, insurance business means the business of issuing insurance and annuity contracts and the reinsuring of risks underwritten by insurance companies, together with those investment activities and administrative services that are required to support (or are substantially related to) insurance, annuity, or reinsurance contracts issued or entered into by the foreign corporation.

(9) International financial reporting standards or IFRS. The term international financial reporting standards or IFRS means accounting standards established and made effective by the International Accounting Standards Board.

(10) Mortgage insurance company. For purposes of this section, mortgage insurance company means any insurance company whose sole business is to insure or reinsure against a lender's loss of all or a portion of the principal amount of a mortgage loan upon default of the mortgagor.

(11) Total assets. For purposes of section 1297(f) and this section, a foreign corporation's total assets are the aggregate value of the real property and personal property that the foreign corporation reports on its applicable financial statement as of the financial statement end date.

(g) Applicability date. The rules of this section apply to taxable years of shareholders beginning on or after January 14, 2021. A shareholder may choose to apply such rules for any open taxable year beginning after December 31, 2017 and before January 14, 2021, provided that, with respect to a tested foreign corporation, it consistently applies the provisions of this section and § 1.1297-6 for such year and all subsequent years.

[T.D. 9936, 86 FR 4571, Jan. 15, 2021, as amended at 86 FR 13648, Mar. 10, 2021]

§ 1.1297-5 [Reserved]

§ 1.1297-6 Exception from the definition of passive income for active insurance income.

(a) Scope. This section provides rules pertaining to the exception from passive income under section 1297(b)(2)(B) for income derived in the active conduct of an insurance business and rules related to certain income of a qualifying domestic insurance corporation. Paragraph (b) of this section provides a general rule that excludes from passive income certain income of a qualifying insurance corporation (QIC), as defined in § 1.1297-4(b), and certain income of a qualifying domestic insurance corporation. Paragraph (c) of this section provides rules excluding certain assets for purposes of the passive asset test under section 1297(a)(2). Paragraph (d) of this section provides rules concerning the treatment of income and assets of certain look-through subsidiaries and look-through partnerships of a QIC. Paragraph (e) of this section provides rules relating to qualifying domestic insurance corporations. Paragraph (f) of this section provides the applicability date of this section.

(b) Exclusion from passive income of active insurance income. For purposes of section 1297 and § 1.1297-1, passive income does not include—

(1) Income that a QIC derives in the active conduct of an insurance business (within the meaning of section 1297(b)(2)(B)); and

(2) Income of a qualifying domestic insurance corporation.

(c) Exclusion of assets for purposes of the passive asset test under section 1297(a)(2). For purposes of section 1297 and § 1.1297-1, passive assets (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(5)), do not include—

(1) Assets of a QIC available to satisfy liabilities of the QIC related to its insurance business (as defined in § 1.1297-4(f)(8)), if the QIC is engaged in the active conduct of an insurance business (within the meaning of section 1297(b)(2)(B)); and

(2) Assets of a qualifying domestic insurance corporation.

(d) Treatment of income and assets of certain look-through subsidiaries and look-through partnerships for purposes of the section 1297(b)(2)(B) exception

(1) General rule. For purposes of applying paragraphs (b)(1) and (c)(1) of this section, a QIC is treated as receiving the income or holding the assets of a look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership to the extent provided in section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2) or § 1.1297-2(b)(3). Subject to the limitation of paragraph (d)(2) of this section, a QIC's proportionate share of the income or assets of a look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership may be treated as earned or held directly by the QIC, and thus as non-passive under paragraphs (b)(1) and (c)(1) of this section, if the requirements of those paragraphs are satisfied.

(2) Limitation. A QIC that is engaged in the active conduct of an insurance business (within the meaning of section 1297(b)(2)(B)) may not treat its proportionate share of the income or assets of a look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership as non-passive to the extent that it exceeds the greater of—

(i) The QIC's proportionate share of the income or assets, respectively, of the look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the net equity value of the interests held by the QIC in the look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership, and the denominator of which is the value of the QIC's proportionate share of the assets of the look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership; and

(ii) The QIC's proportionate share of the income or assets, respectively, of the look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership that are treated as non-passive in the hands of the look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership.

(3) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this section.

(i) Example 1: QIC holds all the stock of an investment subsidiary

(A) Facts.

(1) F1 is a foreign corporation. In Year 1, F1 meets the definition of a QIC under section 1297(f) and § 1.1297-4 and is engaged in the active conduct of an insurance business within the meaning of section 1297(b)(2)(B). Throughout Year 1, F1 owns all the stock of F2, a foreign corporation that is not a QIC and is engaged solely in the investment of passive assets. The stock of F2 is an asset that is available to satisfy liabilities of F1 related to its insurance business within the meaning of paragraph (c)(1) of this section. The assets of F1 are measured on the basis of value under § 1.1297-1(d)(1)(v)(C).

(2) Throughout Year 1, F2 owns assets with a value of $1,000x and adjusted bases of $500x, all of which are treated as passive in the hands of F2. F2 has outstanding debt with a principal amount of $250x. On the financial statement end date of F1's applicable financial statement, the net equity value of the F2 stock held by F1 is $750x. In Year 1, F2 earned $100x of income that is treated as passive in the hands of F2.

(B) Result

(1) Because F1 owns all of the stock of F2, F2 is a look-through subsidiary of F1 within the meaning of § 1.1297-2(g)(3). Under section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2), F1 is treated as if it held 100% of the assets of F2 and received directly 100% of the income of F2. Under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, because F1 is engaged in the active conduct of an insurance business and the stock of F2 is an asset that is available to satisfy the insurance liabilities of F1, F1 treats its proportionate share of the income and assets of F2 as non-passive. The amount of income and assets that is treated as non-passive is subject to the limitation of paragraph (d)(2) of this section.

(2) Under paragraph (d)(2) of this section, the amount of F1's proportionate share of F2's income that is treated as non-passive cannot exceed the greater of two amounts: $75x, which is F1's proportionate share of F2's income ($100x) multiplied by 75% (the net equity value of the F2 stock held by F1, which is $750x, divided by the value of F1's proportionate share of F2's assets, which is $1,000x); and zero, which is F1's proportionate share of the income of F2 that is treated as non-passive in the hands of F2. Therefore, for the purpose of characterizing F1's proportionate share of F2's income, $75x is treated as non-passive, and $25x is treated as passive.

(3) Under paragraph (d)(2) of this section, the amount of F1's proportionate share of F2's assets that is treated as non-passive cannot exceed the greater of two amounts: $750x, which is F1's proportionate share of F2's assets ($1,000x) multiplied by 75% (the net equity value of the F2 stock held by F1, which is $750x, divided by the value of F1's proportionate share of F2's assets, which is $1,000x); and zero, which is F1's proportionate share of the assets of F2 that are treated as non-passive in the hands of F2. Therefore, for the purpose of characterizing F1's proportionate share of the assets of F2, $750x is treated as non-passive, and $250x is treated as passive.

(C) Alternative facts

(1) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of this section (paragraph (A) of this Example 1), except that the assets of F1 are measured on the basis of adjusted basis under § 1.1297-1(d)(1)(v)(C) pursuant to a valid election under § 1.1297-1(d)(1)(iii).

(2) Result. The result with respect to F1's proportionate share of the income of F2 is the same as in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(B)(2) of this section (paragraph (B)(2) of this Example 1). Because the assets of F1 are measured on the basis of adjusted basis under § 1.1297-1(d)(1)(v)(C), F1's proportionate share of the passive assets of F2 is equal to $500x (100% of $500x adjusted bases). Under paragraph (d)(2) of this section, the amount of F1's proportionate share of F2's assets that may be treated as non-passive cannot exceed the greater of two amounts: $375x, which is F1's proportionate share of F2's passive assets ($500x) multiplied by 75% (the net equity value of the F2 stock held by F1, which is $750x, divided by the value of F1's proportionate share of F2's assets, which is $1,000x); and zero, which is F1's proportionate share of the assets of F2 that are treated as non-passive in the hands of F2. Therefore, for the purpose of characterizing F1's proportionate share of the assets of F2, $375x is treated as non-passive, and $125x is treated as passive.

(ii) Example 2: QIC holds all the stock of an operating subsidiary

(A) Facts.

(1) F1 is a foreign corporation. In Year 1, F1 meets the definition of a QIC under section 1297(f) and § 1.1297-4 and is engaged in the active conduct of an insurance business within the meaning of section 1297(b)(2)(B). Throughout Year 1, F1 owns all the stock of F2, a foreign corporation engaged in a manufacturing business that is not a QIC. The stock of F2 is an asset that is available to satisfy liabilities of F1 related to its insurance business within the meaning of paragraph (c)(1) of this section. The assets of F1 are measured on the basis of value under § 1.1297-1(d)(1)(v)(C).

(2) Throughout Year 1, F2 owns assets with a value of $1,200x, of which $1,000x is treated as non-passive and $200x is treated as passive in the hands of F2. F2 has outstanding debt of $600x. On the financial statement end date of F1's applicable financial statement, the net equity value of the F2 stock held by F1 is $600x. In Year 1, F2 earned $120x of income, of which, in the hands of F2, $100x is treated as non-passive and $20x is treated as passive.

(B) Result

(1) Because F1 owns all the stock of F2, F2 is a look-through subsidiary of F1 within the meaning of § 1.1297-2(g)(3). Under section 1297(c) and § 1.1297-2(b)(2), F1 is treated as if it held 100% of the assets of F2 and received directly 100% of the income of F2. Under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, because F1 is engaged in the active conduct of an insurance business and the stock of F2 is an asset that is available to satisfy the insurance liabilities of F1, F1 treats its proportionate share of the income and assets of F2 as non-passive. The amount of income and assets that is treated as non-passive is subject to the limitation of paragraph (d)(2) of this section.

(2) Under paragraph (d)(2) of this section, the amount of F1's proportionate share of F2's income that is treated as non-passive cannot exceed the greater of two amounts: $60x, which is F1's proportionate share of F2's income ($120x) multiplied by 50% (the net equity value of the F2 stock held by F1, which is $600x, divided by the value of F1's proportionate share of F2's assets, which is $1,200x); and $100x, which is F1's proportionate share of the income of F2 that is treated as non-passive in the hands of F2. Therefore, for the purpose of characterizing F1's proportionate share of F2's income, $100x is treated as non-passive, and $20x is treated as passive.

(3) Under paragraph (d)(2) of this section, the amount of F1's proportionate share of F2's assets that is treated as non-passive cannot exceed the greater of two amounts: $600x, which is F1's proportionate share of F2's income ($1,200x) multiplied by 50% (the net equity value of the F2 stock held by F1, which is $600x, divided by the value of F1's proportionate share of F2's assets, which is $1,200x); and $1,000x, which is F1's proportionate share of the assets of F2 that are treated as non-passive in the hands of F2. Therefore, for the purpose of characterizing F1's proportionate share of the assets of F2, $1,000x is treated as non-passive, and $200x is treated as passive.

(e) Qualifying domestic insurance corporation

(1) General rule. A domestic corporation (or a foreign corporation that is treated as a domestic corporation pursuant to a valid section 953(d) election and that computes its reserves as a domestic insurance company would under subchapter L) is a qualifying domestic insurance corporation if it is—

(i) Subject to tax as an insurance company under subchapter L of the Internal Revenue Code;

(ii) Subject to federal income tax on its net income; and

(iii) A look-through subsidiary of a tested foreign corporation.

(2)-(3) [Reserved]

(f) Applicability date. The rules of this section apply to taxable years of shareholders beginning on or after January 14, 2021. A shareholder may choose to apply such rules for any open taxable year beginning after December 31, 2017 and before January 14, 2021, provided that, with respect to a tested foreign corporation, it consistently applies the provisions of this section and § 1.1297-4, for such year and all subsequent years.

[T.D. 9936, 86 FR 4571, Jan. 15, 2021]

§ 1.1298-0 Passive foreign investment company—table of contents.

This section contains a listing of the paragraph headings for §§ 1.1298-1, 1.1298-2, 1.1298-3, and 1.1298-4.

§ 1.1298-1 Section 1298(f) annual reporting requirements for United States persons that are shareholders of a passive foreign investment company.

(a) Overview.

(b) Requirement to file.

(1) General rule.

(2) Additional requirement to file for certain indirect shareholders.

(i) General rule.

(ii) Exception to indirect shareholder reporting for certain QEF inclusions and MTM inclusions.

(3) Special rules for estates and trusts.

(i) Domestic liquidating trusts and fixed investment trusts.

(ii) Beneficiaries of foreign estates and trusts.

(c) Exceptions.

(1) Exception if shareholder is a tax-exempt entity.

(2) Exception if aggregate value of shareholder's PFIC stock is $25,000 or less, or value of shareholder's indirect PFIC stock is $5,000 or less.

(i) General rule.

(ii) Determination of the $25,000 threshold in the case of indirect ownership.

(iii) Application of the $25,000 exception to shareholders who file a joint return.

(iv) Reliance on periodic account statements.

(3) Exception for PFIC stock marked to market under a provision other than section 1296.

(4) Exception for PFIC stock held through certain foreign pension funds.

(5) Exception for certain shareholders who are dual resident taxpayers.

(i) General rule.

(ii) Dual resident taxpayer filing as nonresident alien at end of taxable year.

(iii) Dual resident taxpayer filing as resident alien at end of taxable year.

(6) Exception for certain domestic partnerships.

(7) Exception for certain short-term ownership of PFIC stock.

(8) Exception for certain bona fide residents of U.S. territories.

(9) Exception for taxable years ending before December 31, 2013.

(d) Time and manner for filing.

(e) Separate annual report for each PFIC.

(1) General rule.

(2) Special rule for shareholders who file a joint return.

(f) Coordination rule.

(g) Examples.

(h) Applicability date.

§ 1.1298-2 Rules for certain corporations changing businesses.

(a) Overview.

(b) Change of business exception.

(c) Special rules.

(d) Disposition of stock in a look-through subsidiary or partnership interests in a look-through partnership.

(e) Application of change of business exception.

(f) Examples.

(1) Example 1.

(i) Facts.

(ii) Results.

(2) Example 2.

(i) Facts.

(ii) Results.

(g) Applicability date.

§ 1.1298-3 Deemed sale or deemed dividend election by a U.S. person that is a shareholder of a former PFIC.

(a) In general.

(b) Application of deemed sale election rules.

(1) Eligibility to make the deemed sale election.

(2) Effect of the deemed sale election.

(3) Time for making the deemed sale election.

(4) Manner of making the deemed sale election.

(5) Adjustments to basis.

(6) Treatment of holding period.

(c) Application of deemed dividend election rules.

(1) Eligibility to make the deemed dividend election.

(2) Effect of the deemed dividend election.

(3) Post-1986 earnings and profits defined.

(4) Time for making the deemed dividend election.

(5) Manner of making the deemed dividend election.

(6) Adjustments to basis.

(7) Treatment of holding period.

(8) Coordination with section 959(e).

(d) Termination date.

(e) Late purging elections requiring special consent.

(1) In general.

(2) Prejudice to the interests of the U.S. government.

(3) Procedural requirements.

(4) Time and manner of making late election.

(5) Multiple late elections.

(f) Effective/applicability date.

§ 1.1298-4 Rules for certain foreign corporations owning stock in 25-percent-owned domestic corporations.

(a) Overview.

(b) Treatment of certain foreign corporations owning stock in a 25-percent-owned domestic corporation.

(1) General rule.

(2) Qualified stock and second-tier domestic corporation.

(c) Indirect ownership of stock through a partnership.

(d) Section 531 tax.

(1) Subject to section 531 tax.

(2) Waiver of treaty benefits.

(i) Tested foreign corporation that files, or is required to file, a Federal income tax return.

(ii) Tested foreign corporation that is not required to file a Federal income tax return.

(e) Anti-abuse rule.

(1) General rule.

(2) [Reserved]

(3) [Reserved]

(f) Applicability date.

[T.D. 9360, 72 FR 54824, Sept. 27, 2007, as amended by T.D. 9806, 81 FR 95466, Dec. 28, 2016; T.D. 9936, 86 FR 4576, Jan. 15, 2021]

§ 1.1298-1 Section 1298(f) annual reporting requirements for United States persons that are shareholders of a passive foreign investment company.

(a) Overview. This section provides rules regarding the reporting requirements under section 1298(f) applicable to a United States person that is a shareholder (as defined in § 1.1291-1(b)(7)) of a passive foreign investment company (PFIC). Paragraph (b) of this section provides the section 1298(f) annual reporting requirements generally applicable to United States persons. Paragraph (c) of this section sets forth exceptions to reporting for certain shareholders. Paragraph (d) of this section provides rules regarding the time and manner of filing the annual report. Paragraph (e) of this section sets forth the requirement to file a separate annual report with respect to each PFIC. Paragraph (f) of this section coordinates the requirement to file an annual report under section 1298(f) with the requirement to file an annual report under other provisions of the Internal Revenue Code (Code). Paragraph (g) of this section sets forth examples illustrating the application of this section. Paragraph (h) of this section provides effective/applicability dates.

(b) Requirement to file

(1) General rule. Except as otherwise provided in this section, a United States person that is a shareholder of a PFIC must complete and file Form 8621, “Information Return by a Shareholder of a Passive Foreign Investment Company or Qualified Electing Fund” (or successor form), under section 1298(f) and these regulations for the PFIC if, during the shareholder's taxable year, the shareholder—

(i) Directly owns stock of the PFIC;

(ii) Is an indirect shareholder under § 1.1291-1(b)(8) that holds any interest in the PFIC through one or more entities, each of which is foreign; or

(iii) Is an indirect shareholder under § 1.1291-1(b)(8)(iii)(D) that is treated under sections 671 through 678 as the owner of any portion of a trust described in section 7701(a)(30)(E) that owns, directly or indirectly through one or more entities, each of which is foreign, any interest in the PFIC.

(2) Additional requirement to file for certain indirect shareholders

(i) General rule. Except as otherwise provided in this section, an indirect shareholder that owns an interest in a PFIC through one or more United States persons also must file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the PFIC under section 1298(f) and these regulations if, during the indirect shareholder's taxable year, the indirect shareholder is—

(A) Treated as receiving an excess distribution (within the meaning of section 1291(b)) with respect to the PFIC;

(B) Treated as recognizing gain that is treated as an excess distribution (under section 1291(a)(2)) as a result of a disposition of the PFIC;

(C) Required to include an amount in income under section 1293(a) with respect to the PFIC (QEF inclusion);

(D) Required to include or deduct an amount under section 1296(a) with respect to the PFIC (MTM inclusion); or

(E) Required to report the status of a section 1294 election with respect to the PFIC (see § 1.1294-1T(h)).

(ii) Exception to indirect shareholder reporting for certain QEF inclusions and MTM inclusions. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (b)(2)(ii), the filing requirements under paragraph (b) of this section do not apply with respect to an interest in a PFIC owned by an indirect shareholder described in paragraph (b)(2)(i)(C) or (D) of this section if another shareholder through which the indirect shareholder owns such interest in the PFIC timely files Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the PFIC under paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section. However, the exception in this paragraph (b)(2)(ii) does not apply with respect to a PFIC owned by an indirect shareholder described in paragraph (b)(2)(i)(C) of this section that owns the PFIC through a domestic partnership or S corporation if the domestic partnership or S corporation does not make a qualified electing fund election with respect to the PFIC (see § 1.1293-1(c)(2)(ii), addressing QEF stock transferred to a pass through entity that does not make a section 1295 election).

(3) Special rules for estates and trusts

(i) Domestic liquidating trusts and fixed investment trusts. A United States person that is treated under sections 671 through 678 as the owner of any portion of a trust described in section 7701(a)(30)(E) that owns, directly or indirectly, any interest in a PFIC is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the PFIC if the trust is either a domestic liquidating trust under § 301.7701-4(d) of this chapter created pursuant to a court order issued in a bankruptcy under Chapter 7 (11 U.S.C. 701 et seq.) of the Bankruptcy Code or a confirmed plan under Chapter 11 (11 U.S.C. 1101 et seq.) of the Bankruptcy Code, or a widely held fixed investment trust under § 1.671-5. Such a trust itself is treated as a shareholder for purposes of section 1298(f) and these regulations, and thus, except as otherwise provided in this section, the trust is required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the PFIC as provided in paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section.

(ii) Beneficiaries of foreign estates and trusts. A United States person that is considered to own an interest in a PFIC because it is a beneficiary of an estate described in section 7701(a)(31)(A) or a trust described in section 7701(a)(31)(B) that owns, directly or indirectly, stock of a PFIC, and that has not made an election under section 1295 or 1296 with respect to the PFIC, is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the stock of the PFIC that it is considered to own through the estate or trust if, during the beneficiary's taxable year, the beneficiary is not treated as receiving an excess distribution (within the meaning of section 1291(b)) or as recognizing gain that is treated as an excess distribution (under section 1291(a)(2)) with respect to the stock.

(c) Exceptions

(1) Exception if shareholder is a tax-exempt entity. A shareholder that is an organization exempt under section 501(a) to the extent that it is described in section 501(c), 501(d), or 401(a), a state college or university described in section 511(a)(2)(B), a plan described in section 403(b) or 457(b), an individual retirement plan or annuity as defined in section 7701(a)(37), or a qualified tuition program described in section 529, a qualified ABLE program described in 529A, or a Coverdell education savings account described in section 530 is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to a PFIC unless the income derived with respect to the PFIC stock would be taxable to the organization under subchapter F of Subtitle A of the Code.

(2) Exception if aggregate value of shareholder's PFIC stock is $25,000 or less, or value of shareholder's indirect PFIC stock is $5,000 or less

(i) General rule. A shareholder is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to a section 1291 fund (as defined in § 1.1291-1(b)(2)(v)) for a shareholder's taxable year if—

(A) On the last day of the shareholder's taxable year:

(1) The value of all PFIC stock owned directly or indirectly under section 1298(a) and § 1.1291-1(b)(8) by the shareholder is $25,000 or less; or

(2) The section 1291 fund stock is indirectly owned by the shareholder under section 1298(a)(2)(B) and § 1.1291-1(b)(8)(ii)(B), and the value of the section 1291 fund stock indirectly owned by the shareholder is $5,000 or less;

(B) The shareholder is not treated as receiving an excess distribution (within the meaning of section 1291(b)) with respect to the section 1291 fund during the taxable year or as recognizing gain treated as an excess distribution under section 1291(a)(2) as the result of a disposition of the section 1291 fund during the taxable year; and

(C) An election under section 1295 has not been made to treat the section 1291 fund as a qualified electing fund with respect to the shareholder.

(ii) Determination of the $25,000 threshold in the case of indirect ownership. For purposes of determining the value of stock held by a shareholder for purposes of paragraph (c)(2)(i)(A)(1) of this section, the shareholder must take into account the value of all PFIC stock owned directly or indirectly under section 1298(a) and § 1.1291-1(b)(8), except for PFIC stock that is—

(A) Owned through another United States person that itself is a shareholder of the PFIC (including a domestic partnership or S corporation treated as a shareholder of a PFIC for purposes of information reporting requirements applicable to a shareholder);

(B) Owned through a PFIC under section 1298(a)(2)(B) and § 1.1291-1(b)(8)(ii)(B); or

(C) Marked to market for the shareholder's taxable year under any provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code other than section 1296, provided the rules of § 1.1296-1(i)(2) and (3) do not apply to the shareholder with respect to the PFIC stock pursuant to § 1.1291-1(c)(4)(ii) for the shareholder's taxable year.

(iii) Application of the $25,000 exception to shareholders who file a joint return. In the case of a joint return, the exception described in paragraph (c)(2)(i)(A)(1) of this section shall apply if the value of all PFIC stock owned directly or indirectly (as determined under section 1298(a), § 1.1291-1(b)(8), and paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section) by both spouses is $50,000 or less, and all of the other applicable requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section are met.

(iv) Reliance on periodic account statements. A shareholder may rely upon periodic account statements provided at least annually to determine the value of a PFIC unless the shareholder has actual knowledge or reason to know based on readily accessible information that the statements do not reflect a reasonable estimate of the PFIC's value.

(3) Exception for PFIC stock marked to market under a provision other than section 1296. A shareholder is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to a PFIC for any taxable year in which the PFIC is marked to market under any provision of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code other than section 1296, provided the rules of § 1.1296-1(i)(2) and (3) do not apply to the shareholder with respect to the PFIC pursuant to § 1.1291-1(c)(4)(ii) for the taxable year.

(4) Exception for PFIC stock held through certain foreign pension funds. A shareholder who is a member or beneficiary of, or participant in, a plan, trust, scheme, or other arrangement that is treated as a foreign pension fund (or equivalent) under an income tax treaty to which the United States is a party and that owns, directly or indirectly, an interest in a PFIC is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the PFIC interest if, pursuant to the applicable income tax treaty, the income earned by the foreign pension fund may be taxed as the income of the shareholder only when and to the extent the income is paid to, or for the benefit of, the shareholder.

(5) Exception for certain shareholders who are dual resident taxpayers

(i) General rule. Subject to the provisions of paragraphs (c)(5)(ii) and (iii) of this section, a shareholder is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to a PFIC for a taxable year, or the portion of a taxable year, in which the shareholder is a dual resident taxpayer (within the meaning of § 301.7701(b)-7(a)(1) of this chapter) who is treated as a nonresident alien of the United States for purposes of computing his or her United States income tax liability pursuant to § 301.7701(b)-7 of this chapter.

(ii) Dual resident taxpayer filing as a nonresident alien at end of taxable year. If a shareholder to whom this paragraph (c)(5) applies computes his or her U.S. income tax liability as a nonresident alien on the last day of the taxable year and complies with the filing requirements of § 301.7701(b)-7(b) and (c) of this chapter and, in particular, such individual timely files with the Internal Revenue Service Form 1040NR, “U.S. Nonresident Alien Income Tax Return,” or Form 1040NR-EZ, “U.S. Income Tax Return for Certain Nonresident Aliens With No Dependents,” as applicable, and attaches thereto a properly completed Form 8833, “Treaty-Based Return Position Disclosure Under Section 6114 or 7701(b),” and the schedule required by § 1.6012-1(b)(2)(ii)(b) (if applicable), such shareholder will not be required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the taxable year, or the portion of the taxable year, covered by Form 1040NR (or Form 1040NR-EZ).

(iii) Dual resident taxpayer filing as resident alien at end of taxable year. If a shareholder to whom this paragraph (c)(5) applies computes his or her U.S. income tax liability as a resident alien on the last day of the taxable year and complies with the filing requirements of § 1.6012-1(b)(2)(ii)(a) and, in particular such shareholder timely files with the Internal Revenue Service Form 1040, “U.S. Individual Income Tax Return,” or Form 1040EZ, “Income Tax Return for Single and Joint Filers With No Dependents,” as applicable, and attaches a properly completed Form 8833 to the schedule required by § 1.6012-1(b)(2)(ii)(a), such shareholder will not be required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the portion of the taxable year reflected on the schedule to such Form 1040 or Form 1040EZ required by § 1.6012-1(b)(2)(ii)(a).

(6) Exception for certain domestic partnerships. A shareholder that is a domestic partnership is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to a PFIC directly or indirectly held by the domestic partnership for a taxable year if each person that directly or indirectly owns an interest in the domestic partnership for its taxable year in which or with which the taxable year of the partnership ends is either—

(i) Not a shareholder of the PFIC as defined by § 1.1291-1(b)(7);

(ii) A tax-exempt entity or account not required to file Form 8621 with respect to the stock of the PFIC under paragraph (c)(1) of this section;

(iii) A dual resident taxpayer not required to file Form 8621 with respect to the stock of the PFIC under paragraph (c)(5) of this section; or

(iv) A domestic partnership not required to file Form 8621 with respect to the stock of the PFIC under this paragraph (c)(6).

(7) Exception for certain short-term ownership of PFIC stock. A shareholder is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to a section 1291 fund (as defined in § 1.1291-1(b)(2)(v)) for a taxable year when the shareholder—

(i) Acquires the section 1291 fund in the taxable year or the immediately preceding taxable year;

(ii) Is a shareholder of the section 1291 fund for a total of 30 days or less during the period beginning 29 days before the first day of the shareholder's taxable year and ending 29 days after the close of the shareholder's taxable year; and

(iii) Is not treated as receiving an excess distribution (within the meaning of section 1291(b)) with respect to the section 1291 fund, including any gain recognized that is treated as an excess distribution under section 1291(a)(2) as a result of the disposition of the section 1291 fund.

(8) Exception for certain bona fide residents of certain U.S. territories. A shareholder is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to a PFIC for a taxable year when the shareholder—

(i) Is a bona fide resident (as defined by section 937(a)) of Guam, the Northern Mariana Islands, or the United States Virgin Islands; and

(ii) Is not required to file an income tax return with the Internal Revenue Service with respect to such taxable year.

(9) Exception for taxable years ending before December 31, 2013. A United States person is not required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file an annual report with respect to a PFIC for a taxable year of the United States person ending before December 31, 2013.

(d) Time and manner for filing. A United States person required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to a PFIC must attach the form to its Federal income tax return (or information return, if applicable) for the taxable year to which the filing obligation relates on or before the due date (including extensions) for the filing of the return, or must separately file the form in accordance with the instructions for the form when the United States person is not required to file a Federal income tax return (or information return, if applicable) for the taxable year. In the case of any failure to report information that is required to be reported pursuant to section 1298(f) and these regulations, the time for assessment of tax will be extended pursuant to section 6501(c)(8).

(e) Separate annual report for each PFIC

(1) General rule. If a United States person is required under section 1298(f) and these regulations to file Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to more than one PFIC, the United States person must file a separate Form 8621 (or successor form) for each PFIC.

(2) Special rule for shareholders who file a joint return. United States persons that file a joint return may file a single Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to a PFIC in which they jointly or individually own an interest.

(f) Coordination rule. A United States person that is a shareholder of a PFIC may file a single Form 8621 (or successor form) with respect to the PFIC that contains all of the information required to be reported pursuant to section 1298(f) and these regulations and any other information reporting requirements or election rules under other provisions of the Code.

(g) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this section:

Example 1.

General requirement to file. (i) Facts. In 2013, J, a United States citizen, directly owns an interest in Partnership X, a domestic partnership, which, in turn, owns an interest in A Corp, which is a PFIC. In addition, J directly owns an interest in Partnership Y, a foreign partnership, which, in turn, owns an interest in A Corp. Neither J nor Partnership X has made a qualified electing fund election under section 1295 or a mark to market election under section 1296 with respect to A Corp. As of the last day of 2013, the value of Partnership X's interest in A Corp is $200,000, and the value of J's proportionate share of Partnership Y's interest in A Corp is $100,000. During 2013, J is not treated as receiving an excess distribution or recognizing gain treated as an excess distribution with respect to A Corp. Partnership X timely files a Form 8621 under section 1298(f) and paragraph (b)(1) of this section with respect to A Corp for 2013.

(ii) Results. J is the first United States person in the chain of ownership with respect to J's interest in A Corp held through Partnership Y. Under paragraph (b)(1) of this section, J must file a Form 8621 under section 1298(f) with respect to J's interest in A Corp held through Partnership Y because J is an indirect shareholder of A Corp under § 1.1291-1(b)(8) that holds PFIC stock through a foreign entity (Partnership Y), and there are no other United States persons in the chain of ownership. The fact that Partnership X filed a Form 8621 with respect to A Corp does not relieve J of the obligation under paragraph (b)(1) of this section to file a Form 8621 with respect to J's interest in A Corp held through Partnership Y. J has no filing obligation under section 1298(f) and paragraph (b)(2) of this section with respect to J's proportionate share of Partnership X's interest in A Corp.

Example 2.

Application of the $25,000 exception. (i) Facts. In 2013, J, a United States citizen, directly owns stock of A Corp, B Corp, and C Corp, all of which were PFICs during 2013. As of the last day of 2013, the value of J's interests was $5,000 in A Corp, $10,000 in B Corp, and $4,000 in C Corp. J timely filed an election under section 1295 to treat A Corp as a qualified electing fund for the first year in which A Corp qualified as a PFIC, and a mark-to-market election under section 1296 with respect to the stock of B Corp. J did not make a qualified electing fund election under section 1295 or a mark to market election under section 1296 with respect to C Corp. J did not receive an excess distribution or recognize gain treated as an excess distribution in respect of C Corp during 2013.

(ii) Results. Under paragraph (b)(1) of this section, J must file separate Forms 8621 with respect to A Corp and B Corp for 2013. However, J is not required to file a Form 8621 with respect to C Corp because J owns, in the aggregate, PFIC stock with a value of less than $25,000 on the last day of J's taxable year, C Corp is not subject to a qualified electing fund election or mark to market election with respect to J, and J did not receive an excess distribution in respect of C Corp or recognize gain treated as an excess distribution in respect of C Corp during 2013. Therefore, J qualifies for the $25,000 exception in paragraph (c)(2) of this section with respect to C Corp.

Example 3.

Application of the $25,000 exception to indirect shareholder. (i) Facts. E, a United States citizen, directly owns an interest in Partnership X, a domestic partnership. Partnership X, in turn, directly owns an interest in A Corp and B Corp, both of which are PFICs. Partnership X timely filed an election under section 1295 to treat B Corp as a qualified electing fund for the first year in which B Corp qualified as a PFIC. In addition, E directly owns an interest in C Corp, which is a PFIC. C Corp, in turn, owns an interest in D Corp, which is a PFIC. E has not made a qualified electing fund election under section 1295 or a mark to market election under section 1296 with respect to A Corp, C Corp, or D Corp. As of the last day of 2013, the value of Partnership X's interest in A Corp is $30,000, the value of Partnership X's interest in B Corp is $30,000, the value of E's indirect interest in A Corp is $10,000, the value of E's indirect interest in B Corp is $10,000, the value of E's interest in C Corp is $20,000, and the value of C Corp's interest in D Corp is $10,000. During 2013, E did not receive an excess distribution, or recognize gain treated as an excess distribution, with respect to A Corp, C Corp, or D Corp. Partnership X timely files Forms 8621 under section 1298(f) and paragraph (b)(1) of this section with respect to A Corp and B Corp for 2013.

(ii) Results. Under paragraph (b) of this section, E does not have to file a Form 8621 under section 1298(f) and these regulations with respect to A Corp because E is not the United States person that is at the lowest tier in the chain of ownership with respect to A Corp and E did not receive an excess distribution or recognize gain treated as an excess distribution with respect to A Corp. Furthermore, under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, E does not have to file a Form 8621 under section 1298(f) and these regulations with respect to B Corp because Partnership X timely filed a Form 8621 with respect to B Corp. In addition, under paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A) of this section, E does not take into account the value of A Corp and B Corp, which E owns through Partnership X, in determining whether E qualifies for the $25,000 exception. Further, under paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, E does not take into account the value of D Corp in determining whether E qualifies for the $25,000 exception. Therefore, even though E is the United States person that is at the lowest tier in the chain of ownership with respect to C Corp and D Corp, E does not have to file a Form 8621 with respect to C Corp or D Corp because E qualifies for the $25,000 exception set forth in paragraph (c)(2)(i)(A)(1) of this section.

Example 4.

Indirect shareholder's requirement to file. (i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example 3 of this paragraph (g), except that the value of E's interest in C Corp is $30,000 and the value of E's proportionate share of C Corp's interest in D Corp is $3,000.

(ii) Results. The results are the same as in Example 3 of this paragraph (g) with respect to E having no requirement to file a Form 8621 under section 1298(f) and these regulations with respect to A Corp and B Corp. However, under the facts in this Example 4, E does not qualify for the $25,000 exception under paragraph (c)(2)(i)(A)(1) of this section with respect to C Corp because the value of E's interest in C Corp is $30,000. Accordingly, E must file a Form 8621 under section 1298(f) and these regulations with respect to C Corp. However, E does qualify for the $5,000 exception under paragraph (c)(2)(i)(A)(2) of this section with respect to D Corp, and thus does not have to file a Form 8621 with respect to D Corp.

Example 5.

Application of the domestic partnership exception. (i) Facts. Tax Exempt Entity A and Tax Exempt Entity B are both organizations exempt under section 501(a) because they are described in section 501(c). Tax Exempt Entity A and Tax Exempt Entity B own all the interests in Partnership X, a domestic partnership, which, in turn, owns, an interest in Partnership Y, also a domestic partnership. The remaining interests in Partnership Y are owned by F Corp, a foreign corporation owned solely by individuals that are not residents or citizens of the United States. Partnership Y owns an interest in A Corp, which is a PFIC. Any income derived with respect to A Corp would not be taxable to Tax Exempt Entity A or Tax Exempt Entity B under subchapter F of Subtitle A of the Code. Tax Exempt Entity A, Tax Exempt Entity B, Partnership X, and Partnership Y all are calendar year taxpayers.

(ii) Results. Under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, Tax Exempt Entity A and Tax Exempt Entity B do not have to file Form 8621 under section 1298(f) and these regulations with respect to A Corp because neither entity would be subject to tax under subchapter F of Subtitle A of the Code with respect to income derived from A Corp. In addition, under paragraph (c)(6) of this section, neither Partnership X nor Partnership Y is required to file Form 8621 under section 1298(f) and these regulations with respect to A Corp because all of the direct and indirect interests in Partnership X and Partnership Y are owned by persons described in paragraph (c)(1) of this section or persons that are not a shareholder of A Corp as defined by § 1.1291-1(b)(7).

(h) Applicability dates.

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (h)(2) of this section, this section applies to taxable years of shareholders ending on or after December 31, 2013.

(2) Paragraph (c)(9) of this section applies to taxable years of shareholders ending before December 31, 2013.

[T.D. 9806, 81 FR 95466, Dec. 28, 2016]

§ 1.1298-2 Rules for certain corporations changing businesses.

(a) Overview. This section provides rules under section 1298(b)(3) and 1298(g) that apply to certain foreign corporations that dispose of one or more active trades or businesses for purposes of determining whether a foreign corporation is treated as a passive foreign investment company (PFIC). Paragraph (b) of this section provides a rule that applies to certain foreign corporations that dispose of one or more active trades or businesses. Paragraph (c) of this section provides special rules. Paragraph (d) of this section provides a rule for the treatment of the disposition of the stock of a look-through subsidiary (as defined in § 1.1297-2(g)(3)) or partnership interests in a look-through partnership (as defined in § 1.1297-2(g)(4)). Paragraph (e) of this section provides guidance on when a tested foreign corporation can apply the change of business exception. Paragraph (f) provides examples illustrating the application of the rules in this section. Paragraph (g) provides the applicability date for this section.

(b) Change of business exception. A corporation is not treated as a PFIC for a taxable year if—

(1) Neither the corporation (nor any predecessor) was a PFIC for any prior taxable year;

(2) Either—

(i) Substantially all of the passive income of the corporation for the taxable year is attributable to proceeds from the disposition of one or more active trades or businesses; or

(ii) Following the disposition of one or more active trades or businesses, substantially all of the passive assets of the corporation on each of the measuring dates that occur during the taxable year and after the disposition are attributable to proceeds from the disposition; and

(3) The corporation reasonably does not expect to be and is not a PFIC for either of the first two taxable years following the taxable year.

(c) Special rules. The rules in this paragraph (c) apply for purposes of section 1298(b)(3) and this section.

(1) Income is attributable to proceeds from the disposition of one or more active trades or businesses to the extent the income is derived from the investment of the proceeds from the disposition of assets used in the active trades or businesses.

(2) Assets are attributable to proceeds from the disposition of one or more active trades or businesses only to the extent the assets are the proceeds of the disposition of assets used in the active trades or businesses, or are derived from the investment of the proceeds.

(3) The determination of the existence of an active trade or business and whether assets are used in an active trade or business is made under § 1.367(a)-2(d)(2), (3), and (5), except that officers and employees do not include the officers and employees of related entities as provided in § 1.367(a)-2(d)(3). However, if activities performed by the officers and employees of a look-through subsidiary of a corporation or of a look-through partnership (including a look-through subsidiary or a look-through partnership with respect to which paragraph (d) of this section applies) would be taken into account by the corporation pursuant to § 1.1297-2(e) if it applied, such activities are taken into account for purposes of the determination of the existence of an active trade or business and the determination of whether assets are used in an active trade or business.

(4) In the case of a corporation that satisfies the condition in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, the condition in paragraph (b)(3) of this section is deemed to be satisfied if the corporation completely liquidates by the end of the taxable year following the year with respect to which the tested foreign corporation applies the exception in paragraph (b) of this section.

(d) Disposition of stock of a look-through subsidiary or partnership interests in a look-through partnership. For purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, the proceeds from a tested foreign corporation's disposition of the stock of a look-through subsidiary or of partnership interests in a look-through partnership are treated as proceeds from the disposition of a proportionate share of the assets held by the look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership on the date of the disposition, based on the method (value or adjusted bases) used to measure the assets of the tested foreign corporation for purposes of section 1297(a)(2). The proceeds attributable to assets used by the look-through subsidiary or look-through partnership in an active trade or business are treated as proceeds attributable to the disposition of an active trade or business.

(e) Application of change of business exception. A tested foreign corporation can apply the exception in paragraph (b) of this section with respect to a taxable year of a disposition of an active trade or business or an immediately succeeding taxable year, but cannot apply the exception with respect to more than one taxable year for a disposition.

(f) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this section. For purposes of these examples: USP is a domestic corporation; TFC and FS are foreign corporations that are not controlled foreign corporations (within the meaning of section 957(a)); each corporation has outstanding a single class of stock; USP has owned its interest in TFC since the formation of TFC; each of USP, TFC, and FS have a calendar taxable year; and for purposes of section 1297(a)(2), TFC measures the amount of its assets based on value.

(1) Example 1

(i) Facts.

(A) USP owns 15% of the outstanding stock of TFC. TFC owns 30% of the outstanding stock of FS. FS operates an active trade or business and 100% of its assets are used in the active trade or business. The value of FS's non-passive assets (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(3)) is $900x; the value of FS's passive assets (which include cash and cash equivalents) is $100x. TFC has not been treated as a PFIC for any taxable year before Year 1 and has no predecessor. In addition to holding the FS stock, TFC directly conducts its own active trade or business. The value of TFC's non-passive assets (other than FS stock) is $50x; the value of TFC's passive assets (other than FS stock and assets received during Year 1) is $30x. TFC earns $1x of non-passive income (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(4)) from its directly conducted active trade or business.

(B) On January 1, Year 1, TFC sells all of its FS stock for $300x. The residual gain computed under § 1.1297-2(f)(2) on the sale of the FS stock is $10x. Under § 1.1297-2(f)(3), $9x of residual gain is characterized as non-passive income and $1x of residual gain is characterized as passive income. TFC earned $5x of passive income from the investment of the proceeds from the disposition of the FS stock during each quarter of Year 1, and TFC maintained those earnings ($20x in total) as well as the disposition proceeds in cash for the remainder of the year. TFC reinvests the proceeds of the FS stock sale in an active trade or business during Year 2, and, thus, TFC is not a PFIC in Year 2 and Year 3. Less than 75% of TFC's gross income in Year 1 is passive income (($20x + $1x)/($10x + $20x + $1x) = 68%). However, subject to the application of section 1298(b)(3) and this section, TFC would be a PFIC in Year 1 under section 1297(a)(2) because the proceeds from the sale of the FS stock ($300x) together with TFC's other passive assets exceed 50% of TFC's total assets on each quarterly measuring date. For example, on the first quarterly measuring date TFC's ratio of passive assets to total assets is (($300x + $30x + $5x)/($300x + $30x + $5x + $50x)) and on the fourth quarterly measuring date TFC's ratio of passive assets to total assets is (($300x + $30x + $20x)/($300x + $30x + $20x + $50x)), each of which exceeds 87%. Therefore, TFC chooses to apply the change of business exception in paragraph (b) of this section to Year 1.

(ii) Results.

(A) Under paragraph (d) of this section, for purposes of applying section 1298(b)(3)(B)(i) in Year 1, TFC's proceeds from the disposition of the stock of FS that are attributable to assets used by FS in an active trade or business are considered as from the disposition of an active trade or business. Because 100% of FS's assets are used in its active trade or business, all of TFC's proceeds are considered as from the disposition of an active trade or business. Therefore, under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the passive income considered attributable to proceeds from a disposition of one or more active trades or businesses is $20x (from investment of disposition proceeds). Because TFC reasonably does not expect to be a PFIC in Year 2 and Year 3, and TFC is not, in fact, a PFIC for those years, TFC will not be treated as a PFIC in Year 1 by reason of section 1298(b)(3) and paragraph (b) of this section, based on the satisfaction of the condition in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section, because the 95% ($20x/($20x + $1x)) of TFC's passive income for Year 1 that is attributable to proceeds of the disposition of FS's active trade or business constitutes substantially all of its passive income.

(B) TFC would also not be treated as a PFIC in Year 1 by reason of section 1298(b)(3) and paragraph (b) of this section, based on the satisfaction of the condition in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, because the over 91% of TFC's passive assets on the quarterly measuring dates during Year 1 following the disposition of the stock of FS that is attributable to proceeds of the disposition of FS's active trade or business constitutes substantially all of its passive assets. For example, on the first quarterly measuring date TFC's ratio of passive assets attributable to the proceeds of the disposition of FS's active trade or business to its total passive assets is 91% ($305x/($305x + $30x)), and the same ratio for the fourth quarterly measuring date is 91.4% ($320x/($320x + $30x)).

(C) Under paragraph (e) of this section, TFC cannot claim the section 1298(b)(3) exception in relation to the income attributable to the proceeds of the FS stock sale in Year 2 because TFC already claimed the exception for Year 1.

(2) Example 2

(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section (the facts in Example 1), except that during the first quarter of Year 1, TFC earned only $4x of passive income ($1x per quarter) from the investment of the proceeds from the disposition of the FS stock and earned $12x of passive income ($3x per quarter) from its other passive assets and maintained such earnings in cash for the remainder of the year.

(ii) Results. The results are the same as in paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section (the results in Example 1), except that under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the passive income considered attributable to proceeds from a disposition of one or more active trades or businesses is $4x (from investment of disposition proceeds). Because 24% ($4x/($4x + $12x + $1x)) of TFC's passive income for Year 1 is attributable to proceeds of the disposition of FS's active trade or business, and 24% does not constitute substantially all of TFC's passive income for Year 1, TFC does not qualify for the exception from treatment as a PFIC in section 1298(b)(3) and paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section for Year 1. However, under paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (d) of this section, more than $300x ($300x disposition proceeds + amounts earned from investment of disposition proceeds) of TFC's passive assets held on each quarterly measuring date after the disposition is considered attributable to the disposition of an active trade or business. Because TFC reasonably does not expect to be a PFIC in Year 2 and Year 3, and TFC is not, in fact, a PFIC for those years, TFC will not be treated as a PFIC in Year 1 by reason of paragraph (b) of this section, based on the satisfaction of the condition in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, assuming that the average 89% of TFC's passive assets on the quarterly measuring dates during Year 1 following the disposition of the stock of FS that is attributable to proceeds of the disposition of FS's active trade or business constitutes substantially all of its passive assets.

(g) Applicability date. The rules of this section apply to taxable years of shareholders beginning on or after January 14, 2021. A shareholder may choose to apply such rules for any open taxable year beginning before January 14, 2021, provided that, with respect to the tested foreign corporation, the shareholder consistently applies the provisions of this section and § 1.1291-1(b)(8)(iv) and (b)(8)(v)(A), (B), (C), and (D) and §§ 1.1297-1 (except that consistent treatment is not required with respect to § 1.1297-1(c)(1)(i)(A)), 1.1297-2, and 1.1298-4 for such year and all subsequent years.

[T.D. 9936, 86 FR 4576, Jan. 15, 2021, as at 86 FR 13648, Mar. 10, 2021]

§ 1.1298-3 Deemed sale or deemed dividend election by a U.S. person that is a shareholder of a former PFIC.

(a) In general. A shareholder (as defined in § 1.1291-9(j)(3)) of a foreign corporation that is a former PFIC, (as defined in § 1.1291-9(j)(2)(iv)) with respect to such shareholder, shall be treated for tax purposes as holding stock in a PFIC and therefore continues to be subject to taxation under section 1291 unless the shareholder makes a purging election under section 1298(b)(1). A purging election under section 1298(b)(1) is made under rules similar to the rules of section 1291(d)(2). Section 1291(d)(2) allows a shareholder to purge the continuing PFIC taint by making either a deemed sale election or a deemed dividend election.

(b) Application of deemed sale election rules

(1) Eligibility to make the deemed sale election. A shareholder of a foreign corporation that is a former PFIC with respect to such shareholder may make a deemed sale election under section 1298(b)(1) by applying the rules of this paragraph (b).

(2) Effect of deemed sale election. A shareholder making the deemed sale election with respect to a former PFIC shall be treated as having sold all its stock in the former PFIC for its fair market value on the termination date, as defined in paragraph (d) of this section. A deemed sale is treated as a disposition subject to taxation under section 1291. Thus, gain from the deemed sale is taxed under section 1291 as an excess distribution received on the termination date. In the case of an election made by an indirect shareholder, the amount of gain to be recognized and taxed as an excess distribution is the amount of gain that the direct owner of the stock of the PFIC would have realized on an actual sale or disposition of the stock of the PFIC indirectly owned by the shareholder. Any loss realized on the deemed sale is not recognized. After the deemed sale election, the shareholder's stock with respect to which the election was made under this paragraph (b) shall not be treated as stock in a PFIC and the shareholder shall not be subject to taxation under section 1291 with respect to such stock unless the foreign corporation thereafter qualifies as a PFIC under section 1297(a).

(3) Time for making the deemed sale election. Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, the shareholder shall make the deemed sale election under this paragraph (b) and section 1298(b)(1) in the shareholder's original or amended return for the taxable year that includes the termination date (election year). If the deemed sale election is made in an amended return, the return must be filed by a date that is within three years of the due date, as extended under section 6081, of the original return for the election year.

(4) Manner of making the deemed sale election. A shareholder makes the deemed sale election under this paragraph (b) by filing Form 8621 (“Return by a Shareholder of a Passive Foreign Investment Company or Qualified Electing Fund”) with the return of the shareholder for the election year, reporting the gain as an excess distribution pursuant to section 1291(a) as if such deemed sale occurred under section 1291(d)(2), and paying the tax and interest due on the excess distribution. A shareholder that makes the deemed sale election after the due date of the return (determined without regard to extensions) for the election year must pay additional interest, pursuant to section 6601, on the amount of underpayment of tax for that year. An electing shareholder that realizes a loss shall report the loss on Form 8621, but shall not recognize the loss.

(5) Adjustments to basis. A shareholder that makes the deemed sale election increases its adjusted basis of the PFIC stock owned directly by the amount of gain recognized on the deemed sale. If the shareholder makes the deemed sale election with respect to a PFIC of which it is an indirect shareholder, the shareholder's adjusted basis of the stock or other property owned directly by the shareholder, through which ownership of the PFIC is attributed to the shareholder, is increased by the amount of gain recognized by the shareholder. In addition, solely for purposes of determining the subsequent treatment under the Code and regulations of a shareholder of the stock of the PFIC, the adjusted basis of the direct owner of the stock of the PFIC is increased by the amount of gain recognized on the deemed sale. A shareholder shall not adjust the basis of any stock with respect to which the shareholder realized a loss on the deemed sale, but which loss is not recognized under paragraph (b)(2) of this section.

(6) Treatment of holding period. If a shareholder of a foreign corporation has made a deemed sale election, then, for purposes of applying sections 1291 through 1298 to such shareholder after the deemed sale, the shareholder's holding period in the stock of the foreign corporation begins on the day following the termination, without regard to whether the shareholder recognized gain on the deemed sale. For other purposes of the Code and regulations, this holding period rule does not apply.

(c) Application of deemed dividend election rules

(1) Eligibility to make the deemed dividend election. A shareholder of a foreign corporation that is a former PFIC with respect to such shareholder may make the deemed dividend election under the rules of this paragraph (c) provided the foreign corporation was a controlled foreign corporation (as defined in section 957(a) (CFC)) during its last taxable year as a PFIC. A shareholder may make the deemed dividend election without regard to whether the shareholder is a United States shareholder within the meaning of section 951(b). A deemed dividend election may be made by a shareholder whose pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC attributable to the PFIC stock held on the termination date is zero.

(2) Effect of the deemed dividend election. A shareholder making the deemed dividend election with respect to a former PFIC shall include in income as a dividend its pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC attributable to all of the stock it held, directly or indirectly on the termination date, as defined in paragraph (d) of this section. The deemed dividend is taxed under section 1291 as an excess distribution received on the termination date. The excess distribution determined under this paragraph (c) is allocated under section 1291(a)(1)(A) only to each day of the shareholder's holding period of the stock during which the foreign corporation qualified as a PFIC. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the shareholder's holding period of the PFIC stock ends on the termination date. After the deemed dividend election, the shareholder's stock with respect to which the election was made under this paragraph (c) shall not be treated as stock in a PFIC and the shareholder shall not be subject to taxation under section 1291 with respect to such stock unless the foreign corporation thereafter qualifies as a PFIC under section 1297(a).

(3) Post-1986 earnings and profits defined—

(i) In general. For purposes of this section, the term post-1986 earnings and profits means the post-1986 undistributed earnings, within the meaning of section 902(c)(1) (determined without regard to section 902(c)(3)), as of the close of the taxable year that includes the termination date. For purposes of this computation, only earnings and profits accumulated in taxable years during which the foreign corporation was a PFIC shall be taken into account, without regard to whether the earnings relate to a period during which the PFIC was a CFC.

(ii) Pro rata share of post-1986 earnings and profits attributable to shareholder's stock:

(A) In general. A shareholder's pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC attributable to the stock held by the shareholder on the termination date is the amount of post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC accumulated during any portion of the shareholder's holding period ending at the close of the termination date and attributable, under the principles of section 1248 and the regulations under that section, to the PFIC stock held on the termination date.

(B) Reduction for previously taxed amounts. A shareholder's pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC does not include any amount that the shareholder demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Commissioner (in the manner provided in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section) was, pursuant to another provision of the law, previously included in the income of the shareholder, or of another U.S. person if the shareholder's holding period of the PFIC stock includes the period during which the stock was held by that other U.S. person.

(4) Time for making the deemed dividend election. Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, the shareholder shall make the deemed dividend election under this paragraph (c) and section 1298(b)(1) in the shareholder's original or amended return for the taxable year that includes the termination date (election year). If the deemed dividend election is made in an amended return, the return must be filed by a date that is within three years of the due date, as extended under section 6081, of the original return for the election year.

(5) Manner of making the deemed dividend election:

(i) In general. A shareholder makes the deemed dividend election by filing Form 8621 and the attachment to Form 8621 described in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section with the return of the shareholder for the election year, reporting the deemed dividend as an excess distribution pursuant to section 1291(a)(1), and paying the tax and interest due on the excess distribution. A shareholder that makes the deemed dividend election after the due date of the return (determined without regard to extensions) for the election year must pay additional interest, pursuant to section 6601, on the amount of underpayment of tax for that year.

(ii) Attachment to Form 8621. The shareholder must attach a schedule to Form 8621 that demonstrates the calculation of the shareholder's pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits of the PFIC that is treated as distributed to the shareholder on the termination date pursuant to this paragraph (c). If the shareholder is claiming an exclusion from its pro rata share of the post-1986 earnings and profits for an amount previously included in its income or the income of another U.S. person, the shareholder must include the following information:

(A) The name, address, and taxpayer identification number of each U.S. person that previously included an amount in income, the amount previously included in income by each such U.S. person, the provision of law pursuant to which the amount was previously included in income, and the taxable year or years of inclusion of each amount.

(B) A description of the transaction pursuant to which the shareholder acquired, directly or indirectly, the stock of the PFIC from another U.S. person, and the provision of law pursuant to which the shareholder's holding period includes the period the other U.S. person held the CFC stock.

(6) Adjustments to basis. A shareholder that makes the deemed dividend election increases its adjusted basis of the stock of the PFIC owned directly by the shareholder by the amount of the deemed dividend. If the shareholder makes the deemed dividend election with respect to a PFIC of which it is an indirect shareholder, the shareholder's adjusted basis of the stock or other property owned directly by the shareholder, through which ownership of the PFIC is attributed to the shareholder, is increased by the amount of the deemed dividend. In addition, solely for purposes of determining the subsequent treatment under the Code and regulations of a shareholder of the stock of the PFIC, the adjusted basis of the direct owner of the stock of the PFIC is increased by the amount of the deemed dividend.

(7) Treatment of holding period. If the shareholder of a foreign corporation has made a deemed dividend election, then, for purposes of applying sections 1291 through 1298 to such shareholder after the deemed dividend, the shareholder's holding period of the stock of the foreign corporation begins on the day following the termination date. For other purposes of the Code and regulations, this holding period rule does not apply.

(8) Coordination with section 959(e). For purposes of section 959(e), the entire deemed dividend is treated as having been included in gross income under section 1248(a).

(d) Termination date. For purposes of this section, the termination date is the last day of the last taxable year of the foreign corporation during which it qualified as a PFIC under section 1297(a).

(e) Late purging elections requiring special consent

(1) In general. This section prescribes the exclusive rules under which a shareholder of a former PFIC may make a section 1298(b)(1) election after the time prescribed in paragraph (b)(3) or (c)(4) of this section for making a deemed sale or a deemed dividend election has elapsed (late purging election). Therefore, a shareholder may not seek such relief under any other provisions of the law, including § 301.9100-3 of this chapter. A shareholder may request the consent of the Commissioner to make a late purging election for the taxable year of the shareholder that includes the termination date provided the shareholder satisfies the requirements set forth in this paragraph (e). The Commissioner may, in his discretion, grant relief under this paragraph (e) only if—

(i) In a case where the shareholder is requesting consent under this paragraph (e) after December 31, 2005, the shareholder requests such consent before a representative of the Internal Revenue Service raises upon audit the PFIC status of the foreign corporation for any taxable year of the shareholder;

(ii) The shareholder has agreed in a closing agreement with the Commissioner, described in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, to eliminate any prejudice to the interests of the U.S. government, as determined under paragraph (e)(2) of this section, as a consequence of the shareholder's inability to file amended returns for its taxable year in which the termination date falls or an earlier closed taxable year in which the shareholder has taken a position that is inconsistent with the treatment of the foreign corporation as a PFIC; and

(iii) The shareholder satisfies the procedural requirements set forth in paragraph (e)(3) of this section.

(2) Prejudice to the interests of the U.S. government. The interests of the U.S. government are prejudiced if granting relief would result in the shareholder having a lower tax liability (other than by a de minimis amount), taking into account applicable interest charges, for the taxable year that includes the termination date (or a prior taxable year in which the taxpayer took a position on a return that was inconsistent with the treatment of the foreign corporation as a PFIC) than the shareholder would have had if the shareholder had properly made the section 1298(b)(1) election in the time prescribed in paragraph (b)(2) or (c)(3) of this section (or had not taken a position in a return for an earlier year that was inconsistent with the status of the foreign corporation as a PFIC). The time value of money is taken into account for purposes of this computation.

(3) Procedural requirements

(i) In general. The amount due with respect to a late purging election is determined in the same manner as if the purging election had been timely filed. However, the shareholder is also liable for interest on the amount due, pursuant to section 6601, determined for the period beginning on the due date (without extensions) for the taxpayer's income tax return for the year in which the termination date falls and ending on the date the late purging election is filed with the IRS.

(ii) Filing instructions. A late purging election is made by filing a completed Form 8621-A, “Return by a Shareholder Making Certain Late Elections to End Treatment as a Passive Foreign Investment Company.”

(4) Time and manner of making late election

(i) Time for making a late purging election. A shareholder may make a late purging election in the manner provided in paragraph (e)(4)(ii) of this section at any time. The date the election is filed with the IRS will determine the amount of interest due under paragraph (e)(3) of this section.

(ii) Manner of making a late purging election. A shareholder makes a late purging election by completing Form 8621-A in the manner required by that form and this section and filing that form with the Internal Revenue Service, DP 8621-A, Ogden, UT 84201.

(5) Multiple late elections. For rules regarding the circumstances under which a shareholder of a foreign corporation may make multiple late purging elections under this paragraph (e) or § 1.1297-3(e), see § 1.1297-3(e)(5).

(f) Effective/applicability date. The rules of this section are applicable as of December 8, 2005.

[T.D. 9231, 70 FR 72915, Dec. 8, 2005, as amended by T.D. 9360, 72 FR 54824, Sept. 27, 2007]

§ 1.1298-4 Rules for certain foreign corporations owning stock in 25-percent-owned domestic corporations.

(a) Overview. This section provides rules under section 1298(b)(7) that apply to certain foreign corporations that own stock in 25-percent-owned domestic corporations (as defined in paragraph (b) of this section) for purposes of determining whether a foreign corporation is a passive foreign investment company (PFIC). Paragraph (b) of this section provides the general rule. Paragraph (c) of this section provides rules concerning ownership of 25-percent-owned domestic corporations or qualified stock (as defined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section) through partnerships. Paragraph (d) of this section provides rules for determining whether a foreign corporation is subject to the tax imposed by section 531 (the section 531 tax) and for waiving treaty benefits that would prevent the imposition of such tax. Paragraph (e) of this section provides an anti-abuse rule for the application of section 1298(b)(7). Paragraph (f) provides the applicability date for this section.

(b) Treatment of certain foreign corporations owning stock in a 25-percent-owned domestic corporation

(1) General rule. Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (e) of this section, when a tested foreign corporation (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)) is subject to the section 531 tax (or waives any benefit under any treaty that would otherwise prevent the imposition of the tax), and owns (directly or indirectly under the rules in paragraph (c) of this section) at least 25 percent (by value) of the stock of a domestic corporation (a 25-percent-owned domestic corporation), for purposes of determining whether the foreign corporation is a PFIC, any qualified stock held directly or indirectly under the rules in paragraph (c) of this section by the 25-percent-owned domestic corporation is treated as an asset that does not produce passive income (and is not held for the production of passive income), and any amount included in gross income with respect to the qualified stock is not treated as passive income.

(2) Qualified stock and second-tier domestic corporation. For purposes of this section, the term qualified stock means any stock in a C corporation that is a domestic corporation and that is not a regulated investment company or real estate investment trust and the term second-tier corporation means the corporation.

(c) Indirect ownership of stock through a partnership. For purposes of paragraph (b)(1) of this section, a tested foreign corporation that is a partner in a partnership is considered to own its proportionate share of any stock of a domestic corporation held by the partnership, and a domestic corporation that is a partner in a partnership is considered to own its proportionate share of any qualified stock held by the partnership. An upper-tier partnership's attributable share of the stock of a domestic corporation or of qualified stock held by a lower-tier partnership is treated as held by the upper-tier partnership for purposes of applying the rule in this paragraph (c).

(d) Section 531 tax

(1) Subject to section 531 tax. For purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, a tested foreign corporation is considered subject to the section 531 tax regardless of whether the tax is imposed on the corporation and of whether the requirements of § 1.532-1(c) are met.

(2) Waiver of treaty benefits

(i) Tested foreign corporation that files, or is required to file, a Federal income tax return. For purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, a tested foreign corporation that files, or is required to file, a Federal income tax return waives the benefit under a treaty that would otherwise prevent the imposition of the section 531 tax by attaching to its original or amended return for the taxable year for which section 1298(b)(7) and paragraph (b)(1) of this section are applied or any prior taxable year a statement that it irrevocably waives treaty protection against the imposition of the section 531 tax, effective for all prior, current, and future taxable years, provided the taxable year for which the return is filed and all subsequent taxable years are not closed by the period of limitations on assessments under section 6501.

(ii) Tested foreign corporation that is not required to file a Federal income tax return. For purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, a tested foreign corporation that is not required to file a Federal income tax return waives the benefit under a treaty that would otherwise prevent the imposition of the section 531 tax by a date no later than nine months following the close of the taxable year for which section 1298(b)(7) and paragraph (b)(1) of this section are applied by—

(A) Adopting a resolution or similar governance document that confirms that it has irrevocably waived any treaty protection against the imposition of the section 531 tax, effective for all prior, current, and future taxable years, and maintaining a copy of the resolution (or other governance document) in its records; or

(B) In the case of a tested foreign corporation described in section 1297(e)(3), including in its public filings a statement that it irrevocably waives treaty protection against the imposition of the section 531 tax, effective for all prior, current, and future taxable years.

(e) Anti-abuse rule

(1) General rule. Paragraph (b) of this section does not apply with respect to qualified stock in a second-tier domestic corporation owned by a 25-percent-owned domestic corporation if a principal purpose for the formation of, acquisition of, or holding of stock of the 25-percent-owned domestic corporation or the second-tier domestic corporation, or for the capitalization or other funding of the second-tier domestic corporation, is to hold passive assets (as defined in § 1.1297-1(f)(5)) through the second-tier domestic corporation to avoid classification of the tested foreign corporation as a PFIC.

(2) [Reserved]

(3) [Reserved]

(f) Applicability date. The rules of this section apply to taxable years of shareholders beginning on or after January 14, 2021. A shareholder may choose to apply such rules for any open taxable year beginning before January 14, 2021, provided that, with respect to a tested foreign corporation, the shareholder consistently applies the provisions of this section and § 1.1291-1(b)(8)(iv) and (b)(8)(v)(A), (B), (C), and (D) and §§ 1.1297-1 (except that consistent treatment is not required with respect to § 1.1297-1(c)(1)(i)(A)), 1.1297-2, and 1.1298-2 for such year and all subsequent years.

[T.D. 9936, 86 FR 4578, Jan. 15, 2021, as amended at 86 FR 13648, Mar. 10, 2021]